Intecont Plus

INTECONT PLUS
Operating Instructions
DE Bedienungshinweise Bandwaage
GB Operating instructions Belt Weigher
FR Instructions de service Bascule Intgratice
IT Istruzioni per luso Bilancia per nastro
ES Instrucciones de uso Bscula de cinta
NL Bedieningsinstructie Bandweger
SE Manverhnvisningar Bandvg
RU K
CS Vaga za traku Uputstva za upravljanje
HU Kezelsi tmutat Szlltszalag-mrleg
CZ Nvod k obsluze Psov vha
BG
BV-H2007AA
Service Service
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundlagen der Schenck Process Quality and reliability form the basis for Schenck Process corporate
Unternehmensphilosophie, weltweit. Deshalb bieten wir Ihnen ein philosophy all over the world. Thats why we offer you an extensive
umfangreiches Service-Konzept, von der strengen Qualittskontrolle service strategy starting with our stringent quality control through
ber die Montage und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur lckenlosen assembly and commissioning right down to all-round support.
Betreuung an. Wir sind jederzeit fr Sie da! Were always there for you.
Helpdesk - kostenfrei Free Helpdesk

(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ) 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CET)
Whrend unserer normalen Brozeiten stehen Ihnen in jedem Service specialists are available to you in every department during
Geschftsbereich Service-Spezialisten zur Problemfall- / our normal office hours for analying problems and malfunctions.
Strfallanalyse zur Verfgung.
Heavy Industry Vibrating & Screening Technology
Building materials, mining, foundry, steel and cement T +49 61 51 - 1531 35 25
T +49 61 51 - 32 31 38 F +49 61 51 - 1531 30 96
F +49 61 51 - 32 32 70 vibrating@schenckprocess.com
heavy@schenckprocess.com
Light Industry Spare Parts & Components
Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and pharmaceuticals T +49 61 51 - 1531 17 58
T +49 61 51 - 1531 25 72 F +49 61 51 - 1531 36 32
F +49 61 51 - 1531-26 68 spares@schenckprocess.com
light@schenckprocess.com components@schenckprocess.com
Transport Automation
All industries with logistics processes and trains
T +49 61 51 - 1531 24 48
F +49 61 51 - 1531 13 69
transport@schenckprocess.com
Individuelles Telefon Consulting kostenpflichtig Individual phone consulting (fee required)
(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CET)
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ)
Sie wnschen eine Inbetriebnahme mit telefonischer Untersttzung Do you want one of our service specialists to give you phone
eines Service-Spezialisten oder eine Online-Diagnose / Optimierung support in commissioning your system or on-line diagnosis /
Ihres Systems? Wir sind fr Sie da. Planen Sie mit uns Ihren system optimisation? Were there for you. Schedule an
Wunschtermin. appointment with us whenever you need it.
Kundenservice 24h Notfall-Hotline kostenfrei Free 24 h Customer Service Hotline
Sie haben einen Str- / Problemfall auerhalb unserer normalen You have a malfunction or problem outside of our normal business
Arbeitszeiten. Kein Problem, Sie knnen auch auerhalb unserer hours. No problem. You can reach a Schenck service technician at
Brozeiten jederzeit einen Schenck-Servicemitarbeiter zur Problem- / any time outside of our office hours for recording problems or
Strfallannahme, Service-Disposition und Ersten Hilfe erreichen. malfunctions, service scheduling and first aid.
24h Notfall-Hotline: 24h Emergency-Hotline :

+49 172 650 17 00 +49 172 650 17 00
Transport Automation und statische WgetechnikTransport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment
+49 171 225 11 95 +49 171 225 11 95
Heavy Industry, Light Industry ohne statische Wgetechnik Heavy Industry, Light Industry excluding Static Weighing
Equipment
Copyright 2007
Schenck Process GmbH
Pallaswiesenstrae 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
www.schenckprocess.com
Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Jegliche Vervielfltigung dieser All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,
Dokumentation, gleich nach welchem Verfahren, ist ohne vorherige regardless of method, without prior permission by Schenck Process
schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Schenck Process GmbH, auch GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
auszugsweise, untersagt.
nderungen ohne vorherige Ankndigung bleiben vorbehalten. Subject to change without prior notice.
Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: Translation of the original instructions

Contents VBW
Contents
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SVENSKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 I

Schenck Process
VBW Contents
- Reserved for users notes -
II BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
VBW
DEUTSCH
LAUFMELDUNG, BETRIEBSSTATUS H2
EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
Z1 = FOERDERMENGE
I = FOERDERSTAERKE kg/m
L2
QUITTIEREN
BETRIEBS-
BEREIT
{ POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKTION
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg
ABBRECHEN C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1
ALARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX
EINGABE FUNKTION
AUS VORBEREITEN STARTEN
EIN S2
ZAEHLER UNTERE ANZEIGE EREIGNISMELDUNGEN
LOESCHEN VORWAEHLEN
FUNKTIONSVERTEILER
gB START/STOP Ein- bzw. Ausschalten wenn vorgewhlt
U SCROLL Untere Anzeige und Funktionen vorwhlen

1. Zhler Z2, Z3 4. Bandbeladung Q
T 2. Frderstrke I 5. Bandgeschwindigkeit v
3. Frderstrke Ir in %
i RESET Zhler lschen

1. Nr. des gewnschten Zhlers eingeben (1 oder 2 )
2. Mit Taste ENTER Eingabe besttigen
3. oder mit Taste ESCAPE Eingabe abbrechen
4. oder mit Taste DELETE falsche Eingabe lschen
G FUNCTION Funktionsverteiler und Ereignismeldungen aufrufen

1. Mit Tasten SCROLL gewnschte Funktion whlen.
Liegt ein Ereignis vor, ist schon die Funktion Ereignisse zeigen
vorgewhlt.
2. Mit ENTER Funktion aktivieren.
3. Mit den Tasten SCROLL knnen nacheinander alle vorliegenden
Ereignismeldungen eingesehen werden.
4. Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen mit ESCAPE.
O DELETE Ereignismeldungen quittieren, Eingaben lschen.
N ESCAPE Funktion abbrechen und Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen.
f ENTER Eingabe besttigen

Funktionen starten, z.B. Ereignisse anzeigen (siehe bei FUNCTION)
P DATA Eingabe vorbereiten, z.B. Parameter
INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 1

Schenck Process
VBW
Reserved for users notes
2 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
VBW
ENGLISH
RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2
EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE
READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
FUNCTION DISTRIBUTOR
gB START/STOP if preselected
U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions

(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
T (2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
(3) Feed rate Ir in %
i RESET Reset counter(s)

(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENTER key to acknowledge
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits
G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages

(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function
If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays
O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs
N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays
f ENTER Acknowledge input

start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION)
P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
FRANAIS
SIGNALISATION DE MARCHE, ETAT DE FONCTIONNEMENT
H2
SIGNALISATION D'EVENEMENT
Z1 = QUANTITE TOLALISEE
I = DEBIT kg/m
L2
ACOUITTER
PRET AU
SERVICE
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ROMPRE C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FONCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX LANCER
PREPARER
ARRET FONCTION
L'ENTREE
MARCHE
S2
M.A.Z. PRESELECTIONNER SIGNALISATION D' EVENEMENTS
COMPTEUR AFFICHAGE
INFERIEUR
MENU DE FONCTION
gB START/STOP Marche ou Arrt si prdtermin
U SCROLL Slectionner laffichage infrieur et fonctions

1. Compteur Z2, Z3 4. Charge sur la bande Q
T 2. Dbit I 5. Vitesse de la bande v
3. Dbit Ir en %
i RESET Effacement compteur

1. Slectionner compteur dsir N. 1 ou 2
2. Avec la touche ENTER confirmer lentre
3. ou avec la touche ESCAPE interrompre lentre
4. ou avec la touche DELETE effacer les mauvaises entres
G FONCTION Slectionner le menu des fonctions et annonces vnements

1. Avec les touches SCROLL choisir la fonction souhaite
Si un vnement se prsente, la fonction indiquer vn. est dj
slectionne
2. Valider la fonction avec ENTER
3. Avec les touches SCROLL on peut consulter les annonces
dvnements existantes les unes aprs les autres
4. Retour aux affichages normaux avec ESCAPE
O DELETE Acquittement des annonces dvnements, effacement entre
N ESCAPE Arrter la fonction et retour aux affichages normaux
f ENTER Valider lentre

Dmarrer les fonctions, par ex. indiquer les vnements (voir sous
FONCTION)
P DATA Prparer une entre, par ex. Paramtre

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ITALIANO
OPERAZ. IN CORSO. STATO FUNZ. H2

MESS. DI EVENTO
Z1 = QAT`TOTALIZZ.
kg/m
I = PORTATA
L2
CONFERMA
PRONTO
AL. FUNZ.
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg INTERR. C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNZIONI L3 L1
ALLARME L4
MIN kg/h
M
MAX AVVIO
OFF INTROD. FUNZIONI
ON VAL. IMP.
S2
AZZER. PREFISS. MESSAGGI EVENTO
TOTALIZZ. INDICAZ. IMP.
MENU INDIR. FUNZIONI
gB START/STOP Inserire o disinserire se selezionata
T SCROLL Selezionare display inferiore e funzioni

1. Totalizzatori Z2, Z3 4. Caricamento del nastro Q
2. Portata I 5. Velocit del nastro v
3. Portata Ir in %
i RESET Azzerare totalizzatore

1. Introdurre n del totalizzatore desiderato (1 o 2 )
2. Con il tasto ENTER confermare lintroduzione
3. oppure con il tasto ESCAPE interrompere lintroduzione
4. oppure con il tasto DELETE cancellare lintroduzione errata
G FUNCTION Richiamare il menu di indirizzamento funzioni e i messaggi di evento

1. Con i tasti SCROLL scegliere la funzione desiderata
In presenza di un evento gi prefissata la funzione Indicare eventi
2. Con ENTER attivare la funzione
3. Con i tasto SCROLL possibile fare visualizzare in successione
tutti i messaggi di evento presenti
4. Ritorno alle indicazioni normali con ESCAPE
O DELETE Confermare i messaggi di evento, cancellare le introduzioni
N ESCAPE Interrompere la funzione e ritornare alle indicazioni normali
f ENTER Confermare lintroduzion

Avviare le funzioni, ad es. visualizzare gli eventi (cf. sotto FUNCTION)
P DATA Preparare lintroduzione, ad es. parametri

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ESPAOL
H2
MENSAJE DE FUNCIONAMIENTO, ESTADO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO,
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS
Z1 = CANTIDAD TRASNPORTADA
kg/m
I = RENDIMIENTO
L2
CONFIRMAR
LISTO PARA
OPERACIN { POWER ON
CPU OK CANCELAR
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
FUNCIN L3
-- I = 100 kg/h L1
ALARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX INICIAR
OFF PREPARAR
FUNCIN
ON ENTRADA
S2
BORRAR PRESELECCIONAR
CONTADOR INDICACIN ANTERIOR
AVISOS DE ACONTECIMIENTOS
DISTRIBUIDOR DE FUNCIONES
gB START/STOP Conexin o desconexin si se ha preseleccionado
U SCROLL Preseleccionar la indicacin inferior y las funciones

1. Contadores Z2, Z3 4. Carga de la cinta Q
T 2. Rendimiento I 5. Velocidad de cinta v
3. Rendimiento Ir en %
i RESET Borrar contador

1. Introducir N del contador deseado (1 o 2 )
2. Con la tecla ENTER confirmar la introduccin
3. o con la tecla ESCAPE cancelar la introduccin
4. o con la tecla DELETE borrar la introduccin errnea
G FUNCTION Activar el distribuidor de funciones y los avisos de acontecimientos

1. Seleccionar la funcin deseada con las teclas SCROLL
Si hay un acontecimiento, ya est preseleccionada la funcin
INDIC. ACONTECIM.
2. Activar la funcin con ENTER
3. Con las teclas SCROLL pueden examinarse uno tras otro todos los
avisos de acontecimientos existentes
4. Regreso a las indicaciones normales con ESCAPE
O DELETE Confirmar los avisos de acontecimientos, borrar las introducciones
N ESCAPE Cancelar la funcin y regresar a las indicaciones normales
f ENTER Confirmar la introduccin

Iniciar las funciones, p. ej. INDIC. ACONTECIM. (vase en FUNCTION)
P DATA Preparar la entrada, p. ej. parmetro

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
NEDERLANDS
Lopende melding, Bedrijfstoestand H2

Melding van gebeurtenissen
Z1 = transporthoeveelheid
kg/m
I = transportsterkte
L2
Kwiteren
Bedrijfsklaar
{ POWER ON
CPU OK Functie
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h stoppen L3 L1
L4
ALARM
kg/h
MIN
M
MAX Functie
Uit Ingave
voorbereiden starten
In
S2
Teller Onderste stand Storingsmelder
op nul kiezen
Functieverdeler
0 1 START/STOP In-uitschakelen wanneer gekozen
U SCROLL Onderste stand en functies kiezen

1. teller Z2,Z3 4. bandbelading Q
T 2. transportsterkte I 5. bandsnelheid v
3. transportsterkte in %
i RESET Teller op nul (wissen)
1. nummer van de gewenste teller ingeven (1 of 2)

2. met toets ENTER ingave bevestigen
3. of met toets ESCAPE ingaves stoppen
4. of met toets DELET foutieve ingave wissen
G FUNCTION Functieverdeler en storingsmelder oproepen

1. met de toets SCROLL de gewenste functie kiezen. Bij bepaalde
gebeurtenissen storingen), is de functie gebeurtenis tonen reeds
gekozen
2. met ENTER functie activeren
3. met de SCROLL toets kunnen n na n alle meldingen van
gebeurtenissen geraadpleegd worden
4. terug naar hoofdmenu met ESCAPE
O DELETE gebeurtenissen kwiteren, input wissen
N ESCAPE Functie stoppen en terug naar hoofdmenu
f ENTER Inputbevestigen, functie starten, bvb storingen tonen
P DATA Data input voorbereiden, bvb parameter

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
SVENSKA
DRIFTSMEDDELANDE, DRIFTSSTATUS H2
HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
Z1 = MATNINGSMNGD
I = MATNINGSTJOCKLEK kg/m
L2
KVITTERA
DRIFTS-
KLAR { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg AVBRYTA C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNKTION L3 L1
LARM
L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX STARTA
FRN FRBERED
INMATNING FUNKTION
TILL
S2
RKNARE VLJ HNDELSEMEDDELANDEN
RADERA UNDRE INDIKERING
FUNKTIONSFRDELARE
gB START/STOPP Till-resp. Frnkoppling om frutvalt
U SCROLL Frval av undre indikering och funktioner

1. Rknare Z2, Z3 4. Bandlast Q
T 2. Matningstjocklek I 5. Bandhastighet v
3. Matningstjocklek Ir i %
i RESET Radera rknare

1. Mata in nr. fr nskad rknare (1 eller 2 )
2. Med tangent ENTER bekrfta inmatning
3. eller med tangent ESCAPE avbryt inmatning
4. eller med tangent DELETE radera felaktig inmatning
G FUNCTION Ropa upp funktionsfrdelare och hndelsemeddelanden

1. Vlj nskad funktion med tangenterna SCROLL
Freligger en hndelse, r redan funktionen visa hndelser vald
2. Aktivera funktionen med ENTER
3. Med tangenterna SCROLL kan alla freliggande hndelsmeddelanden
lsas efter varandra.
4. terhopp till normalindikeringarna med ESCAPE
O DELETE Kvittera hndelsemeddelanden. radera inmatningar
N ESCAPE Avbrott av funktionen och terhopp till normalindikeringarna
f ENTER Bekrfta inmatningen

starta funktioner, t.ex. indikera
hndelser (se under FUNCTION)
P DATA Frbered inmatning, t.ex. parameter

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
,
H2

Z1 =
I = /
L2

{ POWER ON
CPU OK
/
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h L3 L1

L4

. M
.

.

S2

gB START/STOP
U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %
i RESET
1. 1 2
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4.
DELETE
G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
(). ,
.
2. ENTER.
3. SCROLL
.
4. ESCAPE
O DELETE ,
N ESCAPE
f ENTER
, , (.
FUNCTION)
P DATA , ,

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
SRPSKI
PRIJAVA KRETANJA, STATUS POGONA H2

PRIJAVE DOGAAJA
Z1 = KOLIINA KOJA SE TRANSPORTUJE

I = INTENZITET TRANSPORTA kg/m
L2
KVITIRAT
I
SPREMAN ZA { POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
POGON o Z1 = 1500 kg FUNKCIJU C1
-- I = 100 kg/h PREKINUTI L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX PRIPREMITI FUNKCIJU
ISKLJUITI DAVANJE STARTOVATI
UKLJUITI PODATAKA
S2
OBRISATI PODATKE DONJI
POKAZIVA PRIJAVE DOGAAJA
BROJAA
PRETHODNO
RASPODELJIVA FUNKCIJA IZABRATI
gh START/STOP Ukljuiti odn. iskljuiti ako je prethodno izabrano
U SCROLL Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati
T
Donji pokaziva i funkcije prethodno izabrati
1. Broja Z2, Z3 4. Optereenje trake Q
2. Intenzitet transporta I 5. Brzina trake v
3. Intenzitet transporta Ir u %
i RESET Obrisati podatke brojaa

1. Dati podatke eljenog brojaa (1 ili 2)
2. Dirkom ENTER potvrditi davanje podataka
3. ili dirkom ESCAPE prekinuti davanje podataka
4. ili dirkom DELETE obrisati pogreno date podatake
G FUNCTION Raspodeljivae funkcija i prijave dogaaja pozvati

1. Dirkom SCROLL izabrati eljenu funkciju. Ako postoji neki dogaaj
funkcija Ereignisse zeigen je ve prethodno izabrana
2. ENTER-om aktivirati funkciju
3. Dirkama SCROLL mogu se pogledati uzastopce sve postojea
prijave dogaaja
4. Povratni skok ESCAPE-om ka normalnim pokazivaima
O DELETE Prijave dogaaja kvitirati, date podatke obrisati
N ESCAPE Funkciju prekinuti i povratni skok u normalne pokazivaef
f ENTER Davanje podataka potvrditi

Funkcije startovati, n.p. pokazati dogaaje (vidi kod FUNCTION)
P DATA Davanje podataka pripremiti, n.p. parametre

SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
MAGYAR
FUTSJEL, ZEMLLAPOT H2
ESEMNYZENETEK
Z1 = SZLLTOTT MENNYISG
I = SZLLTTELJESTMNY
L2
NYUGTZS
ZEMKSZ { POWER ON
CPU OK FUNKCI
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg C1
-- I = 100 kg/h MEGSZAKTSA L3 L1
L4
RIASZTS
MIN M
MAX FUNKCI
KI BEVITEL
INDTSA
BE ELKSZTSE
S2
SZMLL ALS KIJELZ ESEMNYZENETEK
TRLS KIVLASZTSA
FUNKCIINTZ
gB START/STOP Be- ill. kikapcsols ha ki van vlasztva
U SCROLL Als kijelz s funkcik kivlasztsa

1. Szmll Z2, Z3 4. Szalagterhels Q
T 2. Szlltteljestmny I 5. Szalagsebessg v
3. Szlltteljestmny Ir %-ban
i RESET Szmll trls

1. A kvnt szmll szmnak bersa (1 vagy 2)
2. ENTER gombbal bevitel megerstse
3. vagy az ESCAPE gombbal bevitel megszaktsa
4. vagy a DELETE gombbal hibs bevitel trlse
G FUNCTION Funkciintz s esemnyzenetek felhvsa

1. A SCROLL gombokkal kivlasztjuk a kvnt funkcit
Ha van esemny, az Esemnyeket mutat funkci
mr ki van vlasztva
2. Az ENTER gombbal aktvra vltjuk a funkcit
3. A SCROLL gombokkal egyms utn megtekinthetjk
az sszes aktulis esemnyzenetet
4. Visszatrs a norml kijelzsekre az ESCAPE billentyvel
O DELETE Esemnyzenetek nyugtzsa, bevitel trlse
N ESCAPE Funkci megszaktsa s visszatrs a norml kijelzsekhez
f ENTER Bevitel megerstse

Funkcik indtsa, pl. Esemnyeket mutat (lsd a FUNCTION gombnl)
P DATA Bevitel elksztse, pl. paramter

SCHENCK PROCESS
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
ESKY
gB START/STOP Zapnut pop. Vypnut (je-li pedvoleno)
U SCROLL Pedvolba spodnho displeje a funkc

1. Potadlo Z2, Z3 4. Zaten psu Q
T 2. Dopravn sla I 5. Rychlost psu v
3. Dopravn sla Ir v %
i RESET Vymazn potadla
1. Zadejte . poadovanho potadla (1 nebo 2 )

2. Vloen daj potvrte pomoc klvesy ENTER
3. nebo zrute pomoc klvesy ESCAPE
4. nebo vymate pomoc klvesy DELETE
G FUNCTION Sputn funknho pepnae a hlen udlost

1. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL zvolte poadovanou funkci
V ppad existujc udlosti je funkce Zobrazen udlosti pedvolena
2. Pomoc ENTER aktivujte funkci
3. Pomoc klvesy SCROLL je mon prohldnout si vechna hlen
po sob
4. Zpt k standardnmu zobrazen pomoc klvesy ESCAPE
O DELETE Potvzen hlen udlost, vymazn dat
N ESCAPE Peruen funkce a nvrat ke standardnmu zobrazen
f ENTER Potvrzen vloench dat

Sputn funkc, nap. zobrazen udlost (viz. FUNCTION)
P DATA Pprava vloen dat, nap. parametry

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
gB START/STOP . . .
U SCROLL
1. Z2, Z3 4. Q
T 2. I 5. v
3. Ir %
i RESET
1. Nr. (1 2 )
2. ENTER
3. ESCAPE
4. DELETE
G FUNCTION
1. SCROLL
, Ereignisse zeigen
( )
2. ENTER
3. SCROLL
.
4. . ESCAPE
O DELETE ,
N ESCAPE
f ENTER
, . (
FUNCTION ()
P DATA , .

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
VBW
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DEUTSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ESKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ENGLISH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ESPAOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FRANAIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ITALIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAGYAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NEDERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SRPSKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Schenck Process
VBW

Schenck Process
INTECONT PLUS Belt Weigher
Operating Manual
BV-H2214GB
PASS - Service you can rely on.
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless
support across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in
worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures.
Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline in Germany

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to
deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.
J +49 171 2 251195 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment
J +49 172 6 501700 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment
by Schenck Process GmbH, 2008

J +49 61 51-15 31 0
All information is given without obligation. All specifications are subject to change.
Note: Translation of the original instructions

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Contents
1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power ON 4
Signal Lamps 4
Normal Displays 5
Control In Normal Mode 5
Event Messages 6
Function Distributor 8
Display Test and Version Number 8
Batching Mode 9
Visual Make-up 11
Keyboard Mode 11
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe 12
Prefeeder 12
Printing 12
Zero Setting 16
Read Parameters 17
3 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Setting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Calibrating Functions 34
Belt Circuit LB 34
Tare TW 35
Weight Check CW 36
Set Time 38
Simulation Mode 38
8 Service Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9. Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Preselect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Parameters Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10 Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
System Messages S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrics E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Calibration C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Maximum H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Minimum L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
0837 11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transmission to third parties and reproduction of

this documentation are not permitted. Schenck Technische CONTENTS
Process GmbH reserves all rights of ownership
and copyrights.
Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB I - 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS
How To Operate Your INTECONT 85

Mechanical Prerequisites 86
Electrical Prerequisites 86
Enter Parameters 87
Functional Check 88
Calibration 89
Check Using Check Weight 89
Check Belt Speed 90
Check Using Material 90
Automatic Zero Setting 91
Belt Run Monitoring 91
Belt Influence Compensation BIC 92
Control for Point of Discharge CPD 92
Cosine Pendulum 93
Test Plug 93
12 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Start / Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Batching Without Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Batching With Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Data Flow Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Base Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Weighing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1. Effective Platform Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2. Check Weight QPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3. Conveyor Belt Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Printer Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13 Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
This manual applies to software version: VBW 20600-08
Edition : 0837
0837

CONTENTS Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
BV-H2214 GB I-2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW
1 Overview
What Is The INTECONT: Display:
INTECONT PLUS is designed as measuring and 5 x 7 - dot matrix with 6 mm character height
evaluation system for
Upper display left : running message
Belt Weighers right : delivery rate in kg or t
Solids Flow Meters
Mass Flow Meters Lower display left : event messages
Mass Flow Feeders right : selectable
Weighfeeders feed rate, belt speed
Loss-in-weight Feeders etc.
Three system versions are available: Display can be changed over to American units.
1. Without option card (standard) LEDs:
2. With option card VFE 610V for additional 2 green and 3 red LEDs
input/outputs and printer Green LEDs : Ready
Red LEDs : Error or limit value
3. With option card for fieldbus messages
VSS021V : Modbus/S5
VPB 020V: Profibus Keyboard:
VCB020V: DeviceNet
VET020V: MODBUS/TCP Flexible membranes with tactile touch
VET022V: ETHERNET/IP
gB Start/stop measurement
This manual applies to belt weighers using the fully
equipped INTECONT variant. TU Preselect lower display
Select functions
i Reset counter
For Further Reading: G FUNC Call function distributor and
Fieldbus manual BVH2220 event texts
SS-RK512 (3964R) FH 458
Modbus (Comp) FH 525 O DEL Acknowledge event messages
Delete input
O Z1 = 1 2 0 0 0 kg
E1 I = 1 0 0 0 kg/h
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
SchenckProcess GmbH reserves all rights of
ownership and copyrights. Redaktion PDE-RD BV-H2214 GB 1
VBW INTECONT PLUS
The basic diagram shows all inputs and outputs.

N ESC Abort function
f ENT Start function

Acknowledge input
P DAT Prepare input
B9 Enter parameters
KL Enter sign and decimal point
Some Definitions:
I = Feed rate in kg/hr or t/hr

Material amount discharged from belt
per unit time
O Z1 = 1500 kg
Z = Delivery rate in kg or t I= 100 kg/h
Material amount fed out = feed rate x feed time
V = Belt speed in m/s
Q = Belt load in kg/m

Material weight on one belt meter
Measuring Principle:
Belt load Q and speed V are continuously measured

and multiplied. L/C = Load cell for acquisition of belt load Q
The result is feed rate I used to determine delivery
rate. D = Speed transducer
I in kg/hr S = Belt circuit sensor for automatic belt

Q in kg/m influence compensation BIC
V in m/s (non-standard)
24 V = Power supply
Measurement techniques:
V = Speed transducer
n Precision AC voltage amplifier with continuous
correction of zero point and range Q = Load cell
n Highly resolving analog-to-digital converter ANALOG= Analog output selectable for feed rate,
The integrated method is designed to efficiently belt load, belt speed
suppress line voltage interferences.
SERIAL = Serial interfaces for printer and host
n 16-bit microcontroller computer
n Unlimited storage of counter readings, MIN = Relay output for limit value monitoring
configuration and calibration data. Open = MIN value exceeded down
0837

Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
BV-H2214 GB 2 Redaktion PDE-RD and copyrights.
INTECONT PLUS VBW
MAX = Relay output for limit value monitoring

Open = MAX value exceeded up
Feed rate, belt load, or belt speed, can be
monitoring separately for excess of MIN
and MAX values.
FAULT = Relay output for alarms

Open = Alarm
FULL = Relay output for full feed in batching

mode
Closed = full feed
DRIBBLE = Relay output for dribble feed

Closed = dribble feed
MOTOR = Control output for belt drive

Closed = ON
PREF. = Control output for prefeeder

Closed = On
RELEASE Release signal for totalization

= H = Release
ON/OFF = Start scale and totalization.

High = ON
OFF = Stop
Low = STOP
COUNTER= Pulse output for connection of external

totalizing counter
For simple measuring tasks, with constant belt speed,

speed transducer D can be omitted.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Overview
VBW INTECONT PLUS
2 Control
Power ON Signal Lamps
During power failure
Counter readings
Counter pulses not yet output
Preselected normal displays
Service values, e.g. ON-time
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
remain stored for an endless period of time.
The internal clock continues running for approx. 5
days.
After power-on, display and lamps are automatically

tested before version number of system is displayed
for some seconds to be then replaced by the normal a (green) POWER OK
displays. lights if all power supplies are OK.
b (green) CPU OK
lights if microprocessor is ready to
operate.
Z1 = 2 5 0 0 kg X (red) ALARM
E1 I = 0 kg/h flashes if an Alarm event is
available.
In addition, an event code appears
in lower display line.
Message E1
MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE
reports power failure and can be defined as ALARM or lights if feed rate limit value is
WARNING. exceeded down.
ALARM:
Red lamp
flashing.
X
and message E1 are MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE
lights if feed rate limit value is
To start scale, first acknowledge exceeded up.
message.
WARNING:
Signal lamp X remains dark, READY:
message E1 does not flash. The two green signal lamps must be lit, and no Alarm
Start/stop scale automatically or in message available.
manual. No acknowledgement is
required.
O Lets you acknowledge event
message.
0837

Control Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Normal Displays Control In Normal Mode
Upper Display g Start totalization

Prerequisite : External release signal
Left Rotating point as running message. available (selectable)
Scale has started, totalized amount START source (B06)
and feed rate are acquired. set to OP or Keyboard
In stop state of scale (point stands Mode active.
still) only belt load and belt speed are Feature : Rotating point in left field
measured. of upper display
Right Totalizing counter Z1
Lower Display B Stop totalization

Feature : Point stands still
Belt load and belt speed continue
Left Event message, alphanumerically
being measured.
coded, e.g. E1 for power failure.
Right Selectable display
i Reset totalizing counters.
TU Select display This function has to be activated with
parameters A10 or A11.
1 Enter number of desired counter
(1 or 2).
O Z1 = 50 000 kg
Counter no. : _
Z2 = 60 0 kg/h
Counter 3 cannot be reset. In case of
overflow, counting resumes from 0.
f Acknowledge input.
N Correct faulty input or accidental use
of DELETE key.
TU Select lower display
(see Normal Display).
Counter Z2 Z2 = 6000 kg
Counter Z3 Z3 = 1000 kg O Acknowledge event messages.
Feed rate I = 1000 kg/hr G Call further functions, e.g. display
Feed rate Ir = 50.00 % 1) event messages, calibration.
Belt load Q = 10.000 kg/m
Belt load Qr = 50.0% 2) N Exit function distributor.
Belt speed V = 0.0500 m/s
Batching displays Zb, ZI, Zd, Nb 3)
1) related to nominal feed rate

2) related to nominal belt load
3) see Batching Mode.
Display formats and units of counters Z1, Z2, Z3 and I

can be selected separately.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control
VBW INTECONT PLUS
n WARNING 2 Display permanent, not

Event Messages underscored
Definitions Acknowledgement:
None
All important scale functions are internally monitored,
n IGNORE No event monitoring, save
and faults are reported by event message.
MIN/MAX messages via contact
outputs and signal lamps.
For troubleshooting details, see Event Messages
item.
If several events occur at the same time, the most
significant event is displayed first.
Priority: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2
Z1 = 2500 kg
E1 I = 0 kg/h
Operation
O Acknowledge events of ALARM and

WARNING 1 classes after
Message E1 Power Failure elimination of fault. If several events
are available, acknowledge one
Group code (e.g. E) and number (e.g. 1) appear in left
after the other.
field of lower display.
In addition, an explanatory text can be called up.
The events are organized into 4 classes. The Display event texts:
assignment between event and class can be selected
using relevant parameter. G Call function distributor.
n ALARM Display is underscored and TU Scroll Show Event function into
flashes. lower display field.
Red signal lamp X flashes. f Select function.
Totalization stops, scale is

inoperable.
Start:
If cause of Alarm has been
removed and error message
acknowledged.
Acknowledgement:
If cause of Alarm has not been
removed, flashing stops but
message is still on display.
n WARNING 1 Display permanent and

underscored Totalization goes on.
Acknowledgement:
If cause of fault is still present,
underscores are faded out.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
H3 v > MAX
H4 L/C Input > MAX
1. Event S 2 = O 0 7 Minimum L L1 I < MIN

No Release L2 Load < MIN
L3 v < MIN
L4 L/C Input < MIN
Display shows I = Feed Rate
event name e.g. No Release V = Belt Speed

event code e.g. S2
and a note e.g. Parameter O07. L/C = Load Cell
The note informs the operator of relevant parameter. * Fault on device or cabling
TU Let you view various events.

N Return to normal displays.
Contact Outputs
List of Events
General Alarm available until acknowledged
The events are listed in accordance with display MIN/MAX Outputs independent of event class,
priority. active also in IGNORE class.
Limit values are reported as long
as event is available and only
System messages S1 Memory Error with active scale.
S2 No Release*
S3 Scale Maintenance ON
S4 Maintenance Interval
Electrics
S7 Simulation active
S9 Host Communication
Electrics E1 Power Failure

E2 Namur Error Tacho*
E3 Namur Error Sensor*
E6 Error Ext. Event
Material flow B1 Out of Tolerance

B4 BATCH Actual Value MAX
Calibration C C1 L/C Input *

C2 Tacho Input *
C3 Belt Skew
C4 Belt Drift
C5 Tare Correction > MAX
C7 ZERO Time
C8 Slip Error
C9 Tare Diff > MAX
Maximum H H1 I > MAX

0837 H2 Load > MAX

VBW INTECONT PLUS
B = If batching mode is selected, you can access

Function Distributor additional functions in main distributor.
The function distributor lets you call further functions, Abort Batch
or dialogs. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
G Call function distributor. Print Batch
If no event is available, display shows Make-up
function selected last. Next = Belt Empty
f Start function.
S = Calibrating functions protected by password.
N Return to normal display and/or Prompt is output after call of function.
abort function.
E = If an event is available
Z = Iif activated via parameter

Function
Moving through function distributor has no effect on
Display Events
weighing functions.
Display Test and Version Number

TU Scroll through function distributor
Lets you check displays and signal lamps.
Display Events E
G Call display test.
Test Display
1. Display elements flash
START/STOP Prefeeder Z
rhythmically.
Service Values TU 2. Version number is displayed for
Batch Number B
apr. 3 s.
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set f Test terminates automatically.
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe
Programming
Calibrating Functions S
INTECONT PLUS
Read Parameters VBW 20600-00 2482
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Parameters S
Print Parameters
Status Report Example:
Tare S VBW : Belt Weigher
START/STOP Simulation 20600-00 : Version number
Check Weight S
Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S
Programming and calibrating functions lead to further 0837

menus you can move through using cursor keys.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Select Batching Mode

Batching Mode
Selection of batching mode enables batching,
Additional Displays however, no batch is started yet.
Condition: scale OFF and function activated via
parameter A07.
G Call function distributor.

O Z1 = 2500 kg TU Scroll Select Batch into display
ZI = 400 kg
field.
f Select function.
Upper display : If batching mode is selected, a System prompts for input of batch setpoint.
totals sign is displayed left of If batch is selected from external PC, setpoint input is
running message. omitted.
Lower display : Use cursor keys to scroll 4 Enter Setpoint
additional values into display field.
Setpoint prompt is output automatically upon selection
U 1. Zb = Batch setpoint or can be started in manual when batch is complete
(scale OFF).
2. ZI = Batch actual value If batching mode is deselected or a batch is running,
Amount already no input is possible.
discharged When presetting batch setpoint via fieldbus
(Parameter I09 Batch Source = FB), no input is
3. Zd = Batch residual value possible either. This also applies to the input of batch
Amount not yet number and make-up setpoint.
discharged
P Prepare setpoint input.
Zd = Zb - ZI
19 Enter setpoint in kg or t
Max. 9 digits including decimal
4. Nb = Consecutive batch
point.
number The unit is that of counter 1.
Use Batch Number
function to set initial value.
. Setpoint Batch
Before a batch starts, ZI and Zd indicate the amounts Zb = . . . . . . kg
fed out during previous batch.
If you deselect batching mode (Deselect Batch functi-
on), displays are disabled but enabled again upon
next selection.
The display format corresponds to the format of

counter 1. f Acknowledge input.
N Abort input, old setpoint remains
stored.
O Delete faulty digits.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Start and Abort Make-up
Lets you add a selected amount of material to a batch

g Start batch, process starts. aborted or complete.
Prerequisites : Running batch complete, scale OFF.
Display ZI moves from 0 towards No batch printout.
setpoint
Display Zd moves from setpoint Display ZI : Batch actual setpoint resumes from
towards 0. achieved value.
B Abort batch. Display Zd : Batch residual value remains
unchanged.
Batching continues upon next start
command. Display Zbn : Make-up setpoint
Deselect Batch Display Zdn : Batch residual value of make-up

amount
Lets you deselect batching mode, i.e. mode is removed Zdn = Zbn - make-up amount
from active functions available. already fed.
Totals sign disappears from upper display, batching
You can scroll all displays into lower display field
values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb are no longer available, but
using cursor keys.
remain stored.
Zdn and Zbn are available only until start of next
Prerequisites : Batch complete, or aborted using batch.
Abort Batch function; scale OFF.
GT Call function distributor and select
GT Call function distributor, Make-up function.
select Deselect Batch function,
f Acknowledge.
and acknowledge.
f System prompts for input of
make-up setpoint Zbn in kg or t.
The units is that of Counter 1.
Use Select Batch function to reactivate batching
mode.
Old values ZI, Zd, Zb and Nb can be viewed again. P Until start of make-up, setpoint Zbn
can be changed.
Abort Batch
gB Start or abort make-up
This function lets you abort a running batch, i.e.
batching immediately stops.
Batching mode remains selected.
New batch starts upon next start command, old batch If make-up batch is complete, normal batch starts
is not resumed. upon next start command.
Use Make-up function to complete old batch. For new make-up, call function again.
Abort Batch function also aborts make-up
GT Call function distributor and select operations.
Abort Batch function.
f Acknowledge.
You can also abort batch using the P02 contact.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Batch Number Nb
Visual Make-up
Select a number incrementing by 1 after start of every
new batch.
A batch report can be printed only if batch is complete
The consecutive number is printed in batch report and
(setpoint reached).
indicated in lower display line.
Belonging to previous batch, make-up operations are If an unspecified amount is to be batched using the
not counted. START/STOP keys, the results can be printed using a
little trick:
1. Call Select Batch function.
Batch Number function.
2. Enter very high batch setpoint,
f Acknowledge. e.g. 999999999 kg.
Prompt Nb = - is output. 3. Scroll batch actual value ZI into lower display field.
4. Start scale.
f Acquire input. 5. If desired amount ZI is reached, stop scale.
N Abort input. 6. Call Abort Batch function.
Old number remains stored. 7. Start printing
(see Print Batch).
Current number can be changed also while a batch is Make-up can be performed only before print
running. command. To start next batch, resume from item 4.
Next = Belt Empty

Keyboard Mode
One-off changeover to clearance mode.
Next batch is controlled via prefeeder. When batch is
complete, conveyor belt still performs approx. 1/2 belt This function lets you place the selected control
circuit. source for
Prerequisites : Scale OFF, Start/Stop, Batch setpoint

batch complete,
prefeeder control present and on the INTECONT keyboard. If you deselect Keyboard
active. Mode, the old source is active again. When changing
Batching mode without clearance. over from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, the
Start/Stop status remains stored; vice versa, the
external signal is active.
Next - Belt Empty function. GT Call function distributor and select
Start Keyboard Mode or Stop
f Acknowledge. Keyboard Mode functions.
g Start batch.
Display feature:
You will know Keyboard Mode by the rectangle in the
upper left display field.
Condition : This function has to be activated

with the parameter A06.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Activate/Deactivate EasyServe Printing
This function lets you control your INTECONT using The printing functions are available only if the option
the EasyServe PC service tool. card is present.
GT Call function distributor and select Print Batch

Activate EasyServe function.
The batch report can be printed:
1. using Print Batch function
Enter communication parameters using Block R.
2. automatically after each complete batch
(Parameter J02 = YES).
Condition: This function has to be activated
with the parameter A09.
Start of printing disables the Make-up function for the
current batch.
Prerequisites : Batch complete, scale OFF.
Note: Upon power failure, the current
Print format : Order of sequence, line and column
status is stored, i.e. the Activate
divisions can be selected at will
EasyServe function needs not be
(Parameter Block J).
reselected.
Print Batch function.
Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole Start function.
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485). N Abort printing.
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.
Prefeeder Batch Nummer 40

20.11.02 16:49:41
Batch Setpoint 0.150 t
The Start/Stop Prefeeder function lets you activate or Batch Actual Val. 0.150 t
deactivate prefeeder. Select Start, and INTECONT Totalizer 1 0.806t
will control your prefeeder. In Stop state, material flow Totalizer 2 806.47 kg
is interrupted and scale can be tared. Zero Set beforer 19 min.
Events
Prerequisites : External prefeeder present and E1 Power Failure O01
controlled by INTECONT.
Activate function using parameter
N 01.
GT Call function distributor and select Batch Number: Consecutive number of batch
Start Prefeeder or Stop Prefeeder 20.11.02: Date and time
function. Batch Setpoint: Preset batch amount
f Start control signal. Batch Actual Val.: Amount batched (actual value)
Totalizer 1:
Totalizing counter 1
Totalizer 2: Totalizing counter 2

Zero Set before: Feeder run time after last taring or
zeroing operation (see Service
Values) 0837
Events : available during printing

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Print Counter Readings (FMZ), Quantity Report Print Events
This report is identical with the batch report, however, Parameter J03 lets you select/deselect printout of
the numerical values are identified as sub-totals by event messages.
the # symbol.
There are 3 options:
If no batching mode is selected, batch number, batch
setpoint and batch actual value are not printed. This 1. No printout (NO)
type of report figures as Quantity Report.
2. Print events (error)
Batch actual value [kg] # 998 #
etc. 3. Print events and counter readings (YES)
(see Printer Counter Readings)
Call:
1) Use Print Counter Readings function. 20.11.02 11:45:21 L2 W1 Load > MAX
Unlike the Print Batch function, printing is 20.11.02 11:59:01 L2 W1 Load < MIN
possible during running batch.
2) Printed automatically upon every event printout

(Parameter J03 = YES)
L2 :
Event code
Print Parameters W1 :
Error class, e.g. WARNING 1
Event has occurred
:
Print complete parameter list with current values. Cause removed, event acknowledged, if
:
Inputs differing from default values are identified by *. required.
The list is complete with all possible event messages Load<MIN: Explanation
and the current hardware assignment.
Event is displayed on INTECONT as long as

PARAMETER PRINTOUT available.
INTECONT PLUS VBW 20600-01 2482 For more information, see Event Messages item.
20.11.02 16:59:51
BLOCK A Dialog Behaviour

01 Language ENGLISH
02 Units SI
BLOCK B Rated Data

01 Feed Rate Unit kg/h
02 Nominal Feed Rate * 1,000 t/h
etc.

Print Parameters function.
f Start function.
N Abort printing at any time.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Print Zero Setting Results
The result of the automatic zero setting function can STATUS REPORT INTECONT PLUS
be printed automatically after every belt circuit. 25.11.02 13:37:12
Prerequisite:Parameter H 01 = YES (Auto Zero Active)
Software : VBW 20600-01 2482
Parameter H09 = YES Hardware version :1
Option card version :1
Station address :1
Tare correction is the total of all zero point changes; -------------------------------
Latest Report of: 25.11.02 12:13:13
total tare additionally includes the basic tare. ------------ -------------------
Values correspond to same-name parameters SPC values:
D 03/05. Zero Set before : 4086 min

Voltage ON-time : 68 h
Feeder ON-time : 68 h
Latest password entry of : 22.11.02 17:02:12
Latest matkor change : 15.11.02 15:02:34
K05 SPC Time :1h

K06 SPC Filter : 1.00 h
Print Zero Setting Results Feed rate
Mean value Imitt : 0.15 %
Variance : 0.09 %
Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare Correction T [kg/m] 1,56 Belt load Q MAX :0%
Time Q MIN :0%
Totalizer 3 : 510 t
Belt skew : 0.00 %
Belt Drift : 0.00 cm
Latest taring results (max. 5) T in % of Qnenn

22.11.02 16:04:05 : 12.99 %
21.11.02 16:11:22 : 30.75 %
21.11.02 16:10:53 : 33.40 %
22.11.02 16:05:22 : 12.99 %
22.11.02 16:04:43 : 12.99 %
Status Report
Test weight check of 16.06.03 16:23:17
25.11.02 09:06:28
The status report can be printed at any time. Set/Act 0.9643
Reported are previous events, calibration results, and N05 BIC Active NO
Events since power on
SPC measurement values, e.g. feed rate variance. 1 * H03 v> MAX
1 * C07 Set Time To Zero
1 * E01 Power Failure
SPC = Statistic Process Control
For individual data, see Service Values item.
GT Call function distributor and select Zero Set before:

Status Report function. Zero point corrected by taring program or
manual/automatic zero setting.
f Start function.
Voltage ON-time:
N Abort printing at any time. Total voltage ON-time.
Feeder ON-time:
Total ON-time of conveyor belt and INTECONT.
Last password entry on:

Date of last password input for start of a service function
or parameter change.
Latest matkor change:

The matkor parameter lets you change feed rate and
totalization range.
SPC time:
Measuring time for SPC values Qmax and TQ < MIN. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
SPC filter: Feed Rate Diagram

Filter time for SPC values mean value and variance
Printed automatically after status report, the feed rate
Mean value Imitt: diagram shows the current feed rate value in percent
Feed rate mean value exponentially filtered using the of nominal feed rate. The report period is determined
SPC filter time related to nominal feed rate. by Parameter K 05 SPC Time .
Variance:
Feed rate variance related to the square of nominal feed Feed Rate in Percent Pnenn
rate. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 %
Belt load QMAX: - 6h * 5,000 t/h

Maximum belt load during last few hours limited by SPC - 5h * 10,000 t/h
time related to nominal belt load. - 4h * 20,000 t/h
- 3h >
- 2h * 40,000 t/h
Time Q < MIN:
- 1h * 50,000 t/h
Total time during which belt load was below Qmin - 0h * 50,000 t/h
(Parameter F 05), evaluated over the past few hours
(SPC time).
Last taring results (max. 5):

Results (total tare) of last 5 zero point or tare corrections, The actual diagram resolution is higher than shown in
related to nominal belt load. sample.
Feed rate 50 dots for nominal feed rate
Test weight check on : Time : 32 dots for time K 05
Date and time of last check using check weight, Units : t/h, h
performed using Weight Check CW setting program. Initialisation : upon power-up and change of
Parameter K 05.
BIC active: Symbol > : Feed rate exceeds 140 %
indicates whether automatic belt influence
compensation is active, or not.
Events report:
lists number and type of events occurred after last
printout.
If no report has been printed yet, counting starts from
time of power-up.
Counter 3:
Totalizing counter 3
Belt skew:
indicates change in belt length in % of total belt length
(Parameter D06).
Belt drift:
indicates belt drift in cm.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Program complete:
Zero Setting
0. Dev. 70.2 %
The zero setting program is designed to acquire the belt Tarkor 1.12 %
weighers zero point error over one or multiple integer
belt circuits.
In normal mode, value is used to correct current
measuring result.
If no automatic mode is selected, use program in regular
intervals. Upper display: Deviation of zero point from
During zero setting, totalizing counters stop counting. previous zero setting operation in %
of nominal belt load.
Prerequisite:1. Conveyor belt totally unloaded. Dev = + : error increased
If necessary, abort program. Dev = - : error decreased.
User Start Prefeeder function, if Lower display: Deviation of zero point from basic
available. tare in % of nominal belt load.
Taring program corrects basic tare
2. Belt running, during calibration.
indicated automatically.
Acquire result, or view for information and reject.
3. No batch active; batching mode can
remain active. f Acquire result.
Scale zero point is corrected.
4. This function has to be activated with
the parameter A08. N Abort program.
Result is rejected.
Call:
G Call Zero Setting function and start. Restart prefeeder.
If belt is not running, program aborts Event messages:

TU and requests START.
1- C7 Zero setting time elapsed.
f Deselect message, if not desired.
Program running:
2- Value Excessive
Zeroing range exceeded; clean
scale and retare, if necessary.
0. >0< 70.2 % 3. Note:

Tarkor 1.12 % The function setting to zero can also be
started via the digital input P05. The
program is started by a positive flank of the
contact. The result is automatically accepted
if it is within the admissible zero setting limit
(5% of the nominal belt load). An
Upper display: Residual run time in % of total run
ackowledgement of the result is not
time.
necessary. The calibration program can only
Lower display: Zero point error in %, related to
be aborted in its active phase.
nominal belt load.
N Abort program at any time. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Read Parameters
Parameters are defined as variable characteristics or

data used to match INTECONT to the particular
application.
Parameter input is protected by password (see Enter
Parameters).
The Read Parameters function lets you view all
parameters without jeopardizing the operating
reliability.
The parameters are organized into function blocks A ,

B,... and consecutively numbered within a block.
GTf Scroll Programming function into

display field and acknowledge.
Tf Select Read Parameters
sub-function.
Display shows title of first parameter block.
Dialog Behaviour
Block: A
TU Scroll through parameter blocks

A, B,...
fT Scroll through parameters within a
block.
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 1000.0 kg/h
N Return to blocks.
For more information, see Enter Parameters.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
This page left intentionally blank
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
3 Control Overview
RUNNING MESSSAGE, OPERATING STATUS H2

EVENT MESSAGES
Z1 = FEED AMOUNT
I = FEED RATE kg/m
L2
ACKNOWLEDGE
READY
{ POWER ON
CPU OK
m/s
H3 H1
o Z1 = 1500 kg ABORT C1
-- I = 100 kg/h FUNCTION L3 L1
ALARM L4
kg/h
MIN M
MAX START
STOP PREPARE
ENTRY FUNCTION
START
S2
RESET PRESELECT LOWER EVENT MESSAGES
COUNTER DISPLAY
gB Start/Stop if preselected
U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions.
(1) Counters Z2, Z3 (4) Belt load Q
(2) Feed rate I (5) Belt speed v
T (3) Feed rate Ir in %
i RESET Reset counter(s)
(1) Enter number of desired counter (1 or 2).
(2) Use ENT key to acknowledge.
(3) Use ESCAPE key to abort input.
(4) Use DELETE key to delete faulty digits.
G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages
(1) SCROLL keys let you select desired function.

If an event is available, Display Event function is preselected.
(2) ENTER key lets you activate function.
(3) SCROLL keys let you view available event messages one after the other.
(4) ESCAPE key lets you return to normal displays.
O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs.

N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays.
f ENTER Acknowledge input, e.g. setpoint,
start functions, e.g. Display Events (see FUNCTION).
P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Control Overview
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Control Overview Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
4 Operating Principle
A belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the Belt Speed:

material amount transported on a conveyor belt.
A further measure for feed rate is belt speed v,
Belt Load: acquired with the use of speed transducer D and
translated into a corresponding pulse frequency.
The material is guided to a weighing platform If belt load is constant and more approximate
arranged under the belt and limited by 2 carrying accuracy will suffice, speed measurement can be
idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the platform omitted.
load excerts a force on load cell (L/C).
The deflection for measurement is 0.2 mm. The
weighed idlers are connected with the frame structure,
e.g. with the use of a leaf spring parallel system. Feed Rate:
INTECONT normalizes physical units kg/m and m/s.

Multiplication of the two values results in feed rate I.
I in kg/s
v in m/s
Q in kg/m
QB in kg
Leff in m
I in kg/h:
I in kg/h
Proportional to platform load, the load cell output As to the rest,
voltage is amplified and transferred to the INTECONT see above.
microprocessor with the use of an analog-to-digital
converter.
The white triangle indicates the load distribution on a
single-idler platform scale. Only half of the materials
weight force is applied to the weighed idler.
The translation of load ratio into platform length has

become accepted usage in weighing technology.
Leff = effective platform

length
Lg = total platform length
For weighing platforms equipped with multiple

weighed idlers, factor 1/2 is different.
Belt load in kg/m is thus:
QB = total load on
weighing platform.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Automatic Belt Influence Compensation (BIC): Batching:
In batching mode, a preselected material amount is

fed. When batch setpoint is reached, batching stops.
Batching can be controlled via conveyor belt drive or
material prefeeder.
Control via belt drive:
In this mode, the conveyor belt is still fully loaded after

complete batch.
Not even the best of conveyor belts is perfectly even;

particulary in welding points, the belt will be heavier
and stiffer. The figure above shows the relations over
one belt circuit in exaggerated fashion.
Therefore, a high accuracy can normally be ensured

only over entire belt circuits, i.e. over the mean value.
INTECONT is able to acquire and correct this
influence with the use of a belt circuit sensor and a
metal belt mark.
This considerably increases the scales short-term
accuracy.
To enable variations to be considered during 0 Start batch and conveyor belt.
operation, the belt influence is continuously
measured. The compensation adaptively follows up, 1 Abort batch
also if material is fed. or
Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD): 2 resume at any time.
3 Reduce belt speed, change over to dribble feed.
4 Stop conveyor belt.
5 Drive stops, batch setpoint is reached.
For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is

not directly located at the point of material discharge.
Therefore, if belt load varies, the feed rate measuring
result does not exactly correspond to the current feed
rate at the point of discharge.
A special speed-dependent delay elements shifts the
measurement to the discharge point.
To do so, no special load transducers are required;
however, the additional use of the automatic belt 0837
influence compensation is reasonable.

Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Control via prefeeder:
Batch complete, conveyor belt is empty.
0 Start batch and conveyor belt.

Open prefeeder.
1 Stop belt, if necessary; cut off belt and prefeeder

drive.
2 Resume batching.
3 Changeover to dribble feed is possible, but not

always reasonable.
4 Stop prefeeder if precalculated distance to

setpoint is reached.
5 Batch complete.
Conveyor belt continues running for approx. 1/2
belt circuit.
Dribble feed and cut-off point are self-optimizing, i.e.

they are automatically corrected after every batch.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Operating Principle
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Operating Principle Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
5. Technical Data
n Panel-mounting unit VEG 20600/20610 n Surface-mounting unit: with panel mounting unit
VEG 20...
Front panel : 96 x 288 mm
Panel cut-outs : 88 x 282, wall thickness n Wall-mounting housing
max. 10 mm
Mounting depth : min. 225 mm Measuring
(including 50 mm for systems : width x height x depth
connectors) 410x330x236mm
Protected to : IP 20, front to IP 65 Feeding
Material : plastic grey to RAL 7022 systems : width x height x depth
Display : fluorescent, 2 lines of 20 500x600x300mm
characters, 6 mm high Protected to : IP 65
Keyboard : flexible membranes with Material : steel sheet, 1.5 mm, grey
tactile touch Voltage supply : 90...264V/50Hz...60Hz
Signal lamps : LEDs, 2 x green, 3 x red Extension : Feed unit controller
Power supply : 24 V(DC) 50 % -25%,
n Environment
max. 1 A,
no fuse, pole-reversal Temperature : -25 C ... +45 C,
protective circuit tested to -40C
Ext. power supply : 90...264V/ 50HZ...60HZ Humidity : Class F (DIN 40 040) *
Interference :
immunity
to IEC 801
Z1 = 2500 kg Interference
I = 0 kg/h
suppression : to VDE 871, EN 55 011
Housing safety : to IEC 348

EC recommen-
dations : CE label
* Tropical version (class R) upon request
n Storage temperature
-40 C ... +60 C
n Connectors
Plug/screw connectors (Phoenix Combicon),

non-confusible
n Control outputs
Number : 8 N/O relay contacts

Base board : 3
Option card : 5
Load : max. 230 V(AC)
0837 8 A resistive load, 1 A
inductive

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
VBW INTECONT PLUS
If error message CPU Not OK is output, all contacts n External totalizing pulse counter
open.
Frequency : max. 10 Hz
n Control Pulse length : selectable 50...1000 ms
Output : 24 V, max. 100 mA
Number : 5 optionally active low or active
Base card : 3 high,
Option card : 2 galvanically isolated,
Type : 24 V(DC) +/-30 %, 5 mA, short-circuit-proof, limited to
galvanically isolated apr. 350 mA,
negative amounts are stored
internally and must be
compensated by positive
n Control inputs (NAMUR) amounts before new pulse is
output.
Number : 2
This ensures integral
Type : NAMUR (DIN 19234),
accuracy also with minimal
short-circuit and cable
belt load.
breakage monitoring
n Serial printer interface
n Analog output
Number : 1 (option card)
Number : 2
Type : RS 232 (V24), max. 38400
Base card : 1
baud
Option card :
1
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed parity
Raise : 0... <20 mA Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Load : max. 500 ohms Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contat
Reference : 0 V by user, spacing 3.5 mm, max.
galvanically isolated 1.5 mm2
Resolution : 12 bits +/- 1 d Character map : ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1)
If error message CPU Not OK is output, output n Load cell connection
signal turn 0 mA.
Voltage supply : +/- 6 V AC (+/-3 %)
(apr. 66 Hz
short-circuit-proof
n Analog input
Measuring cycle : 100ms
Number : 1 Resolution : 24 Bit
Current : raise ...20 mA impressed Load : R (load cell) = min. 80 ohms
Raise : 0... 20 mA Cable length : max. 30 % voltage drop,
Load : 500 ohms max. 500 m
Reference : 0 V internal, Measuring range : -20mV....+50mV
galvanically non isolated with VLW:
Resolution : 10 bits +/- 1/2 d -1.6mV...min. 32mV
Acuracy : <0.4% over entire
temperature range
0837

Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Serial interface for service PC
Number : 1
Type : RS232; RS422 or RS 485
max. 19200 baud
Data format : 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd
parity changeable to even or
no
Isolation : galvanically non-isolated
Connectors : Phoenix MSTB, contact
spacing 3.5 mm, max. 1.5
mm2 or 9-pole D-Sub HD20
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Technical Data
VBW INTECONT PLUS
This page left intentionally blank.
0837

Technical Data Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
6. Characteristics
n Power failure n Signal lamps (top down)
Scale data, calibration values, counter readings VOLTAGE OK (green)

and pulses pending remain stored after power PROCESSOR OK (green)
failure for an unlimited period of time. The internal ALARM (red)
clock continues running for approx. 5 days. MIN (red) MIN feed rate value
MAX (red) MAX feed rate value
n Dialog language
for error messages, operation, and service n Event messages
programs.
Events and faults are displayed in form of an
Select: DEUTSCH alphanumeric code. Call clear text of consecutive
ENGLISH events via keyboard.
FRANCAIS Events are organized into Alarms and Warnings,
ESPANOL with and without acknowledgement. Alarms stop
ITALIANO scale; warnings dont.
All alarms are additionally reported via relay
output.
n Units (selectable)
n Operating philosophy
SI units : kg , kg/h
t , t/h Operator prompting through multi-level menus.
m , cm Important configuration and calibration functions
are protected by password.
NON-SI units: lb , lb/h
t , t/h
f , inch n Belt speed
(see Parameter List) For simple applications, speed measurement can
be omitted.
n Start/Stop totalizing counter

n Zero setting
Select using Parameter B06.
Zero setting can be performed
n Displays 1- manually via keyboard
2- automatically, if belt is empty.
Upper display: Totalizing counter 1
Lower display: Totalizing counters 2 and 3 The maximum admissible zero setting elevation is
Feed rate absolute monitored.
Feed rate relative
Belt speed
Belt load absolute
Belt load relative
Batch data
Select for lower display using cursor keys.

0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
VBW INTECONT PLUS
n Taring n MIN/MAX messages and outputs
Designed to zero the basic tare load, the taring 2 separately selectable limit values for monitoring
program on principle has the same function as the of signal lamps and relay outputs.
zero setting program. However, tare elevation is Any event can be reported by message.
not monitored, and the call is protected by
password. MIN/MAX for
(1) Feed rate
(2) Belt load
n Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) (3) Belt speed
Using an additional belt circuit sensor and a metal
Switching threshold, relay outputs and event class
belt mark, the dynamic zero point influence of the
can be defined individually for all 6 possibilities.
conveyor belt can be compensated during
operation (with and without material). n Display filter
This considerably increases the belt weighers Define individually for feed rate, belt load and belt
short-term accuracy. speed.
n Measurement at the point of discharge (CPD)

n Maintenance hints
A special speed-dependent delay element shifts
the point of measurement to the material Display event on screen.
discharge point where the material amount
discharged is acquired. (1) Voltage ON-time
(2) Scale ON-time

n Belt drift display
(3) Zero setting required
For prerequisites, see BIC.
n Statistic Process Control (SPC)
n Batching mode
Mean values, variances, maximum value storage,
(1) Without clearance of conveyor belt. zero settings tables, etc. are available in form of
Controlled is the belt drive motor. service values.
(2) With clearance of conveyor belt.

Controlled is the material prefeeder. n Adaptions
Cut-off point and start of dribble feed can be The electrical system needs not be redesigned,
adapted automatically in either case. adapted, etc.
n Zero drop out
Used to suppress totalization upon measurements

around zero, for counter to stop while belt is being
unloaded.
Deselect function, if not desired.
0837

Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Calibration n Digital Outputs
Calibration as such is not necessary.

Number Name Default Value
All you have to do is enter some constructional
data on load cells, speed transducer, belt Q04 DO I-MIN DO4
inclination, etc. INTECONT uses these data to Q05 DO I-MAX DO2
compute all requisite display normalizations. Q01 DO ALARM DO3
Check, or recalibration, can be effected in two Q02 DO START Feeder
ways: Q03 DO START Scale DO1
Q11 DO Full Feed
Q12 DO Dribble Feed
a) Using material N15 DO Belt Skew
N16 DO Belt Drift
Enter check result into INTECONT, and N17 DO Belt Slip
measuring result will be corrected. Q06 DO Q-MIN
Q07 DO Q-MAX
b) Using check weight Q08 DO v-MIN
Q09 DO v-MAX
A special check program lets you check Q10 DO Batch Active
normalization, or if certain technical data are Q13 DOKeyboard Mode
not exactly known (lever ratio, belt inclination, B11 DO Pulse Counter
etc.), correct them.
In subsequent operation, this program can be

used to detect mechanical changes, e.g. platform
distorsion after settling of foundation.
n Digital inputs
Number Name Default Value

P03 DI Ackn. Events DI1
P01 Release DI3
B06 START Source (OP)
P02 DI Abort Batch
N04 Sensor Source DI6
B03 Tacho Source DI7
P04 DI Start
P05 DI Zero Set
N18 Freeze BIC
P06 DI Ext. Event
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Characteristics
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Characteristics Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
7 Setting Programs
Function Distributor Programming and Calibrating functions lead to further

menus you can move through using cursor keys.
The function distributor lets you access all setting B= If batching mode is selected, additional
programs. functions can be accessed in main distributor.
G Call function distributor.

If no event is available, function selected last Abort Batch
is displayed. Deselect Batch
Batch Number
f Start function. Print Batch
Make-up
Next = W/Belt Empty
N Return to normal displays, or
abort function.
S= Calibrating functions protected by password.
Prompt is output after call of function only
E= An event is available.
F u n ctions
Displa y Result s
Z= Activated via parameter.
Moving through function distributor has no effect on

weighing functions.
Move through function distributor.
TU
Display Results E
Display Check
START/STOP Feeder Z
Service Values
Batch Number B
Print Counter Readings
>0< Zero Set
START/STOP Keyboard Mode
START/STOP EasyServe
Programming
Calibration Functions S
Read Parameters
Enter Parameters S
Load Default Par. S
Print Parameters
Print Status Report
START/STOP Simulation
Tare S
Weight Check S
0837 Imp/Belt Circuit S
Set Time S

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Setting Programs
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Calibrating Functions Belt Circuit LB
There are 3 setting programs designed to ease initial Call setting program LB: IMP/BELT only
calibration and recalibration. (1) upon initial calibration
(1) Pulses/Belt Circuit LB (2) after mounting new belt or considerably varying
(2) Taring TW belt tension
(3) Weight Check CW (3) after having changed parameter B 04
Charact.Val. vs or B 05 Nominal Speed (in
Upon initial calibration, perform functions in the above case of scales with and without speed
order of sequence. measurement).
All functions can be reached using the CALIBRATION
function and are protected from unauthorized use by Program acquires the number of speed transducer
password. pulses for one belt circuit and uses the number of
pulses as belt circuit code for the following programs:
During program run until acknowledgement (a) Manual or automatic zero setting
(1) no totalization takes place (b) Taring TW
(2) analog outputs are set to offset values (c) Weight Check CW
(3) no event messages are suppressed
(4) all BIC functions are cut off. Upon initial calibration, first call setting program LB.
This also applies to scales without speed
The operating sequence is the same with all measurement.
programs.
G Call function distributor. Prerequisites : (1) Before calling program, measure

time of one belt circuit with
TUf Scroll CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS maximum possible accuracy and
into lower display field and enter into Parameter C 02.
acknowledge. (2) Deselect batching mode.
(3) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
B7f Enter password 07734.
Sequence:
Display shows a setting program, e.g. TW: Tare. Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
TU Scroll LB: Imp/Belt
Calibrating Functions into lower display field.
S5 TW. Tare
f Start.
N Abort at any time.
Start setting program.

Setting programs do not control belt drive and
N Return to normal displays. prefeeder.
For approx. 2 min., Calibration menu can be If any condition is not met, setting program aborts
f recalled without password input. and a corresponding message is output.
0837

Setting Programs Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Program running: Error message : If sensor is improperly recognized

(sensor pulses measured do not
correspond to parameter setting),
message Sensor Error is output
and setting program aborts. For
>. LB : 5.6 s
1500 Imp troubleshooting, see
Commissioning/Belt Run
Monitoring item.
Upper display : residual run time in seconds

Tare TW
Lower display : added speed transducer pulses
The taring program acquires the belt weighers zero

Program complete: point error over one or multiple integer belt circuits
and uses value to correct current measuring result in
normal mode.
On principle, taring program is identical with zero set-
ting program.
>. LB: v 0.095 m/s
451251 I/B
Tare : acquire basic tare (weight of
mechanical system, conveyor belt,
etc.) upon commissioning, service
and maintenance.
Set to zero : acquire zero point deviation during

Upper display : belt speed mean value over total run operation, e.g. contamination.
time
Lower display : Pulses/belt circuit total Unlike the zero setting program, the correction
amount of the taring program is unlimited.
After taring, the admissible correction amount of the
zeroing program relates to the new reference value.
f Accept result and enter into Prerequisites : (1) Conveyor belt totally unloaded.
Parameter D 06. Control prefeeder using the
N Reject result. START/STOP Feeder function.
(2) Clean mechanical scale system
in weighing area.
The sequence is the same if no speed measurement Normal deposits immediately
is provided. recurring during operation need
not be removed.
Special Messages: (3) Deselect batching mode.
(1) START if belt is not running (4) Ensure conveyor belt is running.
(2) ABORTED Corresponding hint is output
automatically.
Attention!
If a belt circuit sensor is present (N03 = YES), Sequence:

program sequence slightly differs.
Running Gf Function distributor, calibrating
message : E-PROG active (lower display) functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions)
Complete
message : ... - I/B
value flickers upon every belt circuit. TU Scroll TW: Tare
0837 Operation : as described above function into lower display field.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
f Start function. Weight Check CW

N Abort function at any time.
This program lets you check the INTECONT
measuring range.
Program running: Load weighing platform with a known check weight
and acquire platform load mean value over one or
multiple integer belt circuits.
TW: 9 0. 2 % INTECONT compares the result with defined setpoint
Tare 5 2. 3 5
and displays value. Automatic correction does not
take place.
Prerequisites : (1) Tare or zero set
(2) Enter check weight into
Parameter C 08.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time Select check weight between
Lower display : continuously meaned tare in % of 30...100 % of nominal platform
nominal belt load load Q0.
Program complete: Q0 = q0 * Leff

q0 = nominal belt load
Parameter D 01
>. Dev. 2.45 %
Tare 53.20 Leff = eff. platform length
Parameter C 05
(3) Apply check weight in proper

location.
(4) Select batching mode.
Upper display : deviation of tare value from previous (5) Start conveyor belt.
taring result Corresponding hint is output
in % of nominal belt load automatically.
dev = + : tare has increased
dev = - : tare has decreased Sequence:
Lower display : mean value of total tare
in % of nominal belt load Gf Function distributor, calibrating
functions, password
f Accept taring result and enter into (see Calibrating Functions).
Parameter D 04.
Set tare correction (D05) to zero.
TU Scroll CW: Weight Check
N Reject result, i.e. scale is not tared. function into lower display field.
Special Messages: f Start function.

(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED
N Abort function at any time.
Note:
(1) Related to nominal belt load, tare value can
exceed 100%.
(2) If deviation (dev) exceeds 20%, check scale for
mechanical faults, e.g. jammed material
particles.
(3) If BIC is active (M05 = YES), BIC tare vectors 0837

are initialized along with taring program.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Program running: Evaluating Result:

Error < 1 % : KOR = 0.99...1.01
Scale OK, no further action required.
Error < 5 % : KOR = 0.95...1.05

>. CW: 51,4 %
Set / Act 0,9842 Enter KOR value into Parameter D
02.
This make good sense only if
parameter has not yet considered
result of check using material.
Upper display : residual run time in % of total run time
Lower display : continuously meaned SET/ACT Error > 5 % : KOR < 0.95, or KOR > 1.05
measuring result Multi-percent deviations suggest
faulty data input (e.g. belt incination,
lever arms not exactly known), and/or
mechanical faults (misalignment,
Program complete: distorsions).
Check does not consider Parameter D 02 Range

>. CW: 1200,34 kg
Correction, so that check program will indicate
COR 0,99915 same error quotient KOR after check.
Upper display : Fictitious material amount fed over

run time *.
Lower display : mean value KOR of SET/ACT over
total run time
fN Exit program.
Since result is not
AUTOMATICALLY ACQUIRED,
both keys are equivalent.
Special Messages:
(1) START if belt is not running
(2) ABORTED (irrelevant)
* Lets you check scale zero point without check

weight.
Display format: xxxxxxx,yy kg
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Set Time Simulation Mode
Unlike the other programs, date and time can be The Simulation Mode lets you check all scale
changed in START and STOP states of scale and functions without material at the time of
read off under SERVICE VALUES. commissioning.
During simulation, scale is cannot operate in normal
Gf Function distributor, Calibrating mode.
functions, password
(see Calibrating Functions). Gf Function distributor, Calibration
functions, password (see
Calibration Functions).
TU Scroll Set Time function into lower
display field. TU Scroll START Simulation into lower
display field.
f Call menu.
f Start program.
N Abort at any time.
Display : Event message S7

033 Year, e.g. 03
Enter month, day, hour, minute, In upper line, the = symbol
second. flashes.
f Acknowledge every input. Function can be cut off in the same way (STOP
As soon as seconds are Simulation).
acknowledged, new date is stored,
and complete date is briefly
displayed.
Features:
O Delete digit entered last
1. All operating functions can be performed.
2. Feed rate actual value is set to nominal rate.
After power failure, time remains stored for min. 5 3. Belt load and speed measurement are active.
days.
4, All control inputs/outputs operate as usually.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
8 Service Values
The Service table includes detailed system 6) Input switching condition

information.
Call does not affect weighing functions. I+ : DI = 1 1 1 1 1 + 0
GT 1" = contact closed

0" = contact open
f Call SERVICE VALUES function and
Inputs 4 + 5 on option card
activate.
N = no option card
TU Move through service values.
Inputs 6 + 7 designed as Namur inputs
(belt sensor, tacho)
+ short circuit; - cable breakage;
1" = sensor covered; 0" = sensor free
Displays:
7) EL = 22 h
1) VBW 20600-01 2482 Version number
Voltage ON-time
2) HW = 1 Hardware version
Monitored: Parameter K 01, Message S4
3) Option card: 0 (not available)
8) ED : >0 = 95 min
1 (available)
Scale ON-time after last taring, or last manual or
automatic zero set.
O Z1 = 1500100 kg
Opt..Card : 1
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, conveyor belt

may be stopped.
Monitored : Parameter H 07, Message C7
9) ED = 19 h
4) Date and time
Scale and conveyor belt ON-times
5) Relay outputs switching condition
I + DO = 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Prerequisite : Totalization ON
Monitored : Parameter K 03, Message S3
1" = contact closed
0" = contact open
10) Tacho = 96.6 Hz
Outputs 4-8 on option card
N = no option card
Speed transducer input frequency
Select frequency between 0.4...3000 Hz.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
VBW INTECONT PLUS
11) aw = 30.988 % 17) Belt Drift tr = 0.12 cm
Load on load cells related to total of load cells The arrows indicate the direction of drift.
rated capacity.
If value exceeds 100 %, load cells are
overloaded.
From 110 % onward, message H4 :
L/C Input > MAX is output.
12) vap = 0.883168 mV/V
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip

delayed for point of material discharge (CPD Monitored : Parameters N09-N12, messages
active). C3 and C4
13) bic = 2.34001 mV/V 18) Pulses of sensor area Imp.S. = 386
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Measured pulses of sensor area. If belt sensor is
with active BIC (Belt Influence Compensation) properly located, the following result is expected:
Imp.S. = 0.5 * sensor length * 0.01 * charact. value vs

14) L/C = 1.383257 mV/V
Unnormalized load cell amplifier output value Prerequisite: see Slip

(Gross).
19) Mean value Imitt = 22.27 %
Acquired before belt influence compensation and
delay for point of discharge. Feed rate mean value related to nominal feed
rate
Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06

15) R_L/C = 300 ohms Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Load cell resistance value
20) Variance var = 0.02 %
16) Slip s = 0.25 %
Feed rate variance related to nominal feed rate
Variation in belt length in % of total belt length square.
(Parameter D 06).
Filter : Exponential, Parameter K 06
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin
Prerequisite: Belt sensor active (N03), sensor Initialization : Zero at power ON
area on conveyor belt (N04).
Monitored : Parameter N13, message C8
The variance indicates belt load instability.

Higher values suggest poor discharge behaviour
of material.
0837

Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
21) Max. belt load QMAX = 57 % 26) ZE = 53
Maximum belt load during preselected SPC time Pulses output across pulse output of external
related to nominal belt load. totalizing counter, counted from command Reset
Counter 1
Time : SPC time, Parameter K 05
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin 27) ZO = 1
Initialization : Zero at power ON
Max. display : 255 % Pulses pending.
If value constantly exceeds zero, pulse frequency
22) No load percentage TQ < MIN = 23 % surpasses 10 Hz.
Increase smallest display digit of Counter 1
Total time during which belt load is below Qmin (Parameter B 07).
(F 05), related to SPC time, Parameter K 05
28) AI = 12.54 mA
Evaluation : SPC time continuously floating
Prerequisite : Totalization ON, V > Vmin Analog input input current
Initialization : with Q = Qmin at power ON
29) CS = 10851
Check sum of scale software
30) CS_b = 10851
Check sum recomputed in cycles. If value

CS_b differs from CS, a serious fault is
present. Contact the Schenck Service.
31) BIC-N = 27
Counter reading indicating how often BIC sensor

has been recognized
23) Last taring T (date) 23.51 %
32) BIC-E = 5
Date and total tare related to nominal belt load
Counter reading indicating faulty BIC circuits not
Prerequisites : Correct zero point using taring entered into tare vectors
program or manual/automatic
zero setting function.
Manual changes of correction
parameters are not recorded. 33) ES-Version = 11
Displayed are the 5 last taring or zeroing Current EasyServe Version

operations.
24) AO1 = 4.15 mA
Analog output 1 output current
25) AO2 = 10.00 mA
Analog output 2 output current

0837 (on option card)

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Service Values
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Service Values Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
9. Parameterization
General Information There are two types of parameter:

Selection parameters Let you select from various
Parameters are variable characteristics or data used options, e.g.
to match the INTECONT to the application. WARNING, ALARM.
Display units and format Numeric parameters Enter numeric value, e.g.
Limit values nominal feed rate.
Nominal and calibration data, etc.
Some parameters can be selected in accordance with

the requirements (e.g. display formats), others have to Call Parameter Menu
be taken from Spec Sheets supplied.
During parameter input, all functions are maintained. G Call function distributor.
However, during operation, only parameters with no
influence on measurement, e.g. display filter, should TUf Scroll PROGRAMMING function
be changed. into lower display field and
acknowledge.
Default Parameters: TUf Select ENTER PAR. function.
All parameter are preset with default values. These Bf Enter password 07734.
are proven suggestions and can normally be used as
defined.
The default values can be loaded using sub-function

Load Default Parameters.
Dialog Behaviour
Block: A
Identification
The parameters are organized into function blocks A,

B, ... and, within a block, described by
name Display shows title of first parameter block.

number 1, 2, 3 ..
and
value. N Return to normal displays.
For approx. 2 minutes, parameter
Values differing from default are identified by a * menu can be recalled without
before the block letter. password input.
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 1000.0 kg/h
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Parameterization
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Preselect Parameters Enter Parameters
P Prepare input.
TU Selection parameters:
Value flashes.
Rated Data
Block: B Scroll desired value into lower
display field.
46 Go to the left (4) or to the right (6),
see Hardware Configuration.
1. Block letter B9 Numeric parameters:
Feature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Enter value using keypad.
TU Move through blocks A, B ..., up and f Acknowledge input.

down. Next parameter is displayed.
Block letter flashes. O Delete digits.
f Select block. N Abort input.
Parameter selected last is
displayed.
OFF key 0 is active always; ON key I, only after
completed parameter input.
2. Parameter number
Nominal Feed Rate

B02 10000.0 kg/h
TU Move through parameter numbers

within a block.
Parameter number flashes.
f Move through parameter numbers
independent of block (UP only).
NN Return to block titles.

Return to normal mode.
0837

Parameterization Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Hardware Configuration Load Default Parameter
Lets you load the default settings.

When parameterizing the hardware used, the source Function is protected by password and YES/NO
determines whether unit, channel and level must be prompt.
indicated, or not. The table below will assist you in
selecting the hardware configuration: Attention!
All variable parameters and calibration values are
Source Unit Channel Level reset.
FB
OP
G Call PROGRAMMING function and
DEFAULT PARAMETERS.
v B1 YES =1 f Acknowledge
NO =0 selection.
-
Power Failure
DI I+ DI1-DI7 HI, LO
Parameters remain stored for an unlimited period of
DO I+ DO1-DO8 HI, LO time.
AI I+
As you can see, with Fieldbus [FB", Control Unit

(OP), Speed (v) and Not Assigned (-)] no additional
information is required.
Digital Inputs (DI) and Digital Outputs (DO) require
unit, channel and level to be indicated.
With Analog Input (AI), the unit is firmly set to I+.
Sample:
Parameter B06 START Source determines from

where the scale is started.
Description Source
B06 START Source OP
Alternatives FB, DI, v
On standard, the scale is started from INTECONT

keyboard (OP).
Alternatively, fieldbus, digital input (DI) or speed (v)
can be selected. If DI is the desired source,
additionally indicate channel and level (see Hardware
Configuration table); the unit is firmly set to I+.
4 Keys 4 (go to the left) and 6 (go to

the right), let you shift between
source, channel and level.
6
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Parameters Overview D 05 Tare Correction T 0,00 kg/m

D 06 Belt Circuit Char 1000 000 I/B
This list applies to software: VBW 20600-08 Block E Analog Output
Block A Dialog Behaviour E 01 Elevation AO1 I

E 02 Elevation AO1 4,00 mA
A 01 Language ENGLISH E 03 Limit Value AO1 20,00 mA
A 02 Units SI E 04 Source AO2 Q
A 03 Password 07734 or 7734) E 05 Elevation AO2 4.00 mA
A 04 2.Password 2889 E 06 Limit Value AO2 20.00 mA
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF active
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF active Block F Limit Values
A 07 Batch ON/OFF active
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF active F 01 Value for I-MIN 5,0 %I
A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF active F 02 Event Class I-MIN WARNING 2
A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF active F 03 Value for I-MAX 120,0 %I
A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF active F 04 Event Class I-MAX WARNING 2
F 05 Value for Q-MIN 20,0 %Q
F 06 Event Class Q-MIN WARNING 2
Block B Rated Data F 07 Value for Q-MAX 120,0 %Q
F 08 Event Class Q-MAX WARNING 2
B 01 Feed Rate Unit - t/h F 09 Value for V-MIN 5,0 %V
B 02 Nominal Feed Rate 400,0000 t/h F 10 Event Class V-MIN WARNING 2
B 03 Tacho Source DI I+, DI7 HI F 11 Value for V-MAX 120,0 %V
B 04 vs Charact. Value 50.26 I/m F 12 Event Class V-MAX WARNING 2
B 05 Nominal Speed 1,0000 m/s
B 06 START Source OP
B 07 FMZ1 Unit t Block G Filter Setting
B 08 FMZ1 Pulse Dur. 0 ms
B 09 FMZ2 Unit t G 01 I Display 3,0 s
B 10 FMZ3 Unit t G 02 I Analog Output 3,0 s
B11 DO Pulse Counter G 03 Q Display 3,0 s
B12 Pulse Weighting 0.0 kg G 04 V Display 3,0 s
G 05 L/C Filter 1,0 s
G 06 Afterfl. Time 3,0 s
Block C Calibrating Data
C 01 Belt Circuit No. 1.00 Block H AUTO Zero Set

C 02 Belt Circuit Time 30.0 s
C 03 L/C Charac. Value 2,8500 mV/V H 01 AUTO Zero Active NO
C 04 L/C Rated Cap. 220,000 kg H 02 Limit Value Diff. 0,50 %Q
C 05 Eff. Platf. Length 1,000 m H 03 Mean Limit Value 1,00 %Q
C 06 Lever Ratio 1,0000 H 04 Zero Set Limit 5,00 %Q
C 07 Angle a 0.0 degrees H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX WARNING 1
C 08 Check Weight 50,000 kg H 06 Zero Set Time 4h
H 07 Time Elapsed IGNORE
H 08 Print Result NO
Block D Calibrat. Results H 09 ZDO Active NO
H 10 ZDO Limit 1,00 %Q
D 01 Nominal Belt Load 111,11 kg/m H 11 Zero Set Diff. 5,0 %
D 02 Span Correction 1,0000 H 12 Tare Diff. >MAX WARNING 2
D 03 Total Tare 0,00 kg/m
0837
D 04 Basic Tare N 0,00 kg/m

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block I Batch Mode L 09 Physics RS 485

L 10 Baud Rate 9600
I 01 Batch Dribble FD 100,000 kg L 11 Format Data 8-E-1
I 02 Batch End 0,000 kg L 12 Adresse 16
I 03 Adaption Fact. 1,0 L 13 FLOAT-Format IEEE
I 04 Batch Tolerance + 1,0 % L 14 Address 63
I 05 Batch Tolerance - 1,0 % L 15 Baud Rate 125K
I 06 Out of Tolerance WARNING 1 L 17 S5 Physics RS422
I 07 Belt Empty NO L 22 Hardware VxB020
I 08 Batch > Setp. IGNORE
I 09 Batch Source OP
Block J Printer Setting Block M Feeder Control
J 01 Baud Rate 9600 M 01 Feeder Active NO

J 02 AUTO Print NO M 02 Setting Time 0,0 s
J 03 Print Subtotal Error M 03 Feed Distance 0,00 m
J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 NO M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST NO
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2 NO M 05 Change-over FF/DF YES
J 06 Print Page Length 72 lines
J 07 Batch Setp.Line 6
J 08 Batch Setp.Col. 8 Block N Scale Monitoring
J 09 Batch Act.Line 7
J 10 Batch Act.Col. 8 N 01 CPD Active NO
J 11 FMZ 1 Line 8 N 02 Platf.Dis.Length 0,00 %LB
J 12 FMZ 1 Column 8 N 03 Belt Sensor Active NO
J 13 FMZ 2 Line 9 N 04 Source Sensor DI6
J 14 FMZ 2 Column 8 N 05 BIC Active NO
J 15 Date/Time Line 4 N 06 Sensor Length 8.20cm
J 16 Date/Time Column 8 N 07 Sensor Width 12.00 cm
J 17 Event Line 12 N 08 Sensor Offset 0.00 cm
J 18 Event Column 8 N 09 Belt Drift 3.00 cm
J 19 Set Line to Zero 10 N 10 Belt Drift Event W1 (C04)
J 20 Set Column to Zero 8 N 11 Belt Skew 4.00cm
J 21 Line Number 3 N 12 Belt Skew Event A (C03)
J 22 Column Number 8 N 13 Slip Limit 2.00 %LB
N 14 Slip Event W1 (C08)
Block K Maintenance Int. N 15 DO Belt Drift
N 16 DO Belt Skew
K 01 Maintenance Elec. 3000 hours N 17 DO Slip
K 02 Event Maint. EL. WARNING 1 N 18 Freeze BIC
K 03 Maint. STR-Meter 3000 hours
K 04 Event Maint. Run. WARNING 1
K 05 SPC Time 8 hrs Block O Events
K 06 SPC Filter 1,00 hour
BLOCK L Comm. Fieldbus O 01 Power Failure A (E01)
O 02 Memory Error A (S01)
L 01 Protocol Type NO O 03 Tacho Input A (C02)
L 02 Host timeout 5s O 04 Namur Err. Tacho A (E02)
L 03 Comm.-Error Host ALARM (S 09) O 05 Namur Err Belt W1 (E03)
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std O 06 L/C Input A (C01)
L 05 Byte sequence Low-High O 07 No Release W1 (S02)
L 06 Configuration FIXED O 08 L/C Input > MAX A (H04)
0837 L 07 Address 1 O 09 L/C Input < MIN A (L04)
L 08 Resolution 4096

VBW INTECONT PLUS
O10 Simualtion Active W2 (S07) Block U: Ethernet

O11 Error Ext. Event A (E06)
U 01 IP-Address 1 192
U 02 IP-Address 2 168
Block P Digital Inputs U 03 IP-Address 3 240
U 04 IP-Address 4 1
P 01 Release DI I+ DI 3 HI U 05 Net Mask 1 255
P 02 Stop Batch U 06 Net Mask 2 255
P 03 Ackn. Events DI I+DI1 HI U 07 Net Mask 3 255
P 04 DI Start U 08 Net Mask 4 0
P 05 DI Setting to zero U 09 Gatway 1 192
P 06 DI Ext. Event U 10 Gatway 2 168
U 11 Gatway 3 240
Block Q Digital Outputs U 12 Gatway 4 0
Q 01 DO Alarm DO I+ D03 LO
Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Q 03 DO Feeder ON DO I+ D01 HI BLOCK V: Fixmode Parameter
Q 04 DO I-MIN DO I+ DO4 LO
Q 05 DO I-MAX DO I+ DO2 LO V 01 ID Preset Value 1 320
Q 06 DO Q-MIN V 02 ID Preset Value 2 352
Q 07 DO Q-MAX V 03 ID Preset Value 3 384
Q 08 DO v-MIN V 04 ID Preset Value 4 596
Q 09 v-MAX V 05 ID Preset Value 5 594
Q 10 DO Batch Active V 06 ID Preset Value 6 598
Q 11 DO Full Feed V 07 ID Preset Value 7 0
Q 12 DO Dribble Feed V 08 ID Preset Value 8 0
Q 13 DO Keyboard Mode V 09 ID Read Value 1 752
V 10 ID Read Value 2 784
Block R Comm. EasyServe V 12 ID Read Value 4 1872
R 01 Station Address 1 V 14 ID Read Value 6 1880
R 02 Physics RS 232 V 15 ID Read Value 7 1884
R 03 EasyServe Baudr. 19200 V 16 ID Read Value 8 1876
R 04 Format Data 8-0-1
R 05 Connection serial
R 06 MODBUS Idle Time 4ms
Block S: Secondary display DLZ
S01 DLZ active No

S02 Baud rate 9600
S02 Data format 8 bit NO
S04 Physics RS232
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block A : Dialog Behaviour
A 01 Language Note:
Range: DEUTSCH Default: DEUTSCH If you forget your password, you have to change your
ENGLISH* password with EasyServe or report the shown value of
AMERICAN ENG* the parameter A03 to Schenck Service to find out the
FRANCAIS appropriate password
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
Selection applies to all displays, error messages and
parameters.
A 04 Second password
* identical
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 2889
The password for using a specific system. This

password allows you to protect the basic functions in
A 02 Units the function distributor (see above). It does not allow
access to parameters or adjustment functions. The
Range: SI Default: SI changed password is also shown encoded. The
NON-SI default value 2889 generates the return display
14389.
Convert displays and parameter inputs from SI units Note: If you forget the second password, you can
into American units. enter a new password in the A04 parameter using the
standard password
American Units SI Units Conversion *

lb kg 1 lb = 0.453593 kg
A 05 Feeder ON/OFF
t t 1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb
f m 1 f = 0.3048 m Range: active Default: active
inch cm 1 inch = 2.54 cm
not active
Password
* also applicable to compound units, e.g. kg/hr 2. Password
Confirm
You can use this parameter to control access to the
basic functions of ON/OFF prefeeder.
A 03 Password You have the options below::
Range: 1000 - 9999 Default: 07734 o 7734
active: Access is always allowed.
The password that secures the INTECONT keyboard not active: Access is never allowed. This
access to parameters and adjustment functions function is not visible in the
can now be changed. The changed password is distributor.
shown encoded in the parameter dialog and
EasyServe. The default value 07734 (or 7734) Password: Access is available with the
generates the return display 26574 (this process is standard password (A03).
identical to DISOCONT).
Second
Password: Access is available with the new
0837
second password (A04)..

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Confirm: Access has to be confirmed again

for security reasons. A 09 EasyServe ON/OFF
Range: active Default: active
Note: The prefeeder also has to be activated with
not active
parameter M01.
Password
2. Password
A 06 Keyb. Mode ON/OFF Confirm

not active You can use this parameter to control access to the
Password basic functions of EasyServe activate/deactivate.
2. Password The range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
Confirm

basic functions of keyboard ON/OFF mode. The
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter. A 10 Totalizer1 ON/OFF
not active
Password
A 07 Batch ON/OFF 2. Password
Confirm
not active
Password You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
2. Password 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Confirm parameter.
You can use this parameter to control access to the A 11 Totalizer2 ON/OFF
basic functions of batch preselect/deselect. The
range of values is identical to the A05 parameter.
not active
Password
A 08 >0: Zero ON/OF 2. Password
Confirm
Range: active Default: active You can use this parameter to control deleting counter
not active 2. The range of values is identical to the A05
Password parameter.
2. Password
Confirm

basic function of >0: zero setting. The range of
values is identical to the A05 parameter.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block B : Rated Data
B 01 Feed Rate Unit B 05 Nominal Speed

Range: - - - - - - t/h Default: - - - - - - t/h Range: 0,0100...10,000 m/s Default: 1,0000 m/s
- - - - . - t/h
- - - . - - t/h Limit value reference.
- - . - - - t/h If BIC or CPD (Parameter Block N) are used, value
- - - - - - kg/h should be accurate to some percent.
- - - - . - kg/h If scales operate without speed measurement, B 05
- - -. - - kg/h determines the accuracy.
- -.- - - kg/h
Determine feed rate display format.
B 06 START Source
B 02 Nominal Feed Rate Range: OP Default: OP

FB
Range: 0,0020...99999,9 t/h Default: 400,0000 t/h DI
v
Reference for limit values and service displays
To start/stop totalization, there is no single solution:

OP : from INTECONT keyboard
FB : via fieldbus interface
B 03 Tacho Source DI : using digital input. Default value is DI2. You
Range: DI Default: DI I+ DI7 HI can also use any other free digital input.
Digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if
scale fails after Alarm, remove START signal
and re-apply.
Select - to stop belt speed measurement. v : If you select belt speed v, totalization starts at
Computation uses nominal speed B 05. v>v-min (Parameter F09) and stops at
v<v-min.
B 04 vs Charact. Val.
Range: 10,00...100 000,0 I/m Default:
50,26 I/m
Number of speed transducer pulses per belt meter.

Product B 04 * B 05 must range between 0.5...2500
Hz of speed input.
Special case:B 03 = NO
Do not change characteristic value vs; this
would change the run time of your setting
programs.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note:
If you select v, no batching is possible.
Dialog function Keyboard Mode lets you change over

from selected source to keyboard, and vice versa.
Note
G06 defines the totalizing counters tracking time.

If Parameter P01 Release is set to - -", no release is
required.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
B 07 FMZ 1 Unit B 09 FMZ 2 Unit

Range: ------- t Default: - - - - - - - t same as B08, however, for Counter 2
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
- - - - - - t *10
----- t *100
B 10 FMZ 3 Unit
- - - - - - - kg same as B08, however, for Counter 3
- - - - - . - kg
- - - - . - - kg
- - - . - - - kg
B11 DO Pulse Counter

Lets you determine the display format for Counter 1,
all batch values and pulse weighting. Range: Default:
If no external counter is present, set Parameter B08 to DO
0. The impulse output of totalizing counter 1 can now
also be output via a digital output. The impulse output
of INTECONT on plug X6, pins 8-11 is still used with
default value and the configured output is used
B 08 FMZ 1 Pulse Dur. instead with the alternative DO.
The impulse duration is still determined with the B08
Range: 0....1000 ms Default: 0 ms parameter. Readings less than 10 ms block the output
total and readings up to 1 second are set to 1 second
Lets you determine output pulse length of external
when a digital output is used.
totalizing counter. Pulse weighting corresponds to the
smallest display digit of Counter 1
(Parameter B07).
B08 < 10 ms : Pulse output is disabled. B 12 Pulse Weighting

All pulses not yet output still are
deleted. Range: 0.00 100000.00 kg Default: 0.00 kg
At nominal feed rate the output frequency is: The weighting of an output impulse on the impulse
output of totalizing counter 1 can now be set to be
freely selected. The weighting of an impulse
corresponds to the smallest possible digit of counter 1
with default value 0.00 (refer to parameter B07).
PNENN = nominal feed rate in kg/h or t/h
Zmin = smallest display digit of Counter 1

(B 07) in kg or t
Select Zmin (B07) so that f does not exceed

10 Hz.
In addition, pulse duration B08 must be smaller than
1/f.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block C : Calibrating Data
C 01 Belt Circuit No. C 06 Lever Ratio

Range: 1...100 Default: 1,00 Range: 0,0100...2,0000 Default: 1,0000
lets you determine the run time of the Zero Setting, Lever ratio of force transducing weighed idler of
Taring and Weight Check setting programs. platform and load cell.
Does not apply to AUTO Zero Set.
Q = platform load
C 02 Belt Circuit Time F = load on load cell
Range: 1,0...9999,0 s Default: 30,0 s With weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance, lever ratio is always 1.
lets you determine the measuring time for the
Imp/Belt Circuit calibration program. C 07 Angle a
Normally, the time is selected for one belt circuit.
Range: 0,0...60,00 degrees Default: 0,00 degrees
Angle of longitudinal scale axis if load cell is mounted

C 03 L/C Charac. Value
vertical to belt.
Range: 0,01...9,9999 mV/V Default: 2,8500 mV/V
indicates the load cell characteristic value

(transmission factor). C 08 Check Weight
Range: 0,001...22000,0 kg Default: 50,000 kg
Weight of material on load cell simulated by check

C 04 L/C Rated Cap. weight
Range: 0,5000... Default: 220,000 kg

220 000.0 kg
indicates the total of load cell rated capacities.

Pivots are considered as load cells.
C 05 Eff. Platf. Length

Range: 0,1000...50,000 m Default: 1,000 m
indicates effective length of weighing platform.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block D : Calibrat. Results
D 01 Nominal Belt Load D 05 Tare Correction T

No input possible Default: 111,11 kg/m No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. +- 1000 kg/m
computed from nominal data B 02 and B 05
used as reference value for limit values and zero Result of manual or automatic zero setting program
setting program.
After every taring operation, D 05 is set to 0.
D 02 Span Correction
Range: 0,5000...2,0000 Default: 1,0000
proportionally influences measurement of belt load q.
q(corrected) = q(measured) D 02
D 06 Belt Circuit Char
used to correct measuring system through check with
material. No input required Default: 1000000 I/U
max. 9E6
D 03 Total Tare
No input possible Default: 0,00 kg/m Result of basic calibration program Imp/Belt Circuit.
Determines cycle of setting programs.
Total tare = basic tare + tare correction
Divided by Parameter B 04 (vs Charact.Val.), belt
length in m results.
D 04 Basic Tare N
No input required Default: 0,00 kg/m
max. 10000 kg/m
Result of taring program.
Attention!
When entering Parameters D 02 ... D 05 in manual, start
with D 02.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block E : Analog Output
E 01 Source AO 1 E 04 Source AO 2
Range: I (feed rate) Default: I Range: I (feed rate) Default: Q
Q (belt load) Q (belt load)
V (belt speed) V (belt speed)
One of these values can be output in analog fashion. One of these values can be output in analog fashion.
Filters: Parameters G 02, G 04, G 05 Filters: Parametesr G 02, G 04, G 05
E 02 Elevation AO 1 E 05 Elevation AO 2
Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA Range: 0,00...20,00 mA Default: 4,00 mA
Output current with E 01 set to 0. Output current with E04 set to 0.

The smallest value is limited to E 02, also in stop state The smallest value is limited to E 05, also in stop state
of scale. of scale.
E 03 Limit Value AO 1 E 06 Limit Value AO 2

Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA Range: 0,00...1000,00 mA Default: 20,00 mA
Output current with E 01 set to 100 % (nominal value). Output current with E04 set to 100 % (nominal value).
Range of output current is limited to 0...20 mA. Current output range is limited to 0...20 mA by the
hardware.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block F : Limit Values
If measurement values exceed their MIN/MAX limits, a F 06 Event Class Q-MIN L2

corresponding event message is output (L1... L3, H1...
H3). Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
Monitoring starts 10 s after start up. IGNORE
ALARM
F 01 Value for I-MIN
F 07 Value for Q-MAX
Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 5,0 % I
Range: -10...200,0 % Q Default: 120,0 % Q
Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01
F 02 Event Class I-MIN L1 F 08 Event Class Q-MAX H2

Range: WARNING 2 Default: Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2 WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE IGNORE
ALARM ALARM
F 03 Value for I-MAX F 09 Value for V-MIN

Range: -10...200,0 % I Default: 120,0 % I Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 5.0 % V
Reference: Nominal Feed Rate B 02. Reference: Nominal Speed B 05
F 04 Event Class I-MAX H1

Range: WARNING 2 Default: F 10 Event Class V-MIN L3
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE Range: WARNING 2 Default:
ALARM WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM
F 05 Value for Q-MIN
Range: -10...200.0 % Q Default: 20,0 % Q F 11 Value for V-MAX
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Range: -10...200,0 % V Default: 120,0 % V
Reference: Nominal Speed B 05
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
F 12 Event Class V-MAX H3

Range: WARNING 2 Default:
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
IGNORE
ALARM
Block G : Filters
I = feed rate V = belt speed Q = belt load
G 01 I Display G 04 V Display
Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s
Feed rate display Belt speed display
G 02 I Analog output G 05 L/C Filter

Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 1.0...600.0s Default: 1.0 s
Feed rate analog output Holds for all functions and displays depending on belt
load.
G 03 Q Display G 06 Afterfl. Time

Range: 0.0...600.0 s Default: 3.0 s Range: 0.0...2000.0 s Default: 3.0 s
Belt load display Determines the time totalization goes on after turn-off
of feeder.
All filters are of the 1st order type

(exponential), i.e. after abrupt
change of signal, approx. 2/3
of the limit value are reached
after the set time.
Longer times stabilize display

but reduce update rate. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block H : AUTO Zero Set
H 01 AUTO Zero Active H 04 Zero Set Limit

Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %Q Default: 5.00 %Q
YES For more information,
see Calibration item. Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01
Reference: Nominal Belt Load D 01 Maximum admissible totals value of all manual and
automatic zero setting operations. Correction is not
Lets you select the automatic zero setting function acquired.
used to correct zero point on empty conveyor belt
after every belt circuit.
Prerequisites: v > vmin

No setting program
H 05 Tare Corr. > MAX C5
No parameter input Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
ALARM
H 02 Limit Value Diff. Automatic zero setting has exceeded Zero Set Limit
H04. Value is not acquired.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 0.50 %Q
First prerequisite for automatic zero setting.

Defines the uniformity of mean belt load between two
consecutive belt circuits. H 06 Zero Set Time
Range: 1...999 h Default: 4 h
Lets you know that no manual or automatic zero

H 03 Mean Limit Value setting nor taring has been performed during the set
time.
Range: 0.00...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q
Message C 7: Set Time To Zero
Second prerequisite for automatic zero setting.

Defines the maximum admissible belt load mean value
over 2 consecutive belt circuits.
H 07 Time Elapsed C7
Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING 1 Zeit : H 06
WARNING 2
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
H 08 Print Result H 11 Zero Set Diff.

Range: NO Range: 0.00...100.00 %F Default: 5.0 %F
YES Default: NO
Print zero setting result after every belt circuit. Indicates the difference between two consecutive
manual or automatic zero setting operations.
Excess is reported by message C9.
Result autom. zero setting
Total Tare [kg/m] 50,23 Tare [kg/m] 1,56
(D 03) (D 05)
H 12 Tare Diff. > MAX C9

Range: WARNING 2
H 09 ZDO Active WARNING1
IGNORE
Range: NO ALARM Default: WARNING 2
YES Default: NO
Activates Zero Drop Out function (see H 10).

Manual or automatic zero setting has exceeded
difference H 11.
Correction is acquired save in case of ALARM
messages.
H 10 ZDO Limit
Range: 0.0...10.00 %Q Default: 1.00 %Q
If ZDO function is active and belt load exceeds the

defined limit, feed rate measurement and totalization
are suppressed.
No symbol appears on display.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block I : Batch Mode
The sequence of the available batch modes is I 03 Adaption Fact.

detailed in Chapter Details.
Make sure start source B 06 is not set to v. Range: 0.0...1.0 Default: 1.0
Pre-cut-off amount I 02 is adapted automatically, so

that the system better suits the situation upon next
I 01 Batch Dribble FD batch.
Value is corrected by the batch error * I 03.
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 100 000 kg
I 03 = 0: no adaption
If batch setpoint is reached Batch Setpoint I 01-I 02", I 03 = 1: full adaption
full feed output Q11 is reset; dribble feed output Q12
activated. Intermediate values cause a filtered adaption,
These signals can be used, e.g. to reduce belt speed preferred in the case of plants with non-exact
or prefeeder output. repeatability.
I 02 Batch End
Range: 0.00...220 000 kg Default: 0.000 kg
I 04 Batch Tolerance +
If batch setpoint minus pre-cut-off amount I 02 is Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %
reached, batch is complete.
Drive, or prefeeder, stops. Reference: Batch Setpoint
Defines the value admissible for excess of batch

setpoint.
I 05 Batch Tolerance -
Range: 0.0...100.0 % Default: 1.0 %
Reference: Batch Setpoint
Defines the value for shortfall of batch setpoint.
I 02 makes allowance for possible afterflow. I 06 Out of Tolerance B1

Range: WARNING 1
WARNING2
ALARM
IGNORE Default: WARNING 1
Event message B1 reports excess of limit values I 04

or I 05.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
I 07 Belt Empty
Range: NO Default: NO
YES
NO : Batching without belt clearance.

Stop of conveyor belt aborts batch.
YES : Batching with belt clearance.

Stop of prefeeder aborts batch.
(Prefeeder Active M 01 = YES)
I 08 Batch > Setp. B4

Range: IGNORE Default: IGNORE
WARNING1
WARNING 2
ALARM
Batch actual value exceeds setpoint by tolerance I 04.
Message B4 is output.
After acknowledgement (also ALARM messages),
monitoring of current batch cuts off.
I 09 Batch Source
Range: OP
FB Default: OP
OP : Batch setpoint, batch number and make-up

setpoint are preset from the INTECONT
keyboard.
FB : Above values are set via fieldbus interface.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block J : Printer Setting
J 01 Baud rate
Range: 2400 Default: 9600
4800
9600 30.09.97 11:45:21L2 W1 Load < MIN
19200 0.09.97 11:59:01L2 W1 Load < MIN
38400
Event report
Baud rate for transmission to printer.
J 03 Print Subtotal
Print Batch
Range: Error Default: Error
Batch number 12 YES
30.06.03 11:45:10 NO
Batch Setpoint 1000 kg
Batch Actual Val. 998 kg
Totalizer 1 1200 kg Error : Each event is printed automatically as soon
Totalizer 2 90000 kg as available.
Zero Set before 75 min
YES : See above, however, including totalizing
Events counter (FMZ) sub-totals.
NO : No printout
Printing is effected in batching and normal modes.
Save parameter J 03, all parameters are valid for batch

and counter reports.
J 02 Auto Print
Special case:
Range: NO Default: NO If a value is set to line 0 and column 0, it does not
YES appear in report.
NO : Batch report can be printed only using the

control menu.
YES : Batch report is printed automatically when

batch is complete.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
J 04 Reset Print FMZ 1 J 09 Batch Act. Line

Range: NO Default: NO Range: 0...117 Default: 7
YES
YES : Reset counter 1 upon start of next batch
provided that batch report has been
printed. 1)
J 10 Batch Act. Col.
NO : Counter 1 can be reset only using the Range: 0...127 Default: 8
control function.
1) also possible without printer (J 02, J 04= YES).
J 11 FMZ 1 Line
J 05 Reset Print FMZ 2
Range: 0...117 Default: : 8
YES
See J 04, however, for counter 2. J 12 FMZ 1 Column

Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 06 Print Page Length J 13 FMZ 2 Line

Range: 9...127 lines Default: 72 lines Range: 0...117 Default: 9
The page must be minimum 4 times longer than the

number of data to be printed.
The line spacing is always 1/6 inch.
J 14 FMZ 2 Column
Change of parameter automatically initializes printer. Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 15 Date/Time Line
J 07 Batch Setp. Line
J 16 Date/Time Col.
J 08 Batch Setp. Col.
J 17 Event Line
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
J 18 Event Column J 21 Line Number Nb

Range: 0...127 Default: 8 Range: 0...117 Default: 3
J 22 Column Number Nb
J 19 Set Line to Zero ED:>0 Range: 0...127 Default: 8
J 20 Set Column to Zero ED:>0

Block K : Maintenance Int.
K 01 Maintenance Elec. K 04 Event Maint. Run. S3

Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
Message: S4 (K 02) WARNING 2
IGNORE
Alerts you on maintenance work to be effected after a
certain voltage ON-time.
The total of conveyor belt run times exceeds the time

defined by K 03.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S3 is
K 02 Event Maint. EL S4
output.
WARNING 2 WARNING 1
IGNORE
K 05 SPC Time
The total of voltage ON-times exceeds the time Range: 1...24 h Default: 8 h
defined by K 01.
When the set interval has elapsed, message S4 is Acquisition interval for service values, e.g. empty belt.
output. SPC = Statistical Process Control
K 03 Maint. STR-Meter
Range: 0...10000 h Default: 3000 h
Message: S3 (K 04)
Alerts you of maintenance work to be effected after a

certain conveyor belt run time.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
K 06 SPC Filter
Range: 0.00...24.00 h Default: 1.00 h
Exponential first-order filter for service values, e.g.

mean value and feed rate variance.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block L : Communication Fieldbus
L 01 Protocol Type
MODBUS COMP.
S5-BCC COMP.
MODBUS
PROFIBUS DP
DEVICENET
MODBUS/TCP
Every protocol requires an optional interface card to
be present.
COMP identifies the compatible protocols.
Protocol Type MODBUS/ S5-BCC Comp. MODBUS PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet MODBUS TCP ETHERNET IP
MB-COMP
.
VEG VSS VSS VSS VPB 020/8020 VCB VET 020 VET 022
020/8020
BLOCK L Default MODBUS/ PROFIBUS DEVICENET MODBUS/ ETHERNET/ S5-BCC Comp.

MB-COMP. DP TCP IP
L 01 Protocol Type NO x x x x x x
L 02 TIMEOUT Host 5s x x x x x x
L 03 Comm. Error Host IG (S 09) x x x x x x
L 04 Word sequence I:std/L:std x x x x
L 05 Byte sequence High - Low x x
L 06 Configuration FIXED x x x
L 07 Address 1 x
L 08 Resolution 4096 x
L 09 Physical attributes RS 485 x
L 10 Baud Rate 9600 x x
L 11 Data format 8-E-1 x x
L 12 Adresse 16 x
L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT IEEE x x
L 14 Address 63 x
L 15 Baud Rate 125K x
L 16 S5-Physical attributes RS422 x
L 22 Hardware VxB020 x x
Tabelle der aktiven Parameter abhngig vom Protokolltyp.
L 02 TIMEOUT Host L 03 Comm. Error Host S9

Range: 1...600s Default: 10s Range: IGNORE Default: ALARM
W1 (Warnung 1)
If timeout value exceeds zero, a message from host W2 (Warnung 2)
system is expected to arrive during set time. A (Alarm)
If no message is received during the time set by
0837
Parameter L02, event message S9 Data Link Host is
output.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
L 04 Word sequence L 09 Physical attributes

Range: I: std/L:std Default: I: std/L: std Range: RS485
I: swp/L: std RS422
I: std/L: swp RS232
I: swp/L: swp Default: RS 485
The parameter determines the word sequence within
a double word. Modbus baud rate.
I stands for IEEE-754 values (floating point values)
L stands for 4-Byte integer values
std does not reverse the word order, swp swaps
them. L 10 Baud Rate
4800
L 05 Byte sequence 9600
19200
Range: LOW-High Default: LOW-High 38400
High-LOW Modbus-Baudrate.
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
L 06 Configuration
L 11 Data format
Range: FIXED Default: FIXED
NO-PARA-ID Range: 8-E-1 Default: 8-E-1
PARA-ID 8-0-1
PARA-6ID* 8-N-2
Determines the structure and the size of the process 8-N-1
image. Modbus data format (data bits-parity-stop bits).
Only with fieldbus card VxB8020.
L 07 Address L 12 Address
Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 0...126 Default: 16
Slave address for Modbus protocol. Profibus DP Slaveadresse
L 08 Resolution
Range: 1...32767 Default: 4096 L 13 FLOAT-FORMAT
Resolving the data in the Modbus protocol nominal Range: SIEMENS-KG Default: IEEE
value (integer format). IEEE
Determines the display of the floating point value for
the Profibus DP protocol.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
L 14 Address
DeviceNet slave address.
L 15 Baud rate
Range: 125k Default: 125k
250k
500k
DeviceNet baud rates.
L 17 S5 Physical attributes
Range: RS422 Default RS 422
RS232
Setting the physical interface attributes for the S5
BCC protocol.
L 22 Hardware
Range: VxB020 Default: VxB020
VxB8020
Select fieldbus hardware for Profibus DP and
DeviceNet.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block M : Feeder Control
M 01 Feeder Active M 04 Motor STOP aft. ST

Range: YES Range: NO
NO Default: NO YES Default: NO
YES : The START/STOP Prefeeder dialog function NO : After cut-off or batch complete command,
is active. In turned-on state, the prefeeder is belt continues running for the time specified
controlled through the scale-specific by Parameter M02.
sequence.
YES : Conveyor belt immediately stops.
NO : Dialog function is faded out.
Control output is always set to STOP Parameter is active only if Batch Mode has been
Prefeeder. preselected.
Normally, belt immediately stops.
M 02 Setting Time
M 05 Change-over FF/DF
Range: 0.0...1000.0 s Default: 0.0 s
Range: YES
Setting time of material prefeeder NO Default: YES
I 07 = YES Belt clearance.

M 05 ineffective.
M 03 Feed Distance I 07 = NO No belt clearance.
Range: 0.00...10000.00 m Default: 0.00 m Parameter M 05 lets you select Full
Feed / Dribble Feed control via
Material path from prefeeder to end of weighbridge. conveyor belt (NO), or prefeeder
Input is required only if Full Feed / Dribble Feed (YES).
control via prefeeder is desired.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block N : Scale Monitoring
N 01 CPD Active N 04 Source Sensor

Range: NO Range:
YES Default: NO DI Default: DI (DI6)
Starts speed-controlled delay element used to shift Digital input for belt sensor. Can be checked using the
belt load measurement to the point of material relevant service value.
discharge. Only DI6 can be used. If you select alternative -, BIC
and belt monitoring functions cannot be used.
Prerequisites: Speed meter must be present and
active. No belt circuit sensor is
required.
N 05 BIC Active
N 02 Platf.Dis.Length
Range: 0.00...50.00 %LB Default: 0.00 %LB YES
Input required only with CPD active

Lets you start adaptive belt influence compensation
Length from mid platform to material discharge point BIC.
in % of total belt length LB.
The resolution is approx. 200. To initialize BIC:
The dynamical tare portion is cleared upon power-up

or after changes to a parameter of the following list:
N 03 Belt Sensor Active Parameter N 05 BIC Active
Parameter B 04 vs Charact. Val.
YES Parameter D 06 Belt Circuit Char
Brief instructions:
Belt sensor and sensor area on conveyor belt are
designed to acquire belt slip and belt drift, and 1. N03 = YES, enter N 06... N 08.
synchronize the adaptive belt influence compensation
BIC. 2. Start setting program LB: IMP/Belt.
3. Activate BIC (N05 = YES).
4. Tare.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Action:
N 06 Sensor Length
1. Clean head and tail pulleys.
Range: 0.01....400.00 cm Default: 8.20 cm
2. Align belt.
Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel.
See also Service value Imp.S..
Monitoring system can fail, too. So watch service
values of belt circuit sensor and remove fault, if any.
N 07 Sensor Width N 11 Belt Skew

Range: 0.01...400.00 cm Default: 4.00 cm
Limit value for admissible belt skew. If exceeded,
Width of sensor area
event message C3 Belt Skew is output and digital
output N16 DO Belt Skew is set.
N 08 Sensor Offset
Range: -400.00....400.00 cmDefault: 0.00 cm N 12 Belt Skew Event C3
Range: WARNING 1 Default: Alarm (C03)
The offset lets you correct the zero point of the belt
WARNING 2
run monitoring result.
Ignore
However, the maximum display range is limited.
Alarm
Therefore bigger corrections should be effected by
sensor shifting (see Commissioning chapter).
New display = old display - offset Conveyor belt is too far off-centre. Feeder is no longer
operable.
Action: See Belt Drift event.
N 09 Belt Drift
N 13 Slip Limit
Limit value for admissible belt drift. If exceeded, event
message C4 Belt Drift is output and digital output Range: 0.00...10.00 %LB Default: 2.00 %LB
N15 DO Slip Event is set.
Admissible variance of belt length in % of total belt
length.
N 10 Belt Drift Event C4
Limit value exceeded, event message C8 Slip Error
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1 is output and digital output N17 DO Slip is set.
WARNING 2 (C04)
Ignore
Alarm
Cause of event: Belt leaves specified tolerance

range.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
N 14 Slip Event C8
Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 2 (C08)
IGNORE
ALARM
Admissible limit value (N13) is exceeded.
N 15 Do Belt Drift
Range: DO Default: __
__
Digital output used to report belt drift.
N 16 DO Belt Skew
__
Digital output used to indicate belt skew event.
N17 DO Slip
__
Digital output used to indicate belt slip event.
M 18 Freeze BIC
Range: DI Default:
__
If digital input is set, current BIC values are frozen.

This helps to protect acquired values from falsification
upon heavily varying belt loads.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block O: Events
O 01 Power Failure E1 O 05 Namur Err Belt E3

Range: ALARM Default: ALARM Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
WARNING 1 ALARM
WARNING 2 IGNORE
IGNORE
Short-circuit or breakage of belt circuit sensor cable

(BIC).
O 02 Memory Error S1
Prerequisite: N 03 = YES
ALARM (S01) No changes possible.
Feeder is no longer operable.
O 06 L/C Input C1
Range: ALARM Default: ALARM
O 03 Tacho Input C2 WARNING 1
WARNING 2
WARNING 1
WARNING 2
1. Load cell cable not (or improperly) connected.
Input frequency exceeds 2700 Hz. 2. Analog-to-digital converter of measuring amplifier

Monitoring starts 10 s after power-up. is in saturation (see Service Value wz_roh).
Prerequisite: B 03 = YES 3. Supply voltage has fallen below 19V.
Fault must be available for min. 3 s.
O 04 Namur Err. Tacho E2

Range: ALARM Default: ALARM O 07 No Release S2
WARNING 1
WARNING 2 Range: WARNING 1 Default: WARNING 1
IGNORE WARNING 2
IGNORE
RELEASE input signal pending.

Cable breakage or short-circuit.
Special case:
Prerequisite: B 03 = YES IGNORE always releases feeder.
Namur errors reset internal speed value to 0.

Frequency display (service value) is still active.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
O 08 L/C Input > MAX H4

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
Load on load cell exceeds 110 % of the total of load

cell rated capacities (C 04).
Full scale: approx. 115 % with CSD load cells.
O 09 L/C Input < MIN L4

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
Load on load cells is smaller than 3 % of the total of

load cell rated capacities.
O 10 Simulation Active S7
WARNING 2 WARNING 2
ALARM
IGNORE
Simulation mode started
O 11 Error Ext. Event E6

WARNING 1
WARNING 2
IGNORE
The event E6 is set when the external digital input
(parameter P06) is set.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block P: Digital Inputs
P 01 Release P 05 DI Setting to zero

Range: DI Default: DI (DI1) Range: DI Default:
__
Determine digital input for feeder release. The function setting to zero can also be started via the
digital input. The program is started by a positive flank
Setting - means that no release is required. of the contact. The result is automatically accepted if it
is within the admissible zero setting limit (5% of the
Default is DI1, however, any other free digital input nominal belt load). An ackowledgement of the result is
can be used as well. not necessary. The calibration program can only be
aborted in its active phase.
P 02 DI Stop Batch
Range: DI Default: DI (DI3) P06 DI Ext. Event

Range: Default:
DI
Digital input signal used to abort a running batch.
Digital input for external fault signals
P 03 Ackn. Events
Range: DI Default: DI (DI1)

Digital input used to acknowledge event messages.

Level acts statically and should not be permanently
available (permanent acknowledgement).
P 04 DI Start
Range: DI Default:
__
If OP has been selected for start source, digital input

DI Start can be configured and used to start feeder
using a start pulse (key). Feeder is stopped by a pulse
output across digital input Release.
This configuration is possible parallel to the 0837
START/STOP keys on INTECONT keyboard.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block Q: Digital Outputs
Q 01 DO Alarm Q 05 DO I-MAX
Range: DO Default: DO I+DO3 LO Range: DO Default: DO (DO2)

Digital output used to report general alarm. Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
feed rate (F03) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F04).
Q 02 DO Prefeeder ON
Range: DO Default: DO (DO4) Q 06 DO Q-MIN

Range: DO Default:
Digital output used to START/STOP prefeeder.
Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum

belt load (F05) is exceeded down.
Q 03 DO Feeder ON Contact output is independent of event class (F06).
Range: DO Default: DO (DO5)

Q 07 DO Q-MAX
Digital output signal used to indicate START/STOP
state of scale. Range: DO Default:

This very output can also be used to START/STOP
drive.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt load (F07) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of event class (F08).
Q 04 DO I-MIN
Q 08 DO v-MIN
Range: DO Default: Do (DO1)
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum

feed rate (F01) is exceeded down. Contact output is Digital output signal used to indicate that minimum
independent of event class (F02). belt speed (F09) is exceeded down.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F10).
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Q 09 DO v-MAX Q13 DO Keyboard Mode

Range: DO Default: Bereich: Ur-Wert:
DO
Digital output signal to report activated keyboard
mode.
Digital output signal used to indicate that maximum
belt speed (F11) is exceeded up.
Contact output is independent of set event class
(F12).
Q 10 DO Batch Active
Range: DO Default:

Digital output signal reporting that a batch is active.

Signal becomes active upon start of batch and is
deactivated when batch is complete. Signal remains
available after abort of batch.
Q 11 DO Full Feed

Full feed signal is available from start of batch until

batch amount Value for I-MIN (F01)- Batch Dribble
FD (I02) is reached. Batching continues in dribble
feed.
Q 12 DO Dribble Feed

Dribble feed signal is output after the full feed phase

(see Q11).
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block R: Comm. EasyServe
R 01 Station Address R 04 Format Data

Range: 1...254 Default: 1 Range: 8-0-1 Default: 8-0-1
8-E-1
Station address and baud rate of feeder and 8-N-1
EasyServe must be identical.
The relevant setting (including communication
interface) can be searched using EasyServe (menu: EasyServe always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Tools/Options/Communication).
The station address is specially designed for plants For example:
using a service bus. If the latter is not available,
select 1. 8-0-1 means:
Connection to PC can also be made using a 9-pole 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
SUB-D connector on X4 (RS 232 only) or a Phoenix (N = No parity, E = Even Parity)
connector on X5 (RS232, RS422 or RS485).
See also Wiring Diagram in chapter DETAILS.
R 05 Connection
R 02 Physics Range: Serial Default: Serial
SERIAL+TCP
Range: RS 232 Default: RS 232
RS 422
RS 485 If MODBUS/TCP (Ethernet) has been selected for
fieldbus, communication between feeder and
EasyServe can also take place via Ethernet.
Determines the physics of the data transmission To do so, set Connection parameter to SERIAL-TCP.
protocol.
R 06 MODBUS Idle Time

R 03 EasyServe Baudr.
Range: 2...20ms Default: 4 ms
19200 For Modbus driver, single character timeout (idle time)
38400 for end recognition can be adjusted using this
parameter (see BVH2220).
Baud rate
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block S: Secondary display DLZ
S01 DLZ active Note: the BVH2015 Manual on Secondary/Large-Scale

Displays
Range: YES Default: NO
NO
A large-scale display such as DLZ055 or DLZ110 can
be connected at the serial interface on the VEA600V
option card (plug X10). Procedure DDP8861 is used. S02 Baud rate
Selecting DLZ active suppresses all printing outputs
2400
and the secondary display is triggered instead. The
4800
value shown on the lowest line of INTECONT Plus is
9600
always outputted.
19200
38400
Display on Character on
the secondary meaning
INTECONT Plus display
I I feed rate [kg/h] or [ t\h]
Ir i
relative feed rate [%] rated feed S03 Data format
rate
Q Q belt load [kg\m] Range: 7 Bit, Even Parity Default: 8Bit NO
relative belt load [%] rated belt
Qr q
load
8 Bit, No Parity
v v belt speed [m/s]
Z1 1 counter 1 [kg] or [t]
Z2 2 counter 2 [kg] or [t]
Z3 3 counter 3 [kg] or [t] S04 Physics
ZB B batching setpoint [kg] or [t]
Zd R batching residual value [kg] or [t] Range: RS232 Default:: RS232
Nb N consecutive batching number RS485
ZI F actual batching value [kg] or [t] RS422
Zbn b reloading setpoint [kg] or [t]
residual batching value of the
Zdn r
quantity reloaded [kg] or [t]
The DLZ055/110 secondary display can only show the

dimensions kg and t.
If the letter field of the secondary display is illuminated

as a full-surface block, this indicates that the value
shown is invalid. Either it is not possible to show the
desired format or INTECONT is in service operation.
The VLZ20100/VLZ20045 secondary displays can also

be connected, although they do not have any display for
identification and the validity of the outputted
measurement.
The usage of other secondary displays that understand

the DDP8861 protocol has to be examined in specific
cases.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Block U: Ethernet
U 01 IP Address1 U 07 Net mask 3

Range: 0-255 Default: 192 Range: 0-255 Default: 255
Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks
U 02 IP Address 2 U 08 Net mask 4

Manual IP address assignment Delegating the subnetwork masks
U 03 IP Address 3 U 09 Gatway 1
Manual IP address assignment Festlegung der Standard-Gateway-Adresse.
U 04 IP Address 4 U 10 Gatway 2
Manual IP address assignment Delegating the standard gateway address
U 05 Net mask1 U 11 Gatway 3

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address
U 06 Net mask2 U 12 Gatway 4

Delegating the subnetwork masks Delegating the standard gateway address
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Block V: Fixmode Parameters
As of version VBW20600-08, the options FIXED-1 and V 07 ID preset value 7

FIXED-2 in parameter L06, Configuration, are no
longer available and have been replaced by Range: 0...4086 Default: 0
FIXED.The values carried over with the setting FIXED
are determined by the following parameters. The
settings of the original values correspond to the
previous FIXED mode 1.A list of all available
V 08 ID preset value 8
identifiers and FIXED mode examples can be found in
the manual BV-H2220. Range: 0...4086 Default: 0
V 01 ID preset value 1
Range: Fest eingestellt Default: 320
V 09 ID read value 1
Command 4+5 Range: 0...4086 Default: 752
V 02 ID preset value 2 Status 2+3

V 03 ID preset value 3 Status 4+5

V 04 ID preset value 4 Highest priority event

Rreload setpoint [kg] Range: 0...4086 Default: 1872
V 05 ID preset value 5 Actual flow rate [kg/hr]
Batch setpoint [kg] V 13 ID read value 5

V 06 ID preset value 6 Totalizing counter 1 [kg]

0837
Batch number

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Belt load
Belt speed
Totalizing counter 2 [kg]
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
10 Event Messages
System Messages S S9 : Data Link Host

Serial communication interrupted for longer
S1 : Memory Error than timeout.
Action : Check cable connections.
Parameter : L 03
Program and parameter memories are
checked in cycles. If an error is found, cal is
inoperable in most cases.
Action : Contact the SCHENCK
Service.
Parameter: O02 Electrics E
S2 : No Release E1 : Power Failure
External RELEASE signal pending. Power failed or cut off.

Scale cannot start. Feed rate possibly not recorded during this
Parameter : O 07 time.
Action : Acknowledge message.
Parameter : O 01
S3 : Maint. STR Meter
Total ON-time of conveyor belt and E2 : Namur Err Tacho

measurement is exceeded.
Perform requisite service work, if necessary. Short circuit or breakage in speed transducer
Acknowledgement of message does not cable. Scale no longer operable.
influence time intervals. Action : Check speed transducer cable.
Parameters : K 03, K 04 Deselect speed measurement
for a short time using
Parameter B 03 .
S4 : Maintenance Int. Elec Parameter : O 04
The INTECONT power supply has been

switched on for a preset period of time. E3 : Namur Err Belt
Perform requisite service work, if necessary.
Acknowledgement of message does not Short circuit or breakage in belt circuit sensor
influence time intervals. cable.
Parameters : K 01, K 02 Action : Check sensor cable.
Parameter : O 05
S7 : Simulation Active
Operating in Simulation mode, scale is not E6 : Error Ext. Event

prepared for normal operation.
The Simulation mode lets you test all scale There is an external fault signal.
functions without material at the time of Actions: Rectify fault.
commissioning. Parameter: P06 nd O11
Action : Deselect Simulation function.
Parameter : N1
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Calibration C C7 : Set Time To Zero
C1 : L/C Input During preset time, no taring nor manual or

automatic zero setting has taken place.
Load cell cable broken, not or improperly Action : Tare or set to zero,
connected. Supply voltage too low. acknowledge message.
Action : Check cabling. Parameters : H 06, H 07
If OK, check load cell amplifier.
Parameter : O 06
C8 : Slip Error
C2 : Tacho Input
Conveyor belt length inadmissibly changed.
Speed transducer output frequency exceeds Error is acquired only using additional belt
3000 Hz, most probably due to subsequent circuit sensor.
change of belt speed (e.g. gearbox). Action : Check belt tension; if
Action : Check speed transducer for necessary, correct.
proper dimensioning. Check sensor for proper
If necessary, measure pulse measuring distance.
frequency using oscillograph. Parameters : N13, N14
Parameter : O 03
C9 : Tare Diff > MAX

C3 : Belt Skew
Automatic or manual zero setting has detected
Conveyor belt runs too far off centre. Scale is excessive zero point deviation.
no longer operable. Correction takes place only if no Alarm is
Action: See C4 available.
Parameters: N11, N12 Action : Acknowledge message, clean
scale; if need be, retare.
Parameters : H 01, H 11, H 12
C4 : Belt Drift
Belt has left defined tolerance zone.

Action: 1) Clean head and tail pulleys.
2) Align belt.
Parameters: N09, N10
C5 : Tare Corr. > MAX
Automatic zero setting has exceeded specified

limit. No correction takes place.
Action : Clean scale; if need be, retare.
Parameter : H 01, H 04, H 05
0837

Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Maximum H Minimum L
H1 : I > MAX L1 : I < MIN
Current feed rate exceeds set limit value. Current feed rate has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value. Error in measurement possibly out of
message H4 is available or tolerance.
system-specific limits have to Action : System specific unless L4 is
be observed. additionally available
Parameters : F 03, F 04 Parameters : F 01, F 02
H2 : Load > MAX L2 : Load < MIN
Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Current belt load has fallen below set limit
Action : Normally none, unless value.
message H4 is available or Action : See L1
system-specific limits have to Parameters : F 05, F 06
be observed.
Parameters : F 07, F 08
L3 : V < MIN
H3 : v > MAX Current belt speed has fallen below set limit
value.
Current belt load exceeds set limit value. Action : Check to see if belt is running.
Action : System specific unless C2 is Parameters : F 09, F 10
additionally available.
Parameters : F 11, F 12
L4 : L/C Input < MIN
H4 : L/C Input > MAX Weighing system underloaded. Errors in

measurement possible.
Weighing system overloaded. Errors in Action : Check mechanical weighing
measurement possible. system, weighed idler
Action : Check material infeed; belt alignment and load cell cable.
load is too big. Parameter : O 09
Parameter : O 08
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Event Messages
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Batching Signal Lamps

B1 : Out of Tolerance
a (green) POWER OK
Batch not completed with specified accuracy. LED not lit:
Tolerance : Parameters I 04, 05 1. No power supply
Event : Parameter I 06 2. Device defective
Cause : Automatic adaption started 3. All other functions OK, LED
(Parameter I 03) ? probably defective. Call display
Material infeed or belt drive test.
faulty ?
b (green) CPU OK
Display pending or flashing,
processor system is faulty. Scale is
inoperable.
X (red) ALARM
B4: MAX Batch Act. Value flashes if an Alarm message is
available.
Current batch actual value exceeds preset Display additionally shows event
tolerance. code.
Limit value : Parameters I 04, I 08
Action : See relevant event
code.
MIN (red) MIN LIMIT VALUE

lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
down.
Action : See L1: I<MIN
MAX (red) MAX LIMIT VALUE

lit if feed rate limit value is exceeded
up.
Action : See H1: I>MAX.
No power supply:
Upon short circuit on the secondary side of the power

supply, internal overload protection responds.
Disconnect power supply for approx. 1 minute, and its
is ready to operate again.
0837

Event Messages Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
11 Commissioning
How To Operate Your INTECONT
1. Event E2 = O04
There is no way out. Namur Err. Tacho
Who wants to put the INTECONT into service has to

work himself through the Operation and Service
Manuals.
To make learning easier, the INTECONT can be Operate cursors to view available
operated without mechanical equipment, load cells events.
and speed transducer.
Although no feed rate is displayed, all operating T 1. Namur Err. Tacho E2
functions can be performed. Speed transducer not connected, or
1. Connect power supply and turn on (Chapter

U cabling faulty.
DETAILS). 2. L/C Input C1

Load cell not connected, or
2. The upper two green LEDs report Ready to cabling error.
Operate, the red LED in the middle flashes and
reports Alarm E1. 3. L/C Input >MIN L4
4. No release S2
No external RELEASE signal.
Z= 0t
E1 I= 0 kg/h
4. If you wish to turn off the flashing signal lamp or
try the setting programs, change some
parameters as shown in Parameterization
chapter.
Upper display : Totalizing Counter Z1 (a) Parameter O04 to WARNING 1 E2
Lower Display : Event Message E1 (b) Parameter O06 to WARNING 1 C1
Power Failure Feed Rate I (c) Parameter O09 to WARNING1 L4
(d) Parameter O07 to IGNORE S2
O Acknowledge Message E1 with key (e) Parameter B 03 to --
ACK.
Display shows Event Message E2 Deselect belt speed measurement with Parameter B
which reports that no speed transducer 03. Weigher can then operate without tacho generator.
is connected.
Use residual parameters to change the event class of
the 4 message types.
3. Except Scale ON and Set to Zero, all
functions described in the Operating Manual can 5. Set Release contact (Parameter P01).
be performed, e.g. display of event messages.
G Call function distributor. 6. Start INTECONT, all setting programs are
available.
f Start function Display Events. First call LB program as described in Chapter 6
and acquire result using the f key.

7. To simulate belt load, see Test Plug item.
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Commissioning
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Out-of-round
Mechanical Prerequisites The out-of-round error of idlers in the weigher
influential zone must not exceed 0.2 mm.
Mount mechanical equipment in accordance with the
instructions given in separate manual. Check weighed
and carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone for Securement
correct alignment and out-of-round.
After alignment, secure idler sets against
displacement.
Mark idlers and sets to avoid mistakes during
maintenance.
Influences
Incorrect alignment entails a zero point error which is

normally compensated during calibration.
Influential zone However, changes in belt tension increase the error
size.
All weighed idlers and three carrying idlers upstream For this reason, ensure correct alignment and
and downstream of weighing station. constant belt tension for accurate weighing.
Alignment Maintenance
Raise idlers in the influential zone to approx. 3...5 mm If idlers are dismounted for maintenance work to be
above remaining idlers. Align then against one effected, make sure that they are remounted in their
another to a height difference below 0.2 mm. former locations.
Electrical Prerequisites
Run and connect cables as described in Chapter

DETAILS.
Depending on idler set equipment, idlers have to be

aligned in various points.
0837

Commissioning Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Enter Parameters
All important rated and calibration data are shown in

the supplied Spec Sheet.
In addition, see hints given below. We recommend to
read through all parameters and to select the best
possible setting.
Parameter Block A
Dialog language and display unit.

Parameter values are automatically converted if the
unit is changed.
Parameter Block B
Determine belt inclination by using spirit level and
measuring element. Repeat measurement with spirit
Characteristic value vs B 04 is important for
level turned and calculate mean value of height h.
calibration. Adjust units to nominal feed rate. To
ensure stable display, resolution of feed rate display
(B 01) should not exceed 4...5 decimals.
Display format of totalizing counters should not
exceed 6...7 digits. The decimal point is one digit.
Example: Angle C 07: a = tan (h/l)
Nominal feed rate 10 t/h Angles < 20 degr.: a = 55 h/l

Unit B 07 -.- t
Max. Wert 999.999 t Parameter Block D
Calibration results need not be entered.

During initial calibration, range correction D 02 should
be set to 1.
Max. counter run time = Check to see if, with rated data entered, load cell
rated capacity is not exceeded.
Then counter is reset. F = q * L * H * cos(a)
If an external totalizing counter is connected, output q = nominal belt load D 01 in kg/m

frequency must not exceed 10 Hz (see Parameters B L = eff. platform length C 05 in m
07, 08 and Service Displays Z0 and ZE).
H = lever ration C 06
Parameter Block C a = angle C 07 in degr.
F = force on load cell in kg
Ensure correct input of calibration and evaluation data
as shown in relevant Spec Sheet. Measure effective F should be the total of load cell rated capacities C
belt length and inclination at site. 04. If not, load cells are too small for the requested
For definition of belt length, see Chapter DETAILS. nominal feed rate.
Enter belt inclination only if load cells are arranged

right-angled to belt. If load cells are mounted
vertically, the effective angle is 0. For definition of
check weight, see Data Flow Diagrams in Chapter
0837 DETAILS.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Parameter Block F
Functional Check
Select limit values and their event classes in
accordance with application requirements. 1. Start weigher and conveyor belt.
Parameter Block G Starting depends on selected start source B 06 .
Acknowledge Message E1.
Adjust display filters, if required. Normally, the default
values can be used. 2. As running display, a rotating point appears in
top left display field.
If not, Parameter Vmin (F 09) is set too high or
START key has not been operated.
Parameter Block H
3. Interpret event messages, if any, as shown in
See Automatic Zero Setting. Maintain default values Chapter 10 and remedy fault.
for the time being. Do not start automatic zero setting
before calibration is effected.
Parameter Block K 4. Call Service messages.
For calibration, the maintenance parameters are (a) Tachometer

irrelevant. The default values are useful suggestions. If measurement is ON (B 03 = DI7), speed
transducer output frequency must be below
3000 Hz. Compare value with Spec Sheet. If
Parameter Block N frequency heavily varies at constant belt
speed, there is too much space between
Measuring at discharge point (CPD) should normally be speed transducer NAMUR sensor and
activated (N 01, N 02). For automatic belt influence gearing. See also Check of Belt Speed.
compensation (BIC) and belt drift display, a special belt
circuit sensor and a metal sensor area on belt are
required. If these are not available, set Parameter N 03 (b) wz
to NO. Disconnect BIC during initial commissioning. The unnormalized output value of load cell
amplifier must not exceed 2.85mV/V, not even
Parameter Block O
with nominal platform load. Value changes
with varying load on platform (e.g. check
The event classes are selected for a standard scale. If
weight).
messages O 04, O 06 and O 07 have been modified
for training, reset to default.
Value excessive:
Load cell overloaded

Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set
Value negative:
Load cell improperly connected

Tare balance weight, if any, improperly set
(c) aw
Load on load cell in percent related to the total
of load cell rated capacities.
Interpret as under Item b). At nominal belt
load, aw should not exceed 100%.
5. If all else fails, see Test Plug item.

0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Calibration Check Using Check Weight
Calibration as such is not required. After input of rated Check with check weight is useful because
and calibration data, scale is calibrated.
1. Mechanical or electrical faults may be given
Simply call:
2. Calibration data may be uncertain, e.g. lever
1. Setting program Belt Circuit LB determining the ratio not exactly known, inclination hard to
basis of one belt circuit for zeroing and taring measure
programs
3. Incorrect data may have been entered.
2. Taring program TW The check weight should range between 30 %...100

% of nominal platform load and be exactly known.
3. Zero setting program for training. Zero point error 1. Enter effective check weight as Parameter C 08.
should be small after taring. If weighing modules with leaf spring parallel
guidance are used, the check weight corresponds
Always observe the above order of sequence. to the actual value. In other cases, see Spec Sheet
or calculate check weight in accordance with
For first program, measure exact time of one belt Chapter DETAILS / Data Flow Diagrams. For
circuit and enter value into Parameter C 02. For effective check weight, belt inclination is irrelevant.
operation and message interpretation, see Chapter 3.
Two further checks should be effected:
1. Check using check weight 2. Call program Weight Check CW,

as shown in Chapter Setting Programs.
2. Check of belt speed
For evaluation of results, see operating sequence des-
cription.
Possible causes of faults:
Distorsion of platform, insufficient alignment,

interferences on load cell cable.
In case of suspicion, repeat check with another

weight.
If something goes wrong: Unlinearity is mostly due to above faults; linear errors,
our service department is always prepared to help. to incorrect data.
Maybe only some small error or maloperation is the
cause of trouble. Check individual operations one
by one. Normally, the issue can be eliminated.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Check Belt Speed Check Using Material
The speed transducer frequency generator can be Checks or calibrations with check weights cannot
driven by reproduce the actual circumstances to perfection.
1. Friction wheel in the lower belt run Highly accurate weighing results can be achieved only
2. Drive motor shaft. by various measurements with material and
subsequent correction.
In the first case, the entered characteristic value vs
(Parameter B 04) depends on the exact friction wheel For correction, use Parameter D 02.
diameter; in the second, on the belt wrap factor.
Hence, check speed measurement for accuracy. Observe the following items:
1. Acquire belt speed with stop watch and tape 1. Make sure the route from platform to material
measure. collecting point is clean.
To be on the safe side, conduct various
measurements and calculate mean value. 2. Ensure that material diverters, if any, do not
divert any material.
2. Read INTECONT speed display over the same 3. If feed screws or air slides are used between
period of time. platform and collecting point, feeding starts
approx. 30 min. before check measurement so
3. Compare both values with one another and, if that normal build-ups are given.
necessary, correct characteristic value vs B 04.
4. Set dedustings to a minimum.
5. Ensure that hoppers or vehicles used for

transport of material to a legal-for-trade weigher
are cleaned and weighed before every filling
operation (tare).
old = old parameter value
Example:
new = new parameter value
Vg = measured speed
Old value of Parameter D 02 = 1
Va = read off speed
Within 15 min. a material amount of MW = 4.9 t is fed.
Difference in counter reading MA read on INTECONT
This method is also applicable with unknown
is 5.0 t.
characteristic values.
If characteristic value vs is known and deviations are

excessive, the space between sensor (Namur
transducer) and gearing is too big. Check by switching
ammeter into sensor circuit. = 1 x 4.9 = 0.98

5.0
Tooth over sensor: i= 0.1...1.65 mA Enter computed value into Parameter D 02 .
else: i = 1.65...8 mA
Neither level should exceed limit value 1.65 mA.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Automatic Zero Setting Belt Run Monitoring
Activate the automatic zero setting function only in INTECONT comes with belt a belt run monitoring
clearly defined cases, e.g. if some belt circuits are run function designed to detect belt drift and belt slip.
with no load. Activate monitoring using Parameter N03 Belt Sensor
Active.
Parameter H 01 = JA Automatic active
= NO Automatic not active The belt run monitoring functions can be used only if a
belt circuit sensor (Namur transducer) and
Automatic system is active both in turned-on and a triangle metal sensor area on belt area
turned-off state of scale, if belt speed exceeds Vmin. available (see Fig. Below). If not,
Parameters N03 Belt Sensor Active and
N05 BIC Active must be set to NO.
Z1 = 2500 kg
I = 0 kg/h
Measuring result of one belt circuit is continuously

compared to previous result.
If Belt Empty is identified, zero point is automatically
corrected.
Set continuous plausibility check with Parameters H
Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring
02 and H 03. For normal conveyor belts, default
values can be used, however, a check is
recommended. To activate belt run monitoring:
1. Set Parameter N03 Belt Sensor Active to
1. Deactivate automatic H 01 = NO. YES.
2. Call zero setting program via function distributor 2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter N06
various times and acquire result. Sensor Length (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
3. Note final results Dev. (upper display) as of 3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter N07
second run. Sensor Width (s. Belt Run Monitoring figure).
4. The
. highest value of Item 3 is the smallest value 4. Set Parameter N08 Sensor Offset to 0.
for Parameter H 02. 5. Call calibrating function LB: IMP/Belt.
Enter double to triple value, but min. 0.1 %. 6. Acquire result after min. 2 belt circuits.
5. Parameter H04 monitors the total of all zeroing 7. Adjust sensor.
operations. Enter value, e.g. 2...4 times higher Note: Service value Imp.S indicates the
than H 02. number of pulses measured for the covered
6. Activate Automatic using Parameter H 01. sensor. If the belt sensor is located exactly in mid
sensor area, the following value results:
Imp.S. = 0.5 * L (N06) * 0.01 * vs_Charact. Val.

(B04)
Example: N06 = 8.40 cm and

B04 = 1000 I/m result in Imp.S. = 42
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note: Monitor service value Belt Drift Tr indicating

the deviation of mid sensor and thus of belt from Control for Point of Discharge CPD
sensor position in cm.
Upon measurement at the point of discharge, the
Example: Belt drift = 0.20 cm: Parameter N08 measuring point of the weighing platform is shifted to
Sensor Offset = - 0.20 cm indicates belt slip 0.00 cm. the point of material discharge using a delay element.
The amount discharged is measured direct.
8. If necessary, determine event classes of belt slip
and drift messages (Parameters N09...N17). Note: If CPD is active, Automatic Belt Influence
Compensation BIC should be started as well.
Note: Normally, the default values can be used
in actual practice. Prerequisites:
Length ratio from mid platform to material discharge
point and total conveyor belt length is known.
9. Check messages.
Length ratio in percent is entered into Parameter
Note: To check, adapt Parameter N08 N02 Platf.Dis.Length.
SensorOffset accordingly and remember to
reset value to default. To start CPD, set Parameter N01 CPD Active to
YES .
Belt Influence Compensation BIC
The automatic Belt Influence Compensation BIC is

designed to monitor and correct the belt influence. As
is with belt run monitoring, a sensor and a sensor area
are required. To commission BIC, first start belt run
monitoring.
Note: Perform initial commissioning without active

BIC.
Features
After start of the belt influence compensation, the

influence of the conveyor belt on measurement will be
compensated after approx. 10 belt circuits.
Prerequisites:
Belt run monitoring commissioned
Belt run monitoring started.
To start BIC, set Parameter N05 BIC Active to YES

.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
reached.
Cosine Pendulum If items 4 and 5 cannot be performed, use
pendulum position and Rv in turn.
Belt weighers with variable belt inclination are equipped
with a so-called cosine pendulum which compensates 7. Tare scale, best in horizontal position.
the impact of inclination on measuring result.
8. Calibrate range using check weight and
The pendulum is switched into the load cell (L/C) Parameter D 02. Use setting program CW.
supply voltage.
L/C RD Rp Rw Angle C 06
Test Plug
1 x CSD 4000 3000 727 0.73
2 x CSD 2000 1500 363 +/- 30 0.73
1 x HBM 350 300 123 0.64
Almost any possible error in operation is reported by

event message. For interpretation, see Chapter 10.
RD = load cell input resistance in ohms
Check INTECONT for proper operation by using a
Rp = pendulum potentiometer resistance in ohms simple test plug. This helps to see whether the fault is
Rw = calibrated resistance of Rv in ohms with load cel, or cabling and electrical equipment.
1. Position pendulum near weighbridge and align 1. Switch plug as shown in drawing.
using spirit level.
2. Withdraw load cell connector X7 and replace by
2. Param.: Angle a (C 07) = 0 test plug.
Lever (C 06) = table value
Basic Tare N (D 04) = 0 At the indicated resistance values, the following
Tare Correction T (D 05) = 0 service values result:
Do not tare scale.
1. wz apr.1.1mV/V
3. Use Rv to preset RW with highest possible
accuracy. 2. Load cell apr. 55 % (C 03 =2mV/V)
utilization aw apr. 39% (C03 =2.85mV/V)
4. Bring weigher into two opposite positions,
e.g. degr. Apply check weight, if necessary. If wz is in specified range, measuring amplifier
properly operates.
5. Set belt load displays to same value by correcting
the pendulum case zero point position. Note:
The test plug ordering number is V037426.B01.
6. Use potentiometer rv to vary range until until
0837
minimum dependence of belt inclination is

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
12 Details
Start / Stop
Start / stop states exclusively refer to belt drive, 3. START/STOP with belt speed higher, or smaller,
prefeeder and feed rate measurement. than set limit value Vmin (v).
Belt load and belt speed are acquired in either case. System prompts for input of unmeaned value
Display with START Rotating point in upper display : measured for speed V.
field.
Rotation speed is approximately
proportional to feed rate, but
never zero.
Display with STOP Point stands still after completion

:
of measurement.
After effective stop command, totalization is cut off as
soon as set afterflow time Tnach has elapsed.
STOP commands have highest priority.
Four different control modes can be configured (see

also Parameter B06).
1. START/STOP using digital input.
The default value is DI2. However, you can use any 4. START/STOP via fieldbus interface (FB).
other free digital input as well.
Serial START/STOP commands acts in the same
The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. If ways as the corresponding keys.
scale cuts off after Alarm, START signal must be
The Select Keyboard Mode function lets you shift the
removed and applied again.
Start/Stop commands onto keyboard.
Return to Deselect Keyboard Mode function using
Parameter B06.
2. START/STOP using keyboard (OP)
Start : START key if no Alarm is

available and release signal
has been output.
0837 Stop: Stop key, Alarm, or No

Release.

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Details
VBW INTECONT PLUS
Note
1) Selection v does not allow for batching.
2) Digital input Release P01 can be cut off (setting

- -), and scale is released always.
0837

Details Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Batching Without Clearance
If batch is complete, belt drive is cut-off. Feeding by

full feed/dribble feed can be controlled via belt speed
or prefeeder (dashed line).
It is recommended to activate delay for material
discharge (O 01 = YES).
Select keyboard as START source
(B 06 = DE + T).
For details, see OPERATION chapter.
Parameter Schedule:
B 06 START source OP
G 06 Belt tracking time Tn apr. 3 s
Feed rate determination tracking time after

belt cut-off.
Enables afterflowing material to be acquired.
N 01 CPD Active YES
Delay for point of discharge

I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg
Change-over point from full feed to dribble

feed, e.g. by belt speed reduction. Enter
deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see Figure). I 03 = 0 : No adaptation
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg I 03 = 1 : Full adaption
Intermediate values lead to filtered
Belt drive cut-off point. To be set to slightly adaptation.
below setpoint to enable afterflowing material
to be acquired.
Suggestion: I 03 = 0.6
Suggestion:
Mean dribble feed feed rate in kg/h divided by I 04... For monitoring, see Parameter List.
3600.
I 03 Correction Factor 0.6 I 07 Empty Belt NO
Dribble feed changeover and cut-off points Prerequisite for batching mode.
are automatically adapted upon completion of
batch for system to be better matched to M 01 Feeder Active
actual conditions until the time of next
batching operation. NO : Feeder control output is always
LOW. Full feed/dribble feed
changeover must be controlled via
belt drive. Function Next W/Belt
Empty is not possible.
YES : Prerequisite for feeder control via
batch mode and for function
0837 START/STOP Feeder.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
M 05 = NO
M 02 Setting Time sec
No entry required.
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO
and Parameter M 04).
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
M 03 Feed Distance m
is desired after completion of batch or after
cut-off.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
platform.
excess feed.
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from Prerequisite: M 01 = YES
platform center to point of discharge (N 02)
has to be added. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
M 05 Change-over FF/DF Adaption:

NO Change-over via belt drive After every completed batch, system uses the missing
YES : Change-over via feeder amount to compute a correction value for cut-off point
(signals dashed in diagram) A (I 02). Dribble feed changeover point is
automatically corrected.
Sequence:
0 Start batch through START command. Error = SETPOINT - amount fed
Belt drive, prefeeder, totalization (counters)
start operating. The new cut-off point for the next batch is computed
from the error and an evaluation factor.
1 Abort batch through STOP command.
To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
running for time TZ after feeder cut-off
(Parameters M 01, M 02, M 04). F(new) = F(0ld) + FAK * Error
2 Restart batch through START command.
F =Batch cut-off point I 02
3 Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed FM = SET - A - F is reached. Signals FAK =Adaption factor I 03
Full Feed and Dribble Feed change levels. (see Parameter)
A and F are the pre-act cut-off points
(Parameters I 01 und I 02).
4 Cut-off point HM = SET - A Release Signal:
is reached and batch is complete.
Belt drive cuts off. Pending release signal acts as STOP command.
So as to avoid excess feed, prefeeder shuts Alarm:

down as soon as differential amount M (TZ) is
reached (M 04 = NO). Batch is interrupted (motor and prefeeder cut off
immediately). Remedy fault, acknowledge error
M(TZ) = I * TZ/3600 message and restart..
I = Current feed rate filtered through Power DOWN:

display filter G 01
TZ = Parameter M 02 Batch mode is cut off. Counter readings and values of
amounts fed remain stored for an unlimited period of
5 Belt tracking and end of material flow. time. Resume batching with Preselect Batch
If Parameters H and V are correctly set, function.
setpoint has now been reached. If not, see
Item Adaptation. Abort Batch function:
6. Change-over point from full feed to dribble
feed, if prefeeder is used for feed control Abort batch. Control signal behaviour is the same as
(Parameter N 05 = YES). after STOP command.
Pre-act cut-off point FMS is estimated on the

basis of the mean belt load.
FMS = VM - L * Q - M(TZ)
Q = Belt load displayed (Filter G 04)

L = Material path (M 03)
M(TZ)= See Item 4

0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Batching With Clearance
When batch is complete, prefeeder cuts off; belt drive, Parameter Schedule:
after approx. another half belt circuit. Conveyor belt is
empty. Delay for point of discharge should be B 06 START source OP
activated G 06 Belt tracking time Tn ca. 3 s
(N 01 = YES).
Select keyboard for START source (B 06 = DE + T). Tracking time of feed rate acquisition after
Function Next W/Belt Empty automatically activates belt cut-off.
clearance mode. For details, see OPERATION
chapter. N 01 CPD Active YES
The smallest possible actual batch amount Delay for point of discharge
corresponds to the load on belt from weighing platform
to point of feed.
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
I 01 Batch Dribble Feed kg Sequence:
Change-over point from full feed to dribble 0 Start batch through START command. Belt
feed, e.g. through reduction of feed rate. drive, feeder and totalizing counters start
Enter deviation from cut-off point I 02 (see operating.
Diagram). Normally not used in clearance 1 Abort batch through STOP command.
mode. To avoid excess feed, belt drive continues
I 02 Batch Cut-Off Point kg running for time TZ after prefeeder cut-off
(Parameters M 02, M 04).
Feeder cut-off point. 2 Restart batch through START command.
Suggestion: Initial value 0 3 Changeover point to dribble feed is reached.

Full feed and dribble feed signals change
I 03... See Without Clearance level.
I 07 Belt Empty YES
FM = AM - F
Prerequisite for clearance mode
AM = Cut-off point, see Item 4
M 01 Feeder Active YES F = Parameter I 01, Dribble Feed
Prerequisite for clearance mode

4 Cut-off point AM is reached, feeder cuts off.
Belt drive continues running for time Tab to
enable belt to be unloaded.
M 02 Setting Time sec
AM = SOLL - A - Mg
From 0 to nominal feed rate (see Sequence
and Parameter M 04). A = Parameter I 02, Cut-Off Point
M 03 Feed Distance m Mg = Estimated load on belt between
weighing platform and prefeeder.
Material path from feeder to end of weighing
platform. Mg = L * Q + I * TZ/3600
If CPD is active (N 01 = YES) the length from
platform center to point of discharge (N 02) I = Current feed rate filtered through
has to be added. display filter G 01.
TZ = Parameter M 02.
M 04 Motor STOP Aft. ST YES/NO Q = Current belt load filtered through
display filter G 04
Use M 04 to determine whether belt tracking
is desired after completion of batch or after Tab = TZ + time for another half belt circuit
cut-off. With N 04 = NO, TZ is doubled.
With slow feeders, tracking helps to avoid
excess feed (see Sequence and Diagram). 5. Batching amount reached.
Cut-off command routed between Item 4 and 5 totally

aborts batch.
M 05 Change-Over FF/DF YES/NO
For Adaption, Release, etc.:
Parameter has no effect.
See Batching Without Clearance.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Data Flow Diagram
Fig.: Measurement
Parameters:
Note:
Io Nominal Feed Rate B 02 in t/h
In normal INTECONT operation, data flow diagrams
need not be known. Io is reference value for limit values and
service display. Io has no effects on
In special cases, they can be used to trace internal calibration.
normalizations, particulary important for (theoretical)
precalibration. Qo = in kg/m
Vo = in m/s
Io = in t/h
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
L Effective Platform Length C 06 in m
Acquire accurate length and enter.

VS Speed Transducer Characteristic
Value B 04 in I/m
VS determines speed measurement

normalization, thus being relevant for
weighing accuracy.
Fo Load Cell Rated Capacity C 04 in kg
Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are

considered as load cells.
Fo = (N +M) * NNENN
NENN = load cell rated capacity
N = number of load cells
M = number of pivots
Fo determines weigher accuracy.
E Load Cell Characteristic Value C 04

in mV
The transmission coefficient is an important

value for calibration.
Ua = Load cell output voltage in mV

Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
= 5 V (10 V)
Fig.: Displays, limit values, analog input F = Load on load cell
Qo Nominal Belt Load D 01 in kg/m CSD load cells E = 2.85 mV/V

HBM load cells E = 2.00 mV/V
Computed by INTECONT, Qo is reference
value for limit values and displays.
With some types, E is not calibrated. For
Nominal platform load QB = Qo L value, see type plate.
L = effective platform length
Vo Nominal Speed B 05 in m/s H Lever Ratio C 06
The lever ratio is decisive for calibration

Reference value for limit values, only relevant accuracy. However, it must not enter into
for calibration of weighers check weight computation.
1. operating without speed measurement or
2. using adaptive belt influence compensation
0837 BIC is used.

VBW INTECONT PLUS
elt load results from platform data and belt inclination.
F = Force applied to load cell in kg

QB = Platform load in kg
LWB = See Figure.
With platforms with leaf spring parallel

guidance H = 1.
a Belt Inclination C08 in degr
Enter belt inclination if load cells are mounted Fo= Total of load cell in kg
right-angled to belt. With vertically mounted rated capacities
load cells, degree is always 0 E= Load cell characteristic value in m/mV
QPRF Effective Check Weight C 08 in kg
GK= Device constant
This weight serves for check of theoretical
calibration.
As effective check weight, enter platform load
simulated by check weight.
For check weight factor f, see Spec Sheet. Ue = Load cell input voltage in V
QPRF = f * Check Weight a= Angle in degr
Belt speed is computed from speed transducer output

KOR Range Correction D 02 frequency.
D 02 is primarily used to calibrate results of a

material check. This parameter exclusively
acts on belt load measuring branch.
The product from Q and V is feed rate I.
Analog Output:
I = Q * V * 3600s/f in kg/h
For tare parameters to be accurately calibrated, range
correction takes place before taring. If range
normalization QN is modified (Parameters KOR, Fo,
etc.), tare parameters are automatically converted so
ANH << = 1 >> = 20mA that zero point is maintained.
X = I, V or Q (see Fig. Analog Output)
Operating Principle - Summary Weighers without Speed Measurement:
Load cell output voltage Va is amplified and converted For setting program LB, a frequency of V0 * VS is
into digital value d. internally generated. If one of the two parameters is
As transmission factor A0 of AD converter and load changed, call LB program again. Only then all other
cell data are known to INTECONT, load on load cell setting programs will run over integer belt circuits.
can be computed from the output voltage. 0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Connection Diagram
Base Card
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Option Card
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Namur Inputs n Cable Fastening
8 mA = Short circuit
1.65...8 mA = Level 0
0.1...1.65 mA= Level 1 (sensor covered)
0,1 mA = Cable breakage
Option Card:
The option card is attached to the INTECONT cover.

Signal exchange with base card is via a pluggable flat
cable connector.
If pulled off, system behaves as if no option card was
present and only the operating functions and
parameters of the base card can be used.
Cabling Hints In the rear wall of the INTECONT, under each

connector, several slots are provided. The
n All cables are led to the device from the rear upper slot pair is reserved for the cable clamp
(front-of-panel mounting housing) or from below which presses the shielded cable against the
(flush mounting housing) and connected with rear wall. The shield needs not be separately
special connectors. Connectors cannot be connected. The lower cut-out serves for
confused. accommodation of a pull relief, e.g. by cable
binders.
n The INTECONT is isolated from the mounting
surface by its plastic housing.
The rear earthing connector is internally connected
with the electronics zero potential.
The protective ground used requires to be hum- and Attention!
transient-free.
The power supply zero potential (0V ext.) is not Connectors to base card require to be plugged-in
connected to the earthing connector. In general, no with screwed connections up; connectors to option
earthing is required. card, with screwed connections down.
n Ensure that no leakage currents are conducted over n Intecont rear view: Connectors
cable shields. Therefore shields are applied to one
side of INTECONT. The load cell housing is not
connected with shields.
Shields of data cables to host computer are
connected to ground on either side.
n The consumers connected to the relay and pulse

outputs require to be radioshielded, e.g. by
suppressor diodes or RC elements.
n Analog outputs
Long cables, particularly to frequency transducers,
can interact on analog outputs. We suggest to use
an isolating amplifier.
n Make sure the space between power and

measuring cables, if run in parallel, is 0.30 m.
If this is not possible lay measuring cable in steel
conduit. The same holds if the measuring cable is
laid over free stretches or close to powerful 0837
transmitters (e.g. broadcasting stations).

INTECONT PLUS VBW
Weighing Platforms
1. Effective Platform Length Multi-Idler Platform
The effective platform length is an important value for

calibration. Determined by platform design, it can n Buckled Platform
normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we
recommend to remeasure length and to enter the e.g. BMK type
exact value into parameter.
The hatched areas shows the distribution of load on The platform consists of two sections. In its center,
platform. force is applied to load cell. Instead of weighed
idlers, a two-sectional weighing table can also be
n Single-Idler Platform used.
e.g. BEZ, BED types
Platform load is applied to load cell via a weighed

idler. This can be done by using a lever system or,
with no levers, by leaf spring parallel guidance.
Buckled Platform
Single-Idler
Platform
n Multi-Idler Platform
e.g. BMP, BMC types
Various weighed idler are connected to form a

mechanical unit.
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
n One-sided mounting of total belt 2. Check Weight QPRF
Simulating a certain belt load, the check weight is

used for control of weighing system. It can act on
weighing platform direct or via lever system.
The weight to be entered into INTECONT is not the
actual weight, but the weight acting on platform.
Effective check weight QPRF is the platform load in

kg simulated by the check weight
Single-Idler Platform
a) Parallel Leaf Spring Mounting
Theoretically, the check weight can be applied

to any point of the mechanical platform
equipment. Applied weight QP is active always.
One-sided
mounting QPRF = OP
b) Joint Mounting (e.g. Universal Spring Joint):

Lg = Length up to mid hillside
tan(a) 0,018 a
Angle a= 0 : K = 0
Angle a = neg :K = neg
0837

INTECONT PLUS VBW
n Multi-Idler Platform 3. Conveyor Belt Inclination

a) Total platform mounted on load cells:
In certain cases, the inclination of conveyor belt has to
be entered into parameter. Decisive is the load cell
QPRF = QP
mounting position.
b) Joint Mounting a) Right-angled to conveyor belt
See Single-Idler Platform Enter angle a into parameter. Load cell is loaded
with N = Q * cos a.
n Buckled Platform
QPRF = QP
n Normally, check weight acts on center.
n One-sided mounting of total belt
LPG
QPRF = QP
LWZ
b) Vertical to conveyor belt
With inclined belts, consider extension, or shortening,
of calibration lever, if any, in accordance with Enter 0 as angle a. Load cells are loaded with full
single-idler platform. force Q.
Chain Calibration Weight:
If a chain curtain is placed over the platform area, the

total weight of chains in weighing area is the effective
check weight.
QPRF = n * Lg * s
N= Number of chains
Lg= Overall belt length in m
s= Chain weight per m in kg/m
0837

VBW INTECONT PLUS
Printer Connectivity
Interface : Serial (see Chapter Technical Switch

Data). 1-1 : OFF 8-bit message
1-2 : OFF No parity bit
Character map: ISO-Latin-1 (ISO-8859-1) 1-3 : ON, OFF Even/odd
Cable : The connection diagram holds 1-4 : OFF Positive edge
for EPSON and CITIZEN 1-5...8 : OFF, ON, OFF, OFF 9600 baud
printers. 2-1...6 : ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF
(default)
Use Parameter J 01 to set baud rate to 9600. On the

right side of printer, there are two additional DIP
switches. Diagram view corresponds to top of printer.
Fig. EPSON Printer
Switch
1-1 : OFF Character spacing 10 CPI
1-2 : OFF Zero with no backslash
1-3 : ON Graphics character set
Fig.: Printer Cable 1-4 : OFF Auto hyphenation activated
1-5 : ON Normal print speed
1-6...8 : ON, ON, ON USA
EPSON Printer: LX 850 2-1 : ON Page length 12 inch
2-2 : OFF No cut sheet
2-3 : OFF Jump over perforation
2-4 : OFF No auto line feed
Information on switch position can be printed by using

the printer self-test function. (Press line feed key while
starting printer).
CITIZEN Printer: 120D
Fig. EPSON Interface Fig. Serial Interface
The interface board is equipped with 2 DIP switches

0837
used for selection of serial message base data.

INTECONT PLUS VBW
13 Replacement Instructions
Replacing INTECONT PLUS FIP > INTECONT PLUS VEG
INTECONT PLUS, type VEG, is equipped with added functions for INTECONT PLUS, type FIP. Logical
inputs/outputs can now be assigned to hardware at will. Please also check all connectors with relevant
parameter assignment.
When using our convenient replacement set (ordering no. V036910.B01), hardware is adapted by plugging.
The EasyServe setting program supplied enables easy assignment and transfer of all software parameters.
FIP base card connection diagram
FIP option card connection diagram
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
VBW INTECONT PLUS
The FIP base and option cards connection diagrams Load Cell
indicate for every digital input and output the relevant
INTECONT VEG parameter numbers used for
FIP Physical Signal VEG
distribution on physical signals.
X5 3 OUT1 X7 3
The tables below compares the connector X5 4 REF1 X7 4
assignments of FIP and VEG for all physical signals. X5 5 IN2 X7 6
X5 6 IN1 X7 5
X5 7 REF2 X7 7
X5 8 OUT2 X7 8
Digital Outputs
FIP Physical Signal VEG Attention:

Signals IN1 and IN2 are swapped between FIP and
X1 1,2 DA1 X1 1,2 VEG. (VEG is compatible to DISOCONT).
X1 3,4 DA2 X1 3,4
X1 5,6 DA3 X1 5,6
X6 1,2 DA4 X8 1,2
X6 3,4 DA5 X8 3,4 Power Supply
X6 5,6 DA6 X8 5,6
X6 7,8 DA7 X8 7,8 FIP Physical Signal VEG
X6 9,10 DA8 X8 9,10
X2 1 0V ext X2 1
X2 2 24V ext X2 2
Digital Inputs X2 3 ext. 0V supply X2 3
X2 4 ext. 24V supply X2 4
X3 1,2 DE1 X3 1,2 Printer

X9 1,2 DE2 X3 3,4
X9 3,4 DE3 X6 6,7 FIP Physical Signal VEG
- DE4 X9 1,2
- DE5 X9 3,4 X8 1 Screen X10 1
X3 5,6 Sensor = (DE6) X3 5,6 X8 2 TX X10 2
X5 1,2 V1 (Tacho 1) = DE7 X7 1,2 X8 3 RX X10 3
X3 3,4 V2 (Tacho2) -
Pulse Output
Analog Inputs/Outputs
X9 5 24V X6 8
X9 9,10 A01 X6 4,5 X9 6 Open collector X6 9
- A02 X9 5,6 X9 7 Open emitter X6 10
X9 8 0V X6 11
- AI X6 1,2,3
With VEG, fieldbus is connected via separate fieldbus

cards (FIP: Connector X7). See Fieldbus Manual
BVH2220.
0837

Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS VBW
Connector Size
FIP
X1 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 6 pins

X6 Phoenix contact spacing 5mm : 8 or 10 pins
X7 SUB-D: 9 pins
X8 SUB-D: 9 pins
VEG

X3 Phoenix contact spacing 3.5mm : 6 pins
X4 SUB-D: 9 pins
0837

t h i s d o c u m e n ta t i o n a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . Technische Replacement Instructions
VBW INTECONT PLUS
0837

Replacement Instructions Technische this documentation are not permitted. Schenck
INTECONT PLUS
INTECONT Opus
INTECONT Satus
Fieldbus Description
BV-H2220GB
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to
seamless support across the entire product life cycle.
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best
in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process Location.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the
best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions? Then our, the modular service system PASS,
is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then
find out more about the individual components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service .

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock
to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.
+49 172 6 501700 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment
+49 171 2 251195 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

+49 61 51-15 31 0

Table of Contents
1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ 1
1.1 Validity Range ........................................................................................................ 1
2 FIELDBUS DATA............................................................................... 2
2.1 Data Segments ....................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Units ........................................................................................................................ 2
2.3 Numeric Representation ....................................................................................... 2
2.4 User Data Construction......................................................................................... 4

2.4.1 FIXED Mode...................................................................................................... 4
2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode Detailed Message Sample................................................. 7
2.4.2 General User Data Construction ....................................................................... 8
2.4.2.1 Message Construction................................................................................ 9
2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer .................................................................................. 11
2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction Detailed Samples.............................. 13
2.5 User Data Diagnosis ............................................................................................ 15

2.5.1 Serial connection............................................................................................. 15
2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet.................................................................................. 17
2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data.............................................................................................. 19

2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists.............................................................................. 19
2.6.2 Commands ...................................................................................................... 20
2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format .......................................................... 22
2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ..................................................... 23
2.6.5 Status Information ........................................................................................... 24
2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format............................................... 32
2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus) ......................................... 35
2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format....................................................................... 36
2.6.9 Events ............................................................................................................. 37
3 PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................. 38
3.1 Commissioning Guideline .................................................................................. 38
3.2 Profibus Module Functionality ........................................................................... 38
3.3 User Data Construction....................................................................................... 39
3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT)..................................................................... 39
3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master ......................................................................... 40
3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting......................................................................... 41
3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V) ............................................................................... 42
3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020)................................................................................ 43
3.9 For Further Reading ............................................................................................ 44
INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 I

Schenck Process
Table of Contents
4 DEVICENET ..................................................................................... 45
4.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................45
4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality .........................................................................45
4.3 User Data Construction .......................................................................................45
4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT) .........................................................46
4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master.............................................................................46
4.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .........................................................................47
4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V) .............................................................................48
4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V) .............................................................................49
4.9 For Further Reading .............................................................................................50
5 MODBUS.......................................................................................... 51
5.1 Commissioning Guideline ...................................................................................51
5.2 Modbus Module Functionality.............................................................................51
5.3 Data Format...........................................................................................................51
5.4 Function Codes (FC) ............................................................................................52
5.5 Transmission Protection .....................................................................................52
5.6 Error Codes...........................................................................................................52
5.7 Station Addresses ................................................................................................52
5.8 User Data ...............................................................................................................53

5.8.1 Process Values ................................................................................................53
5.8.2 Parameters ......................................................................................................53
5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus.....................................................................53
5.10 Sample Messages...............................................................................................53
5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT)...........................................................54
5.12 Settings on Modbus Master ..............................................................................55
5.13 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .......................................................................55
5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG) .............................................56
5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG) ...........................................58
5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire....................................................................58
5.17 For Further Reading ...........................................................................................58
II BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description

Schenck Process
Table of Contents
6 ETHERNET ...................................................................................... 59
6.1 Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................. 59
6.2 Checking Station Addresses .............................................................................. 60
6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP .................................................................................................... 61

6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline ............................................................................... 61
6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 61
6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 61
6.3.4 Station Addresses ........................................................................................... 62
6.3.5 Function Codes (FC)....................................................................................... 62
6.3.6 Transmission Protection.................................................................................. 62
6.3.7 Error Codes ..................................................................................................... 62
6.3.8 Data Formats................................................................................................... 63
6.3.9 Process Values ............................................................................................... 63
6.3.10 Parameters.................................................................................................... 63
6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview.............................................................................. 63
6.3.12 Message Samples......................................................................................... 64
6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT) .............................................. 64
6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master .................................................................. 65
6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting .................................................................... 65
6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V VEG) ...................................................... 66
6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG.............................................................................. 67
6.3.18 For Further Reading...................................................................................... 67
6.4 Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................................ 68

6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines.............................................................................. 68
6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions ............................................................................. 68
6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode................................................................................................. 68
6.4.4 User Data Construction................................................................................... 68
6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT) ................................................... 68
6.4.6 Configuration of the network in RSLogix 5000" ............................................. 70
6.4.7 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting....................................................................... 71
6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG...................................................... 72
6.5 Ethernet connection VKG ................................................................................... 73

6.5.1 For Further Reading........................................................................................ 73
7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES............................................................. 74
7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers .......................................... 74
7.2 Batching via fieldbus........................................................................................... 75
INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 III

Schenck Process
Table of Contents
IV BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description

Schenck Process
Overview
1 Overview
Before putting into operation one of the protocols described below, always read Item
Fieldbus Data and the protocol-specific items.
Decisive for the further procedure is the User Data Construction item. You can select:
! FIXED mode or
! General user data construction
If you arrive at the conclusion that the FIXED mode is the right mode for your application,
you can skip all the other information on IDs and parameters.
The FIXED mode means you need less time for orientation and it makes it much easier to
use the fieldbus connection. You only have to read the FIXED mode Chapter in Sections
1.1-1.4 as well as the sections on diagnosis and troubleshooting wherever necessary.
You can find information on the web server in document BVI2060AA.
1.1 Validity Range

This item describes all data that can be transferred using the various fieldbus protocols.
The data basis is the same for all fieldbuses. Special features are detailed at the protocol-
specific items.
The Fieldbus Data item holds for the following protocols:
Protocol See:
Profibus DP Chapter 3
DeviceNet Chapter 4
Modbus Chapter 5
Modbus-TCP/IP and Ethernet/IP Chapter 6
For description of protocol S5-RK512 (3964R), see manual FH458.
INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description BV-H2220 GB , 0831 1

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2 Fieldbus Data
2.1 Data Segments

The INTECONT system distinguishes the following cyclic data:
! Commands (bit or byte information)
! Setpoints (floating point values)
! Status information (bit or byte information)
! Measurement values (floating point values)
! Long (INT32) values (integer values)
2.2 Units
INTECONT uses two different unit systems:

! SI units
! NON-SI units
Changeover takes place using the Units parameter.
For the fieldbuses, this means:
! Selection SI lets you transfer all unit values in "m, kg and sec"
! Selection NON-SI transfers your values in "ft, lb and sec".
2.3 Numeric Representation
Floating Point Values

INTECONT readies measurement values, setpoints and some parameters in the form of
floating point numbers in the IEEE-754 4-byte format. Depending on protocol and
parameter, these can be converted into another floating point format. For details, see
individual protocol descriptions.
Transmission always starts with MSB.
Example for transmission of value 150.5 in IEEE format (indicating the line sequence):
Byte 1: Byte 2: Byte 3: Byte 4:

Sign/Exponent Mantissa 1 Mantissa 2 Mantissa 3
0x43 0x16 0x80 0x00
Sample floating point numbers

Number IEEE format (HEX) Siemens-KG format (HEX)
1.0 3F800000 01400000
10.0 41200000 04500000
100.0 42C80000 07640000
1000.0 447A0000 0A7D0000
2 BV-H2220 GB , 0831 INTECONT PLUS, Fieldbus Description

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Data (double) words
Data words are standard transmitted using the Motorola format (high byte followed by low
byte).
Depending on protocol and parameter, another byte sequence can be set. For details, see
individual protocol descriptions.
Word oder / Byte order
Data type MSB LSB

MSB LSB
Int 32 / LONG
0 0 MSB LSB
Int 16
Bit information
Bits are comprised to form words (Modbus, Modbus/TCP) or double words (Profibus,
DeviceNet). The line sequence is as follows:
Ex.: Command ID 0x0140 Comm4_HI Comm4_LO Comm5_HI Comm5_LO

Ex.: Status ID 0x02F0 Status2_HI Status2_LO Status3_HI Status3_LO

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.4 User Data Construction
As mentioned above, INTECONT readies two process images:

! FIXED mode or
! General user data construction.
The data of the Fixed Mode Parameter parameter blocks are transferred to set positions
between the host system and INTECONT in the FIXED mode. Parameters cannot be
transferred. However, you also do not have to study the principle of data exchange via
"general user data structure". This is where you can transfer any data you want in any
order you want including the equipment parameters. You pay for this flexibility at the price
of devoting more time and effort to orientation in terms of the data scope and type of
processing.
The user data structures of this section also apply to the PROFIBUS, DeviceNet and
EtherNet/IP protocols. The Modbus, or Modbus/TCP, protocol is used to transfer
continuous data ranges from Master to scale and vice versa (see protocol-specific items).
2.4.1 FIXED Mode
The data of the FIXED mode are also adapted to each scale type. In any event, the
structure of the data packages as shown in the figure below is identical. Each value is
always the size of one data double word (4 bytes). Values not used are filled with zero. For
detailed description of commands and status values, refer to the lists of cyclic data given at
the end of the Fieldbus Data item.
NOTE
In preset value 1 (commands 4 + 5) the release bit (in terms of a fieldbus release)
serving for interface monitoring must always be set statically. If this bit is not set,
the subsequent preset values are not evaluated and HOST communication fault is
set.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
The table below includes all values transferred with the particular scale type:
Preset values Fixed Mode 1 and 2

VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VDM20600
Byte-No. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5 140 Commands 4+5
5-8 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7 160 Commands 6+7
9-12 180 Commands 8+9 180 Commands 8+9 180 Kommando 8+9 180 Commands 8+9 180 Commands 8+9
13-16 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 254 Make-Up setpoint [kg] 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 250 Absolute setpoint [kg/h] 254 Make-Up setpoint [kg]
17-20 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg] 252 Batch setpoint [kg]
21-24 0 256 Batch No. 0 256 Batch No. 256 Batch No.
25-28 0 0 0 254 Make-up Setpoint [kg] 0
29-32 0 0 0 0 0
Read values Fixed Mode 1
VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VDM20600
Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3
5-8 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5
9-12 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event
13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h]
17-20 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg]
21-24 760 Fill weight [kg] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 758 Belt load [kg/m] 75A Measured load [kg] 75A Measured load [kg]
25-28 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 75C Belt speed [m/s] 75E Speed [1/min] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]]
29-32 766 Actual Setpoint [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 766 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] 766 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] 768 Actual Setpoint [kg/h]
Read values Fixed Mode 2

VLW20600 VBW20600 VDB20600 VMD20600 VMD20600
Byte-Nr. ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert ID (hex) Wert
1-4 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3 2F0 Status 2+3
5-8 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5 310 Status 4+5
9-12 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event 610 Highest priority event
13-16 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h] 750 Feed rate [kg/h]
17-20 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg] 752 Totalizer 1 [kg]
21-24 760 Fill [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg] 754 Totalizer 2 [kg]
25-28 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg] 768 Batch Feed Rate [kg]
29-32 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg] 76A Batch Res. Amount [kg]

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
From the programme statuses

VBW20600-08
VDB20600-08
VDM20600-05
VLW20600-07
VMD20600-08
there is only one FIXED mode. The values that are then transferred in FIXED mode
should be set in the parameter block Fixed Mode Parameter. The default values
correspond to the values in the table for fixed mode 1.
2.4.1.1 FIXED Mode Detailed Message Sample
INTECONT parameters (scale type: VLW)
Configuration FIXED-1
Floating point format IEEE format
Master->Slave Bytes (hex) Meaning (ID value, hex) Current value

Bytes 1-4 00 0C 00 00 Commands 4+5 (0140) Event acknowledged, release set
Bytes 5-8 00 00 00 00 Commands 6+7 (0160) No command active
Bytes 9-12 00 00 00 01 Commands 8+9 (0180) START keyboard mode set
Bytes 13-16 43 16 80 00 Setpoint (0250) 150.5 kg/hr
Bytes 17-20 42 C8 00 00 Batch setpoint (0252) 100 kg
Bytes 21-32 ZERO Standby
Slave->Master Bytes (hex) Meaning (ID value, hex) Current value

Bytes 1-4 01 02 00 00 Status 2+3 (02F0) Normal mode, no release
Bytes 5-8 00 02 00 04 Status 4+5 (0310) Filling system, fill level < Min
Bytes 9-12 13 18 00 00 Most significant error (0610) Event S9 ackn., Warning2
Bytes 13-16 42 C8 00 00 Feed rate actual value (0750) 100 kg/hr
Bytes 17-20 44 9A 40 00 Totalizing counter 1 (0752) 1234 kg
Bytes 21-24 43 AC 80 00 Bin level F (0760) 345 kg
Bytes 25-28 45 F6 90 00 Totalizing counter 2 (0754) 7890 kg
Bytes 29-32 42 C8 00 00 Effective setpoint (0766) 100 kg/hr

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.4.2 General User Data Construction
Since there is no specific Weighing profile, data construction uses the existing
Variable Speed Drives profile.
In this profile, user data construction for the cyclic channel is called Parameter
Process Data Object (PPO).
The guideline determines the user data construction for drives a Master can use to
access the drive slaves by means of cyclic data exchange. User data construction in
cyclic data exchange comprises two ranges which can be transmitted in every
message:
! Process Data Range (PZD), i.e. control words and setpoints, or status
information and actual values
! Parameter Range (PKW) for read/write of parameter values, e.g. read-out of
information on parameter characteristics (MIN/MAX values, etc.).
The PPO type used to address the scale from Master can be configured at the time of
bus system commissioning. The PPO type is selected as a function of the scale task
in the automation environment and used to control the scale in the automation
environment, e.g. Start/Stop, Enter Setpoints. The parameter range enables the user
to freely access all scale parameters with the use of the bus system. Thus, further
information for scale visualization can be called up from a host system, e.g. a PC, with
no adverse effects on the efficiency of process data transmission.
All messages used in cyclic data transmission have the following basic construction:
Protocol frame Parameters (PKW) User data Protocol frame

(header) optional Process data (PDR) (trailer)
General message construction
PPO types
You can select the following PPO types:
! NO_PARA_ID: User data without a parameter range and three defined preset
values and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID
! PARA_ID: User data with a parameter range, two preset values and four reading
values.
! PARA_6ID: User data with a parameter range with three defined preset values
and as many as 6 additional reading values selectable by ID
This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020.
Parameter range (PKW)

The PKW message part (Parameter Code Value) can be used to monitor and/or
change any scale parameter. The requisite mechanisms of order/reponse IDs are
described at the Parameter Transfer item.
Process data range (PDR)

Using the process data, commands and preset values (Master to scale) or status
words and actual values ( scale to Master response) can be transmitted.
Transmitted process data are immediately effective.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.4.2.1 Message Construction

The figure below shows the basic construction of user data in the INTECONT system.
The first line shows the message from bus master to scale; the second, the scale
reponse.
The user data structure is fixed and the data content (IDs and values) is variable.
The size of the user data part of a package is 32 bytes in the process images
NO_PARA_ID + PARA_ID. If the DeviceNet or Ethernet/IP protocol is used, 32 should
be entered as the number of bytes (as the produced and consumed connection size).
The configuration telegram guarantees the correct length information in Profibus .
Unused bytes are filled with the value zero.
Starting with the program versions
1 VBW20600-08
2 VDB20600-08
3 VDM20600-05
4 VLW20600-07
5 VMD20600-08
the process image PARA_6ID is also supported. The structure corresponds to
NO_PARA_ID + up-stream parameter block. Another condition is that a
communication module is used with a firmware version.
This process image is only available in connection with Hardware VxB8020.
You can see the version under service values SW_FB.
The process image of the control system to INTECONT is 38 bytes long in this case
and 40 bytes are transmitted in the opposite direction.
Sample
Data transmission without parameters with 3 preset values, 6 variable
user-defined identifications (IDs) representation HEX

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Note
! The preset IDs from Master to scale must originate from the Command or Preset
value ranges. It is possible to preset multiple setpoints (feed rate and batch
setpoint) or multiple commands with different IDs in one and the same cycle.
! If one ID is zero, respective value is not evaluated..
! If all bytes are set to zero in the presetting message (bus Master to INTECONT),
fieldbus communication fault is set on INTECONT. INTECONT interprets this state
as failure of the bus Master's host CPU whilst the communication processor in
Master is active. The INTECONT timeout monitoring cannot compensate this state
since formally valid data packages are transferred still. At least one preset ID must
have a valid value unequal to zero.
! Control and status information is comprised in 4-byte packages. The IDs assigned
to blocks are highlighted in data description. Only these IDs may be used here. If
a different ID is used, data are rejected and an error message is output.
! In the response message, status and actual value are identified by their positions
in message. The fixed status has ID 0x2F0; the actual value, ID 0x750.
! Through addition of (read) IDs in Master --> scale message, you can cause the
scale to enter the desired values into the response message. Value sequence
corresponds to the ID sequence. If IDs of the Preset value or Command ranges
are entered, the value preset last is reread.
! If an ID is identified as wrong, corresponding value in the response is set to zero.
Sample Data transmission with additional parameter block
The (grey) parameter block always precedes the residual data.
Master --> scale message
PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 ID ID Ordering list

Preset Preset value 1 Preset Preset value 2 (read IDs)
value 1 value 2
Scale response
PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 Status infos (2+3) Actual value Values as per ordering list
(4 bytes) (4 bytes)
Note
Parameter evaluation requires considerable expenditure. We suggest to limit data

exchange to parameters of the FLOAT type.
For detailed message samples, see end of item 1.5.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.4.2.2 Parameter Transfer

Parameter block (PKW)
Parameter block (PKW), 4 words

PKE (1st word) IND (2nd word) PWE (3rd and 4th words)
High Low PWE1 PWE2
Basic construction of parameter block
Parameter ID (PKE),
1st word The parameter ID (PKE) is always a 16-bit value.

Bits 0 to 12 (PNU) include the number of the desired parameter.
Bits 13 to 15 (AK) include the order or response ID.
For the order message (Master; scale), the meaning of the order ID
is shown in table.
For the response message (scale ; Master), the meaning of the

response ID is shown in table. Depending on order ID, only certain
response IDs can be used.
AK PNU
Bit no. 15 14 13 Bit 0-12
Details of parameter ID (PKE)
Order ID Meaning Pos. response Neg. response

0 No order 0 -
1 Request current 2 7
parameter value (double
word)
3 Write (change) parameter 2 7
value (double word)
4 Order description element 2 7
(double word)
Order IDs (AK) Master station > INTECONT
Response ID Meaning
0 No order
2 Transfer current parameter value / event group (double word)
7 Order cannot be executed (error number in PWE2)
Response IDs (AK) INTECONT > Master station

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Parameter index (IND)

2nd word
The array sub-index (in PROFIBUS profile simply called sub-index) is
an 8-bit value and transferred upon cyclic data exchange using PPOs
in the most significant byte (bits 8 to 15) of parameter index (IND).
The less significant byte (bits 0 to 7) always has zero value.
IND function
If an order transfers a sub-index with values between 1 and 254, the
desired index of the selected parameter is transferred. For meanings
of single parameter indices, please see the table below.
When a description element is processed, the number of the desired
element is transferred.
Index Meaning
0 Default value
4 Min. value
8 Max. value
12 Unit index (1st word), after-comma places (2nd word)
Index in parameter description (IND) most significant byte of parameter index
Parameter value (PWE)

3rd and 4th words
The parameter values (PWE) are always transferred in form of a
double word (32 bits). A PPO message can transfer only one
parameter value at a time.
A 32-bit parameter value consists of PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd
word) and PWE2 (less significant word, 4th word).
A 16-bit parameter value is transferred in PWE2 (less significant
word, 4th word). Set PWE1 (most significant word, 3rd word) to 0 value
on Master.
Bits 0 ... 15: Parameter value with 16-bit parameter, or Low portion with
32-bit parameter
Bits 16 ... 31: Value = 0 with 16-bit parameters, or High portion with 32-bit
parameter
Error number Meaning

1 Inadmissible parameter number (parameter not available or preset
value wrong, e.g. MIN/MAX exceeded up/down)
2 MIN/MAX value exceeded up/down
3 No access right
4 Order not possible in current operating state of scale
5 Order not implemented
Error numbers
Error number (PWE2)
If the response ID has value 7 (order cannot be executed), parameter value 2 (PWE2)
includes an error number specified in table.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Order/response processing rules
An order and/or response can refer to a single parameter only.

The Master must repeat the order until receipt of relevant response.
The Master recognises the response on the given order through:
! evaluation of response ID
! evaluation of parameter number PNU
! if necessary, evaluation of parameter index IND
! if necessary, evaluation of parameter value PWE.
The complete order must be sent in one message; splitted order messages are not
admitted. The same applies to the response.
If the response message is repeated, the scale responds with the current values.
If no information from PWK interface are needed in cyclic operation (only PZD data
matter), set the order ID to No Order.
For samples, see item below.
2.4.2.3 General User Data Construction Detailed Samples

Sample 1
GSD module: "NO_PARA_ID"

INTECONT parameters Configuration: NO_PARA_ID
Process image length Master -> Slave : 30 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format Siemens-KG-Format
Sample Master->Slave process image:
Bytes 1+2 0250 ID for "Write feed rate setpoint

Bytes 3-6 0A 7D 00 00 Setpoint 1000.0 kg/hr
Bytes 7+8 0140 ID for "Commands 4+5"
Bytes 9-1 00 41 00 00 Reset control value for scale start and counter 1
Bytes 13+14 0000 Standby
Bytes 15-18 00 41 00 00 Reset control value for scale start and counter 1 (ID=0: not active)
Bytes 19+20 0752 ID to request counter 1 reading
Bytes 21+22 075C ID to request belt speed in m/s
Bytes 25+26 0758 ID to request belt load in kg/m
Sample Slave->Master process image:
Bytes 1-4 01 02 00 00 Always status messages to ID 02F0

Bytes 5-8 00 00 00 00 Always feed rate actual value kg/hr, ID=0750
Bytes 9-12 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 19+20, i.e. counter 1 reading
Bytes 13-16 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed

Bytes 21-24 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load
Bytes 25-28 00 00 00 00 Standby
Bytes 29-32 00 00 00 00 Standby
Bytes 1-4 status messages: set are "Normal mode and No release bits
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Sample 2 (preset parameter)
GSD module: PARA_ID

INTECONT parameters Configuration: PARA_ID
Process image lenght Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Floating point format IEEE
Bytes 1-8 7205 0000 4170 0000 Preset parameter "F_Control Min. Feed Index 1" (value =15 %)
Bytes 9+10 0250 ID for "Write feed rate setpoint "
Bytes 11-14 44 7A 00 00 Setpoints 1000.0 kg/hr
Bytes 15+16 0140 ID for "Control"
Bytes 17-20 00 44 00 00 Acknowledge control value for events and reset counter 1
Bytes 23+24 075C ID to request belt speed in m/s
Bytes 27+28 0758 ID to request belt load in kg/m
Bytes 1-8 5205 0000 4170 0000 Preset parameter value accepted
Bytes 9-12 01 02 00 00 Always status messages to ID 02F0
Bytes 13-16 00 00 00 00 Always feed rate actual value in kg/h, ID=0750
Bytes 21-24 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 21+22, i.e. belt speed
Bytes 29-32 00 00 00 00 Value for ID in bytes 25+26, i.e. belt load
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample 3 (preset parameter with error response)
GSD module PARA_ID

Process image lengths Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Bytes 1-8 7205 0000 447a 0000 Preset parameter "F_Control Min." (value =1000 %)
... ... ...
Bytes 1-8 F205 0000 4170 1000 Preset parameter value not accepted (value > MAX)
... ... ...
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample 4 (read parameter)
GSD module PARA_ID

Process image lengths Master -> Slave : 28 bytes, Slave -> Master: 32 bytes
Bytes 1-8 3205 0000 xxxx xxxx Read parameter "F_Control Min" (xxxx = optional value)
... ... ...
Bytes 1-8 5205 0000 4170 0000 Parameter value = 15%

... ... ...

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.5 User Data Diagnosis
2.5.1 Serial connection
You can always carry out the utilisation diagnosis with a serial EasyServe connection.
In addition, you can always use diagnosis with VEG via Ethernet if the optional
VET020V fieldbus card is mounted. The VKG scenario always offers all options.
EasyServe readies a very simple form of bus monitor.
Menu Fieldbus View lets you go to the dialog window.

The following diagnoses are possible:
Display of first 50 characters of last 100 messages in hex format. Display only shows
the mere user data.
The following errors can be recognised:

! Parameter with wrong data format. All floating point numbers are improperly
indicated.
! Faulty IDs preset from Master (see Lists of Cyclic Data)
! Faulty data contents
Not recognised:
!Initialisation error upon connection set-up
!Layer 2 issues upon data exchange
Display of EasyServe monitor (Profibus or DeviceNet)
Representation of Modbus messages (incl Modbus frame)
The figure shows the Modbus telegram depiction (including Modbus frame)

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Explanations on EasyServe monitor (Profibus sample)
Master transfers command (ID=0x0140) Acknowledge event bit and command

(ID=0x0160). Scale is requested to respond to IDs 0x0758, 0x075E, 0x0310 and
0x0610.
Display meanings
Display shows current fieldbus protocol (see title) and data selected using checkbox.
==> means that Master sends data to scale ( Receive INTECONT).
<== identifies data sent from INTECONT to Master
Selection buttons
Record:
Starts recording on scale
Display:
Data are transferred from scale to PC and then displayed. This process may take
some seconds depending on how many data have been stored yet. Maximum the last
(most recent) 50 messages can be recorded.
Copy:
Lets you mark all (no selection), single or a group of messages by mouse click and
copy them into clipboard. If requested, data can be copied into an editor.
Checkbox:
Lets you select the direction of data and activate a time stamp.
Note
With the Modbus/TCP protocol, the EasyServe monitor displays the data of the
internal interface (scale-EtherNet module). The representation corresponds to the
Modbus sample.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.5.2 Connection via Ethernet
The fieldbus view (as shown below) was extended for Modbus/TCP (VEG) and the
VKG scenario. All data streams are transmitted to EasyServe using the UDP protocol.
Both internal and external data are shown with VEG.
This figure shows the difference between internal and external communication. The
standard EasyServe fieldbus view always shows the internal data (refer to the chapter
on Fieldbus Data).
HOST
External Communication
(TCP)
Communication subassembly
VET2xV
Internal communication
(serial)
Unit
The next figure shows the data of a VEG. The upper row is identical to the standard
diagnose view. The selection fields in the second row allow the selection (filtering) of
particular data after recording has been stopped. The filters are described in detail
below.
Selecting Channel
direction selection
Diagnosing a VEG unit

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
Diagnosing the VKG

These 4 bytes represent the time right down to the millisecond.
The time stamp in front of it is generated by the PC. It is used by
all units that cannot give the exact time.
Note:
17 bytes of internal header data that are not user data follow the time stamp with the
VvB8020 fieldbus cards.
The direction filter enables selection
All
Reception
Transmission
The channel filters show all channels which appear in the record. The following
mean:
All
C(ontroller)
1( ... 3) TCP channel number host
Combining the two channel filters can either filter out the data of two host channels or
the data of a host channel can be combined with the internal data. The host data
contain the 6 Modbus/TCP header bytes.
The copy function transfers the currently selected data into an editor window.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6 Lists of Cyclic Data
2.6.1 Explanations on Data Lists
There are separate lists for the various data types.

Each list contains the following information:
ID
Used with protocols:

Modbus for data address
Modbus/TCP for data address
Profibus DP for ID indicating the value to be transferred
DeviceNet s. Profibus
EtherNet/IP s. Profibus
The ID value addresses the complete data word. If a bit is to be addressed (as is
possible with MODBUS), add the number before value meaning to the word address.
e.g.: General alarm (data segment "Status")
Word address 0x02F0 + 5 --> bit address 0x02F5
The bold-printed IDs shall be used for:

! Profibus DP
! DeviceNet
They determine the base address of a double word.
Value
The "Value" column states the meaning of the value in the INTECONT system.
Scale types
The Type column indicates whether or not the respective value is available with the
selected scale type. If not available, ZERO value is returned. Preset values relating
to non-existing IDs are not evaluated.
Note:
Non-existing values are possibly available in a later software version (new extension
stage).
Mode (commands only)

Commands can be triggered by level or edge. Letter D(ynamic) indicates that a
change from 0 to 1 triggers the desired action. Letter S(tatic) indicates that the
level determines the function.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.2 Commands
Attention: Special condition or source

parameter for marked values "!". See manual.
(x) Not available with measusing systems

o Reserved for use with EasyServe
Byte- Word- ID ID Rem. Value Mode VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM
Offset Offset (HEX) (DEC)
For Protocol 3964(R), data block 96 HEX

starts here!
0 0 100 256 ! Command 0 (coded as number)
Feed index (Range 1...4)
1 Century x x x x x
2 1 Command 1 (coded as number)

Year x x x x x
3 Month x x x x x
4 2 120 288 Command 2 (coded as number)

Day x x x x x
5 Hour x x x x x
6 3 Command 3 (coded as number)

Minute x x x x x
7 Second x x x x x
8 4 140 320 Command 4 LO (bit-coded)

! 0 Start Scale (D) x x x x x
! 1 Stop Scale (D) x x x x x
2 Clear Events (D) x x x x x
3 Fieldbus-Release (S) x x x x x
4 Select Volumetric Mode (D) x x x
! 5 Select Gravimetric Mode (D) x x x
6 Reset Totalizer 1 (D) x x x x x
7 Reset Totalizer 2 (D) x x x x x
9 Command 4 HI (bit-coded)
! 8 Volum. Synchronous (D) x x
9 Moisture Corr. ON (D)
A Moisture Corr. OFF (D)
B Meas. Drive OFF (D) x
! C Gate Feedback (S)
D Open Gate Manual (D)
E Stop Gate Manual (D)
F Close Gate Manual (D)
10 5 Command 5 LO (bit-coded)
0 Select Batch (D) x x x x x
1 Deselect Batch (D) x x x x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data


2 - Abort Batch (D) x x x x x

3 - Next Batch +Clearance (D) x
4 - Make-Up (D) x x x
5 - Emergency Setpoint ON (D)
6 - Emergency Setpoint OFF (D)
7 - Meas. Drive ON (D)
8 - Filling Start (D) x
9 - Filling Stop (D) x
A - Emptying Start (D) x
B - Emptying Stop (D) x
C - Init. Hopper Controller (D)
D - Activate Fill Unit (D)
E - Activate Prefeeder (D) x x x x
F - Stop Prefeeder (D) x x x x
! 0 - Tare (D) x x x x x
! 1 - Zero Set (D) x x x x
! 2 - Weight Check (D) x x x x
! 3 - Pulses/Revolution (D) x x
! 4 - DAE Adjustment (D) x
! 5 - Linearization P1 (D) x
! 9 - Volumetric (D) x
! A - Optimize controller (D) x
B - Calibration Acquire (D) x x x x x
C - Calibration Abort (D) x x x x x
D - Time Acquire (D) x x x x x
! E - Bin: Tare (D)
! F - Bin: Weight Check (D)
! 8 - Print Batch Report (D) x x x x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data


9 Print Status Report (D) x x x x x

A Print Intermediate Totalizer (D) x x x x x
B Cancel Printout (D) x x x x x
C Print Parameters (D) x x x x x
D Print Parameter Shortlist (D)
E Reserved (Register EasyServe) (D) o o o o o
F Reserved (Deregister EasyServe) (D) o o o o o
0 Start Keyb. Mode (D) x x x x x
1 Stop Keyb. Mode (D) x x x x x
2 Start Simulation (D) x x x x
3 Stop Simulation (D) x x x x
4 Load Default Parameter (D) x x x x x
5 Check Meas. Start (D) x
6 Manual Prefeeder (ES only) (D)
7 Automatic Prefeeder (ES only) (D)
reserved
2.6.3 Preset Values in Floating Point Format

parameter for marked values "!". See
manual.
Byte- Word- ID ID Bem. Value VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block AO

HEX starts here!
0 0 250 592 ! Absolute Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
4 2 252 594 ! Absolute Batch Setpoint [kg] x x x x X
8 4 254 596 Make-Up Setpoint [kg] x x X
12 6 256 598 Batch No. x x x
16 8 258 600 PLC-Analog-OUT 1
20 10 25A 602 PLC-Analog-OUT 2
24 12 25C 604 Span Correction Value
28 14 25E 606 Tare Correction Value

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
32 16 260 608 ! Difference Feed Rate [kg/h]

36 18 262 610 Hopper Level [kg]
40 20 264 612 ! Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h]
44 22 266 614 Setpoint Hopper Level [kg]
48 24 268 616
52 26 26A 618
56 28 26C 620
60 30 26E 622
2.6.4 Preset Values in Integer Format (Modbus)

parameter for marked values "!". See
manual.
Byte- Word- ID ID Value VLW VBW VDB VMD VDM
0 0 20 32 ! Serial Setpoint [kg/h] x x

0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 300% P
2 1 21 33 ! Serial Batch Setpoint [kg/h] x x x x
0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P * 8 HRS.
4 2 22 34 Make-Up Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
0 to MAXINCR. = 0 to 100% P

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.5 Status Information
Byte- Word- ID ID Value VBW VDB VLW VMD VDM

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 64 HEX

starts here!
0 0 02D0 720 Status 0 (coded as number)
Scale Type (Low Byte) x x x x x
1 Software Revision (High Byte) x x x x x
2 1 Status 1 (coded as number)

Software-Version (Low-Byte) x x x x x
3 Software-Version (High-Byte) x x x x x
4 2 02F0 752 Status 2 LO (bit-coded)

0 Scale On (measurement active; no motor x x x x x
control in local mode)
1 - No Release x x x x x
2 Counter Active x x x x x
3 Volumetric x x x
4 Select. Language OK x x x x x
5 Alarm x x x x x
6 Warning x x x x x
7 Calibration Active x x x x x
5 Status 2 HI (bit-coded)
8 Normal Mode x x x x x
9 Keyboard Mode x x x x x
A Local Mode
B Simulation Mode x x x x
C Volum. Start-Up x x x
D Meas. Drive ON x
E Wheel Meas. Drive Delay x
F Setpoint Limited x x
6 3 Status 3 LO (bit-coded)
0 Batch Selected x x x x x
1 Batch Active x x x x x
2 Batch Dribble Feed (pre-act cont.) x x x x x
3 Batch + Clearance x
4 NON-SI active x x x x x
5 Dead Time active
6 Dead Time Setpoint active
7 Dead Time ON/OFF active
8 Tare x x x x x
9 Zero Set x x x x
A Weight Check x x x x
B Pulses/Revolution x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

C DAE Adjustment x
D Auto Zero active x x x
E Volumetric Adaption x
F Gravimetric Optimization x
8 4 0310 784 Status 4 LO (bit-coded)

0 Meas. System x x x
1 Gain-In-Weight x
2 Filling Active x
3 Discharge Active x x x
4 Gate Open x
5 Gate Closed x
! 6 2nd Batch Unit active (VLW20151 only)
7 Surge Hopper present
8 Feed rate > MAX x x x x x
9 Feed rate < MIN x x x x x
A Belt load > MAX x x
B Belt load < MIN x x
C Speed > MAX x x
D Speed < MIN x x
E Bin > MAX
F Bin < MIN
0 Bin Level Control existent
1 Hopper level > MAX x
2 Hopper level < MIN x
3 Measured load > MAX x
4 Measured load < MIN
5 n > MAX x
6 n < MIN x x
7 Check system waits for acknowledgement
8 Check system available
9 Rel. tare exceeded
A Abs. tare exceeded
B Rel. range exceeded
C Abs. range exceeded
D Check meas. announced
E Prepare check
F Check active
12 6 0330 816 Status 6 LO (bit-coded)

0 NON-SI active x x x x x
1 Waiting for Confirm. x x x x x
2 Waiting for checkweight x x x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

3 Param. active to VLB x x x x x

4 Linearization P1 x
8 Open Gate x
9 Blow-out ON x
A Manual Prefeeder
B - Bin: Tare
C - Bin: Weight Check
D Optimization Bin Controller
E - 2nd Bridge > MAX
F - 2nd Bridge < MIN
0 Emergency Setpoint active
1 Trend active
2-
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-
8 Moisture Corr. Active
9 Moisture > MAX
A Moisture Meas. Faulty
B PreFeed Control Active
C EasyServe active x x x x x
D EasyServe announced x x x x x
! E Feeder 1 Active (VLW20152 only)
! F Feeder 2 Active (VLW20152 only
16 8 0350 848 Status 8

0 Calibr. Set Nominal Feed Rate
1 - Dig. Output Pre-cut-off Amount
2 MAX Limit Value
3 - MIN Limit Value
4 VSM 20110 (DISOCONT L)
5 Refilling Active x x x x
6 VSM 20107 (Pulverized Coal)
7 Fill Bin Weigher
17 Reserved
8-
9-
A-

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
9 Status 9
18 Reserved
19 Reserved
The events defined in a type of scale react on

the event-bits. Bits not used are send with the
value Null.
20 10 0370 880 Event S1-S8

0 Event Warning 2 S1 x x x x x
21 Event S9
9-
A-
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
22 11 --
23 --
24 12 0390 912 Event Warning 2 E1-E8 x x x x x

25 Event Warning 2 E9 x x x x x
26 13 --
27 --
28 14 03B0 944 Event Warning 2 B1-B8 x x x x x

29 Event Warning 2 B9 x x x x x
30 15 --
31 --
32 16 03D0 976 --
33 --

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

34 17 --
35 --
36 18 03F0 1008 Event Warning 2 C1-C8 x x x x x

37 Event Warning 2 C9 x x x x x
38 19 Event Warning 2 H1-H8 x x x x x

39 Event Warning 2 H9 x x x x x
40 20 0410 1040 Event Warning 2 L1-L8 x x x x x

41 Event Warning 2 L9 x x x x x
42 21 Event Warning 1 S1-S8 x x x x x

44 22 0430 1072 --
45 --
46 23 Event Warning 1 E1-E8 x x x x x

47 Event Warning 1 E9 x x x x x
48 24 0450 1104 --
49 --
50 25 Event Warning 1 B1-B8 x x x x x

51 Event Warning 1 B9 x x x x x
52 26 0470 1136 --
53 --
54 27 --
55 --
56 28 0490 1168 --
57 --
58 29 Event Warning 1 C1-C8 x x x x x

59 Event Warning 1 C9 x x x x x
60 30 04B0 1200 Event Warning 1 H1-H8 x x x x x

61 Event Warning 1 H9 x x x x x
31 Event Warning 1 L1-L8 x x x x x

62 Event Warning 1 L9 x x x x x
63
64 32 04D0 1232 Event Alarm S1-S8 x x x x x
65 Event Alarm S9 x x x x x
66 33 --

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

67 --
68 34 04F0 1264 Event Alarm E1-E8 x x x x x

69 Event Alarm E9 x x x x x
70 35 --
71 --
72 36 0510 1296 Event Alarm B1-B8 x x x x x

73 Event Alarm B9 x x x x x
74 37 --
75 --
76 38 0530 1328 --
77 --
78 39 --
79 --
80 40 0550 1360 Event Alarm C1-C8 x x x x x

81 Event Alarm C9 x x x x x
82 41 Event Alarm H1-H8 x x x x x

83 Event Alarm H9 x x x x x
84 42 0570 1392 Event Alarm L1-L8 x x x x x

85 Event Alarm L9 x x x x x
86 43 Digital Inputs
0 DI1 x x x x x
1 DI2 x x x x x
2 DI3 x x x x x
3 DI4 x x x x x
4 DI5 x x x x x
5 DI6 x x x x x
6 DI7 x x x x x
7-
87 Digital Inputs: Error Bits

8 DI1 Error
9 DI2 Error
A DI3 Error
B DI4 Error
C DI5 Error
D DI6 Error x x x x x
E DI7 Error x x x x x
F-
88 44 0590 1424

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

89
90 45 Digital Outputs
0 - DO1 x x x x x
1 - DO2 x x x x x
2 - DO3 x x x x x
3 - DO4 x x x x x
4 - DO5 x x x x x
5 - DO6 x x x x x
6 - DO7 x x x x x
7 - DO8 x x x x x
91
92 46 05B0 1456
93
94 47
95
96 48 05D0 1488
97
98 49
99
100 50 05F0 1520

101
102 51
103
104 52 0610 1552 Highest-Priority Event (LO) x x x x x

Bit 0 3 Event number
Range 0 8
corresponds to displays 1 - 9
Bit 4 7 Event group

Range 1 12
S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11
105 Highest-Priority Event (HI) x x x x x

Bit 8 11 Event class
Range 1 4
A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4)
Bit 12 - 15 Acknowledge event

Range 0 1
Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0
106 53 Parameter block of the event class

107 Parameter block number

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

108 54 0630 1584 Century x x x x x

109 Year x x x x x
110 55 Month x x x x x
111 Day x x x x x
112 56 0650 1616 Hour x x x x x

113 Minute x x x x x
114 57 Second x x x x x
115 Feed index
116 58 0670 1648 Next Event from error logger (LO) x x x x x

(Zero if list is empty)
Bit 0 - 3 Event number

Range 0 - 8
corresponds to displays 1 - 9
Bit 4 - 7 Event group

Range 1 - 12
S = 1, E = 3, B=5, C=9, H=10, L=11
117 Next Event from error logger (HI) x x x x x
Bit 8 - 11 Event class

Range 1 - 4
A=1, W1=2, W2=3, (IG=4)
Bit 12 Acknowledge event

Range 0 - 1
Acknowledged = 1, Not acknowledged = 0
Bit 13 New Event

Range 0 - 1
New = 1
Bit 14 Reset Event

Range 0 - 1 (Reset = 1)
Bit 15 Time: am /pm

Range 0 - 1 (am = 0, pm = 1)
118 59 Time stamp event logger x x x

119 Time stamp event logger x x x
Bit 0- 5: Seconds (0-59)
Bit 6-11: Minutes (0-59)
Bit 12-15: Hours (0-11)

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.6 Measurement Values in Floating Point Format

For Protocol 3964(R), data block 6E HEX

starts here!
0 0 0750 1872 Feed Rate [kg/h] x x x x x
4 2 0752 1874 Totalizer 1 [kg] x x x x x
16 8 0758 1880 Belt Load [kg/m] x x
20 10 075A 1882 Measured load [kg] x x
24 12 075C 1884 Belt Speed [m/s] x x
28 14 075E 1886 Speed [1/min] x x
32 16 0760 1888 Fill Weight [kg] x
36 18 0762 1890 Surge Hopper [kg]
40 20 0764 1892 2nd Platform [kg/m]
44 22 0766 1894 Actual Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
48 24 0768 1896 Batch Feed Rate [kg] x x x x x
52 26 076A 1898 Batch Res. Amount [kg] x x x x x
56 28 076C 1900 Relative Setpoint [%] x x x
60 30 076E 1902 Prefeeder Position [%]
64 32 0770 1904 Deviation [%] x x x
68 34 0772 1906 Moisture [%]
72 36 0774 1908 Feed Rate Moisture Corr. [kg/h]
76 38 0776 1910 Totalizer 1 Corr. [kg]
80 40 0778 1912 Totalizer 2 Corr. [kg]
84 42 077A 1914 Totalizer 3 Corr. [kg]
88 44 077C 1916 Rel. Bin Weight
92 46 077E 1918 Setpoint Bin Level
96 48 0780 1920 VSE1: Analog Output [mA] x x x x x
100 50 0782 1922 VEA1: Analog Input [mA] x x x x x
104 52 0784 1924 VEA1: Analog Output [mA] x x x x x
108 54 0786 1926 VSE2: Analog Output [mA]
112 56 0788 1928 VEA2: Analog Input [mA]
116 58 078A 1930 VEA2: Analog Output [mA]
120 60 078C 1932 VSE3: Analog Output [mA]
124 62 078E 1934 VEA3: Analog Input [mA]
128 64 0790 1936 VEA3: Analog Output [mA]
132 66 0792 1938 Belt Slip [%] x x
136 68 0794 1940 Belt Drift [cm] x x
140 70 0796 1942 Relative Feed Rate [%] x x x x x
144 72 0798 1944 Relative Belt Load [%] x x
148 74 079A 1946 External Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
152 76 079C 1948 Batch Setpoint [kg] x x x x x
156 78 079E 1950 Tacho [Hz] x x x x
160 80 07A0 1952 Utilize L/C [%] x x x x x
164 82 07A2 1954 Load Cell Raw VAP [mV/V] x x
168 84 07A4 1956 Load Cell Raw BIC [mV/V] x x
172 86 07A6 1958 Load Cell Raw [mV/V] x x x x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

176 88 07A8 1960 Controller Magnitude [mA] x x x

180 90 07AA 1962 Rel. Fill Weight [%] x
184 92 07AC 1964 Calibration Result 1 -Current Upper Value x x x x x
188 94 07AE 1966 Calibration Result 2 - Current Lower Value x x x x x
192 96 07B0 1968 Y_unlin x
196 98 07B2 1970 Y_lin x
200 100 07B4 1972 DAE Utilization [%] x
204 102 07B6 1974 Differential of F [kg/h] x
208 104 07B8 1976 Adaption Factor Index 1 x
212 106 07BA 1978 Adaption Factor Index 2
216 108 07BC 1980 Adaption Factor Index 3
220 110 07BE 1982 Adaption Factor Index 4
224 112 07C0 1984 CM Meas. Time [s] x
228 114 07C2 1986 Number of all CM x
232 116 07C4 1988 Curr. No. x
236 118 07C6 1990 CM: Mean Delta-F [kg] x
240 120 07C8 1992 CM Mean Feed Rate [kg/h] x
244 122 07CA 1994 Feed Constancy [%] x
248 124 07CC 1996 Nominal Belt Load [kg/m] x x
252 126 07CE 1998 Feed Constancy [g] x
256 128 07D0 2000 Control Magnitude Yz [mA]
260 130 07D2 2002 Control Magnitude Yzi [%]
264 132 07D4 2004 Nominal Measured Load [kg] x x
268 134 07D6 2006 Actual Value, not linearized [kg/h] x x
272 136 07D8 2008 Actual Tare [kg] x x x x
276 138 07DA 2010 Bin: Utilize L/C [%]
280 140 07DC 2012 Bin: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]
284 142 07DE 2014 Control Magnitude Yb [mA]
288 144 07E0 2016 Control Magnitude Ybi [mA]
292 146 07E2 2018 Analog Input DI4 [mA]
296 148 07E4 2020 Check: Relative Tare [%]
300 150 07E6 2022 Check: Relative Span [%]
304 152 07E8 2024 Check: Continuous Totalizer Z [kg]
308 154 07EA 2026 Check: Result F/Z
312 156 07EC 2028 Check: Measurement Time [h]
316 158 07EE 2030 Check: Belt Length [m]
320 160 07F0 2032 2nd Bridge: Relative Belt Load [%]
324 162 07F2 2034 2nd Bridge: Load Cell Raw [mV/V]
328 164 07F4 2036 2nd Bridge: Utilize L/C [%]
332 166 07F6 2038 Control Magnitude Y2 [%]
336 168 07F8 2040 Difference Feed Rate [kg/h]
340 170 07FA 2042 Rel. Actual Setpoint [%] x x x
344 172 07FC 2044 Rel. Measured Load [%] x x
348 174 07FE 2046 Bin Feed Rate [kg/h]
352 176 0800 2048 Check Meas. Monitoring [%]
356 178 0802 2050 Component Control Magnitude [mA]
360 180 0804 2052 Current Batch-No. x x x
364 182 0806 2054 Totalizer Component 1 [kg]
372 186 080A 2058 Totalizer Component 3 [kg]

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data

376 188 080C 2060 Totalizer Component 4 [kg]

380 190 080E 2062 Totalizer Component 5 [kg]
404 202 081A 2074 Totalizer Sum of all Batches [kg]
408 204 081C 2076 Tacho Input VSE 2 [Hz]
412 206 081E 2078 Corr. Feed Rate rel. [%]
416 208 0820 2080 Belt Load [kg/m] non-linearized x
420 210 0822 2082 2-Sensor Slip [%]
424 212 0824 2084 Setpoint last / act. Batch [kg]
428 214 0826 2086 Current No. of last / act. Batch
432 216 0828 2088 Component No. of last / act. Batch
436 218 082A 2090 EIO: Analog Output 1 [mA]
440 220 082C 2092 EIO: Analog Output 2 [mA]
444 222 082E 2094 EIO: Analog Output 3 [mA]
448 224 0830 2096 EIO: Analog Output 4 [mA]
452 226 0832 2098 EIO: Analog Input 1 [mA]
468 234 083A 2106 Setpoint Feeder 1 [kg/h]
472 236 083C 2108 Setpoint Feeder 2 [kg/h]
476 238 083E 2110 Nominal Feed Rate Total [kg/h]
480 240 0840 2112 Contr. Magnit. 2nd Feeder [mA]
484 242 0842 2114 Speed 2nd Feeder [1/min]
488 244 0844 2116 Feed Rate 2nd Feeder [kg/h]
492 246 0846 2118 Fill-Weight 2nd Feeder [kg]
496 248 0848 2120 Counter 2nd Feeder
500 250 084A 2122 Check Weigher Print Value 1 x
504 252 084C 2124 Check Weigher Print Value 2 x
508 254 084E 2126 Check Weigher Print Value 3 x
512 256 0850 2128 Check Weigher Actual Value [%] x
516 258 0852 2130 Check Weigher Variance
520 260 0854 2132 L/C Resistance [ohms] x x x x x
524 262 0856 2134 Make-up Setpoint [kg] x x x
528 264 0858 2136 Make-up Residual Amount [kg] x x x
532 266 085A 2138 Mean Value I [%] x
536 268 085C 2140 Variance I [%] x
540 270 085E 2142 Belt Load QMAX [%] x
544 272 0860 2144 Time QMIN [%] x
548 274 0862 2146 Taring Result 1 [%] x
552 276 0864 2148 Taring Result 2 [%] x
556 278 0866 2150 Taring Result 3 [%] x
560 280 0868 2152 Taring Result 4 [%] x
564 282 086A 2154 Taring Result 5 [%] x
568 284 086C 2156 Check Weigher Print Value 4 x
572 286 086E 2158 Pulse Sensor x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.7 Measurement Values in Integer Format (Modbus)

0 0 30 48 Actual value [kg/h] x x x x x

0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to P * 8 Hours
8 4 34 52 Belt Load [kg/m] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q
10 5 35 53 Measured Load [kg] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200% Q
12 6 36 54 Speed [m/s] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100%V [cm/s]
14 7 37 55 RPM [1/min] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% N
16 8 38 56 Hopper [kg] x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% F
18 9 39 57 Surge Hopper [kg]
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100% B
20 10 3A 58 Surge Hopper [kg]
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 200 % Q
22 11 3B 59 Effective Setpoint [kg/h] x x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 300% P
24 12 3C 60 Batch Actual Value [kg] x x x x x
26 13 3D 61 Batch Residual Amount [kg] x x x x x
28 14 3E 62 Procental Setpoint Evaluation [%] x x
0 to MAXINCREMENTS = 0 to 100 %
30 15 3F 63 Prefeeder Position [%]
32 16 40 64 Deviation [%] x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.8 Values in Long Integer Format

For Protocol 3964(R), data block C8 HEX

starts here!
0 0 0980 2432 Pulses still output
4 2 0982 2434 Pulses output x x x x x
8 4 0984 2436 Time Voltage ON [h] x x x x x
12 6 0986 2438 Time Scale ON [h] x x x x x
16 8 0988 2440 Reserved x
20 10 098A 2442 Selected Options x x x x x
24 12 098C 2444 Status Bit Field 1 for Commands 4 and 5 x x x x x
28 14 098E 2446 Status Bit Field 2 for Commands 6 and 7 x x x x x
32 16 0990 2448 Status Bit Field 3 for Commands 8 and 9 x x x x x
36 18 0992 2450 Status Bit Field 4 for Commands 10 and 11 x x x x x
40 20 0994 2452 Calibration Result 1 Text ID x x x x x
44 22 0996 2454 Calibration Result 1 Unit ID x x x x x
48 24 0998 2456 Calibration Result 2 Text ID x x x x x
52 26 099A 2458 Calibration Result 2 Unit ID x x x x x
56 28 099C 2460 Calibration Result 1 After -comma-places x x x x x
ID
60 30 099E 2462 Calibration Result 2 After-comma-places ID x x x x x
64 32 09A0 2464 Calibration Error Text ID x x x x x
68 34 09A2 2466 Para-Checksum x x x x x
72 36 09A4 2468 Software Date x x x x x
76 38 09A6 2470 Flash-Checksum x x x x x
80 40 09A8 2472 Flash-Checksum calculated x x x x x
84 42 09AA 2474 Hardware-Version x x x x x
88 44 09AC 2476 Option Card Version x x x x x
92 46 09AE 2478 Pulses Output x x x x x

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Data
2.6.9 Events
The input in table references the parameter used to change the event class.
System Message (S-1) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM
S1 Memory Error O 02 Q 02 N 02 M 02 M 02
S2 No Release O 07 Q 07 N 07 M 06 M 04
S3 Maintenance STR-Meter K 04 K 04 K 04 K 04 K 04
S4 Maintenance Interval Electric K 02 K 02 K 02 K 02 K 02
S5 RESERVE
S6 RESERVE
S7 Simulation active Q 10 N 10 M 08 M 07
S8 Setpoint limited Q 11 N 11 M 09
S9 Communication Error Host L 03 L 03 L 03 L 03 L 03
Electrical System (E-3) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM

E1 Power Failure O 01 Q 01 N 01 M 01 M 01
E2 Namur Error Tacho O 04 Q 04 N 04 M 04
E3 Namur Error Belt O 05 Q 05 N 05
E4 RESERVE
E5 Stand-By F 14 F 14 F 10
E6 External Input F 15 M 10 M 08
E7 RESERVE
E8 RESERVE
E9 RESERVE
Material Flow (B-5) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM

B1 Out of Tolerance I 06 I 05 I 05 I 05 I 05
B2 Control Deviation R 24 O 08 N 06
B3 Controller Ltd. R 25 O 09 N 07
B4 Max BATCH Act. Value I 08
B5 DAE active O 08
B6 DAE Time O 09
B7 T_Gate H 16
B8 T_Volumetric H 17
B9 Linearization S 10 P 10 O 10 N 10
Calibration (C-9) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM

C1 L/C Input O 06 Q 06 N 06 M 05 M 03
C2 Tacho Input O 03 Q 03 N 03 M 03
C3 Belt Skew N 12 M 12
C4 Belt Drift N 10 M 10
C5 Tare Correction > MAX H 05 H 04 H 04
C6 RESERVE
C7 Set Time To Zero H 07
C8 Slip Error N 14 M 14
C9 Tare Diff. > MAX H 12
Maximum (H-10) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM

H1 I > MAX F 04 F 04 F 04 F 04 F 04
H2 Load > MAX F 08 F 08
H3 v > MAX F 12 F 12
H4 L/C Input > MAX O 08 Q 08 N 08 M 07 M 05
H5 F > MAX F 08
H6 Wheel Overload F 06
H7 n > MAX F 12
H8 F > Fo H 09
H9 RESERVE
Minimum (L-11) VBW VLW VDB VMD VDM

L1 I < MIN F 02 F 02 F 02 F 02 F 02
L2 Load < MIN F 06 F 06
L3 v < MIN F 10 F 10
L4 L/C Input < MIN O 09 Q 09 N 09 M 06
L5 F < MIN F 06
L6 RESERVE
L7 n < MIN F 10 F 08
L8 F < Buffer MIN H 07
L9 RESERVE

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
3 PROFIBUS DP
This chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Profibus slave to a Profibus
Master assembly.
Described is the functionality of the Profibus module, the data exchange between
Profibus Master and INTECONT, fault diagnosis and troubleshooting. The Profibus
hardware is described at the Profibus Module VPB020V/VPB8020 item.
Designed to assist the S7 programmer in commissioning, Manual BVH2204 describes
the use of the general user data construction at the DISOCONT example. However,
data construction is identical for INTECONT.
3.1 Commissioning Guideline
1. Prepare the hardware as per the chapter on Profibus Module VPB020V /

VPB8020
VPB020 can always be used in the VEG units.
Starting with the program versions.

VBW20600-08
VDB20600-08
VDM20600-05
VLW20600-07
VMD20600-08
standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The

communication subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in
the fieldbus block.
2. Determine data to be transferred. Check to see if the data of FIXED mode 1/2
suffice to meet your requirements. If YES, select desired process image at
Fieldbus Communication Configuration. If NO, configure your process image
by input of requisite IDs (see Fieldbus Data item).
3. Generating the master parameter sets using the GSD file. Please select the
correct GSD file depending on the hardware used.
4. Start communication through Master.
3.2 Profibus Module Functionality
! Module certified to EN 50170

! Cyclic user data exchange with Master (DP-V0)
! Automatic baud rate recognition
! Bus interface monitoring
! Easy parameterisation of VPB 020V / VPB8020 using base unit control station or
EasyServe diagnostic tool
! Support of PROFIBUS control command SYNC for synchronised data transfer
from Master to various slaves
! Support of PROFIBUS control command FREEZE for synchronised data transfer
from various slaves to Master
! No user-specific diagnostic functions
! Fail Safe: clear state supported
! No change of station address via bus

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
For details and examples on user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.
3.4 Settings on DP-Slave (INTECONT)
For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool.
The parameter description holds for either unit.
Parameter Value range Default Explanation
Protocol type all fieldbus protocols NO Select protocol: here

Profibus-DP
Timeout Host 0 ... 300 s 10 s Designed for interface
monitoring.
ZERO value means that
interface is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication
Host W1 (Warning 1), error
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Address 0 ... 126 126 Slave address on Profibus
Configuration FIXED, FIXED Lets you set construction

NO_PARA_ID, and meaning of user data.
PARA_ID
Float format Siemens-KG, IEEE IEEE Format for all setpoints,
measurement values and
floating point parameters.
Hardware VxB020 VxB020 Selecting the communication
VxB8020 subassembly
Note
Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is
excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
3.5 Settings on Profibus DP Master

Unit-master-data files (GSD)
INTECONT PLUS is a modular slave whose properties are described by 3 modules.
Note:
! You will find the INTECONT PLUS configuration in the S7 hardware configurator
at Profibus-DP/Further Fieldbuses/Controller/INTECONT.
! The current GSD files
ICV10524.GSD (VEG + VPB020)

ICV20524.GSD (VEG + VPB8020)
can be loaded from the service page of Schenck-Process GmbH

(http://support.schenckprocess.com/ , path: Bus Systeme-Profibus).
! Reading/writing of double words in S7 systems: please note that the INTECONT

PLUS double words can neither be read nor written using function modules
SFC14 and SFC15 of S7 systems. Access the peripherals direct.

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
3.6 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event
message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that this message is assigned to
an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on
EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if
present, provides further information on fault diagnosis.
Event Message Communication Error Host
The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module:
! Different station address on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty. Watch LEDs
on module. In case of doubt, restart system, and module is initialised provided that
parameters are properly set (red LED flashes).
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available.
! Check resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus
connectors. For details, see Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change
parameterisation or replace module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation.
! Scale configuration differs from Master configuration. Change GSD module or
scale parameterisation.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs).
! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication
between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one
preset ID must be unequal to zero, or in FIXED mode the release bit must be
set.
! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus
parameter.
EasyServe Fieldbus view
The chapter on Fieldbus Data shows and explains how cyclical user data is displayed
for all protocols

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
3.7 Profibus Module (VPB020V)

Meaning of the LEDs on the Profibus connection
On the Profibus connection (VPB020V), the LED is lit
H1 (red) Blinking mode: when the Fieldbus connection has been reinitialised.
This happens after applying voltage and after
changing certain fieldbus parameters (in grey, see
below)
OFF: when initialising is complete and the user data
exchange is OK
H2 ON: when user data is being transmitted
(green) OFF: Connection not yet initialised or fieldbus
malfunctioning
If no LED is lit, please check the parameterisation and the cable connection to the
main board.
To provide an interface to the Profibus, the module can be attached to the INTECONT
PLUS cover. The module is certified to EN 50170, the protocol used is DP-V0.
Bus termination:
Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so, set
plug-in jumpers (W150, W151;W152) on board to position 1-2. On standard, the
resistors are not activated (position 2-3).
Bus address:
! Set address via parameter.
LED
! Status LED for communication OK (green)
! Bus error or configuration display (red)
The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position 2-3.

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
3.8 Profibus module (VPB8020)

An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base card (VKG) of
INTECONT to create an interface to the Profibus. The module is certified in conformity
with EN 50170, the protocol is DP-V0.
Bus termination
The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of the
bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a rule the
resistances are not activated (position 2-3).
Bus addresses:
! The addresses are set using parameters.
If no LED is lit, please check the parameterization and the cable connection to the
main board.
Opertion Mode (LED)
State Indication
Off Not online/No power
Green On-line, Date exchange
Green blinking on-line, clear mode
Red blinking (1 Hz) parameter error
Red blinking (2 Hz) configuration error
State LED
Schenck Process
PROFIBUS DP
Status Indication
Off Not power or not initialised
Green Initialised
Green blinking initialised, diagnostic event is pending
Red Exceeption error
Connector assignment (applies to all Profibus cards)
Pin Signal Signal

(X20, 9-pin Sub-D-female) (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5
max. 1.5mm)
Not used in INTECONT PLUS
1 - B-Line, positive RS485 RxD/TxD *
2 - A-Line, negative RS485 RxD/TxD
**
3 B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD * GND BUS
4 RTS, Request To Send +5V BUS
5 GND BUS Screening
6 +5V BUS -
7 - -
8 A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD ** -
9 - -
Housing Bus Cable Shield -
* This cable has the conductor color red.

** This cable has the conductor color green.
Characteristics (applies to all Profibus cards)
Isolation optocouplers
Voltage supply 5V DC internal
Current supply max. 310mA
Connectors 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm
9-pin Sub-D-female
3.9 For Further Reading

Profibus standard EN 50170
Profibus user organisation www.profibus.com
PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1, Grundlagen, Manfred Popp, Hthig Verlag , 2000
Tipps und Tricks fr Anwender
HMS documentation on Anybus-IC www.hms-networks.com
BVH2204 Commissioning aid for S7 programmers
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

Schenck Process
DeviceNet
4 DeviceNet
The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT DeviceNet slave to a
DeviceNet Master assembly.
Described is the functionality of the DeviceNet module, the data exchange between
DeviceNet Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting.
For DeviceNet hardware, see DeviceNet Module VCB020V / VCB8020V item.

The VCB020 can always be used in the VEG units.
Starting with the program versions
! VBW20600-08
! VDB20600-08
! VDM20600-05
! VLW20600-07
! VMD20600-08
standard procedure will be changing over to the VCB8020 model. The communication
subassemblies used are selected with the Hardware parameter in the fieldbus block.
! Determining the data to be transmitted - the ID of the data is required (see

'Fieldbus Data' chapter).
! Creating master parameter sets using the EDS file. Please select the correct EDS
file depending upon the hardware used.
! Set the Slave Address INTECONT parameter
! Start communication by the master
4.2 DeviceNet Module Functionality
! Module certified to DeviceNet specification 2.0

! Cyclic exchange of user data with Master. As a rule, the POLL mode is used for
transfer of I/O data.
! Bus interface monitoring
! Easy parameterisation of VCB020V / VCB8020V via base unit control station or
EasyServe diagnostic tool.

For details and samples on general user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.

Schenck Process
DeviceNet
4.4 Settings on DeviceNet Slave (INTECONT)

For parameterisation, use Operator Panel or EasyServe tool.
The parameter description holds for both units.
Protocol type all fieldbus NO Select protocol: here

protocols DeviceNet
monitoring.
interfance is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication error
Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Address 1 ... 63 63 Slave address on DeviceNet
Baud rate 125k, 250k, 500k 125k DeviceNet baud rate
Configuration FIXED, FIXED Lets you set construction and

NO_PARA_ID, meaning of user data
PARA_ID
DVN byte High-Low Low-High Byte sequence within a data
sequence Low-High word
DVN word I:std / L:std I:std / Word sequence within a data
sequence I:swp / L:std L:std double word, separately
I:std / L:swp settable for floating point
I:swp / L:swp values I(EEE) and integer
values L(ONG)
Hardware VxB020 VxB020 Selecting the communication
VxB8020 subassembly
Note
! Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave
is excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.
4.5 Settings on DeviceNet Master

Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
The description file files can be found at the Schenck Process GmbH service side
(http://support.schenckprocess.com, path: Service-Download-Bus systems-
DeviceNet). The download file includes a Readme with detailed information.

Schenck Process
DeviceNet

If you have selected one of the fieldbuses, any malfunction is reported by event
message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that this message is assigned to
an event class other than IG(NORE). The message is output both on display and on
EasyServe. If only the display is available, read the next two items. The EasyServe, if
present, provides further information on fault diagnosis.
Event MessageCommunication Error Host
The event message is designed to report any error concerning the fieldbus module:
! Different baud rate on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty.
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected. For proper connection, see
Fieldbus Hardware.
! Fieldbus hardware bus termination is not (or various times) available. Check
resistors on module (supplied state: "Not activated") and on bus connectors. For
details, see Fieldbus Hardware.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to the extension board. Change
parameterisation or replace module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterisation.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master --> scale message (only use bold-printed IDs).
! All preset IDs in message from host system have zero value (communication
between Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). Minimum one
preset ID must be unequal to zero, or in FIXED mode the release bit must be
set.
! The communication module does not fit the settings of the Hardware fieldbus
parameter.
EasyServe Fieldbus View
The representation of cyclic user data is the same for all protocols. For details, see
Fieldbus Data item.

Schenck Process
DeviceNet
4.7 DeviceNet Module (VCB020V)

To provide an interface to CAN bus using the DeviceNet protocol, you can attach the
module to the INTECONT cover.
Bus termination
! Activate the bus terminals resistors on first and the last stations on bus. To do so,
set the plug-in jumper W160 on board to position 1-2. On standard, the resistors
are not activated (position 2-3).
Baud rate and bus address are set via parameter.
X20 "
Set jumper W100 (Power supply source) to position 2-3.

Schenck Process
DeviceNet
4.8 DeviceNet Modul (VCB8020V)
An option is to mount the module in the cover (VEG) or on the base board (VKG) of
INTECONT to create an interface to the CAN bus with the DeviceNet procedure.
Bus termination
! The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station
of the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By
default, the resistances are not activated (position 2-3).
Baud rate and bus addresses:
! Both values are set using parameters.
Network Status (LED)
Status Indication
OFF Not online/ No power
Greev On-line, one or more connections are established
Green blinking on-line, no connection
Red Critical link failure
Red blinking (1 Hz) One or several connections are in time-out
Alternating Red/Green Self test
Moduel Status LED

Schenck Process
DeviceNet
Status Indication
Off No power
Green Operating in normal condition
Green blinking Faulty Configuration
Red Unreccoverable Faultst(s)
Red blinking Rectifiable Defect
Alternating Red/Greed Self test
Connector assignment (applies to all Devicenet cards)
Pin Signal X20

1 V-
2 CAN_L
3 screening
4 CAN_H
5 V+
Characteristics (applies to all Devicenet cards)
Isolation optocouplers
Connectors Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm
Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

DeviceNet specification Version 2.0 (ODVA)
Bosch CAN specification Version 2.0, Sept. 1991
DeviceNet user organisation www.odva.com
HMS documentation on Anybus-IC www.hms-networks.com
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

Schenck Process
Modbus
5 Modbus
The present chapter describes the interfacing of the INTECONT Modbus slave with a
Modbus Master assembly and describes the Modbus in the form activated by the
MODBUS selection. The previous version of the INTECONT-compatible Modbus
(MODCOMP) is described in Manual FH525 (only VEG).
Described is the functionality of the Modbus module, the data exchange between
Modbus Master and INTECONT, diagnosis and troubleshooting. The hardware of the
Modbus module is described at the end of this chapter.

Prepare the hardware as described in the Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Determine data to be transferred using the data IDs (see Fieldbus Data).
! Set INTECONT PLUS parameters Slave Address and Data Format.
! Start communication through Master.
5.2 Modbus Module Functionality

In general:
! Cyclical user data exchange with the master

! Monitoring the bus interface
! Easy to parameterise using the basic model's operating station or the EasyServe
diagnostic tool
! Modbus mode: RTU
VEG:
! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The
physical characteristics can be selected by parameters. It can als be connected
via RS232.
VKG :
! Connection with RS422 (4-wire bus) or RS485 (2-wire bus, also called J-bus). The
physics are selected with wire jumper. It is connected directly to the base board.
5.3 Data Format

Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values can be transmitted
both in the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits) and in the integer format. The integer
format readies a 16-bit word whose resolution can be set in the range of 0 ....
MAXINCREMENTS. The maximum resolution is 215 increments. Integer and IEEE
format are addressed using different data addresses.
For every parameter, the IEEE format can be swapped wordwise. All control
information and statusses are represented in the form of a binary signal using the 8
data bits of each character. In addition, all control and status information can be
treated as single bit information.

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.4 Function Codes (FC)

The table below lists the codes used and explains their meanings.
FC [dec] Meaning
1 Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits)
2 Bitwise reading of status information (one/multiple bits)
3 Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement values, LONG values
and parameters (one/multiple words)
4 Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words)
5 Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit)
6 Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word)
8 Diagnosis (only sub-codes 0 and 1)
15 Bitwise writing of control information (one/multiple bits)
16 Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words)
23 Reading and writing of multiple data words in one cycle. This function
code may be used in all cases where FC3 or FC16 can be used.
5.5 Transmission Protection

The characters are protected by a parity bit (see MODBUS specification).
The messages are protected by check sum (CRC16) (see MODBUS specification).
The MODBUS specification determines the reaction on transmission errors (see 2-1
EXCEPTION RESPONSE).
5.6 Error Codes

Used are only error codes 01 to 03. Upon CRC error no response is sent.
All errors described below are comprised in device in the form of general error
message Communication Host. The message includes the timeout.
Error code Meaning

1 Station does not support requested function (FC).
2 Faulty data address
! ID or SC out of range
! Data offset + length excessive
3 Wrong data type
! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000)
! Data length < 0
! Requested length excessive
! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd
5.7 Station Addresses

Each scale receives a slave address starting from 1 in rising sequence. In the
following text, the highest settable address is called MAXSLAVE. The address is set
on scale or EasyServe in the dialog mode. MAXSLAVE has value 254. Address 0 is
the boradcast address. In this case, the slaves do not return any response.

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.8 User Data
5.8.1 Process Values

Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the
data within a segment are added in continuous succession. The data of a segment
can be read or written using a message.
5.8.2 Parameters
All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, only one
parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID
unique throughout the system. For some important parameters of wagon type VLW,
these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For the residual parameters,
EasyServe can create a list including the IDs.
Note: Menu item EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETER-Print SysID lets you activate
printout of the IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note
that the modification of the selection parameters requires special knowledge. Floating
point and/or integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data
formats correspond to those of the cyclic values.
5.9 Cyclic Data Exchange Via Modbus

In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending on
function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must be
incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocols register addresses start from 1.
So the data address is configured like this:
Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT PLUS Address + 1.
5.10 Sample Messages

The following lines show the construction of the Modbus messages. The first column
represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale response.
Floating point values are represented in the form of an (unswapped) IEEE number.
Data to scale Scale response Meaning

01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 01 05 0140 ff00 8C12 Start scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2 01 05 0141 ff00 DDD2 Stop scale (single-bit command)
01 06 0140 0040 8812 01 06 0140 0040 8812 Reset counter 1 (preset word)
01 03 02F0 0004 4582 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read 4 words of status information
cc cc xx = data, cc = CRC16
01 03 1082 0002 60E3 01 03 04 42C8 0000 6FB5 Read parameter (nominal feed rate,
ID=1082 (hex), value = 100))
01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678 01 10 1082 0002 E520 Write parameter (value =163.34)
6C1A

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.11 Settings on Modbus Slave (INTECONT)

For parameterisation, you can use the Operator Panel or the EasyServe tool.
The parameter description holds for either unit.
Protocol type all fieldbus protocols NO Select protocol: here

Modbus
monitoring.
interface is not activated.
Communication W2 (Warning 2), IG Class of communication
Host W1 (Warning 1), error
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
Modbus address 1 ... 254 1 Slave address on Modbus
Modbus 1 ... 32767 4096 Indicates maximum number
resolution of increments of value in
analog, or integer, format.
Modbus IEEE I:std / L:std I:std / Determines the word
format I:swp / L:std L:std sequence for transmission
I:std / L:swp of measurement values in
I:swp / L:swp the I(EEE)/L(ONG) format.
Modbus baud 9.6 19.2 38.4 kBaud 9.6 kBaud Baud rate
rate
Modbus data 8-O-1 8-O-1 Modbus normally uses an
format 8-E-1 11-bit character frame, e.g.
8-N-2 8-O-1
8-N-1 (10-bit frame) 1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd
parity, 1 stop bit
Physics VEG: Physics Selecting the interface
RS232 RS485-2- physics
RS422 wire
RS485
VKG:
RS485-2-wire RS485-4-
RS485-4-wire wire
Note
Used for message end identification, the Modbus idle time is defined with 3.5
characters as a function of selected baud rate, and corresponds to approx. 4
milliseconds at 9600 baud. For adaptation to specific device configurations, this time
can be set in the EasyServe block. The setting acts both on EasyServe and fieldbus
interfaces.
Selected baud rate Modbus idle time in milliseconds

9600 4
19200 2
38400 1
When operating the EasyServe interface using a radio converter, the times stated in
table may be longer.

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.12 Settings on Modbus Master

! If data from various segments (see Fieldbus Data) are used, every segment
needs at least one message.
! Set correct byte sequence with values in the IEEE and LONG formats.
! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailer
bytes.

If you have activated (selected) one of the eligible fieldbus modules, any malfunction
is reported by event message "Communication Error Host (S9) provided that
message is assigned an event class other than IG(NORE). Message is output on
display and EasyServe. If only the display is available, continue reading from next
item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis.
Meaning of the Communication Host S9 event message
! Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message
reports the following errors:
! Different baud rates on Master and scale
! Cable connection between fieldbus module and base board faulty
! Fieldbus cable defective or improperly connected; for proper connection, see
! Bus termination absent or present multiple times. Check the jumpers in the
fieldbus connectors on the module. For details, see Fieldbus Hardware item.
! Selected protocol type does not correspond to add-on card. Change
parameterization or exchange module.
! Timeout parameter value too small. Change scale parameterization.
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message.
See also Error Codes item.

The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the Fieldbus
Data item.

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.14 Serial Bus Module (VSS021V - applies to VEG)

To provide a serial interface to the fieldbus Master, you can attach the module to the
INTECONT cover.
Bus termination
! The bus termination is realized using jumpers in the fieldbus connectors.

This ensures that the termination is preserved upon replacement of card.
! Am Busmaster sollten Sie einen 220 Ohm-Widerstand zur Terminierung
verwenden.
Baud rate, bus address, interface physics, data format
! All values are set via parameters. Depending on selected physics,

different connections must be realized on fieldbus connector (see below).
X20 "
Connector assignment X20
Pin No. RS 232 RS 422 RS 485

1 GND GND GND
2 TX TX- -
3 RX RX- RX-/TX-
4 - RX+ RX+/TX+
5 - TX+ -
6 - Bus termination Bus termination
7 - Bus termination Bus termination

Schenck Process
Modbus
Jumpers for interface physics and bus termination with RS485 (2-wire)
Bus terminal jumpers with RS422 (4-wire)
Characteristics
Isolation Optocouplers
Connectors Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

Schenck Process
Modbus
5.15 Connection for serial interface S3 (RS485- VKG)
Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped for operating as an RS485-2-wire interface. An
additional 120 Ohm bus termination resistance should be installed for the last bus
subscribers.
5.16 tie-in diagram S3 as RS485-2-wire
If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the
reception side (PINS 6-9).

Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996
BVH2098AA EASYSERVE

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6 Ethernet
This chapter describes all protocols and tools basing on Ethernet. At present, these
are the Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP application protocols.
Modbus/TCP
This uses the TCP/IP standard for data transmission and the application data appear
as a Modbus-RTU frame.
VEG:
Here, the Modbus/TCP interface is created via optional fieldbus card (VET020V).
VKG:
The Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP use the same Ethernet connection on the base
card. This makes it possible to connect the EasyServe via Modbus/TCP in parallel to
the Ethernet/IP fieldbus.
Ethernet/IP
EtherNet/IP adds the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) to standard Ethernet. This
is the same application protocol and object model used with DeviceNet. CIP facilitates
interoperability between devices from different manufacturers and sub-networks.
VEG:
Implemented with the optional fieldbus card (VET022V)
VKG:S. Note Modbus/TCP.
6.1 Ethernet Settings
Your INTECONT can be parameterized using the INTECONT control unit or the
EasyServe tool. The settings apply to Modbus/TCP and Ethernet/IP.
The parameter description holds for either system.
Parameter value range Default Explanation

value
IP address 1 0 255 192 Manual IP address assignment
IP address 2 0 255 168 (see above)
Network mask 1 0 255 255 Delegating the Subnetz mask
Network mask 2 0 255 255 (see above)
Gateway 1 0 255 0 Delegating the standard gateway
address
Gateway 2 0 255 0 (see above)

Schenck Process
Ethernet
Note
If you operate your INTECONT units on a local sub-network with specific network
card, we suggest to set the PC network adapter to the following values:
! IP address: 192.168.240.254
! Net mask: 255.255.255.0
! Gateway: 0.0.0.0
! INTECONT 1-n: 192.168.240.x wo x=1-n
! Always use unique IP addresses. Ask your system administrator for available
addresses.
6.2 Checking Station Addresses

You can check network parameters using the PING command available on any PC,
e.g. ping 192.168.240.1
If check is successful, reponse time of the final unit is displayed.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3 Modbus-TCP/IP
This item describes the functionality of INTECONT used as server on Ethernet.

In detail:
! Ethernet module (Ethernet Bus Module VET020V - VEG) item
! Ethernet module configuration (determine characteristics and assign station
addresses)
! FIELDBUS mode: Data exchange between Ethernet client and INTECONT via
Modbus/TCP
! WEB SERVER mode: Preparation and call of a WEB page
! Diagnosis and troubleshooting.
6.3.1 Commissioning Guideline

! Prepare hardware as described at Ethernet Bus Module VET020V (only VEG)
item.
! Activate protocol type Modbus-TCP on INTECONT.
! Parameterize Ethernet address on module.
! In FIELDBUS mode: Determine data to be transferred data IDs required (s.
Fieldbus Data item).
! Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode).
! Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.
6.3.2 Ethernet Module Functions
! Connect module using RJ45 connector.

! The server can exchange data with as many as 3 clients simultaneously in
fieldbus mode. If the EasyServe tool is used, it can occupy one of the three
channels if the coupling is performed over the network. The data are either sent
as Modbus (RTU)/TCP packets or are expected as such from external. The
functional range is described in more detail below.
! Monitoring the bus interface
! Easy to parameterise the interface using the basic model's operating station or
the EasyServe diagnostic tool.
6.3.3 Fieldbus Mode
In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like a Modbus/TCP server in accordance

with standard OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999
and masters all function codes of Classes 1 and 2 (save FC7) as well as the most
significant codes of Class 2 (FC15 and 23).
Data representation is totally oriented to the Modbus standard. The TCP safety layer
performs the function of the check sum (CRC16) of the Modbus message. Of the 6-
byte message header defined in the OPEN MODBUS standard, INTECONT only uses
the 6th byte to transfer the data length. The residual bytes are returned in the response
in ratio 1:1.
To enable later extensions, these header bytes (1-5) should not be used; set them to
ZERO.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.4 Station Addresses
In the Ethernet network, all stations are clearly identified by their IP addresses.
Therefore the Modbus slave address can always be set to value 1.
6.3.5 Function Codes (FC)
The list below explains the codes used:
FC [dec] Meaning
1 Bitwise re-reading of control information (one/multiple bits)
2 Bitwise re-reading of status information (one/multiple bits)
3 Wordwise (re)reading of setpoints, measurement, LONG and parameter
values (one/multiple words)
4 Wordwise reading of status information (one/multiple words)
5 Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always 1 bit)
6 Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoints (always 1 data word)
8 Diagnosis (sub-codes 0 and 1 only)
15 Bitwise writing of control information (one/(multiple bits)
16 Wordwise writing of commands (one/multiple data words)
23 Wordwise writing and simultaneous reading of data (one/multiple data
words)
6.3.6 Transmission Protection
With Modbus/TCP, the transmission is protected by the safety measures of the TCP
layer.
6.3.7 Error Codes
Only error codes 01 to 03 are used. Upon CRC error, no reponse is sent.
All errors described below are comprised in system in the form of general error
message Communication Error Host. This message includes the timeout.
Error Code Meaning

1 Station does not support requested function (FC).
2 Wrong data address
! ID or SC out of range
! Data offset + length excessive
3 Wrong data type
! Wrong data with FC 5 (admissible: 0xff00 and 0x0000)
! Data length < 0
! Requested length exceeded
! Data address with IEEE or INT32 values odd

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.8 Data Formats
Transmission starts with MSB. Setpoints and measurement values are transferred in
the IEEE float format (IEEE754, 32 bits). All control information and statusses are
represented in form of a binary signal using the 8 data bits of each character. In
addition, all control and status information can be treated as single bit information.
6.3.9 Process Values
Every cyclic data segment includes values of the same type. The addresses of the
data within a segment are consecutively added. The data of a segment can be read or
written using a single message.
6.3.10 Parameters
All parameters can be read and written. In contrast to cyclic values, however, only one
parameter per message can be processed. Transmission requires the parameter ID
unique throughout the system. For some significant parameters of scale type VLW,
these IDs can be found in the list of fieldbus data. For residual parameters, EasyServe
can prepare a list complete with IDs.
Note: Menu item EXTRAS-OPTIONS-PARAMETERS-Print SysID lets you activate
printout of IDs to be used for data address of the Modbus protocol. Please note that
special knowledge is required to edit the selection parameters. Floating point and/or
integer values can be read and written without any problems. The data formats
correspond to those of the cyclic values.
Note:
Parameters preset via fieldbus are accepted only if parameter mode is not active at
the same time.
6.3.11 Data Exchange Overview
In many cases, the host system must add a so-called segment address (depending
on function code) to the described data address. Furthermore, the data address must
be incremented by 1 since the Modbus protocols register addresses start from 1.
So the data address is configured like this:
Data Address = Segment Address + INTECONT Address + 1.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.12 Message Samples
The following lines show the construction of the Modbus/TCP messages. The first
column represents the message from bus Master to scale; the second, the scale
response.
Data to scale Scale response Meaning

00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Start scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0140 ff00 01 05 0140 ff00
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Stop scale (single-bit command)
01 05 0141 ff00 01 05 0141 ff00
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06
Reset counter 1 (preset word)
01 06 0140 0040 01 06 0140 0040
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 0B Read 4 words of status information
01 03 02F0 0004 01 03 08 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx = data, cc = CRC16
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 07 Read parameter (nominal feed rate,
01 03 1082 0002 01 03 04 42C8 0000 ID=1082 (hex), value = 100))
00 00 00 00 00 0B 00 00 00 00 00 06
Write parameter (value =163.34)
01 10 1082 0002 04 4323 5678 01 10 1082 0002
6.3.13 Settings on Modbus/TCP Slave (INTECONT)
Parameter Value Range Default Explanation
Protocol Type Any fieldbus NO Select protocol: here Modbus/TCP

protocol
Host Timeout 5 ... 300 s 10 s Serves for interface monitoring.
Values less than 5 are limited to
the minimum value.
Error Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)
WEB Coding HTML, XML XML Determines type of WEB page
(only VEG) coding. If XML is selected, data in
browser are represented by the
style sheet.
DHCP NO NO The IP address is assigned on
(only VEG) device or configuration tool
(EasyServe).

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.14 Settings on Modbus/TCP Master
! If data from various segments are used (s. Fieldbus Data), every segment needs
at least one message.
! Set correct byte sequence for values in the IEEE and LONG formats.
! Maximum admissible message length is 256 bytes including header and trailor
bytes.
6.3.15 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
item. The EasyServe tool provides further information on error diagnosis.
Note
An internal communication fault (fieldbus card INTECONT main board) produces a
timeout on fieldbus Master. To remove, restart your INTECONT.
Event message Communication Host S9
Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports
the following errors:
! Inadmissible ID (data address) detected in Master -> scale message.
See also Error Codes and "Interface Configuration items.
Monitoring the Fieldbus channels (VEG)

Only the channel with writing authorisation is monitored when fieldbus channels are
monitored for error indication and safety turn-off for the scale. Communication faults
are only shown for this channel. Setting the event class for the Host Communication
Fault to ALARM switches off the scale and all static command bits are put in the safe
state.
One exception: It also shows the Host Communication Fault if there is no fieldbus
channel that has acquired the specification right and if the fieldbus has already been
activated. In this case, the fault message can only be suppressed by changing the
event class to IGNORE.
In terms of this monitoring strategy, EasyServe is not considered to be a Fieldbus

client. The special settings in the relevant parameter block apply to EasyServe and
also the same rules with regard to logging on and off apply as with a serial coupling.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.16 Ethernet Bus Module (VET020V VEG)
You can also attach the module to the INTECONT PLUS cover in order to provide an
Ethernet interface (10BaseT) to the TCP client. Plug jumper W100 (determining
voltage supply) in position 2-3.
X20 "
Pin Assignment X20 (RJ45)
Pin Meaning
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 --
5 --
6 RX-
LEDs on the communication module
Green on / red off Communication is taking place via one of the field bus channels.
The telegrams are free of error.
Green on / red on Communication running, but an error exists (wrong ID, wrong
function code, wrong length)
All off No field bus client active or the mod bus/TCP protocol has not
been preselected.
Features
Separation Yes
Current supply Max 500mA
Ethernet topology 10BaseT
Connector RJ45

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.3.17 Ethernet connection VKG
The VKG scenario uses the standard Ethernet connection on the base board.
Netblock LED:
1 Link (green): Ethernet has the connection
2 FDX (yellow): full duplex
3 100 (red): 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)
6.3.18 For Further Reading
OPEN MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION Schneider Electric, Release 1.0,

29 March 1999
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. J/1996
Note
All external documents, updates and examples listed here can be loaded from the
service page of Schenck Process GmbH (http://support.schenckprocess.com, path:
Bus Systeme-TCP).

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.4 Ethernet/IP
6.4.1 Commissioning Guidelines
! Prepare hardware as described at item Ethernet Bus Module VET022V(VEG).

! Activate protocol type "Ethernet/IP" on INTECONT.
! Parameterize Ethernet address on module.
! Select process image and determine data to be transmitted.
! Start communication through Master (FIELDBUS mode).
! Call WEB page in WEB SERVER mode.
6.4.2 Ethernet Module Functions
! Connect module using RJ45 connector.

! In FIELDBUS mode, server can exchange data of multiple clients at the same
time. Ethernet/IP and Modbus/TCP are available as protocols. The process
image of the two protocols is the same. The communication module is not
designed to block any attempt to write, i.e. the last client having sent preset
values is the winner.
! The module can be used as Group 2 and 3 server on the Ethernet/IP network.
For more information, see ODVA WEB page.
! When using the Modbus/TCP protocol, the rules of Modbus/TCP specification
V1.0 apply. For details, see MODBUS.ORG or SCHENCK PROCESS Service
WEB pages.
! Bus interface is monitored.
! Easy parameterization of VET022V using base unit control station or EasyServe
diagnostic tool.
6.4.3 Fieldbus Mode

In FIELDBUS mode, INTECONT behaves like an Ethernet/IP or Modbus/TCP server.
The comments below dedicate to Ethernet/IP. For Modbus/TCP, a different
communication module is available, better suited to use the device features. For
protocol itself, see separate item.
6.4.4 User Data Construction

For details and examples on user data construction, see Fieldbus Data item.
6.4.5 Settings on Ethernet/IP-Slave (INTECONT)
Protocol Type Any fieldbus NO Select protocol: here Ethernet/IP

protocol
Host Timeout 5 ... 300 s 10 s Serves for interface monitoring.
Values less than 5 are limited to
the minimum value.
Error Host W1 (Warning 1),
A(LARM),
IG(nore)

Schenck Process
Ethernet
Byte sequence High-Low High- Swaps byte sequence in every user

Low-High Low data word
Word sequence I:std / L:std I:std / Determines the word sequence
I:swp / L:std L:std during transmission of
I:std / L:swp measurement values in the
I:swp / L:swp I(EEE)-/L(ONG) format. Also swaps
analog preset values.
Configuration FIXED, FIXED The parameter specifies the
NO_PARA_ID, process image
PARA_ID,
PARA_6ID
Any change to a grey-marked parameter resets the field connection, i.e. the slave is
excluded from user data exchange for approx. 4 sec.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.4.6 Configuration of the network in RSLogix 5000"
! Create a new project in RSLogix

! Configure the controller
! Select the EtherNet/IP bridge
! Configure the EtherNet/IP Bridge
! Add the INTECONT Satus station to the I/O configuration
! Add a generic Ethernet module
! Configure the new Ethernet/IP module
! Set connection options for INTECONT
! Download the configuration

Schenck Process
Ethernet
items. The EasyServe tool, if present, provides further information on error diagnosis.
Event message Communication Host S9
Designed as general message for any fieldbus connection faults, this message reports
the following errors:
! Different station addresses on Master and scale
! Inadmissible ID detected in Master -> scale message (exclusively use bold IDs).
! All preset IDs in host system message are set to zero (communication between
Master-CPU and communication processor (CP) failed). At least one preset ID
must be set to a correct value (unequal to zero); or Release bit set in FIXED
mode.
! If, despite established data communication, the data of the INTECONT (VKG) is
not updated, it is probably because the Ethernet/IP option is not activated (see
BVH2346, chapter Set options).
The representation of cyclic user data for all protocols is explained at the Fieldbus
Data item.

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.4.8 Ethernet Bus Module (VET022V) for VEG
To provide an Ethernet interface (10/100 BaseT) to the TCP client, you can also
attach the module to the INTECONT cover. To do so, plug jumper W100 (determine
power supply) in position 2-3.
X20 "
Pin assignment X20 (RJ45)
Pin Meaning
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 --
5 --
6 RX-
Characteristics
Separation Yes
Ethernet topology 10/100 BaseT
Connector RJ45

Schenck Process
Ethernet
6.5 Ethernet connection VKG
Netblock LED:
1 Link (green): Ethernet has the connection
2 FDX (yellow): full duplex
3 100 (red): 100 Mbaud (otherwise 10 Mbaud)
6.5.1 For Further Reading
Ethernet/IP Specification www.odva.org

ANYBUS-IC Design Guide www.hms-networks.com
ANYBUS-IC Fieldbus Appendix www.hms-networks.com
Network Analyzer (Packetyzer) www.packetyzer.com

Schenck Process
Application Examples
7 Application Examples
7.1 Zeroing and Taring Weighfeeders / Belt Weighers
Step ID ID Comment
dec. hex.
Leave normal mode and prepare Zeroing and Taring

1 Turn OFF 321 0x141 for batch to be deselected
2 Abort batch 338 0x152 for batch to be deselected
3 Deselect batch 337 0x151
4 Select volumetric mode 324 0x144 Speed proportional to setpoint
5 Close prefeeder 351 0x15F Prefeeder and feed gate remain
closed also if setpoint is not zero.
6 Turn ON 320 0x140
Setpoint needs not be 0.
Belt is running proportionally to setpoint.

If P=Po then v=vo; if P=Pn then v=vn.
Continue belt run until belt load is almost 0.

7 Read belt load 1880 0x758
Select zeroing or taring and continue accordingly.
! Zeroing: Item 8 and 9
! Taring: Item 10 and 11
Zeroing
8 Start Zeroing 367 0x171
9 Check statuses 776 0x308
Taring
10 Start Taring 368 0x170 Ensure that statuses are
11 Check statuses 777 0x309 available during zeroing, or taring.
12 Wait for status change. 817 0x331 Wait for acknowledgement.
Nullstellen (Step 13)
13 Calibration results included 1964 0x7A Deviation from last zero set or taring
in measurement values C
Tarieren (Step 14)
14 1966 0x7A New value for tare (P09.04) or
E tare correction (P09.05)
Acquire calibration result (Step 15)
15 379 0x17B Acceptance command
Check belt load If you select acquisition, make sure
1880 0x758 belt
load measurement value is zero (=
oscillates around zero point).
Reject calibration result and abort (Step 16)
16 380 0x17C
Return to Normal Mode
17 Turn OFF 321 0x141
18 Activate batch (if desired). 336 0x150
19 Involve prefeeder 350 0x15E
20 Gravimetrisch aktivieren 325 0x145
21 Enter desired setpoint; if need be, also batch setpoint.
22 Continue in normal mode.

Schenck Process
7.2 Batching via fieldbus
Please remember that not all actions are available for all scale types. You can
ascertain availability in the list of cyclical data.
You can also use the FIXED mode with the exception of the data specified under item
7.
Step Control system action Data Type ID hex. ID dec. Remarks
Preparations:
Set the turn-on source parameter (control sources block) and batch setpoint source (batching operation block) on
DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS to FB
1 Activate batching mode Command 150 336 Positive flank

This is still maintained if there is a
power failure in the scale.
2 Specify the batch setpoint [kg] Setpoint 252 594 Batch setpoints sent when the
(IEEE float) batch is in progress only go to
effect when the next batch is
started.
3 Specify the batch number Setpoint 256 598
(IEEE float)
4 Start the batch Command 140 320 Positive flank
5 Make an active test of the Status information 301 769 Log. 1 during full feed/dribble feed
batch and afterflow time
6 Test the batch pre-act contact Status information 302 770 Dribble feed reached
7 Query the digital outputs on Status information 590 1424 Not in the FIXED mode
the scale
(such as scale on/off and
prefeeder on/off)
8 Interrupt the batch Command 141 321 Positive flank
You can continue the batch in
progress with the start command
9 Let batch continue Command 140 320 Positive flank
10 End batch Command 152 160 Positive flank

Any subsequent start command
starts a new batch while the last
batch is not continued.
11 Query the remaining batch Readings 76A 1898 The quantity still to be discharged
quantity [kg] (IEEE float)
12 Actual batch value [kg] Readings 768 1896 The quantity already discharged
(IEEE float)
13 Deselect batch Command 151 15F Positive flank
This deactivates batching mode
NO_PARA_ID no parameters, 3 predetermination values, 6 reading values
Commands V- Commands V- Batch L- L- L- L- L- L- 0

V-
4+5 ID2 6+7 ID3 setpoint ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6
ID1
Status 2+3 Current Status 4+5 Status 6+7 Digital Actual Counter 1 Highest-
feed rate outputs batch priority
(ID 02F0) (ID 0750) (ID 0310) (ID 0330) value (ID 0752) event
(ID 0590) (ID 0610)
((ID 0768)
V-ID1 0140 commands 4+5 start, stop and reset counter, etc.

Schenck Process
V-ID2 0160 commands 6+7 wg. Start zero setting+ accept calibration result/abort
calibration
V-ID3 0252 batch setpoint
L-ID1 0310 Status 4+5 wg. Query whether the batch is active at clear
L-ID2 0330 Status 6+7 wg. Calibration + wait for acknowledgement
L-ID3 0590 digital outputs wg. Scale on/off + prefeeder on/off
L-ID4 0768 actual batch value
L-ID5 0752 counter 1
L-ID6 0610 highest-priority event

Schenck Process
DISOMAT Satus
System Manual
BV-H2331GB
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever and wherever
you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide,
personal, comprehensive service.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best
service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to
deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 61 51-15 31 0

Contents
1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 For systems in zone 1 explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Control displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Instructions for specific applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2 Some examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4 Field case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5 Connecting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2 Load cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.4 Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial S3 interface (RS485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.6 Connecting DISOMAT Satus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
with the VNT power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.7 Connection for the power supply for the VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC) . . . . . . 20
5.8 Protection against EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.10 Connections into the explosive zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6 Bus coupling modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.4 Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7 Analog display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8 Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
8.1 Serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8.3 Parametrization and calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
8.4 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.5 Function Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.6 Loading language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.7 Backup and Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.8 Loading flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.9 Product Service Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9 Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
10 Batching with DISOMAT Satus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10.1 Filling Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10.2 Dispatch Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.3 Materiald data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
11 Data processing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 I1

Schenck Process
11.2 List of procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.1 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.1 Procedure agreements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.3.1.2 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.3.1.2 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.3.2.1 Siemens procedure 3964R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.3.3.1 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.2 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.3.3.3 Examples for SIMATIC S5 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.3.4.1 Teleperm M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11.4 The structure of the utility data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.5 Data processing commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
13 Event Message Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
13 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
15 Equipment supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
16.1 Fieldbus accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I2 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus

Schenck Process
The Manual
This manual describes the DISOMAT Satus control electronics, called DISOMAT
or the system below
It explains:
How it works
Connection diagrams
Accessories
for the VSE 20900, VFG 20900 and VFG 20910 system versions
This manual is valid starting from the VWW 20900-004 firmware version
You can find additional information (such as other details on the fieldbus
couplings) in the following manuals for the DISOMAT system.
n DISOMAT Data Communication, Bplus, DISOMAT Opus,

DISOMAT Satus, DISOBOX Data Communication BV-H 2359
DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 i

Schenck Process
ii BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus

Schenck Process
Safety Instructions
1 Safety Instructions
Using for the Intended Purpose
The measuring system with the mechanical components connected to it is only

intended for weighing and control applications directly associated with that. Any
use beyond that is considered not intended.
Sources of danger
The measuring system does not generate any hazards during weighing operation
if the system is properly installed and put into service.
Using the measuring system might be dangerous if the system takes on contral
applications or when the material weighed is transported. Potential sources of
danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported
or metered in. In these cases, the measuring system may cause residual hazards
if untrained staff uses or operates it incorrectly..
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The user
is fully responsible for overall plant safety.
Labeling residual hazards

The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component used has
the potential to cause severe injury or death.
This symbol labels signs on hazard that could cause property damage to the
measuring system or other system components.
Personnel
Only skilled persons may prepare, install, start-up, operate, maintain and service
these systems.
Everyone doing work on the measuring system should read the safety instructions
and be aware of and follow the parts of the service manual applicable to them.
The operator should use the service manual to instruct the operating personnel to
comply with all regulations and instructions.
DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0836 1

Schenck Process
Safety Instructions
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only persons
familiar with how the system functions should be allowed to change these
parameters (such as with Schenck Process training). Incorrectly set parameters
may cause injuries to persons or damage to the machine whenever user control
systems are connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password
Parameters are protected by password from unauthorised changes. The
measuring system operator should act responsibly with the password.
Acknowledging fault messages

Fault messages may only be acknowledged after the cause of the fault has been
rectified.
Before acknowledging a fault, please ensure that connected peripheral units are
functioning properly. Check to see that any connected control systems are in safe
state.
Service and maintenance

Please follow all warning signs on the scale.
Please shut off the measuring system before working on the mechanical
equipment or peripheral units (particularly control systems). Take appropriate
action to ensure that the measuring system cannot be inadvertently restarted.
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply
(pull the plug).
Moisture and humidity

All of the parts of the scale (particularly electrical components) have to be
protected from moisture and humidity when the housing is open such as during
service work. Beyond this, the protection classes of the housing should be
observed.
Design modifications
Modifications to the measuring system and/or use of replacement parts not
supplied by Schenck Process renders Schencks liability null and void for resulting
damage. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to
affect the operating safety of the measuring system.
Replacing parts
Only use original Schenck Process replacement parts for repair. Using other spare
parts renders the warranty invalid.
2 BV-H2331GB / 0836 System Manual DISOMAT Satus

Schenck Process
System characteristics 2.1 General Information
2 System characteristics
2.1 General Information
DISOMAT Satus is a measuring amplifier for forming and monitoring weight
readings.
Its standard equipment is:
n A load cell connection for measurement transducers (such as Schenck Pro-
cess-RT load cells or Schenck Process measuring eyes)
n a serial service interface for configuring with a PC or VT terminal
n two serial data processing interfaces for transmitting data to a higher-level data
processing system
n one analog output
n 4 output contacts (relays)
n 3 input contacts (optocouplers)
DISOMAT Satus is particularly suited to systems that measure and/or monitor

the weights of a number of individual scales. It can be connected to a process
control system
via analog output or
to a data processing system via serial interface or
fieldbus.
A typical area of application is fill level monitoring in multiple-hopper systems.
DISOMAT Satus can also be used as a filling or dispatch scale using the serial
interface to control the batching process (for instance, presetting the setpoint or
feed ON/OFF).
Control LEDs display the most important operating states of DISOMAT Satus
while the DISOPLAN PC software package is for easy and convenient start-up.
DISOMAT Satus is installed in a field case or a 19 module assembly frame. The

voltage is supplied by a local 24 V = supply, the power supply unit in the 19
module assembly frame or a transformer in the field case.
Several DISOMAT Satus units can be integrated in Profibus and DeviceNet

networks with optional fieldbus upgrades.
The standard interface for integrating in Ethernet networks via MODBUS-TCP and
Ethernet-IP protocols are available in the unit.

Schenck Process
2.2 For systems in System characteristics
2.2 For systems in

zone 1 explosive areas
Fig. 1:
The VXB 209... protective circuits are part of the equipment that disconnects
intrinsically safe circuits from those that are not intrinsically safe. They have to be
built in an safe area. The components installed for limiting current and voltage
provide the explosion protection while retaining the galvanic connection to the
circuits.
Intended Use
The protective circuit is made of a Z barrier for:

n the load cell(s)
n 2 binary inputs
n the serial secondary display
n the analog output (4-20 mA)
You can find details on using the VXB 209... protective circuit in the BV-H2330
Safety Instructions.

Schenck Process
Start-Up 3.1 Control displays
3 Start-Up
3.1 Control displays
An der Frontplatte des DISOMAT Satus befinden sich 8 Leutdioden, die
Betriebszustnde des DISOMAT Satus signalisieren.
Fig. 2:

Schenck Process
3.1 Control displays Start-Up
The version with a display (VSE 20910) also has a 3 1/2 digit red LED display and
3 operating buttons (figure). Chapter 7. describes how the display is connected
and adjusted while the function of the keys depends on the chosen configuration.
Fig. 3:

Schenck Process
Planning
4 Planning
The VFE 900 main card has all of the components for normal operation: the
measuring circuit, CPU, power supply unit, serial interface for connecting up to a
data processing system, 4 safely disconnected relay outputs, 4 optocoupler inputs
and one analog output.
The Components and How They Function

Designation Function
DISOMAT Satus = VSE 20900 Measuring and Monitoring Weights and Data Trans-
Main Card mission to Higher-Level Data Processing Systems
DISOMAT Satus = Main card Measuring and monitoring weights and showing
with the display and operating them on a 3-digit LED display. The operating but-
buttons: VSE 20910 ton for Set tare / Clear tare / Zero setting.
19 VNG 900 module assembly Space for as much as 10 DISOMAT Satus or 5
frame (without racks and with DISOMAT Satus and 5 VXB oer 5 DISOMAT Sa-
blank panels) tus VSE20910 or 9 DISOMAT Satus + 1 VNT 3xx
power supply unit
VNT20900 power supply unit Power supply for as much as 6 DISOMAT Satus in
VNT20910 the 19 module assembly frame for as many as 9
VNT20930 DISOMAT Use Satus VNT 20930
VFG20900 field case Space for one DISOMAT Satus
VFG20910 field case Space for one DISOMAT Satus including the trans-
former (230/115 V) for its power supply
VPB 020 Profibus card Integrating into the Profibus or DeviceNet systems
VCB 020 DeviceNet card
VXB 209 ex interface module... intrinsically safe connection for components used in
explosive zones such as Schenck-RT load cells
(DISOMAT Satus outside of the explosive zone!)
DISOPLAN for convenient start-up under MS-Windows XP/2000

Schenck Process
4.1 Instructions for specific applications Planning
4.1 Instructions for specific applications

Connecting several load cells/measuring eyes
To connect several load cells or measuring eyes to DISOMAT Satus, you need a
DKK 69/70 interconnecting box (for as many as 4 load cells) or a DKK6 (for 6 load
cells) or a VKK 28008 (for 8 load cells) with overload protection wherever required.
The Control System of DISOMAT Satus

(such as with a data processing system, process control system or PLC)
You can trigger one single DISOMAT Satus via serial or analog interface,
although several DISOMAT Satus have to be controlled. There are the following
options for solving this problem:
n The control system has enough analog interfaces (such as the process control
system or PLS)
n They control the DISOMAT Satus units via the compatible-for-bus RS 485 in-
terface with a MODBUS/J-Bus protocol and a data processing system.
n You couple the DISOMAT Satus units via fieldbus upgrade.
n You couple via built-in Ethernet interface (MODBUS-TCP or Ethernet-IP proto-
col).
Maximum distances
The acceptable distances between DISOMAT Satus and peripheral units
connected to it depend on what interface the peripheral units are operated on.
Serial computer interface
Interface Maximum cable length

RS 232 15 m
RS 485, 2-wire 800 m at the maximum baudrate of 9,600 baud
(compatible for bus with a maximum of 16 bus sub-
scribers)
Analog interface
n 300 m
Connecting the load cells

n 1,000 m with Schenck Process load cells and Schenck Process measuring
eyes (8 x 0.5 mm measuring cable)

Schenck Process
Planning 4.2 Some examples of applications
4.2 Some examples of applications

The graph below shows all options for connecting up and upgrading a DISOMAT
Satus. The connecting options are shown in broken lines.
Fig. 5:
First example: DISOMAT Satus in a non-explosive zone via analog interface on a process control
system
Fig. 4:

Schenck Process
4.2 Some examples of applications Planning
Second example: DISOMAT Satus in the Profibus with a VPB fieldbus card
Fig. 7:
Third example:DISOMAT Satus with a scale, display and control system in an explosive zone
Fig. 6:

Schenck Process
Planning 4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack
4.3 Assembly in the 19 rack

19 subassemblies of DISOMAT Satus have the dimensions below:
Height
129 mm (3HE)
The width of the standard subassemblies

VSE 20900
VXB 209xx
VNT
41 mm (8TE)
The version with the display (VSE 20910) is twice as wide (82 mm)
The depth of the boards is 270 mm

Installation depth including the plug and cable outlet: 330 mm
It is best to use the DNG 900 rack for assembling the components.
This is either is supplied complete with DISOMAT Satus subassemblies when
ordered or empty with the equipped blank panels. You can also use any 19
systems for installation, although the cable have to be carefully supported
(mechanically with strain relief and electrically with cable shields).
The rack takes a maximum of 10 subassemblies where units with a display require
2 slots.
An example of maximum fitting:
10x VSE 20900 24 VDC feed
9x VSE 20900 network feed
5x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, 24 VDC
4x VSE 20900 with VXB safety barrier, network feed
5x VSE 20910 24 VDC
A power supply unit is always mounted on the far right side of the rack. Bus cards,
Profibus and DeviceNet are mounted directly on DISOMAT. You do not need any
additional space in the rack.

Schenck Process
4.4 Field case Planning
4.4 Field case
Fig. 8:

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 4.4 Field case
5 Connecting the Unit

Figure 9 shows the location of the terminals
Fig. 9
1: power supply
digital outputs
digital inputs
analog output
2: serial interface S2 (RS 232)
serial interface S3 (RS 485)
load cell connection
3: serial interface S1 (RS 232)
4: network connection (Ethernet)
5: Adapter plug for the fieldbus modules

Schenck Process
5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone Connecting the Unit
5.1 Connection assignment: non-explosive zone
Fig. 10:
* You can use a fourth

input contact after removing the encoder pin from X1.1B Pin4.

Schenck Process
5.2
The power cable for Potential equalization rail Potential Equalization Line
2
Signal the DVC platform scale
4x2x0,5 mm2 7x0,5 mm
Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit
28 RD 28 RD
BK BK/WH BK BK (BN) 82 BK 82 BK
Supply Voltage +82
Load cells
82.1 82.1 +
BL BU/WH BU BL 82
Supply Voltage -81 27 WH 27 WH - 27 28 +
YE YE GR 81.1
Supply Sense+82.1 81.1 81
-
Supply Sense -81.1 GN GN GN 81 BU 81 BU
50 50 YE/BK
Load Cell Signal +28 RD RD RD YE/BK
Junction Box To Potential Equalization
Load Cell Signal -27 WH GR WH (if required)
28 Line On Junction Box
RD
Screen plate 50 Screen NF
Fig. 11: Schenck RT-weighing cell connection

82 BK
Totally 82.1 +
Totally 82
Screened
Screened 27 WH
screened in - 27 28 +
pairs 81.1 81
-
81 BU
50
YE/BK
DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB / 0822

To Potential Equalization
Line On Junction Box
28 RD
82 BK
82.1 +
82
27 WH - 27 28 +
81.1 81
-
81 BU
Circuit board
- Load Cell Signal 27
27 50
28 + Load Cell Signal 28
82.1 YE/BK
NV To Potential Equalization
81.1 Line On Junction Box
+ Supply Sense 28
82.1 82 RD
- Supply Sense
81.1 82 BK
+ Supply Voltage
82 81 82.1
- Supply Voltage 82
81 27 WH - 27 28 +
Memory for 81.1 81
calibration data On Screen Plate -
Screen plate 81
Junction Box BU
(DKK 6,69,70) 50 50 Load Cells
YE/BK YE/BK
Jumper for write-protection of calibration
data (jumper open = parameters can be written) vh231001.cdr
5.2 Load cells
15
5.2 Load cells Connecting the Unit
If the scale design provides the ground connection from a load cell body, it is not
necessary to connect it via PAS.
The cable screen does not need to be connected to terminal 50 of the
interconnecting box for load cells whose connecting cable shield is connected to
the load cell body (e.g. Schenck VBB).
In this case, the shield is connected via the load cell body and PAS or ground.
Please refer to the manufacturers instructions for details on connecting more load
cells.
5.2.1 Preparing the load cell plug

The memory chip for setting and adjustment data has to be mounted before
connecting the load cell cable.
The chip is attached to the unit.
Remove connection 1 of the chip (refer to the figure; the flat side is upwards)
It is connected on pins 2 and 3 of the plug as shown (refer to the figure; the flat
side is upwards)
The parameters are write-protected with a jumper between pins 1 and 3.
Fig. 12
Fig. 13

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.2 Load cells
Signal 4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 4 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 7 x 0.5 mm2

4 x 2 x 0.23 mm2
ULC+/82 BKs4 + BK/WHs1 GNs4 + YEs1 gn (BK)
ULC-/81 BUs4 + BU/WHs1 BNs4 + WHs1 BN/BU (BU)
Usense+/82.1 GYs2 GNs2 GN/BU (YE)
Usense-/81.1 GNs2 WHs2 WH/BU (GN)
UMeas+/28 RDs3 BNs3 bn (RD)
UMeas-/27 WHs3 WHs3 wh (GR)
Shield/50 Shield Shield NC * (NC)*
s1, s2, s3, s4 = screened in pairs
Schenck Process 3849.807 / 3849.809 / 3849.810 / 3849.009 3849.717 / 3849.718
material no. 3849.808 (3849.701 / 3849.711)
*Neutral colour
Strands colour-coded as per DIN IEC
German
BK black
BN brown
RD red
OG orange
YE yellow
GN green
BU blue
VT violet
GY grey
WH white
PK pink
GD gold
TQ turquoise
SR silver

Schenck Process
5.4 Relay outputs Connecting the Unit
5.3 Digital inputs
Fig. 15: Inputs connection diagram
5.4 Relay outputs
Fig. 14: Relay outputs connection diagram

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial
5.5 Instruction for connecting the serial

S3 interface (RS485)
Contacts 6-7 and 8-9 are jumped to operate it as a RS485 2-wire interface and an
120-Ohm bus termination resistor should be mounted for the last bus subscriber.
Fig. 16: Connection diagram S3 as RS485-2
If this interface is operated in the 4-wire mode, the termination resistor goes on the
reception side (PINS 6-9).
5.5.1 Connnecting a PC or VT terminal to the S1 service

interface
Pin assignment: Use a null modem cable for connections (length < 3m)
Pin 2: RxD
Pin 3: TxD
Pin 5: 0 V

Schenck Process
5.7 Connection for the power supply for the Connecting the Unit
5.6 Connecting DISOMAT Satus

with the VNT power supply unit
Fig. 17:
5.7 Connection for the power supply for the

VFG 20910 field device (115/230 VAC)
There is a mains transformer in the VFG20910 field device. The terminals of the
transformer are labelled.
They are connected to the terminals depending on the mains voltage.
Terminals
0 and 230 V
or 0 and 115 V
0 115V 230V X

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier
5.8 Protection against EMC

Please do the following to guarantee optimum EMC resistance for DISOMAT
Satus:
n Do not conduct the measuring cable shield on the X1.0A plug, but lay it on the
shield rail or housing.
n Do not lay the shield of serial lines on the X1.0B plug, but directly on the hou-
sing/mounting plate (fast-on).
n Connect the fast-on on the back side of the unit by a short path with the hou-
sing (19 rack and mounting plate).
Ground the housing well (we recommend a minimum line cross-section of 4 mm)2
and contact via screwed cable lug (not fast-on).
5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier

The VXB safety barrier and main VFE subassembly are connected electrically via
multi-strand flat cable with preconnected plugs. It is virtually impossible to plug the
wrong pin in the wrong socket due to the different pole numbers on the plug.
The assignment is:
inputs, 4-pole -> X1.1. B 5-8
analog output, 2-pole -> X1.1. A 1-2
The attached analog doubler from DISOMAT (X1.1 A1-2) has to be attached if
you want the analog output to be used for triggering an analog display in the
explosive zone and for issuing signals in the safe zone (PLC, analog display).
It may never be doubled on the explosive side of the barrier (X41),
feed 3-pole -> X1.1. B 1-3,
double underclamp or use the free connection on the VNT power supply unit.
serial interface -> X0B 6-10

5-pole, small grid
load cell 10-pole -> X0A
The dongle with the memory chip is already mounted with the VXB.
IMPORTANT:
It makes sense to use the old memory chip again when replacing the VXB to keep
the scale parameters.

Schenck Process
5.9 Connecting the VXB 209xx safety barrier Connecting the Unit
Fig. 18:
A cover (6) is bolted onto the VXB 209... protective circuits to comply with the air
and conducting paths as per Table 4 of EN 50020. This provides a thread
measure of more than 50 mm between connecting components that are
intrinsically safe and those that are not intrinsically safe.

Schenck Process
Connecting the Unit 5.10 Connections into the explosive zone
5.10 Connections into the explosive zone
Fig. 19:
You can find the safety instructions and data with an impact on safety on the
VXB209x barriers in the BV-H2330 manual.

Schenck Process
5.10 Connections into the explosive zone Connecting the Unit

Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module
6 Bus coupling modules

The VPB 020, VPB 8020, VCB 020 and VCB8020 bus coupling modules are
fastened to the CPU board with 3 screws each (component side upwards). It is
electrically connected up via the ribbon cable. All of the parts needed for
subsequent mounting are attached to the coupling module.
6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module

The module can be attached to the main DISOMAT board to create an interface to
the PROFIBUS-DP. This module is designed and certified as per DIN 19245 or
Part 2 of EN 50170and has an automatic baud rate identification of up to 12
Mbit/s (12 MBaud).
The circuit board has two connections for connecting the bus. You can use both
the XP3 plug (terminals) and the XP1 (HD-9 pole) in the DISOMAT.
Please remember that the first and last unit on the PROFIBUS-DP system has to
have a bus termination . To solve this problem, jump W150, W151 and W152 to
1-2.
Caution: All bridges have to be in the same position.
Pin assignment
XP1 XP3
Pin no. Pin No.
3 1 RxD/TxD-P*
8 2 RxD/TxD-N**
5 3 DGND
6 4 VP
1 5 shield***
* : = -P = B
** : N = A
*** : Please do not put the shield on the plug, but on the cable
clamp
The HI20 LEDs indicate proper bus operation (transmitting and receiving)

Schenck Process
6.1 Profibus VPB 020 coupler module Bus coupling modules
Fig. 20: Position of connections and jumpers VPB 020
Important!
W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT.
Note:
If the last actively terminated slave is removed from the bus, this may cause the
entire bus to malfunction. This fault occurs particularly frequently when using
alternating scales. This problem can be avoided by using a separate active bus
termination as offered by Siemens under order number 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0 .
You can also purchase the bus termination from Schenck Process under material
no. V014298.B01.
External wiring
You can find instructions for installing external wiring and protecting against
malfunctions in the Profibus Guideline from the Profibus User Organisation (PNO),
order number 2.111.
You can find other details on the Profibus, in particular on building up the
transmitted data in the DISOMAT Bplus Manual, Opus, Satus, DISOBOX
BVH2316.
Projecting aids (drawings, rules)

The Profibus standard DIN 19245 (part 3) defines a unit master data file and you
can download the suitable Profibus projecting file (.gsd) by Internet from the
Schenck Process product page under www.schenckprocess.com under
products/services and downloads.

Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)
6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020)

As an option, the module can be fastened on the units base card to provide an
interface to the Profibus.
Bus termination
The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of
the bus. This is done by setting alljumper plugs into position 1-2 on the card. As a
rule the resistances are not activated (position 2-3).
Bus addresses:
n The addresses are set using parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 Operation Mode
Status-LED
6 7 8 9
Front View

On the Profibus connection (VPB8020), the LED is lit
Opertion Mode
State Indication
Off Not online/No power
Green On-line, Date exchange
Flashing Green On-line, clear
Flashing Red (1 Hz) Parametrization error
Flashing Red (2 Hz) PROFIBUS Configuration error

Schenck Process
6.2 Profibus module (VPB8020) Bus coupling modules
Status
State Indication
Off Not power or not initialised
Green Initialised
Flashing Green Initialised, diagnostic event(s) present
Red Exceeption error
Pin assignment
Pin Signal (XP1 9-pin Signal (XP3, 5-pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5
Sub-D-female) max. 1.5mm)
1 - B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD *
2 - A-Line, Negative RS485 RxD/TxD **
3 B-Line, Positive RS485 RxD/TxD GND BUS
*
4 RTS, Request To Send +5V BUS
5 GND BUS Shielding
6 +5V BUS -
7 - -
8 A-Line, Negative RS485 -
RxD/TxD **
9 - -
Housing Bus Cable Shield -
* This cable has the conductor color red.

** This cable has the conductor color green.
Characteristics
Disconnection Optocoupler
Power supply 5V DC internal
Power supply Max 310mA
Plug connector 5-Pin Phoenix MSTB 3.5 max. 1.5mm
9-pin Sub-D-femal

Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data

Profibus configurations
Various configurations are available in DISOMAT Satus:

n DISOMAT Satus Standard
32 / 22 bytes per direction
n DISOMAT Satus - Short
10/2 bytes per direction
n DISOMAT Satus Extended
56/60 bytes per direction
Flexible ID mechanism
n Select the coupling card used (VPB020/VPB8020) when configuring the Profi-
bus.
n Select compartibility (DISOMAT T/DISOMAT Satus)
n Select the configuration (see below)
n The following figure shows the valid constellations together with the gsd files to
be used and wherever necessary the CFC modules.
n
Device type DISOMAT T DISOMAT Satus

Software version All <4 4 and larger
Profibus-subassembly VPB 20100 VPB 020 VPB 020 VPB 8020
Compatibility DISOMAT T DISOMAT Satus
Possible configurations Short Short 4 ID, no text Short 0 8 ID,
Standard Standard Standard no text
Extended 4 ID, no text Extended
GSD file DSV4 6712 DSA1 0A97 DSA1 0A97 DSV4 6712 DSA1 0A97
CFC module DISOMAT T, Tplus - - DISOMAT T, Tplus DISCO_P7

Schenck Process
6.3 The content of the Profibus-DP coupling data Bus coupling modules
6.3.1 DISOMAT Satus standard configuration

(Standard Process Image VPB020 and VPB8020,
Mode DISOMAT T)
DP read register (32 bytes)
Object In- Byte Contents

dex
0 0-3 Pending faults
1 4-5 Input contacts 1-4
2 6-9 Output contacts 1-4
3 10-11 Undefined
4 12-15 Net (INT32) [g]
5 16-19 Tare (INT32) [g]
6 20-21 Scale status
7 22-25 Feed rate dg/dt (Float) [kg/s]
8 26-29 Batch actual value (Float) [kg]
9 30-31 Undefined
Pending faults
The number assigned to the fault message of a pending fault.
Refer to the table in the chapter on Event Messages
Input contacts
The date indicates the positions of the bit-coded input contacts.
bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
bit n = 0 : contact low
bit n = 1 : contact high
Output contacts
The outputs are also compiled bit coded in a datum as per the inputs.
bit 0 corresponds to contact 1, bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
bit n = 0 : contact low
bit n = 1 : contact high
Scale status, bit-coded (low byte)

UNDERFLOW bit 0, scale is in the underflow
OVERFLOW bit 1, scale is in the overflow
Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated
PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, scale is precisely zero
RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times resolution of weight is switched on
INVALID bit 5, weight is invalid
Tare_SET bit 6, scale is tared
NO_MOTION_STATE bit 7, scale is in no-motion state
ADJUSTMENT JUMPER bit 10, jumper in the adjustment position

Schenck Process
DP write register (22 bytes)
Object in- Byte Contents

dex
0 0-1 Unused
1 2-3 Scale commands
2 4-5 Undefined
3 6-7 Set data processing contacts
4 8-9 Data processing contacts
5 10 - 11 Unused
6 12 - 13 Unused
7 14 - 17 Unused
8 18 - 21 Unused
Scale commands
bit 1 : Clear tare
bit 0 : Tare
bit 2 : Zero setting
This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then
changed to 1.
set data processing contacts and data processing contacts
There are 4 data processing contacts

Bit 0 corresponds to contact 1 and bit 3 corresponds to contact 4
If a bit is 1 in the Set Data Processing Contacts space, the contact is set as per
the value in the Data Processing Contacts space.
Example:
Data processing contacts: 0x0a = 00001010
Set data processing contacts: 0x09 = 00001001
Contact 1 is set to LOW and contact 4 is set to HIGH. 1 in bit 1 of the Data
Processing Contacts space does not have any meaning.
In DISOMAT Satus, the physical output contacts are set if they were configured
to From Data Processing in the configuration.

Schenck Process
6.3.2 Configuration DISOMAT Satus-Short (Configuration

Short Process Image,VPB020 and VPB8020, Mode
DISOMAT T)
Object index byte Content

0 0-3 Gross weight in kg
(IEEE float)
1 4-7 Tare in kg (IEEE
float)
2 8-9 Scale status
Scale status, bit-coded (low byte)

UNDERFLOW bit 0, the scale is in the underflow
OVERFLOW bit 1, the scale is in the overflow
Tare_CALCULATED bit 2, tare was calculated
PRECISELY_ZERO bit 3, the scale is precisely zero
RESOLUTION bit 4, ten times the resolution if the weight is switched on
INVALID bit 5, the weight is invalid
Tare_SET bit 6, the scale is tared
NO-MOTION STATE bit 7, the scale is in no-motion state
DP write register (2 bytes)
Object index Byte Content

Scale commands
Bit 1 : Clear tare
Bit 0 : Tare
Bit 2 : zero setting
This action is triggered when the bit affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then
changed to 1.

Schenck Process
6.3.3 Konfiguration Satus-Extended (only VPB8020, Mode

DISOMAT T)
Object index byte Contents Alternative reading data

0 0-3 Pending faults
1 4-5 Entry contacts 1 - 4
2 6-9 Output contacts 1 - 4
3 10 - 11 Batch number
4 12 - 15 Net (INT32) [g]
5 16 - 19 Tare (INT32) [g]
6 20 - 21 Scale status
7 22 - 25 Feed rate dg/dt (float) [kg/s]
8 26 - 29 Actual batch value (float) [kg] Pre-contact (float)
9 30 - 33 Residual Amount of batch (float) [kg] Adaptation Factor (float)
10 34 - 37 Current setpoint/last batch (float) [kg] Controller magnitude full-feed (float)
11 38 - 41 Setpoint for next batch (float) [kg] Control magnitude for dribble feed
(float)
12 42 - 45 Level gross (float) [kg] Time for dribble speed of ramp (float)
13 46 - 49 Batch sum (balance sheet) (float)
14 50 - 53 Correction Amount (main contact) (float) [kg] Neg. tolerance (float)
15 54 - 55 Batching status
Alternative reading data

The alternative content of bytes 26-53 can be adjusted via bit 15 of the accept
command and it is the readback tool for the component parameters set.
Batching status
Bit 0 : feed unit ON
Bit 1 : batch active
Bit 2 : full feed
Bit 3 : dribble feed
Bit 4 : filling active
Bit 5 : discharging active
Bit 6 : open flap (for discharging or filling; identical with digital
output for flap OPEN)
Bit 7 : LOW / GIW type
Bit 8 : material quantity (Note: initiate discharging or filling)
Bit 9 : batching time > Max.
Bit 10 : time the flap is open> Max.
Bit 11 : except pos. tolerance
Bit 12 : except neg. tolerance
Bit 13 : spare
Bit 14 : spare

Schenck Process
DP writing index (60 bytes)
Object index byte Contents

0 0-1 Unused
2 4-5 Accept commands
3 6-7 Set data processing contacts
4 8-9 Data processing contacts
5 10 - 11 Command
6 12 - 13 Value 1 (INT16)
7 14 - 17 Value 2 (INT 32)
8 18 - 21 Value 3 (INT 32)
9 22 - 25 Batch setpoint (float) [kg]
10 26 - 29 Pre-contact (float) [kg]
11 30 - 33 Correction Amount (float) [kg]
12 34 - 37 Adaptation factor (float) [kg]
13 38 - 41 Controller Magnitude for full feed (float) [mA]
14 42 - 45 Controller Magnitude for dribble feed (float) [mA]
15 46 - 49 Time of dribble feed ramp (float) [s]
16 50 - 53 Pos. tolerance (float) [kg]
17 54 - 57 Neg. tolerance (float) [kg]
18 58 - 59 Batching commands
The dosage can be guided via charging commands in addition to the scale
commands of bytes 2/3 already described. This action is triggered when the bit
affected was 0 at least 200 msec and then changed to 1.
Charging commands
Bit 0: start
Bit 1: stop
Bit 2: cancel
Bit 3: clear batching total
Bit 4: start filling
Bit 5: stop filling
Bit 6: start discharging
Bit 7: stop discharging
Accept commands (bits 0-8 only go into effect when changing from 0 to 1)
Bit 0: accept pre-contact
Bit 1: accept correction amount
Bit 2: accept adaptation value
Bit 3: accept controller magnitude for full feed
Bit 4: accept controller magnitude for dribble feed
Bit 5: accept time for dribble feed ramp
Bit 6: pos. Accept tolerance value
bit 7: neg. Accept tolerance value
Bit 8: accept setpoint
Bit 9 - 14: spare
Bit 15: request component parameters (refer to read-only data) statically
Note: Values marked (float) are floating point numbers in the IEEE 7544 byte
format

Schenck Process
MSB LSB
Vorz/Exponent Mantissa 1 Mantissa 2 Mantissa 3
The transmission begins at the same time as the MSB.

For example:
Specifications for the master -> slave
byte 0 1 00 00
byte 2 3 00 00
byte 4 5 01 00 accept setpoint
byte 6 - 21 00 - 00
byte 22 25 41 20 00 00 setpoint: 10 kg
byte 26 29 3e 4c cc cd pre-contact: 0,2 kg
byte 30 - 33 3d 4c cc cd correction amount 0,05 kg
byte 34 - 37 3f 00 00 00 adaptation value 0,5
byte 38 - 59 00 - 00
Note:
Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 > 01 00:
DISOMAT only accepts the batch setpoint.
Changing byte 4-5 of 00 00 > 01 07:
DISOMAT accepts the setpoint and also the pre-contact, correction amount and
adaptation value.
Process image slave -> master

byte 03 00 00 00 00
byte 45 00 00
byte 69 00 00 00 00
byte 10 11 00 27 batch number 39
byte 12 15 00 00 1f 66 net (int)
byte 16 19 00 00 00 00 tare (int)
byte 20 21 00 80 wagon status: scale is in the no-motion
state
byte 22 25 b9 ca d6 19 dG/ dt: ca. 0.000
byte 26 29 40 9f 8e 25 actual batch value: 4,986 kg
byte 30 33 3c 63 b4 00 residual batch quantity: 0,014 kg
byte 34 37 40 9f ff ff current setpoint/last batch: 5 kg
byte 38 41 41 20 00 00 setpoint for next batch: 10 kg
byte 42 45 41 00 b5 17 level: 8,044 kg
byte 46 49 43 6e c9 78 batching total: 238,787 kg
byte 50 53 3d 30 56 4d correction amount: 0,043 kg
byte 54 55 00 00 00 00 batching status
6.3.4 Flexible ID Mechanism

(VPB020 and VPB8020 + DISOMAT Satus)
Refer to the BV-H2359 Manual for details

Schenck Process
6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module Bus coupling modules
6.4 Fieldbus monitoring (Profibus-DP)

Since output contacts can be set via fieldbus interface and drives of feed units can
be triggered , a communication failure has to be identified and the corresponding
outputs have to be changed into the safe state. Monitoring is active when the set
timeout > 0 and a fieldbus card is connected.
If the connection to a fieldbus master fails, current batching is stopped after

timeout and a fault message is issued. The fault message is automatically cleared
after resuming the connection.
6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module

This module can be attached to DISOMATs to interface it to the DeviceNet.
The VCB 020 card has two bus connecting plugs. Both XC1 and XC3 plugs can be
used in DISOMAT.
Pin no..
1 0V
2 CAN-
3 Shield (please lay on the cable inlet and not on the XC plug)
4 CAN+
5 +24V
The bus address is set via software.

Put jumper W160 onto 1-2.
W100 has to be on position 2-3 to operate with DISOMAT.
You can find more details on the Devicenet, in particular on the structure of
transmitted data, in the Data Communication BV-H2359 manual.

Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.5 VCB 020 Device Net Coupling Module
Fig. 21: Position of connectors and jumpers VCB 020

Schenck Process
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) Bus coupling modules
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020)

As an option, the module can be fastened on the units mainboard to provide an
interface to the CAN-Bus with DeviceNet procedure.
1
XP3 VCB8020
W160 H120
XP1 5 4 3 2 1
1
2
Feldbuskarten-
Verbinder
3
4
5 H110 W100
DC/DC 1
vh233407.cdr
Bus termination
n The bus termination resistances must be activated at the first and last station of
the bus. This is done by applying the W160 jumper to the position 1-2. By de-
fault, the resistances arenot activated (position 2-3).
Baud rate and bus addresses:

n Both values are set using parameters.
The W100 jumper, for determining the power supply, must be plugged in position
2-3.
XP1
Network Status LED
1 2 3 4 5
Module Status LED
Front View

Schenck Process
Bus coupling modules 6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020)
Network Status (LED)
Status Indication
Off Not online/ No power
Green On-line, one or more connections are established
Flashing Green (1Hz) Onl-ine, no connaections established
red Critical link failure
Flashing Red (1 Hz) One of more connection timed-out
Alternating Red/Green Self test
Moduel Status LED
Status Indication
OFF No power
Green Operating in normal condition
Flashing Green (1Hz) Missing or incomplete configutation, device needs

commissioning
Red Unreccoverable Faultst(s)
Flashing Red (1 Hz) Recoverable (Fault(s)
Alternating Red/Greed Self test
Plug assignment X20/XC3
Pin Signal X20

3 Screening
4 CAN_H
2 CAN_L
1 V-
5 V+
Characteristics
Disconnection Optocoupler
Power supply Max 250mA
Plug connector Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 2.5mm
Phoenix MSTB 5 max. 1.5mm

Schenck Process
6.6 DeviceNet module (VCB8020) Bus coupling modules

Schenck Process
Analog display
7 Analog display
An optional simple display can be connected to DISOMAT Satus that is triggered
by the analog interface (4 20 mA). Although the display is entirely fed from the
interfaces current, its load is so low that an analog PLC input can be fed without
any problems (maximum external load: 250 ).
The display has 3 1/2 digits

n The digits are 10 mm high
n It can be set with the DIP switch and potentiometer
n It can be combined with the 19" rack.
Connection and Configuration
Fig. 22:
The standard preset display shows triggering 0-1,000 at 420 mA. The display is
completely readjusted in the order described below.
1. Turn the zero point R3 potentiometer and the R7 zone potentiometer to the
right all the way to the catch.
Set the SW4 SW6 switches to OFF
2. The SW1 switch to ON (the end of the zone can be set between 650-1,350)
3. Trigger with 4 mA and set the display to 000 with the R3 potentiometer.
4. Trigger with 20 mA and set the display to 1000 with the R7 potentiometer.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as a check.
6. Set the desired decimal point with the SW4 SW6 switches.
SW6 ON 1 place behind the decimal point
SW5 ON 2 places behind the decimal point
SW4 ON 3 places behind the decimal point
You can preset the display ranges with the SW1-SW3 switches.

Schenck Process
Analog display
SW1 SW2 SW3 4mA 20mA

OFF OFF OFF 000 to 1050 - 1999
ON OFF OFF 000 to 650 - 1350
OFF ON OFF 000 to 450 - 800
OFF OFF ON 000 to 300 - 500
ON ON ON 000 to 200 - 300
Note:
You can easily specify 4 mA or 20 mA by issuing the setpoint via analog output.
Set P12 of the scale control parameters to 4 (refer to Chapter 6.5.7) and use
Disoplan or the TCLI command ES to select the setpoint.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
8 Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

The DISOPLAN PC program is available for conveniently configuring and
parametering the DISOMAT family scales
The instruments that can be interfaced now are:

DISOMAT Opus
DISOMAT Satus
DISOBOX
DISOMAT Tersus
Acceptable operating systems are:

n WINDOWS XP
n WINDOWS 2000
n WINDOWS Vista
You can do the following with DISOPLAN:

n Assign subscriber addresses to the serial bus
n Configure interfaced instruments

n Displaying the scale weights and operating the scale
n Display group and channel weights and their status (only with DISOBOX )
n Edit the language files and load into DISOMAT

n Read out the entire system configuration (back-up) and store in the PC
n Load stored data into a DISOMAT (restore) for fast substitute system set-up.
NOTE:
Access to the DISOPLAN functions is administered via license levels. They range
from the standard operator to the instrument developer. This is the reason why
some of the functions shown in this manual may not be visible or accessible in
other installations.
DISOPLAN installation is self-explanatory.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
IMPORTANT NOTE:
There are some unit parameters that cannot be set via DISOPLAN menu item
in the DISOMAT-Satus firmware version combination: VWW20900-04 with
DISOPLAN version 5.
Please use the Control Terminal function to configure these items. Follow the-
se steps:
Start the control terminal
main menu/display/control terminal)
Navigate with the arrow keys to menu item 41
(down/right/right/down).
Start password input (ENTER)
Password 618349 (ENTER)
Navigate with the arrow keys to the menu items.
This affects the items:

Calibration analog output menu item 435
Fieldbus 4334
Option management/release Ethernet-IP) 5d
Data acquisition (OK) is located in the control terminal on the END button.t.
Please leave the menu tree by repeatedly pressing the Arrow Up button before
you close the control terminal.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.1 Serial connection
8.1 Serial connection

You can connect these system with the following interfaces
DISOMAT Tersus S3 9-pole HD-plug

(use a null modem cable)
DISOMAT Satus S1
DISOMAT Opus S1 Use the V052410.B01 cable or make cables according to the connection
diagram in the system manual.
DISOBOX S1
Matching cables are included in DISOPLAN-CD.
You can connect DISOPLAN at any time if the interface is not occupied by other
systems. You have to turn the system on and off if the interface is otherwise
occupied (for instance, with a secondary display) and you can start set-up
operation with DISOPLAN within the first minute after turning it on. Turn
DISOPLAN on and off after ending it and its resumes normal operation after one
minute.
You can activate set-up operation in menu item 5C Start DISOPLAN at any time if
the system has a display and keyboard.
All systems can also be configured via Ethernet (the VET 020 option card has to
be installed on DISOBOX). This allows access to the system at any time, but the
configuration of the PC used has to allow access to the systems network address.
The following figure shows the start screen of DISOPLAN:

Schenck Process
8.1 Serial connection Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
Connected systems are identified by the Search for New Systems function and the
following series of figures shows how to communicate via Ethernet (there is a
different process with serial communication).
The figure below shows an example of how DISOMAT Opus is found.
Other detected device types are displayed in the window with different symbols.
To configure a system, either click the symbol twice or branch off to the specific
system via Display Selection.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus
8.2 DISOMAT Opus / Satus / Tersus

If you start configuring DISOMAT from the DISOPLAN start screen, you come to
the following overview field where you can call up the most important functions
directly:
Before starting configuration, you have to use the Enter Password function to set
the correct operating privilege. You can find details on the structure of privileges in
each operating manual.
IMPORTANT:
The current passwords in the system are used (they may differ from the factory
values given in the manual).
This does not apply to DISOMAT Satus.

Schenck Process
8.3 Parametrization and calibration Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
8.3 Parametrization and calibration

You can use the settings symbol to get to instrument configuration.
You can set some important system parameters directly in the window shown in
the following figure.
They are:
Function variant
- see below
Link function blocks (only DISOMAT Tersus)
- refer to the BVH2317 Manual
Fieldbus communication
IP configuration
Create a printing pattern
Specific national settings
- see below
Edit language
- see below
You can use the Parameter function to arrive at setting all system parameters.
When you load the data, it shows the internal menu tree of DISOMAT as shown.
It offers all instrument parameters and functions in a transparent fashion for editing
and executing. Since all of the functions have been explained in the BV-H2313
Operating Manual, we shall not go into them in detail here.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.4 Scale
Fig. 24:
8.4 Scale
Scales parameters. The best place to set the calibration and scales parameters is
in the menu Scales display / Parameters. The scales can also be set in this
menu under the Set sub-menu.
Fig. 23:

Schenck Process
8.4 Scale Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
Setting the Calibration Parameters
The scales can be configured in the Parameters / Calibration Parameters menu.

Details on the parameters can be found in the BVH2313 instruction manual.

Schenck Process
8.4.1 The Unit parameter

Display: Unit kg
Selection: t - tonnes
kg - kilogram (= preset)
g - gram
lb - Pound
N - Newton
kN - Kilo-Newton
Function: This parameter sets the unit of weight in your DISOMAT. This holds
true for inputting all parameters (such as pre-contact or main con-
tact) and for the weight display (base position).
8.4.2 Final Value parameter
Display: Final Value [current dim.] 600,000

Input: Any values in the range of 0.1 to 9000000
preset = 600,000
Function: This parameter defines final value of the scale. This is the final va-
lue of the largest range with the multiple-division or multiple-range
scale.
Important: The Scale Interval parameter is linked directly to the Fi-
nal Value parameter and both values have to fit together.
8.4.3 The Scale Interval parameter

Display: Scale interval [current dim.] 0.200
Input: Values in the range from 0.001 to 1000
preset = 0,200
Function: This parameter defines the scale interval and therefore the part
number of the scale.
Remarks: The scale interval defines the part number of the scale along with
the final value parameter.
part number = final value/scale interval
Scale intervals are only possible in modules of 1, 2 and 5.
If the scale interval entered is not realistic, you receive a event mes-
sage W1211:scale interval wrong.

Schenck Process
8.4.4 No motion difference parameter
Display: No motion difference 1d

Selection: 0d; 1d; 2d; 4d;
preset = 1d
selection in scale intervals
Function: This parameter defines when the scale identifies the no-motion state
along with the no motion time parameter .
The scale identifies the no-motion state when the readings measu-
red in the no motion time do not differ from the last reading measu-
red any more than the no motion difference.
Remarks: You can key in the no motion time under the
Scale Parameter menu item.
8.4.5 Zero setting range parameter
Display: Zero setting range 4%

Selection: 0%; 2%; 4%; 10%; 20%;
preset = 4%
Function: Along with the final value parameter, this parameter defines the ran-
ge within the scale can be set to zero. It is entered in % of the final
value.
Remarks: The weighing range is not narrowed down by zero setting.
The zero setting range is asymmetrical to the zero point:
2% = -0.5 .... +1.5
4% = -1.0 .... +3.0
10% = -2.5 .... +7.5
20% = -10.0 .... +10.0

Schenck Process
8.4.6 Overrange parameter
Display: Overrange 9d
Selection: 100%; 101%; 102%; 110%; 9d
preset = 9d
selected in % or in d (digit). 9d has to be selected with legal-for-tra-
de scales.
The digital parts or the smallest possible resolution of the weighing
range is called digit (d). This value corresponds to the scale interval
of the scale.
Function: This parameter defines what weight is shown above the final value
in relation to the final value. If the weight on the scale is greater than
the overrange, the symbol oooooo is shown instead of a weight
provided that the parameter legal-for-trade=yes. If legal-for-tra-
de=no, the overrange is shown by the symbol T symbol; the
weightis still displayed.
8.4.7 F-mechanical parameter
Display: F-mechanical 1.00

Input: any values in the range of 0.1 to 99999
preset = 1,00
input without dimensions
Function: This mechanical factor includes the mechanical design of the scale
(i.e., transmission, lifting and load sharing ratios).
F-mechanical = load on the scale / load on the load cell
Remarks: With scales without load transmission, the factor 1.00.
value < 1,0000: load reduction
value > 1,0000: load transmission

Schenck Process
Examples for F-mechanical:

A bin weigher is placed on 1 load cell and 2 fixed bearings. If the load cell and the
two fixed bearings are arranged to be symmetric to rotation around a circular bin
with its centre of gravity in the middle (load support to 3 x 120 degrees), the load is
distributed at 1/3:
33,33 %
Festlager
Pivot
Palier
33,33 % Supporto fisso
Wgezelle 100 %
Load cell Fmech = =3
33,33 %
Capteur
Cella pesatrice 33,33 %
Festlager
Pivot
Palier
Supporto fisso
Fig. 25:
You get different results with a rectangular bin or a circular bin in a symmetrical
weighing frame (even if it is square and completely symmetrical):
25 %
Festlager
Pivot
Palier
50 % Supporto fisso
Wgezelle Behlter 100 %
Load cell
Hopper
Rcipient
Fmech = =2
Recipiente
50 %
Capteur
Cella pesatrice 25 %
Festlager
Pivot
Palier
Supporto fisso
Fig. 26:
The reason for this load distribution is the fact that the distance of
the load cell (1/2 side length) and
the fixed bearings (1/2 of a diagonal)
to the bins centre of gravity differ; that means that the three bearing points do not
form a triangle with sides of equal length. This gives a value of 2 for theoretical
calibration.
The load of the load cells has to be correctly applied for their design.
In contrast to the two simple borderline cases shown here (rectangular bin with
non-symmetrical load distribution), it either has to be derived from a precise
geometric analysis or by weighing the medium (liquid) put into the bin in advance
(which is preferable).
IMPORTANT: Every calibration done with weights has to ensure that a centre of
gravity exactly in the middle.

Schenck Process
8.4.8 F-adjustment parameter
Display: F-adjustment 1.00

Input: any values in the range of 0.9 to 1.1
preset = 1
This adjustment factor takes in scattering in the indicators of the
load cells or the overal indicator of the scale mechanism. The sys-
tem ascertains the parameter value during the zone adjustment (Re-
fer to menu item 4453:range).
F-adjustment = test weight / weight shown
8.4.9 Load cell nominal load parameter
Display: Load cell nominal load 1000kg

Input always in [kg]: 1 - 999999
preset = 1000
Function: This parameter gives the nominal load of the load cells used.
If a eine load cell is loaded with the nominal load, it gives vol-
tage as a measuring signal at a feed voltage of 1V that corre-
sponds to its load cell factor (parameter WZ_K [mV/V] ).
Remarks: Always enter in kg. Load cells with nominal load information
in other units has to be converted to kg.
8.4.10 Load cell number parameter
Display: Load cell number 1

Input: any values in the range of 1 to 20
preset = 1
Function: This parameter gives the number of load cells of the scale. This
does not count any fixed bearings.
8.4.11 Load cell indicator parameter

Schenck Process
Display: WZ-K [mV/V] 2.85

Input: any values in the range of 0.1 to 10
preset = 2,85
Function: The load cell indicator (nominal indicator) states what output voltage
(measuring signal) a load cell supplies depending upon the feed vol-
tage if it is at its nominal load.
8.4.12 Dead weight parameter
Display: Dead weight + 0.00kg

Input: any values in the range of 0 to 999999
preset = 0,00
Function: Dead weight is the weight of the scale mechanism (the weight of the
empty scale) that loads the load cells in addition to the useful load,
i.e., the material to be weighed. The dead weight is calculated at
dead weight adjustment and keyed in as the Dead Weight calibrat-
ion parameter.
It is one of the two parameters that does not have to be keyed in
along with the adjustment factor.
The correct value only has to be keyed manually for the dead weight
with mathematical adjustment.
The legal for trade parameter has not significance for DISOMAT Satus.

Schenck Process
After completing the first parameter block, a second block opens automatically
Fig. 27:
8.4.13 Scale code parameter
Display: Scale code Scale 1(for example)

Input: Any text, max. 7 digits
Function: The operator uses this parameter to define the name of the scale.
8.4.14 Class parameter
Display: Class Handelswg. Kl. III

Selection: Handelswg. Kl.III; rough scale Kl.IIII; SWA; user-defined minimum
load
Function: This parameter defines the accuracy class of the scale. This chan-
ges the minimum load depending upon the application.
8.4.15 User-defined minimum load parameter
Display: User-defined minimum load [current dim] 0.00

Input: The minimum load of the scale in the current dimension
preset = 0
Function: This parameter defines the min= value of the electronic descriptive
plate if user-defined minimum load is selected in the Class parame-
ter]___ getroffen wurde.

Schenck Process
Other data are set under parameter/scale parameters, in particular the filter times.
8.4.16 Switch filter parameter
Display: Switch filter 0.20s

Selection: 0.02 s; 0.04 s; 0.10 s; 0.20 s; 0.40 s; 1.00 s
preset = 0.20 s
Function: Limit monitoring. This parameter defines the filter time in seconds
for the weights used by the Fast Comparators and for batching. The
longer the filter time, the more sluggish is scale monitoring. The va-
lue to be set is dictated by the external vibratory influences where
the scale is installed (such as mechanical vibrations).
8.4.17 Display filter parameter
Display: Display filter 0.47s

Selection: 0.06 s; 0.10 s; 0.15 s; 0.22 s; 0.33 s; 0.47 s; 0.68 s; 1.00 s; 1.50 s;
2.00 s; 3.30 s; 4.70 s
preset = 0.47 s
Function: This parameter defines the filter time for weights shown in the dis-
play. Function blocks, data processing transmission and no-motion
state monitoring also use the filtered weight. The longer the filter
time, the more sluggish is the scale display. The value to be set is
dictated by the external vibratory influences where the scale is in-
stalled (such as mechanical vibrations)..

Schenck Process
8.4.18 No motion time parameter
Display: No motion time 1.0s

Input: any values in the range of 0.0 to 10.0
preset = 1.0
Function: This parameter defines the no motion difference along with the
calibration parameter when the scale identifies the no-motion sta-
te.
rule of thumb: no motion time 0.8 * display filter

The system identifies no-motion state when the readings measured
in no motion time do not differ from the last reading measured any
more than the no motion difference .The no-motion state is shown in
the weight display with the >< symbol.
8.4.19 Zero tracking parameter
Display: Zero tracking No

Selection: No = off (preset)
yes = on
Auto = zero setting *)
Function: This parameter defines whether the scale is automatically reset to
zero within the zero setting range.
The following conditions apply to zero tracking:
1. The scale has to be in no motion for at least 1 second.
(refer to the conditions under the No Motion Time parameter)
2. The weight may not differ from the current zero point by any
more than d.
3. The weight may not have changed in the last second
by any more than 0.5 d/s.
4. The new zero point has to be within the zero setting range
(refer to Zero Setting Range parameter). Any
zero point shifts beyond this will be shown as weight.
*) If you select Auto, conditions 2 and 3 do not apply to negative
weights.

Schenck Process
8.4.20 Switch-over delay parameter
Display: Switch-over delay 1.0s

Input: any values in the range of 0.0 to10.0
preset = 1,0
Function: This parameter defines the switch-over delay between the two ran-
ges with the multiple-range scale/multiple-division cale. This keeps
the scale from switching to another range from a brief impact of
weight such as putting on the weighing material. It is switched over
when no-motion state or time has expired.
Remarks: Switch-over delay is only important for the multiple-division or mul-
tiple-range scale.
8.4.21 Filter time dG/dt parameter
Display: Filter time dG/dt [s] 2.00

Input: Any values in the range of 0 to 30,000
preset = 2,00
Function: This parameter defines filter time for the weight change display
8.4.22 Dead weight adjustment (adjustment / dead weight)

The dead weight is the constant weight of a scale design (such as the empty bin
and weighbridge) that loads the load cells (refer to the Dead Weight calibration
parameter).
The term dead weight does not have anything to do with the Tare function.
Make sure that the scale does not have a load. The systenm uses this menu item
to calculate the Dead Weight parameter and keys in the value. This weight will be
subtracted from the reading in future so that the actual weight is shown on the
scale.
8.4.23 Range adjustment (adjustment/range

The system uses the weight keyed in and the weight measured to calculate the
adjustment factor and keys it into the parameter list (refer to the F-adjustment
calibration parameter).

Schenck Process
8.4.24 Linearisation (adjustment/linearisation

correct (25%, 50%, 75% of the final value of the range) to 9.9 scale intervals.
The dead weight and range of the scale have to be adjusted before linearisation
Calculating the characteristic curve

Determine characteristic deviation in each support point and enter value.
Apply 25% of range as calibration weight.
Read the actual weight and make a note of it.
Calculate the correction in scale intervals (scale interval e is on the upper
left-hand side of the display) according to the formula:
Correction = (set weight - actual weight) / scale interval
(the scale interval of the large range with MT/MB scales)

Key in the correction in scale intervals under the 4452:linearisation menu
item.
Check deviation. Repeat if necessary.
Resume from next support point (50%, 75%).
Example calculation
You have a scale with a 600 kg weighing range and a verification scale interval of
0.2 kg (i.e., with 3,000 parts).
The scale shows a value of 300.28 with linearisation at 50% (equalling 300 kg)
with the support point. To linearise the scale, you have to calculate the correction
in scale intervals (not in kg) according to the formula above and key it in:
correction = (300.00 kg - 300.28 kg) / 0.2 kg = -0.28 / 0.2 = -1.4
The correction value to be entered is -1.4.

Schenck Process
8.6 Loading language Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN
8.5 Function Variants

You can use this menu item to activate and parameter predefined configurations
for the DISOMAT. You can find details in Chapters 9 and 10.
8.6 Loading language
Abb. 28:
A pre-prepared language file can be loaded into the DISOMAT in the

Maintenance / Language menu..
Select Standard and the desired language (Spanish in the example). Confirming
with OK will load the new language.Then activate this language under National
Settings / Language Loaded.

Schenck Process
Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN 8.9 Product Service Internet
8.7 Backup and Restore

The items concerning saving data can be found in the Maintenance menu:
Data security: reading out the program and data from DISOBOX into a back-up
file. This can also be called up directly from the main menu.
Data restoration: restoring data from the back-up file into the instrument
8.8 Loading flash

Loading a new software version. Loading is registered in the instrument (logfile)
8.9 Product Service Internet

The code issued under Information / Product Service Internet enables you to
download current information on DISOBOX such as software updates or the latest
manuals.

Schenck Process
8.9 Product Service Internet Instructions for operating the DISOPLAN

Schenck Process
Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter
9 Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter

DISOMAT Satus provides a signal exchange via analog output and binary
inputs/outputs in the weighing transmitter mode along with data transmission via
serial interface or fieldbus .
Do the following to configure this mode:
Start die Function Variants function from the main screen of the DISOPLAN
configuration program and select the variant of weighing transmitter. The following
configuration screen opens
Fig. 29:
Analog output block

Analog output OFF 4-20 mA
Analog source block
Source Gross This block selects what size is issued on the analog output and how it is
scaled.
The following are optional sizes and reference values:
source Dimension for Min/Max
gross: Dimension of the scale
net: Dimension of the scale
dG/dt: Dimension of the scale / h
fieldbus: none (the IEEE value of the PLS-AIn is issued)
controller magnitude: not available in Opus; 0 is always issued
setpoint: Dimension of the scale
actual value %: Percent of setpoint
actual value dim: Dimension of the scale
residual value %: Percent of setpoint
residual value dim: Dimension of the scale
next setpoint: Dimension of the scale
MIN reference value 0
MAX reference value 0
Output blocks ... output 4
If an analog signal is used (such as gross), a comparator is created with
hysteresis on this signal via the two ON and OFF parameters.
PLS-AOut block
Reference value 20 = reference value Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the PLS analog output 1.
MAX

Schenck Process
Using DISOMAT as a weighing transmitter
The IN1, IN2 and IN3 inputs are permanently occupied with the
Set Tare, Clear Tare and Zero Setting functions in the Weighing Transmitter
operating type.

Schenck Process
Batching with DISOMAT Satus
10 Batching with DISOMAT Satus

When batching, a certain quantity of material is conveyed into a bin or discharged
from a bin. A batch can be started, interrupted and continued or cancelled and the
setpoint specified dictates the feed amount.
Both full feed and dribble feed contacts and an analog controller magnitude signal
of 0(4) - 20 mA are provided to trigger the feed unit.
All commands, status information and readings for controlling a batch are available
via serial interface.
The start, stop, cancel and acknowledge fault commands can also be specified via
digital inputs.
If the commands for control come via fieldbus, it makes sense to set the Timeout
parameter in the bus coupling unequal to zero so that DISOMAT Satus monitors
the coupling to the master. If data transmission is malfunctioning, feeding is put
into the correct state.
NOTE:
You cannot use the fieldbus to control batching via VPB020 and VCB020 fieldbus
cards. Instead, use a DSIOMAT T control electronics unit.

Schenck Process
10.1 Filling Scale Batching with DISOMAT Satus
10.1 Filling Scale

The filling scale conveys a specified set quantity from a storage bin into a weighing
bin.
Discharge weighing
Surge hopper
DISOMAT T
DO Batch active
DO
MAX control level
MIN control level

Fieldbus
WZ PMS
0-20mA
M AO
Full feed
DO
Fill unit Dribble feed
DO vh2331_27.cdr
Fig. 30:
You can define different batching functions depending on how the scale control
parameters are set (refer to Chapter 6.5.7 ):
n Simple feeding while checking whether the desired batching quantity fits into
the weighing bin.
n Automatically emptying the weighing bin at the beginning or end of a batch.
n Multiple-feeding with manual or automatic emptying of the weighing bin when it
reaches the maximum filling quantity (MAX control level).
n It empties to the minimum filling quantity (MIN control level) and the duration of
the emptying process is monitored.

Schenck Process
Batching with DISOMAT Satus 10.1 Filling Scale
Do the following to configure the filling scale:

n Start the Function Variants function from the start screen of the DISOPLAN
configuration program and select the Filling Scale variant.
Fig. 31:
The parameters have the following meaning:
Analog output block
Analog output OFF 4-20 mA
Analog source block
Actual value of dim:
Source Full You can use this block to select what quantity
should be issued on the analog output and how it
is scaled.
The potential quantities and reference values are:
Source Dimension for Min/Max
Gross: Dimension of the scale
Net: Dimension of the scale
dG/dt: Dimension of the scale/ h
Fieldbus: none; the IEEE value of the
PLS-AIn is issued
Controller magnitude: not available in Opus;
output is always 0
Setpoint: Dimension of the scale
Actual value %: Percent of the setpoint
Actual dim.: Dimension of the scale
Residual value %: Percent of the setpoint
Residual value dim: Dimension of the scale
Next setpoint: Dimension of the scale
Output 4 block
This is where you can define the function of bina-

ry output 4 not used by batching.
If an analog signal is used (such as gross), a
comparator is created with hysteresis on this sig-
nal via the two ON and OFF parameters..
Discharge Weighing block

Schenck Process
10.1 Filling Scale Batching with DISOMAT Satus
Max.Fill Weight 0.0 Single feeding:[BR] The maximimum weight in the weighing bin
Setpoint > Max-
FillWgt.
Fill weight 0.0
Optimization No Start/stop optimization (Yes/No)
No-Motion Time 20.0 The maximum time it waits for no-motion state af-
ter feeding.
Timeout 0.0 0 sec: Tare memory is not cleared

after feeding
> 0 sec Tare memory is cleared after a time
entered and it can start again after this time.
Settling time: 0.0 Time that can be set between the main contact
dropping (dribble feed) and tolerance check
Automatic filling/discharging OFF This parameter defines DISOMATs behaviour

when emptying the filling scale
off:
It is not automatically emptied.
before start + manual release:

The scale is emptied if it is higher than Maximum
Filling (material data) before starting and it does
not start automatically.
before start + auto release:

As above, but it is automatically started after
emptying
after ending:
It is emptied after feeding if the weight > Maxi-
mum Filling
multiple + manual release:

This is used when the setpoint is greater than the
scale capacity. The system stops at Maximum Fil-
ling, empties and waits for manual release again.
multiple + auto release:

As above, but with automatic restart
block PLS-AOut
Reference value 20 = MAX reference va- Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the
lue PLS analog output 1.

Schenck Process
Batching with DISOMAT Satus 10.2 Dispatch Scale
10.2 Dispatch Scale

The dispatch scale dispatches a specified set quantity from the weighing bin.
Discharge weighing
Surge hopper
DISOMAT T
DO Batch active
DO
MAX control level
MIN control level

Fieldbus
WZ PMS
0-20mA
M AO
Full feed
DO
Fill unit Dribble feed
DO vh2331_27.cdr
Fig. 32:
You can define different batching functions depending on how the scale control
parameters are set (refer to Chapter 6.5.7 ): :
n Simple feeding while checking whether there is sufficient material in the weig-
hing bin for the desired batching quantity.
n Automatically filling the weighing bin at the beginning or end of a batch
n Multiple-feeding with manual or automatic filling of the weighing bin when it
reaches the minimum filling quantity (MIN control level).
n It is filled to the maximum filling quantity (MAX control level) where the duration
of the filling process is monitored.

Schenck Process
10.2 Dispatch Scale Batching with DISOMAT Satus
Fig. 33:
If the weight signal is invalid (during the intake phase after voltage ON, with cable
break and if there are readings outside of the valid measuring range), an on
command is rejected or current feeding is stopped.

Schenck Process
Batching with DISOMAT Satus 10.2 Dispatch Scale
Fig. 34:
Discharge Weighing block
Fill weight 0.0
Optimization No Start/stop optimization (Yes/No)
No-Motion Time 20.0 The maximum time it waits for no-motion state after feeding.
Timeout 0.0 0 sec: Tare memory is not cleared after feeding

> 0 sec Tare memory is cleared after a time entered. Restart only
possible after this time..
Settling time: 0.0 The time that can be set between the main contact dropping (dribble
feed) and tolerance check
Automatic filling/discharging OFF This parameter defines DISOMATs behaviour when emptying the filling
scale
off:
It is not automatically emptied.
before start + manual release:

The scale is emptied if it is higher than Maximum Filling (material data)
before starting and it does not start automatically.
before start + auto release:

As above, but it is automatically started after emptying
after ending:
It is emptied after feeding if the weight > Maximum Filling
multiple + manual release:

This is used when the setpoint is greater than the scale capacity. The
system stops at Maximum Filling, empties and waits for manual release
again.
multiple + auto release:

As above, but with automatic restart wie oben, aber mit automatischem
Wiederanlauf
PLS-AOut block
Reference value 20 = MAX Scaling parallel output of the analog output on the PLS analog output 1.
reference
value

Schenck Process
10.3 Materiald data Batching with DISOMAT Satus
10.3 Materiald data

DISOMAT Satus administers two sets of sorting data that apply the material
parameters of the feeder.
The sorting data are divided up into two blocks and set under
Setting/Sorting/Sorting Data 1 or Sorting Data 2.
Fig. 35:
Max fill level: It is emptied when it is above this value or it is refilled to

this value.
Min fill level: It is refilled when it is below this value or it is emptied to
this value.
Prefill value: It is filled to this value in dribble feed (splashing liquid)
Pre-contact
Main contact: Switching from full to dribble feed or turning off dribble
feed (depending on the setpoint)
Plus tolerance: There is a fault message if the fed value is more than
PLUS above the setpoint.
MINUS tolerance: It is refilled if the value is more than MINUS below the
setpoint.
Optimization factor: Discrepancies from the setpoint are weighed with this
factor to calculate the new main contact. Optimization =
0 the main contact is not refilled.
Refeeding pulse length: This is the length of the refeeding pulse
Maximum feeding time

Max. discharge/filling times:
Monitoring time behaviour.

Schenck Process
Batching with DISOMAT Satus 10.3 Materiald data
Fig. 36:
Full: Analog controller magnitude in full feed

Dmax ramp: The time for switching from full/dribble
dribble: Analog controller magnitude in dribble feed
Refeeeding: Analog controller magnitude in when refeeding

Schenck Process
10.3 Materiald data Batching with DISOMAT Satus

Schenck Process
Data processing interface 11.1 Preface
11 Data processing interface

11.1 Preface
If you want DISOMAT Satus to be connected to and remote-controlled by a
higher-order data processing system (such as a process computer, PC or PLC),
agreements have to be made on electrical connections (the physical level) and
data exchange.
You can integrate DISOMAT Satus into local networks via serial interface. Data
is exchanged based on the same protocols as in PLC that we will call procedures
in this framework.
Procedures 1) are rules agreed for establishing communication, formating and
coding data including guaranteeing no-fault transmission. All procedures used for
DISOMAT Satus use messages to transmit or receive data blocks (messages)
and acknowledging connections.
All procedures have in common the immediate response behaviour: DISOMAT
Satus responds immediately to each message and transmits another message
after execution with commands that might need a certain amount of time for
execution (such as taring has to wait for the no-motion state).
The data to be transmitted, known as utility data, are packed into data messages
that also contain control and test characters.
The control characters define the beginning and end of the data message. To do
this, the utility data of the beginning and end character are limited or a message
header states the entire length of the data message.
The block check character (BCC) is used for data security because they enable
the recipient to identify faults in data transmission.
Data and utility data can be transmitted character-coded (such as 7-bit ASCII, 8-bit
ASCII) or as binary sequences of bits.
Synchronisation Data message Data security
Message: Opening Head User data Ending

Schenck Process
11.3 Procedures Data processing interface
11.2 List of procedures

The list below shows the procedures in DISOMAT Satus for communicating via
serial interfaces.
Procedure refer to Chapter
SCHENCK poll procedure (DDP 8785) 11.4.1
Siemens procedure 3964R 11.4.2
SIMATIC S5 control system 11.4.3
Teleperm M 11.4.4
J-Bus (Modbus) 11.4.5
11.3 Procedures
11.3.1 Schenck Process poll procedure (DDP 8785)

This procedure was developed from Schencks standard procedure and is used for
special applications such as for regular weight display in the higher-level PC.
The data processing partner begins communicating directly with the request
message and DISOMAT responds with the appropriate data record. Neither side
acknowledges or repeats if there is a fault. The block check mechanism ensures
the transmission of the content of the data (identifying falsifiED messages).
Note:
Important response messages could be lost with this procedure, particularly the
delayed response messages because it is not possible to say precisely when
they will occur.
e.g.
The delayED message of the taring command (AT) only directly follows the first
reaction with the no-motion state.
11.3.1.1 Procedure agreements

Message:
Opening Head User data Ending
<ETX> <BCC>

Schenck Process
Data processing interface 11.3 Procedures
Opening
N/a
Data message
Die data messages (Sende-, Anforderungs- und response messages) sind
folgendermaen aufgebaut:
<STX>Utility data <ETX><BCC>
Acknowledge
N/a
Fault identification
One of the two partners does not give feedback within a specified period.
What to do with faults in data transmission
If there are faults in data transmission, the sender tries to repeat the message
several times.
Synchronisation, monitoring periods and repetition:

No Acknowledge
response monitoring time ta : 5 seconds
No opening
No data repeats
There are not any data processing faults on DISOMAT Satus
Data security and generating the block check character

The block check character (BCC) is only formed as a longitudinal parity over all
characters transmitted. The bits of the BCC supplements the number of bits of a
bit number line (see below) to straight. The parity bit of the BCC is not formed
according to this rule. It is generated out of the 7 bits of the BCC itself and the
recipient generates the BCC code and compares it with the block check character
received.
For example: forming the block check character for data AB34.
Bit number S E B
T A B 3 4 T C
X X C
7 0 1 1 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
2 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
Parity bit 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
uneven
(Longitudinal parity: even and BCC parity like character parity)

Schenck Process
Transmitting priority
DISOMAT Satus always has a low priority. If both communication partnerss want
to open data traffic, DISOMAT Satus interrupts and goes into the receiving state.
11.3.1.2 Routine
Fig. 37:
For example:
The data processing system transmits the command for ascertaining and
transmitting weight data to DISOMAT with scale number 02.
<STX>02#TG#<ETX><BCC>
DISOMAT responds directly with the data message.
<STX>02#TG#netto#tara#dg/dt#status#<ETX><BCC>

Schenck Process
11.3.2 Siemens procedure 3964R


Message:
<STX> <DLE><ETX> <BBC>
The following characterises the individual components of data transmission,

although the order of the components named is not meant as a temporal
sequence.
Opening
The sender opens data transmission with the control characters <STX>
Data message
The data messages (transmission, request and response messages) are
structured as following: utility data <DLE><ETX>
Acknowledge
If data transmission is successful, the recipient acknowledges with and, with faulty
data transmission, with <NAK>.
Fault identification
The recipient acknowledges with <NAK> or one of the two partners does not give
feedback within a specified period.
What to do with faults in data transmission
If there are faults in data transmission, the sender tries to repeat the message
several times. Repeat always begins when opened.
Synchronisation, monitoring periods and repetition:

n Acknowledge monitoring time tq 2 seconds
n Response monitoring time ta 5 seconds
n Opening monitoring time te 2 seconds
n Max. number of repeating opening is 5
n Max. number of repeating data is 5
Data security and generating the block check character <BCC>

refer to Chapter 11.4.1.1.
Transmitting priority
refer to Chapter 11.4.1.1.

Schenck Process
Value range
The value range of the characters of the data part transmitted extends over the
entire 8 bits (i.e., from 00 to FF in hexadecimals). It is necessary to have special
treatment for the final code of the utility data to reach this range of values if the
sequence of bits of the character occurs accidentally in the utility data. A
duplication is used here.
<DLE> Duplication
The sender duplicates a <DLE> in the utility data so that the recipient receives all
of the utility data.
When receiving two <DLE> the recipient undoes duplication and treats it <DLE>
as a data byte.
The routine with Request Data (Siemens procedure 3964R)
Fig. 38:
For example:
The data processing system transmits the command for ascertaining and
transmitting weight data to the DISOMAT T with scale number 02...

Schenck Process
1) Master (data processing) Slave (DISOMAT) Component of the procedure
<STX> Opening
<DLE> Acknowledge
02#TS#<DLE><ETX><BCC> Request message
<DLE> Acknowledge
2) Master (data processing) Slave (DISOMAT) Component of the procedure
<STX> Opening
<DLE> Acknockledge
02#TS#s#<DLE><ETX><BCC Response message
<DLE> Acknowledge
3) Master (data proces- Slave (DISOMAT) Component of the procedure

sing)
<STX> Opening
<DLE> Acknockledge
02#TS#netto#tara#status# <DLE><ETX><BCC Response message
<DLE> Acknowledge
The data processing system transmits the command for transmitting the weights at
the no-motion state (1). It immediately receives the response that the command
was understood (2) (immediate response). Then, DISOMAT sends a delay ED
message. If the command can be executed within a specified period (20 seconds),
DISOMAT transmits the data requested in the delay ED message, in this case the
weights (3). Otherwise, it sends the fault message after the specified period.
(The value s in the response message is for the status of the data processing
command)
Note:
The Immediate Response response is transmitted with Transmit Data and the
second response message is not needed.
11.3.3 SIMATIC S5 control system (RK512)

Procedure RK512 differs from the SIEMENS 3964R procedure due to a message
header 10 bytes long in front of the utility data where the target, command and
length information are leyed in.
To address a scale,
n the data module (DB) has to be used for a scale number (0-255) and
n the message code has to be in the data word (DW).
The values are in the table of Chapter 7.6.

The messages to DISOMATs go to directly neighbouring addresses.

Schenck Process
For example: Query of weight at the no-motion state to DW=6, Periodic

Request to DW=7.
The address of the AD messages from DISOMAT is composed of a data module

that can be entered and the data word (permanently assigned) for the message
code.
All data are transmitted ASCII-coded in SIMATIC S5 mode.
The data module or data word is shown hexadecimal 0-FF.

The procedure is 3964R. Refer to Chapter 11.4.2.1
11.3.3.2 Routine
The description of the AD and ED message:
An AD message (TRANSMIT message Transmit Data) consists of the message
header (10 bytes) with the attached data. The response message has 4 bytes.
An ED message (FETCH message Request Data) consists of the message
header (10 bytes). The response message then consists of the message header
abbreviated to 4 bytes and the requested data attached to it.
The message header of the request message with SIMATIC S5

In SIMATIC S5 mode, all data in the message header are shown hexadecimal and
all messages start with 2 zero bytes (). Then the message type (ED or AD), data
module address, data word address, data length and two coordination flags follow.
Byte number Meaning
1 0000
3 message type (ED or AD)
5 Data module address = scale number
6 Data word address = command code
7 Data length (1)
9 The coordination flag. The value FF is expected per byte in the interest of cutting
down on configuration work while maintaining maximum data security (only with the
ED messagesn).
10
11 ... Data whose length is given in the 7th and 8th byte (at least 1 data word has to be
transmitted).
The structure of the AD message

The AD message using the example of clear tare (AC)

Schenck Process
Request message (SIMATIC S5 DISOMAT)
Byte Meaning
number
1 0000
3 message type (ED or AD)
5 Data module address = scale number
6 Data word address = command code
7 Data length ( 1)
9 The coordination flag. The value FF is expected per byte in the interest of cut-
ting down on configuration work while maintaining maximum data security (only
with the ED messages).
10
11 ... Data whose length is given in the 7th and 8th byte (at least 1 data word has to
be transmitted).
The structure of the AD message

The AD message using the example of clear tare (AC)
request message (SIMATIC S5 DISOMAT)
Byte num- hex. ASCII Meaning

ber
1 00
2 00
3 41 A Command: issue
4 44 D Type: data
5 01 Target: DB = scale number, such as 1
6 02 Target: DW = command code AC
7 00 Number:
8 01 Number: 1 DW
9 ff Coordination flags (byte)
10 ff Coordination flags (bit)
11 20 First data byte - blank
12 20 Second data byte - Blank

Schenck Process
Response message (DISOMAT SIMATIC S5)
Byte num- hex. Meaning

ber
1 00 Fixed length 4 byte
2 00
3 00
4 xx xx = fault code (00 = order ok; not equal to 00 = faults)
The structure of the ED message

ED message using the example of Query Weight (TG)
This command transmits the weights back to S5 without the no-motion state query.
S5 can read the scale state from the scale status.
For example: net = 123.5 kg, tare 100.0 kg and material flow 12.3 kg/second
Request message (SIMATIC S5 > DISOMAT)

ber
1 00 Order type
2 00 Order type
3 45 E Command: input
4 44 D Type: data
5 01 Source: DB = scale number, such as 1
6 05 Source: DW = command code TG
7 00 Number:
8 0e Number: 14 DW

Schenck Process
Reaction message (DISOMAT > SIMATIC S5)
Byte hex. ASCII Meaning

num
ber
1 00
2 00
3 00
4 00 Fault number (00 = no faults)
5 20 First data byte +

6 2d - Second data byte
7 31 1 Third data byte
8 32 2 Fourth data byte net
9 33 3 Fifth data byte
10 2c , Sixth data byte
11 35 5 Seventh data byte +
12 23 # Eighth data byte - separator
13 20 Ninth data byte +
14 20 Tenth data byte
15 31 1 Eleventh data byte
16 30 0 Twelfth data byte tare
17 30 0 Thirteenth data byte
18 2c , Fourteenth data byte
19 30 0 Fifteenth data byte +
20 23 # Sixteenth data byte - separator
21 20 Seventeenth data byte +
22 20 Eighteenth data byte
23 20 Nineteenth data byte
24 31 1 Twentieth data byte flow velocity
kg/sec.
25 32 2 Twenty-first data byte
26 2c , Twenty-second data
byte
27 33 3 Twenty-third data byte +
28 23 # Twenty-fourth data byte - separator
29 63 c Twenty-fifth data byte - scale status n1
30 30 0 Twenty-sixth data byte - scale status n0
31 23 # Twenty-seventh data byte - separator
32 00 Twenty-eighth dummy byte

Schenck Process
or if there is a fault:

ber
1 00 Fixed length 4 byte
2 00
3 00
4 xx xx = fault code
11.3.3.3 Examples for SIMATIC S5 messages

Set tare memory (AT)
Send message AT
Byte number hex. ASCII Meaning

1 00
02 00
4 44 D Type: data
5 01 Target:?DB = scale number z.B. 1
6 01 Target: DW = command code
AT
7 00 Number:
8 01 Number: 1 DW
11 20 First data byte - blank

12 20 Second data byte - blank
Reaction message direct

ber
1 00 Fixed length 4 bytes
2 00
3 00
4 00 Fault code (00 = no faults)

Schenck Process
Response message delayed

After the weighing equipment has identified the no-motion state or the no-motion
waiting period of 20 seconds is over, DISOMAT Satus transmits the following
message

ber
1 00
2 00
4 44 D Type: data
5 32 Target: DB can be adjusted in the menu tree, such

as 50
6 54 Target: DW permanently assigned
7 00 Number:
8 01 Number: 1 DW
11 30 0 First data byte status 0= No OK
12 23 # Second data byte - separator 1=
11.3.4 Teleperm M
Siemens 3964R in Teleperm M-mode
Teleperm M uses the procedure (and data head) such as the SIMATIC S5 RK512
(refer to Chapter 7.4.3). No character-orientated protocols are agreed to under
Teleperm M.
This is the reason why special messages are defined:
n Data messages for transmitting floating point numbers in the Teleperm M for-
mat.
n Bit-orientat ED messages that transmit the information to and from DISOMAT
as bit spaces.

Schenck Process

Message: User data Ending
Opening Head
10 bytes (8 bits) <DLE><ETX> <BCC>
All numbers are shown as floating point numbers in the Teleperm M format.
n 4 message types were defined for communication:
n Status message
n Actual value message
n Order message
n Setpoint message
All other messages that do not contain utility data also apply here.
Command Type Data word DW Data Available in DISOMAT

length
dec. hex. dec. hex
Status message ES 93 5D T
Actual value mes- ED 94 5E T

sage
Command Code Request message Response message

direct delayed
Status message 5D (10 byte data head) (4 bytes of data head) a
a = 3 bytes of status information
Actual value message 5E (10 byte data head) (4 byte data head) z1z2z3z4
z1z2z3z4 = 4 floating point numbers

Schenck Process
11.3.5 J-Bus (Modbus)

The J-Bus or the Modbus originally rolled out by Gould Modicon is a bus system
particularly wide-spread in France that is especially customary when triggering
peripheral systems with the PLC. These two bus systems differ with their physical
connection.
While the Modbus only allows RS485 4-wire interfaces, the J Bus is specified as
RS485 2-wire and also allows power interfaces and RS232 as a point-to-point
connection.
DISOMAT Satus uses RTU framing.
J-Bus and Modbus are genuine bus systems. That means that all units are
connected in parallel on the bus and a bus master settles the access authorisation
to the bus (the master-slave principle).
Three of the numerous functions provided by the J-Bus procedure are sufficient to
produce the desired functionality:
First type 3: Reading several words
For data queries;
identical to the ED messages of SIMATIC S5.
For example: weight query
Second type 6: Writing a word

For commands without data;
identical to the AD messages of SIMATIC S5.
Examples: Taring or start feeding.
Thitd type 16: Writing several words

For commands with data;
Also identical to AD messages of SIMATIC S5;
Examples: Specifying a setpoint and keying in manual
tare.
A detailed description of the function code

Function code 3, Reading several words
The data structure of the request message
Address
Function code = 3
high byte start address (ignored in DISOMATs)
low byte start address ( = message code in DISOMATs)
number of words to be read high byte (ignored)
number of words to be read low byte (ignored)
CRC16
Response message if successful

Address
3 (echo of the function code)
length of the issue data in bytes
data
CRC16

Schenck Process
Response message if there is a fault

Address
83 (hex) = echo of the function code (3) + 8. bit set
fault code
CRC16
IMPORTANT:
Partial data records cannot be read by giving an address longer than the message
code.
Heres an example:
It is not possible to read the gross, net and status of address 50 and only reading
the status of address 64.
Function code 6, writing a word

Address
function code = 6
high byte address (ignored in DISOMATs)
low byte address ( = message code in DISOMATs )
high byte value to be written
low byte value to be written
CRC16

Address 6 (echo of the function code)
high byte address (ignored in DISOMATs) as an echo
low byte address (= message code in DISOMATs) as an echo
high byte value to be written as an echo
low byte value to be written as an echo
CRC16

Address
fault code
CRC16
Function code 16, writing several words

address
function code = 16
high byte start address (ignored in DISOMATs)
low byte start address ( = message code in DISOMATs)
number of words to be written high byte (ignored)
number of words to be written low byte (ignored)
number of bytes to be written
values to be written
CRC16

Schenck Process

Address
16 (echo of the function code)
high byte start address as an echo
low byte start address (= message code in DISOMATs) as an
echo
number of words to be written high byte as an echo
number of words to be written low byte as an echo
CRC16

Address
fault code
CRC16
Fault codes may be:

1: An invalid function code ( not 3, 6 or 16)
2: An invalid address = DISOMAT does not know the message code
3: Invalid data
4: System failure = local communication software (data processing task) does
not respond or faults when processing the reading command
Peculiarities of the J-Bus/Modbus

The J-Bus procedure is only a master-slave procedure. In other words, there is
only a data query of the master from the slave. No slave can transmit without
being commanded to. The consequence is the fact that delayed response
messages do not arrive. All data processing functions that require a delayed
response messages can only be used to a limited extent or not at all (there is no
delayed response on success/failure).
Non-applicable data processing Remedies/way out

functions
with the J-Bus/Modbus
n Set tare Look for the tared bit in the scale status.
n Zero setting Look in the area of zero for weight.
n Query weight in the no-motion state Obtain the weight without the no-motion
state and look for the no-motion state bit.
n Periodic weight query Read weight periodically.
The data are transmitted in ASCII code. This means that ASCII messages are
used, although without the #XX#-command code. This makes it generally valid
considering the many different data formats depending on the machine with J-Bus
transmission (Modbus transmission).
Note:
This offers transmitting 4-byte integer values as a special application.

Schenck Process
11.4 The structure of the utility data Data processing interface
11.4 The structure of the utility data

WN#XX#...utility data...#
WN#XX#: Message header
WN: Scale number or target address
(two-digit decimal number (ASCII-coded 00-99) )
XX: message code (2 letters (A..Z, ASCII-coded)
# Separators within utility data
Utility data: Data as per the message code
All data are transmitted (such as Teleperm M) in ASCII coding if not otherwise
stated.
Examples for utility data

Specifying data to DISOMAT Satus with scale number 02:
Giving the weight on the scale in the current unit with range adjustment (AR):
02#AR#200,0#
In this case:Adjust the range to 200 kg if the unit is preset to kg .
DISOMAT result data:

The response message with net weight, tare weight and status (TS, 7 total digits
for the numerical values).
02#TS# 120,0# 40,0#c0#
The response message with the scale parameters of DISOMAT in units of 0.1
seconds WR.
02#WR#20#15#0#
Filter time: 2.0 seconds

No motion time: 1.5 seconds
Zero point tracking: off

Schenck Process
Data processing interface 11.5 Data processing commands
11.5 Data processing commands

11.5.1 Table of the data processing commands
This table applies to DISOMAT T from version 2.0. Data processing commands
added afterwards are marked in the last column.
The table of the data processing commands in DISOMAT Satus

Command Code Type with Data word DW Type Address from versi-
(AS-CII SIMATIC S5 with SIMATIC S5 with with on
message) J-Bus J-Bus
dec.
DW Data length
dec. hex. dec. hex. dec.
Group of scale commands

Tare AT AD 1 6 1
Clear tare AC AD 2 2 6 2
Key in tare ET AD 3 3 16 3
Zero setting AZ AD 4 4 6 4
Query weight and dg/dt TG ED 5 5 14 E 3 5
Weight with no-motion state TS AD 6 6 * *
Periodic weight request SZ AD 7 7 * *
Request gross weight TB ED 8 8 6 6 3 8
Request weight IG ED 9 9 3 9
(16-bit Integer format)
Group of feeding
Specify setpoint ES AD 32 20 5 5 16 32 3
Query setpoint AS ED 33 21 9 9 3 33 3
Read balance GB ED 34 22 3 34 3
Clear balance BL AD 35 23 6 35 3
Start feeding GO AD 36 24 6 36 3
Stop feeding HA AD 37 25 6 37 3
Cancel feeding AB AD 38 26 9 9 6 38 3
Query feeding status DG ED 39 27 3 39 3
Group of general control

Read all contacts RK ED 64 40 4 4 3 64
Set contacts PK AD 68 44 16 68
Set analog output PA AD 85 55 16 85
Query faults AF ED 66 42 13 D 3 66

Schenck Process
11.5 Data processing commands Data processing interface
The table of the data processing commands in DISOMAT Satus

Command Code Type with Data word DW with SIMATIC S5 Type Address from ver-
(AS-CII SIMATIC S5 with J-Bus with sion
message) J-Bus
dec.
DW Data length
dec. hex. dec. hex. dec.
Along with the messages described above, all of which were initiated by the data processing partners, there are a series of messages that are
sent at the initiative of DISOMAT.
Note:
This does not apply to J-Bus operation. These messages are only sent in SIMATIC S5 operation if the target data module that can be keyed into DIS-
OMATs dialog is not equal to zero. The messages are then sent to data words in this target DB with fixed offset.
Weight with no-motion state TS AD 16 10

Periodic weight transmissi- TG AD 32 20
on AT AD 84 54
Taring is done AZ AD 88 58
Zero setting is done TO AD 92 5C
Dead weight adjustment AR AD 96 60
ended
Range adjustment ended

Schenck Process
11.5.2 The table of command formats

You can find a table of the command formats of the utility on the following pages,
ordered according to:
n Group of scale commands
n Group of diagnosis
n Group of feeding
n Group of adjustment
n Group of general control

n Group of parametrisation
The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT Satus
Command Code Send or request message Response message direct Response message delayed
Group of scale command

Taring AT WN#AT# WN#AT#s# WN#AT#s#
The message is processed The command is executed
Clear tare AC WN#AC# WN#AC#s#
Key in tare ET WN#ET#tara# Tare the tare weight WN#ET#s#
Zero setting AZ WN#AZ# WN#AZ#s# WN#AZ#s#

The message is processed The command is executed
Query Weight TG WN#TG# WN#TG#netto#tara#dg/dt#status#

Net: net (7-digit) such as . - 123,5
Tare: tare (7-digit) such as - 50,0
dg/dt: DG/dt (7-digit)
status: scale status
Weight in the no-motion TS WN#TS# WN#TS#s# WN#TS#netto#tara#status#

state The message is processed This message is transmitted
after the weighing equip-
ment identifies the no-moti-
on state or the waiting time
of 20 seconds is over.
Request periodic weight SZ WN#SZ#w# WN#SZ#s# periodical:

transmission w: Period in multiples of The message is processed WN#TG#net-
0.1 seconds to#tara#dg/dt#status#
acceptable values: 0 or 5-99
(w=0 switches dispatch off)
Request gross weight TB WN#TB# WN#TB#brutto#

Gross: gross (7-digit)
Request weight IG WN#IG# WN#IG#

(16-bit Integer format) LowByteHighByte(Net)LowByte
HighByte(Tare)LowByteHighByte(dg/dt)
Net, Tare, dG/dt as a 16-bit Integer, standardised
to 10,000 (scale final value), status

Schenck Process
The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT B, C and T
command Code Transmission or request Response message direct Response message
message delayed
Group of feeding
Specify setpoint ES WN#ES#g# WN#ES#s#
g: setpoint (7digit)
Query setpoint AS WN#AS# WN#AS#g#

g setpoint (9-digit)
Query balance GB WN#GB# WN#GB#g#w#

g: balance total (11-digit, right-justified, with 2
places right of the decimal point)
w: number of dumps (4-digit)
Clear balance BL WN#BL# WN#BL#s#
Start feeding GO WN#GO# WN#GO#s#
Stop Dosieren HA WN#HA# WN#HA#s#

The message is processed
Cancel feeding AB WN#AB# WN#AB#s#
Query feeding status DG WN#DG# WN#DG#stat#ist#soll#

stat: feeding status
0: batch ended, feeding OFF
1: feeding ON
2: feeding stopped
3: after voltage ON, no
batch run
(0-3) + 10: past max.
batching time
(0-3) + 20: past max.
filling or emptying time
actual: actual value
set: setpoint

Schenck Process
The table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT Satus
Command Code Transmission or request Response message direct Response messagede-
message layed
Group of general control

Read all con- RK WN#RK# WN#RK#K1#K2#K3#K4#
tacts Kx: position of contact x (x = 1,2,3 or 4)
Kx = 1: HIGH,
Kx = 0: LOW
Set contacts pk WN#PK#K1#K2#K3#K4# WN#PK#s#

Kx: the value to set on contact x is
Kx = 1: HIGH,
Kx = 0: LOW,
Everything else: the contact is unchanged. Contacts
can only be set by data processing if the source of the
contact is set to Data Processing in configuration.
Set analog out- PA WN#PA#aaaa# WN#PA#

put aaaa: value of the ana-
log output, 0 - 10,000
0 <> minimum power
(0 or 4 mA)
10000 <->maximum
power (20 mA)
Query faults AF WN#AF# WN#AF#F-Text#

F-Text: fault number and text

Schenck Process
11.5.3 Explanation on the commands

WN The scale number is double-digit (such as 01)
S The code number of the status of the data processing command. If the code
number is not equal to 0, it was not possiuble to execute the command
without fault.
Code number Status/faults
0 ok
1 No no-motion state
2 Outside of the zero setting range
3 Parameter faulty
4 Command faulty
5 Tare too small
6 Range too small
7 Cable break
8 Mechanical fault
9 Parameterisation fault
10 Fault in original adjustment
11 Values invalid
12 Fault in test number
13 Calibration switch, adjustment contact or adjustment jumper in the

wrong position
14 Fault in scale interval
15 Data cannot be changed
-1 Miscellaneous faults
Status scale status in hexadecimal view
Bit number Meaning
0 Underrange
1 Overrange (weight > weighing range final value)
2 Tare calculated
3 Exactly zero
4 Operated with ten times the resolution of the weight
5 Weight invalid
6 Tare set
7 No-motion state identified

Schenck Process
For example: status c0" is interpreted as a hexadecimal number 0xc0 and

converted to binary 11000000;
Value: 11000000 bits 6 and 7 are set. That means that tare is set
and no-motion state is identified.
Bit: 76543210
Remarks: The hexadecimal numbers a-f are always issued as lower-case

letters.
Remarks: The hexadecimal numbers a-f are always issued as lower-case

letters.

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Calibration
12 Calibration
The calibration parameters and the results of adjustment are stored in the scale
connector called a dongle. The benefit is the fact that it does not have to be
adjusted again after exchanging or changing the DISOMAT. Manipulating the
dongle causes a loss of adjustment.
Fig. 39
Please do the following for parameterising and adjustment:
1. Turn off the power.

2. Open the unit and the housing of the dongle by raising it on the side with a
screwdriver.
3. Remove the jumper between terminals 1 and 3 of the connecting plug (refer
to the photograph)
4. Carry out parameterisation and adjustment as described in the
Operating Manual.
5. Placing a jumper between terminals 1 and 3 makes the relevant data
write-protected.
6. Clip the together plastic housing components of the dongle.

Schenck Process
Calibration

Schenck Process
Event Message Construction
13 Event Message Construction

Event messages are constructed as follows:
KNNTT[-ID]:Text
where:
K = Class (1 digit)
NN = Event number (2 digits)
TT = Task number (2 digits)
-ID = Optional ID number
:Text = Event text
The first letter (K) is the code letter of the event class currently assigned to the
event. The next 2-digit number (NN) is the unique code of the reported event
(=consecutive numbering of all event texts). Next, the 2-digit number of the task
(TT) that started the event is read out. Optionally, an ID number (ID) designed to
specify the cause of the reported event can follow. After the double point, the
event is read out in text form.
Defined Event Classes
Event Class Code Meaning

Message M Please note
An event is information intended for the operator. A message will disappear automatically after
30 seconds.
Messages can be acknowledged without passwords being required, if you wish to clear one
before it disappears automatically. The DISOMAT will continue operating regularly.
Warning W The event informs the operator of an uncritical situation. The warning must be noted and
acknowledged (no password required). The DISOMAT will continue operating regularly.
Alarm A Simple malfunction
Informs the operator of a critical situation. The DISOMAT input and output contacts stop being
processed and the outputs are set on safety standby. *)
An alarm must be taken note of and the cause of this simple malfunction may need to be recti-
fied; then the message must be acknowledged (no password required). Inputs/outputs will then
continue being processed.
*) As long as an alarm is activated, all malfunction-relevant binary function block outputs (pri-
marily function blocks of the function block groups CONTROL and COMPARATORS) are set
to logical zero.
Malfunction S Serious malfunction
Informs the operator of very critical situations, e.g. device hardware faults. As with Alarm mes-
sages, inputs/outputs will not be processed and outputs are set to safety standby.*) The cause
of the malfunction must be rectified to ensure that the system will continue operating regularly.
The malfunction message must then be acknowledged. An arbitrary password is required (pa-
rameter or configuration password).
*) As long as a malfunction is present, all malfunction-relevant binary function block outputs
(primarily function blocks of the function block groups CONTROL and COMPARATORS) are
set to logical zero.
With the event number, the optional ID and the event text, you can use the list in the following section
to assist in troubleshooting.

Schenck Process
List of Relevant Event Messages for the DISOMAT Satus

Display Text Cause Repair
A0209: Mains failure
A0309-nnn: Restart **)
A04xx-nnn: Parameter error **)
M06xx: No idle **)
M07xx: Out of zeroing range **)
M08xx: Tare too small **)
S0909-x: Hardware error **) Replace hardware
A1111-1:Cable breakage Scales 1 dongle missing Re-plug dongle.
A13xx-nn:Check number **) Repeat function (when scales idle!)
M1520-1: Communication error Fieldbus: Unknown Write ID
M1520-2: Communication error Fieldbus: Unknown Read ID
A1911: Measuring voltage too high Measuring channel 1 input signal too high Calibrate dead load.
W2105: Tare > Gross
W4004: Feeding stopped
W4104: Feeding aborted
W4204-1: Setpoint too low Acquire setpoint.
W4204-2: Setpoint too large Acquire setpoint
W4304: Fill value too low
W4404: Excess feeding Setpoint will cause overfill
W4404-1: Excess feeding Setpoint greater than maximum fill value
W4504: Out of tolerance Out of POSITIVE tolerance
A4804: Analog interface cable breakage
W5404: Check for empty Bin tare weight out of configured limits Empty bin
W6020: PLS no longer transmitting External fieldbus master no longer polling controller
W700x-nnn: DP error **)
Various identification numbers (IDs) not listed in this documentation can be read out for this event.
They are designed to assist the suppliers service personnel in troubleshooting

Schenck Process
Parameter Error Itemization

A0402-1:Parameter error DP configuration
A0404-2: Parameter error Analog output calibration Re-calibrate analog output.
A0404-3: Parameter error Material data
A0404-4: Parameter error Maximum dW/dt
A0404-5: Parameter error Load collective memory
A0405-1: Parameter error Event classes
A0409: Parameter error Country-specific settings
A0409-1: Parameter error DISOPLAN
A0410: Parameter error DT control
A0411-1: Parameter error Scales 1 calibration parameters
A0411-2: Parameter error Scales 1 weigh parameters
A0411-4: Parameter error Calibration parameters part 2
A0411-5: Parameter error Balances
A0411-6: Parameter error Fixed tare
A0411-7: Parameter error Scales 1 operation mode
A0411-8: Parameter error Scales 1 calibration times
A0411-9: Parameter error Scales 1 linearization
A0411-10: Parameter Error Scales 1 times
A0411-11: Parameter Error Scales 1 assignment dongle/measuring module
A0420-1: Parameter error Modbus
A0420-2: Parameter error Profibus-DP
A0420-4: Parameter error DeviceNet
A0420-5: Parameter error Modbus/TCP

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Technical Data
13 Technical Data
Supply voltage of the 19 VSE 20900 unit 18 36 VDC/VAC
Supply voltage of the VFG 20900 / 20910 field unit 18 36 VDC /
115/230VAC
Power consumption 10 VA max.
Temperature range Performance temperature: -30 to +60C
Storage temperature: -40 to +80 C
Measuring channels 1
Load cell supply: 5V alternating current supply
Input signal 0 to 15 mV
Sensitivity 0.7 V/d
Unit kg, g, t, lb; N; kN
Scale value 1, 2 and 5 etc. adjustable from 0.01-5,000
Linearity < 0,5%o
Zero point stability < 1,0V/10K = 0,07%o with reference to the maximum input voltage
Range stability < 0,1%o/10K
Accuracy < 0,2%o/10K
Taring To 100% of the weighing range
Load cell impedance: Min. 47 ( entspricht 8 x 350 - Load cell or > 20 RT load cells
@ 4000 )
Date/Time Real-time clock (RTC),
Minimum buffer time 7 days
Housing (VFE Type) 19 cassette, 3HE, 8TE
Housing (VFE Type) Plastic
IP 65 protection class, suited for wall-mounting
Binary inputs * 3 x optocoupler, 18-36 VDC, type. 5 mA
Fourth input also used as an option
Binary outputs * 4 x relay, 230 VAC, 60 W max.
1 x optocoupler, 18 - 36 VDC,
max. 50 mA
Analog output 1 x 0(4) 20 mA, 12 bits, max. load 500
Serial interfaces: 2 interfaces for data processing or secondary display
interface S1: RS 232
interface S2: 485, 2/4-wire; *
Max. baud rate: 38400
Service interface S1: for configuration ( DISOPLAN )
Data processing procedures Siemens 3964R
S5 (RK512)
Schencks standard procedure DDP8672
Schencks poll procedure DDP8785
MODBUS
MODBUS-TCP
Secondary display procedures: DTA
DDP 8861
DDP 8850
VLZ20200-D
Ethernet interface * 10/100MBaud, on board
Fieldbus (optional) Profibus DP-V0
DeviceNet
Ethernet-IP

Schenck Process
Technical Data

Schenck Process
Equipment supplied
15 Equipment supplied
Designation Material number
DISOMAT SATUS VSE 20900 circuit board incl. front plate V052188.B01
DISOMAT SATUS VSE 20901 circuit board incl. front plate; with V052188.B02
mounted PROFIBUS option
DISOMAT SATUS VSE 20910 V053903.B01
circuit board incl. front plate,
with integrated LED weight display
DISOMAT SATUS in the VFG 20900 field casing for 24 VDC supply V053921.B01
DISOMAT SATUS in VFG 20901 field casing for 24 VDC supply; with V053921.B02
mounted PROFIBUS option
DISOMAT SATUS in VFG 20910 field casing with transformer for V053922.B01
115/230 VAC supply
justrightDISOMAT SATUS in VFG 20911 field casing with transformer V053922.B02
for 115/230 VAC supply; with mounted PROFIBUS option
VNG 0900 19" rack V055346.B01
Power supply unit for 85-250 V AC, for up to 9 VSE 209xx with fieldbus V053978.B01
cards
VXB 20901 safety barriers for RTN/RTB/VBB/PWS load cells in potenti- V068489.B01
ally hazardous area of ATEX category 2G
VXB 20911 safety barrier for RTK/DMA weigh cells V068493.B01
Profibus installation set for DISOMAT SATUS V053917.B02
DeviceNet Satus installation set V053918.B02
DISOPLAN VPL 20430 configuration software V029764.B01

Equipment supplied

Schenck Process
Appendix 16.1 Fieldbus accessories
16 Appendix
16.1 Fieldbus accessories
For connecting and cabling the fieldbus modules of DISOMAT We recommend
Satus for the following components:
Bus distributor star distributor IP20 D-SUB System

Star distributor for TS 35 assembly, 1 bus-in (pin), Schenck material no. E013613.01
5 bus-out (bushing), Phoenix PSM-PTK4
Bus distributor T-piece IP20 D-SUB System

T-piece for TS 35 assembly, 1 bus-in (pin), Schenck material no. E144562.01
2 bus-out (bushing), Phoenix PSM-PTK
9-pin Steckverbinder IP20 D-SUB System

for 1 cable Interbus S
(pin), Phoenix-Subcon-9/M-SH
(bushing), Phoenix-Subcon-9/F-SH Schenck material no. E030909.01
Schenck material no. E012924.02
9-pin plug-in connector IP20 D-SUB System
for 2 cable: Profibus
(pin), Phoenix-Subcon-Plus M1
for 2 Profibus cables (pin), with screw terminals and con-
nectable terminal resistor
SIEMENS, 35 degree outgoing cable
Schenck material no. V022274.B01
for 2 Profibus cabless (pin), with screw terminals and con-
for 2 Profibus cables (pin), with screw terminals and con-
Fieldbus cable for Profibus DP, Schenck material no. E054627.01
Interbus, Modbus
can be universally used to 500 kbit/s, d=7,1 mm 6-strand
to 12 MB/s violet special cable, d=7.7 mm 2-strand Schenck material no. 3849219

Schenck Process
16.1 Fieldbus accessories Appendix

Schenck Process
DISOMATSatus , DISOMATOpus,
DISOMAT Tersus
Data Communication
BV-H2359GB
service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to
seamless support across the entire product life cycle.
wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to advise and assist with the best
in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System provides you with
the best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from simple
inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual components at

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock
to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 61 51-15 31 0

Contents
1 Something about this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Information for operators of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 List of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 The interface parameter of DISOMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 Computer, PC Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1.1 Schenck Process Standard Protocol (DDP 8672). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1.2 Schenck Process Poll Protocol (DDP 8785) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1.3 Schenck Minproz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.4 Siemens Protocol 3964R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1.5 ASCII-S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.6 ASCII - Modbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2 Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.1 User Data Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.2 EDP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3 Commands Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5 Coupling for SPS and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5.1 Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.1.1 The structure of the data telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.1.2 The structure of the fault telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.1.3 The address ranges of the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.1.4 Data from the process control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.1.5 Data on the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.1.6 Modbus interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.2 Modbus/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.2.1 Example telegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.2 Diagnosis and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.3 Parameterising the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.3 Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.3.1 Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.3.2 The Functionality of Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.3.3 User Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.3.4 Configuring the Network in RSLogix 5000" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.3 Profibus DP protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.3.1 Data segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.3.2 Structure of user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.3.3 Data from the process control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication BV-H2359GB/0902 I

Schenck Process
5.3.4 Data on the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3.5 Profibus-DP interface parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.3.6 Planning aids (drawings, rules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.4 DeviceNet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.4.1 Structure of user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.4.2 Parameterising DeviceNet interface parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.6 Available data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.6.1 Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.6.2 Controller data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.7 Date/time format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
II BV-H2359GB/0902 DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication

Schenck Process
Something about this manual
1 Something about this manual

Who is it written for?
This manual is for technicians and programmers who want to control the
equipment described (called DISOMAT or equipment below) with a data
processing unit or create their own function block linkages. The assumption is
made that DISOMAT functions are known and the user has a basic knowledge of
data exchange in local computer networks (point-to-point connections and bus
systems).
Software versions
DISOMAT OPUS starting from version 20700-003
DISOMAT Satus starting from version 20900-001
DISOMAT Tersus starting from version 20450-002
What does this describe?

It describes:
n Procedures
n Data processing commands
n Bus interfaces
n The entire function block strategy
A table of supplementary manuals
Internal numbers
DISOMAT Opus System Manual BV-H2310GB
DISOMAT Opus Operating Manual BV-H2313GB
DISOMAT Satus System Manual BV-H2331GB
DISOMAT Tersus System Manual BV-H2334GB
DISOMAT Tersus Operating Manual BV-H2335GB
DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication BV-H2359GB/0902 1

Schenck Process
Something about this manual
- Reserved for Notes -
2 BV-H2359GB/0902 DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication

Schenck Process
Safety Instructions
Intended use
When controlling DISOMAT, please make sure that it is used for the intended
purpose
as described in the manual.
Any use beyond that is considered not for the intended purpose.
General hazards if safety instructions are not obeyed

DISOMAT is reliable state-of-the-art equipment when connected. However, there
might be residual hazards if untrained personnel use it incorrectly.
Safety-conscious work
n Anyone entrusted with the DISOMAT data processing should have read and
understood the manual and in particular the safety instructions.
n Only trained and authorised personnel may connect DISOMAT to a computer
and control it via data lines. The assumption is made that the personnel is
familiar with weighing equipment functions.
n Fault messages may only be acknowledged after the reason for the fault has
been rectified and there is no longer a hazard.
n Fault messages may only be acknowledged with a password after the reason for
the fault has been rectified. Beyond this, if control systems are connected to a
lower order DISOMAT, they have to ensure that the control systems stay in a
safe state after acknowledging default.

Schenck Process
2.1 Information for operators of Safety Instructions
Labelling residual hazards

Some commands may only be used interactively. This generally applies to all
commands critical to safety such as acknowledging a fault message and
starting feeding.
These commands are marked with the symbol below in this manual.
There might be danger to persons or property
if these commands are carried out without the approval of an operator.
When computer controlling DISOMAT, please make sure that commands critical to
safety are only carried out if they are approved by an operator.
Before giving approval, this operator has to satisfy him or herself that there is no
danger.
If this is not possible, you should avoid using commands critical to safety in
computer control.
Safety notes for the user company

n The user company shall bear the responsibility for proper data processing for the
connected DISOMAT.
n Personnel supervisors should be familiar with the chapter on safety instructions
and the operation and start-up items with an impact on safety.
n Before start-up, supervisors should check whether computer controlled
DISOMAT operation might cause additional hazards in connection with other
machines or plant components . If necessary, supervisors should supplement
safety instructions.
2.1 Information for operators of

calibrated scales
Requirements made of add-on non-verifiable equipment/data processing systems
for recording readings for commercial applications.
Legal provisions
Readings for commercial applications have to be obtained with calibrated
measuring instruments.
The readings may be forwarded to add-on non-verifiable equipment (computer
systems) for creating commercial vouchers assuming that the scale or the
configurable (i.e., approved) add-on equipment records or stores readings in a
non-deletable fashion and without making any changes *)
and that the readings are accessible to both parties affected by the
measurement.
*) The weights and measures regulations state that add-on equipment is equivalent to the measuring
instruments. The weights and measures act and weights and measures regulations take these circumstances
into consideration by making specific requirements of the data processing equipment and programs used in
commercial applications.
Requirements made of data processing connections/query for recording readings

and creating vouchers:
1. Legal-for-trade reading query (guaranteeing legal-for-trade data storage):

Schenck Process
Safety Instructions 2.1 Information for operators of
The legal-for-trade reading has to be queried as per the instructions in

Schenck manuals.
When changing the prompting mode from DP to scale, always check to see if
data is correctly saved.
Readings for a commercial voucher may not be further processed without prior
legal-for-trade data storage (for instance, with a fault message). If this is not
respected, this would be a violation of calibration regulations which would be
tantamount to a regulatory offense.
2. Labeling readings:
Identification features (strings) such as
Date/Time
Cons. No.
Vehicle No.
are or should be assigned to legal-for-trade readings for tracing them from the
legal-for-trade data memory to the commercial voucher.
The commercial voucher has to have the following note:

Readings from freely programmable add-on equipment.
These legal-for-trade readings may be inspected.
3. The duration of legal-for-trade data storage.

The minimum storage period for legal-for-trade readings is 3 months. The oldest
reading is overwritten when storing new readings. Storage periods > 3 months can
be set.
The operator of the scale equipment is responsible for complying with the statutory
requirements.

Schenck Process
2.1 Information for operators of Safety Instructions

Schenck Process
Introduction
3 Introduction
Agreements on electrical connections (on the physical level) and data exchange
are necessary if DISOMAT is supposed to be connected to and remote-controlled
by a higher-level data processing system (a process computer, PC or stored
program control).
DISOMAT can be connected into local networks via serial interface and data
exchange is geared towards the normal protocols in the stored program controls
(SPC). They are called procedures in this framework.
Procedures are rules agreed for establishing communication as well as formatting

and coding data including ensuring correct transmission. All procedures applied to
DISOMAT use messages for transmitting or receiving data blocks (telegrams) and
confirming the connection (acknowledging).
What all procedures have in common is the immediate response property:
DISOMAT responds immediately to each telegram and transmits another telegram
after execution (such as taring has been completed) with commands that require
a certain time for execution.
The data to be transmitted, known as user data, are packed into data telegrams
that also contain control and test characters.
Control characters define the beginning and end of the data telegram.
To do this, either the user data from the beginning and end characters are limited
or the entire length of the data telegram is given by the telegram head.
Block check characters (BCC) are used for data storage because they enable
the recipient to identify faults in data transmission.
The data and user data can be character-coded (such a 7-bit ASCII. 8-bit ASCII)
or transmitted as binary sequences of bits.
Message: Synchronisation Data telegram Data storage


Schenck Process
3.1 List of procedures Introduction
3.1 List of procedures

The list below shows the procedures presently used in DISOMAT
for communication via serial interfaces.
Couplings for computers, PCs

q SCHENCK Standard Procedure; refer to Chapter 4.1.1
q SCHENCK Poll Procedure; refer to Chapter 4.1.2
q SIEMENS 3964R; refer to Chapter 4.1.3
q ASCII-S5; refer to Chapter 4.1.4
q ASCII-Modbus; refer to Chapter 4.1.5
Other procedures may be visible in the selection depending upon the equipment
configuration such as DDP 8672-MS.
These procedures are only of importance in specific applications and they are
documented in each plant description.
q Coupling for SPS and PLC

q Modbus Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.1
q Profibus-DP Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.2
q Interbus-S Protocol; refer to Chapter 5.3
3.2 The interface parameter of DISOMAT

Several parameters have to be set before the interface can be operated.
The parameters can be keyed in or selected with DISOMAT in the menu tree under
the following menu items:
n PERIPHERY /interfaces
n PERIPHERY /COMMUNICATION/ data processing
n PERIPHERY /COMMUNICATION/fieldbus
You can find an exact description of the settings in each operating manual.

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling 4.1 Protocols
4 Computer, PC Coupling
4.1 Protocols
4.1.1 Schenck Process Standard Protocol (DDP 8672)

Protocol Agreements
Nachricht: Synchronisation Daten-Telegramm Datensicherung

Erffnung Kopf Nutzdaten Nachspann
<ENQ> <STX> ... <ETX> <BCC>
In the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The
sequence of elements is not to be understood as time sequence.
Enquiry
The sender starts data transmission with control character <ENQ>.
Acknowledgement
The receiver acknowledges the enquiry with
<ACK> (ready to receive)
or <NAK> (not ready).
Data Message
The data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as
follows:
<STX> User Data <ETX><BCC>
Acknowledgement
Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with <ACK>; faulty data
transmission, with <NAK>.
Error Recognition
Receiver acknowledges with <NAK> or one of the two stations fails to send
feedback within preset period of time.

Schenck Process
4.1 Protocols Computer, PC Coupling
Behaviour Upon Errors In Data Transmission

Upon errors in data transmission, sender repeats sending various times.
With errors in connection set-up, repeats start from enquiry.
With faulty transmission of user data, repeats start with data message.
Synchronization Monitoring Times, Repeats:

Acknowledgement monitoring time tq 2 seconds
Response monitoring time ta 5 seconds
Enquiry monitoring time te 2 seconds
Max. number of enquiry repeats: 3
Max. number of data repeats: 3
Data Protection, Block Check Character Generation

BCC is formed as longitudinal parity over all character sent exclusive of <STX>.
BBC bits complete number of bits 1 of a bit number line to even (s. Example)
parity bit is not formed in accordance with this rule. It is generated from the
7 bits of the BBC itself.
Receiver for his part generates the BCC code and compares it with block check
characters received..
Example: Block check character formation for AB34 data.
Bit No. S A B 3 4 E B
T T C
X X C
7 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
2 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
Parity bit 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Here: Odd
(Longitudinal: Always even and BCC parity same as character parity)

Schenck Process
Sending Priority
The DISOMAT units always have low priority. If both stations attempt to start data
communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state.
Sequence
1. Sample Sequence:
DISOMAT with address 01 is to transmit current weight values to EDP.
1) EDP sends command for weigh data transmission to DISOMAT (01#TG#).
Master (EDP) Slave (DISOMAT ) Protocol Element
<ENQ> Enquiry
<ACK> Acknowledgement
<STX>01#TG#<ETX><BCC> Request message
2)
DISOMAT responds with response message comprising net and tare weights,
weight change per time unit (dW/dt) and scale status information.

<ENQ> Enquiry
STX>01#TG#netto#Tare#dg/dt#status#<ETX><BCC> Response message

Schenck Process
2. Example: Command with delayed response
DISOMAT with address 01 is to be tared remote-controlled via EDP.
1) EDP sends taring command (01#AT#) to DISOMAT.
<ENQ> Enquiry
<STX>01#TG#<ETX><BCC> Request message
2)
Taring is possible only under certain conditions, e.g. DISOMAT must have
recognized no-motion.
This may take some seconds. Therefore, DISOMAT sends an immediate

response message informing EDP that the command is being processed.
<ENQ> Enquiry
<STX>01#TG#<ETX><BCC> Response message direct
S=0: Command execution OK

S 0: Command execution faulty
3)
DISOMAT tries to tare scale and, once command is successfully executed, sends
a response message including the information 01#AT#0# (user data).
If the command could not be performed (DISOMAT has not recognized
no-motion after a certain timeout), the response includes a number unequal to
0, e.g. 01#AT#1#.
<ENQ> Enquiry
<STX>01#TG#<ETX><BCC> Response message delayed

Schenck Process
4.1.2 Schenck Process Poll Protocol (DDP 8785)

This protocol has been developed from the SCHENCK Standard Protocol (see
Item 4.1.1, or Spec Sheet DDP8 672) and is used for special applications, for
instance, running weight display in superordinate PC.
EDP starts communication direct with request message and DISOMAT responds
with corresponding data record. This is done without acknowledgement and
without repeat in case of error. Transmission of data contents is secured
through block check mechanism (recognition of faulty messages).
Note:
With this protocol, important response messages can get lost, particularly the
delayed response messages whose output time is not exactly predictable.
Examples:
n The feed result message (DO) may be output several hours after start of
feeding.
n The delayed message of the taring command (AT) follows only in no-motion.
Protocol Agreements
Message Synchronization Data Message Data Protection
Enquiry Header User data Ending
STX> <ETX> <BCC>
IIn the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The
sequence of elements is not to be understood as timely sequence.
Enquiry
Omitted!
Data Message
The data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as
follows:
<STX> User Data <ETX><BCC>
Acknowledgement
Omitted!
Error Recognition
One of the two stations does not send feedback within preset period of time.

Schenck Process
Behaviour Upon Errors in Data Transmission

Upon errors in data transmission (timeout), sender retries data request.
Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats:

n No acknowledgement
n Response monitoring time ta : 5 sec.
n No enquiry
n No data repeats
n No EDP error on DISOMAT

See Item 4.1.1, page 7.
Sending Priority
The DISOMAT units always have low priority. If both stations try to start data
communication, DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state.
Sequence
Example:
EDP sends command for weigh data acquisition and transmission to DISOMAT .
<STX>01#TG#<ETX><BCC>
>
DISOMAT reponds directly with data message.
<STX>01#TG#netto#Tare#dg/dt#status#<ETX><BCC>
<

Schenck Process
4.1.3 Schenck Minproz

Minproz was consciously developed as a very simple procedure. Its set-up without
character check or block check characters makes it possible to trigger telegrams
from a terminal program for testing purposes (such as Windows Hyperterminal).
The fact that there is no block check means that data can be falsified without
decection. This is the reason why it is not advisable to apply this procedure when
operating the scale.
Master starts communication with the request message direct and DISOMAT
responds with the corresponding data record. On either side, this takes place
without acknowledgement, block check and repeat in case of error.
Protocol Agreements
Synchronisation Data Message Data Saving
Message: Enquiry Header User data Ending
- <CR>
Enquiry, acknowledgement, error recognition

omitted!
Data message
Data messages (send, request and reponse messages) are constructed as
follows:
User data <CR>
EDP sends command for acquisition and transfer of weigh data to DISOMAT.
01#TG#<CR>
>
DISOMAT responds with data message direct.
< 01#TG#net#tare#dW/dt#status#<CR>

Schenck Process
4.1.4 Siemens Protocol 3964R

Protocol Agreements
Synchronization Data Message Data Protection
<STX> ... <DLE><ETX> <BCC>
In the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The
Enquiry
Sender starts data transmission with control character <STX>.
Acknowledgement
The receiver acknowledges the enquiry with <DEL> (ready to receive) or
<NAK> (not ready).
Data Message
Data messages (send, request and response messages) are construction as
follows:
User data <DLE><ETX><BCC>
Acknowledgement
Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with <DLE>; faulty
Error Recognition

Upon errors in data transmission, sender repeats sending various times.
In principle, repeats start from enquiry.
Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats:

n Acknowledgement monitoring time tg 2 sec.
n Response monitoring time ta 5 sec.
n Enquiry monitoring time te 2 sec.
n Max. number of enquiry repeats 5
n Max. number of data repeats 5

Schenck Process

See Item 4.1.1, page 7.
Sending Priority
DISOMAT aways has low priority. If both stations try to start data communication,
DISOMAT aborts sending and returns to receiving state.
Value Range
The value range of transmitted characters of a data section covers 8 bits, i.e. in
hexadecimal representation 00 to FF.
This value range requires a special treatment of user datas end code (<DLE>), if
the bit string of the <DLE> character is included in user data. This is done by
doubling the <DLE><DLE> Doubling<DLE> character.
<DLE> Doubling
<DLE> occurring in user data is doubled by transmitter, for receiver to

completely receive user data.
If two <DLE> codes are received, receiver resets doubling and treats <DLE> as
data byte.

Schenck Process
Data Request Sequence

Example:
1)1) EDP sends command for weigh data transmission upon no-motion.

<STX> Enquiry
<DLE> Acknowledgement
Response message
01#TS#<DLE><ETX><BCC> <DLE Acknowledgement
2)
EDP receives immediate response that command has understood. The code in
response message stands for the status of the EDP command.
0=OK, 1=Error

Schenck Process

<STX> Enquiry
01#TS#s#<DLE><ETX><BCC> Response message
s = 0: Command execution OK
s 0: Command execution faulty
3)
Then, DISOMAT sends delayed message. If command can be executed within
preset period of time (20 seconds), delayed message includes requested data,
here: weight values and status. If not, corresponding error message is output after
elapse of preset period of time.
<STX> Enquiry
01#TS#netto#Tare#status<DLE><ETX><BCC> Response message

Schenck Process
4.1.5 ASCII-S5
The protocol used with SIMATIC S5/S7 differs from the SIEMENS 3964R protocol
by the 10-byte message header ahead of user data which comprises address,
command and length information. In DISOMAT this protocol is called S5.
In SIMATIC S5 Mode, all data are transmitted in ASCII code.

Data block or word are represented hexadecimally (0..FF)
To address a scale,
n the data block (DB) for scale number (0...255) must be used and
n the message code must be included in data word (DW).
For corresponding values, see Table EDP Commands at Item 4.2.2.
Example: Request weight in no-motion" to DW=6, Periodic request to DW=7.
The address of the AD messages sent from DISOMAT consists of data block
and data word (firmly preset) for the message code. See Item 4.2.2.
Protocol Agreements
Synchronization Data Message Data Protection
<STX> 10 Bytes ... <DLE><ETX> <BCC>
IIn the following, the individual data transmission elements are characterized. The
Enquiry
Sender starts data transmission with control character <STX>.
Data Message
Data messages (send, request and response messages) are constructed as

follows:
Message header User Data <DLE><ETX><BCC>.
Acknowledgement
Receiver acknowledges successful data transmission with <DLE>; faulty data

Error Recognition

Schenck Process

Upon errors in data transmission, transmitter repeats sending various times.
Repeats always start from enquiry.
Synchronization, Monitoring Times, Repeats

n Acknowledgement monitoring time tq = 2 sec.
n Response monitoring time ta = 5 sec.
n Enquiry monitoring time te = 2 sec.
n Max. number of enquiry repeats: 5
n Max. number of data repeats 5
Sending Priority
DISOMAT always has low priority. If both stations try to start data communication,
DISOMAT aborts sending and goes to receiving state.
Value Range
The value range of transmitted characters of a data section covers 8 bits, i.e. in
hexadecimal representation 00 to FF.
This value range requires a special treatment of user datas end code (<DLE>), if
the bit string of the <DLE> character is included in user data. This is done by
doubling the <DLE> character.
<DLE> Doubling
<DLE> occurring in user data is doubled by transmitter, for receiver to com-

pletely receive user data.
If two <DLE> codes are received, receiver resets doubling and treats <DLE> as
data byte.

Schenck Process
Request Message Header With S5 Protocol
In S5 mode, all data in the message header are represented in hexadecimal

fashion. All messages start with two zero bytes ( ) followed by message type
(ED or AD), data block address, data word address and two coordination flags.
Byte No. Meaning

1 00
2 00
3
4 Message type (ED or AD)
5 Data block address = Scale number

6 Data word address = Command code
7
8 Data length (> 1) in words
9 Coordination flag
10
To keep configuration work down and ensure maximum data
safety, value FF is expected for every byte.
11 ... Data; length indicated in 7th and 8th byte. (At least one data word must be
sent.)
AD and ED Message Descriptions:

AD messages (SEND messages) consist of message header (10 bytes) followed
by data. Response message contains a 4-byte status information.
ED messages (FETCH messages) consist of message header (10 bytes).

Response message comprises 4-byte status information and requested data.

Schenck Process
AD Message Construction
AD message in the Clear Tare example (AC)
Request message (SIMATIC DISOMAT )
Byte No. hex. ASCII Meaning

1 00
2 00
3 41 A Vommand: Output
4 44 D Type: Data
5 21 Destination: DB = Scale no., e.g. 33
6 02 Destination: DW = Clear Tare command code
7 00 Number
8 01 Number : 1 DW
9
10
FF
FF
Coordination flag (byte)
Coordination flag (bit) >
11 20 1st data byte (blank)
12 20 2nd data byte (blank)
Response message (DISOMAT > SIMATIC).

Byte No. hex. Meaning
1 00 4-byte fixed length

2 00
< 3
4
00
xx xx= Error code (00 = Job OK; unequal to 00 = Error)
ED Message Construction
ED message in the Request Weight example (TG)
This command returns the weight values to SIMATIC without no-motion inquiry.
SIMATIC can read out scale status (see Item 4.3). In our example, net = -123.5kg,
tare=100.0kg and material flow=12.3kg/sec.
Request message (SIMATIC > DISOMAT )

1 00
2 00
3 45 E Command: Input
4 44 D Type: Data
5 21 Source: DB = Scale number, e.g. 33
6 02 Source: DW = Request weight command code
7 00 Number
8 0e Number : 14 DW
9 FF Coordination flag (byte)
>
10 FF Coordination flag (bit)

Schenck Process
Response message (DISOMAT SIMATIC)
Byte No. hex. ASCII

Meaning
1 00
2 00
3 00
4 00 Error number (00 = No error)
5 20 1st data byte

6 2d - 2nd data byte
7 31 1 3rd data byte
8 32 2 4th data byte Net
9 33 3 5th data byte
10 2c 6th data byte
12 23 # 8th data byte - Separator
13 20 9th data byte
14 20 10th data byte
16 30 0 12th data byte Tare
18 2c , 14th data byte
< 23
24
20
31 1
19th data byte
20th data byte
Material flow kg/s
25 32 2 21st data byte

26 2c , 22nd data byte
27 33 3 23rd data byte
29 63 c 25th data byte - Scale status n1
30 30 0 26th data byte - Scale status n0
32 00 28th dummy byte
or, if an error has occurred:

2 00
<
3 00
4 00 xx = error number (00 = OK; not 00 = error)

Schenck Process
Further Examples
Acquire Tare
Send message AT:
Byte No. Hex. ASCII Meaning

1 00
2 00
3 41 A Command: Output
4 44 D Type: Data
5 21 Destination: DB = Scale number, e.g. 33
6 01 Destination: DW = Tare command code
7 00 Number
8 01 Number : 1 DW
11
12
20
20
1st data byte - blank
2nd data byte - blank
>
Direct response message
Byte No. Hex. Meaning

< 2
3
4
00
00
00 Error code (00 = No error)
Delayed response message
Once weighing system has recognized no-motion or the 20-second no-motion

timeout has elapsed, DISOMAT sends the following message:
Byte No. Hex. ASCII Meaning1

1 00
2 00
4 44 D Type: Data
5 32 Destination: DB settable in menu tree, e.g. 50
6 54 Destination: DW permanently assigned with AT = 84
7 00 Number:
8 01 Number: 1 DW
< 11 30 0 1st data byte - Status 0 = OK 1 = Not effected
12 23 # 2nd data byte - Separator

Schenck Process
Feeding Stopped
Send message BR:
Byte No. Hex. ASCII Meaning

1 00
2 00
4 44 D Type: Data
5 32 Destination: DB settable in menu tree, e.g. 50
6 50 Destination: DW = perm. assigned with BR = 80
7 00 Number:
8 01 Number : 1 DW
11
12
31
23
1
#
Feeding Stopped code
Separato
>
Response message:
Byte No. Hex. Meaning

2 00
<
3 00
4 00 Error code
DISOMAT automatically sends this message to SIMATIC provided that feeding

has been started by SIMATIC and the data block address has been entered at
DISOMAT menu item EDP Configuration in decimal fashion (e.g. 50, hex 32).
This message is output if:
n First HA command (Stop Feeding) from SIMATIC

n AB command (Abort Feeding) from SIMATIC
n First stop via keyboard or input contact
n Error in feeding operation.
Restart stopped feeding operation with Start Feeding (GO, hex 24).
4.1.6 ASCII - Modbus

The ASCII-Modbus protocol corresponds to the message construction described
at Item 5.2. The user data, however, are in the ASCII format.
For type and address values, see ZDV Commands table at Item 4.2.2.

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling 4.2 Message Descriptions
4.2 Message Descriptions
4.2.1 User Data Construction

Data construction in protocol frame is organized as follows:
Address # EDP Command# Specific Data#
Address Meaning
Used to distinguish multiple scales or DISOMAT units operating in group mode,
the scale address must have two digits, e.g. 04 and an ASCII code.
DISOMAT units equipped with two channels reserve 4 addresses/channel.
Enter scale address in menu tree at Item 4431:EDP.
1st address identifies the displayed scale.
2nd address Scale 1
3rd address Scale 2
4th address Twin-unit scale
EDP Commands
The EDP Command field consists of a 2-digit ASCII code used as abbreviation
of the command to be executed on DISOMAT , see Table at Item 4.2.2.
Example: AT Aquire Tare
ES Enter Setpoint
For ASCII-S5, the Address #EDP Command# sequence is replaced by the
message header of SEND/FETCH (AD/ED) messages.
The EDP Command field is converted into data words within the addressed data
block.
The Specific Data are transmitted as user data in the ASCII code.
Specific Data
This part of the user data is variable and corresponds to the parameters sent to
DISOMAT using the relevant EDP command.
The Address and EDP Command fields are separated by #.
Example:
Scale adress 1 means:
Adress 1 = displayed scale
Adress 2 = Scale 1
Adress 3 = Scale 2
Adress 4 = Twin unit scale
If multiple devices are present on a bus, next DISOMAT receives scale address 5.

Schenck Process
4.2 Message Descriptions Computer, PC Coupling
4.2.2 EDP Commands
Table of DISOMAT EDP Commands

Command Identifier (ASCII Type with Data word DW with Type addre
telegram) SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC S5/S7 with ss
with
J-Bus
J-Bus
* = not DW Data length
implemented
dec. hex. dec. hex. dec. dec.
Group of Scale Commands:
Taring AT AD 1 1 6 1
Clear tare Key in tare AC AD 2 2 6 2
Zero setting ET 3 3 16 3
Connect scale AZ AD 4 4 6 4
WN AD 10 0a
AD
Query weight and dG/dt TG ED 5 5 14 0e 5 5
Query weight in the no-motion state TS AD 6 6 6 *
Start cyclical output SZ AD 7 7 7 *
Feeding group:
Specify setpoint ES AD 32 20 16 32
Query setpoint AS ED 33 21 5 5 3 33
Specify material number and setpoint SE AD 41 29 7 7 16 41
Query current material number and SR ED 42 2a 3 42
setpoint
Specify data for specific sorts SD AD 43 2b 16 43
Query data for specific sorts SA *
Query balance GB ED 34 22 9 9 3 34
Read sort balances SB ED 40 28 50 32 3 40
Delete balances BL AD 35 23 6 35
Start feeding with current data GO AD 36 24 6 36
Start feeding data for specific sorts SG AD 45 2d 16 45
Stop feeding HA AD 37 25 6 37
Cancel feeding AB AD 38 26 6 38
Query feeding status DG ED 39 27 9 9 3 39
Query extended feeding status DA *
General Control group:

Query faults AF ED 6 42 21 15 3 66
Acknowledge fault QU AD 67 43 6 67
Disomat B compatible
Read function block parameters AP * * * *
Set function block parameters EP AD 71 47 16 71
Disomat
Read function block parameters PL * * * *
Set function block parameters PS AD 87 57 16 87
Start Processing Function Block FS AD 74 4a 6 74
PLC order telegram (bits) SS AD 77 4d 0e 16 77
PLC read telegram (bits) SL ED 78 4e 14 3 78
General Control group:
Set fast comparator SK AD 79 4f 16 79
Read fast comparator GK * * * *
lock keyboard LK AD 81 51 6 81
Release keyboard UK AD 82 52 6 82
Weight telegram for legal-for-trade PC PC * * * * *
Paramerterising group:
Query equipment ID ID ED 128 80 43 2b 3 128

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling 4.2 Message Descriptions
Read form format DL * * 82 * *

Set form format DS AD 130 16 130
Set time EU AD 131 83 16 131
Read maximum values LM ED 138 8a 15 0f 3 138
Set maximum values SM AD 139 8b 16 139
Read fixed tare values LF ED 144 90 50 32 3 144
Set fixed tare values SF AD 145 91 16 145
Printing group:
Specify string 1 EB AD 96 60 16 96
Specify one of five strings EI AD 98 62 16 98
printing telegram DR AD 97 61 16 97
There are a series of telegrams sent on the initiative of DISOMAT along with the previously described telegrams, all of which were
initiated by the data processing partners.
Note:
This does not apply to Modbus operatioon (DISOMAT is always slave here). These telegrams are only sent in SIMATIC S5
operation if the target data module that can be entered in the DISOMAT dialog is not equal to zero. Then the telegrams are
sent to the data word in this target data module with a fixed offset.
Feeding ended DO1 AD 0 0 12 0c
Weight in the no-motion state TS AD 16 10 10 0a
Periodical weight transmission TG AD 32 20 14 0e
Feeding interrupted BR AD 80 50 1 1
Taring carried out AT AD 84 54 1 1
Zero setting carried out AZ AD 88 58 1 1
Print-out ended DR AD 100 64
^^
1 wird nur gesendet, wenn ber Telegramm gestartet wurde (GO bzw. SG).

Schenck Process
4.2 Message Descriptions Computer, PC Coupling

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling
The table of command formats for the data processing commands in DISOMAT
Command Identifier Send or request telegram Reply telegram direct delayed
Group of scale commands:
Taring AT WN#AT# WN#AT#s# The telegram is being processed WN#AT#s# Command executed
Clear tare AC WN#AC# WN#AC#s#
Key in tare ET WN#ET#tara# WN#ET#s# S 0 with the MT scale when the tare value
Tare = tare weight is greater than the small range.
Zero setting AZ WN#AZ# WN#AZ#s# The telegram is being processed WN#AZ#s# Command executed
Connect scaleNot WN WN#WN# * WN#WN#w# w: currently connected scale

available for Opus
Query weight TG $) WN#TG# WN#TG#netto#tara#dG/dt#status#
net: Net (7-digit)

tare: tare (7-digit)
dG/dt: dG/dt (7-digit)
status: Scale status (refer to Chapter 4.3)
such as # -123,5# 50,0# 0,0#c0#

kg/t/g depending on the scale adjustment
Query weight in the TS WN#TS# WN#TS#s# ? The telegram is being processed WN#TS#netto#tara#status#
no-motion state This telegram is sent after the weighing facility has
identified the no-motion state or the waiting time of
10 seconds is over.

Schenck Process
The table of command formats for the data processing commands in DISOMAT
Start cyclical output SZ WN#SZ#w# WN#SZ#s# cyclical:

The telegram is being processed WN#TG#netto#tara#dG/dt#status#
w: Period in multiples of
0.1 seconds
acceptable values: 0 or 5-99
(w=0 turns off output)
* WN = 00 leaves the connected scale

WN = 01, 02, 03 connects the addressed scale.
$) Note: The TG and TS commands do not trigger weight registration in DISOMAT (printout and legal-for-trade memory). This is why they never may be used for triggering legal-for-trade weighing. Please
only use the DR command for this.
^^

Schenck Process
Table of the command formats of data processing commands in DISOMAT

Feeding group:
Specify setpoint ES WN#ES#g# WN#ES#s#
g: Setpoint
for sort 1 (max. 7 digits)
such as #100# kg/t/g/ depending upon

scale adjustment
Not available for

Opus
Query setpoint AS WN#AS# WN#AS#g#
g: Setpoint (8-digit, right-justified 3
Not available for positions after the decimal point)
Opus
such as # 100.000# kg/t/g/ depending upon scale
adjustment
Specify material number and SE WN#SE#n#soll#ak# WN#SE#s#
setpoint n: Material number 1-10
target: Setpoint (max. 7 digits)
ak: optional order identifier,
maximal 25 characters of text
= string 5
such as #1#100#xy# kg/t/g depending on
scale adjustment
Query current material SR WN#SR# WN#SR#n#soll#
number and setpoint n: Material numbers 1-10 /Opus 1-2
target: setpoint
such as # 1# 100,0# kg/t/g depending upon
scale adjustment

Schenck Process

Feeding group:
Specify data for sort SD WN#SD#n#vf#vk#hk#tol#opt#soll# WN#SD#s#
n: Material number 1-10
vf: Pre-fill switching threshold
vk: Pre-contact switching threshold
hk: Main contact switching theshold
tol: Tolerance range
opt: Optimisation factor target: *
such as #1#10#20#10#5#0,1#
kg/t/g depending upon scale adjustment
Query data for sort SA WN#SA#n# WN#SA#vf#vk#hk#tol#opt#soll#
n: Material numbers 1-10/Opus 1-2 Refer to command SA for parameters
Query balance GB WN#GB# WN#GB#g#w#
g: Balance total (11-digit, right-justified,
with 2 positions after the decimal point)
w: Number of bulk solids dumps (max. 5-digit)
Read the sort balances SB-0016 WN#SB# WN#SB#sb1#sb2#...#sb10#
sb1-sb10 : Sort balance (9-digit right-justified,
positions after the decimal point and
shown as in the display format)
such as # 123,4#...kg/t/g depending upon scale
adjustment
Clear balance BL WN#BL# WN#BL#s#
Start feeding with current GO WN#GO# WN#GO#s#
data

Schenck Process

Feeding group:
Trigger feeding start SG WN#SG#n#soll#ak# WN#SG#s#
for specific n : Material numbers 1-10/Opus 1-2
sorts
target : Setpoint
ak: optional order identifier
maximal 25 characters
text = string 5
Stop feeding HA WN#HA# WN#HA#s# Reply: WN#BR#feeding is stopped
Cancel feeding AB WN#AB# WN#AB#s# Reply: WN#BR#Feeding interrupted
and WN#DO# feeding ended
Query feeding status DG WN#DG# WN#DG#stat#ist#soll#
stat: feeding status 0/1/2 none / active /
stopped
actual: actual value
target: setpoint
Query extended feeding DA WN#DA# WN#DA#stat#istg#sollg#sn#ist#soll#fg#ak#fk#
status stat: feeding status 0/1/2 none / active / stopped
istg: total actual value
sollg: total setpoint
sn: material number
actual: actual value of current bulk solids dump
target: setpoint of current bulk solids dump
fg: release status 1= feeding can be started
ak: order identifier max. 25 characters
text = string 5
fk: function block identifier (configuration
identifier) max. 10 characters text such as
acceptance scale

Schenck Process
Table of the command formats of the data processing commands in DISOMAT

General control group:
Read all contacts TK WN#TK# WN#TK#x1#x2#x3#x4#x5#x6#x7#x8#x9#x10#x11#x12#x
13#x14#a1#a2#
X1..x4: position of input contacts 1-4

x5..x10: position of output contacts 1-6
x11..x14: position of virtual data processing contacts 1-4
a1,a2: analog data processing outputs (10-digit,
right-justified, 3 positions after the decimal point)
(contact set = 1, contact not set = 0)

Schenck Process

Contact status TA WN#TA# WN#TA#Netto#Tara#Status#WK#
Int-In-W#Int-In-#
ICP-In-W#ICP-In-#
Int-Out-W#Int-Out-#
ICP-Out-W#ICP-Out-#
PLS-In-W#PLS-In-#
PLS-Out-W#PLS-Out-#
data processing contacts#
net: display format, 7-digit
tare: display format, 7-digit
status: 4-digit, hex, bit-coded
WK:scale identifier 1 (scale 1), 2 (scale 2), 3 (twin-unit)
Int-In-X: internal input contacts, 2-digit, hex, bit-coded
X == W: current values
X == : change since last telegram
ICP-In-X: OK extension to input contacts, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded
Int-Out-X: internal output contacts, 2-digit, hex, bit-coded
ICP-Out-X: OK extension to output contacts, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded
PLS-In-X: PLS inputs, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded
PLS-Out-X: PLS outputs, 4-digit, hex, bit-coded
data processing contacts: as with TK telegram

Schenck Process

Set data processing EK WN#EK#x1#x2#x3#x4# oder WN#EK#s#
contacts WN#EK#x1#x2#x3#x4#abcd#
X1-x4: contacts 1-4
Set contact = 1,
Do not set contact=0
abcd: PLS input function blocks, hex,
bit-coded, such as 000f#
DISOMAT automatically resets any data
processing contact set after reading.
Query fault gaps S WN#AF# WN#AF#E-Text#
E-Text: Result number and text as display (max. 40 characters)

Acknowledge fault QU WN#QU# WN#QU#s#
You can only acknowledge faults of the message, warning and

alarm classes. You have to acknowledge malfunction class faults in
the menu tree of DISOMAT (after keying in your password) .
Read DISOMAT PL WN#PL#b# WN#PL#b#p1#...#pu#
function block
parameters b: Refer to the function block description b: Function block identifier
Read DISOMAT for the function block identifier p1...pn: Parameter values of the function block
function block Refer to the function block description for
parameters the number
Not available for

Opus
*:Setpoint only SWA VKD204000

Schenck Process

Set DISOMAT PS WN#PS#b#p1#...#pn# WN#PS#s#
function block
parameters b: Function block identifier s 0: Feed operation active,
p1...pn: Parameter values no parameter change available now
Not available for
Opus
PLC order telegram SS316 WN#SS#XX# WN#SS#s# Other reply telegrams depending upon
(bits) requirements: WN#AT#s#, WN#AZ#s#,
Not available for WN#BR#s#, etc.
Opus XX=2 Order bytes (refer to Chapter 4.3, page
47
for an explanation)
PLC read telegram SL WN#SL# WN#SL#B1B2B3#netto#brutto#dg/dt#
(bits)
Not available for B1: Byte 1 = scale status

Opus B2: Byte 2 = data processing and input contacts
B3: Byte 3 = output contacts
(refer to Chapter , page for the meaning)
Net: Net (7-digit)
Gross: gross (7-digit)
dG/dt: dG/dt (7-digit)
Set fast comparator SK WN#SK#n#e#ein#aus# WN#SK#s#
n: Comparator number 1-6

e: activate: 0/1 no/yes
Not available for on: turn-on value
Opus
on: turn-off value

Schenck Process

Read fast GK WN#GK#n# WN#GK#n#e#ein#aus#
comparator n: Comparator number Refer to command SK for parameters
Not available for

Opus
Block the keyboard LK WN#LK# WN#LK#s
for 1 minute
Release keyboard UK WN#UK# WN#UK#s

Schenck Process
The table of command formats for data processing commands in DISOMAT

Query equipment ID WN#ID# WN#ID#t sk sd sn#
ID
T: Text DISOMAT
sk: software identifier
sd: date written
sn: equipment serial number
Read form format DL WN#DL#nr# WN#DL#nr#muster#
nr: Number of form format 1/2/3/4 nr: Numbers 1-3 = printing format 1-3
Number 4 = data processing format
(variable part)
Number 5 = side head format
Number 6 = legal-for-trade memory
format (variable part)
Numbers 7-9 = format of printing 4-6
Pattern: format string of the
printing pattern
Set form format DS WN#DS#nr#muster# WN#DS#s#
Refer to under DL for parameters
Set time EU WN#EU#TT.MM.JJ#hh:mm:ss# WN#EU#s#
Tag.Monat.Jahr#Stunde:Minute:Sekunde
Read maximum LM WN#LM# WN#LM#dg#bl#sch#

values
Dg: Max. dG/dt (10-digit, right-justified, 3
Not available for positions after the decimal point)
Opus bl: Max. balance (12-digit, right-justified,
2 positions after the decimal point)
sch: Max. bulk solids dumps (5-digit)

Schenck Process

Set maximum SM WN#SM#dg#bl#sch# WN#SM#s#
values Refer to command LM for parameters
Not available for

Opus
Read fixed tare LF WN#LF# WN#LF#w1#...#w9#
w1-w9: fixed tare values
Set fixed tare SF WN#SF#w1#...#w9# WN#SF#s#
values w1-w9: fixed tare values
Printing group:
Specify string 1 EB WN#EB#text# WN#EB#s#
text: max. 30 character of text
Specify one of five EI WN#EI#n#text WN#EI#s
strings n: string numbers 1-5
text: max 25 characters

Schenck Process

Printing telegram DR WN#DR#n#text# WN#DR#s# After printing:
n: * Number of the printing pattern If s 0, it is still moving (send it again later). WN#DR#n#x#status#string#
0-6 n= Number of the printing pattern
text: string texts
(max. 25 characters) X=0 No fault when printing
X=1 Faults occurred when printing
or with several strings X=2 Faults with data in the legal-for-trade memory
WN#DR#n#text1#text2#...#text5# Status= Refer to Chapter , page for the scale status.
String= formated string.
text1-text5: max. 25 characters per
string text Refer to Chapter 5.2.1.5 in the Operating Manual for an example,
The weight description is generally constant in its length, but it is

dependent on the system configuration, such as:
n = 0: Registering in the 1-scale system, legal-for-trade brackets, Dimension t

legal-for-trade memory # <0,00t> B # -> length 17
n = 1...6: printing pattern 1-scale system, no legal-for-trade brackets, Dimension kg
# 150.0kg B # -> length 15
2-scale system, legal-for-trade bracket, Dimension t
# <17.34t> B 1# -> length 17
The texts are printed if the BZ1-BZ5 string

identifier is also entered in the corresponding
printing pattern.
The DR command triggers weight registration in DISOMAT (printer and legal-for-trade memory). This is why it can be used to trigger legal-for-trade weighing. Please read the notes in Chapter 2.1 if weight is
further processed in non-legal-for-trade plant components.

Schenck Process

DISOMAT message group: DISOMAT sends a telegram.
Feeding DO WN#DO#g1#g2#g3#
ended
g1: actual value
g2: actual value - setpoint
g3: optimised main contact
This telegram is only sent if feeding was

started per telegram (GO or SG).
Interrupt BR WN#BR#
feeding
^^

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling 4.3 Commands Explanations
4.3 Commands Explanations

WN Scale number always in 2-digit form, e.g. 01
s Codes number of EDP command status
If the code number unequals 0, command was not properly executed.
S = 0: Command execution OK
s>< 0: Command execution faulty
status Scale status in hexadecimal format
Bit No. Meaning
0 Underrange
1 Overrange (weight > full scale value)
2 Tare computed
3 Exact zero
4 - Not used -
5 Weight invalid
6 Tare acquired
7 No-motion recognized
With 16-bit status:
Bit No. Meaning
8 Initialisation
9 - Not used -
10,11 Range (1,2,3)
12 In zeroing range
13 Twin-unit scale
14 Multi-divisional scale
15 Multi-range scale
Example: Status c0 is interpreted as hexadecimal number 0xc0 and

converted into binary 1100 0000.
Bit: 76543210 Bits 6 and 7 are set, i.e. tare is acquired;

Value: 11000000 no-motion, recognized.
Note:Hexadecimal numbers a...f are always transmitted as lower-case letters.

Schenck Process
4.3 Commands Explanations Computer, PC Coupling
SS vUsed in PLC order message

Message type: Bit output
Data block: Scale number
Data word: 4d (hex)
Message construction: 16 bits, each bit coding an order to connected

scale.
Bit setting starts order. Meaning of individual bits:
Bit No. Meaning
0 Acquire tare
1 Clear tare
2 Set to zero
3 Start feeding
4 Stop feeding
5 Abort feeding
6 Clear balance
7 Acknowledge error
8-15 Standby
Selected command is executed only upon first sending of message (rising edge).
To have command executed, reset relevant signal..

Schenck Process
Computer, PC Coupling 4.3 Commands Explanations
SL Used in PCL read message
Byte Explanation Bit No. Meaning

0 Underrange
1 Scale status
1 Overrange
2 Tare computed
3 Exact zero
4 Resolved mode
5 Weight invalid
6 Tare acquired
7 No-motion
8 Contact 1
2 Output of DISOMAT
physical input
9 Contact 2
10 Contact 3
11 Contact 4
12 EDP 1
13 EDP 2
Output of DISOMAT
virtual (EDP) outputs statusses:
14 EDP 3
15 EDP 4
16 Contact 1
3 Output of DISOMAT
physical output contact statusses
17 Contact 2
18 Contact 3
19 Contact 4
20 Contact 5
21 Contact 6
22 Standby
23 Standby
Sequence in message:
Bytes: 1 2 3
Bits: 76543210 15...8 23...16

Schenck Process
4.3 Commands Explanations Computer, PC Coupling

Schenck Process
Coupling for SPS and PLC 5.1 Modbus-RTU
5 Coupling for SPS and PLC

This chapter describes coupling between an SPS/PLC and the equipment.
DISOMAT Satus (only for the process image No text/4ID with Profibus and
DeviceNet)
DISOMAT Opus
DISOMAT Tersus
The equipment is called the controller below. The text will explicitly point out
whether parts of this description are only for one specific piece of equipment.
Note:
The BV-H2331 System Manual describes the standard and short process
images of DISOMAT Satus that are compatible with DISOMAT T.
The description of the Profibus is based upon the VPB8020 hardware.
The description of DeviceNet is based upon the VCB8020 hardware.
You can find the common database for all controllers and protocols in the
chapter on Available Data at the end of this document.
5.1 Modbus-RTU
The general specification of the Modbus protocol describes two ways to code data:
n 7-bit ASCII framing

n RTU framing
The controllers only work with RTU framing.

The specification below describes the special properties for coupling a process
control system (PLS) and the controller.
Terminology
The following chapters describe:
HEXADECIMAL values in the form of 0x1234 and
DECIMAL values in the form of 1234.
Logical hierarchy
The process control system is bus master and the controllers are treated as
individual slaves.
One telegram cycle always consists of a query from the master (PLS) and a reply
from the slave. The reply is either the acknowledgment to an order from the
master or a data record that the master requested in its query.
Physical arrangement
The best way to couple the bus is via RS485 (2- or 4-wire) interface.
This is interface S3 with DISOMAT Satus and Opus while interfaces S1 or S2 are
available for DISOMAT Tersus.
You can find the connection diagram in the system manual.

Schenck Process
5.1 Modbus-RTU Coupling for SPS and PLC
Data format and data signaling rate

This uses the RTU format with an 11-Bit character frame. The data format, baud
rate and interface physics are set in the interfaces menu item.
Data position
The transmission begins at the same time as the MSB.
The setpoints and readings are transmitted both in the IEEE float format (IEEE
754, 32 bits) and in the integer format. You have a 16-Bit word available with the
integer format and you can adjust its resolution over a range of 0-MAXTEILE while
maximum resolution is 215-1 parts.
Here is an example of transmitting the value 150.5 in the IEEE format (this gives
the sequence in the circuit):
Byte 1: sign / Byte 2: Byte 3 Byte 4:

exponent Mantissa 1 Mantissa 2 Mantissa 3
0x43 0x16 0x80 0x00
All control information and statuses are represented as a binary signal with the 8
data bits of each character.
Additionally, all control and status information can be treated as single-bit
information.
Guaranteeing Transmission
The characters are secured by a parity bit (see MODBUS specifications).
The telegrams are secured by a checksum (CRC16; see Modbus specifications).
The Modbus specification defines the reaction to transmission errors.
You can guarantee the transmission between the controller and the control system
in the controller via TIMEOUT. Then, the controller expects a telegram from the
control system at specific intervals. The type of telegram is not important here.
You can set both the interval and the type of reaction from the controller to no
telegram on the controller via parameters and you can find the events notes in
each operating manual of the controller. The TIMEOUT = 0 setting means that the
data flow between the controller and master is not monitored by the controller.
Routines
Any routines important for specifying data are described in each section.
Subscriber addresses
Every controller is given a slave address beginning with 1 in ascending order. The
highest address it is possible to set is labeled MAXSLAVE in the following text.
You can set the address by dialog on the controller. MAXSLAVE has a value of
254. Address 0 is the broadcast address..

Schenck Process
5.1.1 The structure of the data telegrams

The data are transmitted in separate telegrams arranged according to data types
(binary or analog) to make it easier to process the data in PLS.
All programs have the following structure:
T1 T2 T3 Slave Function Data Check T1 T2 T3

Address Code CRC16
Break 8 bits 8 bits n * 16 bits 16 bits Break
Several readings can be transmitted simultaneously.

The start address of the data registers and then the data are arranged in the Data
field. The number of data is defined by the LENGTH field (word count or byte
count). This information depends upon the function code and direction of
transmission at various points (explicit or implicit length information). No length
information is given if a single reading is transmitted (function codes 5 or 6).
Function codes:
Function Description
code
1 Bitwise reverse reading of control information (one or several bits)
2 Bitwise reading of status information (one or several bits)
3 Wordwise (reverse) reading of setpoints and readings (one or several words)
4 Wordwise reading of status information (one or several words)
5 Bitwise (re)setting of control information (always one bit)
6 Wordwise writing of control bits or setpoint values (always one data word)
15 Bitwise writing of control information (one or several bits)
16 Wordwise writing of setpoints in the IEEE format (one or several data words)
Note:
Often, the control system should add what is known as a segment address
(depending upon the function code) to the data address to be described.
Furthermore, the data address should be set up one because the register
addresses start at 1 with the Modbus protocol. In other words, the rule for
configuring the data address is:
The data address = segment address + controller address + 1.

Schenck Process
The structure of the data field:
The data telegram from PLS
ADDRESS HI start address of the data registers

ADDRESS LO start address of the data registers
VALUE HI content of the data registers
VALUE LO content of the data registers
The request telegram from PLS
ADDRESS HI start address of the data registers

ADDRESS LO start address of the data registers
LENGTH HI number of the data fields in words
LENGTH LO number of the data fields in words
The readings telegram from the controller
LENGTH number of the data fields in bytes

VALUE 1 HI content of the data registers
VALUE 1 LO
...
VALUE n HI
VALUE n LO
All fields are 8 bits long.

Schenck Process
5.1.2 The structure of the fault telegrams

The fault telegrams have the following structure
T1 T2 T3 Slave Function Error CRC16 T1 T2 T3

Address Code Code
Break 8 bits 8 bits 8-bits 16-bits Break
The value 0x80 is added to the Function Code value from the request in the fault
telegram. You can see the meaning of the fault codes in the table below.
Error Code This means
1 The subscriber does not support the function requested (FC)
2 Faulty data address such as

- data address out of range
- data address with IEEE or odd
- data offset + length too long
3 The wrong data type such as

- The wrong data with FC 5 (0xFF00 and 0x0000 are acceptable)
- The data length is smaller than 0
- The length requested is too long
5.1.3 The address ranges of the coupling

The following data ranges are defined for Modbus coupling.
The writing range with

- controll information and
- setpoints (in IEEE or integer format)
- predetermination values in the LONG integer format)
- text (not with DISOMAT Satus) and the reading range with
- status information and
- readings (in IEEE or integer format)
- readings in the LONG integer format
- text (not with DISOMAT Satus)

Schenck Process
5.1.4 Data from the process control system

The data from the control system can always be assigned to one of the groups
specified:
Control bits -The information transmitted is assigned to one of the 16 bits of the
PLS-DIn1-16 function blocks. What effect the control information has depends
upon how the function block is wired. Please ensure that the desired function
block is also loaded (with the Load Fixed Linkage function). The positive flank
had this effect on all control bits and the status has to be pending for at least
100 ms to be identified unambiguously. The bit should be taken back after
carrying out the control function. A bit number (which of the possible 16 bits
should be changed) may be calculated from the four lowest-value bits in the
data address LO. If, for instance, the database address is 0x1010, this
references bit 0 while bit 7 is addressed in Highbyte with the address 0x101F.
The value 0xFF in Highbyte of the control word sets the flag while the value
0x00 deletes the flag (function code 5).
Commands- A 16-bit data word is always transmitted as a command. There

has to be a change for a command to be effective. If you would like to execute
the same command several times, you have to transmit the ZERO command
between commands.
Analog predetermination values - These values can be transmitted as an IEEE

floating point value (4-byte) or an integer (2-byte).
(String) texts (not with DISOMAT Satus)
Control information (PLS-DIn 1-16 and commands)

The telegram to the controller (function codes 5, 15, 6,16) has binary information
that you can read back with function codes 1 and 3.
Bus address 1... MAXSLAVE
Function codes 1, 5, 15 bit operations
Function codes 3, 6, 16 word operations
basic data address 0x0010 commands

0x0020 PLS-DIn 1-16
The number of data words / bits 0x0002 / 0x0020

Schenck Process
General control telegram: (commands)

Slave FC Data address Data CRC
address (1 byte) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes)
(1 byte)
Wordwise presetting of commands:

Slave FC Data address Data CRC
address 0x06 0x0010 (1 Wort)
0x01-0xfe
For example, wordwise presetting (commands):

Slave FC Data address Data CRC Meaning
address
0x06 0x0010 0x0001 Taring
0x01 0x06 0x0010 0x0002 Clear tare
0x01 0x06 0x0010 0x0003 Zero setting
0x01 0x06 0x0010 0x0080 Acknowledge
0x01 0x06 0x0010 0x0000 error
0x01 Reset
Note:
You can only specify commands with FC 6 or 16 because this is a number, not
bit-coded data. This means that only one command can be executed per
transmission.
For example, for bitwise presetting via function block (PLS-DIn 1-16):
Slave address FC Data address Data CRC Meaning
0x01 0x05 0x0020 0xFF00 Set PLS-DIn 1

0x01 0x05 0x0020 0x0000 Reset PLS-DIn 1
0x01 0x06 0x0020 0x0010 Set PLS-DIn 5
Data addresses Meaning
0x0010 Low Byte Command number (refer to the chapter on

Available Data Specifications)
0x0020 Low Byte function blocks PLS -DIn-1 bit address 0x0020
PLS -DIn-2 0x0021
PLS -DIn-3 0x0022
PLS -DIn-4 0x0023
PLS -DIn-5 0x0024
PLS -DIn-5 0x0024
PLS -DIn-6 0x0025
PLS -DIn-7 0x0026
PLS -DIn-8 0x0027
0x0020 High Byte function blocks PLS -DIn-9 bit address 0x0028
PLS -DIn-10 0x0029
PLS -DIn-11 0x002A
PLS -DIn-12 0x002B
PLS -DIn-13 0x002C
PLS -DIn-14 0x002D
PLS -DIn-15 0x002E
PLS -DIn-16 0x002F

Schenck Process
Predetermination values in the IEEE format

A telegram to the controller (function code 16) has predetermination values in the
IEEE format. You can read back this information with function code 3.
Function codes 16, 3
basic data address 0x0x100
Number of data words 0x0012
The general telegram in the IEEE format:

Slave FC Data address Length in Byte count Data/ CRC
address words Value
(1 byte) (1 byte) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (1 byte) (4 bytes) (1 byte)
The setpoint value in the IEEE format:

Slave FC Data address Number in Byte Data CRC
address words count
0x01-0xfe 0x10 0x0100 0x0012 0x0024
An example of a setpoint telegram

(manual tare 1 = 100 kg for slave1):
Slave FC Data address Length in Byte Data CRC
address words count
0x01 0x10 0x0100 0x0002 0x04 0x42c80000
Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings

Schenck Process
The predetermination values in the integer format

You can also transmit the IEEE setpoints with the 6/16 function codes in the
integer format always using the final value set in the parameters as the reference
value
For example: 0 ... MAXTEILE correspond to 0 ... scale final values in kg.
You can read back this information with function code 3.
Function codes 6, 16, 3
basic data address 0x0200
Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for the table of valid addresses
Note:
Integer format values are always positive while negative values are set to zero.
Setpoints in the LONG integer format

Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for the table of valid addresses

Schenck Process
Transmitting texts to the controller

For instance, this telegram can be used to transmit formatted texts (such as
printing strings) to the controller with a maximum text length of 32 characters per
string.
The print form further processes 25 of these 32 characters. The rest is not used
and is replaced by the zero value when reading back. You can also combine all
strings into one setpoint telegram by filling up each partial string to 32 bytes.
Number of data words 0x0010 (words per string)
The following text specifications are implemented:

Meaning Text ID
String text 1 1 (basic data address 0x0600)
The general telegram format:

Slave FC Data address Length in words Byte Data/text CRC
address count
(1
(1 byte) byte) (2 Byte) (2 bytes) (1 byte) ( as much as 160 (2 bytes)
bytes)
Some examples of text setpoint telegrams for slave 1.

n String text 1
n String text 3
n All string texts (1-5)
Slave FC Data address Length in words Byte Data CRC

address count
0x01 0x10 0x0600 0x0010 0x20 0x41424344...

0x01 0x10 0x0620 0x0010 0x20 0x41424344...
0x01 0x10 0x0600 0x0050 0xA0 0x41424344..
If the number of text bytes is odd, fill up the text with a space at the end.

Schenck Process
5.1.5 Data on the process control system

Status information
The following telegram is used for requesting status information. Status
information may be requested wordwise (function code 4) or bitwise (function code
2). FC3 can also be used instead of FC4.
Function codes 2, 4, (3)
The number of data words / bits 0x0018/0x0180
The general request telegram
Slave address FC Data address Length CRC

(1 byte) (1 byte) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes)
Wordwise request of status information
Slave address FC Data address Length in words CRC

0x01-0xfe 0x04 0x1300 0x0018
Bitwise request of status information
Slave address FC Data address Number of bits CRC

0x01-0xfe 0x02 0x1300 0x0180
An example of a request (status word):

0x01 0x04 0x1300 0x0001
0x01 0x02 0x1300 0x0010
Refer to the chapter on Available Data for the Controller Data for the list of valid
addresses

Schenck Process
Readings in the IEEE format

The control system can request readings with the following telegram in the IEEE
format.
The dimensions of these readings are always kg or kg/second.
Function codes 4, (3)
Number of data words 0x00D0
The general request telegram:

Readings request in the IEEE format
Slave address FC Data address Length in words CRC

0x01-0xfe 0x03 0x0700 0x007C
An example for requesting the gross weight on scale 1:

0x01 0x03 0x0700 0x0002
addresses

Schenck Process
Readings in the integer format

The host system can request the IEEE readings in the integer format with the
following telegram using the final value set in the parameters as the reference
value.
The dimensions of these readings are always kg or kg/second.
Bus address 1..MAXSLAVE
The base data address can be calculated from the IEEE address according to the
formula (refer to the section on available data for the controller data).
For example: rated weight, unrounded, kg
400HEX + (736HEX - 700HEX) /2 =
400HEX + 36HEX / 2 = 400HEX + 1BHEX = 41BHEX
Note:
Integer format values are always positive while negative values are set to zero.
Readings in the LONG integer format

Number of data words 0x000E
addresses

Schenck Process
Read the texts of the controller

For instance, this telegram can be used to read formatted texts (such as printing
strings) with a maximum text length of 32 characters per string.
Number of data words 0x0010, data words per string
The general request telegram::

An example of request for text

0x01 0x03 0x0500 0x0010

Schenck Process
5.1.6 Modbus interface parameters
What the parameters mean:
q Internal address defining the bus address (0-254)
q Reference value for converting a physical quantity into parts that are
transmitted (1-32767)
such as 10,000,000 kg <> 32 767 parts.
q Final value the maximum value to be transmitted when the

quantity to be transmitted reaches a reference value.
q Interface selecting the fieldbus interface
q Timeout for monitoring the interface in seconds;
0 s = no monitoring
1-300s = value range
q Swapping order of bytes for floating point numbers and words
on the bus (BIG Endian, BYTE Swap, WORD Swap,
LITTLE Endian)
Note:
If monitoring is activated
-address errors
-function code errors, and
- incorrect length information
are also shown as communication errors in the controllers display.

Schenck Process
5.2 Modbus/TCP
5.2 Modbus/TCP
The chapter below describes the functionality of the controllers as servers on
Ethernet.
The following are described in detail::

n Server configuration
n Data exchange between an Ethernet client and the controller per Modbus/TCP,
n Notes for troubleshooting and diagnosis
n It is connected via RJ45 plug on the VFE xx.
n The server can exchange data with as many as 3 clients simultaneously. If the
DISOPLAN start-up tool is used, it can occupy one of the three available
channels if coupling is performed via network. The data are either sent as
Modbus/TCP packets or are expected as such from outside. The function scope
is identical with that of Modbus-RTU excepting the Modbus/TCP header (refer to
Chapter 5.1.15.1.5).
n The controller functions like a Modbus/TCP server as per the standard OPEN
MODBUS/TCP SPECIFICATION, Release 1.0, 29th March, 1999. It can handle
all class 1 and 2 function codes (except for FC7) and the most important class 2
codes (FC15 and FC23).
n This data representation is based entirely on the Modbus standard. The TCP
safety layer takes on the role of the Modbus telegram check sum (CRC 16). The
controllers evaluate the length field and protocol identifier and all other bytes are
sent back in the reply unchanged.
n Customer applications should always set the protocol identifier to zero.

Schenck Process
5.2 Modbus/TCP
All stations in the Ethernet network are unambiguously identified via IP address.
This is the reason why the Modbus slave address can always be set to 1.
5.2.1 Example telegrams

The lines below show the structure of the Modbus/TCP telegrams. The first
column is the telegram of the bus master to the scale and the second column is
the scales reply.
Data to Scales Scales Reply Meaning

00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 06 Taring
01 06 0010 0001 01 06 0010 0001
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 05 Read group status
01 03 0300 0001 01 03 02 xx xx
00 00 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 23 Read gross weights on channels 1-8
01 03 0748 0010 01 03 20 xx ..... xx
00 00 00 00 00 0B 00 00 00 00 00 06 Write setpoint (value = 163.34)
01 10 0110 0002 04 4323 5678 01 10 0110 0002

The event message is a group message for all faults concerning the fieldbus
connection. These are:
n Different station addresses sent to the master and scales.
n There is a problem with the cabling between the fieldbus connection and main
board.
n The fieldbus cable is defective or incorrectly connected.
n The timeout parameter has been set at too small a value. Change the
parameterisation of the scales.
n An unacceptable ID (data address) was identified in the telegram of the master
to the scale.
Also refer to the section on fault codes (also refer to Modbus-RTU).

Schenck Process
5.2 Modbus/TCP
5.2.3 Parameterising the controller

Parameterising should be carried out with controllers both with the operator panel
and DISOPLAN.
The parameter description applies to both pieces of equipment.

Schenck Process
5.2 Modbus/TCP
Parameters Value range Default value Explanation

Protocol type All fieldbus protocols OFF Protocol selection: in this case, Modbus/TCP
Timeout Host 0-300 s 0s The parameter is used for interface monitoring.
ZERO meansthatthe interface is not
monitored.
IP address 192.168.240.1 Manual IP address assignment
Network mask 255.255.255.0 Delegating the subnetwork masks
Gateway 0.0.0.0 Delegating the standard gateway address
Notes
If you operate the controller on a local subnetwork with an internal network card for this network, it
would make sense to set the PC network adapter as follows:
n IP address: 192.168.240.254
n Network mask: 255.255.255.0
n Gateway: 0.0.0.0
n Controller 1-n: 192.168.240.n
where n=1-253
n IP addresses have to be unambiguous. This is why you should ask your system
administrator for valid addresses that are not in use.

Schenck Process
5.3 Ethernet/IP
5.3 Ethernet/IP
The DISOMAT uses the Ethernet/IP protocol to exchange data through an
Ethernet network with a suitable control system.
5.3.1 Start Up
n Releasing the Ethernet/IP option on the unit (separate ordered item)
n Activating the Ethernet/IP protocol type in the Fieldbus item on the menu
n Configuring communication You can find details in the operating manuals
n Defining the data to be transmitted.
n Start communication by the master
5.3.2 The Functionality of Ethernet Connections

n The module can be employed as a group 2 and group 3 server in the Ethernet/IP
network. Further information can be found on the ODVA website.
5.3.3 User Data Structure

You can find details on and examples of the user data structure in the chapter on
the Profibus User Data Structure.

Schenck Process
5.3 Ethernet/IP
5.3.4 Configuring the Network in RSLogix 5000"

Setting up a new project in RSLogix
Configuring the controller
Selecting the EtherNet/IP Bridge
Configuring the EtherNet/IP Bridge
Adding DISOMAT to the I/O configuration
Adding a generic Ethernet module
Configuring a new Ethernet/IP module
This example applies to the parameter definition No Text / 1 ID
Setting the linking options for DISOMAT
Downloading the configuration

Schenck Process
5.3 Ethernet/IP

Schenck Process
5.3 Profibus DP protocol

The general specification of the Profibus-DP protocol is in EN50170. The
specification below describes the special properties for coupling a process control
system and the controller.
IMPORTANT:
Please remember that the last physical subscriber has to terminate the Profibus
with a terminating resistor. There may be communication malfunctions if this
subscriber is taken by the bus.
Terminology
Logical hierarchy
The process control system is bus master and the controllers are treated as
individual slaves.
from the slave (controller). The bus master cyclically acquires a process image of
the controller of no more than 70 bytes and cyclically transmits a command
telegram to the controller of no more than 56 bytes. The master is notified of the
current size of the process image by the selection of the correct modules from the
equipment master data file (refer to the table on Assigning the Parameter Setting
of the Profibus Interface to Modules in the GSD File at the end of the chapter).
Important:
The controller is modeled as a modular slave. If a new module is activated on the

master, the same set of parameters has been activated on the controller. The
reverse is also true.
For example:
Set of parameters number ID 4
Text block 4-byte text
Module (refer to GSD) Short Text - 4ID

Schenck Process
Data format
The setpoints and readings are transmitted in the IEEE float format (IEEE 754, 32
bits) or the Siemens float format.
The transmission always begins at the same time as the MSB..
The transmission between the controller and the control system can be secured in
the controller by TIMEOUT.
The controller expects a telegram from the control system at certain intervals. Both
the interval and the type of controllers reaction
to no telegrams (refer to the chapter on Event Messages in the operating manual)
can be set on the controller via parameters. The setting TIMEOUT = 0 means that
the data flow between the controller and control system is not monitored by the
controller.
Routines
Any routines important for specifying data are described in each section.
highest address it is possible to set is labeled MAXSLAVE in the following text.
You can set the address by dialog on the controller and MAXSLAVE has the value
126.
5.3.1 Data segments

We distinguish:
The writing range with

n control information,
n predetermination values in the IEEE format,
n Setpoints in the LONG integer format
n Texts from the master to the controller (not with DISOMAT Satus)
and the reading range with

n status information
n Readings in the IEEE format
n Readings in the LONG integer format
n The controllers texts (not with DISOMAT Satus)
Blocks of four bytes each can be unambiguously addressed with a two-byte

identifier (ID; refer to the tables on Available Data).

Schenck Process
5.3.2 Structure of user data

This means that the telegrams of cyclical data transmission have the basic
structure below:
Protocol frame Texts (TXT) User data Protocol frame

(Header) Optional Process data (Trailer)
Figure 1 The basic structure of the Profibus telegrams
The types below have been defined:

n User data without a text range and with defined setpoint and process data
(white) and as many as 8 additional values that can be selected via ID (grey).
Also refer to Figure 2
n User data with a text range and with the selection of process data described
above.
Text range (TXT)
You can read or write texts with as many as 128 bytes with the TXT telegram part.
The section on Text Transmission via Profibus DP describes the necessary
mechanisms of order/reply identifiers.
We distinguish 4-and 20-byte text blocks where the longer variant should only be
used with greater quantities of text to keep the transmission period low.
Process data range
You can use the process data to transmit control words and setpoints (orders:
master > 6 controller) or state words and actual values (replies: controller >
master).
The process data transmitted go into effect immediately.

Schenck Process
74
Data packets without text block
32 Bytes
max. Paketlngen
C
F P- P- 16 - 32 Bytes
o Preset Preset ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID
C ID ID
m value 1 value 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2
m
S Gross
F Gross
t ID in
C unroun Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Value6 Value7 Value8 14 - 46 Bytes
a 1 display
B ded
t format
Data packets with 4-Byte text block 32 Bytes
C
F P- P- 24 - 40 Bytes
BV-H2359GB/0902
Text block C ID ID
m value 1 value 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2
m
S Gross
F Gross
t ID in
Text block C unroun display Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Value6 Value7 Value8 22 - 54 Bytes
a 1
B ded
t format
Text
Text Header
4 Byte
4 Byte
Data packets with 20-Byte text block 32 Bytes
Figure 2 The user data structure of Profibus telegrams

C
F P- P- 40 - 56 Bytes
Text block C ID ID
m value 1 value 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2
m
S Gross
F Gross
t ID in
Text block C unroun Value1 Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Value6 Value7 Value8 38 - 70 Bytes
a 1 display
B ded
t format
Text Header Text

4 Byte 20 Byte
Schenck Process
DISOMAT Opus, Satus, Tersus, Data Communication
The bright areas are the minimum parts of the telegram and they cannot be
changed. You can add as many IDs piecewise to the telegrams (depending upon
the set parameters) as needed in the current application.
Note:
Reading-writing in double words in S7 systems: please remember that the double
words cannot be read or written with the SFC14 and SFC15 function modules of
the S7 systems. Instead, use direct peripheral access.
Examples of telegrams
The following figure shows the basic structure of Profibus telegrams. The first line
is the telegram from the bus master to the controller and the second line is the
controllers reply.
Example 1: Data transmission without a text block and without variable

user-defined identifiers (ID)
Parameter settings:
Text block no
number ID 0
Telegram master to the controllers.
FKB Commands ID Manual tare or ID Manual tare or FKB

bin. out FKB analog analog
(2
bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes)
Reply of the controller
FKB bin Status Mirror-ID Scale showed Gross

in Scale in this gross Scale displayed
displayed case: zero rounded off in the
display format
(2
bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes)
The commando telegram that changes manual tare for scale/group 1 and specifies
the first analog value of the analog function block:
FKB binary command ID manual tare1 value of manual tare 1 ID FKB1/1

value
xx xx xx xx xx xx 2000 42 10 00 00 200C 42 C8 00 00
The values for (control) commands

00 01 Taring on the scale displayed
00 02 Clear tare on the scale displayed
00 03 Zero setting on the scale displayed

Schenck Process
Remarks
The identifier and corresponding values in the telegram from the master to the
controller are always expected in precisely this order and position. If an ID is
zero,the corresponding value will not be evaluated. The control and status
information is always combined into packets of four bytes. If the wrong identifier is
used, the datawill be rejected.
These specification data have to be pending at least 100 ms to ensure that the
controller can identify them without any problems.
The values in the reply telegram are identified using the position in the telegram.
This is the reason why identifiers are not needed.
Example 2: Data transmission without a text block and with 2 variable user-defined
identifiers (ID)
Parameter settings
Text block no
number ID 2
Telegram of master to the controller
FKB Comma ID Manual tare or ID Manual tare ID1 ID 2

PLS-DIn nds FKB analog or FKB
1-16 analog
(2 (2 (2
bytes) bytes) bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) (2
bytes)
FKB The Mirror-ID Gross Gross Value Value

PLS- status on = ID 1 on the scale The scale ID 1 ID 2
DOut the scale displayed displayed rounded
1-16 displayed in the display
format
(2 (2 (2
Byte) (2 bytes) bytes) (4 bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) bytes)
Remarks:
You can make the controller enter the desired values into the reply telegram by
adding identifiers in the telegram of the master to the controller. The order of
values corresponds to the order of the identifiers. The identifiers may come from
all data segments, which enables you to read back the predetermination values.
If an identifier is identified as incorrect, its value in the reply will be set to zero.
The identifiers should not be changed in regular user data operation because this
would make it impossible to unambiguously assign the ID to the value at the
switch-over point.
Example 3: Data transmission with text blocks and without variable user-defined
identifiers (ID).
Parameter settings:

Schenck Process
Text block 4-byte text block (not with DISOMAT Satus)

number ID 0
The text block is always set in front of the other data.
Telegram of master to the controller
Text header Text-user data FKB PLS-DIn Commands ID Manual tare or ID Manual tare
FKB analog or FKB
analog
(2
4 bytes 4 bytes (2 bytes) (2 bytes) bytes) (4 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes)
Text header Text-user data FKB PLS- The status on Mirror-ID Gross Gross
Dout the scale in this case: on the scale The scale
displayed ZERO displayed displayed in the
display format
4 Byte rounded
4 bytes (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (2 bytes) (4 bytes) 4 bytes)
Text transmission via Profibus DP

All explanations in this chapter relate to the 4-byte text block and the same applies
correspondingly to the 20-byte text block. It only differs in the number of text-user
data that can be transmitted per cycle.
Text header Text-user data
AK Text-ID AKT MAX As much as 4- or 20-byte text-user data

(unused bytes should filled with zero)
Figure 3 The basic structure of the text block
The meaning of the byte in the text header

AK The first byte contains the order or reply identifier
Refer to the table further below for details.
Text-ID The second byte contains the text identifier (1-5) that specifies the text to be transmitted in greater
detail.
Refer to the Text-ID table for details.
AKT AKT specifies the current index value in texts that cannot be transmitted in one cycle.
If you select short (4-byte) text, this gives you the sequence 0,4,8,... for the index value.
If you select long (20-byte) text, this gives you the sequence 0,20,40,... for the Index Value.
Important: AKT has to accept the value of MAX at the end of the text transmission for least one
telegram cycle. This indicates to the controller that all text segments were transmitted and that the
text should now be accepted in the controller.
MAX The byte always contains the total length of the text user data in bytes.

Schenck Process
The following text types are implemented:
Meaning Text-ID
String text 1 1
String text 2 2
String text 3 3
String text 4 4
String text 5 5
You can find the meaning of the order identifier in Table 1 for the order telegram
(master > controller).
Order identifier Meaning
0 No order
1 Read the text from the scale
2 Write the text for the scale
Tab. 1 Order identifiers (AK) master station -> DISOMAT
You can find the meaning of the reply identifier in Table 2 for the reply telegram
(controller > master).
Reply identifier Meaning
0 No order
2 Text fragment successfully transmitted
7 Order cannot be executed
Tab. 2 Reply identifiers (AK) DISOMAT -> master station
The master has to repeat an order until he has received the appropriate reply.
The master recognises the reply to an order placed by evaluating the reply
identifier
If text information is not needed in cyclical operation, the order identifier has to be
set to no order.

Schenck Process
Read text (controller text transmitted to the master)

If there is a new text, the text is requested piecewise, but no more than 4 or 20
bytes per cycle. While the maximum index always gives the length of the text,
n the current index has the sequence 0, 4, 8 with the 4-byte text block to the
maximum index.
n and the current index has the sequence 0, 20, 40 in the 20-byte text block to the
maximum index.
Example:
Reading a text 21 bytes long with the 4-byte text block
(This is an example)
xx any characters
01 01 00 12 xx xx xx xx 1. request
02 01 00 12 54 68 69 73 1. reply (This)
02 01 04 12 20 69 73 20 2. reply ( is )
02 01 08 12 61 6E 20 65 3. reply (an e)
01 01 0C 12 xx xx xx xx 4. request
02 01 0C 12 78 61 6D 70 4. reply (xamp)
02 01 10 12 6C 65 00 00 5. reply (le)
01 01 12 12 xx xx xx xx end telegram
(The master has read the entire text)

Schenck Process
Write a text (transmit the text of the master to the

controller)
The text is transmitted piecewise, no more than 4 or 20 bytes per cycle. While the
maximum index always give the length of the text,
n the current index has the sequence 0, 4, 8 in the 4-byte text block to the
maximum index.
n and the current index has the sequence 0, 20, 40 in the 20-byte text block to the
maximum index.
Example:
Specifying a text 21 bytes long with the 4-byte text block
(This is an example)
(The replies of the controller are not described)

02 01 00 12 54 68 69 73 (This)
02 01 04 12 20 69 73 20 ( is )
02 01 08 12 61 6E 20 65 (an e)
02 01 0C 12 78 61 6D 70 (xamp)
02 01 10 12 6C 65 00 00 (le)
01 01 12 12 xx xx xx xx end telegram
(The application
accepts the text)
The end telegram where the current index is set equal to the maximum index
always has to transmit regardless of the length of the text. It is only transmitted to
the scale after transmitting this packet..

Schenck Process
5.3.3 Data from the process control system

DP write register (control information and analog predetermination values)
Description without a text block
byte Code Contents
0-1 0x1002 Function block PLS-DIn 1-16

PLS-DIn 9-16 is transmitted first followed by PLS-DIn 1-8
2-3 0x1000 1 byte unused
Command number in LOW-byte (1 byte)

Refer to the list of available data
4-5 ID1 analog specification (refer to the list)
6-9 Value for the ID1 analog specification
10 - 11 ID2 analog specification (refer to the list)
12 - 15 Value for the ID2 analog specification
16 - 17 ID1
18 - 19 ID2
20 - 21 ID3
22 - 23 ID4
24 - 25 ID5
26 - 27 ID6
28 - 29 ID7
30 - 31 ID8
The commands on the scale displayed

Please key in the coding of the command into the command byte. This action is
immediately triggered after correct reception. When giving be Clear Tare
command, please remember that the manual tare value is set to ZERO at the
same time as the command.
The identifiers for PLS-DIn 1-16 and the commands are not transmitted. They are
only used to refer to the list of the Available Data.
Refer to the chapter on Available Data Settings for valid setpoints
The procedure for specifying the values via fieldbus

The values addressed above can be specified by one of the following sources:
n Data processing procedure
n Local operating panel (menu tree or function key(s))
n Fieldbus

Schenck Process
1. Setpoint and material number:

The fieldbus is always the sole determinant source when the ID in the telegram
assigned to the value is transmitted from the master to the controller. Any
values from other sources are then overwritten in the next fieldbus cycle.
If you want to use the fieldbus to change the value, set the desired value in the
fieldbus protocol and then transmit it to the controller together with its ID. To
allow other sources to specify, the IDs for setpoint or material number have to
be set to zero or the ID on of a different value in the fieldbus telegram. That
means that the specification IDs determine which source has priority.
2. Other values:
The controller accepts the manual tare of the scale displayed and the data
PLS-AIN-1 - PLS-AIN-4 after changing the corresponding values.
The controller requires at least 100 ms to accept. It can be accepted by waiting

this period or also by reading back current values. Reading back is done by setting
the corresponding read-ID.

Schenck Process
5.3.4 Data on the process control system

DP read register (status information and readings)
Description without a text block
byte Identifier Contents
0-1 0x300C Function block PLS-Dout 1-16
2-3 0x3000 The scale status on the scale displayed
4-5 0x3002 Request (ID1 mirrored)
6-9 0x4000 Gross weight on the scale displayed

unrounded in kg
10 - 13 0x4010 Gross weight on the scale displayed

rounded off in the display format
14 - 17 See list for ID Value 1
18-21 See list for ID Value 2
Word = 16-bit data word

Long = data double word
Note:
When range 1 and range 2 are set, the scale is in range 3.
The bold print identifiers are not transmitted and they are only used to refer to the
list of the Available Data.
Refer to the chapter on Available Data for the Controller Data for the reading ID list

Schenck Process
5.3.5 Profibus-DP interface parameters
q Internal address ? station address for the Profibus (0-126)
q Number of IDs identifiers of all values that should be requested for

specific customers (0-8).
q Text block This parameter defines whether a fixed text block is

put ahead of the normal user data and, if this is the
case, its size (off, 4 bytes, 20 bytes).
q Data format The format for all floating point numbers

(IEEE, SIEMENS-KG)

0s = no monitoring
1-300 s = value range
The number of IDs, text block and internal address parameters are only used after
reset and the old (i.e., effective) values are showed until then.
Note:
If monitoring is activated, the controller shows both timeouts and faulty identifiers
(ID) as communication malfunctions.

Schenck Process
5.3.6 Planning aids (drawings, rules)

You can load the appropriate Profibus planning file (.gsd) from the address below:
http://support.schenckprocess.com- Steuerungen\Profibus.
You can find the controller in the hardware configurator of an S7 under:

Profibus-DP/weitere Feldgerte/Regler/DISOMAT xxxx
The names of the GSD modules are structured according to the following scheme:
Text block, number IDs
For example:
No Text, 0 ID
No Text, 4 ID
Short Text, 2 ID
Long Text, 4 ID etc.

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
5.4 DeviceNet Protocol

Terminology
Logical hierarchy
The process control system is the bus master and the controllers are treated as
individual slaves.
from the slave. The bus master cyclically acquires a process image of the
controller and cyclically transmits a command telegram to the controller
Data Format
The setpoints and readings are transmitted in the IEEE float format (IEEE 754, 32
bits) or the Siemens float format.
They are transmitted according to standard procedure starting with the MSB.
You can use the swapping parameter to change the order all bytes.
Timeout can guarantee transmission between the controller and control system in
the controller so that the controller expects a telegram from the control system at
particular intervals. You can use parameters to set both the interval and the type of
reaction from the controller to no telegram on the controller. The setting TIMEOUT
= 0 means that the data flow between the controller and control system is not
monitored by the controller.
Routines
Any routines important for specifying data are described in the specific section.
highest address that can be set is marked in the following text as MAXSLAVE.
You can set the address by dialog on the controller. MAXSLAVE is 63.

Schenck Process
5.4.1 Structure of user data

The data content is identical to the Profibus-DP coupling (refer to the chapter on
Data Segments and User Data).
5.4.2 Parameterising DeviceNet interface parameters

q Internal address station address for DeviceNet (0-63)
0s = no monitoring
1-300 s = value range
q Baud rate on the DeviceNet (125 kB, 250 kB and 500 kB)
q User data no text/4 ID, text/2 ID, establishing the
composition of the data to be requested via
DeviceNet.
4 customised data can be requested WITHOUT text
and 2 customised data can be requested WITH text.
q Data format Format for all floating point numbers

(IEEE, SIEMENS-KG)
q Swapping order of bytes for the floating point numbers and
words on the bus
(BIG Endian, BYTE Swap, WORT Swap,
LITTLE Endian)
The setting LITTLE Endian make sense in
connection with ROCKWELL control systems.
Note:
When monitoring is activated, both timeouts and faulty identifiers (ID) are shown
as communication malfunctions.

Schenck Process
Diagnosis and Troubleshooting 5.5 DeviceNet Protocol

Faulty functions from event messages are shown if you activated (selected) one of
the fieldbuses:
The A6020:PLS No Longer Transmitting event message
The event is set when the host no longer operates the controller within the
configured timeout. Some other possible causes for this message are:
Different station addresses sent to the master and scales.

There is a problem with the cabling between the fieldbus connection and main
board.
The fieldbus cable is defective or incorrectly connected. See the chapter
Fieldbus Hardware for the correct connection.
The timeout parameter has been set at too small a value. Change the
parameterisation of the scales.
M1520-X: Communication Faults event message
X == 1 : A specification ID in the telegram is not known to the controller.

X == 2 : A reading ID in the telegram is not known to the controller.
X == 3: There is no connection to the host in the case of Ethernet/IP.

Schenck Process
5.5 DeviceNet Protocol Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Schenck Process
5.6 Available data
5.6.1 Setpoint
WRITE fieldbus
Identifiers Identifiers Data Type Meaning Added Information DISOMAT Satus DISOMAT Opus DISOMAT Tersus
Profibus Modbus
DeviceNet Modbus/TCP
(hex) (dec) (hex) (dec) (dec)
Commands
1000 4096 10 16 Num. DW Command number X X X
The meaning of the command numbers

DW 1 Taring Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
DW 2 Clear tare Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
DW 3 Zero setting Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
DW 4 Taring Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
DW 5 Clear tare Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
DW 6 Zero setting Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
DW 7 Taring Scale 2
DW 8 Clear tare Scale 2
DW 9 Zero setting Scale 2
DW 10 Taring Twin-unit
DW 11 Clear tare Twin-unit

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
DW 12 Zero setting Twin-unit
DW 13 Taring
DW 14 Clear tare
DW 15 Zero setting
DW 16 Taring
DW 17 Clear tare
DW 18 Zero setting
DW 19 Taring
DW 20 Clear tare
DW 21 Zero setting
DW 22 Taring
DW 23 Clear tare
DW 24 Zero setting
DW 25 Taring
DW 26 Clear tare
DW 27 Zero setting
DW 71 Connect scale Scale 1
DW 72 Connect scale Scale 2
DW 73 Connect scale Twin-unit
DW 74 Connect scale
DW 75 Connect scale

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
DW 76 Connect scale
DW 77 Connect scale
DW 78 Connect scale
DW 80 Register Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
DW 81 Register Scale 1
DW 82 Register Scale 2
DW 83 Register Twin-unit
DW 84 Register
DW 85 Register
DW 86 Register
DW 87 Register
DW 88 Register
DW 128 Acknowledging the highest X X X
pending fault
1002 4098 20 32 DW Function blocks Refer to the loaded function X X
(16 bits) block linkage
PLS-DIn-xx for the meaning of the bits
Predetermination values (floating point values, IEEE)
2000 8192 100 256 DDW Manual tare Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
2004 8196 102 258 DDW unused
2008 8200 104 260 DDW unused
200C 8204 106 262 DDW PLS -AIn-1 X X X
2010 8208 108 264 DDW PLS -AIn-2 X X X

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
2014 8212 10A 266 DDW PLS -AIn-3 X X X
2018 8216 10C 268 DDW PLS -AIn-4 X X X
200C 8220 10E 270 DDW Material number 1 X X X
2020 8224 110 272 DDW Setpoint 1 in kg X X X
2024 8228 112 274 DDW Material number 2 X
2028 8232 114 276 DDW Setpoint 2 in kg X
Texts/string (ASCI
600 1536 String 1 A maximum of 25 A maximum of 25 A maximum of 25
characters characters characters
Predetermination values (integers, ULONG)
8000 32768 800 2048 DDW Date and coding as per Profibus specifications X X X
8004 32772 802 2050 DDW Time and coding as per Profibus specifications X X X
8008 32776 804 2052 DDW Material number 1 X X X

Schenck Process
5.6.2 Controller data
READ fieldbus
Profibus Modbus
(hex) (dec) (hex) (dec)
Status information
3000 12288 1300 4864 DW Status (as data word, 16 its) Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
1300 4864 The scale is in the underrange X X X
1301 4865 The scale is in the overrange X X X
1302 4866 Manual or fixed tare is set X X X
1303 4867 Scale is exactly zero X X X
1304 4868 X X X
1305 4869 The weight is not valid X X X
1306 4870 Scale tared X X X
1307 4871 Scale in no-motion X X X
1308 4872 Measuring is being initialised: X X X
No weights are being established
1309 4873 X X X
130A 4874 The scale is in range 1 X X X
130B 4875 The scale is in range 2 X X X
130C 4876 The scale is in the zero setting range X X X
130D 4877 X X X
130E 4878 This is a multi-interval scale X X X
130F 4879 This is a multi-range scale X X X

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
3004 12292 1310 4880 Num. DW Mirror-ID (first requested ID) X X X
1320 4896 Num. DW The fault class of the highest pending fault X X X
0:no result
1:message
2:warning
3:alarm
4:fault
3008 12296 1330 4912 Num. DW The fault number of the highest pending fault X X X
1340 4928 Num. DW The LE group of the highest pending fault X X X
300C 12300 1350 4944 Num. DW Fault ident X X X
1360 4960 DW Binary function blocks (16 bits) PLS-DOut-xx X X X
Refer to the loaded function block linkage for the
meaning of the bits
3010 12304 1370 4976 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details) Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
1380 4992 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details) Scale 2
3014 12308 1390 5008 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details) Twin-unit
13A0 5024 DW Status (as a double word, 16 bits) Disobox 1 channels
1-2
13A0 5024 Initialising channel 1 X
13A1 5025 X
13A2 5026 X
13A3 5027 Measuring signal to large channel 1 X
13A4 5028 The load cell cable is broken to channel 1 X
13A5 5029 X
13A6 5030 X

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
13A7 5031 X
13A8 5032 Initialising channel 2 X
13A9 5033 X
13AA 5034 X
13AB 5035 Measuring signal to large channel 2 X
13AC 5036 The load cell cable is broken to channel 2 X
13AD 5037 X
13AE 5038 X
13AF 5039 X
3018 12312 13B0 5040 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 1 channels
3-4
13C0 5056 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 1 channels
5-6
301C 12316 13D0 5072 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 1 channels
7-8
13E0 5088 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 2 channels
1-2
3020 12320 13F0 5104 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 2 channels
3-4
1400 5120 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 2 channels
5-6
3024 12324 1410 5136 DW Status (refer to status ID 13A0 for details) Disobox 2 channels
7-8
1420 5152 DW Dimension (0:kg 1:g 2:t 3:lb) X X X
High-Word/Low-Byte

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
3028 12328 1430 5168 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details)
1440 5184 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details)
302C 12332 1450 5200 DW Status (refer to status ID 1300 for details)
3030 12336 1480 5248 DW Physical digital inputs X X X
1490 5264 DW Physical digital outputs X X X
3034 12340 14A0 5280 DW Feed status of feed operation 1 X X X
feeding status 0/1/2 none / active /stopped
14B0 5296 DW Feed status of feed operation 2 X
feeding status 0/1/2 none / active /stopped
Texts/string (ASCII)
Readings (floating point values, IEEE)
4000 16384 700 1792 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
4004 16388 702 1794 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
4008 16392 704 1796 DDW dW/dt unrounded in kg Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
400C 16396 706 1798 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
4010 16400 708 1800 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
format
4014 16404 70A 1802 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
format
4018 16408 70C 1804 DDW dW/dt Rounded in the display Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
format
401C 16412 70E 1806 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display Scale displayed Scale displayed Scale displayed
format
4020 16416 710 1808 DDW Balance (total) 100000 rest (kg) X X X
4024 16420 712 1810 DDW Balance (total) 100000 multiple (kg) X X X
4028 16424 714 1812 DDW Balance (current sort) 100000 rest (kg) X X X
402C 16428 716 1814 DDW Balance (current sort) 100000 multiple (kg) X X X
4030 16432 718 1816 DDW PLS -AOut-1 X X X
4034 16436 71A 1818 DDW PLS -AOut-2 X X X
4038 16440 71C 1820 DDW PLS -AOut-3 X X X
403C 16444 71E 1822 DDW PLS -AOut-4 X X X
4040 16448 720 1824 DDW Registered tare rounded in the display format X X X
4044 16452 722 1826 DDW Registered net rounded in the display format X X X
4048 16456 724 1828 DDW Registered consecutive number (integer data format) X X X
404C 16460 726 1830 DDW Registered consecutive number (float data format) X X X

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
4050 16464 728 1832 DDW Material number Feed operation 1 X X X
4054 16468 72A 1834 DDW Setpoint in t Feed operation 1 X X X
4058 16472 72C 1836 DDW Material number Feed operation 2 X
405C 16476 72E 1838 DDW Setpoint in kg Feed operation 2 X
4060 16480 730 1840 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
4064 16484 732 1842 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
4068 16488 734 1844 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
406C 16492 736 1846 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
4070 16496 738 1848 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Scale 2
4074 16500 73A 1850 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg Scale 2
4078 16504 73C 1852 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg Scale 2
407C 16508 73E 1854 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg Scale 2
4080 16512 740 1856 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Twin-unit
4084 16516 742 1858 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg Twin-unit
4088 16520 744 1860 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg Twin-unit
408C 16524 746 1862 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg Twin-unit
4090 16528 748 1864 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 1
4094 16532 74A 1866 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 2
4098 16536 74C 1868 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 3
409C 16540 74E 1870 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 4
40A0 16544 750 1872 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 5

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
40AC 16556 756 1878 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox1-Channel 8
40B0 16560 758 1880 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
format
40B4 16564 75A 1882 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
format
40B8 16568 75C 1884 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
format
40BC 16572 75E 1886 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1
format
40C0 16576 760 1888 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display Scale 2
format
40C4 16580 762 1890 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display Scale 2
format
40C8 16584 764 1892 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display Scale 2
format
40CC 16588 766 1894 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display Scale 2
format
40D0 16592 768 1896 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display Twin-unit
format
40D4 16596 76A 1898 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display Twin-unit
format
40D8 16600 76C 1900 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display Twin-unit
format
40DC 16604 76E 1902 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display Twin-unit
format

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
40E0 16608 770 1904 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 1
40EC 16620 776 1910 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 4
40F0 16624 778 1912 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 5
40F4 16628 77A 1914 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 6
40F8 16632 77C 1916 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 7
40FC 16636 77E 1918 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg Disobox 2 channel 8
4100 16640 780 1920 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg
4104 16644 782 1922 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg
4108 16648 784 1924 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg
410C 16652 786 1926 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg
4114 16660 78A 1930 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg
4118 16664 78C 1932 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg
411C 16668 78E 1934 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg
4124 16676 792 1938 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg
4128 16680 794 1940 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg
412C 16684 796 1942 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
4134 16692 79A 1946 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg
4138 16696 79C 1948 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg
413C 16700 79E 1950 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg
4140 16704 7A0 1952 DDW GROSS weight unrounded in kg
4144 16708 7A2 1954 DDW TARE weight unrounded in kg
4148 16712 7A4 1956 DDW dG/dt unrounded in kg
414C 16716 7A6 1958 DDW NET weight unrounded in kg
4150 16720 7A8 1960 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display
format
4154 16724 7AA 1962 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display
format
4158 16728 7AC 1964 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display
format
415C 16732 7AE 1966 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display
format
4160 16736 7B0 1968 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display
format
4164 16740 7B2 1970 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display
format
4168 16744 7B4 1972 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display
format
416C 16748 7B6 1974 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display
format
4170 16752 7B8 1976 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display
format

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
4174 16756 7BA 1978 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display
format
4178 16760 7BC 1980 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display
format
417C 16764 7BE 1982 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display
format
4180 16768 7C0 1984 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display
format
4184 16772 7C2 1986 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display
format
4188 16776 7C4 1988 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display
format
418C 16780 7C6 1990 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display
format
4190 16784 7C8 1992 DDW GROSS weight Rounded in the display
format
4194 16788 7CA 1994 DDW TARE weight Rounded in the display
format
4198 16792 7CC 1996 DDW dG/dt Rounded in the display
format
419C 16796 7CE 1998 DDW NET weight Rounded in the display
format
41A0 16800 7D0 2000 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41A4 16804 7D2 2002 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41A8 16808 7D4 2004 DDW dG/dt kg / 100 ms

Schenck Process
Profibus Modbus
41AC 16812 7D6 2006 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41B0 16816 7D8 2008 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41B4 16820 7DA 2010 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41B8 16824 7DC 2012 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41BC 16828 7DE 2014 DDW dW/dt kg / 100 ms
41C0 16832 7E0 2016 DDW Current actual value Feed operation 1 X X X
41C4 16836 7E2 2018 DDW Current residual value Feed operation 1 X X X
41C8 16840 7E4 2020 DDW unused
41CC 16844 7E6 2022 DDW unused
41D0 16848 7E8 2024 DDW Current actual value Feed operation 2 X
41D4 16852 7EA 2026 DDW Current residual value Feed operation 2 X
41D8 16856 7EC 2028 DDW unused
41DC 16860 7EE 2030 DDW unused
Readings (integers, ULONG)
7000 28672 900 2304 DDW The current date X X X
Coding according to the Profibus specifications
7004 28676 902 2306 DDW The current time X X X
Coding according to the Profibus specifications
7008 28680 904 2308 DDW Registration date X X X
700C 28684 906 2310 DDW Registration time X X X

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
5.7 Date/time format
DISOMAT B plus, Opus, DISOBOX, Datenkommunikation BV -H2316DE/0715 107

Schenck Process
5.7 Date/time format

Schenck Process
DISOCONT
Weighfeeder
Operating Instructions
DE Bedienhinweise Dosierbandwaage
GB Operating Instructions Weighfeeder
FR Instructions de service Doseur pondral bande
IT Istruzioni per luso Bilancia pesatrice con nastro
ES Instrucciones de uso Bscula dosificadora
NL Bedieninstructies Banddoseertoestel
PT Manual de instrues Balana dosadora de correia
Service Service Service aprs-vente
BV-H2061AA
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundlagen Quality and reliability form the basis for La qualit et la fiabilit - sur cette base repose la
der Schenck Unternehmensphilosophie, Schenck's corporate philosophy all over philosophie d'entreprise de Schenck, dans le monde
weltweit. Deshalb bieten wir Ihnen ein the world. That's why we offer you an entier. C'est pourquoi, nous vous offrons un large
umfangreiches Service-Konzept, von der extensive service strategy starting with our concept de service, depuis le contrle qualit
strengen Qualittskontrolle ber die Montage stringent quality control through assembly svre, en passant par le montage et la mise en
und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur lckenlosen and commissioning right down to all-round service, jusqu' l'assistance sans lacune. Nous
Betreuung an. Wir sind jederzeit fr Sie da! support. We're always there for you. sommes toujours votre service !
Helpdesk - kostenfrei Free Helpdesk Support Clients - appel gratuit

(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least (LU-VE, au moins 8H17H, heure de l'Europe
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ) 8 o'clock to 5 p.m. CET) centrale)
Whrend unserer normalen Brozeiten stehen Service specialists are available to you in Pendant nos heures de bureau normales, dans
Ihnen in jedem Geschftsbereich every department during our normal office chacune de nos divisions vous trouverez nos
Service-Spezialisten zur Problemfall- / hours for analying problems and spcialistes en matire d'analyses de
Strfallanalyse zur Verfgung. malfunctions. problmes / dfaillances votre disposition.
Heavy Vibrating & Screening Technology
Building materials, mining, foundry, steel and cement Phone: +49 6151 1531-3525
Phone: +49 6151 1531-3138 Fax: +49 6151 1531-3096
Fax: +49 6151 1531-3270 vibrating@schenckprocess.com
heavy@schenckprocess.com
Light Spare Parts & Components
Chemistry, plastics, foodstuffs and pharmaceuticals Phone: +49 6151 1531-1758
Phone: +49 6151 1531-2971 Fax: +49 6151 1531-3632
Fax: +49 6151 1531-2668 spareparts@schenckprocess.com
light@schenckprocess.com components@schenckprocess.com
Transport Automation
All industries with logistics processes and trains
Phone: +49 6151 1531-2448
Fax: +49 6151 1531-1369
transport@schenckprocess.com
Individuelles Telefon Consulting Individual phone consulting Consultation individuelle tlphonique

kostenpflichtig (fee required) appel titre onreux
(Mo. - Fr., mindestens (Monday through Friday from at least 8 (LU-VE, au moins 8H17H, heure de l'Europe
8.00 17.00 Uhr MEZ) o'clock to 5 p.m. CET) centrale)
Sie wnschen eine Inbetriebnahme mit telefonischer Do you want one of our service specialists Vous souhaitez une mise en service avec
Untersttzung eines Service-Spezialisten oder eine to give you phone support in l'assistance tlphonique d'un spcialiste de
Online-Diagnose / Optimierung Ihres Systems? Wir commissioning your system or on-line service, ou un diagnostic / l'optimisation en ligne
sind fr Sie da. Planen Sie mit uns Ihren diagnosis / system optimisation? We're de votre systme ? Nous sommes votre
Wunschtermin. there for you. Schedule an appointment disposition. Projetez avec nous votre date de
with us whenever you need it. rendez-vous.
Kundenservice 24h Notfall-Hotline Free 24 h Customer Service Service aprs-vente - Ligne d'urgence
kostenfrei Hotline 24h/24 appel gratuit
Sie haben einen Str- / Problemfall auerhalb You have a malfunction or problem Vous avez une panne / un problme en dehors
unserer normalen Arbeitszeiten. Kein Problem, Sie outside of our normal business hours. No de nos heures de travail normales. Pas de
knnen auch auerhalb unserer Brozeiten jederzeit problem. You can reach a Schenck problme ; vous pouvez toujours joindre
einen Schenck-Servicemitarbeiter zur Problem- / service technician at any time outside of quelqu'un du personnel de service de Schenck
Strfallannahme, Service-Disposition und Ersten our office hours for recording problems or qui prendra note de votre problme / panne, qui
Hilfe erreichen. malfunctions, service scheduling and 'first se chargera de le / la transmettre et qui vous
aid'. portera 'Premiers secours' - mme en dehors de
nos heures de bureau.
24h Notfall-Hotline: 24h Emergency-Hotline : Ligne d'urgence 24h/24 :

+49 172 6 501700 +49 172 6 501700 +49 172 6 501700
Transport Automation und statische Automation and Static Weighing Transport Automation (automatisation du
WgetechnikTransport Equipment transport) et technique du pesage statique
+49 171 2 251195 +49 171 2 251195 +49 171 2 251195
Heavy Industry, Light Industry ohne statische Heavy Industry, Light Industry excluding Heavy Industry, Light Industry sans technique du
Wgetechnik Static Weighing Equipment pesage statique
Copyright 2006
Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Jegliche All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this Tous droits rservs. Toute reproduction de cette
Vervielfltigung dieser Dokumentation, gleich documentation, regardless of method, documentation, mme partielle, et par quelque
nach welchem Verfahren, ist ohne vorherige without prior permission by procd que ce soit, sans lautorisation pralable
schriftliche Genehmigung durch die Schenck Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even crite de Schenck Process GmbH, est strictement
Process GmbH, auch auszugsweise, untersagt. by excerpt, is prohibited. interdite.
nderungen ohne vorherige Ankndigung Subject to change without prior notice. Sous rserve de modification sans avis pralable.
bleiben vorbehalten. Note: Translation of the original Nota : Traduction des instructions originales de
Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung instructions service
Contents
1 DEUTSCH .......................................................................................... 1
1.1 Allgemeines............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Sicherheitshinweise .............................................................................................. 1
1.3 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente.............................................................................. 3

1.3.1 Das Disocont Bediengert ................................................................................ 3
1.3.2 Meldelampe....................................................................................................... 4
1.3.3 Statusfeld .......................................................................................................... 4
1.3.4 Anzeigefeld........................................................................................................ 5
1.3.5 Meldungsfeld ..................................................................................................... 6
1.3.6 Wichtige Tasten................................................................................................. 6
1.3.7 Funktionstasten................................................................................................. 6
1.3.8 Funktionsverteiler.............................................................................................. 7
2 ENGLISH ........................................................................................... 8
2.1 General.................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Safety Instructions ................................................................................................ 8
2.3 Display and Control Elements............................................................................ 10

2.3.1 Disocont Control Unit ...................................................................................... 10
2.3.2 LED ................................................................................................................. 11
2.3.3 Status Field ..................................................................................................... 11
2.3.4 Display Field.................................................................................................... 12
2.3.5 Message Field ................................................................................................. 13
2.3.6 Important Keys ................................................................................................ 14
2.3.7 Function Keys ................................................................................................. 14
2.3.8 Function Distributor ......................................................................................... 15
3 FRANAIS ....................................................................................... 16
3.1 Gnralits ........................................................................................................... 16
3.2 Instructions de scurit ...................................................................................... 16
3.3 Elments d'affichage et de service .................................................................... 18

3.3.1 L'unit de service Disocont ............................................................................. 18
3.3.2 Lampe tmoin.................................................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Champ d'tat ................................................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Champs de textes affichs.............................................................................. 20
3.3.5 Ligne de signalisations.................................................................................... 21
3.3.6 Touches importantes....................................................................................... 22
3.3.7 Touches de fonction........................................................................................ 22
3.3.8 Menu des fonctions ......................................................................................... 23
4 ITALIANO ........................................................................................ 24
4.1 Generalit ............................................................................................................. 24
4.2 Istruzioni di sicurezza ......................................................................................... 24
4.3 Elementi di indicazione e di comando............................................................... 26

4.3.1 L'unit di comando Disocont ........................................................................... 26
DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions BV-H2061AA, 0532 I

Schenck Process
Contents
4.3.2 Spia di segnalazione........................................................................................27

4.3.3 Righe di testo ...................................................................................................27
4.3.4 Campo di indicazione ......................................................................................28
4.3.5 Riga di messaggio ...........................................................................................29
4.3.6 Tasti importanti ................................................................................................30
4.3.7 Tasti di funzione...............................................................................................30
4.3.8 Distributore di funzioni .....................................................................................31
5 ESPAOL ........................................................................................ 32
5.1 Generalidades.......................................................................................................32
5.2 Instrucciones de seguridad.................................................................................32
5.3 Elementos de indicacin y de mando ................................................................34

5.3.1 La unidad de mando Disocont .........................................................................34
5.3.2 Lmpara de sealizacin.................................................................................35
5.3.3 Zona de estado ................................................................................................35
5.3.4 Zona de indicacin...........................................................................................36
5.3.5 Lnea de sealizacin ......................................................................................37
5.3.6 Teclas importantes...........................................................................................38
5.3.7 Teclas de funcin.............................................................................................38
5.3.8 Men de funciones...........................................................................................38
6 NEDERLANDS................................................................................. 40
6.1 Algemeen ..............................................................................................................40
6.2 Veiligheidsinstructies ..........................................................................................40
6.3 Display- en bedieningselementen ......................................................................42

6.3.1 Het Disocont bedieningstoestel .......................................................................42
6.3.2 Signaallampjes.................................................................................................42
6.3.3 Statusveld ........................................................................................................43
6.3.4 Displayveld.......................................................................................................44
6.3.5 Meldingsveld ....................................................................................................45
6.3.6 Belangrijke toetsen ..........................................................................................46
6.3.7 Functietoetsen .................................................................................................46
6.3.8 Functiemenu ....................................................................................................47
7 PORTUGUS................................................................................... 48
7.1 Generalidades.......................................................................................................48
7.2 Instrues de segurana .....................................................................................48
7.3 Elementos de visualizao e comando..............................................................50

7.3.1 A unidade de comando Disocont.....................................................................50
7.3.2 Lmpada de sinalizao ..................................................................................51
7.3.3 Campo de estado.............................................................................................51
7.3.4 Campo de visualizao....................................................................................52
7.3.5 Campo de mensagem .....................................................................................53
7.3.6 Teclas importantes...........................................................................................54
7.3.7 Teclas de comando..........................................................................................54
7.3.8 Menu de funes .............................................................................................55
II BV-H2061AA , 0532 DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
Deutsch Allgemeines
1 Deutsch
1.1 Allgemeines
Diese Kurzhinweise beschreiben die Funktionen des DISOCONT VLB-Bediengertes
zur regelmigen Bedienung des DISOCONT Systems.
Fr ausfhrlichere Informationen verweisen wir auf:
- das Systemhandbuch BV-H2085DE und
- das Betriebshandbuch DISOCONT Dosierbandwaage BV-H 2062DE.
1.2 Sicherheitshinweise
Zur Vermeidung von Personen- und Sachschden sind die im folgenden genannten
Bedingungen und Vorschriften einzuhalten.
Beachten Sie darber hinaus:
! Sicherheitshinweise in der Auftragsdokumentation.
! Sicherheitshinweise, die Mechanikkomponenten betreffen.
! Vorschriften fr Lieferanteile, die nicht von Schenck Process hergestellt

wurden oder nicht zum Lieferumfang von Schenck Process gehren.
Bei Montage-, Inbetriebnahme- und Servicearbeiten sind die im Bestimmungsland
gltigen Regeln der Technik zu beachten.
Bestimmungsgeme Verwendung
Das Mess-System mit den angeschlossenen Mechanikkomponenten ist ausschlielich
fr Wgeaufgaben und direkt damit verbundene Steuerungsaufgaben zu verwenden.
Jeder darber hinausgehende Gebrauch gilt als nicht bestimmungsgem.
Gefahrenquellen
Vom Mess-System geht whrend des Wgebetriebs keine Gefahr aus, wenn das
System ordnungsgem installiert und in Betrieb genommen wurde.
Gefahren beim Einsatz des Mess-Systems knnen entstehen, wenn das System
Steuerungsaufgaben bernimmt oder beim Transport des Wgeguts. Mgliche
Gefahrenquellen sind dann z.B. Zusatzvorrichtungen, durch die das Wgegut
befrdert oder dosiert wird. In diesen Fllen knnen Restgefahren vom Mess-System
ausgehen, wenn es von ungeschultem Personal unsachgem eingesetzt oder
bedient wird.
Das Mess-System kann Bestandteil einer komplexeren Anlage sein. Der Betreiber der
Anlage trgt die Gesamtverantwortung fr die Betriebssicherheit der Anlage.
Kennzeichnung von Restgefahren

Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Hinweise auf Gefahren, die zu
Sachschden am Mess-System oder anderen Anlagenteilen fhren
knnen.
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Hinweise auf Gefahren, die zur

Verletzung von Personen oder im Extremfall sogar zum Tod fhren
knnen.
Personal
DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions BV-H2061AA , 0532 1

Schenck Process
Deutsch Sicherheitshinweise
Vorbereitung, Montage, Inbetriebnahme, Bedienung, Wartung, Instandhaltung und

Servicearbeiten drfen nur von fachlich geeignetem Personal durchgefhrt werden.
Alle Personen, die mit dem Mess-System zu tun haben, mssen die
Sicherheitshinweise und die fr sie wichtigen Teile des Betriebshandbuchs kennen
und beachten.
Der Betreiber muss das Bedienpersonal anhand des Betriebshandbuchs unterweisen,
mit der Verpflichtung, smtliche Vorschriften und Anweisungen einzuhalten.
Parameternderung
Die Funktionsweise des Mess-Systems wird durch Parameter festgelegt. Die
Parameter drfen nur von Personen gendert werden, die mit der Arbeitsweise des
Gertes vertraut sind (z.B. durch Schulung bei Schenck Process). Falsch eingestellte
Parameter knnen bei angeschlossenen Steuerungen zu Gefhrdungen von
Personen oder zu Sachschden fhren. Darber hinaus knnen sie den Wgebetrieb
erheblich stren.
Passwort
Die Parameter werden per Passwort vor unbefugter nderung geschtzt. Der
Betreiber des Mess-Systems muss auf einen verantwortungsbewussten Umgang mit
dem Passwort achten.
Quittieren von Ereignismeldungen

Ereignismeldungen drfen nur quittiert werden, wenn die Ursache des Ereignisses
beseitigt ist.
Achten Sie vor der Quittierung eines Ereignisses darauf, da angeschlossene
Peripheriegerte ordnungsgem arbeiten. Insbesondere angeschlossene
Steuerungen mssen in einem definierten, sicheren Zustand sein.
Wartung und Instandhaltung
! Es sind alle an der Waage angebrachten Warn- und Hinweisschilder zu

beachten.
! Vor Arbeiten an der mechanischen Ausrstung oder Peripheriegerten

(insbesondere Steuerungen) muss das Mess-System abgeschaltet werden.
Es sind Messnahmen zu treffen, die ein unbeabsichtigtes Einschalten des
Mess-Systems ausschlieen.
! Arbeiten an elektrischen Ausrstungen drfen nur im spannungsfreien

Zustand durchgefhrt werden (Netzstecker ziehen!).
! Die Gerte drfen nur in den vorgesehenen Gehusen betrieben werden, da

sonst die Gefahr der Berhrung spannungsfhrender Teile besteht.
Nsse und Feuchtigkeit
Alle Teile der Waage, insbesondere die elektrischen Teile, mssen vor Nsse und
Feuchtigkeit geschtzt werden, wenn die Gehuse geffnet werden, z.B. bei
Wartungs- und Servicearbeiten. Ansonsten mssen die Schutzarten der Gehuse
beachtet werden.
Konstruktive nderungen
Wenn Sie das Mess-System konstruktiv verndern oder durch Komponenten
ergnzen, die nicht von Schenck Process geliefert werden, bernimmt Schenck
Process keine Haftung und keine Garantie. Dies gilt insbesondere fr nderungen, die
die Betriebssicherheit des Mess-Systems beeinflussen knnen.
Austausch von Teilen
2 BV-H2061AA, 0532 DISOCONT Weighfeeder Operating Instructions

Schenck Process
Deutsch Anzeige- und Bedienelemente
Mssen bei einer Reparatur Teile ausgetauscht werden, so drfen nur Original-
Ersatzteile von Schenck Process verwendet werden. Werden andere Ersatzteile
verwendet, erlischt die Garantie.
1.3 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente

1.3.1 Das Disocont Bediengert
In der folgenden Abbildung ist die Frontansicht des DISOCONT Bediengerts mit
Kennzeichnung der Anzeigefelder dargestellt:
In diesem Betriebshandbuch wird bei der Beschreibung von Tasten die Abkrzung
"Taste <Tastenname>" verwendet, z.B. Taste <Return>.
Bedient wird der DISOCONT mit Funktionstasten <F1> bis <F9> (gelb), Cursortasten
<Links>, <Rechts>, <Hoch>, <Tief> (grn), einem Nummerntastenblock (wei) und
der Taste <Return> (rot).
Die jeweilige Belegung der Funktionstasten ist von der Bediensituation abhngig. Die
Funktion wird ber oder neben der Taste angezeigt.
Der Kontrast der Anzeige wird um eine Stufe erhht, indem Taste <.> und Cursortaste
<Hoch> gleichzeitig gedrckt werden. Der Kontrast wird um eine Stufe verringert,
indem Taste <.> und Cursortaste <Tief> gleichzeitig gedrckt werden.
Standardmig wird nach 15 Minuten die Hintergrundbeleuchtung ausgeschaltet. Ein
beliebiger Tastendruck schaltet die Beleuchtung wieder ein. Mit der
Tastenkombination <.> und Cursortaste <Links> wird die Beleuchtung auf Dauerlicht
geschaltet.
Die Kombination <.> und Cursortaste <Rechts> schaltet wieder in den Grundzustand.
Der zuletzt gewhlte Zustand bleibt auch nach Spannungsausfall erhalten.
Die in der Abbildung "Frontansicht des DISOCONT Bediengertes" dargestellten
Elemente haben folgende Bedeutung.

Schenck Process
1.3.2 Meldelampe
Wenn die grne Meldelampe leuchtet, ist der DISOCONT betriebsbereit.
1.3.3 Statusfeld
In der 1. oder 2. Textzeile kann folgender Text angezeigt werden:
Anzeige Bedeutung
Waage ist ausgeschaltet. Nur Bandbeladung und
OFF
Bandgeschwindigkeit werden weiterhin gemessen und angezeigt.
Waage ist eingeschaltet. Frderorgan luft, Frdermenge und
ON
Frderstrke werden erfat.
VOL Volumetrischer Betrieb.
VOL--> Anfahr- oder Leerfahrbetrieb
VOL-S Volumetrisch synchron
OP Tastatur-Betrieb.
SIM Simulationsbetrieb ist eingeschaltet.
BATCH Vorgewhlter Batchbetrieb.
Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software Version 11 ist passiv
ES 11
beobachtend angeschlossen
Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software Version 11 ist aktiv
ES-ACT 11
angeschlossen und kann Werte verstellen
Ein PC mit der EasyServe-Software hatte eine Unterbrechnung ohne
ES-DIS
sich ordnungsgem abgemeldet zu haben.
PA Waage im Parametriermode
CA Einstellprogramm aktiv
LOCAL Lokal-Betrieb ist vorgewhlt
CHECK Eine Kontrollmesseinrichtung ist aktiv
MAN + Manuelles Fllen des Behlters gestartet
MAN - Manuelles Fllen des Behlters gestopt

Schenck Process
1.3.4 Anzeigefeld
Im Anzeigefeld kann in zwei Zeilen jeweils eine der folgenden Prozessgren
dargestellt werden. Die Zeilenanzeige kann auch ganz ausgeblendet werden.
Die Auswahl der Gren wird mit den Cursortasten vorgenommen: Die Cursortasten
<Links> und <Rechts> beziehen sich auf das erste Textfeld und die Cursortasten
<Hoch> und <Tief> auf das zweite Textfeld.
Die angegebene Reihenfolge der Gren entspricht dem Durchrollen mit der
Cursortaste <Rechts> bzw. <Hoch>:
Angezeigte Gre Dimension Bezugsgre
Aktueller Sollwert kg/h oder t/h -
Frderstrke I kg/h oder t/h -
Relat. Frderstrke % Nenn-Frderstrke
Bandbeladung kg/m -
Rel. Bandbeladung % Nennbandbeladung
Bandgeschwindigkeit m/s -
Zhler 1 kg oder t -
Zhler 2 kg oder t -
Zhler 3 kg oder t -
(Sollwert-Istwert)/Nenn-
Regelabweichung %
Frderstrke *100
Externer Sollwert (1) kg/h oder t/h -
Relativer Sollwert % externer Sollwert
Batch-Sollwert (2) kg oder t -
Batch-Restmenge (2) kg oder t -
Batch-Istwert (2) kg oder t -
Feuchte (3) % -
Korrigierter Istwert (3) kg/h oder t/h -
Korr. Rel. Istwert (3) % Nenn-Frderstrke
Zhler 1 Korr. (3) kg oder t -
B: Fllgewicht (4) kg oder t -
B: Rel. Fllgewicht (4) % Nennfllstand
B: Sollwert (5) kg -
Position Zuteiler (6) % 100%
Differenz Istwert (7) kg/h -
Korrektur Tara rel. (8) % Nenn-Bandbeladung
Korrektur Ber. rel. (8) % Bereichskorrektur
Kontroll-Lnge (8) m -
Kontin. Ergebnis Z (8) kg -
Kontroll-Erg. F/Z (8) - -
Bandbelad. 2. Brcke (9) kg/m -
rel. Beladung 2.Br. (9) % Nenn-Bandbeladung

Schenck Process
(1) nur, wenn Parameter P 03.03 "Sollwertquelle" auf ein externes Gert (Feldbus
oder analoger Eingang) eingestellt ist.
(2) nur, wenn Parameter "Chargierbetrieb" auf "YES" steht und die Funktion "Batch
Vorwahl" aktiv ist.
(3) Nur, wenn Feuchte Messung aktiv (Block 28)
(4) Nur, wenn Behlterwaage aktiv (Block 24)
(5) Nur, wenn Behlter-Regelung EIN (Block 25)
(6) Nur, wenn P31.01 AI Zuteiler Position ungleich "--"
(7) Nur, wenn P03.09 Differenz Istwert ungleich "--"
(8) Nur, wenn Kontroll-Messeinrichtung aktiv (Block 27)
(9) Nur, wenn P26.01 2. Wgebrcke aktiv auf "YES"
1.3.5 Meldungsfeld
Im unteren Bereich des Anzeigefeldes gibt es das Meldungsfeld. Dort wird eine
eventuell anstehende Ereignismeldung mit dem Kurzkode und einem Erluterungstext
angezeigt.
Beispiel fr eine Ereignismeldung ist: "WE-01 Netzausfall".
1.3.6 Wichtige Tasten
1.3.7 Funktionstasten
ber oder neben den Funktionstasten <F1> bis <F9> wird die fr den Bedienkontext
magebende Tasten-Bedeutung auf der Anzeige dargestellt. Die folgenden Tasten
sind wichtig zur Bedienung des DISOCONT:
Taste Belegung Funktion
F5 ON Einschalten
F6 OFF Ausschalten
Lschen der zuletzt eingegebenen Zahl oder des
F4 DEL
zuletzt eingegebenen Zeichens.
F1 EDIT Vorbereiten der Eingabe.
Abbrechen von Eingaben, Programmen und allen
F3 ESC
anderen Funktionen nach Aufruf.
F2 MENU Aufrufen des Funktionsverteilers.
F7 ResTot Lschen eines Frdermengenzhlers.
F7 Events Ereignisse zeigen
F7 Print T FMZ drucken
F7 Volum Volumetrisch
F7 Grav Gravimetrisch
F7 VolSyn Volumetrisch synchron
F7 EndBat Batch beenden
F7 Print B Batch drucken
Abschlieen einer Eingabe. Aufrufen eines Programms,
<Return> Return
einer Funktion.
F8 ClrEvt Quittieren von Ereignismeldungen
F9 Ba Set Batch Sollwert eingeben
Die Funktionstaste F7 dient als Hot-Key mit dem spezielle Funktionen direkt
ausgefhrt werden knnen. Die Belegung der Taste erfolgt mit dem Parameter P
02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

Schenck Process
1.3.8 Funktionsverteiler
Der Funktionsverteiler ist das Element zur Bedienung spezieller Funktionen des
DISOCONT. Vom Funktionsverteiler wird auf Funktionsgruppen zugegriffen, die zum
Konfigurieren und Steuern der Anlage bentigt werden. Die Funktionsgruppen sind
Betriebsfunktionen, Justagefunktionen und Programmierfunktionen. Zu ihnen gehren
beispielsweise Einstellprogramme und Parametereingabe.
Um die Gefahr von Fehlbedienungen gering zu halten, sind einige Funktionen im
Funktionsverteiler mit Passwort gesichert.
In der folgenden Abbildung ist der Funktionsverteiler mit allen untergeordneten Mens
dargestellt.
Abb.: Funktionsverteiler mit Mens

Vorgehen zum Aufruf des Funktionsverteilers
1. Einstellen der Normal-Anzeige durch ein- oder mehrmaliges Bettigen
derTaste <ESC>
2. Bettigen der Taste <MENU>
3. Durchrollen der Funktionen mit Cursortasten
4. Auswahl mit Taste <RETURN>
Hinweis: Bei Funktionen mit zwei Auswahlmglichkeiten wird die nicht aktive Funktion
angezeigt, z.B. wird "Batch Abwahl" angezeigt, wenn "Batch Vorwahl" aktiv ist.

Schenck Process
English General
2 English
2.1 General
This set of quick references describes the functions of the DISOCONT control unit that
can be used in daily system operation.
For details, please read
- System Manual BV-H2085GB and
- Operating Instructions BV-H2062GB.
2.2 Safety Instructions

To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated
below.
Additionally, you should observe:
! Safety hints given in order-specific documentation
! Safety hints relating to mechanical components
! Instructions given in sub-suppliers documentation.

When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable
local regulations.
Use As Originally Intended
The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively
designed for weighing and controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is
considered inappropriate.
Risks
No danger originates from the measuring system itself, if it is properly installed and
commissioned.
However, upon use of the measuring system, danger may result during transit of
material to be weighed (e.g. from auxiliaries used to handle or feed material) or if
system assumes control tasks. Residual risks may originate from the measuring
system if unskilled operators improperly handle the system.
The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The user is fully
responsible for the overall plant safety.
Identification of Residual Risks
The presence of this symbol indicates that the machine or component
used has the potential to cause damage to the measuring system or other
plant sections.

used has the potential to cause severe injury or death.
Personnel
Preparation, installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance, and servicing may
exclusively be performed by skilled persons only.
All persons working on the measuring system are required to observe the safety hints
and know the parts of the technical documentation relevant to their work.

Schenck Process
English Safety Instructions
The supervisor is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations
and instructions given.
Parameter Changes
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters, which must
exclusively be changed by persons familiar with the measuring system operating
principles (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set may
cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a user control system is
connected. They can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password
Software parameters are protected from unintended change by password. The
measuring system user has to ensure safe password handling.
Error Message Acknowledgement
Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Before you acknowledge an error message, check to see that connected peripherals
properly operate. Check to see that connected control systems, if any, are in fail-safe
state.
Maintenance and Repair
! During maintenance and repair, observe any warning symbols on the scale.
! Before performing work on the mechanical system or peripherals (particularly

the control system), disconnect the measuring system and protect the system
from inadvertent restart.
! Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power

supply.
! The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger
of contacting live parts.
Moisture Protection
Protect all system parts, electrical items in particular, from moisture (e.g. during
maintenance and servicing) when housings are open. Observe housing protection
standards.
Modification & Replacement
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not
supplied by Schenck Process voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting
damages. This particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect
the operating safety of the measuring system.
Replacement of Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To
ensure this requirement is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be
used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will be void.

Schenck Process
English Display and Control Elements
2.3 Display and Control Elements

2.3.1 Disocont Control Unit
The figure below shows the DISOCONT control unit front panel and its display fields.
This manual uses the abbreviations "<Key Name...> key", e.g. <Return> key. Cursor
keys are called "cursor <UP> or <DOWN>".
The DISOCONT is operated with the use of function keys (yellow), keypad (white) and
Return key (red).
Function keys are assigned in accordance with the specific control situation. The
particular function is displayed over or right next to the key.
You can increase display contrast by operating key <.> and single or repeated
operation of the <UP> cursor. Use <.> keys and <DOWN> cursor to decrease display
contrast.
On standard, the background lighting cuts off after 15 minutes and comes on again
after operation of any key. Use shortcut <.> and cursor key <Left> for steady light.
Shortcut <.> and cursor key <Right> lets you return to default state.
The state selected last is maintained also after power failure.
The elements shown in the figure have the following meanings.

Schenck Process
2.3.2 LED
If the green LED lights, DISOCONT is ready to operate.
2.3.3 Status Field

In the first and second text lines you can read the following texts:
Display Meaning
Scale OFF. Only belt load and belt speed continue being measured and
OFF
displayed.
ON Scale ON. Feed unit is active, amount fed out and feed rate are aquired.
VOL Volumetric mode
VOL--> Start-up or clearance mode
VOL-S Volumetric Synchronous mode
OP Keyboard mode
SIM Simulation ON
BATCH Batch mode selected
ES 11 PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is connected for passive monitoring.
ES- PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is actively connected and can be used to
ACT 11 change values.
ES-DIS PC with EasyServe software disrupted without previous log-off.
PA Scale in parametrization mode
CA Setting program active
LOCAL Local mode preselected
CHECK Check system active
MAN + Manual hopper filling started
MAN - Manual hopper filling stopped

Schenck Process
2.3.4 Display Field

In the display field, one of the following process variables can be displayed in two
lines. You can also fade out line display.:
Selection is by cursor keys. <Left> and <Right> cursors refer to the first text field;
<Up> and <Down> cursors, to the second text field.
The stated sequence of variables corresponds to scrolling with <Right> or <Up>
cursor.
Displayed Variable Unit Reference Value
Current Setpoint kg/hr or t/hr -
Feed Rate I kg/hr or t/hr -
Relative Feed Rate % Nominal feed rate
Belt Load kg/m -
Relative Belt Load % Nominal belt load
Belt Speed m/s -
Totalizer 1 kg or t -
(Setpoint-actual value)/nominal
Deviation %
feed rate *100
External Setpoint (1) kg/hr or t/hr -
Relative Setpoint % External setpoint
Batch Setpoint (2) kg or t -
Batch Resid. Amount (2) kg or t -
Batch Feed Rate (2) kg or t -
Moisture (3) % -
Corr. Feed Rate (3) kg/hr or t/hr -
Corr. Rel. Feed Rate (3) % Nominal feed rate
Totalizer 1 Corr. (3) kg or t -
BIN: Fill Weight (4) kg or t -
BIN: Rel. Fill Weight (4) % Nominal fill level
BIN: Setpoint (5) kg -
Flow Gate Position (6) % 100%
Difference Feed Rate (7) kg/hr -
Rel. Tare Corr. (8) % Nominal belt load
Rel. Span Corr. (8) % Range correction
Check Belt Length (8) m -
Contin. Result Z (8) kg -
Check Result F/Z (8) - -
Belt load 2nd Bridge (9) kg/m -
Rel. Load 2nd Bridge (9) % Nominal belt load

Schenck Process
(1) Only if Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to external system (fieldbus
or analog input).
(2) Only if Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES" and "Preselect Batch"
Function is active.
(3) Only if moisture measurement is active (Block 28)
(4) Only if hopper scale is active (Block 24)
(5) Only if bin weigher control is ON (Block 25)
(6) Only if P31.01 AI Pos. Flow Gate unequals "--"
(7) Only if P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" unequals "--"
(8) Only if check system is active (Block 27)
(9) Only if P26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to "YES"
2.3.5 Message Field

The message field in the lower display field area shows the event message, if any,
complete with code and a short explanatory text.
Sample event message: "WE-01 Power Failure".

Schenck Process
2.3.6 Important Keys
2.3.7 Function Keys

Over or next to function keys <F1> to <F9>, the contact specific key definition is
shown on display. The following keys are important for DISOCONT control:
Key Assignment Function
F5 ON Turn on
F6 OFF Turn off
F4 DEL Delete number of character entered last
F1 EDIT Prepare input
F3 ESC Abort inputs, programs and all other function after call
F2 MENU Call function distributor
F7 ResTot Reset totalizing counter
F7 FILL Start filling
F7 NO FILL Stop filling
F7 Events Display events
F7 Print T Print totalizing counter readings
F7 Volum Volumetric mode
F7 Grav Gravimetric mode
F7 VolSyn Volumetric Synchronous mode
F7 EndBat Terminate batch
F7 Print B Print batch
<Return> Return Acknowledge input. Call program or function.
F8 ClrEvt Acknowledge event messages
F9 Ba Set Enter batch setpoint
Function key F7 serves as hot-key designed to directly perform special functions. Key
is assigned using Parameter P 02.14 "Hot-Key F7".

Schenck Process
2.3.8 Function Distributor
The function distributor is designed to access special DISOCONT functions required

for system control and configuration. Among these are, for instance, operating,
calibrating, and programming functions, as well as setting programms and parameter
input.
To reduce the risk of maloperation, some functions are protected by password.
Using the function distributor, you can select the following functions and menus:
Print FMZ
Reset Totalizer PROGRAMMING Menu
Test Display
Select/Stop Prefeeder Read Parameters
Service Values Enter Parameters
Trend Load Default Param.
Volumetic/Gravimetric Print Parameters
Volum. Synchronous Print Shortlist
Start/Stop Keyb. Mode Print Status Rep.
Display Events (1)
Select/Deselect Batch (2
Abort Batch (3)
Print Batch (4)
Start Span Corr. (5)
Finish Check Meas. (5) CALIB. FUNCTIONS Menu
Accept Correction (5)
>0< Zero Set START/STOP Simulation
Programming TW: Tare
Calib.Functions CW: Weight Check
LB: Pulses/Belt
TB: Tare (6)
(1) only if events are available CB: Weight Check (6)
(2) only if Parameter P 14.01 Batch Mode is set to BIN: Contr. Optim. (7)
YES Set Time
(3) only if Select Batch is active
.
Autom. Manual Bin Control (6)

(4) only if a batch is complete Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (8)
(5) only if check system is active (Block 27)
(6) only if bin weigher is active (Block 24)
(7) only if bin control is started (P 25.01)
(8) only if bin controller has been selected manually vh206201_GB.cdr
Fig: Function Distributor With Menus

Follow these steps:
1. Select normal display by pressing <ESC> key as many times as required.
2. Press <MENU> key.
3. Scroll functions using cursor keys.
4. Select with <Return> key.

NOTE: In case of functions with two possible selections, the function not active is
displayed, e.g. if "Select Batch" is active, "Deselect Batch" is displayed.

Schenck Process
Franais Gnralits
3 Franais
3.1 Gnralits
Ces instructions succintes dcrivent les fonctions utiles de l'unit de service
DISOCONT pour raliser les oprations usuelles sur le systme Disocont.
Pour obtenir des informations plus dtailles, veuillez vous reporter
- au manuel du systme BV-H2085FR correspondant et
- au manuel de service BV-H2062FR.
3.2 Instructions de scurit

Afin d'viter la mise en danger de personnes ainsi que l'endommagement du matriel,
il faut respecter les conditions et prescriptions suivantes.
De plus, veuillez observer :
! Instructions de scurit faisant partie de la documentation spcifique la

commande.
! Instructions de scurit se rfrant aux composants mcaniques.
! Prescriptions pour les pices fournies qui n'ont pas t fabriques par la
socit Schenck Process ou qui ne font pas partie de l'tendue de fourniture
de la socit Schenck Process.
Pour les travaux de montage, de mise en service et de maintenance, il faut respecter
les rglementations en matire technique, valables dans le pays de destination.
Utilisation selon destination
Le systme de mesure avec les composants mcaniques raccords doit tre utilis
uniquement pour raliser des fonctions de pesage/dosage et des fonctions de
commande y relies directement. Toute autre utilisation allant au-del est considr
comme n'tant pas conforme sa destination.
Sources de dangers
Pendant le pesage/dosage, il n'y a aucun danger qui peut se produire partir du
systme de mesure condition que le systme ait t install et mis en service
correctement.
Il peut y avoir risque de danger pendant l'utilisation d'un systme de mesure lorsque le
systme de mesure remplit des fonctions de commande ou lors de la manutention du
produit peser. D'ventuelles sources de dangers sont alors, par exemple, des
dispositifs supplmentaires l'aide desquels l'on ralise la manutention ou le dosage
du produit peser. Dans ces cas, des dangers rsiduels peuvent provenir du systme
de mesure, s'il est utilis ou manuvr de manire mal approprie par du personnel
non spcialis.
Le systme de mesure peut faire partie d'une installation complexe. L'utilisateur de
l'installation porte la responsabilit totale pour la scurit de fonctionnement de
l'installation.
Marquage de dangers rsiduels
Ce symbole caractrise les dangers qui peuvent entraner des
endommagements sur le systme de mesure ou sur des autres parties de
l'installation.

Schenck Process
Franais Instructions de scurit
Ce symbole caractrise les dangers qui peuvent entraner la blessure de

personnes, ou mme - dans des cas extrmes - la mort.
Le personnel
Les travaux de prparation, de montage, de mise en service, de manuvre,
d'entretien, de rparation et de maintenance ne doivent tre raliss que par du
personnel spcialis en ces matires.
Toutes les personnes travaillant sur le systme de mesure doivent connatre et
respecter les instructions de scurit et les chapitres du manuel de service, importants
pour leur travail.
L'utilisateur doit former le personnel de service l'aide du manuel de service, tout en
l'obligeant respecter toutes les prescriptions et instructions.
Modification des paramtres
Le fonctionnement du systme de mesure est dtermin par des paramtres. Les
paramtres ne doivent tre modifis que par les personnes qui se sont familiarises
avec le mode de fonctionnement du systme de mesure (par exemple aprs avoir
particip un stage de formation de la socit Schenck Process). Des paramtres
mal rgls peuvent entraner - lorsque des systmes de commande sont raccords -
des dangers pour les personnes et l'endommagement du matriel. De plus, ils
peuvent dranger considrablement le mode de pesage/dosage.
Mot de passe
Les paramtres sont protgs par un mot de passe contre toute modification non
autorise. L'utilisateur du systme de mesure doit veiller ce que le mot de passe soit
utilis tout en tant conscient de la responsabilit qui en rsulte.
Acquittement de signalisations d'erreurs
Les signalisations d'erreurs ne doivent tre acquittes que si la cause de l'erreur a t
limine.
Avant d'acquitter une erreur, veillez ce que les priphriques raccords fonctionnent
correctement. Surtout les systmes de commande raccords doivent se trouver dans
un tat dfini et sr.
Entretien et maintenance
! Il faut respecter toutes les enseignes appliques sur le systme de pesage.
! Avant de raliser des travaux sur l'quipement mcanique ou sur les

priphriques (surtout systmes de commande), il faut mettre le systme de
mesure l'arrt. Il faut prendre les mesures respectives pour exclure la mise
en marche involontaire du systme de mesure.
! Les travaux sur les quipements lectriques ne doivent tre raliss qu' l'tat
libre de tension (retirer la prise du secteur !).
! Les appareils ne doivent tre utiliss que dans les botiers/coffrets prvus
cet effet, car sinon il y a danger de rentrer en contact avec des pices
lectriques sous tension.
Humidit
Toutes les pices du systme de pesage, surtout les pices lectriques, doivent tre
protges contre l'humidit lors de travaux d'entretien et de service, quand il faut
ouvrir les coffrets. Sinon, il faut respecter les types de protection des coffrets.
Modifications de la construction
Si vous modifiez la construction du systme de mesure ou si vous y ajoutez des
composants qui n'ont pas t fournis par la socit Schenck Process, Schenck
Process dcline toute responsabilit et garantie. Ceci est le cas surtout quand il s'agit

Schenck Process
Franais Elments d'affichage et de service
de modifications pouvant agir sur la scurit de fonctionnement du systme de

mesure.
Remplacement de pices
Lorsqu'il faut remplacer des pices lors de travaux de rparation, uniquement des
pices de rechange d'origine de la socit Schenck Process doivent tre utilises. Si
l'on utilise des autres pices de rechange, Schenck Process dcline tous droits de
garantie.
3.3 Elments d'affichage et de service

3.3.1 L'unit de service Disocont
La figure suivante montre la face avant de l'appareil de pilotage DISOCONT, avec le

reprage des champs d'indication :
Dans ce manuel de service lors de la description des touches, on utlisera l'abrviation

"Touche <Nom de la touche>", par ex. Touche <Entre>. Pour les touches du curseur
on utilisera l'abrviation "Touche curseur <Direction>", par ex. Touche curseur
<Haut>.
Le DISOCONT est pilot avec des touches de fonctions (jaunes), des touches curseur
(vertes), un bloc de touches numriques (blanches) et une touche Entre (rouge).
L'affectation des touches de fonction dpend de chaque situation dans laquelle volue
l'appareil. Le nom de la fonction est indiqu sur ou ct de la touche.
Le contraste de l'indication est augment d'un cran, en appuyant simultanment sur la
touche <.> et la touche curseur <Haut>. Le contraste est diminu d'un cran, en
appuyant simultanment sur la touche <.> et la touche curseur <Bas>.
En standard, aprs 15 minutes le rtro-clairage est coup. Par appui sur une touche
quelconque l'clairage est remis en route. Avec la combinaison des touches <.> et de
la touche curseur <Gauche> l'clairage est commut en position continue.
La combinaison <.> et la touche curseur <Droite> commute nouveau dans la
position par dfaut.
La dernire position choisie reste conserve mme en cas de coupure de courant.
Les lments reprsents dans la figure ont la signification suivante :

Schenck Process
3.3.2 Lampe tmoin

Lorsque la lampe tmoin verte est allume, le DISOCONT est prt au service.
3.3.3 Champ d'tat

A la 1re ou 2de ligne, le texte suivant peut s'afficher :
Abrviation Signification
Le systme de pesage est l'arrt. On continu seulement mesurer
OFF
et indiquer la charge sur la bande et la vitesse de bande.
Le systme de pesage est en marche. L'organe de transport marche ;
ON
la quantit transporte et le dbit sont mesurs.
VOL Mode volumtrique
VOL--> Fonctionnement de dmarrage ou d'arrt (vidange)
VOL-S Volumtrique synchrone
OP Mode de service clavier
SIM Le mode simulation est en marche.
BATCH Mode chargement prslectionn
Un PC avec le Software Version 11-EASYSERVE est raccord en
ES 11
actif et peut modifier des valeurs
Un PC avec le Software Version 11-EASYSERVE est raccord en
ES-ACT 11
actif et peut modifier des valeurs
Un PC avec le Software-EASYSERVE a eu une interruption sans
ES-DIS
avoir annonc correctement son arrt.
PA Mot de passe actif - En mode de paramtrage
CA Programme d'ajustage activ
LOCAL La marche local est slectionne
CHECK Une opration de mesure de contrle est active
MAN + Dmarrage du remplissage manuel de la trmie
MAN - Arrt du remplissage manuel de la trmie

Schenck Process
3.3.4 Champs de textes affichs

Dans le champs de textes affichs, il est possible d'afficher une des grandeurs du
process suivantes sur deux lignes. L'affichage des lignes peut aussi tre supprim.
La slection des grandeurs s'effectue au moyen des touches curseur : Les touches
curseur <gauche> et <droite> se rfrent au 1er champ de texte, et les touches
curseur <haut> et <bas> se rfrent au 2d champ de texte.
Grandeur indique Dimension Grandeur de rfrence
Consigne actuelle kg/h ou t/h -
Valeur relle kg/h ou t/h -
Valeur relle ngative % Dbit nominal
Charge sur la bande kg/m -
Charge rel. sur bande % Charge nominale sur la bande
Vitesse de la bande m/s -
Compteur totalisateur 1 kg ou t -
(Consigne-valeur relle)/Dbit
Ecart rgulation %
nominal *100
Consigne externe (1) kg/h ou t/h -
Consigne relative % Consigne externe
Consigne pour le Batch (2) kg ou t -
Quantit de reste du Batch (2) kg ou t -
Valeur relle du Batch (2) kg ou t -
Grandeur indique Dimension Grandeur repre
Humidit % -
Consigne (3) kg/h ou t/h -
Corr. rel. valeur fixe (3) % Dbit nominal
Corr.- compteur 1 (3) kg ou t -
B: Poids de remplissage (4) kg ou t -
B: poids de remplissage rel. (4) % Remplissage nominal
B: Consigne (5) kg -
Position alimentateur (6) % 100%
Diffrence valeur relle (7) kg/h -
Correction tare rel. (8) % Charge nominale sur la bande
Correction gamme rel. (8) % Correction de gamme
Contrle-Longueur (8) m -
Rsultat continu Z (8) kg -
Contrle rsul. F/Z (8) - -
Charge bande 2. tablier (9) kg/m -
Charge rel. 2.tab. (9) % Charge nominale

Schenck Process
(1) Seulement, quand le paramtre P 03.03 "source consigne" correspond un

appareil externe (Bus de champ ou entre analogique).
(2) Seulement, quand le paramtre "Marche chargement" est plac sur "YES" et que
la fonction "Slection Batch" est active.
(3) Seulement, quand la mesure de l'humidit est active (Bloc 28)
(4) Seulement, quand la trmie peseuse est active (Bloc 24)
(5) Seulement, quand rgulation trmie est en MARCHE (Bloc 25)
(6) Seulement, quand P31.01 AI Position alimentateur n'est pas gale "--"
(7) Seulement, quand P03.09 Diffrence valeur relle n'est pas gale "--"
(8) Seulement, quand l'quipement de contrle de la mesure est actif (Bloc 27)
(9) Seulement, quand P26.01 2. tablier de pesage actif sur "YES"
3.3.5 Ligne de signalisations

Dans la zone infrieure du champ d'affichage se trouve le champ de signalisation.
Une ventuelle signalisation d'vnement y est affiche avec un code abrg et un
texte explicatif.
Voici l'exemple d'une signalisation d'vnement : "WE-01 Panne secteur".

Schenck Process
3.3.6 Touches importantes
3.3.7 Touches de fonction

Sur l'affichage apparat au-dessus ou ct des touches de fonctions <F1> - <F9> la
signification des touches importantes pour le contexte de service respectif. Les
touches suivantes sont importantes pour raliser divers oprations sur le DISOCONT.
Touche Signification Fonction

F5 ON Marche
F6 OFF Arrt
F4 DEL Effacer le dernier chiffre ou caractre introduit.
F1 EDIT Prparation de lintroduction.
Interruption des introductions, programmes et toutes
F3 ESC
autres fonctions aprs slection.
F2 MENU Appel du rpartiteur de fonctions.
F7 ResTot Effacement dun compteur totalisateur.
F7 Events Indication des vnements
F7 Print T Impression compteur totalisateur
F7 Volum Volumtrique
F7 Grav Gravimtrique
F7 VolSyn Volumtrique synchrone
F7 EndBat Terminer Batch
F7 Print B Impression Batch
Terminer une introduction. Appel dun programme, dune
<Return> Return
fonction.
F8 ClrEvt Acquittement dune annonce dvnement
F9 Ba Set Introduire une consigne Batch
La touche de fonction F7 sert de Hot-Key avec laquelle des fonctions spciales

peuvent tre excutes directement. La signification de la touche se fait laide du
paramtre P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

Schenck Process
3.3.8 Menu des fonctions
Le repartiteur de fonctions est l'lment utilis pour raliser des fonctions spciales du
DISOCONT. A partir du repartiteur de fonctions, l'on a recours, par exemple, des
fonctions ncessaires pour configurer le systme. Les groupes de fonctions
comprennent les fonctions d'opration, d'ajustage et de programmation.
A fin de rduire des erreurs de manipulation, quelques fonctions du repartiteur de
fonctions sont protges par mot de passe.
Les fonctions et menus suivants peuvent tre slectionns partir du rpartiteur de
fonctions :
Fig. : Rpartiteur de fonctions avec menus

Procd pour appeler le menu des fonctions
1. Afficher l'affichage normal en appuyant une ou plusieurs fois sur la touche
<ESC>.
2. Appuyer sur la touche <MENU>.
3. Faire dfiler les fonctions au moyen des touches curseur.
4. Slectionner avec touche <Return>.

NOTA: En cas de fonctions avec deux possibilits de slection, la fonction non active
est affiche, p.ex. si "Slect. Batch" est activ, "Dselct. Batch" est affich.

Schenck Process
Italiano Generalit
4 Italiano
4.1 Generalit
Le presenti istruzioni per l'uso descrivono le funzioni utili dell'unit di comando
DISOCONT per la normale operazione del sistema Disocont.
Per informazioni pi dettagliate si rimanda al relativo
- il manuale di sistema BV-H2085GB ed
- manuale di esercizio BV-H2062.
4.2 Istruzioni di sicurezza

Osservare le condizioni e le norme elencate nel seguito al fine di evitare danni a
persone e cose.
Rispettare inoltre :
! Istruzioni di sicurezza contenute nella documentazione dell'ordine.
! Istruzioni di sicurezza relative ai componenti meccanici.
! Norme per le parti di fornitura che non sono state prodotte da Schenck
Process o che non fanno parte del complesso di fornitura di Schenck Process.
Durante lavori di montaggio, messa in servizio e service devono essere osservate le
norme tecniche vigenti del paese di destinazione.
Impiego secondo l'uso previsto
Il sistema di misura con i componenti meccanici collegati deve essere utilizzato
esclusivamente per compiti di pesatura ed i compiti di comando ad essi direttamente
collegati. Qualsiasi impiego che esuli da ci non viene considerato a norma.
Fonti di pericolo
Durante il funzionamento di pesatura non derivano pericoli dal sistema di misura se il
sistema stato installato e messo in servizio correttamente.
Durante l'impiego di un sistema di misura possono insorgere pericoli quando il sistema
di misura esegue compiti di comando oppure durante il trasporto del materiale di
pesatura. Possibili fonti di pericolo sono allora p.es. rappresentate da dispositivi
addizionali con i quali viene trasportato o dosato il materiale. In questi casi possono
derivare pericoli residui dal sistema di misura quando viene impiegato od operato in
modo inadeguato da personale non addestrato.
Il sistema di misura pu essere parte integrante di un impianto pi complesso. La ditta
utente dell'impianto risponde in toto della sicurezza di esercizio dell'impianto.
Identificazione dei pericoli residui
Questo simbolo indica pericoli che possono causare danni materiali al
sistema di misura o ad altre parti dell'impianto.
Questo simbolo indica pericoli che possono mettere in pericolo l'incolumit

delle persone fino, in casi estremi, a causarne la morte.

Schenck Process
Italiano Istruzioni di sicurezza
Personale
Preparazione, montaggio, messa in servizio, operazione, manutenzione e lavori di
service devono essere eseguiti solo da personale appositamente qualificato.
Tutte le persone che hanno a che fare con il sistema di misura devono essere a
conoscenza ed osservare le istruzioni di sicurezza e le sezioni rilevanti del manuale di
esercizio.
La ditta utente deve istruire il personale operatore sulla base del manuale di esercizio,
informandolo dell'obbligo di osservare tutte le norme e le istruzioni.
Modifica dei parametri
Il modo di funzionamento del sistema di misura viene definito mediante parametri. I
parametri devono essere modificati solo da persone che hanno dimestichezza con il
funzionamento di sistema di misura (p.es. acquisita in seminari presso Schenck
Process GmbH). Quando i comandi sono collegati, errori nell'impostazione dei
parametri possono mettere in pericolo l'incolumit di persone o causare danni
materiali. Essi possono altres disturbare notevolmente il funzionamento di pesatura.
Password
I parametri vengono protetti con una password da modifiche non autorizzate. La ditta
utente del sistema di misura deve provvedere ad usare coscienziosamente la
password.
Conferma dei messaggi di errore
I messaggi di errore devono essere confermati solo una volta eliminata la causa
dell'errore.
Prima della conferma di un errore controllare che le periferiche collegate funzionino
correttamente. In particolar modo i comandi collegati devono trovarsi in uno stato
sicuro definito.
Manutenzione
! Osservare tutte le targhe monitorie ed informative applicate alla bilancia.
! Disinserire il sistema di misura prima di eseguire lavori all'equipaggiamento

meccanico o alle periferiche (soprattutto ai comandi). Occorre adottare delle
misure affinch sia impossibile inserire accidentalmente il sistema di misura.
! Lavori agli equipaggiamenti elettrici devono essere eseguiti solo in assenza di

tensione (togliere la spina di alimentazione rete!).
! Gli apparecchi devono venir azionati solo nelle custodie previste altrimenti
esiste il pericolo di contatto dei pezzi sotto tensione.
Umidit e bagnato
Tutti i componenti della bilancia, soprattutto le parti elettriche devono essere protette
dall'umidit e dal bagnato, per es. durante lavori di manutenzione e di service, quando
devono essere aperte le custodie. Altrimenti osservare i tipi di protezione delle
custodie.
Modifiche costruttive
Se vengono eseguite modifiche costruttive al sistema di misura o vengono aggiunti
componenti che non sono stati forniti da Schenck Process, Schenck Process declina
allora ogni responsabilit e garanzia. Ci vale in particolar modo per modifiche che
possono influire sulla sicurezza di esercizio del sistema di misura.
Sostituzione di componenti
Se nel corso di una riparazione si rende necessaria la sostituzione di componenti,
devono essere utilizzati solo componenti originali Schenck Process. Se vengono
impiegate altre parti di ricambio, la garanzia si estingue.

Schenck Process
Italiano Elementi di indicazione e di comando
4.3 Elementi di indicazione e di comando

4.3.1 L'unit di comando Disocont
Nell'illustrazione seguente raffigurata la veduta frontale dell'unit di comando

DISOCONT con l'identificazione dei campi di indicazione :
Nel presente manuale di uso, la descrizione dei tasti utilizza l'abbreviazione

"tasto<nome del tasto>, p.es. tasto <Return>.
Il DISOCONT viene operato con i tasti di funzione <F1> fino a <F9> (gialli), i tasti
cursore <sinistra> e <destra>, <Su> e <Gi> (verdi), il blocco di tasti numerici (bianco)
ed il tasto <Return> (rosso).
Sopra o accanto ai tasti di funzione viene indicato il significato dei tasti per il contesto
di operazione.
Il contrasto dell'indicazione viene intensificato se il tasto <.> ed il tasto cursore <Su>

sono premuti allo stesso tempo. Il contrasto dell'indicazione si riduce se il tasto <.> ed
il tasto cursore <Gi> sono premuti al tempo stesso.
Normalmente dopo 15 minuti l'illuminazione di fondo si disattiva. Una qualsiasi
pressione di tasto riattiva di nuovo l'illuminazione. Con la combinazione dei tasti <.> e
con il tasto cursore <sinistra> l'illuminazione viene attivata su luce continua.
La combinazione <.> ed il tasto cursore <destra> aziona di nuovo lo stato default.
Lo stato selezionato da ultimo resta anche dopo Power Down.
Gli elementi rappresentati nella figura hanno il significato seguente.

Schenck Process
4.3.2 Spia di segnalazione

Quando si accende la spia verde, il DISOCONT pronto al funzionamento.
4.3.3 Righe di testo

Nella 1a o 2a riga di testo viene rappresentato if seguente testo:
Sigla Significato
La bilancia disinserita. Vengono misurati ed indicati solo il carico
OFF
e la velocidad di nastro.
La bilancia inserita. L'organo di trasporto in funzione, la
ON
quantit materiale e la portata vengono acquisite.
uisite Modo volumetrico
VOL--> Modo avviamento oppure scarico
VOL-S Volumetrico sincrono
OP Modo tastiera
SIM Modo simulazione inserito
BATCH Modo batch preselezionato
Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software Versione 11 collegato
ES 11
passivamente osservando
Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software Versione 11 collegato
ES-ACT 11
attivamente e pu regolare valori
Un PC con l' EasyServe-Software ha avuto un'interruzione senza
ES-DIS
aver notificato il ritiro secondo le norme.
PA Password attiva - in modo parametrizzazione
CA Programma attiva
LOCAL Modo locale preselezionato
CHECK Un dispositivo controllo misura attivo
MAN + Riempimento manuale del recipiente iniziato
MAN - Riempimento manuale del recipiente interrotto

Schenck Process
4.3.4 Campo di indicazione

Nel campo di indicazione pu essere visualizzata in due righe una delle seguenti
grandezze di processo. L'indicazione della riga pu essere spenta del tutto.
La selezione viene eseguita con i tasti cursore: I tasti cursore <sinistra> e <destra> si
riferiscono al 1o campo di testo e i tasti cursore <su> e <gi> al 2o campo di testo.
Grandezza Unit Riferimento
Valore imposto attuale kg/h oppure t/h -
Portata I kg/h oppure t/h -
Portata rel. % Portata nominale
Carico di nastro kg/m -
Carico di nastro rel. % Carico di nastro massimo
Veloci di nastro m/s -
Totalizzatore 1 kg oppure t -
(Valore imposto-valore reale)/val.
Scarto regolazione %
nom. *100
Valore imposto esterno (1) kg/h oppure t/h -
Valore imposto relativo % Valore imposto esterno
Valore imposto batch (2) kg oppure t -
Quantit residual batch (2) kg oppure t -
Valore reale batch (2) kg oppure t -
Umidit (3) % -
Valore reale corr. (3) kg/h oppure t/h -
Corr. valore reale re. (3) % Portata nominale
Totalizzatore 1 corr. (3) kg oppure t -
Recipiente: Peso del materiale
kg oppure t -
(4)
Recipiente: Peso mat. rel. (4) % Riempimento nominale
Recipiente: Valore imposto (5) kg -
Posizione alimentatore (6) % 100%
Differenza valore imposto (7) kg/h -
Correzione tara rel. (8) % Portata nominale
Correzione campo rel. (8) % Correzione del campo
Lunghezza di controllo (8) m -
Risultato cont. Z (8) kg -
Risultato di controllo F/Z (8) - -
Carico di nastro Ponte 2 (9) kg/m -
Carico rel. Ponte 2 (9) % Carico di nastro nominale

Schenck Process
(1) Solo, se il parametro P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" impostato su dispositivo

esterno (bus di campo oppure ingresso analogico)
(2) Solo, se il parametro "Batch Mode" impostato su "YES" ed attiva la funzione
"Selezione batch"
(3) Solo, se Moisture attivo (blocco 28)
(4) Solo, se Bin Weigher attivo (blocco 24)
(5) Solo, se Bin Level Controller impostato su ON (blocco 25)
(6) Solo, se P31.01 "AI Pos. Flow Gate" non impostato su "--"
(7) Solo, se P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" non impostato su "--"
(8) Solo, se Check System attivo (blocco 27)
(9) Solo, se P26.01 "2. Weighbridge active" impostato su "YES"
4.3.5 Riga di messaggio

Nella parte inferiore del campo di indicazione si trova il campo di messagio. Qui viene
indicato un messaggio di evento avveratosi eventualmente con un codice corto ed un
testo esplicativo. Un esempio di messaggio di evento dato da : "WE-01 Mancanza
tensione di rete".

Schenck Process
4.3.6 Tasti importanti
4.3.7 Tasti di funzione

Sopra o accanto ai tasti di funzione <F1> - <F9> viene indicato il significato dei tasti
per il contesto di operazione. I tasti seguenti sono importanti per l'operazione del
DISOCONT :
Tasto Assegnazione Funzione

F5 ON Inserire
F6 OFF Disinserire
F4 DEL Cancella l'ultimo numero o carattere introdotto
F1 EDIT Preparare l'introduzione
Interrompe le introduzioni, i programmi et tutte le altre funzioni dopo
F3 ESC
il richiamo
F2 MENU Richiama il distributore di funzioni
F7 ResTot Cancella un totalizzatore
F7 Events Indicare eventi
F7 Print T Stampa totalizzatore
F7 Volum Volumetrico
F7 Grav Gravimetrico
F7 VolSyn Volumetrico sincrono
F7 EndBat Annulla batch
F7 Print B Stampa batch
<Return> Return Concludere introduzione. Richiama un'introduzione, una funzione.
F8 ClrEvt Conferma segnalazioni di errore
F9 Ba Set Imettere valore imposto
Il tasto di funzione F7 uno strumento (Hot-Key) di eseguire funzioni speciali.

L'assegnazione dei tasti viene eseguita con il parametro P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

Schenck Process
4.3.8 Distributore di funzioni
Il distributore di funzioni l'elemento per il comando di funzioni usate meno

frequentemente del Disocont. Dal distributore di funzioni si accede per es. a funzioni
necessarie per la configurazione del dosatore a perdita di peso.
Nel distributore di funzioni possono essere selezionati le funzioni ed i menu seguenti:
Fig: Distributore di funzioni Menu

Come procedere per richiamare il distributore di funzioni
1. Impostazione dell'indicazione normale premendo una o pi volte il tasto
<ESC>.
2. Premere il tasto <MENU>.
3. Far scorrere le funzioni con i tasti cursore.
4. Selezionare con tasto <Return>.

NOTA: In caso di funzioni con due possibilit de selezione, la funzione non attiva
viene indicata, per es. se "Select Batch" attivo, "Deselect Batch" indicato.

Schenck Process
Espaol Generalidades
5 Espaol
5.1 Generalidades
Estas instrucciones de uso resumidas describen las funciones tiles de la unidad de
mando DISOCONT para realizar el manejo usual del sistema Disocont.
Para informaciones ms amplias hay que leer
- el manual de sistema BV-H2085GB y
- el manual de servicion BV-H2062 respectivo.
5.2 Instrucciones de seguridad

Para evitar daos personales y materiales hay que respetar las siguientes
condiciones y disposiciones.
Adems hay que observar :
! Instrucciones de seguridad descritos en la documentacin especfica al

pedido.
! Instrucciones de seguridad que se refieren a los componentes mecnicos.
! Disposiciones para piezas entregadas que no fueron producidas por Schenck

Process, o que no forman parte del volumen de suministro de Schenck
Process.
Para realizar los trabajos de montaje, de puesta en servicio y de servicio hay que
observar las reglas tcnicas vigentes en el pas de destino.
Uso conforme al destino
El sistema de medicin con los componentes mecnicos conectados debe utilizarse
exclusivamente para funciones de pesaje y funciones de mando relacionadas
directamente con stas. Cada uso superando lo descrito est considerado como no
conforme al destino.
Fuentes de peligro
Durante el modo de pesaje no procede ningn peligro del sistema de medicin,
siempre que el sistema fuera instalado y puesto en servicio correctamente.
Durante el uso de un sistema de medicin pueden surgir peligros si el sistema de
medicin realiza funciones de mando o si se trata del transporte del producto a pesar.
Posibles fuentes de peligro son entonces dispositivos adicionales sirviendo al
transporte o a la dosificacin del producto a pesar. En estos casos pueden proceder
peligros restantes del sistema de medicin, siempre que se trate de personal no
formado que efectua un uso o manejo no apropiado.
El sistema de medicin puede ser parte integrante de una instalacion compleja. El
usuario de la instalacin tiene la responsabilidad completa para la seguridad de
funcionamiento de la instalacin.
Marcacin de peligros restantes
Este smbolo caracteriza indicaciones con respecto a peligros que pueden
llegar a daos materiales en el sistema o en otros partes de la instalacin.
Este smbolo caracteriza indicaciones con respecto a peligros que pueden

llegar a daos personales o - en casos extremos - a la muerte.

Schenck Process
Espaol Instrucciones de seguridad
Personal
Los trabajos de preparacin, montaje, puesta en servicio, manejo, entretenimiento,
mantenimiento y servicio slo deben ser efectuados por un personal especializado.
Todas las personas que tienen algo que hacer con el sistema de medicin deben
conocer y respetar las instrucciones de seguridad y todas las partes del manual de
operacin importantes.
El usuario debe instruir el personal de servicio basndose en el manual de operacin,
obligndole a respetar todas las disposiciones e instrucciones.
Modificacin de los parmetros
El funcionamiento del sistema de medicin es determinado por parmetros. Los
parmetros slo deben ser modificados por personas que conocen el funcionamiento
del sistema de medicin (despus de un curso de formacin por la Schenck Process,
por ejemplo). Parmetros no ajustados correctamente pueden causar - con sistemas
de mando conectados - peligros personales o materiales. Adems pueden molestar
considerablemente el modo de pesaje.
Contrasea de acceso
Los parmetros estn protegidos contra modificacin no admitida por medio de una
contrasea de acceso. El usuario del sistema de medicin debe cuidar a un empleo
de la contrasea de acceso, consciente de su responsabilidad.
Acuse de recibo de sealizaciones de errores
Slo est permitido acusar recibo de sealizaciones de errores cuando ya se ha
eliminada la causa del error.
Antes del acuse de recibo de un error hay que cuidar que los dispositivos perifricos
conectados trabajan correctamente. Especialmente sistemas de mando conectados
deben encontrarse en un estado definido, seguro.
Entretenimiento y Mantenimiento
! Hay que respetar todos los rtulos indicadores y de aviso que se encuentran
en el sistema de pesaje.
! Antes de realizar trabajos en el equipo mecnico o en perifricos

(especialmente sistemas de mando) hay que desconectar el sistema de
medicin. Hay que tomar las medidas necesarias para excluir una puesta en
marcha involuntaria del sistema de medicin.
! Trabajos en equipos elctricos slo deben hacerse al estado libre de tensin

( quitar el enchufe con la red !).
! Los aparatos deben utilizarse slo en las cajas previstas, si no existira el

riesgo del contacto con piezas bajo tensin.
Humedad
Todas las piezas del sistema de pesaje, especialmente las piezas elctricas, deben
ser protegidas contra humedad, por ejemplo durante trabajos de entretenimiento y de
servicio cuando hay que abrir los crteres. En otro caso deben respetarse los tipos de
proteccin de los crteres.
Modificaciones constructivas
Si Vd. modifica la construccin del sistema de medicin o si aade Vd. componentes
que no son entregados por Schenck Process, Schenck Process declina la
responsabilidad y la garanta. Esto vale especialmente para modificaciones que
pueden influir la seguridad de funcionamiento del sistema de medicin.

Schenck Process
Espaol Elementos de indicacin y de mando
Recambio de piezas
Cuando hay que reemplazar piezas durante una reparacin, slo deben utilizarse
piezas de recambio originales de Schenck Process. Si se usan otras piezas de
recambio ya no tendr ninguna garanta.
5.3 Elementos de indicacin y de mando

5.3.1 La unidad de mando Disocont
En la figura siguiente est representada la cara frontal de la unidad de mando

DISOCONT con las caractersticas de las zonas de indicacin :
Fig. : Cara frontal de la unidad de mando DISOCONT

En el presente manual de servizio, la descripcin de las teclas utiliza la abreviatura
"tecla<nombre de la tecla>, p.ej. tecla<Return>.
El DISOCONT se maneja por medio de las teclas de funciones <F1> hasta <F9>
(amarillas), las teclas del cursor <izquierda>, <derecha>, <Arriba>, <Abajo> (verdes),
el bloque de teclas numericas (blanco) et la tecla <Return> (roja).
El significado de la teclas de funciones depende del contexto de servicio. La funcin

est representada en el display por encima o al lado de la tecla.
El contraste de la indicacin se intensifica de un escaln si la tecla <.> et la tecla

cursor <Arriba> se apretan al mismo tiempo. El contraste baja de un escaln si la
tecla <.> et la tecla cursor <Abajo> se apretan al mismo tiempo.
Los elementos representados en la figura tienen la siguiente significacin .

Schenck Process
5.3.2 Lmpara de sealizacin

Cuando la lmpara verde de sealizacin est encendida, el DISOCONT est listo
para el servicio.
5.3.3 Zona de estado

En la 1a 2a lnea de texto puede indicarse el texto siguiente :
Abreviacin Significado
El sistema de pesaje est desconectado. Solamente siguen medidas
OFF
e indicadas la carga y la velocidad de cinta.
El sistema de pesaje est conectado. El rgano de transporte est en
ON marcha, se detectan la cantidad de producto transportado y el
caudal.
VOL Modo volumtrico
VOL--> Modo de arranque de vaciado
VOL-S Modo volumtrico-sncrono
OP Modo por teclado
SIM El modo de simulacin est en marcha.
BATCH Modo de carga predeterminado
Un PC equipado con el software EasyServe, versin 11, est
ES 11
conectado de manera pasiva observando
Est conectado de manera activa un PC equipado con el software
ES-ACT 11
EasyServe, versin 11, e idneo para modificar valores
Un PC equipado con el software EasyServe ha tenido una
ES-DIS
interrupcin sin despedirse correctamente.
PA Contrasea ativa - en modo de parametraje
CA Programa de ajuste activo
LOCAL Modo local preseleccionado
CHECK Un sistema de medicin control es activo.
MAN + Llenado manual de tolva iniciado
MAN - Llenado manual de tolva interrumpido

Schenck Process
5.3.4 Zona de indicacin

En la zona de indicacin puede indicarse en dos lneas una de las siguientes
magnitudes del proceso. Tambin puede oprimirse completamente la indicacin por
lneas.
La seleccin de la magnitudes se hace por medio de las teclas del cursor : Las teclas
del cursor <izquierda> y <derecha> se refieren a la 1a zona a texto, y las teclas del
cursor <Arriba> y <Abajo> a la 2a zona a texto :
Magnitud Dimensin Referencia
Valor consigna actual kg/h t/h -
Caudal I kg/h t/h -
Caudal relativo % Caudal nominal
Carga de cinta kg/m -
Carga de cinta rel. % Carga de cinta nominal
Velocidad de cinta m/s -
Contador 1 kg t -
Contador 2 kg t -
Contador 3 kg t -
(Valor consigna - valor
Desviacin de regulacin %
real)/Valor nominal *100
Valor consigna externo (1) kg/h t/h -
Valor consigna relativo % Valor consigna externo
Valor consigna de carga (2) kg t -
Cantidad residual de carga (2) kg t -
Valor real de carga (2) kg t -
Humedad (3) % -
Valor real corrigido (3) kg/h t/h -
Valor real rel. corr. (3) % Caudal nominal
Contador 1 corr. (3) kg t -
Tolva: Peso de llenado (4) kg t -
Tolva: Peso de llenado rel. (4) % Nivel de llenado nominal
Tolva: Valor consigna (5) kg -
Posicin alimentador (6) % 100%
Diferencia valor real (7) kg/h -
Correccin tara rel. (8) % Carga de cinta nominal
Correccin rango rel. (8) % Correccin del rango
Longitud de control (8) m -
Resultado cont. Z (8) kg -
Resultado control F/Z (8) - -
Carga de cinta Puente 2 (9) kg/m -
Carga de cinta rel. Puente 2 (9) % Carga de cinta nominal

Schenck Process
(1) Slo si el parmetro P 03.03 "Fuente del valor consigna" est ajustado al
aparato externo (bus del campo entrada analgica)
(2) Slo si el parmetro "Modo de carga" est fijado a "YES" y si la funcin
"Preseleccin de carga" es activa
(3) Slo si Humedad es activa (Bloque 28)
(4) Slo si Bscula de tolva es activa (Bloque 24)
(5) Slo si Regulacin tolva est fijado a ON (Bloque 25)
(6) Slo si P31.01 "AI Posicin alimentador" no est fijado a "--"
(7) Slo si P03.09 "Diferencia valor real" no est fijado a "--"
(8) Slo si Sistema de medicin control es activo (Bloque 27)
(9) Slo si P26.01 "Puente 2 activo" est fijado a "YES"
5.3.5 Lnea de sealizacin

En la zona inferior de la zona de indicacin se encuentra la zona de sealizacin. All
est indicado un acontecimiento eventualmente ocurrido con su cdigo abreviado y
un texto de explicacin.
Un ejemplo para una sealizacin de acontecimiento es : "WE-01 Power Failure".

Schenck Process
5.3.6 Teclas importantes
5.3.7 Teclas de funcin

Por encima o al lado de las teclas de funciones <F1> -< F9> est representada en el
display la significacin de las teclas necesarias para el contexto de servicio. Las
siguientes teclas son importantes para el manejo del DISOCONT :
Tecla Abbreviacin Funcin
F5 ON Conectar
F6 OFF Desconectar
F4 DEL Borrar la cifra o el caracter entrado(a) por ltimo
F1 EDIT Preparar la entrada
Ruptura de entradas, de programas y de todas las otras funciones
F3 ESC
despus de su llamada.
F2 MENU Llamar el men de funciones
F7 ResTot Poner a cero un totalizador
F7 Events Indicar acontecimientos
F7 Print T Impresin totalizador
F7 Volum Volumtrico
F7 Grav Gravimtrico
F7 VolSyn Volumtrico-sncrono
F7 EndBat Acabar la carga
F7 Print B Impresin de la carga
<Return> Return Acabar una entrada. Llamada de una entrada de una funcin
F8 ClrEvt Confirmar avisos de acontecimiento
F9 Ba Set Entrar el valor consigna de la carga
La tecla de funcin F7 sirve de Hot-Key destinado a ejecutar funciones speciales
directamente. La ocupacin de las teclas se hace con el paramtro P 02.11 "Hot-Key
F7".
5.3.8 Men de funciones
El men de funciones es el elemento utilizado para realizar las funciones menos

frecuentes del DISOCONT. Desde el men de funciones se puede acceder, por
ejemplo, a funciones necesarias para configurar la bscula dosificadora diferencial.
Las siguientes funciones y los siguientes mens pueden seleccionarse desde el men
de funciones:

Schenck Process
Fig: Funcin Menu Ramificado

Procedimiento para llamar al men de funciones
1. Ajustar la indicacin normal pulsando una o varias veces la tecla <ESC>.
2. Pulsar la tecla <MENU>.
3. Hacer desfilar las funciones por medio de las teclas del cursor.
4. Seleccionar con botn <Return>

Nota: En caso de funciones con dos posibilidades de seleccin, la funcin non activa
viene indicada, por ej, si "Select Batch" esa activo, "Deselect Batch" viene indicado.

Schenck Process
Nederlands Algemeen
6 Nederlands
6.1 Algemeen
Deze beknopte instructies beschrijven de functies van het DISOCONT VLB-
bedientoestel die een courante bediening van het DISOCONT-systeem mogelijk
maken.
Voor meer informatie verwijzen wij naar :
- het systeemhandboek BV-H2085NL en
- het bedrijfshandboek DISOCONT banddoseertoestel BV-H 2062DE.
6.2 Veiligheidsinstructies
Ter vermijding van gevaar voor personen of beschadigingen moeten onderstaande
voorwaarden en voorschriften nageleefd worden.
Respecteer bovendien:
! de veiligheidsinstructies in de documentatie bij de bestelling.
! de veiligheidsinstructies betreffende de mechanische componenten.
! de voorschriften voor delen die niet gefabriceerd werden door SCHENCK of

niet tot de levering van SCHENCK behoren..
Bij montage-, inbedrijfname- en servicewerken moeten de regels in het
bestemmingsland gerespecteerd worden.
Doelgericht gebruik
Het meetsysteem met de aangesloten mechanische componenten mag uitsluitend
gebruikt worden voor weegopdrachten en de rechstreeks daarmee verbonden
sturingsopdrachten. Elk ander gebruik geldt als "niet doelgericht".
Gevarenbronnen
Van het meetsysteem gaat er tijdens het weegbedrijf geen gevaar uit, indien het
systeem reglementair genstalleerd en in bedrijf genomen werd.
Gevaren bij het gebruik van het meetsysteem kunnen ontstaan, wanneer het systeem
sturingsopdrachten overneemt of bij het transport van het weeggoed. Mogelijke
gevarenbronnen zijn dan bijv. bijkomende inrichtingen voor het transport of de
dosering van het weeggoed. In deze gevallen kan restgevaar uitgaan van het
meetsysteem, in geval van ondeskundig gebruik of bediening door ongeschoold
personeel.
Het meetsysteem kan een onderdeel zijn van een complexere installatie. De exploitant
van de installatie draagt de volledige verantwoordelijkheid voor de bedrijfszekerheid
van de installatie.
Kentekens voor restgevaar

Dit symbool wijst op gevaar dat kan leiden tot verwonding van personen,
en in extreme gevallen zelfs tot de dood.

Schenck Process
Nederlands Veiligheidsinstructies
Dit symbool wijst op gevaar dat kan leiden tot beschadiging aan het
meetsysteem of andere installatiedelen.
Personeel
Voorbereiding, montage, inbedrijfname, bediening, onderhoud, herstelling en
servicewerken mogen enkel uitgevoerd worden door vakkundig personeel.
Alle personen die met het meetsysteem te maken hebben, moeten de
veiligheidsinstructies en de voor hun belangrijke delen van de bedrijfshandleiding
kennen en respecteren.
De exploitant moet het bedienpersoneel onderrichten aan de hand van de
bedrijfshandleiding en hen wijzen op de verplichting alle veiligheidsinstructies en
aanwijzingen na te leven.
Parameterverandering
De werkwijze van het meetsysteem wordt vastgelegd door parameters. De
parameters mogen enkel veranderd worden door personen, die vertrouwd zijn met de
werkwijze van het toestel (bijv. door scholing bij SCHENCK). Fout ingestelde
parameters kunnen bij aangesloten sturingen tot gevaar leiden voor personen of
schade toebrengen. Bovendien kunnen zij het weegbedrijf aanzienlijk storen.
Paswoord
De parameters worden door een paswoord beveiligd tegen onbevoegde
veranderingen. De gebruiker van het meetsysteem moet instaan voor een
verantwoorde omgang met het paswoord.
Kwiteren van foutmeldingen

Foutmeldingen mogen enkel gekwiteerd worden, wanneer de oorzaak van de fout
weggenomen is.
Let er vr de kwitering van de fout op, dat aangesloten randtoestellen reglementair
werken. Vooral aangesloten sturingen moeten zich in een gedefinieerde, zekere
toestand bevinden.
Onderhoud en herstellingen
! Alle waarschuwings- en instructieplaatjes op het doseertoestel moeten

gerespecteerd worden.
! Vr werken aan de mechanische uitrusting of aan randapparatuur (vooral

sturingen) moet het meetsysteem uitgeschakeld worden. Er moeten
maatregelen getroffen worden om een onopzettelijk inschakelen van het
meetsysteem uit te sluiten.
! Werken aan elektrische uitrustingen mogen enkel uitgevoerd worden in

spanningsvrije toestand (netstekker uittrekken!).
! De toestellen mogen enkel gebruikt worden in de voorziene behuizingen,

aangezien er anders gevaar bestaat voor contact met spanningsgeleidende
delen.
Nat en vocht
Alle delen van het doseertoestel, vooral de elektrische delen, moeten beveiligd
worden tegen nat en vocht, wanneer de behuizing geopend wordt, bijv. bij
onderhouds- en servicewerken. De beveiligingen van de behuizing moeten
gerespecteerd worden.
Constructieve veranderingen

Schenck Process
Nederlands Display- en bedieningselementen
Wanneer u het meetsysteem constructief verandert of componenten toevoegt, die niet

door SCHENCK geleverd worden, neemt SCHENCK geen enkele
verantwoordelijkheid of garantie op zich. Dit geldt vooral voor veranderingen die de
bedrijfszekerheid van het meetsysteem kunnen benvloeden.
Vervanging van onderdelen

Moeten er bij een herstelling onderdelen vervangen worden, dan mogen enkel de
originele wisselstukken van SCHENCK gebruikt worden. Worden er andere
wisselstukken gebruikt, dan vervalt de garantie.
6.3 Display- en bedieningselementen

6.3.1 Het Disocont bedieningstoestel
De volgende afbeelding toont het vooraanzicht van het DISOCONT bedieningstoestel

met aanduiding van de displayvelden:
In dit bedrijfshandboek wordt bij de beschrijving van toetsen de afkorting "toets

<toetsennaam>" gebruikt, bijv. toets <Return>.
De DISOCONT wordt bediend met functietoetsen <F1> tot <F9> (geel), cursortoetsen
<links>, <rechts>, <op>, <neer> (groen), een numeriek toetsenbord (wit) en de toets
<Return> (rood).
De bezetting van de functietoetsen is afhankelijk van het bedienstation. De functie
wordt weergegeven boven of naast de toets.
Het displaycontrast wordt met een stap verhoogd door de toets <.> en de cursortoets
<op> gelijktijdig in te drukken. Het contrast wordt met een stap verlaagd door de toets
<.> en de cursortoets <neer> gelijktijdig in te drukken.
Standaard wordt na 15 minuten de achtergrondbelichting uitgeschakeld. Door het
indrukken van een willekeurige toets schakelt de belichting weer in. Met de
toetsencombinatie <.> en cursortoets <links> schakelt men over op continubelichting.
De combinatie <.> en cursortoets <rechts> schakelt opnieuw over naar de initile
toestand.
De laatst gekozen toestand blijft ook behouden na power down.
De elementen weergegeven in de afbeelding "Vooraanzicht van het DISOCONT
bedieningstoestel" hebben volgende betekenis:
6.3.2 Signaallampjes
Wanneer het groene signaallampje oplicht, is de DISOCONT bedrijfsklaar.

Schenck Process
6.3.3 Statusveld
In de eerste of tweede tekstregel kan volgende tekst aangeduid worden:
Display Betekenis
Doseertoestel is uitgeschakeld. Enkel bandbelasting en bandsnelheid
OFF
worden verder gemeten en aangeduid.
Doseertoestel is ingeschakeld. Transportelement loopt,
ON
transporthoeveelheid en debiet worden geregistreerd.
VOL Volumetrisch bedrijf.
VOL--> Start- of leegloopbedrijf
VOL-S Volumetrisch synchroon
OP Toetsenbordbedrijf.
SIM Simulatiebedrijf is ingeschakeld.
BATCH Voorgekozen batchbedrijf.
Een PC met de EasyServe-Software versie 11 is passief observerend
ES 11
aangesloten
Een PC met de EasyServe-Software versie 11 is actief aangesloten
ES-ACT 11
en kan waarden veranderen
Een PC met de EasyServe-Software had een onderbreking zonder
ES-DIS
zich zoals het hoort afgemeld te hebben.
PA Doseertoestel in parametreermode
CA Instelprogramma actief
LOCAL Lokaal bedrijf is voorgekozen
CHECK Een controlemeetinrichting is actief
MAN + Manueel vullen van het reservoir gestart
MAN - Manueel vullen van het reservoir gestopt

Schenck Process
6.3.4 Displayveld
In het displayveld kan in twee regels telkens n van de volgende processwaarden
weergegeven worden. De regeldisplay kan ook volledig uitgeschakeld worden.
De keuze van de waarden gebeurt met de cursortoetsen: de cursortoetsen <links> en
<rechts> hebben betrekking op het eerste tekstveld en de cursortoetsen <op> en
<neer> op het tweede tekstveld.
De aangegeven volgorde van de waarden komt overeen met het doorrollen met de
cursortoets <rechts> of <op>:
Aangeduide waarde Dimensie Referentiewaarde
Actuele streefwaarde kg/h of t/h -
Debiet I kg/h of t/h -
Relat. Debiet % Nominaal debiet
Bandbelasting kg/m -
Rel. Bandbelasting % Nominale bandbelasting
Bandsnelheid m/s -
Teller 1 kg of t -
Teller 2 kg of t -
Teller 3 kg of t -
(Streefwaarde-rele
Regelafwijking %
waarde)/nom.debiet *100
Externe streefwaarde (1) kg/h of t/h -
Relatieve streefwaarde % externe streefwaarde
Batch-streefwaarde (2) kg of t -
Batch-resthoeveelheid (2) kg of t -
Batch-rele waarde (2) kg of t -
Vocht (3) % -
Gecorrigeerde rele waarde (3) kg/h of t/h -
Gecor. Rel. rele waarde (3) % Nominaal debiet
Teller 1 corr. (3) kg of t -
B: Vulgewicht (4) kg of t -
B: Rel. vulgewicht (4) % Nominale vulstand
B: Streefwaarde (5) kg -
Positie toewijzer (6) % 100%
Verschil rele waarde (7) kg/h -
Correctie tarra rel. (8) % Nominale bandbelasting
Correctie ber. rel. (8) % Bereikscorrectie
Controlelengte (8) m -
Doorl. resultaat Z (8) kg -
Controleresultaat F/Z (8) - -
Bandbelast. 2. brug (9) kg/m -
rel. belasting 2.br. (9) % Nominale bandbelasting

Schenck Process
(1) Enkel wanneer parameter P 03.03 "streefwaardebron" ingesteld is op een extern

toestel (veldbus of analoogingang).
(2) Enkel wanneer parameter "chargebedrijf" op "YES" staat en de functie "batch
voorkeuze" actief is.
(3) Enkel wanneer vochtmeting actief (Blok 28)
(4) Enkel wanneer reservoirweging actief (Blok 24)
(5) Enkel wanneer reservoirregeling AAN (Blok 25)
(6) Enkel wanneer P31.01 AI toewijzerpositie niet gelijk is aan "--"
(7) Enkel wanneer P03.09 verschil rele waarde niet gelijk is aan "--"
(8) Enkel wanneer controlemeetinrichting actief (Blok 27)
(9) Enkel wanneer P26.01 2. weegbrug actief op "YES"
6.3.5 Meldingsveld
In het onderste bereik van het displayveld bevindt zich het meldingsveld. Daar wordt
een eventueel aanstaande foutmelding aangeduid met de code en een verklarende
tekst.
Voorbeeld van een foutmelding is: "WE-01 Stroomonderbreking".

Schenck Process
6.3.6 Belangrijke toetsen
6.3.7 Functietoetsen
Boven of naast de functietoetsen <F1> tot <F9> wordt de voor de bediencontext
geldende toetsenbetekenis weergegeven op het display. De volgende toetsen zijn
belangrijk voor de bediening van de DISOCONT:
Toets Bezetting Functie

F5 ON Inschakelen
F6 OFF Uitschakelen
Wissen van het laatst ingegeven getal of van het laatst ingegeven
F4 DEL
teken.
F1 EDIT Voorbereiden van de invoer.
Afbreken van invoeren, programma's en alle andere functies na
F3 ESC
oproep.
F2 MENU Oproepen van het functiemenu.
F7 ResTot Wissen van een transporthoeveelheidsteller.
F7 Events Gebeurtenissen tonen
F7 Print T FMZ afdrukken
F7 Volum Volumetrisch
F7 Grav Gravimetrisch
F7 VolSyn Volumetrisch synchroon
F7 EndBat Batch beindigen
F7 Print B Batch afdrukken
<Return> Return Afsluiten van een invoer, oproepen van een programma, een functie.
F8 ClrEvt Kwiteren van gebeurtenismeldingen
F9 Ba Set Batch streefwaarde ingeven
De functietoets F7 dient als Hot-Key waarmee speciale functies direct uitgevoerd

kunnen worden. De bezetting van de toets gebeurt met de parameter P 02.11 "Hot-
Key F7".

Schenck Process
6.3.8 Functiemenu
Het functiemenu is het element voor de bediening van de speciale functies van de
DISOCONT. Vanuit het functiemenu krijgt men toegang tot de functiegroepen, die
nodig zijn voor het configureren en sturen van de installatie. De functiegroepen zijn
bedrijfsfuncties, justeringsfuncties en programmeerfuncties. Daartoe behoren
bijvoorbeeld de instelprogramma's en de parameterinvoer.
Om het gevaar voor verkeerde bedieningen zo klein mogelijk te houden, zijn een
aantal functies in het functiemenu beveiligd met een paswoord.
De volgende afbeelding toont het functiemenu met alle ondergeschikte menu's.
FUNCTIEMENU
FMZ afdrukken
Teller wissen
Displaytest Menu Programmeren
Toewijzer DEELNEMEN/UIT
Service-waarden Parameters lezen
Trend Parameters invoeren
Volumetrisch/gravimetrisch Oorspr.parameters laden
Volum. Synchroon Parameters afdrukken
Toetsenbordmode AAN/UIT Beknopte lijst afdrukken
Gebeurtenissen tonen (1) Toestandsprotokol
Batch voorkeuze/niet KME-res. afdrukken (5)
herkiezen
Batch beindigen (3)
Batch afdrukken (4)
Start tarra-corr. (5)
Start bereikscorr. (5)
Controle afbreken (5) Menu Justeringsfunctie
Corrigeren (5)
>0< nulstellen
Programmeren Simulatie AAN/UIT
Justeringsfunctie TW: tarreren
CW : gewichtscontr.
(1) enkel bij optreden gebeurtenissen LB: Impulsen/band
(2) enkel wanneer parameter P14.01 chargebedrijf op TB: tarreren (6)
YES staat CB: gewichtscontr. (6)
(3) enkel wanneer een charge actief is B: regelaar-optim. (7)
(4) enkel wanneer
. een charge beindigd is Tijd instellen
(5) enkel wanneer controlemeetinrichting actief (blok 27) Reservoir reg. Manueel/autom. (6)
(6) enkel wanneer reservoirweegtoestel actief (blok 24) Res. reg. man. start/stop (8)
(7) enkel wanneer reservoirregeling AAN (P25.01)
(8) enkel wanneer reservoirregelaar manueel opgeroepen
werd vh206201_NL.cdr
Afb.: Functiemenu met bijmenu's

Procedure voor het oproepen van het functiemenu
1. Instellen van de normale aanduiding door de toets <ESC> n of meerdere
keren in te drukken
2. Activeren van de toets <MENU>
3. De functies doorrollen met de cursortoetsen
4. Selectie met de toets <RETURN>

Opmerking: Bij functies met twee keuzemogelijkheden wordt de niet-actieve functie
aangeduid, bijv. "Batch uit selectie", wanneer "Batch voorkeuze" actief is.

Schenck Process
Portugus Generalidades
7 Portugus
7.1 Generalidades
As presentes instrues resumidas descrevem as funes da unidade de comando
DISOCONT VLB para efetuar as operaes usuais no sistema DISOCONT.
Para informaes mais detalhadas ver:
- o manual do sistema BV-H2085DE e
- o manual de instrues DISOCONT Balana Dosadora de Correia BV-H 2062DE.
7.2 Instrues de segurana

Para evitar danos pessonais e materiais devem observar-se as seguintes condies e
instrues.
Alm disso devem observar-se:
! as instrues de segurana contidas na documentao especfica do pedido.
! as instrues de segurana que se referem aos componentes mecnicos.
! os regulamentos para unidades fornecidas no fabricadas pela Schenck

Process ou que no formam parte do volume de fornecimento da Schenck
Process.
Para efetuar trabalhos de montagem, operao inicial e manuteno necessrio
que se observem as regras tcnicas vlidas no pas de destino.
Uso conforme finalidade prevista

O sistema de medio com os componentes mecnicos ligados deve ser usado
exlusivamente para funes de pesagem e funes de comando diretamente
relacionadas. Qualquer uso alm do uso especificado ser considerado como uso
contrrio finalidade prevista.
Fontes de perigo
No emanar nenhum perigo do sistema de medio durante o modo de pesagem
sempre que o sistema tenha sido instalado e posto em funcionamento de acordo com
as instrues.
Podem surgir perigos durante o uso do sistema de medio se o sistema assumir
funes de comando ou durante o transporte do produto a pesar. As possveis fontes
de perigo so por exemplo os dispositivos adicionais que servem para o transporte
ou dosagem do produto. Nesses casos podem emanar perigos residuais do sistema
de medio se este for usado ou manejado impropriamente por pessoal nao
adestrado.
O sistema de medio pode formar parte de uma instalao mais complexa. Nesse
caso o operador da instalao ser responsvel da segurana da instalao.
Identificao dos perigos residuais

Este smbolo faz referncia aos perigos que podem causar danos
materiais no sistema de medio ou outras partes da instalao.

Schenck Process
Portugus Instrues de segurana
Este smbolo faz referncia aos perigos que podem provocar leses
ou, em casos extremos, at a morte.
Pessoal
A preparao, montagem, operao inicial, manejo, trabalhos de manuteno e
inspeo no devem ser efetuados seno por pessoal qualificado.
Qualquer pessoa que trabalhe com o sistema de medio deve conhecer e observar
as instrues de segurana e as partes relevantes do manual de instrues.
O operador deve instruir o pessoal operador com base no manual de instrues
obrigando-o a observar todas as instrues.
Modificao dos parmetros

A funcionalidade do sistema de medio est definida pelos parmetros. Os
parmetros no devem ser modificados seno por pessoas familiarizadas com o
funcionamento da unidade (p.e. depois de terem assistido a um curso de treinamento
na Schenck Process). Com o sistema de comando ligado, os parmetros ajustados
incorretamente podem causar riscos para pessoas ou danos materiais. Alm disso
podem afetar consideravelmente as operaes de pesagem.
Palavra passe
Os parmetros esto protegidos contra uma modificao no autorizada por uma
palavra passe. O usurio do sistema de medio deve cuidar de que a palavra passe
seja usada com responsabilidade.
Confirmao das mensagens de evento

As mensagens de evento no devem ser confirmadas seno depois de eliminada a
sua causa.
Antes de confirmar um evento verifique-se de que as unidades perifricas funcionem
corretamente, especialmente de que qualquer comando ligado se encontre numa
condio segura definida.
Trabalhos de manuteno e inspeo
! Devem observar-se todas as placas de aviso e informao instaladas no

sistema de pesagem.
! Antes de efetuar qualquer trabalho nos dispositivos mecnicos ou unidades

perifricas (especialmente nas unidades de comando) necessrio desligar o
sistema de medio. necessrio tomar medidas para excluir que o sistema
de medio seja ligado involuntariamente.
! Para trabalhos nos equipamentos eltricos necessrio que o sistema esteja

livre de tenso (tirar a ficha de rede!).
! Os equipamentos s devem funcionar nas caixas previstas porque seno

existe o risco de que o pessoal entre em contato com peas sob tenso.
Humidade
necessrio proteger todas as peas do sistema de pesagem, sobretudo as peas
eltricas, contra humidade quando se abrem as caixas p.e. durante trabalhos de
manuteno. De resto deve observar-se a classe de proteo das caixas.
Modificaes na construo
Se se efetuarem modificaes na construo ou se se acrescentarem componentes
no fornecidos pela Schenck Process a mesma no assumir qualquer
responsabilidade nem garantia. Isso valer especialmente em relao s

Schenck Process
Portugus Elementos de visualizao e comando
modificaes que possam afetar a segurana operacional do sistema de medio.
Substituio de peas
Se for necessrio substituir alguma pea durante trabalhos de reparao, s usar
peas originais da Schenck Process. Se se usarem outras peas a garantia extinguir-
se-.
7.3 Elementos de visualizao e comando

7.3.1 A unidade de comando Disocont
A seguinte figura mostra a vista frontal da unidade de comando DISOCONT com a

descrio dos campos de visualizao:
primeira linha de texto

segunda linha de texto
primeiro campo de texto
primeiro campo de visualizao

segundo campo de texto bloco de teclas
numricas
segundo campo de visualizao
tecla <Return>
lmpada de campo de teclas de comando F1-F9 campo de estado teclas do cursor VH206410_pt.cdr
sinalizao mensagem
Para descrever as teclas usa-se, no presente manual de instrues, a forma

resumida "tecla <nome da tecla>", p.e. tecla <Return>.
A unidade DISOCONT comandada mediante as teclas de comando <F1> a <F9>
(amarelas), as teclas do cursor <seta para a esquerda>, <seta para a direita>, <seta
para cima>, <seta para baixo> (verdes), um bloco numrico (branco) e a tecla
<Return> (vermelha).
A configurao das teclas de comando depende da situao de funcionamento,
sendo visualizada ao lado ou em cima da respetiva tecla.
Para aumentar o contraste da visualizao por um degrau carregar simultaneamente
nas teclas <.> e <seta para cima> e para diminui-lo por um degrau carregar
simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e <seta para baixo>.
Geralmente a iluminao de fundo desliga-se aps 15 minutos. Para religar a
iluminao basta carregar em qualquer tecla. Para mudar para iluminao
permanente carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e <seta para a esquerda> e
para voltar condio bsica carregar simultaneamente nas teclas <.> e <seta para a
direita>.
A ltima condio selecionada ser mantida tambm no caso de haver uma falha de
tenso.
Os elementos representados na figura "Vista frontal da unidade de comando
DISOCONT" indicam o seguinte.

Schenck Process
7.3.2 Lmpada de sinalizao

Se a lmpada verde estiver encendida, a unidade DISOCONT est pronta para entrar
em funcionamento.
7.3.3 Campo de estado

Na primeira ou segunda linha de texto poder aparecer o seguinte texto:
Visualizao Significado
A balana est desligada, apenas a carga e a velocidade da correia
OFF
continuam a ser medidas e indicadas.
A balana est ligada. O rgo transportador est a funcionar, a
ON
quantidade transportada e o dbito sendo detectados.
VOL Modo volumtrico.
VOL--> Modo de arranque ou esvaziamento
VOL-S Volumtrico sncrono
OP Modo teclado.
SIM Modo de simulao est ligado.
BATCH Modo batch pr-seleccionado..
Um PC com a software EasyServe verso 11 est ligado para
ES 11
observao passiva
Um PC com a software EasyServe verso 11 est ligado
ES-ACT 11
activamente, podendo ajustar os valores.
Um PC com a software EasyServe teve uma interrupo sem ter
ES-DIS
terminado a sesso devidamente.
PA Balana no modo de parametrizao
CA Programa de ajuste activo
LOCAL Modo local est pr-seleccionado
CHECK Um dispositivo de medio de controlo est activo
MAN + Enchimento manual do recipiente iniciado
MAN - Enchimento manual do recipiente parado

Schenck Process
7.3.4 Campo de visualizao

No campo de visualizao, uma das seguintes variveis de processo ser
representada em duas linhas. Tambm possvel suprimir a visualizao.
As variveis so selecionadas mediante as teclas do cursor: As teclas <seta para a
esquerda> e <seta para a direita> correspondem ao primeiro campo de texto e as
teclas <seta para cima> e <seta para baixo> ao segundo campo de texto.
A sequncia indicada das variveis aparecer ao fazer-se "scrolling" com a tecla do
cursor <seta para a direita> ou <seta para cima>:
Valor visualizado Dimenso Valor de referncia

Valor terico actual kg/h ou t/h -
Dbito nominal I kg/h ou t/h -
Dbito relativo % Dbito nominal
Carga da correia kg/m -
Carga relativa de correia % Carga nominal da correia
Velocidade da correia m/s -
contador 1 kg ou t -
Contador 2 kg ou t -
Contador 3 kg ou t -
(valor torico - valor real)/dbito
desvio de regulao %
nominal *100
valor terico externo (1) kg/h ou t/h -
valor terico relativo % valor terico externo
valor batch terico (2) kg ou t -
quantitade batch residual (2) kg ou t -
valor Batch real (2) kg ou t -
humidade (3) % -
valor real corrigido (3) kg/h ou t/h -
valor real rel. corr. (3) % dbito nominal
Contador 1 corr. (3) kg ou t -
B: peso de enchimento (4) kg ou t -
B: peso rel. de enchimento (4) % nvel nominal
B: valor terico (5) kg -
Posio alimentador (6) % 100%
Differena valor real (7) kg/h -
Correco tara rel. (8) % Carga nominal da correia
Correco da gama rel. (8) % Correco da gama
Comprimento de controlo (8) m -
Resultado contn. Z (8) kg -
Resultado controlo F/Z (8) - -
Carga da correia 2da ponte (9) kg/m -
Carga rel. da correia 2da pte. (9) % Carga nominal da correia

Schenck Process
(1) apenas se o parmetro P 03.03 "fonte de valor terico" estiver ajustado a um

dispositivo externo (bus de campo ou entrada analgica).
(2) apenas se o parmetro "modo batch" estiver ajustado a "YES", a funo "pr-
seleco batch" estiver activa.
(3) apenas se a medio da humidade estiver activa (bloco 28)
(4) apenas se a balana para recipientes estiver activa (bloco 24)
(5) apenas se a regulao de recipiente estiver LIG (bloco 25)
(6) apenas se P31.01 AI alimentador posio desigual "--"
(7) apenas se P03.09 diferena valor real desigual "--"
(8) apenas se o dispositivo de medio de controlo estiver activo (bloco 27)
(9) apenas se P26.01 2da ponte de pesagem estiver activa em "YES"
7.3.5 Campo de mensagem

Na zona inferior do campo de visualizao h um campo de mensagem onde
aparecer uma eventual mensagem de evento com o seu cdigo abreviado mais um
texto explicativo.
Um exemplo de uma mensagem de evento "WE-01 Falha de rede".

Schenck Process
7.3.6 Teclas importantes
7.3.7 Teclas de comando

Em cima ou ao lado das teclas de comando <F1> a <F9> ser visualizada a funo
das teclas no respectivo contexto de funcionamento. As seguintes teclas so
importantes para a operao do DISOCONT:
Tecla Configurao Funo

F5 ON ligar
F6 OFF desligar
anular o ltimo nmero introduzido ou o ltimo carcter
F4 DEL
introduzido.
F1 EDIT preparar a introduo
Interromper introdues, programas e quaisquer outras
F3 ESC
funes depois de chamadas
F2 MENU Chamar o distribuidor de funes
F7 ResTot Apagar um contador
F7 Events Visualizar eventos
F7 Print T Imprimir contador
F7 Volum volumtrico
F7 Grav gravimtrico
F7 VolSyn Volumtrico sncrono
F7 EndBat terminar batch
F7 Print B imprimir batch
Terminar uma introduo. Chamar um programa, uma
<Return> Return
funo.
F8 ClrEvt Confirmar mensagens de eventos
F9 Ba Set Introduzir o valor batch terico
A tecla de comando F7 serve como tecla hot-key a qual permite efectuar funes
especiais directamente. A tecla configurada com o parmetro P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7".

Schenck Process
7.3.8 Menu de funes
O menu de funes o elemento para aceder a funes especiais da unidade

DISOCONT necessrias para configurar e comandar o sistema, entre elas as funes
de operao, ajuste e programao, como p.e. programas de ajuste e introduo de
parmetros.
Para reduzir o risco de comandos errados, algumas funes esto protegidas por
palavra passe.
A seguinte figura mostra o menu de funes com os submenus que se podem
selecionar.
Print FMZ
Reset Totalizer PROGRAMMING Menu
Test Display
Select/Stop Prefeeder Read Parameters
Service Values Enter Parameters
Trend Load Default Param.
Volumetic/Gravimetric Print Parameters
Volum. Synchronous Print Shortlist
Start/Stop Keyb. Mode Print Status Rep.
Display Events (1)
Select/Deselect Batch (2
Abort Batch (3)
Print Batch (4)
Start Span Corr. (5)
Finish Check Meas. (5) CALIB. FUNCTIONS Menu
>0< Zero Set START/STOP Simulation
Programming TW: Tare
Calib.Functions CW: Weight Check
LB: Pulses/Belt
TB: Tare (6)
(1) only if events are available CB: Weight Check (6)
(2) only if Parameter P 14.01 Batch Mode is set to BIN: Contr. Optim. (7)
YES Set Time
(3) only if Select Batch is active
.

(4) only if a batch is complete Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (8)
(5) only if check system is active (Block 27)
(6) only if bin weigher is active (Block 24)
(7) only if bin control is started (P 25.01)
(8) only if bin controller has been selected manually vh206201_GB.cdr
Fig.: Distribuidor de funes com menus

Procedimento para chamar o menu de funes
1. Selecionar a visualizao normal carregando uma ou vrias vezes na tecla
<ESC>
2. Carregar na tecla <MENU>
3. Fazer "scrolling" das funes mediante as teclas de seta
4. Selecionar mediante a tecla <RETURN>
Nota: No caso de funes com duas selees possveis ser visualizada a funo
no ativada, p.e. "deselecionar batch" ser visualizado se "pr-selecionar batch"
estiver ativado.

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Index
A unidade de comando Disocont 50

Algemeen 40
Allgemeines 1
Anzeige- und Bedienelemente 3
Anzeigefeld 5
Belangrijke toetsen 46
Campo de estado 51
Campo de mensagem 53
Campo de visualizao 52
Campo di indicazione 28
Champ d'tat 19
Champs de textes affichs 20
Das Disocont Bediengert 3
Deutsch 1
Disocont Control Unit 10
Display and Control Elements 10
Display- en bedieningselementen 42
Display Field 12
Displayveld 44
Distributore di funzioni 31
Elementi di indicazione e di comando 26
Elementos de indicacin y de mando 34
Elementos de visualizao e comando 50
Elments d'affichage et de service 18
English 8
Espaol 32
Franais 16
Functiemenu 47
Functietoetsen 46
Function Keys 14
Funktionstasten 6
Funktionsverteiler 7
General 8
Generalidades 32, 48
Generalit 24
Gnralits 16
Het Disocont bedieningstoestel 42
Important Keys 14
Instrucciones de seguridad 32
Instrues de segurana 48
Instructions de scurit 16
Istruzioni di sicurezza 24
Italiano 24
La unidad de mando Disocont 34
Lmpada de sinalizao 51
Lmpara de sealizacin 35
Lampe tmoin 19
LED 11
Ligne de signalisations 21
Lnea de sealizacin 37
L'unit di comando Disocont 26
L'unit de service Disocont 18
Meldelampe 4
Meldingsveld 45
Meldungsfeld 6
Men de funciones 38
Menu de funes 55
Menu des fonctions 23
Message Field 13
Nederlands 40
Portugus 48
Riga di messaggio 29
Righe di testo 27
Safety Instructions 8
Sicherheitshinweise 1

Schenck Process
Index
Signaallampjes 42
Spia di segnalazione 27
Status Field 11
Statusfeld 4
Statusveld 43
Tasti di funzione 30
Tasti importanti 30
Teclas de comando 54
Teclas de funcin 38
Teclas importantes 38, 54
Touches de fonction 22
Touches importantes 22
Veiligheidsinstructies 40
Wichtige Tasten 6
Zona de estado 35
Zona de indicacin 36

Schenck Process
DISOCONT
Weighfeeder
Instruction Manual
BV-H2062GB
we make processes work
Contacts, Copyright
Sales: Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 10 28

eMail: sales.process@schenck.net
Service: 24h Emergency hotline: +49 (0) 172 - 650 17 00

+49 (0) 171 - 255 11 95 (Beltweigher, Weighfeeder)
eMail: service.process@ schenck.net
Business Segments:
Heavy Duty Weighing & Feeding

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 26 23
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 32 70
eMail: bvh.process@schenck.net
Light Duty Weighing & Feeding

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 25 72
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 20 72
eMail: bvl.process@schenck.net
Vibrating Machines
Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 35 25
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 30 96
eMail: bvs.process@schenck.net
Transport & Logistics

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 24 48
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 13 69
eMail: bvt.process@schenck.net
Components & Spare Parts

Service Tel.: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 17 58
Service Fax: +49 (0) 61 51 32 - 36 32
eMail: bvk.process@schenck.net
Copyright 2005
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH
Measuring and Process Technologies
Landwehrstrae 55, D-64293 Darmstadt
http://www.schenck-process.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of manual, regardless of method, without prior permission by
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
Subject to change without prior notice.

Contents
1 ON MANUAL...................................................................................... 1
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................. 2
3 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ 4
3.1 What is DISOCONT? .............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Measuring Principle............................................................................................... 5
3.4 Operating Modes.................................................................................................... 7
3.5 Control .................................................................................................................... 7

3.5.1 Weighfeeder ...................................................................................................... 7
3.5.2 Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder ............................................. 8
3.5.3 Belt Weighers With Constant Load ................................................................... 8
3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC ........................................................................ 9
3.7 Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP ................................................................. 9
3.8 Batching................................................................................................................ 10
4 CONTROL........................................................................................ 11
4.1 Control Unit .......................................................................................................... 11
4.1.1 LED ................................................................................................................. 12
4.1.2 Status Field ..................................................................................................... 12
4.1.3 Display Field.................................................................................................... 13
4.1.4 Message Field ................................................................................................. 14
4.1.5 Function Keys ................................................................................................. 14
4.2 Function Distributor ............................................................................................ 15
4.3 Basic Functions ................................................................................................... 16

4.3.1 START/STOP Feeder ..................................................................................... 16
4.3.2 Setpoint Input .................................................................................................. 16
4.3.3 Relative Setpoint ............................................................................................. 17
4.3.4 Reset Totalizing Counters............................................................................... 17
4.3.5 Acknowledge Event Messages ....................................................................... 18
4.4 Operating Functions............................................................................................ 18

4.4.1 Test Display..................................................................................................... 19
4.4.2 Select/Stop Prefeeder ..................................................................................... 19
4.4.3 Service Values ................................................................................................ 19
4.4.4 Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric Modes............................ 23
4.4.5 START / STOP Keyboard Mode ..................................................................... 23
4.4.6 >0< Zero Set ................................................................................................... 24
4.4.7 Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings) ....................................................... 25
4.4.8 Display Events ................................................................................................ 25
4.4.9 Trend ............................................................................................................... 26
4.5 Calibrating Functions .......................................................................................... 27
DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 I

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH , Darmstadt
Contents
4.5.1 "TW: Tare" .......................................................................................................28

4.5.2 "CW: Weight Check" ........................................................................................29
4.5.3 "LB: Pulses/Belt" ..............................................................................................30
4.5.4 "Set Time" ........................................................................................................32
4.5.5 "START / STOP Simulation"............................................................................32
4.6 Programming Functions ......................................................................................34

4.6.1 Read Parameters.............................................................................................34
4.6.2 Enter Parameters.............................................................................................35
4.6.3 Load Default Parameters.................................................................................36
4.6.4 Print Parameters ..............................................................................................36
4.6.5 Print Parameter Shortlist..................................................................................37
4.6.6 Status Report ...................................................................................................38
4.7 Batching Functions ..............................................................................................39

4.7.1 Select Batch.....................................................................................................39
4.7.2 Abort Batch ......................................................................................................40
4.7.3 Print Batch .......................................................................................................40
4.7.4 Deselect Batch.................................................................................................41
4.8 Bin Weigher...........................................................................................................41

4.8.1 "Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function .................................41
4.8.2 "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function ...........................................42
4.8.3 "TB: Tare" Calibrating Function .......................................................................42
4.8.4 "CB: Weight Check" Calibrating Function........................................................43
4.8.5 "B: Controller Optim." Calibrating Function......................................................44
4.9 On-stream Calibration System............................................................................45

4.9.1 "Start Tare Corr." function................................................................................45
4.9.2 "Start Range Corr." ..........................................................................................46
4.9.3 "Correct" function .............................................................................................46
4.9.4 "Abort Check" function .....................................................................................47
5 COMMISSIONING............................................................................ 48
5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites ....................................................................................48
5.2 Alignment ..............................................................................................................48

5.2.1 Out-of-Round Error ..........................................................................................48
5.2.2 Maintenance ....................................................................................................49
5.3 Electrical Wiring ...................................................................................................49
5.4 Input Important Parameters ................................................................................49
5.5 Control ...................................................................................................................50

5.5.1.1 Setting external feed rate controller ..........................................................50
5.5.1.2 Setting internal controller ..........................................................................50
5.6 Controller Calibration...........................................................................................51
5.7 Belt Run Monitoring .............................................................................................51
5.8 Belt Influence Compensation BIC.......................................................................52
5.9 Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP...........................................................52
6 CHECKS .......................................................................................... 53
II BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder

SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH, Darmstadt
Contents
6.1 Functional Check ................................................................................................. 53
6.2 Check Using Check Weight ................................................................................ 53
6.3 Belt Speed Check................................................................................................. 54
6.4 Check Using Material .......................................................................................... 55
6.5 Test Plug............................................................................................................... 56
7 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 57
7.1 General Information............................................................................................. 57
7.2 Parameter List ...................................................................................................... 61
7.3 Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules ......................................................... 78
7.4 Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions ............................................................ 81
7.5 Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources ............................................................. 85
7.6 Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data............................................................ 88
7.7 Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling ........................................................... 89
7.8 Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring ............................................................ 90
7.9 Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters ................................................................ 95
7.10 Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values .................................................................. 96
7.11 Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data ........................................................... 98
7.12 Parameter Group 10 - Controller ...................................................................... 99
7.13 Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs .......................................................... 103
7.14 Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs .............................................................. 106
7.15 Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs ........................................................... 110
7.16 Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode................................................................. 113
7.17 Parameter Group 15 - Process Control ......................................................... 116
7.18 Parameter Group 16 - VAP.............................................................................. 117
7.19 Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring ........................................................ 117
7.20 Parameter Group 18 - Printer.......................................................................... 120
7.21 Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe...................................................... 121
7.22 Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus ......................................................... 123
7.23 Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs ............................................................... 131
DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 III

Contents
7.24 Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller ...................................................133
7.25 Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking .................................................................136
7.26 Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher.................................................................140
7.27 Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller....................................................145
7.28 Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge.........................................................149
7.29 Parameter Group 27 - Check System .............................................................153
7.30 Parameter Group 28 - Moisture.......................................................................165
7.31 Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time....................................................................167
7.32 Parameter Group 30 - Linearization................................................................169
7.33 Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate.....................................................................170
7.34 Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip...............................................................172
7.35 Event Messages................................................................................................174
8 TYPICAL APPLICATIONS............................................................. 182

8.1 Weighfeeder ........................................................................................................182
8.2 Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder...........................................................183
8.3 Belt Weigher with Constant Load .....................................................................185
9 APPENDIX ..................................................................................... 187

9.1 Linearization .......................................................................................................187
9.2 Sensor Slip ..........................................................................................................188
9.3 Source Selection ................................................................................................189
9.4 Setpoint and Start Sources ...............................................................................190
9.5 Batching ..............................................................................................................193
9.6 Feed Rate Control...............................................................................................195
9.7 Effective Platform Load .....................................................................................201
9.8 Belt Load Control ...............................................................................................203
9.9 Hopper Control ...................................................................................................204
9.10 Interlocking P23.01...P23.19 ............................................................................205
9.11 Interlocking P23.20...P23.27 ............................................................................207
9.12 Details: Time Gate P22.28...P22.37 .................................................................208
IV BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder

Contents
9.13 On-stream Calibration System ....................................................................... 210
DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB , 0521 V

Contents
VI BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder

On Manual
1 On Manual
The Operating and Service Manual is designed for use by the operator and the service
engineer.
This manual is available both in printed and Windows-Help (Winhlp) formats.
You may also access the printed version electronically in the Adobe PDF format.
The daily user will find the information he needs in the Operating Manual.
Information on the DISOCONT electronic design is included in the System Manual
(BV-H2085).
DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 -1-

Safety Instructions
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated
below.
Additionally, you should observe:
! Safety hints given in order-specific documentation
! Safety hints relating to mechanical components
! Instructions given in sub-suppliers documentation.

When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable
local regulations.
Use As Originally Intended
The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively
designed for weighing and controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is
considered inappropriate.
Risks
No danger originates from the measuring system itself, if it is properly installed and
commissioned. However, upon use of the measuring system, danger may result
during transit of material to be weighed (e.g. from auxiliaries used to handle or feed
material) or if system assumes control tasks.
Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators
improperly handle the system. The measuring system can be part of a more complex
plant. The user is fully responsible for the overall plant safety.
Identification of Residual Risks
used has the potential to cause severe injury or death.

used has the potential to cause damage to the measuring system or other
plant sections.
Personnel
Preparation, installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance, and servicing may
exclusively be performed by skilled persons only.
All persons working on the measuring system are required to observe the safety hints
and know the parts of the technical documentation relevant to their work.
The supervisor is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations
and instructions given.
Parameter Changes
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters, which must
exclusively be changed by persons familiar with the measuring system operating
principles (e.g. after training by SCHENCK). Parameters incorrectly set may cause
injuries or damage to the machine whenever a user control system is connected. They
can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password
Software parameters are protected from unintended change by password. The
measuring system user has to ensure safe password handling.
-2- BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder

Safety Instructions
Error Message Acknowledgement

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Before you acknowledge an error message, check to see that connected peripherals
properly operate. Check to see that connected control systems, if any, are in fail-safe
state.
Maintenance and Repair
! During maintenance and repair, observe any warning symbols on the scale.
! Before performing work on the mechanical system or peripherals (particularly

the control system), disconnect the measuring system and protect the system
from inadvertent restart.
! Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power

supply.
! The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger
of contacting live parts.
Moisture Protection
Protect all system parts, electrical items in particular, from moisture (e.g. during
maintenance and servicing) when housings are open. Observe housing protection
standards.
Modification & Replacement
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not
supplied by SCHENCK voids SCHENCK's liability for any resulting damages. This
particularly applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect the operating
safety of the measuring system.
Replacement of Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by SCHENCK. To ensure
this requirement is met, only genuine SCHENCK spare parts should be used. When
using other spare parts, the warranty will be void.

Overview
3 Overview
The Overview chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT system used
in conjunction with a feeder or meter.
3.1 What is DISOCONT?

The DISOCONT is a versatile family of modular weighing electronics for use with
weighing and feeding systems.
Its components are system unit VSE, local control unit VLB and input/output unit VEA.
The DISOCONT is designed for continuous measuring and control tasks as well as
discontinuous batching.
The system also performs all weighing and processing functions required for the
measuring and feeding of bulk solids.
The DISOCONT is suited for flexible adaptation to space requirements and

interconnection.
Used in conjunction with the specific application software for weighing and feeding
tasks, the DISOCONT can be used in the following industries:
! Steel
! Basic Materials
! Cement
! Food
! Chemical
In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems
are supported:
! Belt weighers
! Weighfeeders
! Solids flow meters (chutes)
! Solids flow feeders
! Loss-in-weight, gain-in-weight feeders
! Mass flow meters (Coriolis meters)
! Mass flow feeders (Coriolis feeders)
! Filling systems

Overview
3.2 Definitions
The table below explains some basic terms.
Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Unit
kg/hr or
I Actual feed rate Material amount per unit time
t/hr
Preset feed rate actual value is controlled kg/hr or
P Set feed rate
for t/hr
Weight of material amount fed out since
Z Totalized amount kg or t
last counter reset
V Belt speed Conveyor belt speed m/s
Weight of material fed on one meter of belt
Q Belt load kg/m
length
QB Platform load kg
Controller
Y Depending on deviation mA
magnitude
Xd Deviation Difference from setpoint - actual value %
Tab.: Definitions
3.3 Measuring Principle

The belt weigher is designed to continuously weigh the amount of material transported
on a conveyor belt. The measuring principle is shown in the "Measuring Principle"
figure. The material is guided over a platform arranged below belt and limited by two
carrying idlers. Via one or multiple weighed idlers, the material amount on platform
excerts a force on load cell L/C. Weighed idlers are connected to the frame structure,
e.g. via leaf-spring parallel guidance.
Fig.: Measuring Principle

Overview
The load cell output voltage is proportional to platform load. It is amplified and
transferred to the microprocessor with the use of an analog/digital converter. The load
pattern of a single-idler belt weigher is shown in the "Measuring Principle" figure by
the white triangle. Only half of the material weight load is applied to the weighed idler.
Weighing technology considers the weight pattern of platform load in the computation
of the effective platform length. For the single-idler platform, the following holds true:
Leff = Lg / 2
Leff = Effective platform length in m

Lg = Total platform length in m
NOTE: For multi-idler platforms, compute effective platform length as explained in the
"Details: Platforms" item of the Appendix.
Belt load Q is computed as follows:
Q = QB / Leff

QB = Weight of load on platform in kg
Another significant measurement value is the belt speed acquired by a speed

transducer and converted into a corresponding pulse frequency.
DISOCONT uses belt load and speed to compute the feed rate in accordance with the
following formula:
I = Q * v = QB * v / Leff
I = Feed rate in kg/s
v = Belt speed in m/s
QB = Weight of load on platform in kg
Leff = Effective platform length in m

Overview
3.4 Operating Modes

The DISOCONT can operate in three modes:
! Gravimetric Mode (Controlled)

Actual feed rate is controlled for preset feed rate. Maximum possible
setpoint corresponds to nominal feed rate. If input value is too big,
system reports error.
! Volumetric Mode (Uncontrolled)
Feed unit is set proportional to set feed rate. Changes in hopper weight do not
influence feed unit control. At rated conditions, feed rate approximately
corresponds to defined setpoint. Setpoint is limited to three times the nominal
feed rate. If value is exceeded, system reports error.
! Volumetric Synchronous Mode
In contrast to volumetric mode, current belt speed setpoint is not computed

using nominal belt load but the belt load measured before change-over. This
ensures that change-over takes place without jerks.
3.5 Control
This items briefly describes how the control system operates with different
applications.
NOTE: All applications require the belt to be driven by an external power stage with
armature voltage or speed control.
3.5.1 Weighfeeder
The figure below shows how the conveyor belt extracts material from a silo. Actual
feed rate is compared to setpoint and the difference is transferred to controller R
which continues varying belt speed until actual feed rate is equal to setpoint.
Fig.: Weighfeeder Control

Overview
3.5.2 Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder

The figure on the next page reflects the control principle. A controlled prefeeder feeds
the material onto a conveyor belt. The feed rate is controlled for setpoint by change of
belt load. Normally, belt speed is constant.
Prefeeder
Q V
- ACT
Y Xd
R
+ SET
Vh206224_gb.cdr
kg/hr
Fig.: Belt Weigher Control With Controlled Material Prefeeder

NOTE: Position-controlled prefeeders require an external three-point step controller to
be connected.
3.5.3 Belt Weighers With Constant Load

The figure below shows the control principle. An uncontrolled prefeeder feeds the
material onto a conveyor belt. The controller adapts belt speed such that it always
corresponds to nominal belt load Qo. Since the weighing system always uses the
same working point, a high measuring accuracy can be achieved. The feed rate at the
point of discharge corresponds to the prefeeder feed rate.
Prefeeder
Q V
ACT
+
Y Xd ACT
R
-
SET
Vh206225_gb.cdr
Qo
Fig.: Belt Weigher With Constant Load

Overview
3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC

Not even the best conveyor belts have exactly the same material properties.
Particularly at the welds, conveyor belts become thicker and stiffer. The figure below
enlarges the situation over one belt circuit.
Fig. Material Distribution On Conveyor Belt
On these grounds, high accuracy can be ensured only over complete belt circuits, i.e.
via the mean value. An additional belt circuit sensor and a metallic marker on belt
enables the DISOCONT to acquire and compensate the dynamic zero point influence
which increases the scale's short-term accuracy. To compensate changes in running
operation, belt influence is continuously measured. Adaptive compensation is active
also while material is being measured.
3.7 Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP

For constructional reasons, the weighing platform is not arranged directly at the point
of material discharge. So, if belt load varies, the feed rate measured does not
correspond to the current feed rate at the point of discharge. A special speed
dependent delay element shifts the measurement to the point of discharge where it
acquires the amount of material directly. There is no need for special measurement
value transducers. Material flow, too, is controlled for point of discharge.

Overview
3.8 Batching
In batch mode, a preselected amount of material is discharged. If batch setpoint is
reached, batching process is complete.
Batching can be performed in any mode and with any variant.
The figure below shows the batching sequence of a controlled system:
Fig.: Batching
The represented sections mean:
0 : Start batch
1 : Stop batch
2 : Continue stopped batch
3 : Continuously decrease set feed rate
4 : Stop batch automatically if preset amount has been batched.
- 10 - BV-H2062GB , 0521 DISOCONT Weighfeeder

Control
4 Control
This chapter details the DISOCONT control.
There are three different modes:
! Control via the VLB local control box
! Control via "Easyserve" software on PC
! Local control (emergency mode) via the VLG local control

box.
4.1 Control Unit

After start of the DISOCONT control unit, display is automatically tested.
If test is complete, the device version number is displayed for some seconds, to be
then replaced by the normal display.
NOTE: The following values and settings remain stored after power failure:
! Counter readings
! Parameter settings
! Setpoints
! Service values
! Counter pulses not yet output
! Date and time for approx. 5 days provided that a DISOCONT

input/output unit is connected.
The figure below shows the DISOCONT control unit front panel and its display fields.
This manual uses the abbreviations "<Key Name...> key", e.g. <Return> key. Cursor
keys are called "cursor <UP> or <DOWN>".
The DISOCONT is operated with the use of function keys (yellow), keypad (white) and
Return key (red).
DISOCONT Weighfeeder BV-H2062GB, 0521 - 11 -

Control
Function keys are assigned in accordance with the specific control situation. The
particular function is displayed over or right next to the key.
You can increase display contrast by operating key <.> and single or repeated
operation of the <UP> cursor. Use <.> keys and <DOWN> cursor to decrease display
contrast.
On standard, the background lighting cuts off after 15 minutes and comes on again
after operation of any key. Use shortcut <.> and cursor key <Left> for steady light.
Shortcut <.> and cursor key <Right> lets you return to default state.
The state selected last is maintained also after power failure.
The elements shown in the figure have the following meanings:
4.1.1 LED
If the green LED lights, DISOCONT is ready to operate.
4.1.2 Status Field

In the first and second text lines you can read the following texts:
Display Meaning
Scale OFF. Only belt load and belt speed continue being measured and
OFF
displayed.
ON Scale ON. Feed unit is active, amount fed out and feed rate are aquired.
VOL Volumetric mode
VOL--> Start-up or clearance mode
VOL-S Volumetric Synchronous mode
OP Keyboard mode
SIM Simulation ON
BATCH Batch mode selected
ES 11 PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is connected for passive monitoring.
ES- PC with EasyServe software Version 11 is actively connected and can be used to
ACT 11 change values.
ES-DIS PC with EasyServe software disrupted without previous log-off.
PA Scale in parametrization mode
CA Setting program active
LOCAL Local mode preselected
CHECK Check system active
MAN + Manual hopper filling started
MAN - Manual hopper filling stopped

Control
4.1.3 Display Field

In the display field, one of the following process variables can be displayed in two
lines. You can also fade out line display.:
Selection is by cursor keys. <Left> and <Right> cursors refer to the first text field;
<Up> and <Down> cursors, to the second text field.
The stated sequence of variables corresponds to scrolling with <Right> or <Up>
cursor.
Displayed Variable Unit Reference Value
Current Setpoint kg/hr or t/hr -
Feed Rate I kg/hr or t/hr -
Relative Feed Rate % Nominal feed rate
Belt Load kg/m -
Relative Belt Load % Nominal belt load
Belt Speed m/s -
(Setpoint-actual value)/nominal feed rate
Deviation %
*100
External Setpoint (1) kg/hr or t/hr -
Relative Setpoint % External setpoint
Batch Setpoint (2) kg or t -
Batch Resid. Amount (2) kg or t -
Batch Feed Rate (2) kg or t -
Moisture (3) % -
Setpoint (3) kg/hr or t/hr -
Corr. Rel. Feed Rate (3) % Nominal feed rate
BIN: Fill Weight (4) kg or t -
BIN: Rel. Fill Weight (4) % Nominal fill level
BIN: Setpoint (5) kg -
Flow Gate Position (6) % 100%
Difference Feed Rate (7) kg/hr -
Rel. Tare Corr. (8) % Nominal belt load
Rel. Span Corr. (8) % Range correction
Check Belt Length (8) m -
Contin. Result Z (8) kg -
Check Result F/Z (8) - -
Belt load 2nd Bridge (9) kg/m -
Rel. Load 2nd Bridge (9) % Nominal belt load
(1) Only if Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to external system (fieldbus
or analog input).

Control
(2) Only if Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES" and "Preselect Batch"
function is active.
(3) Only if moisture measurement is active (Block 28)
(4) Only if hopper scale is active (Block 24)
(5) Only if bin weigher control is ON (Block 25)
(6) Only if P31.01 AI Pos. Flow Gate unequals "--"
(7) Only if P03.09 "Difference Feed Rate" unequals "--"
(9) Only if P26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to "YES"
4.1.4 Message Field

The message field in the lower display field area shows the event message, if any,
complete with code and a short explanatory text.
Sample event message: "WE-01 Power Failure".
4.1.5 Function Keys

Over or next to function keys <F1> to <F9>, the contact specific key definition is
shown on display. The following keys are important for DISOCONT control:
Key Assignment Function
F5 ON Turn on
F6 OFF Turn off
F4 DEL Delete number of character entered last
F1 EDIT Prepare input
F3 ESC Abort inputs, programs and all other function after call
F2 MENU Call function distributor
F7 ResTot Reset totalizing counter
F7 FILL Start filling
F7 NO FILL Stop filling
F7 Events Display events
F7 Print T Print totalizing counter readings
F7 Volum Volumetric mode
F7 Grav Gravimetric mode
F7 VolSyn Volumetric Synchronous mode
F7 EndBat Terminate batch
F7 Print B Print batch
<Return> Return Acknowledge input. Call program or function.
F8 ClrEvt Acknowledge event messages
F9 Ba Set Enter batch setpoint
Function key F7 serves as hot-key designed to directly perform special functions. Key
is assigned using Parameter P 02.14 "Hot-Key F7".

Control
4.2 Function Distributor

The function distributor is designed to access special DISOCONT functions required
for system control and configuration. Among these are, for instance, operating,
calibrating, and programming functions, as well as setting programms and parameter
input.
To reduce the risk of maloperation, some functions are protected by password.
Using the function distributor, you can select the following functions and menus:
Fig: Function Distributor With Menus

Follow these steps:
1. Select normal display by pressing <ESC> key as many times as required.
2. Press <MENU> key.
3. Scroll functions using cursor keys.
4. Select with <Return> key.

NOTE: In case of functions with two possible selections, the function not active is
displayed, e.g. if "Select Batch" is active, "Deselect Batch" is displayed.

Control
4.3 Basic Functions

This item describes the use of the basic functions, e.g. start/stop feeder, enter
setpoint, relative setpoint, reset totalizing counters and acknowledge event message.
4.3.1 START/STOP Feeder

Prerequisites
! No alarm available.
! External release signal available. If not, event message IL-01 "No Release" is
output.
! Keyboard mode ON or Parameter P03.02 "Feeder Start" set to "OP".

To start:
1. Press <ON> key.
Feature
"ON" appears in first text line in double-size letters.
To stop:
1. Press <OFF> key.
Feeder cuts off. Measurement starts after elapse of the time set by Parameter P 05.03
"Afterfl. Totalizer".
Feature
"OFF" appears in first text line in double-size letters.
4.3.2 Setpoint Input

Prerequisite:
! Keyboard Mode ON or Parameter P03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" set to "OP".

To enter setpoint:
1- Press <EDIT> key.
2- Enter desired figures on keypad using keys <1> to <9>.
NOTE: Delete single figures using the <DEL> key.
3- Acknowledge with <Return> key, or
4- Abort with <ESC> key.
NOTE: In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate; in
volumetric mode, to three times the nominal feed rate.

Control
4.3.3 Relative Setpoint

Relative setpoint Pr can be used to percentally evaluate setpoint Pe input from
external source.
Pr value can be preset via VLB or analog input (see P03.08).
Prerequisites
! Parameter P 03.03 "Setpoint" set to "AI", "DI4" or "FB"
! Parameter P 03.08 "Rel. Setpoint" not set to "--"
! Keyboard mode OFF

Compute control setpoint using the following formula:
P = Pe * Pr / 100%
P = Effective setpoint
Pe = External setpoint
Pr = Relative setpoint
NOTE: In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate; in volumetric
mode, to three times the nominal feed rate.
4.3.4 Reset Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT is equipped with three totalizing counters. Counters 1 and 2 can be reset;
counter 3 automatically resumes counting from 0 in case of overflow.
To reset:
1. Press <ResTot> (F7) key. If Hot-Key <F7> does not offer the
<ResTot> function (Parameter P02.11), call "Reset Counter"
using the function distributor.
2. Enter number of counter to be reset.
3. Acknowledge with <Return> or
4. Abort with <ESC> key. Old counter readings remain stored.

Control
4.3.5 Acknowledge Event Messages

All significant feeder functions are monitored. If an error occurs, an event message is
displayed in message field. If several messages occur at the same time, the most
significant event is displayed first.
Priority sequence: Alarm, Warning 1, Warning 2.
NOTE: The "Display Events" function details the event messages (cf. "Operating
Functions" item).
To acknowledge:
Before you acknowledge event message on DISOCONT, remove cause

of fault!
1. Remove cause of fault.
2. Operate <ClrEvt> key.
For list of events, see "Parameters" chapter, "Event Messages" item.
4.4 Operating Functions

This item describes how to use the operating functions.
These are:
Print FMZ
Reset Totalizer
Test Display
Select/Stop Prefeeder
Service Values
Trend
Volum. Mode/Gravimetric
Volum. Synchronous
Start/Stop Keyb. Mode
Display Events (1)
Select/Deselect Batch (2)
Abort Batch (3)
Print Batch (4)
Start Tare Corr (5)
Start Span Corr (5)
Finish Check Meas. (5)
>0< Zero Set
Programming
Calib. Functions
(1) Only if events are available

(2) Only if Parameter P14.01 "Batch Mode" is set to "YES"
(3) Only if a batch is active
(4) Only if a batch is complete
NOTE: The use of the operating functions always starts from normal display.
Go to normal display by pressing the <ESC> key as many times as required.

Control
4.4.1 Test Display

This function lets you test display using a test pattern. In addition, the DISOCONT
software version is displayed.
To test:
1. Call up function distributor using the <MENU> key.
2. Select function using cursor keys.
3. Activate function with <Return> key.
NOTE: Test is complete after 10 s. System returns to normal display.
Display
! For approx. 2 s display reads "Display Test".
! DISOCONT application, device type and number are displayed for some
seconds.
4.4.2 Select/Stop Prefeeder

With the use of this function, DISOCONT controls a connected prefeeder.
Prerequisite:
! Prefeeder present and connected.

To select/stop:
1. Call function distributor with <MENU> key.
2. Select function "Select/Stop Prefeeder" with cursor keys.
4.4.3 Service Values

The service values provide detailed information on weighing system, its active units
and their digital and analog inputs/outputs.
To call service values:
4. Select desired service value using <UP> or <DOWN> cursor.

Control
The following service values are available:

Service Value Sample Explanation
DISOCONT
VDB 20150-1 Device family, software number, ID number and VSM
2312 module
VSM 20102
28.07.2001
Current Time
15:05:27
VSE1 : DO = 0000 Digital outputs on DISOCONT control unit 1
VSE 2 : DO = 0100 Digital outputs on DISOCONT control unit 2
VSE 3 : DO = 1001 Digital outputs on DISOCONT control unit 3
VEA1 : DO = 01110 Digital outputs on DISOCONT input/output unit 1
Digital outputs on DISOCONT external input/output
EIO: DO = 0001001100001101
unit
EIO: DI = 0110010011000010 Digital inputs on DISOCONT external input/output unit
Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 1 "+" = short

VSE1: DI = 01++
circuit; "-" = cable breakage
VSE2 : DI = 0010 Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 2
VSE3 : DI = 1000 Digital inputs on DISOCONT control unit 3
VEA1 : DI = 0000 Digital inputs on DISOCONT input/output unit 1
Time Voltage
33 h
ON
Time Scale ON: 13 h
Tacho 100.000 Hz Speed transducer input frequency
Nominal Belt
27.778 kg/m
Load
Load on belt before linearization (only if P 30.01
Belt Load Unlin. 18.081 kg/m
"Linearization ON" is set to YES).
Utilize L/C 100.000 % Load cell load
Loadcell Raw Raw measured value with VAP active (delay for point
0.904076 mV/V
VAP of discharge only if P 16.01 is set to YES.
Raw measured value with BIC active (belt influence

Loadcell Raw
0.904076 mV/V compensation); (only if
BIC
P 17.03 is set to YES).
Loadcell Raw 0.462963 mV/V
Load on hopper load cells (only if P 24.01 "Bin
BIN: Utilize LC 70.095%
Weigher Active" is set to YES).

Control

BIN: Loadcell Hopper raw measured value (only if P 24.01 "Bin
0.713456 mV/V
Raw Weigher Active" is set to YES).
Measure for adverse effects on hopper (wind, etc.);

Check Meas.
0,00 % (only if P 24.01 "Bin Weigher Active" is set to YES).
Window
See also P 27.44 "Max. Bin Error".
2.Br. Loadcell Second weighbridge raw measured value (only if P

0.653456 mV/V
Raw 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to YES).
2.Bridge Utilize Second weighbridge load cell load (only if
60.321 %
LC P 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to YES).
Belt load controller control magnitude (see Appendix);
Controller Mag.
30.22 % (only if P 26.01 "2nd Weighbridge Active" is set to
Y2
YES).
Acquired belt length change in % of total conveyor
2-Sensor Slip 0.21 % belt length (only if P 32.01 2-Sensor Slip act. is active:
Block 32).
Acquired belt length change in % of total conveyor
Belt Slip 0.21 belt length (only if P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" is set
to YES).
Acquired belt drift in cm. Monitoring starts one belt
circuit after start. In cut-off state, the old display is
Belt Drift 0.12 cm
maintained (only if P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" is set
to YES).
VSE1: Analog
0.00 mA Analog output on DISOCONT control unit 1
Output
VSE1: Analog
4.50 mA Analog output 2 on DISOCONT control unit 1
Output 2
VSE2 : Analog
Output
VSE3 : Analog
Output
EIO: Analog Analog output 1 on DISOCONT external input/output
2.05 mA
Output 1 unit
3.00 mA
Output 2 unit
0.00 mA
Output 3 unit
15.40 mA
Output 4 unit
VEA1: Analog
4.00 mA Analog output on DISOCONT input/output unit 1
Output
VEA2: Analog
Output
VEA3: Analog
Output

Control

VEA1: Analog
0.00 mA Analog input on DISOCONT input/output unit 1
Input
VSE1: Analog
9.89 mA Analog input on DISOCONT control unit 1
Input
VEA2: Analog
Input
VEA3: Analog
Input
VSE1 : Analog Analog input DI 4 on DISOCONT control unit 1 (only if
5.96 mA
DI4 DI4 is used).
EIO: Analog Analog input 1 on DISOCONT external input/output
0.00 mA
input 1 unit
3.45 mA
input 2 unit
11.40 mA
input 3 unit
17.50 mA
input 4 unit
Controller
7.77 mA Feed rate controller control magnitude
Magnitude
Controller Mag. Bin controller control magnitude (only if P25.01 "Bin

5.21 mA
Yb Controller Active" = YES).
Bin controller internal auxiliary magnitude, see
Controller Mag.
3.21 mA Appendix (only if P25.01 "Bin Controller Active" =
Ybi
YES).
External totalizing counter pulses (see Parameter P
Pulses Output 319
02.07 "Counter 1 Unit").
External totalizing counter pulses still to be output.

Pulses pending 7 Value should not exceed 10. In case of excess, adjust
weighting (see Parameter P 02.07 "Counter 1 Unit").
Flash Checksum 16798 Checksum via feeder software
New checksum cyclically computed via Flash Eprom.

Flash-Checksum
16798 If value unequals Flash check sum, a serious fault is
calc.
present. Inform the Schenck Service.
Controller Mag. Prefeeder control magnitude for belt load controller

3.48 mA
Yz (only if P 22.01 "Controller Belt load" is set to YES).
Controller Mag. Belt load controller internal auxiliary magnitude (only if

3.45 %
Yzi P 22.01 "Controller Belt load" is set to YES).
Hardware
1 DISOCONT VSE current hardware version
version
Data are also acquired in turned-off state of scale.
NOTE: Value on display remains active until function is terminated by operating the
<ESC> key in normal display.

Control
4.4.4 Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric

Modes
This function lets you select "Volumetric", "Volumetric Synchronous" and "Gravimetric"
modes.
Volumetric Mode:
Prefeeder drive motor is controlled porportional to setpoint.
At rated conditions, flow rate approximately corresponds to selected setpoint.
Setpoint is limited to the triple nominal flow rate. Excessive values cause output of
message SC1 "Setpoint Limited".
Volumetric Synchronous Mode:
In contrast to volumetric mode, current belt speed setpoint is not computed using
nominal belt load but the belt load measured before change-over. This ensures that
change-over takes place without jerks.
Gravimetric Mode:
Flow rate actual value is controlled for selected setpoint.
Maximum possible setpoint equals nominal flow rate. Excessive values cause output
of message SC1 "Setpoint Limited".
To select:
2. Select desired function with cursor keys.
3. Activate displayed mode with <Return> key.

Note:
You can also call the "Volumetric", "Volumetric Synchronous" and "Gravimetric"
modes using hot-key F7 (see Parameter P02.11 "Hot-Key F7").
Display
"VOL" in the first text line indicates Volumetric mode; VOL-S in the first text line
indicates Volumetric Synchronous mode; in Gravimetric mode, no symbol is displayed.
4.4.5 START / STOP Keyboard Mode

Use function to assign preselected Start/Stop and Setpoint sources to keys on
DISOCONT keyboard. If keyboard mode is deselected, previous operating sources
are active again.
NOTE: Upon changeover from external source (e.g. serial) to keyboard, scale START
/ STOP status and setpoint remain stored, and vice versa.
To start/stop:

Display
"OP" is displayed in second line if keyboard mode is selected.

Control
4.4.6 >0< Zero Set

Use function to call up zero setting program designed to acquire the weighfeeder's
zero point error over one or multiple belt circuits. Unlike the taring program, function is
used in daily operation and therefore not protected by password. At that, the zero
setting program only accepts values outside of basic tare within certain tolerances. If
tolerance is exceeded, scale has to be re-tared (see "Calibrating Functions" item).
Prerequisites
! Volumetric mode preselected
! No material on conveyor belt
! Prefeeder, if any, disconnected using the STOP Prefeeder function
! Feeder connected
! Batch mode not active.

Follow these steps:
1. Call up function distributor using <MENU> key.
2. Select ">0< Zero Set" function using cursor keys.
3. Activate function using <Return> key.
4. Enter displayed value into Parameter P 09.05 "Tare Correction" with <Return>
key or abort with <ESC> key.
NOTE: If deviation exceeds 20%, check for mechanical scale error.
Display
! "CA" is displayed in second text line.
! While program is running, ">0 Measurement ON" is displayed in first text field;
residual run time in %, in first display field.
! If program is terminated, "Deviation" is displayed in first text field; percent

value, in first display field.
! "Tare Correction" is displayed in second text field; tare correction value related
to nominal belt load in %, in second display field.
Special Messages
Message Cause
START! Scale cut off.
Select VOLUM! Gravimetric mode selected
Aborted ! Process aborted; no changes effected
Value too big Zero setting result exceeds set limit value. Result is not acquired.
Batch Active Batch mode is active.
Note:
You can also start Zero Set function via digital input (see P12.24 "DI Zero Set").
Positive contact edge starts function. Results within tolerance (5% of nominal belt
load) are acquired automatically; results out of tolerance, rejected automatically.

Control
Note:
Successful completion of zero setting program can be checked via digital output
P13.17 "DO Zero Setting OK".
Start of zero setting program closes digital output. After check, contact reopens
provided that the result is in tolerance.
4.4.7 Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings)

Use function to print totalizing counter readings.
Prerequisite:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active P01.02 = "YES".
NOTE: You can also print totalizing counter readings during batching.
To print:
2. Select "Print FMZ" function using cursor keys.

Note: You can also call function "Print FMZ" using hot-Key <F7> (Parameter P02.11
"Hot-Key F7" = "Print Totalizer) (Assignment of <F7>: Print T).
Printout may look like this:
Fig.: Sample Totalizing Counter Report
4.4.8 Display Events

This function gives detailed information on all available event messages.
Prerequisite
! At least one event has occurred. If not, function is not available.

To display events:
NOTE: If events are available, function automatically appears first in function
distributor display.
3. If several events are available, these can be viewed by operating the <UP> or
<DOWN> cursor.
4. Sorted by priority, the events additionally reference the relevant parameter,

e.g. 1st event IL06 = P23.19 "Not Ready For Start".
Control
5. Return to normal display with <ESC> key.

Note: You can also call the "Display Events" function using hot-key <F7> (Parameter
P 02.11 "Hot-Key F7" = Display Events"). (Assignment of <F7>: Events).
4.4.9 Trend
The trend is defined as graphical representation of measuring results over a certain
period of time on the VLB control unit.
The resolution is 50 * 100 pixels (value, time).
Parametrization uses Parameters P02.12 - P02.15. The following measurement
values can be represented:
Values Parameter Setting
Rel. feed rate I
Rel. belt load Q
Current setpoint W
B: Rel. fill weight: B
Deviation Xd
2nd weighbridge
2nd weighbridge
rel. load
Moisture Moisture
Corrected rel.
Icorr.
actual value
Note: The trend values are continuously transferred to VLB and stored there. Only if
time axis P 02.14 or the value of P 02.15 are changed, the values stored in VLB are
deleted. The values of P 02.12 "Upper Limit Trend" and P 02.13 "Lower Limit Trend"
can be changed at will without loss of data.

Control
4.5 Calibrating Functions

The following calibration programs are available:
START/STOP Simulation
TW: Tare
CW: Weight Check
LB: Pulses/Belt
TB: Tare (1)
CB: Weight Check (1)
BIN: Contr. Optim. (1)
Set Time
Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop (2)
(1) Only if bin weigher is active (Block 27)
(2) Only if bin controller has been selected in manual
Calibrating functions are protected from inadvertent use by password.
NOTE: Preset password: 7353.
The calibrating functions descriptions given at the items below start from the
Calibrating menu. To go to Calibrating menu:
1. Go to normal display by pressing the <ESC> key as many times as required.
2. Go to function distributor using <MENU> key.
3. Select Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys.
4. Activate menu using <Return> key.
5. Enter password.
6. Acknowledge using <Return> key.

NOTE: All programs can be aborted with <ESC> at any time. Previous status is
maintained.
NOTE: Upon weighfeeder initial calibration, first call "LB: Pulses/Belt" function; all
other calibrating functions always refer to one or multiple belt circuits.
NOTE: During program run time until acknowledgement
1. no totalization takes place
2. analog outputs are set to the elevation value
3. no event messages are suppressed.

Control
4.5.1 "TW: Tare"

Use function to acquire the belt weigher's zero point error over one or multiple belt
circuits. Unlike the zero setting program, function is exclusively used for
commissioning or after conversions. It is protected from inadvertent use by password.
After taring, belt load is 0 kg/m.
Prerequisites
! Volumetric mode preselected
! No material on conveyor belt
! Prefeeder, if any, cut off using the STOP Prefeeder function
! Scale turned on
! Batch mode not active.

Follow these steps:
1. Select "TW: Tare" program in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys.
2. Start program using <Return> key.
3. Wait for new tare value to be displayed.
4. Acquire measuring result with <Return> key or abort with <ESC> key.
Taring program result is entered into Parameter P09.04 "Basic Tare", and Parameter
P09.05 "Tare Correction" is set to zero.
Display
! Second text line reads "CA".
! While function is active, first text field reads "TW: Measurement ON"; first
display field indicates residual run time in %.
! If function is terminated, first text field reads "Deviation"; first display field
indicates deviation value related to previous tare value.
! Second text field reads "Tare"; second display field indicates tare value
related to nominal belt load in %.
Special Messages
Message Cause
START ! Feeder cut off
Aborted ! Process aborted; no changes
Select Volum.! Gravimetric mode selected
Batch active! Batch mode active
Note: If BIC is active, P17.03 = "YES", BIC tare vectors are initialised along with taring
program.
Note: 2nd weighbridge tare is acquired and stored upon taring (P26.15).

Control
4.5.2 "CW: Weight Check"

Use function to check the DISOCONT measuring range. Platform is loaded with
known check weight and the platform load mean value is acquired over one or multiple
integer belt circuits. The result is compared with setpoint, to be then displayed.
NOTE: Result does not automatically enter into Parameter P 09.01 "Range
Correction" nor into any other parameter.
Prerequisites
! Ensure that there is no material on conveyor belt.
! If prefeeder is involved, cut off using the "STOP Prefeeder" function.
! Perform taring or zero setting operation.
! Enter Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight". Ensure that check weight is

between 30% and 100% of nominal platform load Q0. Nominal platform load
is computed from:
Q0 = q0 * Leff
q0 = Nominal belt load
Leff = Eff. platform length
! Apply check weight in appropriate location.
! Start scale.
! Preselect volumetric mode.
! Ensure Batch mode is not active.
Follow these steps:

1. Select function in menu using cursor keys.
3. Evaluate acquired values using the table below.
4. Exit function with <ESC>.

NOTE: Acquisition with <Return> key is not possible.
Display
! Function active: First text field reads "CW: Measurement ON"; first display
field indicates residual run time in %.
! Function active: Second text field reads "Set/Act"; second display field
indicates the quotient from Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight" and check
weight measurement value.
! Function terminated: First text field reads "CW: Complete"; first display field
indicates measured weight of fictitiously fed material amount in kg.
! Function terminated: Second text field reads "KOR"; second display field
indicates SET/ACT mean value over the entire run time.

Control
Special Messages
Message Cause
START ! Feeder cut off
Aborted ! <ESC> suppressed
Select Volum ! Gravimetric mode selected
Evaluation Table
Error KOR Explanation
<1% 0.99.....1.01 Scale OK; no further action required
If the result of a material check has not yet been considered
< 5% 0.95.....1.05 with Parameter "Range Correction", enter KOR value into
Parameter.
< 0.95 Deviations of several percent may be due to input of wrong
>5% or technical data (e.g. belt inclination not yet known, lever
> 1.05 arms) or mechanical faults (alignment, wrong belt tension).
Note: Parameter P09.01 "Range Correction" is not considered during check. After
correction, check program displays the same error quotient KOR.
4.5.3 "LB: Pulses/Belt"

Use function to acquire the number of speed transducer pulses for one belt circuit.
Number of pulses is used as belt circuit code for the following functions:
! Zero Set >0<
! TW: Tare
! CW: Weight Check
Upon initial calibration, the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function is the

first to be called up.
Function requires to be called whenever
! scale is initially calibrated
! a new belt has been applied
! belt tension heavily varies
! with scales with or without speed measurement, Parameter P 04.01 "vs-

Charact.Val" or Parameter P 02.04 "Nominal Speed" has been changed.
Prerequisites
! Before calling function, measure the time for one belt circuit with utmost
precision and enter value in Parameter P 09.02 "Belt Circuit Time".
! Turn on feeder.
! Select Volumetric mode .
! Ensure Batch mode is not active.

Control
Follow these steps:

1. Select function in Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys.
3. Acquire result with <Return> key or abort with <ESC> key.

NOTE: If you press <Return> key, result is acquired and stored in Parameter
P 09.06 "Belt Circuit No.".
Display
! Function active: First text field reads "LB: Measurement ON"; first display field
shows residual run time in s.
! Function active: Second display field indicates the number of totalized speed
transducer pulses.
! Function terminated: First text field reads "LB: v"; first display field indicates
belt speed mean value over the entire run time.
! Function terminated: Second display field indicates the total result of pulses
per belt circuit.
Note: If belt sensor is active, P17.01 = "YES", program sequence slightly
differs. Second text field immediately shows current value of pulses per belt
circuit. Value flashes upon every belt circuit.
Note: Also if the belt sensor is active, enter the time for one belt circuit into
P09.02 as precisely as possible. If you fail to do so, the belt speed mean
value is incorrectly displayed after termination of setting program.
Special Message
Message Cause
START! Feeder cut off
Aborted! Process aborted; no changes
Select Volum! Gravimetric mode selected

Control
4.5.4 "Set Time"

Use function to set date and time.
Prerequisite:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active; P01.02 = "YES".
To enter:
1. Select Set Time function in Calibrating Function menu using cursor keys.
2. Start Calibrating Function using <Return> key.
3. Enter year via keypad.
4. Acknowledge with <Return>.
5. Enter month via keypad.
7. Enter day via keypad. .
9. Enter hour via keypad.
11. Enter minute via keypad.
13. Enter second via keypad.

NOTE: No entry means 00 seconds.
4.5.5 "START / STOP Simulation"

Designed for training purposes, the simulation function enables all scale functions to
be tested without material. Setting programs can also be called in simulation mode.
NOTE: In simulation mode, no normal weighing operation can be performed.
Features
! All operating functions can be performed.
! Normal weighing and feeding operations cannot take place.
! Control circuit is closed internally, with actual feed rate being controlled for
setpoint by the connected controller.
! Control magnitude Y is transferred to the outside.
! Belt load and speed measurement are active.
! All control input and outputs operate normally.

Control
To start/stop:
1. Select function in Calibrating Menu using cursor keys.

Display
"SIM" is displayed in second text line as soon as START Simulation function is active.

Control
4.6 Programming Functions

This item details the functions of the Programming menu. These are:
Read Parameters
Enter Parameters
Load Default Parameters
Print Parameters
Print Shortlist
Print Status Report
Print Check Result (1)
(1) Only if check measurement is active (Block 24)
Parameters are variable features or data used to program DISOCONT for the
application. Parameters are organized by function blocks and consecutively numbered
within a block.
Parameter input is protected by password.
NOTE: Preset password: 7353
The programming functions described at the items below start from the Programming
menu. To call Programming menu:
1. Go to normal display by pressing <ESC> as many times as required.
3. Select Programming menu using cursor keys.
4. Activate menu using <Return> key.
4.6.1 Read Parameters

Use function to view parameters. Editing is not possible.
NOTE: Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *.
To read:
1. Select function in Programming menu using cursor keys.

NOTE: Display shows title of first parameter block.
3. Select parameter block with cursor keys, or direct using <.>

key and enter via keypad.
4. Activate parameter block using <Return> key.
5. View parameters within a block using cursor <UP>, <DOWN>

keys, or directly select number using <.> key and enter via
keypad.
6. Return to parameter block using <ESC> key.
7. If need be, resume from step 3.
8. Return to normal display using <ESC> key.

Display
"PA" is displayed in second text line.

Control
4.6.2 Enter Parameters

Use function to read and edit parameters. Enter password.
NOTE: Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *.
To enter:
3. Enter password.
4. Acknowledge with <Return> key.

NOTE: Display shows title of first parameter block.
5. Select parameter block with cursor keys, or select direct using

<.> key and enter via keypad.
6. Activate parameter block using <Return> key.
7. View parameters within a block using cursor <UP>, <DOWN>

keys, or directly select number using <.> key and enter via
keypad.
NOTE: Use cursor keys to choose parameters of selected
block. Press <Return> to choose parameters in rising
sequence independent of block.
8. Activate parameter using <EDIT> key.
9. Enter new value using keypad or cursor keys.
10. Acquire new value with <Return> key, or reject with <ESC>
key.
11. Return to parameter block using <ESC> key.
12. If need be, resume from step 5.
13. Return to normal display using <ESC> key.

Display
"PA" is displayed in second text line.

Control
4.6.3 Load Default Parameters

Use function to reset parameters to default values.
Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset. We recommend to

print parameters using the Print Parameters function before loading default values.
To load:
2. Start function using <Return> key.
3. Enter password.
4. Acknowledge with <Return> key.

NOTE: System prompts for acknowledgement.
5. Enter "1" for "YES" or "0" for "NO".
6. Acquire "1" or "0" using <Return> key.
4.6.4 Print Parameters

Prerequisite:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active; P 01.02 = "YES".
Use function to print parameter list complete with current settings, software version
and current date. In addition, current hardware assignment and event message are
printed.
Parameters deviating from default values are identified by *.
To print:
3. Abort using <ESC> key.

Control
Sample Printout:
4.6.5 Print Parameter Shortlist

Prerquisiste:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active (P 01.02 = "YES"). The shortlist
contains the parameters deviating from default values (identified with* in Parameter
List) as well as scale version and date/time.
To print:

Control
4.6.6 Status Report

Prerequisite:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 must be active; P 01.02 = "YES".
The status report includes the most important status values as well as all event
messages occurred since last printout. If no status report has been printed yet, events
are counted from last DISOCONT power-up.
To print:

Control
4.7 Batching Functions

NOTE: For batching, Parameter P 14.01 "Batch Mode" has to be set to "YES".
Only then, the "Select Batch / Deselect Batch" function is available in function
distributor.
In addition, the following functions are available:
Abort Batch
Print Batch
4.7.1 Select Batch

This function provides the prerequisites for batching, however, does not start batching
process.
Prerequisite
! Feeder disconnected
To call Batch mode:
1. Call function distributor using <MENU> key.
3. Start function with <Return> key.
4. Enter batch setpoint using <1>... <9> keys.
5. Acquire batch setpoint and return to normal display using <Return> key, or
6. Abort with <ESC> key.

Note: If no batching operation has been started or stopped, you can change batch
setpoint in normal display using the <BaSet> key provided that batch active setpoint
P.14.02 is set to "OP".
Note: Items 4-6 can be omitted if active batch setpoint P 14.02 is not set to "OP".
Features
Display: "BATCH" in first text line
The following process variables can be scrolled into normal display using cursor keys:
! Batch setpoint
! Batch actual value = Amount discharged
! Batch residual value = Amount still to be discharged.

Display format corresponds to that of totalizing counter 1.
During batching, "Batch actual value" display is running from 0 towards setpoint;
"Batch residual value" display is running from setpoint towards 0.
NOTE: Before start of new batch, "Batch actual value" and "batch residual value"
displays show the amounts reached with previous batch.
After deselection of batching mode ("Deselect Batch" function), displayed values can
no longer be used. However, they reappear upon new selection of function.
To start/stop batch:
1. Start selected batch mode using the <ON> key.
2. Abort batching using the <OFF> key.
3. Resume stopped batch using the <ON> key.

Control
4.7.2 Abort Batch

Abort batching process. Batch Mode remains stored.
NOTE: Next start command starts new batch. Old batch is not resumed.
Prerequisite
! Batching started
To abort:

Note: You can also print batch using hot-Key <F7> , if Parameter P 02.11 is set to
"Abort/Print Batch" and offers <F7> "EndBat".
4.7.3 Print Batch

Prerequisites:
DISOCONT input/output unit 1 active; P01.02 = "YES".
If batch is complete or has been aborted, you can start printing in manual using the
"Print Batch" function.
Note: If Parameter "Automatic Printout" is set to "YES", printing starts automatically
after every complete batch.
Prerequisite:
! Batching is complete or has been aborted using the "Abort Batch" function.
If batching is complete or has been aborted, you can start printout in manual using the
"Print Batch" function.
NOTE: If Parameter "Automatic Printout" is set to "YES", batch report is printed
automatically after every complete batch.
Prerequisite
! Batching complete or aborted via "Abort Batch" function.

To start printout in manual:

Note: You can also print batch using hot-Key <F7>, if Parameter P 02.11 ist set to
"Abort/Print Batch" and offers <F7> "Print B".

Control
4.7.4 Deselect Batch

Use function to deselect batching mode and remove function of active range. BATCH
display disappears from first text line. Batching values, i.e. "Batch Setpoint", "Batch
Actual Value" and "Batch Residual Amount", can no longer be called up. However,
they are not cleared.
Prerequisites
! Batching complete or aborted using the "Abort Batch" function
! Feeder disconnected
To deselect batch:

Note: Reactivate batch mode using the "Select Batch" function. The old batch values
"Batch Setpoint", "Batch Actual Value" and "Batch Residual Amount" can be viewed
again.
4.8 Bin Weigher

Operating totally independent of the continuous scale, the bin weigher is designed for
display of bin weight, monitoring and reporting of limits values, control of fill level as
well as for use as check scale in conjunction with an on-stream calibration system.
4.8.1 "Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function

Bin level can be controlled either manually or automatically. Upon automatic control,
the prefeeder is turned on/off as a function of limits values P24.12 and P24.13
"Control Level MIN" and "Control Level MAX" (Parameter P24.14 "DO Bin Filling").
Upon manual control, you can start/stop prefeeder direct using the "Bin Contr. Man.
Start" or Bin Contr. Man.Stop" calibrating functions.
To avoid bin overflow, prefeeder cuts off in both modes as soon as limit value P24.13
"Control Level MAX" is exceeded.
Upon changeover from Manual to Automatic Bin Control, any active filling operation is
synchronized.
To change over:
1. Select "Manual/Autom. Bin Control" in "Calibrating Function" menu using
cursor keys.

Display:
In manual mode, first text line reads "MAN+" or "MAN-".

Control
4.8.2 "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function

In manual mode, this function starts/stops prefeeders.
Prerequisites:
! Set bin controller to manual.
! If limit value P24.13 "Control Level MAX" is exceeded, prefeeder cannot be

started.
To start/stop bin controller:
1. Select the "Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" in "Calibrating Functions" menu using
cursor keys.
2. Acticate function with <Return> key.

Note:
Ensure that prefeeder feed rate exceeds maximum discharge rate.
Display:
With prefeeder started, first text line reads "MAN+"; in cut-off state, "MAN-".
Note:
If continuous bin control in P 25.01 "Bin Controller ON" mode is set to YES, the fill or
discharge unit control magnitude P25.03 "AO Contr. Mag." is set to 20mA with
manually started prefeeder, and to 0mA with manually stopped prefeeder. Digital input
P25.04 "DO Scale ON" is started/stopped likewise.
4.8.3 "TB: Tare" Calibrating Function

The taring program automatically acquires the weight of the empty bin and enters it
into Parameter P24.25 "Tare". If taring is complete, bin fill weight is 0 t.
Prerequisites:
! Bin must be empty.
! Bin must not be filled.

To tare:
1. Select "TB: Tare" setting program in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor
keys.
2. Start setting program with <Return> key.
3. Wait for new tare value to be displayed.
Display:
! While function is active, first text field reads "TB: Measurement running", and
first display field shows the residual run time in %.
! If function is complete, first text field displays "Deviation", and first display field
shows the deviation value related to previous tare value.
! Second text field changes to "Tare", and second display field shows the tare
value related to load cell rated capacity in % (P24.04 "L/C Rated Cap.").

Control
Special Messages
Message Cause
Aborted! Process aborted; no change.
4.8.4 "CB: Weight Check" Calibrating Function

The "CB: Weight Check" automatically aquires the value of P24.24 "Range Correction"
used to corrected the bin measuring result.
Prerequisites:
! Bin not filled or discharged.

To check bin weight:
1. Select "CB: Weight Check" in "Calibrating Function" menu using cursor keys.
Check weight (Parameter P24.26 "Check Weight") may already be applied.
3. Wait until current bin weight is acquired, prompt "Checkweight Up/Down"

displayed in first text line, and check weight value displayed in first display
field.
4. Apply or remove check weight.
5. Continue setting program with <Return> key.
6. Wait for new "Set/Act" value to be displayed.
New value for Parameter P24.24 "Range correction" is computed using the following
formula:
Abbreviation Description
Parameter
KOR
P24.24
new New value
old Old value
set Check weight
Measured check
act
weight
Display:
! During first measuring phase, first text field reads "CB: Measurement running",
and first display field shows residual run time in %.
! Second text field displays "Weight"; second display field, current bin weight.
! If first measuring phase is complete, first text field reads "Checkweight

Up/Down"; first display field, check weight value.
! Second text and display fields continue indicating current weight.

Control
! In second measuring phase, with check weight applied or removed, first field
shows the residual run time; second field, the measured check weight value. If
check weight has been removed, value is negative.
! If setting program is complete, first text fields displays "Weight"; first display
field, measured check weight value. If check weight has been removed, value
is negative.
! Second text field displays "Set/Act"; second display field, the ratio between
check weight and measured value.
Special Messages
Message Cause
Aborted! Process aborted; no change.
4.8.5 "B: Controller Optim." Calibrating Function

The bin controller optimization program automatically computes control parameters
KP and TN (P25.08 and P25.09) from feed or discharge unit constants (P25.06) and
dead time (P25.07).
Prerequisites:
! Bin control active (P25.01 set to "YES").
! Fill or discharge unit technical data (P25.06 "Scale Constant" and P25.07
"Dead Time TT") correctly set.
To optimize controller:
1. Select "B: Control Optim." setting program in "Calibrating Functions" menu
using cursor keys.

Note:
With this setting program, the results are entered automatically, i.e. the program must
not be terminated with <Return> or <ESC>. The values computed for Parameters
P25.08 "P-Component KP" and P25.09 "I-Component TN" can be adjusted in manual.
The residual hopper control parameters (D-Component, Bypass, Elevation, etc.) are
not affected by the optimization program.
Display:
! While function is active, first text field reads "CO: P-Component KP", and first
display field shows the newly computed value of Parameter
P25.08 "P-Component KP".
! Second text field displays "I-Component TN"; second display field, the newly
computed value for Parameter P25.09 "I-Component TN".
! After approx. 10 seconds, normal display returns.

Note:
If there is no valid scale constant value (P25.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA), function is aborted,
and Parameters KP and TN remain unchanged. In this case, first text field displays
"Scale Constant"; first display field, value 0.0.
After approx. 5 seconds, message "Aborted"! is output.

Control
4.9 On-stream Calibration System

The KME system basically consists of a bin weigher used to check and correct the
weighfeeder actual feed rate.
During check and correction, the material flow is not interrupted.
The check results comprises the measuring results of the two scales for the material
amount actually fed out. Being by far more accurate than dynamic weighing, the static
weighing result is acquired as correct.
The correction value is computed from the difference, or the ratio, of the two amounts.
Correction of the zero point error compensates additive errors, e.g. caused by material
deposits on weighing platform.
Ranges correction compensates multiplicative errors.
Range correction is principally required after commissioning; zero point correction,
also in running operation.
For setting details, see Block 27 and Appendix.
4.9.1 "Start Tare Corr." function

Use function to start on-stream calibration system in order to acquire the feeder's tare
error.
Prerequisites:
! Parameter P27.01 "Type of Check" set to "YES".
! The source of Parameter P27.09 "Start Tare Corr." set to "OP".

To start:
2. Select "Start Tare Corr." function with cursor keys.

Features
"CHECK" display in second text line.
The following additional process variables can be displayed in normal mode using
cursor keys:
Displayed
Unit Description
Variable
Continuous
kg Amount acquired by continuous scale
results Z
Belt length passed over weighbridge
Check length m
during check
Check result F/Z Static /Dynamic Amount ratio
Tare rel.
Check result (see P27.34)
correction
Note:
If check-and-correct measurement is complete, system automatically acquires result
(P27.02 = "YES") provided that it is between defined limits (P27.31 and P27.32). If not,
acquire result using the "Correct" function, or reject with "Abort Check" function.

Control
4.9.2 "Start Range Corr."

Use function to start on-stream calibration in order to acquire the scale range error.
Prerequisites:
! Parameter P27.01 "Type of Check" set to "YES".
! Source of Parameter P27.08 "Start Range Corr." set to "OP".

To start range correction:
2. Select "Start Range Corr." function using cursor keys.
3. Activate function with <RETURN> key.

Features
"CHECK" display in second text line.
The following additional process variables can be displayed in normal mode using
cursor keys:
Displayed
Unit Description
Variable
Continuous
kg Amount acquired by continuous scale
results Z
Belt length passed over weighing
Check length m
platform during check
Check result F/Z Static / Dynamic Amount ratio
Range rel.
Check result (see P27.36)
correction
Note:
If on-stream calibration is complete, system automatically acquires result (P27.02 =
"YES") provided that it is within defined limits (P27.31 and P27.32). If not, acquire
result using the "Correct" function, or reject with "Abort Check" function.
4.9.3 "Correct" function

Use function to acquire check result after completion of measuring phase.
Prerequisites:
! KME measuring phase complete
! Source of Parameter P27.10 "Correct" set to "OP".

To correct check result:

Features
"CHECK" display removed from second text line
Note:
Upon range correction, the result enters into Parameter P09.01 "Range Correction" ;
upon tare correction, into Parameter P09.05 "Tare Correction"

Control
4.9.4 "Abort Check" function

Use function to reject result after completion of a KME measuring phase.
Prerequisites:
! KME measuring phase complete
! Source of Parameter P27.11 "Abort Check" set to "OP"

To reject check result:

Features
"CHECK" display removed from second text line
Note:
The process values of the last check operation are present displayed in normal display
until start of a new check measurement.
If P27.01 "Type of Check" is set to "NO", no KME process values can be called any
longer.

Commissioning
5 Commissioning
5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites
Mount mechanical equipment as described in the Installation Instructions. The weigher
influential zone comprises all weighed idlers and three carrying idler approach and
retreat of weighing station. The weigher influential zone is shown in the figure below.
Fig.: Weigher Influential Zone

Upon installation, check for proper alignment and out-of-round error of weighed and
carrying idlers in the weigher influential zone. Improper alignment causes a zero point
error that depends on belt load and cannot be tared off. Exact alignment is the
essential prerequisite for an accurate scale.
5.2 Alignment
The figure below shows the points of alignment which must be observed for perfect
alignment.
Fig.: Alignment Points

Lift idlers in the weigher influential zone to 3...5 mm above residual idlers. Ensure that
their difference in height does not exceed 0.4 mm. Depending on idler station
equipment, alignment must be performed in several points.
5.2.1 Out-of-Round Error
Ensure that the idlers out-of-round error in the weigher influential zone does not
exceed 0.4 mm. In addition, protect idler stations from displacement after alignment.

Commissioning
5.2.2 Maintenance
Always remount serviced idlers in previous pattern.

NOTE: Therefore: Mark idlers and idler stations before performing maintenance work.
Once service work is done, check for proper alignment and retare scale.
5.3 Electrical Wiring

Depending on equipment supplied, DISOCONT can be wired as shown in sample or
system specific circuit diagrams.
For electrical data and assembly interfaces, see DISOCONT Hardware Manual BVH-
2085.
5.4 Input Important Parameters

System comes with Spec Sheet including all important nominal and calibrating data. In
addition, some values have to be determined in the field, e.g. belt inclination. No
further parameters changes are required. Parameter default values are suitable for
most practical applications.
Principal data and parameters:
! Total of load cell rated capacities. Parameter P 04.03 "Lever Ratio".
! Load cell characteristic. Parameter P 04.02 "L/C Charact. Value".
! Lever ratio, if any. Parameter P 04.05 "Angle".
! Nominal feed rate. Parameter P 02.03 "Display Formats".
! Speed transducer characteristic value. Parameter P 04.01 "vs Charact.

Value".
! Effective platform length. Parameter P 04.04 "Eff. Platf. Length".
! Belt rise. Parameter P 04.06 "Angle" (cf. "Details: Belt Rise" item in the
Appendix).
! Belt circuit time. Parameter P 09.02 "Belt Circuit Time".

NOTE: For parameter input, see "Programming Functions" item. For parameter
meanings and settings, see "Parameters" item.

Commissioning
5.5 Control
Before commissioning the control system, set external feed rate controller and internal
controller.
NOTE: The setting description below holds true for weighfeeders with DC drive. With
some few changes, description equally applies to other systems.
5.5.1.1 Setting external feed rate controller
1. Set setpoint ramp, if any, to smallest value.
2. Set I-R compensation, if any, to zero.
3. Set current limitation to approx. two times the rated motor current.
4. Set controller Parameters P 10.02 "P-Component" and P 10.03 "I-Component"

to zero (note default value).
5. Set Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset" to 10...15 mA.

NOTE: If need be, you can set control magnitude via local control unit.
6. Calibrate external controller amplification so that weighfeeder nominal speed
is reached.
At 10 mA control magnitude, speed must not exceed motor rated

speed.
7. Enter setpoint steps into Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset", check
external controller control behaviour and optimize.
8. Set Parameter P 10.06 "Cont.Magn.Offset" such that motor just stops

revolving (normally 0 mA).
5.5.1.2 Setting internal controller
1. Enter default values of controller parameters P 10.02 "P-Component" and P

10.03 "I-Component".
2. Select Volumetric mode.
3. Enter setpoint steps and, if need be, optimize controller parameters P 10.02
"P-Component" and
P 10.03 "I-Component".
NOTE: Default values may slow down speed settling.
4. Check setting in Gravimetric mode using check weights.

Commissioning
5.6 Controller Calibration

Calibration as such is not required. After entry of nominal and calibrating data, scale is
calibrated.
Call the following programs:
Rigidly observe order of sequence.

1. "LB: Pulses/Belt" setting program.
2. "TW: Tare" setting program.

After calibration, two checks are useful (cf. Check item).
1. Check using check weight
2. Check of belt speed
5.7 Belt Run Monitoring

DISOCONT is equipped with integrated belt run monitoring function. Activate
monitoring using Parameter P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active".
Provided that belt is equipped with a belt circuit sensor N (NAMUR) and a
triangled metallic sensor area, programs can be used for belt monitoring (see Belt
Monitoring figure). If not, set Parameters P 17.01"Belt Sensor Active" and P 17.03
"BIC Active" to NO.
Fig.: Belt Run Monitoring

Activating belt run monitoring:
1. Set Parameter P 17.01 "Belt Sensor Active" to YES.
2. Enter sensor length L into Parameter P 17.04 "Sensor Length" (see Belt Run
Monitoring figure).
3. Enter sensor width B into Parameter P 17.05 "Sensor Width" (see Belt Run
Monitoring figure).
4. Set Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset" to 0.
5. Call up the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function.

Commissioning
6. Acquire result after minimum two belt circuits.
7. Adjust sensor.
NOTE: To adjust sensor, the "Belt Slip" service value is monitored. This value
indicates the belt off-centre deviation in cm.
Example: Belt slip = 0.20 cm: Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset" = - 0.20 cm,
belt slip = 0.00 cm is indicated.
8. If necessary, determine event classes of belt drift and belt skew messages
(Parameters P 17.07 to P 17.12).
NOTE: In most cases, the default values can be used.
9. Check messages.
NOTE: Perform check, e.g. by changing Parameter P 17.06 "Sensor Offset".
Ensure that parameter value is reset after check.
5.8 Belt Influence Compensation BIC

The automatic belt influence compensation BIC is designed to monitor and correct the
belt influence. Like belt monitoring, sensor and sensor area are required. Before
starting BIC, turn on belt run monitoring.
NOTE: Perform first start without BIC active.
Features
After start of the belt influence compensation, belt influence on measurement is
compensated after approx. ten belt circuits.
Prerequisites
! Belt monitoring commissioned
! Belt monitoring turned on.

To start BIC:
Set Parameter P 17.03 "BIC Active" to "YES".
5.9 Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP

With measurement at the point of discharge VAP, a delay element shifts the weighing
platform measuring points to the point of material discharge. The amount discharged
is acquired directly.
NOTE: If VAP is active, we recommend to turn on the BIC belt influence
compensation.
Prerequisite
! The length ratio of platform centre up to discharge point over the entire
conveyor belt length is known.
! Enter length ratio in percent into Parameter P 16.02 "Platf.Dis.Length".

To start VAP:
Set Parameter P 16.01 "VAP Active" to YES.

Checks
6 Checks
6.1 Functional Check

Follow these steps:
1. Connect scale.
2. Interpret event messages, if any, and remedy fault.
3. Go to "Service Values" function and check the following values:
o Tachometer: Ensure that speed transducer output frequency is below

2900 Hz. The value should more or less correspond to Spec Sheet. If
the frequency heavily varies at constant belt speed, the speed
transducer Namur sensor is likely to be too far away from gearing
(see also "Check Belt Speed" item).
o Raw measured value: Ensure that the unnormalized load cell amplifier
output value does not exceed 3.5mV/V, not even at nominal belt load.
Value must change if weighing platform is loaded, e.g. by check
weight. If value is excessive, load cell is overloaded. If value is
negative, load cell is improperly connected.
o L/C utilization: Load cell load in percent related to total load cell rated
capacities. Value must change if weighing platform is loaded, e.g. by
check weight. If value is excessive, load cell is overloaded. If value is
negative, load cell is improperly connected. At nominal platform load,
load cell utilization should not exceed 100%.
NOTE: If no stable operating state can be achieved, read the Check Using Test Plug
item.
6.2 Check Using Check Weight

Check using check weight makes good sense since
! mechanical or electrical errors are detected
! calibrating data can be "uncertain", e.g. lever ratio is not exactly known or belt
rise difficult to measure
! faulty data can be recognized.

Prerequisites
! Check weight exactly known
! Effective check weight exactly known
! Effective check weight between 30% and 100% of nominal platform load.
NOTE: If weighing modules with leaf-spring parallel guidance are used,
effective platform weight equals the real value. In other cases, see Spec
Sheet or compute effective check weight as described at the "Details: Check
Weight" item. For effective platform load, belt rise is irrelevant.

Checks
Follow these steps:

1. Enter effective check weight into Parameter P 09.03 "Check Weight".
2. Call up the "CW: Weight Check" calibrating function (see Calibrating

Functions item).
Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by
! Platform distortion
! Improper alignment
! Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.

NOTE: If one of these causes is likely to be given, we recommend to perform
additional tests with different check weights. Non-linear deviations are probably due to
the above causes and linear deviations to faulty data.
6.3 Belt Speed Check

The speed sensor frequency transducer can be driven either by
! a friction wheel on the return belt, or
! the drive motor shaft.

In the first case, the value of Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value" depends on
exact friction wheel diameter, in the second case, on gearbox and belt underslung
factor. Therefore, speed measurement accuracy must be checked.
Follow these steps:

1. Acquire conveyor belt speed Vg using stop watch and tape measure.
NOTE: To be on the safe side, perform several measurements and compute
mean value.
2. Read off speed value Va on DISOCONT, at best over the same period of
time.
3. Compare values for deviation.

If yes:
4. Acquire new value for Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value" using the
following formula:
Parameter P 04.01 (new) = Parameter P 04.01 (old) *Va / Vg
Vg = Speed measured
Va = Speed read off
5. Enter new value into Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact. Value".
NOTE: This method can also be used with unknown Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Charact.
Value".
If bigger deviations occur
With unknown vs-characteristic value and big deviations, the NAMUR sensor is in
many cases too far away from sprocket.

Checks
NOTE: We suggest to switch an ammeter into sensor circuit. The following

measurement values are to be expected:
Tooth over sensor : i = 0.1...1.65 mA
In all other cases: i = 1.65...8 mA.
6.4 Check Using Material

No check or calibration using check weights can simulate the natural conditions to
perfection. A highly accurate scale can only be achieved with the aid of multiple
measurements with material and subsequent correction.
Correction is performed using Parameter P 09.01 "Range Correction".
Prerequisites
! Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally

clean.
! Material diverters do not divert any material.
! If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point,
have system feed material for approx. 30m minutes before starting check
measurement. Thus, the normal build-ups are formed on feed units.
! Dedustings are reduced to a minimum.
! Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial

scale have been cleaned and re-weighed before filling (tare weight).
Example:
The "Check Using Material" figure shows the operating principle of a check using
material.
Fig.: Check Using Material

Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is
fed. The material value MA displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P
09.01 "Range Correction" is computed using the following formula:
Parameter P 09.01 (new) = Parameter P 09.01 (old) * MW / MA
In our example, value is 0.98.
Enter new value into Parameter P 09.01 "Range Correction".

Checks
6.5 Test Plug

Most functional errors are reported by event message. If a measured value displayed
is obviously wrong, you can check measuring amplifier function with the aid of a
simple test plug (s. Test Plug figure). Using the test plug you can easily find out
whether the fault is with load cell, cabling, or electronics.
Fig.: Test Plug

Connecting test plug:
1. Wire plug as shown in drawing.
2. Turn off power.
3. Withdraw load cell connector X6.
4. Plug test plug into load cell connector X6 slot.
5. Turn on power.
If the stated resistors are used, the following service values result:
! Raw measurement value approx. 1.500000 mV/V.
! L/C utilization approx. 75% for 2mV/V load cell characteristic value.
! L/C utilization approx. 53% for 2.85mV/V load cell characteristic value.
If raw measurement value is in specified range, measuring amplifier operates free
from fault.
Measured load display depends on scale rated data.
Note: With other resistors R1 and R2, the following raw measured value results:
Raw measured value ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V]
If parameter default values are used, display reads approx. 90 kg/m.

Parameters
7 Parameters
This chapter discusses the parameters available with DISOCONT and presents a list
of event messages relating to the individual parameters.
7.1 General Information

Parameters are variable features or data used to adapt DISOCONT to the application.
There are two principal types of parameter:
! Selection parameters - for selection from multiple alternatives
o Select characteristic values (e.g. display unit, control behaviour)
o Select event classes (determine reaction on events)
o Select hardware configuration (source, unit, channel, level)
! Numeric parameters - for direct input of numeric values

Parameters can be changed during operation. However, parameters influencing
measuring result, e.g. display filters, must not be changed.
Default Values
All parameters are preset with default values which normally need not be changed.
You can recall default values using the "Load Default Parameters" function.
NOTE: For loading default values, see "Loading Default Parameters" item.
Identification
Parameters are organized by function group and identified as follows:
"Group number - parameter number", e.g. P01.02.
The system ID is a unique identification code used throughout the DISOCONT

system. It is used, for instance, in data transfer or for special service tasks.
Dependencies
There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values.
These dependencies are stated in the header of every single parameter description.

Parameters
Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operator Panel (control unit)
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
DI 4 Analog input with low resolution
W1 Warning 1 (acknowledgement required)
W2 Warning 2 (no acknowledgement required)
A Alarm
IG No event message but contact outputs
LC Load cell
LS Logical signal
VSE System unit
VEA Input/output unit
I Flow rate
Q Belt load
V Belt speed
EIO External I/O unit
Notes
Inputs/outputs
Number Description
1. Select source DI, DO ...,...
"--" means "not assigned", i.e. function is not
available.
2. Select unit VSE 1 ...
Display only shows units selected in Parameter
Block 1.
3. Select channel number DI 1 ...
4. Select signal level LOW or HIGH (N/C or N/O
contact)
Analog Input DI 4:
Low-resolution input designed to be used only for minor auxiliary signals.

Description Unit
Resolution: Max. 1000d
Galvanic isolation: None
Input: 0...10V
Across positive input, an internal voltage of +9V over 1 kilohm is available.

Parameters
Hardware Configuration
Upon parametrization of the hardware used, the source determines whether unit,
channel and level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies:
Possible hardware configurations:

Source Unit Channel Level
FB
OP
v
--
DI4
AI VEA1-VEA3
EIO AI1-AI4
AO VEA1-VEA3
VSE1-VSE3
EIO AO1-AO4
LC VSE1-VSE3
DI VEA1-VEA3 DI1-DI4 High, Low
VSE1-VSE3
EIO DI1-DI16
DO VEA1-VEA3 DO1-DO5 High, Low
VSE1-VSE3 DO1-DO4
EIO DO1-DO16
LS VEA1-VEA3 DI1-DI4 High, Low
DO1-DO5
VSE1-VSE3 DI1-DI4
DO1-DO4
EIO DI1-DI8
DO1-DO8
As you can see, with fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), are not assigned (--)
and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does not require additional specification for
unit, channel or level.
Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified.
Digital inputs (DI), outputs (DO) and logical signals (LS) require unit, channel and level
to be specified.
The external input/output unit readies 4 analog input and outputs, and 16 digital inputs
and outputs.
Extension card VEA 20101 offers the following additional inputs and outputs on VSE
1:
Analog output A02
Analog input AI1
Digital inputs DI5, DI6 and DI7
Digital outputs DO5, DO6 and DO7.

Parameters
Example:
Parameter P 03.02 determines the scale start source.
Description Source
P 03.02 Start FB
Alternatives OP, DI
On standard, the scale is connected via fieldbus (FB). Alternatively, you can select
control unit (OP) or a digital input (DI). If DI is desired, additionally specify active unit
with channel and level (see Possible Hardware Configurations table).
Event messages
The reaction on events can be parametrized using the event classes. As a rule, all
classes (Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2) and No Message (IG) can be
set. Therefore, the parameter default value suffices.
Example:
P 06.09 Power Down A Event WE 01
After power failure, event WE 01 is set as Alarm.

Parameters
7.2 Parameter List

This item includes a list of all DISOCONT parameters divided into functional
parameter blocks. Listed are number, name and the so-called Sys ID.
The latter is the DISOCONT internal ID number for the single parameters.
The following list applies to
VDB 20150-13 1155
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Sys ID
P 01.01 Com. Error OP IG 4218
P 01.02 VEA20100-Unit 1 YES 4208
P 01.03 VEA20100-Unit 2 NO 4209
P 01.04 VEA20100-Unit 3 NO 4210
P 01.05 VSE20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
P 01.06 VSE20100-Unit 3 NO 4212
P 01.07 Com. VEA20100-Unit 1 A 4213
P 01.08 Com. VEA20100-Unit 2 A 4214
P 01.09 Com. VEA20100-Unit 3 A 4215
P 01.10 Com. VSE20100-Unit 2 A 4216
P 01.11 Com. VSE20100-Unit 3 A 4217
P 01.12 External I/O NO 4219
P 01.13 Com. Ext. I/O A 4220
P 01.14 VEA 20101 NO 4221
P 01.15 Com. VEA 20101 A 4222
02 - Scale Definitions
P 02.01 Language DEUTSCH 4224
P 02.02 Units SI 4225
P 02.03 Nominal Flow Rate Io 10000.0 kg/h 4226
P 02.04 Nominal Speed 0.1000 m/s 4227
P 02.05 Display Formats STANDARD 4228
P 02.06 Flow Rate Units ------ kg/h 4229
P 02.07 Counter 1 Unit ------- kg 4230
P 02.08 Pulse Length Total 0.050 s 4231
P 02.09 Counter 2 Unit ----.-- t 4232
P 02.10 Counter 3 Unit -----.- t 4233

Parameters
P 02.11 Hot-Key F7 Reset Totalizer 4238

P 02.12 Upper Limit Trend 100.00 % 4235
P 02.13 Lower Limit Trend 0.00 % 4234
P 02.14 Trend Period 1.00 h 4236
P 02.15 Trend Value I 4237
P 02.16 DO Pulse Counter -- 4239
P 02.17 Pulse Weighting 0.00 kg 4254
03 - Control Sources
P 03.01 Control Sources STANDARD 4240
P 03.02 Scale Start FB 4241
P 03.03 Absolute Setpoint FB 4242
P 03.04 Setpoint Range 20.00 mA 4243
P 03.05 Setpoint Offset 4.00 mA 4244
P 03.06 Release -- 4245
P 03.07 Event No Release W2 4246
P 03.08 Relative Setpoint -- 6233
P 03.09 Difference Flow Rate -- 4248
P 03.10 Diff.Flow Rate Range 20.00 mA 4249
P 03.11 Diff. Flow Rate Off. 4.00 mA 4250
P 03.12 Difference Function NO 4251
P 03.13 Rel.Setp. Range 20.00 mA 6240
P 03.14 Rel. Setp. Offset 4.00 mA 6241
04 - Scale Rated Data

P 04.01 vs Charact. Val. 10000.0 I/m 4256
P 04.02 LC Charac. Value 2.0000 mV/V 4257
P 04.03 LC Rated Cap. 60.000 kg 4258
P 04.04 Eff. Platf.Length 0.500 m 4259
P 04.05 Lever Ratio 1.0000 4260
P 04.06 Angle 0.00 degr. 4261
P 04.07 Speed Measurement DI 4262
P 04.08 Belt Load Measurem. LC 4263

Parameters
05 - Scale Controlling
P 05.01 Volum. Start-Up 0.00 % length 4272
P 05.02 Volum. Clearance 0.00 % length 4273
P 05.03 Afterfl.Totalizer 3.0 s 4274
P 05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P 05.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit 1.00 % Q 4680
P 05.06 Start-Up Mode % length 4276
P 05.07 DO Scraper -- 4277
P 05.08 Pulse Length Scraper 0.25 h 4278
P 05.09 Pulse Pause Scraper 6.00 h 4279
06 - Scale Monitoring
P 06.01 Scale Monitoring STANDARD 4288
P 06.02 Stand-By Event W2 4289
P 06.03 Stand-By Limit Value 2 % Io 4290
P 06.04 Tacho Event A 4291
P 06.05 Error LC Input A 4293
P 06.06 LC Input < MIN A 4294
P 06.07 LC Input > MAX A 4295
P 06.08 Setpoint Limited W1 4296
P 06.09 Power Failure A 4297
P 06.10 Time Deviation 20.0 s 4298
P 06.11 Threshold Deviation 5.0 % 4299
P 06.12 Factor Deviation 1.0 4320
P 06.13 Event Deviation A 4300
P 06.14 Controller Limited W2 4301
P 06.15 Memory Error A 4302
P 06.16 License Violation A 4303
P 06.17 Password 10000 4292
P 06.18 Source Emerg. Setp. -- 4930
P 06.19 Emergency Setpoint 0.0 kg/h 4931
P 06.20 Analog Input< Offset A 5418

Parameters
07 - Display Filters
P 07.01 Display Filters STANDARD 4327
P 07.02 LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
P 07.03 I-Display 3.0 s 4328
P 07.04 I-Analog Output 3.0 s 4329
P 07.05 I-Serial Output 3.0 s 4330
P 07.06 Belt Load 3.0 s 4331
P 07.07 Belt Speed 3.0 s 4332
P 07.08 Deviation 3.0 s 4333
08 - Limit Values
P 08.01 Limit Values STANDARD 4336
P 08.02 Value for I-Min 5.0 % Io 4337
P 08.03 Event Class I-Min W1 4338
P 08.04 Value for I-Max 120.0 % Io 4339
P 08.05 Event Class I-Max W1 4340
P 08.06 Value for Q-Min 60.0 % Q 4341
P 08.07 Event Class Q-Min W1 4342
P 08.08 Value for Q-Max 120.0 % Q 4343
P 08.09 Event Class Q-Max W1 4344
P 08.10 Value for V-Min 5.0 % V 4345
P 08.11 Event Class V-Min W1 4346
P 08.12 Value for V-Max 120.0 % V 4347
P 08.13 Event Class V-Max W1 4348
09 - Calibration Data
P 09.01 Range Correction 1.0000 4352
P 09.02 Belt Circuit Time 30.0 s 4353
P 09.03 Eff. Check Weight 10.000 kg 4354
P 09.04 Basic Tare 0.00 kg/m 4355
P 09.05 Tare Correction 0.00 kg/m 4356
P 09.06 Belt Circuit No. 1000000 I/U 4357

Parameters
10 - Controller
P 10.01 Optim. Controller STANDARD 4368
P 10.02 P-Component KP 0.02000 mA/% 4369
P 10.03 I-Component TN 1.0 s 4370
P 10.04 Lower Limit 0.00 mA 4371
P 10.05 Upper Limit 20.00 mA 4372
P 10.06 Contr. Magn. Offset 0.00 mA 4373
P 10.07 Position at STOP 0 4374
P 10.08 Bypass 0.00 mA 4375
P 10.09 Store NO 4376
P 10.10 Volumetric Mode Qconst 4377
P 10.11 Setp. Filter 1st Ord 0.0 s 4378
P 10.12 Setp. Filter 2nd Ord 0.0 s 4379
P 10.13 Set/Act Comparison W-X 4380
P 10.14 Set/Act Sources I 4381
P 10.15 Adaptation 1 NO 4382
P 10.16 Adaptation 2 NO 4383
11 - Analog Outputs
P 11.01 Analog Outputs STANDARD 4384
P 11.02 Setpoint -- 4385
P 11.03 Setpoint Offset 4.00 mA 4386
P 11.04 Setpoint Range 20.00 mA 4387
P 11.05 Actual Flow Rate -- 4388
P 11.06 Flow Rate Offset 4.00 mA 4389
P 11.07 Flow Rate Range 20.00 mA 4390
P 11.08 Belt Load -- 4391
P 11.09 Belt Load Offset 4.00 mA 4392
P 11.10 Belt Load Range 20.00 mA 4393
P 11.11 Speed -- 4394
P 11.12 Speed Offset 4.00 mA 4395
P 11.13 Speed Range 20.00 mA 4396
P 11.14 Deviation -- 4397
P 11.15 Deviation Offset 4.00 mA 4398
P 11.16 Deviation Range 20.00 mA 4399
P 11.17 Controller Magnit. Y AO 4400

Parameters
12 - Digital Inputs
P 12.01 Digital Inputs STANDARD 4416
P 12.02 Error Ext. Event 1 A 4417
P 12.03 DI Ext. Event 1 DI 4418
P 12.04 Error Ext. Event 2 A 4430
P 12.05 DI Ext. Event 2 -- 4431
P 12.06 DI Acknowl. Events -- 4419
P 12.07 DI Local Mode DI 4420
P 12.08 DI Volumetric ON -- 4421
P 12.09 Belt Limit Switch -- 4422
P 12.10 Event Limit Switch IG 4423
P 12.11 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI3 A 4424
P 12.12 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI4 A 4425
P 12.13 NAMUR Error VSE2-DI3 IG 4426
P 12.17 Error Ext. Event 3 IG 4730
P 12.18 DI Ext. Event 3 -- 4731
P 12.19 Error Ext. Event 4 IG 4732
P 12.20 DI Ext. Event 4 -- 4733
P 12.21 DI Volum. Sync. ON -- 4941
P 12.22 DI:Reset Totalizer 1 -- 5414
P 12.23 DI:Reset Totalizer 2 -- 5415
P 12.24 DI Zero Set -- 4255
13 - Digital Outputs
P 13.01 Digital Outputs STANDARD 4432
P 13.02 DO Scale Start DO 4433
P 13.03 DO Scale Started -- 4434
P 13.04 DO Start Prefeeder DO 4435
P 13.05 DO ALARM -- 4436
P 13.06 DO Deviation -- 4437
P 13.07 DO I-MIN -- 4438
P 13.08 DO I-MAX -- 4439

Parameters
P 13.09 DO Q-MIN -- 4440

P 13.10 DO Q-MAX -- 4441
P 13.11 DO v-MIN -- 4442
P 13.12 DO v-MAX -- 4443
P 13.13 DO Volumetric Mode -- 4444
P 13.14 DO Local Mode -- 4445
P 13.15 DO WARNING -- 4759
P 13.16 DO Keyboard Mode -- 4462
P 13.17 DO Zero Set OK -- 4463
14 - Batch Mode
P 14.01 Batch Mode NO 4448
P 14.02 Batch Setp. Source OP 4449
P 14.03 Adaptation Time 3s 4450
P 14.04 Correction Amount 0.000 kg 4451
P 14.05 Adaptation Factor 0.5 4452
P 14.06 Automatic Printing NO 4453
P 14.07 DI Batch Terminate -- 4454
P 14.08 DO Batch Running -- 4455
P 14.09 DO Dribble Feed -- 4456
P 14.10 DO Full Feed -- 4457
P 14.11 Analog Setp. Relat. 1000.0 kg 4936
P 14.12 Batch Setp. Range 20.00 mA 4937
P 14.13 Batch Setp. Offset 4.00 mA 4938
P 14.14 Batch Tolerance 100000.000 kg 4458
P 14.15 Out of Tolerance W2 4459
P 14.16 Pre-cut-off Amount 0.000 kg 4460
P 14.17 DO Pre-cut-off -- 4461
15 - Process Control
P 15.01 Process Control STANDARD 4464
P 15.02 Maintenance Elec. 3000 h 4465
P 15.03 Event Maint. EL. IG 4466
P 15.04 Maint. Scale Run. 3000 h 4467
P 15.05 Ev.Maint Scale Run. IG 4468

Parameters
16 - VAP
P 16.01 VAP Active NO 4480
P 16.02 Platf.Dis.Length 0.00 % length 4482
17 - Scale Monitoring
P 17.01 Belt Sensor Active NO 4496
P 17.02 Source Belt Sensor DI 4497
P 17.03 BIC Active NO 4498
P 17.04 Sensor Length 8.20 cm 4500
P 17.05 Sensor Width 12.00 cm 4501
P 17.06 Sensor Offset 0.00 cm 4502
P 17.07 Belt Drift 3.00 cm 4503
P 17.08 Belt Drift Event W1 4504
P 17.09 Belt Skew 4.00 cm 4505
P 17.10 Belt Skew Event A 4506
P 17.11 Slip Value 2.00 % length 4507
P 17.12 Slip Event W1 4508
P 17.13 Belt Drift DO -- 4509
P 17.14 Belt Skew DO -- 4510
P 17.15 Slip DO -- 4511
18 - Printer
P 18.01 Baud Rate 9600 4512
P 18.02 Page Length 72 4513
P 18.03 Print Event NO 4514

Parameters
19 - Comm. EasyServe
P 19.01 Own Address 1 4520
P 19.02 Baud Rate 9600 4521
P 19.03 Diagnosis 0 4522
P 19.04 Flag 1 0 5444
P 19.05 Flag 2 0 5445
P 19.06 Format Data 8-O-1 4523
P 19.07 Connection Serial 4526
P 19.08 Modbus Idle Time 4 ms 4527
20 - Comm. Fieldbus
P 20.01 Protocol Type NO 4528
P 20.02 Timeout Host 10 s 4529
P 20.03 Comm. Error Host IG 4530
P 20.04 Modbus Address 1 4531
P 20.05 Modbus Diagnosis 0 4532
P 20.06 Resolution 4096 4533
P 20.07 Word Sequence IEEE:std / LONG:std 4534
P 20.08 Modbus Baud Rate 19200 4535
P 20.09 Modbus Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P 20.10 S5 Diagnosis 0 4536
P 20.11 S5 Float Format SIEMENS-KG 4537
P 20.12 S5 Baud Rate 9600 4538
P 20.13 S5 Data Format 8-E-1 4657
P 20.14 PB-DP Address 10 4539
P 20.15 PB-DP-FLOAT Format IEEE 4540
P 20.16 PB-DP Parameter NO 4658
P 20.17 PB-DP-ID Count 6 4659
P 20.18 DVN Address 63 4541
P 20.19 DVN Baud Rate 125K 4542
P 20.20 SE-Bus Address 33 4543
P 20.21 IB-FLOAT Format SIEMENS-KG 4686
P 20.22 IB-Effective Data NO PARAM / 2 ID 4685
P 20.23 PB-DP-Set-Val Count 2 Preset IDs 4734
P 20.24 DVN-Parameter NO 4780
P 20.25 DVN-ID Count 6 4779

Parameters
P 20.26 DVN-Set-Val Count 2 Preset IDs 4781

P 20.27 Byte Sequence Low - High 4924
P 20.29 WEB Coding XML 6228
P 20.30 DHCP NO 6229
P 20.31 IP Address 1 192 6216
P 20.32 IP Address 2 168 6217
P 20.33 IP Address 3 240 6218
P 20.34 IP Address 4 1 6219
P 20.35 Net Mask 1 255 6220
P 20.36 Net Mask 2 255 6221
P 20.37 Net Mask 3 255 6222
P 20.38 Net Mask 4 0 6223
P 20.39 Gateway 1 0 6224
P 20.40 Gateway 2 0 6225
P 20.41 Gateway 3 0 6226
P 20.42 Gateway 4 0 6227
P 20.43 Byte Sequence High - Low 6231
P 20.45 Configuration FIXED 6230
P 20.46 T-Mode with Comm-Obs YES 6234
21 - PLS Outputs
P 21.01 PLS Binary OUT 1 -- 4662
P 21.09 PLS Analog OUT 1 -- 4670
P 21.10 PLS Analog OUT 2 -- 4671

Parameters
22 - Belt Load Controller

P 22.01 Belt Load Controller NO 4544
P 22.02 Contr. Magn. Adapt. 10.0000 mA 4545
P 22.03 Blind Distance 5.00 m 4546
P 22.04 Offset 0.00 mA 4547
P 22.06 Upper Limit 20.00 mA 4549
P 22.07 Position at STOP 0 4550
P 22.08 Store NO 4551
P 22.09 Contr.Mag. Prefeeder -- 4552
P 22.10 Pulse Length 1.0 s 4553
P 22.11 S: P-Component 0.5000 s/mA 4687
P 22.12 S: I-Component 3.0 s 4688
P 22.13 S: Threshold Resp. 0.00 % 4689
P 22.14 S: DO Open Flow Gate -- 4702
P 22.15 S: DO Close Flow G. -- 4703
23 - Interlocking
P 23.01 DI Error Mechanics 1 -- 4760
P 23.06 DI Error Electr. 1 -- 4765
P 23.09 DO Error Mechanics -- 4768
P 23.10 Error Mechanics W1 4769
P 23.11 DO Error Electricity -- 4770
P 23.12 Error Electricity W1 4771
P 23.13 DO Error Mechatr. 1 -- 4772
P 23.14 DO Error Mechatr. 2 -- 4773
P 23.15 Error Mechatronics W1 4774
P 23.16 DO Ready -- 4775
P 23.17 Not Ready W1 4776
P 23.18 DO Ready for Start -- 4777

Parameters
P 23.19 Not Ready for Start W1 4778

P 23.20 LS_1 AND-Gate 1 -- 5376
P 23.21 LS_2 AND-Gate 1 -- 5377
P 23.22 Error AND-Gate 1 W1 5378
P 23.23 LS_1 AND-Gate 2 -- 5379
P 23.24 LS_2 AND-Gate 2 -- 5380
P 23.25 Error AND-Gate 2 W1 5381
P 23.26 DO: AND-Gate 1 -- 5416
P 23.27 DO: AND-Gate 2 -- 5417
P 23.28 LS TIME-Gate 1 -- 5520
P 23.29 Delay TIME Gate 1 0.0 s 5521
P 23.30 Pulse TIME Gate 1 10.0 s 5522
P 23.31 Active at OFF:TIME 1 YES 5523
P 23.32 DO: TIME Gate 1 -- 5524
P 23.33 LS TIME-Gate 2 -- 5525
P 23.34 Delay TIME Gate 2 0.0 s 5526
P 23.35 Pulse TIME Gate 2 10.0 s 5527
P 23.36 Active at OFF:TIME 2 YES 5528
P 23.37 DO: TIME Gate 2 -- 5529
24 - Bin Weigher
P 24.01 Bin Weigher Active NO 4704
P 24.02 Load Measurement -- 4705
P 24.04 LC Rated Cap. 1000.000 kg 4707
P 24.05 LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
P 24.06 Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
P 24.07 Error LC Input W1 4709
P 24.08 LC Input > MAX W1 4710
P 24.09 Nominal Bin Load 100.0 % LC 4711
P 24.10 Display Format ---.--- t 4672
P 24.11 Display Filter 3.0 s 4713
P 24.12 Control Level MIN 60.0 % 4714
P 24.13 Control Level MAX 70.0 % 4715
P 24.14 DO Bin Filling -- 4716
P 24.15 Bin Level MIN 5.0 % 4717
P 24.16 Event Bin Level MIN W1 4718

Parameters
P 24.17 DO Bin Level MIN -- 4719

P 24.18 Bin Level MAX 120.0 % 4720
P 24.19 Event Bin Level MAX W1 4721
P 24.20 DO Bin Level MAX -- 4722
P 24.21 AO Bin Load -- 4723
P 24.22 AO Offset 4.00 mA 4724
P 24.23 AO Range 20.00 mA 4725
P 24.25 Tare 0.000 kg 4727
P 24.26 Eff. Check Weight 10.00 kg 4728
P 24.27 Control. in OFF-Mode YES 4755
P 24.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor -- 5401
P 24.29 Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
25 - Bin Level Controller

P 25.01 Bin Controller ON NO 4735
P 25.02 Filling Type YES 4736
P 25.03 A0 Contr. Magn. -- 4738
P 25.04 D0 Scale ON -- 4758
P 25.05 Setpoint Bin Level 0.00 kg 4757
P 25.06 Scale Constant 0.0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
P 25.07 Dead Time TT 3.0 s 4742
P 25.08 P-Component KP 0.00000 mA/kg 4739
P 25.10 D Portion TV 0.0 s 4747
P 25.11 D Filter TD 0.0 s 4748
P 25.12 Bypass 10.00 mA 4743
P 25.13 Bypass D Portion 0.0 s 4749
P 25.14 Contr. Magn. Offset 0.00 mA 4744
P 25.16 Upper Limit 20.00 mA 4746
P 25.17 Dead Band Deviation 0.0 kg 4750
P 25.18 Dead Band Factor 0.0 4751
P 25.19 Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752
P 25.20 Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
P 25.21 DI Init. Controller -- 4754
P 25.22 Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476

Parameters
26 - 2nd Weighbridge
P 26.01 2.Weighbridge active NO 4905
P 26.02 2nd Weighbridge -- 4906
P 26.04 LC Rated Cap. 200.000 kg 4908
P 26.05 Eff. Platf.Length 0.180 m 4909
P 26.06 LC Filter 0.25 s 4910
P 26.07 Error LC Input W1 4911
P 26.08 2nd Bridge MIN 5.0 % 4912
P 26.09 Event 2nd Bridge MIN W2 4913
P 26.10 DO 2nd Bridge MIN -- 4914
P 26.11 2nd Bridge MAX 150.0 % 4915
P 26.12 Event 2nd Bridge MAX W2 4916
P 26.13 DO 2nd Bridge MAX -- 4917
P 26.15 Tare 0.00 kg/m 4919
P 26.16 Controller active NO 4920
P 26.17 P-Component KP 0.500 4921
P 26.19 Analog Output 2nd Br -- 5383
P 26.20 2nd Bridge Offset 4.00 mA 5384
P 26.21 2nd Bridge Range 20.00 mA 5385
27 - Check System
P 27.01 Type of Check System NO 4861
P 27.02 Auto Correction NO 4903
P 27.03 Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
P 27.04 Cycle Time 0.50 h 4863
P 27.05 Print Check Result NO 4886
P 27.06 Release Check System -- 4864
P 27.07 No Check Release W2 4884
P 27.08 Start Span Corr OP 4865
P 27.09 Start Tare Corr OP 4866
P 27.10 Accept Correction OP 4867
P 27.11 Finish Check Meas. OP 4868

Parameters
P 27.12 Circuits or Quantity Quantity 4869

P 27.13 Check Circuits 0.0 4870
P 27.14 Check Quantity 0.0 kg 4871
P 27.15 Storage Quantity 500.0 kg 4872
P 27.16 Min. Check Quantity 0.0 kg 4873
P 27.17 Min. Check Quantity W1 4874
P 27.18 Min. Fill Weight 0.0 kg 4875
P 27.19 Min. Fill Weight W1 4876
P 27.20 Max. Fill Weight 1000.0 kg 4877
P 27.21 Max. Fill Weight W1 4878
P 27.22 Damping Time 3.0 s 4879
P 27.23 Blind Distance 0.0 % 4880
P 27.24 DO: Control Started -- 4881
P 27.25 Scale Stopped -- 4882
P 27.26 Scale Not Stopped W1 4883
P 27.27 Prepare Check Meas. W2 4885
P 27.28 DO:Check Meas Active -- 4887
P 27.29 Expect Acceptance W2 4888
P 27.30 DO:Expect Acceptance -- 4889
P 27.31 Absolute Range 10.0 % 4890
P 27.32 Relative Range 3.0 % 4891
P 27.33 Abs.Tare Corr. Error W1 4892
P 27.34 Rel.Tare Corr. Error W1 4893
P 27.35 Abs.Span Corr. Error W1 4894
P 27.36 Rel.Span Corr. Error W1 4895
P 27.37 Corr. Evaluation 1.000 4896
P 27.38 Correction Speed 0.0 s 4897
P 27.39 AO:Check Meas Result -- 4898
P 27.40 DO: Check Gate -- 4899
P 27.41 Check Gate Feedback -- 4900
P 27.42 Check Gate Time 0s 4901
P 27.43 Check Gate Error W1 4902
P 27.44 Max. Bin Error 0.0 % 4946
P 27.45 Event Bin Error W1 4947
P 27.46 DO: Correction Error -- 4904

Parameters
28 - Moisture
P 28.01 Moisture Active NO 5386
P 28.02 Moisture Select -- 5399
P 28.03 Moisture Measurement -- 5387
P 28.04 Nominal Moisture 20.00 % 5388
P 28.05 Moisture Offset 4.00 mA 5389
P 28.06 Moisture Range 20.00 mA 5390
P 28.07 DO Moisture active -- 5400
P 28.08 Moisture MAX 10.00 % 5391
P 28.09 DO Moisture MAX -- 5392
P 28.10 Event Moisture MAX W1 5393
P 28.11 AO Flow Rate corr. -- 5394
P 28.12 AO Flow Rate Offset 4.00 mA 5395
P 28.13 AO Flow Rate Range 20.00 mA 5396
P 28.14 Pulse Counter corr. NO 5397
29 - Dead Time
P 29.01 Dead Time Active NO 5403
P 29.02 Dead Time 0.00 s 5404
P 29.03 Setpoint Select -- 5405
P 29.04 Setpoint Clock ON -- 5406
P 29.05 ON/OFF Select -- 5407
P 29.06 ON/OFF Clock ON -- 5408
P 29.07 Time Elem. Preassign -- 5409
P 29.08 Time Elements Init. -- 5410
P 29.09 DO Dead Time Active -- 5411
P 29.10 DO Setpoint Active -- 5412
P 29.11 DO ON/OFF Active -- 5413
30 - Linearization
P 30.01 Linearization ON NO 4577
P 30.02 Lin. S1 25.00 % Q 4681
P 30.03 Lin. I1 25.00 % Q 4579
P 30.04 Lin. S2 50.00 % Q 4682
P 30.05 Lin. I2 50.00 % Q 4581

Parameters
P 30.06 Lin. S3 75.00 % Q 4683

P 30.07 Lin. I3 75.00 % Q 4583
P 30.08 Lin. S4 100.00 % Q 4684
P 30.09 Lin. I4 100.00 % Q 4585
P 30.10 Lineariz. Error W2 4586
31 - Flow Gate
P 31.01 AI Pos.Flow Gate -- 4691
P 31.02 AI Offset 4.00 mA 4692
P 31.03 AI Range 20.00 mA 4693
P 31.04 AO Pos. Flow Gate -- 4694
P 31.05 AO Offset 4.00 mA 4695
P 31.06 AO Range 20.00 mA 4696
P 31.07 Err. MIN Flow Gate W2 4697
P 31.08 Pos. MIN Flow Gate -- 4698
P 31.09 Err. MAX Flow Gate W2 4699
P 31.10 Pos. MAX Flow Gate -- 4700
32 - 2-Sensor Slip
P 32.01 2-Sensor Slip act. NO 5433
P 32.02 Source Sensor 1 Speed 5434
P 32.03 DI Sensor 1 -- 5435
P 32.04 Char. Value Sensor 1 100.00 I/m 5436
P 32.05 DI Sensor 2 -- 5437
P 32.06 Char. Value Sensor 2 100.00 I/m 5438
P 32.07 Slip Value 2 2.00 % length 5439
P 32.08 Slip Error 2 W1 5440
P 32.09 DO Slip 2 -- 5443

Parameters
7.3 Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules

A DISOCONT system can comprise maximum 3 VSE system units, 3 VEA
input/output units, 1 EIO external input/output unit and 1 OP control unit. For servicing,
a PC with the EasyServe program can be connected. Except EasyServe, all units
involved must be logged in using Parameter P01.02.... Non-logged in units are
inoperable and the EasyServe and control unit parametrization and control functions
are not available either. With units actively involved in closed- and open-loop control,
communication error messages P01.07... must be set to Alarm.
P 01.01 Com. Error OP Default: IG

Event Group: SY Number: 07
Cause of Event:
Error in communication with DISOCONT control unit.
Serial communication interrupted for more than 10s.
Action: Check cable connections.
P 01.02 VEA20100-Unit 1 Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Disocont Input/Output Unit 1
P 01.03 VEA20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
P 01.04 VEA20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
P 01.05 VSE20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
P 01.06 VSE20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES

Parameters
P 01.07 Com. VEA20100-Unit 1 Default: A

Cause of Event:
Error in communication with DISOCONT input/output unit 1 (VEA1).
Action: Check cabling .
Must be set to Alarm if VEA1 actively intervenes in control loop.

Cause of Event:
Achtion: Check cabling .

Cause of Event:
Action: Check cabling.
P 01.10 Com. VSE20100-Unit 2 Default: A

Cause of Event:
Error in communication with DISOCONT system unit 2 (VSE2).
Must be set to Alarm if VSE2 actively intervenes in control loop.
P 01.11 Com. VSE20100-Unit 3 Default: A

Cause of Event:
P 01.12 External I/O Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
External I/O expansion (EIO) for additional digital and analog inputs/outputs

Parameters
P 01.13 Com. Ext. I/O Default: A

Cause of Event:
Error in communication with DISOCONT External I/O (EIO).
P 01.14 VEA 20101 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
To equip VSE base card with additional I/O, extension card VEA 20101 is available.
Plugged on the base card fieldbus connector, the extension card offers the following
additional inputs/outputs on VSE 1:
Analog output A02
Analog input AI1
Digital inputs DI5, DI6 and DI7
Digital outputs DO5, DO6 and DO7
Output DO7 can also be used for pulse output.
NOTE:
After start-up, plugged-on card is automatically identified and activated.
P 01.15 Com. VEA 20101 Default: A

Cause of Event:
Error in communication with extension card VEA 20101.

Parameters
7.4 Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions

P 02.01 Language Default: DEUTSCH
Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Select DISOCONT dialog langue. OTHERS let you use your own texts that can be
created using EasyServe.
P 02.02 Units Default: SI

Alternative: SI
NON-SI
Change over displays and parameter inputs from SI units to the American metric
system (NON-SI). Numerical values entered are automatically converted.
The table below shows the conversion from one unit system into the other:
NON-SI unit SI-unit Conversion
pound lb Kilogramm kg 1 lb = 0.453593 kg
ton t Tonne t 1 t = 0.907185 t = 2000 lb
feet f Meter m 1 f = 0.3048 m
inch " Millimeter mm 1" = 25.4 mm
This table equally applies to combined units, e.g. kg/hr.
P 02.03 Nominal Flow Rate Io Default: 10000.0 kg/h

Min: 0.0 kg/h Max: 220000000.0 kg/h
Nominal flow rate is the scale characteristic value used as reference for limit values
and service displays.
P 02.04 Nominal Speed Default: 0.1000 m/s

Min: 0.0010 m/s Max: 50.0000 m/s
Serving as reference value for limit value monitoring, nominal speed determines
nominal belt load together with nominal feed rate.
Value should be accurate to some percent.
P 02.05 Display Formats Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Determine whether standard or user specific display formats are to be used. Preset
standard display formats are matched to scale depending on nominal flow rate .
Normally, display formats suit the practical application.

Parameters
P 02.06 Flow Rate Units Default: ------ kg/h

Only available if Parameter: 02.05 = SELECTABLE
Alternative: ------ kg/h
----.- kg/h
---.-- kg/h
--.--- kg/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- kg/min
Lets you display format of flow rate actual value and setpoint.
P 02.07 Counter 1 Unit Default: ------- kg

Alternative: ------- kg
-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 1 and pulse weighting for external counter.
P 02.08 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.050 s

Min: 0.000 s Max: 10.000 s
External totalizing counter output pulse duration (VEA 1).

Pulse weighting corresponds to the Counter 1 smallest display digit.
If pulse duration is smaller than 10 ms, pulse output is blocked. All pulses not yet
output are reset.
At nominal flow rate, output frequency f is:
Pnom = Nominal flow rate in kg/hr or t/hr

Zmin = Counter 1 smallest display digit in kg or t
If an external counter is connected, output frequency has to be smaller than or equal
to 10 Hz.

Parameters
P 02.09 Counter 2 Unit Default: ----.-- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Counter 2 display format.
P 02.10 Counter 3 Unit Default: -----.- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Counter 3 display format.
P 02.11 Hot-Key F7 Default: Reset Totalizer

Alternative: Reset Totalizer
Display Events
Print Totalizer
Volum / Grav
Volum-Syn / Grav
Abort / Print Batch
Key F7 on control unit VLB can be assigned with different functions:

Reset Totalizer:
Reset totalizing counter readings.
Display Events:
Display event list (scroll using cursor keys).
Print Totalizer:
Print out batch report.
Volum./Grav.:
Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric mode, and vice versa.
Volum-Syn./Grav:
Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric Synchronous mode, and vice versa.
Abort/Print Batch:
Abort batch, print batch report.
Print command is effective only after completion of batch.

Parameters
P 02.12 Upper Limit Trend Default: 100.00 %

Min: -200.00 % Max: 200.00 %
The trend is a graphical representation of measuring results over the time displayed
on control unit VLB.
The resolution is 50 * 100 pixels (value, time).
See Operating Functions chapter, Trend item.
P 02.13 Lower Limit Trend Default: 0.00 %

Min: -200.00 % Max: 200.00 %
P 02.14 Trend Period Default: 1.00 h

Min: 0.19 h Max: 100.00 h
P 02.15 Trend Value Default: I

Alternative: I
Q
W
B
Xd
2.Br.
Feuchte/Moisture
I corr.
I:
Feed rate
Q:
Belt load
W:
Setpoint
B:
Bin level
Xd:
Deviation
2. Br:
Load on second weighbridge
Feuchte/Moisture:
Moisture measurement value
Icorr:
Feed rate, moisture corrected

Parameters
P 02.16 DO Pulse Counter Default: --

Alternative: DO
Totalizing counter 1 pulse output can alternatively be output via digital output.
Default value "---" uses the pulse output on VEA 1. The "DO" alternative uses the
configured output.
Pulse time is determined by Parameter P02.08 now as before. Values below 10ms
totally block output, and values up to 1 second are set to "High" for 1 second.
P 02.17 Pulse Weighting Default: 0.00 kg

Min: 0.00 kg Max: 100000.00 kg
Lets you select output pulse weighting at will.

With default value " 0.00 kg", weighting corresponds to the smallest display digit of
counter 1 (see Parameter P02.07).
7.5 Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources

P 03.01 Control Sources Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Determine whether default or user specific parameter values are to be used for control
source configuration.
P 03.02 Scale Start Default: FB

Alternative: OP
DI
Determine scale start source.

The digital input operates edge-controlled, i.e. if scale shuts down after alarm, reset
Start signal.
P 03.03 Absolute Setpoint Default: FB

Alternative: OP
AI
DI4
Determine setpoint source.

Parameters
P 03.04 Setpoint Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Maximum input current for 100% analog setpoint. The range and elevation parameters
are effective only if Parameter P03.03 "Absolute Setpoint" is set to A1 or DI4.
P 03.05 Setpoint Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Elevates input current for 0% nominal feed rate setpoint. Active only if Parameter P
03.03 "Setpoint" is set to AI or DI4.
P 03.06 Release Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
Determines system responsible for scale release.

Setting "--" means that no release is required.
P 03.07 Event No Release Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
Cause of Event:
No release signal from source defined by Parameter "Release".
P 03.08 Relative Setpoint Default: --

Alternative: OP
AI
DI4
Lets you evaluate absolute setpoints from fieldbus (FB) or analog input (AI, or DI4)
relatively.
Example:
OP :
Percental setpoint from VLB
AI, DI4:
Percental setpoint via analog input or DI4. For normalization, use Parameters P03.13
"Rel.Setp. Range" and P03.14 "Rel.Setp.Elevation".
Attention:
Only absolute setpoints from external source can be evaluated relatively. If Keyboard
Mode or OP are selected for absolute setpoint, absolute setpoint from keyboard is
active directly.

Parameters
P 03.09 Difference Flow Rate Default: --

Alternative: FB
AI
DI4
For explanation, see Parameter P 03.12.
P 03.10 Diff.Flow Rate Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Maximum input current for 100% flow rate (Parameter P 03.09 set to AI or DI4).
P 03.11 Diff. Flow Rate Off. Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Input current for 0% flow rate.
P 03.12 Difference Function Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Control
Display
Control + Display
Using input "P 03.09" an additional feed rate value can be entered into system.
NO:
Value is ineffective for control, display and totalization.
Control:
Value can be subtracted from measured feed rate and used for control. Measured
feed rate is displayed and counted.
Display:
Value can be subtracted from measured feed rate and displayed. Control uses
measured feed rate.
Control + Display:
Display and control use the difference between actual value measured and actual
value difference.
P 03.13 Rel.Setp. Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
P 03.14 Rel. Setp. Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA

Parameters
7.6 Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data

P 04.01 vs Charact. Val. Default: 10000.0 I/m
Min: 1.0 I/m Max: 1000000.0 I/m
vs-characteristic value is defined as number of speed transducer pulses per belt

length meter.
If no tachometer is active, do not change vs- characteristic value. This would change
setting programs run time.
P 04.02 LC Charac. Value Default: 2.0000 mV/V

Min: 0.0100 mV/V Max: 10.0000 mV/V
Load cell characteristic value (transmission factor).
P 04.03 LC Rated Cap. Default: 60.000 kg

Min: 0.500 kg Max: 220000000.000 kg
Total of load cells rated capacities.
P 04.04 Eff. Platf.Length Default: 0.500 m

Min: 0.100 m Max: 50.000 m
Effective platform length
P 04.05 Lever Ratio Default: 1.0000

Min: 0.0100 Max: 2.0000
Lever ratio between load cell and force transducing weighed idler.
Lever ratio = load cell load / platform load
P 04.06 Angle Default: 0.00 degr.

Min: 0.00 degr. Max: 60.00 degr.
Inclination of scale longitudinal axis if load cell is mounted vertical to belt.
P 04.07 Speed Measurement Default: DI VSE1.DI3 High

Alternative: --
Determine device configuration for speed acquisition. Only DI3 can be used on VSE1.
If the "--" alternative is selected, speed acquisition is inactive. Nominal speed P 02.04
is internally active.
With weighfeeders, the alternative is useful only for testing.

Parameters
P 04.08 Belt Load Measurem. Default: LC VSE1

Alternative: --
Belt load measurement device configuration.

With the "--" alternative, belt load measurement is inactive. Internally, nominal belt
load P(Nenn)/v(Nenn) is active.
This possibility is useful only for special cases.
7.7 Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling

P 05.01 Volum. Start-Up Default: 0.00 % length
Min: 0.00 % length Max: 200.00 % length
Volumetric start-up cycle after start of scale, before start of Gravimetric (controlled)
mode.
Display feature "VOL -->" in first text line.
Input is in % of belt length.
P 05.02 Volum. Clearance Default: 0.00 % length

Volumetric clearance cycle after scale stop. Prefeeder immediately cuts off. After set
number of belt circuits, belt stops.
Change over from Gravimetric to Volumetric mode takes place smoothly.
Display feature "VOL-->" in first text line.
P 05.03 Afterfl.Totalizer Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 2000.0 s
During this period of time, after scale stop, the amount fed out is still acquired.
P 05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
If belt load falls below the value set by Parameter P05.05, measurement value is set
to 0. Feed rate and totalized amount are no longer acquired.
Zero Drop Out is useful only with feed-controlled belt weighers, not with weighfeeders.
P 05.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1.00 % Q

Min: 0.00 % Q Max: 10.00 % Q

Parameters
P 05.06 Start-Up Mode Default: % length

Alternative: Q MIN
% length
Lets you optimize start-up behaviour.

%length:
Start-up mode always uses the belt length set by Parameter P05.01.
Qmin:
Lets you abort start-up mode. As soon as belt load exceeds limit value Qmin (P08.06
Q-Min Limit), system goes to Gravimetric Mode. If limit value is not exceeded,
changeover takes place as soon as belt length value set by Parameter P05.01 is
reached.
P 05.07 DO Scraper Default: --

Alternative: DO
Parameters P05.07 to P05.09 let you control a cleaning scraper in cycles.

If weighfeeder is STARTED, digital output (P05.07) for pulse time (P05.08) is open,
and closed for pause (P05.09).
Special cases:
P05.09 = 0.00h ---> no pause
P05.09 > 1000.00h ---> only one pulse; then always pause.
P 05.08 Pulse Length Scraper Default: 0.25 h

Min: 0.01 h Max: 1000.00 h
P 05.09 Pulse Pause Scraper Default: 6.00 h

Min: 0.00 h Max: 1001.00 h
7.8 Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring

P 06.01 Scale Monitoring Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Determine whether default values or user specific parameter values are to be used for
scale monitoring.
P 06.02 Stand-By Event Default: W2

Event Group: SC Number: 02
Cause of Event:
Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter
P06.03 "Standby Limit"). Material prefeeder cuts off.

Parameters
P 06.03 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 2 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
Cuts off belt drive and prefeeder (not scale), if setpoint is smaller than this value.
Control magnitude is set to the value of Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP".
Change-over to Stand-by mode is delayed by 3s, return is immediately effected.
P 06.04 Tacho Event Default: A

Event Group: CA Number: 02
Cause of Event:
Input frequency exceeds 2900 Hz.
Prerequisite: Parameter P 04.07 "Speed Measurement" not set to "--".
P 06.05 Error LC Input Default: A

Cause of Event:
Load cell cable wrong.
Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
Supply voltage is below 19V.
Error must be available for minimum 3s.
If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
Check for either possibility. If scale connot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn
device off and restart.
P 06.06 LC Input < MIN Default: A

Event Group: LO Number: 01
Cause of Event:
Load cell load is smaller than 3% of load cell rated capacities.
P 06.07 LC Input > MAX Default: A

Event Group: HI Number: 01
Cause of Event:
Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action: Check material infeed.

Parameters
P 06.08 Setpoint Limited Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal
value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active (P 06.18).
P 06.09 Power Failure Default: A

Event Group: WE Number: 01
Cause of Event:
Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off.
During power failure, no totalization takes place.
Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
P 06.10 Time Deviation Default: 20.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Time during which the deviation may exceed the limit determined by "Deviation
Threshold" parameter.
See also "Deviation Factor" parameter.
P 06.11 Threshold Deviation Default: 5.0 %

Min: 0.0 % Max: 100.0 %
Maximum admissible deviation.

Reference: Nominal feed rate
P 06.12 Factor Deviation Default: 1.0

Min: 0.0 Max: 1.0
If the deviation absolute value exceeds threshold P 06.11(12) for time P 06.10 , event
message HI 5 (P 06.13) is output.
At 100% setpoint, the effective threshold should be equal to Parameter P 06.11. For
smaller setpoints, threshold can be reduced using Parameter P 06.12.
P 06.12 = 0 : Effective threshold = P 06.11 * Setpoint/nominal value
P 06.12 = 1 : Effective threshold = P 06.11

Parameters
P 06.13 Event Deviation Default: A

Cause of Event:
Maximum control deviation exeeded. Actual feed rate strongly differs from setpoint for
more than preset time.
There are various possible causes:
1. Material handling error

Material flows irregularly or cannot be discharged with sufficient qualitiy.
Controller is out of limit for a certain time.
2. Electronics error
Check external feed rate controller and motor cablings. Check feed controller
for proper setting (current limitation, speed range).
3. Calibration error
During initial calibration, controller was set so critically that smallest changes
of system properties cause unreliable operation.
Action: Repeat this commissioning step.
P 06.14 Controller Limited Default: W2

Event Group: CO Number: 01
Cause of Event:
Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After
some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.
2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.

Action: Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal
feed rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.

Parameters
P 06.15 Memory Error Default: A

Cause of Event:
Error has been detected by cyclic check of program and parameter memories. If SY
01 is output immediately after power-up, check VSM module for proper seat.
If this is no help, call the "Load Default Parameters" function. If this does not help
either, contact the Schenck Service; in most cases, scale is inoperable.
P 06.16 License Violation Default: A

Cause of Event:
Loaded software or activated parameter blocks (e.g. Bin Weigher) are not licensed
through the VSM module used. You need a module with a higher type number.
The only possible event class is "Alarm".
P 06.17 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Change the password protecting parameters, calibrating functions, etc. from access
through the control unit.
Changed password is displayed in encoded form. Default password 7353 results in
return display 10 000.
Password forgotton:
Tell the SCHENCK service the value of Parameter P 06.17, or change password using
EasyServe.
P 06.18 Source Emerg. Setp. Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
Activate the emergency setpoint, and setpoints higher than P 06.19 are limited to this
value.
Message SC01 (P 06.08) is output.
Keyed in setpoints are automatically set to the emergency setpoint.
P 06.19 Emergency Setpoint Default: 0.0 kg/h

Min: 0.0 kg/h Max: 220000000.0 kg/h

Parameters
P 06.20 Analog Input< Offset Default: A

Cause of Event:
The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the set zero point
elevation.
7.9 Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters

P 07.01 Display Filters Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Determine if default values or user defined values of display filter parameters are to be
used.
The load cell filter (2nd order) acts on all measurement values depending on belt load.
All other filters (1st order) act only on corresponding displays and outputs.
P 07.02 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300.00 s
Load cell filter acts on all load cell dependent measurement values.
P 07.03 I-Display Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Filter for feed rate display and output on operator panel, EasyServe and all fieldbuses
(except SEBUS).
P 07.04 I-Analog Output Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Flow rate analog output
P 07.05 I-Serial Output Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Filter for serial output via SEBUS (see "Protocol Type" parameter)

Parameters
P 07.06 Belt Load Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Belt load display
P 07.07 Belt Speed Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Belt speed display
P 07.08 Deviation Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Deviation display
7.10 Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values

P 08.01 Limit Values Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
limit value messages.
Digital outputs for limit value messages report excess of MIN/MAX values independent
of event class.
Limit values are monitored only in turned-on state of scale. Monitoring starts 10s after
start of scale.
P 08.02 Value for I-Min Default: 5.0 % Io

Min: -10.0 % Io Max: 200.0 % Io
Reference: Nominal flow rate
P 08.03 Event Class I-Min Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Flow rate smaller than set minimum value.

Parameters
P 08.04 Value for I-Max Default: 120.0 % Io

Min: -10.0 % Io Max: 200.0 % Io
Reference: Nominal flow rate
P 08.05 Event Class I-Max Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
P 08.06 Value for Q-Min Default: 60.0 % Q

Min: -10.0 % Q Max: 200.0 % Q
Reference: Nominal belt load
P 08.07 Event Class Q-Min Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
P 08.08 Value for Q-Max Default: 120.0 % Q

Min: -10.0 % Q Max: 200.0 % Q
Reference: Nominal belt load
P 08.09 Event Class Q-Max Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
P 08.10 Value for V-Min Default: 5.0 % V

Min: -10.0 % V Max: 200.0 % V
Reference: Nominal speed

Parameters
P 08.11 Event Class V-Min Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
P 08.12 Value for V-Max Default: 120.0 % V

Min: -10.0 % V Max: 200.0 % V
Reference: Nominal speed
P 08.13 Event Class V-Max Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Belt speed exceeds set MAX value.
7.11 Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data

P 09.01 Range Correction Default: 1.0000
Min: 0.5000 Max: 2.0000
Proportionally influences belt load q measurement.

q(corrected) = q(measured)range correction
Enter result of the "Weight Check" setting program.
P 09.02 Belt Circuit Time Default: 30.0 s

Min: 1.0 s Max: 9999.0 s
Determines measuring time for the "LB: Pulses/Belt" calibrating function.

Normally the time for one belt circuit is selected.
P 09.03 Eff. Check Weight Default: 10.000 kg

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 22000.000 kg
Check weight value used to perform the "Weight Check" calibrating function,
P 09.04 Basic Tare Default: 0.00 kg/m

Min: 0.00 kg/m Max: 10000.00 kg/m
Taring function result.

Parameters
P 09.05 Tare Correction Default: 0.00 kg/m

Min: -1000.00 kg/m Max: 1000.00 kg/m
Result of zero setting program and on-stream calibration (KME).

Upon every taring operation, tare correction is set to 0.
Using the zero setting program, a value of max. 5% of nominal belt load can be
entered into parameter.
Message "Value Too Big" aborts zero setting program.
P 09.06 Belt Circuit No. Default: 1000000 I/U

Min: 0 I/U Max: 9000000 I/U
Result of the "LB:Pulses Belt" .

Determines setting programs running cycle.
Division by characteristic value vs results in belt length (in m).
Upon initial calibration, always call the "LB:Pulses Belt" setting program in first place,
also if P 04.07 is set to "--".
7.12 Parameter Group 10 - Controller

P 10.01 Optim. Controller Default: STANDARD
UNIVERS
STANDARD:
Standard controller setting for Weighfeeder applications.
UNIVERS:
User-defined controller settings for special cases (see Appendix).
For detailed schematic diagrams and special applications, see Appendix.
Attention!
Change-over from UNIVERS to STANDARD resets parameters from P 10.08 onward
to default values.
P 10.02 P-Component KP Default: 0.02000 mA/%

Min: 0.00000 mA/% Max: 1000.00000 mA/%
Reference: Nominal setpoint

Special case: KP=0 results in I-controller

Parameters
P 10.03 I-Component TN Default: 1.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
Feed rate controller tracking time (integral component).

Tracking time TN is defined as the time during which the I component changes the
control magnitude in the exact same way as the P component.
Special cases:
1st KP = 0 : I controller
TN is the reciprocal of integration constant KI, i.e. a big value means a slow controller.
KI = 1/TN TN in %/(mA/s)
2nd TN = 0 : P-controller
The I component is reset.
P 10.04 Lower Limit Default: 0.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Lower controller magnitude limit.
P 10.05 Upper Limit Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Controller magnitude upper limit.

With inputs smaller than 20 mA, limit depends on setpoint size.
1st upper limit P 10.05 = 20mA

2nd upper limit P 10.05 = 10mA
3rd upper limit P 10.05 = 0mA
P 10.06 Contr. Magn. Offset Default: 0.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Elevation of control magnitude by a constant value. Elevation acts before control

magnitude limitation.

Parameters
P 10.07 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
In stop state of scale, control magnitude can be set either to 0 or to the elevation value
set by Parameter P 10.04 "Lower Limit".
0:
In turned-off state of feeder, control magnitude is set to 0.
Lower Limit:
Control magnitude is set to the lower limit (P10.04).
P 10.08 Bypass Default: 0.00 mA

Only available if Parameter: 10.01 = UNIVERS
Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Proportional to preset setpoint, the control magnitude is additively superimposed by a

value.
This parameter indicates the bypass value for the nominal setpoint.
P 10.09 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
Store last control value of after scale stop. Next start uses this value.
NO :
No storage
YES :
Store
YES-A :
Store only if scale has not been stopped by alarm.
Alarm in stop state of scale does not influence stored value.

Parameters
P 10.10 Volumetric Mode Default: Qconst

Alternative: Qconst
Yconst
Determines volumetric mode.

Qconst:
V*Qconst acts as actual value.V= actual belt speed and Qconst= stored value
(nominal belt load, or last measurement value). Scale operates in speed-controlled
fashion.
Yconst:
Controller is cut off, setpoint by-pass (Parameter P 10.08 "Bypass") acts alone.
For more information, see Appendix "Details: Control".
P 10.11 Setp. Filter 1st Ord Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 6000.0 s
First-order filter in setpoint branch. Does not act on bypass.
P 10.12 Setp. Filter 2nd Ord Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 6000.0 s
Second-order filter in setpoint branch. Does not act on bypass.
P 10.13 Set/Act Comparison Default: W-X

Alternative: W-X
X-W
Set/act comparison:
W-X:
Controller receives control difference "setpoint - actual value"
X-W:
Controller receives control difference "actual value - setpoint"

Parameters
P 10.14 Set/Act Sources Default: I

Alternative: I
Q
I setting:
Setpoint = Set feed rate
Actual value = Measured feed rate
Q setting :
Setpoint = Nominal belt load Qo.
Actual value = Measured belt load
P 10.15 Adaptation 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
V
1/Q
1/W
For adaption across controller input, see Appendix.
P 10.16 Adaptation 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
W
For adaption across controller output (see Appendix).
7.13 Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs

P 11.01 Analog Outputs Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
analog outputs.
In cut-off state of scale, all analog outputs are set to the value of the particular
elevation.
P 11.02 Setpoint Default: --

Alternative: AO
Set feed rate analog output source.
P 11.03 Setpoint Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Parameters

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Output current for 0% set feed rate value.
P 11.04 Setpoint Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Output current for 100% set feed rate value.
P 11.05 Actual Flow Rate Default: --

Alternative: AO
Actual flow rate analog output source
P 11.06 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Output current for 0% actual flow rate value.
P 11.07 Flow Rate Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Output current for 100% actual flow rate value.
P 11.08 Belt Load Default: --

Alternative: AO
Belt load analog output source
P 11.09 Belt Load Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Output current for 0% belt load

Parameters
P 11.10 Belt Load Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Output current for 100% belt load
P 11.11 Speed Default: --

Alternative: AO
Belt speed analog output source
P 11.12 Speed Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Output current for 0% belt speed
P 11.13 Speed Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Output current for 100% belt speed
P 11.14 Deviation Default: --

Alternative: AO
Deviation analog output source
P 11.15 Deviation Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Deviation value "zero" is symmetrically between elevation and 20 mA.
P 11.16 Deviation Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
For output current, the folowing ratio holds:

Parameters
P 11.17 Controller Magnit. Y Default: AO VSE1

Alternative: --
Analog output for feed rate controller control magnitude Y.
7.14 Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs

P 12.01 Digital Inputs Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Determine whether default values or user specific parameter settings are to be used
for digital inputs.
P 12.02 Error Ext. Event 1 Default: A

Cause of Event:
External fault signal at input 1.
P 12.03 DI Ext. Event 1 Default: DI VSE1.DI1 Low

Alternative: --
Input 1 for external fault signal. Linked with internal fault logic (Block: Interlocking).
P 12.04 Error Ext. Event 2 Default: A

Cause of Event:
External fault signal at Input 2.
P 12.05 DI Ext. Event 2 Default: --

Alternative: DI

Parameters
P 12.06 DI Acknowl. Events Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input for acknowledgement of event messages.

Designed for static action, the level must not be continuously available (continuous
acknowledgement).
P 12.07 DI Local Mode Default: DI VSE1.DI2 High

Alternative: --
Local control unit feedback signal reports that mode has been switched to "Local".
DISOCONT operates as display unit only. To suppress event messages, it is
automatically set to "Volumetric" mode. Upon reset, DISOCONT cuts off.
Digital outputs for control of drives (P13.02 and P13.04) are reset in Local Mode.
P 12.08 DI Volumetric ON Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input for changeover of scale to volumetric mode; not to

volumetric/synchronous mode.
P 12.09 Belt Limit Switch Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input for connection of belt limit switch.

Monitoring is independent of belt drift monitoring using belt sensor
(Block: Conveyor Belt ).
P 12.10 Event Limit Switch Default: IG

Event Group: WM Number: 01
Cause of Event:
Belt limit switch for belt run monitoring has been triggered.

Parameters
P 12.11 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI3 Default: A

Cause of Event:
Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable.
If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG type.
External Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required (the same holds the
for the Namur monitorings below).
P 12.12 NAMUR Error VSE1-DI4 Default: A

Cause of Event:
Short circuit for breakage in NAMUR sensor connecting cable.
Action: Check NAMUR sensor cable.
P 12.13 NAMUR Error VSE2-DI3 Default: IG

Cause of Event:

Cause of Event:

Cause of Event:

Cause of Event:

Parameters
P 12.17 Error Ext. Event 3 Default: IG

Cause of Event:
External fault signal across fault input 3.

Alternative: DI
P 12.19 Error Ext. Event 4 Default: IG

Cause of Event:
External fault signal across fault input 4

Alternative: DI
P 12.21 DI Volum. Sync. ON Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input used for change-over of scale to Volumetric Synchronous mode.
P 12.22 DI:Reset Totalizer 1 Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input used to reset totalizing counter 1. The positive edge is active.

Parameters
P 12.23 DI:Reset Totalizer 2 Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input used to reset totalizing counter 2. The positive edge is active.
P 12.24 DI Zero Set Default: --

Alternative: DI
You can also start Zero Set function using this digital input (Item 4.4.6).
Positive contact edge starts function. Results within tolerance (5% of nominal belt
load) are acquired automatically; results out of tolerance, rejected automatically.
7.15 Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs

P 13.01 Digital Outputs Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
for digital outputs.
P 13.02 DO Scale Start Default: DO VSE1.DO1 High

Alternative: --
Digital input used to start/stop feeder drive
P 13.03 DO Scale Started Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal used to display START/STOP states of scale.
P 13.04 DO Start Prefeeder Default: DO VSE1.DO2 High

Alternative: --
Digital output for prefeeder start/stop

Parameters
P 13.05 DO ALARM Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output used to indicate general alarm.
P 13.06 DO Deviation Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output if maximum deviation ( P 06.11) is reached.

Contact output is independent of event class.
P 13.07 DO I-MIN Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output when minimal flow rate (P08.02) is exceeded down.
P 13.08 DO I-MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output when maximum flow rate (P08.04) is exceeded up.
P 13.09 DO Q-MIN Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output if minimum belt load (P 08.06) is reached.

Contact output is independent of event class
P 13.10 DO Q-MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output if maximum belt load (P 08.08) is reached.


Parameters
P 13.11 DO v-MIN Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output if minimum speed (P 08.10) is reached.

P 13.12 DO v-MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output if maximum speed (P 08.12) is reached.

P 13.13 DO Volumetric Mode Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal when scale changes over to volumetric mode.
P 13.14 DO Local Mode Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal when scale changes over to local mode.
P 13.15 DO WARNING Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal output when a warning is available
P 13.16 DO Keyboard Mode Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal transferred when Keyboard Mode is selected.

Parameters
P 13.17 DO Zero Set OK Default: --

Alternative: DO
Successful completion of zero setting program can be checked via digital output.
Start of zero setting program closes digital output. After check, contact reopens
provided that the result is in tolerance.
7.16 Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode

P 14.01 Batch Mode Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Determine whether batch mode can be run or not.

Additionally select operating menu item "Select Batch".
P 14.02 Batch Setp. Source Default: OP

Alternative: FB
AI
DI4
Enter source determining batch setpoint.
P 14.03 Adaptation Time Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 3600 s
If adaption time is reached, set feed rate decreases towards zero.
P 14.04 Correction Amount Default: 0.000 kg

Min: -100000.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg
Shifts the start of the adaption time by the correction amount. Adaption time = 0
corresponds to a pre-cut-off point.
Upon commissioning, the correction amount should be 0.

Parameters
P 14.05 Adaptation Factor Default: 0.5

Min: 0.0 Max: 1.0
Start of tracking time automatically adapts the cut-off function, so that system is nearer
to real conditions upon next batch.
Adaption factor = 0 : No adaption
Adaption factor = 1 : Full adaption
Intermediate values lead to filtered adaption which is to be preferred with systems with
inaccurate repeat behaviour.
The adaption result enters into the Correction Amount parameter.
P 14.06 Automatic Printing Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES:
Automatic printout after every complete batch .
NO:
Batch printout is possible only via a control menu.
Printout is possible only if batch has been terminated automatically or in manual.
P 14.07 DI Batch Terminate Default: --

Alternative: DI
Digital input signal used to terminate active batch.
P 14.08 DO Batch Running Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output signal available if batch is running.

Signal is activated upon batch start, and deactivated after completion of batch. In case
of batch stop, signal is maintained.
P 14.09 DO Dribble Feed Default: --

Alternative: DO
Dribble feed signal is output during adaption time.
P 14.10 DO Full Feed Default: --

Alternative: DO
Full feed signal is output from feed start to end of adaption time. Feeding continues in
dribble feed.

Parameters
P 14.11 Analog Setp. Relat. Default: 1000.0 kg

Min: 0.0 kg Max: 220000000.0 kg
Reference value used to parametrize the "Batch Setpoint" analog input. (Source P
14.02 = AI or DI4)
P 14.12 Batch Setp. Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Input current for a batch setpoint in the amount of P 14.11.
P 14.13 Batch Setp. Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Input current for batch setpoint 0. With negative values, the input range can be
expanded, e.g.
P 14.11 = 1000 kg
P 14.12 = 20mA
P 14.13 = -20mA
0...20mA correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg
P 14.14 Batch Tolerance Default: 100000.000 kg

Min: 0.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg
If batch is out of tolerance, the correction amount maximally changes by the set
tolerance value during adaption.
P 14.15 Out of Tolerance Default: W2

Event Group: MF Number: 06
Cause of Event:
Batch out of tolerance
P 14.16 Pre-cut-off Amount Default: 0.000 kg

Min: 0.000 kg Max: 1000000.000 kg
If batch residual amount falls below the "Pre-cut-off Amount" parameter, digital output
"DO Pre-cut-off Amount" opens and remains open until batch is complete.
P 14.17 DO Pre-cut-off Default: --

Alternative: DO

Parameters
7.17 Parameter Group 15 - Process Control

P 15.01 Process Control Default: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
for process control.
P 15.02 Maintenance Elec. Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Hint on possible maintenance work depending on voltage ON-time.
P 15.03 Event Maint. EL. Default: IG

Cause of Event:
Total of power-on time exceeds value of "Voltage On-Time" parameter.
After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs
you that service work is required.
P 15.04 Maint. Scale Run. Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Hint on possible maintenance work depending on scale ON-time.
P 15.05 Ev.Maint Scale Run. Default: IG

Cause of Event:
Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time".
After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs
you that service work is required.

Parameters
7.18 Parameter Group 16 - VAP

P 16.01 VAP Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Start speed-dependent belt load delay VAP.

Permits belt load measurement to be shifted to point of discharge.
Prerequisites:
Speed measurement system has to be installed and activated. No belt circuit sensor is
required.
P 16.02 Platf.Dis.Length Default: 0.00 % length

Distance from mid weighbridge to material discharge point in percent of total belt
length (not to be confused with tail pulley spacing).
7.19 Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring

P 17.01 Belt Sensor Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Belt sensor and sensor area in conveyor belt serve for acquisition of belt drift, belt
skew and synchronization of adaptive belt influence compensation BIC.
P 17.02 Source Belt Sensor Default: DI VSE1.DI4 High

Alternative: --
Belt sensor digital input. Function can be controlled using relevant service value. Only
DI4 on VSE1 can be used. With alternative "--" , BIC and belt monitoring functions
cannot be used.

Parameters
P 17.03 BIC Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Start adaptive belt influence compensation.

BIC initialization:
Dynamic tare component is cleared upon Power On or change of parameters:
! Parameter P 17.03 "BIC Active"
! Parameter P 04.01 "vs-Characteristic Value"
! Parameter P 09.06 "Belt Circuit Code ".

Brief instructions:
1. Set P 17.01 to YES.
2. Enter P 17.04...06.
3. Run setting program "LB: Pulses/Belt".
4. Activate BIC (P 17.03 = YES)
5. Tare scale.
P 17.04 Sensor Length Default: 8.20 cm

Min: 0.01 cm Max: 400.00 cm
Length of sensor area in direction of belt travel.
P 17.05 Sensor Width Default: 12.00 cm

Min: 0.01 cm Max: 400.00 cm
Sensor area width
P 17.06 Sensor Offset Default: 0.00 cm

Min: -400.00 cm Max: 400.00 cm
Offset can be used to correct belt run monitoring zero point. However, maximum
display range is limited. Bigger differences should be compensated by shifting of
sensor (see Commissioning chapter).
New display = old display - offset
P 17.07 Belt Drift Default: 3.00 cm

Min: 0.01 cm Max: 400.00 cm

Parameters
P 17.08 Belt Drift Event Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Belt out of tolerance.
Action:
1. Clean tail and drive pulleys.
2. Align belt.
Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be, remedy
fault.
P 17.09 Belt Skew Default: 4.00 cm

Min: 0.01 cm Max: 400.00 cm
P 17.10 Belt Skew Event Default: A

Cause of Event:
Belt has run off-center. Scale is no longer operable.
Action: See Belt Slip event.
P 17.11 Slip Value Default: 2.00 % length

Admissible slip between conveyor belt (sensor area) and speed acquisition in % of
total belt length.
P 17.12 Slip Event Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Admissible slip exceeded.
P 17.13 Belt Drift DO Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output reporting Belt Drift event.
P 17.14 Belt Skew DO Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output reporting Belt Skew event.

Parameters
P 17.15 Slip DO Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output reporting Belt Slip event.
7.20 Parameter Group 18 - Printer

P 18.01 Baud Rate Default: 9600
Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
Protocol baud rate

Data format: 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
P 18.02 Page Length Default: 72

Min: 1 Max: 127
Number of lines per page.

Change of parameter or Power ON starts printer.
Printer is connected to first VEA input/output unit.
P 18.03 Print Event Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
NO :
No printout.
YES :
Every event is automatically printed the moment it occurs.

Parameters
7.21 Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe

P 19.01 Own Address Default: 1
Min: 1 Max: 16
Station addresses and baud rates of scale and EasyServe must be identical.
Settings (including the COM interface) can be searched using EasyServe (Menu:
Extra/Options/Communication).
The station address is specially designed for systems with Service bus. If there is no
Service bus, select address 1.
P 19.02 Baud Rate Default: 9600

Alternative: 9600
19200
Baud rate
P 19.03 Diagnosis Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
Activate various diagnostic stages. Zero means: No diagnosis.

Diagnosis is possible only using a special interface card.
P 19.04 Flag 1 Default: 0

Min: -3276 Max: 32767
Note:
Scale does not evaluate this parameter.
Parameter can be used for fail-safe storage of user-specific characteristic.
P 19.05 Flag 2 Default: 0

Min: -3276 Max: 32767
Same function as "Flag 1" parameter
P 19.06 Format Data Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-N-2
8-E-1
8-O-1
8-N-1

Parameters
P 19.07 Connection Default: Serial

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS/TCP
Alternative: Serial
SERIAL+TCP
When fieldbus is set to MODBUS/TCP, EasyServe can additionally be operated via

TCP.
P 19.08 Modbus Idle Time Default: 4 ms

Min: 2 ms Max: 20 ms
Lets you freely select message end-of-text character for Modbus driver.
According to the Modbus standard, the idle time is 3.5 digits depending on baud rate.
For setting details, see Manual BVH2104.
4ms value fits 9600 baud rate. For other speeds, calculate and enter correct time.
Faulty input can increase fieldbus error rate.

Parameters
7.22 Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus

P 20.01 Protocol Type Default: NO
Alternative: NO
MODBUS
S5
S5-BCC
PROFIBUS DP FIX
PROFIBUS DP
INTERBUS-S
DEVICE NET FIX
DEVICE NET
MODBUS/TCP
SEBUS
Lets you select protocol.

For detailed protocol description, see the following manuals:
BV-H 2100:
General fieldbus description applicable to any fieldbus.
BV-H 2101:
Special INTERBUS-S manual
BV-H 2102:
Special PROFIBUS-DP manual
BV-H 2103:
Special DEVICE NET manual
BV-H 2104:
Special MODBUS manual
BV-H 2105:
Special S5 and S5-BCC manuals
BV-H 2243
Special manual for MODBUS/TCP
Attention!
Changes to Parameters P 20.14, P 20.16, P 20.17, P 20.18, P 20.19, P 20.22, P
20.23, P 20.24, P 20.25 and P 20.26 are active only after a 30-second POWER
DOWN.
Note:
DISOCONT recognizes a Profibus-DP or Interbus-S hardware, if present, and selects
the relevant protocol type automatically.
If the fieldbus coupling is not active, ensure that the event class of Parameter 20.03
"Host Communication " is not set to Alarm. Otherwise scale cannot be started.
P 20.02 Timeout Host Default: 10 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Interface monitoring. Zero means that interface is not activated.

Parameters
P 20.03 Comm. Error Host Default: IG

Cause of Event:
Interruption of serial communication exceeds the timeout period.
P 20.04 Modbus Address Default: 1

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = MODBUS
Min: 1 Max: 254
Slave address on Modbus
P 20.05 Modbus Diagnosis Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 15
Activate various diagnostic stages. Zero means that diagnostics is not active.
P 20.06 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
Maximum number of increments of the measurement value transferred is output in

analog or integer format.
P 20.07 Word Sequence Default: IEEE:std / LONG:std

Alternative: IEEE:std / LONG:std
IEEE:swap/ LONG:std
IEEE:std/ LONG:swap
IEEE:swap/LONG:swap
Determines word sequence during measurement value transmission in the

IEEE/LONG format.
P 20.08 Modbus Baud Rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
19200
Baud rate

Parameters
P 20.09 Modbus Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-N-2
8-E-1
8-O-1
8-N-1
Modbus always uses an 11-bit character frame.

Example: 8-O-1 means:
1 start bit, 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit.
(N = No Parity, E = Even Parity)
P 20.10 S5 Diagnosis Default: 0

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = S5, S5-BCC
Min: 0 Max: 15
Activates various diagnostic stages. Zero means that diagnostics is not active.
P 20.11 S5 Float Format Default: SIEMENS-KG

Alternative: SIEMENS-KG
IEEE
Format indication for all setpoints, measurement values and floating-point parameters.
P 20.12 S5 Baud Rate Default: 9600

Alternative: 9600
19200
Baud rate
P 20.13 S5 Data Format Default: 8-E-1

Alternative: 8-N-2
8-E-1
8-O-1
8-N-1
The S5 protocol always uses an 11-bit character frame.

Example: 8-E-1 means:
1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit.

Parameters
P 20.14 PB-DP Address Default: 10

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS DP FIX
Min: 0 Max: 126
Attention!
Active only after a 30-second POWER DOWN.
Slave address on Profibus
P 20.15 PB-DP-FLOAT Format Default: IEEE

IEEE
Format indication for all setpoints, measurement value and floating-point parameters.
P 20.16 PB-DP Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Attention!
Select whether user data package includes parameter block or not.
P 20.17 PB-DP-ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
Attention!
Select optional measurement and status values (scale --> Master).
P 20.18 DVN Address Default: 63

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = DEVICE NET, DEVICE NET FIX
Min: 1 Max: 63
Attention!
Parameter is active only after a 30-second power down.
Slave address on DeviceNet.

Parameters
P 20.19 DVN Baud Rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Attention!
Parameter is active only after a 30-second power down.
Baud rate.
P 20.20 SE-Bus Address Default: 33

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = SEBUS
Min: 1 Max: 33
Internal bus address
P 20.21 IB-FLOAT Format Default: SIEMENS-KG

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = INTERBUS-S
IEEE
P 20.22 IB-Effective Data Default: NO PARAM / 2 ID

Only available if Parameter: 20.01 = INTERBUS-S
Alternative: NO PARAM / 2 ID
NO PARAM / 4 ID
NO PARAM / 6 ID
1 PARAM / 2 ID
1 PARAM / 4 ID
Attention!
P 20.23 PB-DP-Set-Val Count Default: 2 Preset IDs

Alternative: 2 Preset IDs
3 Preset IDs
4 Preset IDs
Attention!

Parameters
P 20.24 DVN-Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Attention!
P 20.25 DVN-ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
Attention!
P 20.26 DVN-Set-Val Count Default: 2 Preset IDs

Alternative: 2 Preset IDs
3 Preset IDs
4 Preset IDs
Attention!
P 20.27 Byte Sequence Default: Low - High

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High

IEEE:swap/ LONG:std
IEEE:std/ LONG:swap
IEEE:swap/LONG:swap
P 20.29 WEB Coding Default: XML

Alternative: XML
HTML

Parameters
P 20.30 DHCP Default: NO

Alternative: NO
P 20.31 IP Address 1 Default: 192

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255
P 20.35 Net Mask 1 Default: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Parameters

Min: 0 Max: 255
P 20.39 Gateway 1 Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255

Min: 0 Max: 255
P 20.43 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High

IEEE:swap/ LONG:std
IEEE:std/ LONG:swap
IEEE:swap/LONG:swap

Parameters
P 20.45 Configuration Default: FIXED

Alternative: FIXED
NO_PARA_4_4
NO_PARA_3_6
PARA_2_4
P 20.46 T-Mode with Comm-Obs Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
To be able to use Keyboard mode as Emergency mode without disrupting fieldbus

connection, fieldbus communication monitoring can be deactivated in Keyboard mode,
for feeder to be operated also if fieldbus connection is faulty.
7.23 Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs

P 21.01 PLS Binary OUT 1 Default: --
Alternative: DO
Control digital output 1 via fieldbus.

PMS Binar-OUT 1-8 outputs can be controlled via fieldbus.
The residual inputs/outputs configured are accessible on fieldbus for information.

Alternative: DO

Alternative: DO

Alternative: DO

Alternative: DO

Parameters

Alternative: DO

Alternative: DO

Alternative: DO
P 21.09 PLS Analog OUT 1 Default: --

Alternative: AO
Control analog output 1 via fieldbus.
P 21.10 PLS Analog OUT 2 Default: --

Alternative: AO
Control analog output 2 via fieldbus.

Parameters
7.24 Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller

P 22.01 Belt Load Controller Default: NO
Alternative: NO
ANALOG
PULS
Stepping
NO:
No belt load control.
ANALOG:
Analog control magnitude output for speed-controlled prefeeders.
PULSE:
Pulse/pause output for intermittently controlled prefeeders.
Stepping:
Position-controlled prefeeder with Parameters P 22.11-P 22.15.
For controller schematic, see Appendix.
For second weighbridge controller, see Parameter Block 26.
P 22.02 Contr. Magn. Adapt. Default: 10.0000 mA

Min: 0.0010 mA Max: 20.0000 mA
Speed bypass superimposing belt load controller. Use parameter to calibrate belt load
in volumetric mode to nominal value.
P 22.03 Blind Distance Default: 5.00 m

Min: 0.00 m Max: 100.00 m
Distance between prefeeder material infeed point and platform centre.

Controller automatically adjusts as a function of the socalled blind distance, nominal
speed and load cell filter P 07.02.
Big distances result in slow controller, and vice versa.
P 22.03 = 0.0m :
Controller cut off and in home position (0).
P 22.04 Offset Default: 0.00 mA

Min: -20.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Elevates control magnitude by a constant value. If parameter P 22.01 is set to "Pulse",

value is normally zero.

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Belt load controller control magnitude lower limit. If parameter P 22.01 is set to
"Pulse", value is normally zero.

Parameters

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Controller control magnitude upper limit.

Upon inputs smaller than 20 mA, limit depends on setpoint size (see Parameter P
10.05).
P 22.07 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
In cut off state of scale, you can set control magnitude either to 0 or to the lower limit
in Parameter P 22.05.
P 22.08 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
Store last value of belt load controller after scale stop. Next start uses this values.
NO :
No storage
YES :
Store
YES-A :
Store only if scale has not been stopped by alarm.
P 22.09 Contr.Mag. Prefeeder Default: --

Alternative: AO
Control magnitude analog output (P 22.01 = ANALOG).

Configure "Start Prefeeder" output using Parameter P 13.04.
P 22.10 Pulse Length Default: 1.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60.0 s
Pulse length for "PULSE" setting of Parameter P 22.01 "Belt Load Controller". Pulse
length remains constant; pause is adjusted before control.
Output "Start Prefeeder, P 13.04" should be placed on first system unit VSE 1.
P 22.11 S: P-Component Default: 0.5000 s/mA

Only available if Parameter: 22.01 = Stepping
Min: 0.0000 s/mA Max: 1000.0000 s/mA
Parameters P 22.11-P 22.15 hold for position controlled prefeeders. For relevant gate
control, see Block 31.

Parameters
P 22.12 S: I-Component Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
P 22.13 S: Threshold Resp. Default: 0.00 %

Min: 0.00 % Max: 1000.00 %
P 22.14 S: DO Open Flow Gate Default: --

Alternative: DO
Step controller "Prefeeder OPEN" control output (P 22.01 = Stepping).

At best, set output on first VSE system unit.
P 22.15 S: DO Close Flow G. Default: --

Alternative: DO
Step controller "Prefeeder CLOSED" control output (P22.01 = Stepping").

At best, set output on first VSE system unit.

Parameters
7.25 Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking

P 23.01 DI Error Mechanics 1 Default: --
Alternative: DI
LS
The complete interlock circuitry consists of a big interlock block and two smaller
blocks.
1. Big block P23.01...P23.19
The entire interlock circuitry comprises 1 big and 2 smaller interlock blocks.
2. Big blocks P 23.01...P 23.19

Let you interlink fault inputs of mechanical and electrical system with relevant
Error and Ready messages.
All digital system inputs/outputs can be placed on inputs.
3. Small blocks P 23.20...P 23.37

2 Freely available AND gates with 2 inputs each. P22.20...P22.27
All digital system inputs/outputs can be placed on gate inputs.
2 universal time gates P23.28-P23.37
DI continue being active also when events are configured for IG.
For complete signal patterns, see Appendix.

Alternative: DI
LS

Alternative: DI
LS

Alternative: DI
LS

Alternative: DI
LS
P 23.06 DI Error Electr. 1 Default: --

Alternative: DI
LS

Parameters

Alternative: DI
LS

Alternative: DI
LS
P 23.09 DO Error Mechanics Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.10 Error Mechanics Default: W1

P 23.11 DO Error Electricity Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.12 Error Electricity Default: W1

P 23.13 DO Error Mechatr. 1 Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.14 DO Error Mechatr. 2 Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.15 Error Mechatronics Default: W1

P 23.16 DO Ready Default: --

Alternative: DO

Parameters
P 23.17 Not Ready Default: W1

P 23.18 DO Ready for Start Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.19 Not Ready for Start Default: W1

P 23.20 LS_1 AND-Gate 1 Default: --

Alternative: LS

Alternative: LS
P 23.22 Error AND-Gate 1 Default: W1


Alternative: LS

Alternative: LS
P 23.25 Error AND-Gate 2 Default: W1

P 23.26 DO: AND-Gate 1 Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.27 DO: AND-Gate 2 Default: --

Alternative: DO

Parameters
P 23.28 LS TIME-Gate 1 Default: --

Alternative: LS
Lets you select input signal (digital input or output). If signal is available,
contact P23.32 for time P23.30 is output after delay time P23.29.
Parameter P23.31 lets you determine whether time gate is active always or
only in ON state of feeder.
P 23.29 Delay TIME Gate 1 Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 3600.0 s
P 23.30 Pulse TIME Gate 1 Default: 10.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 36000.0 s
P 23.31 Active at OFF:TIME 1 Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
P 23.32 DO: TIME Gate 1 Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 23.33 LS TIME-Gate 2 Default: --

Alternative: LS
Parameters P23.33 - P23.37 refer to the second time gate (see P23.28).
P 23.34 Delay TIME Gate 2 Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 3600.0 s
P 23.35 Pulse TIME Gate 2 Default: 10.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 36000.0 s
P 23.36 Active at OFF:TIME 2 Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES

Parameters
P 23.37 DO: TIME Gate 2 Default: --

Alternative: DO
7.26 Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher

P 24.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Simulation
The bin weigher operates entirely independent of continuous scale.

Functions:
1. Display bin weight
2. Monitor and report limit values
3. Control MIN/MAX levels
4. Check scale for a on-stream calibration system.

You can also fill scale via menu.
P 24.01 = Simulation:
Simulates bin and MIN/MAX control. Continuous scale extracts material; filling
uses
4 * P(Nenn)
P 24.02 Load Measurement Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation
Alternative: LC
FB

Min: 0.0100 mV/V Max: 10.0000 mV/V

Parameters

Min: 0.500 kg Max: 220000000.000 kg
Load Cells Rated Capacities Total

If a hopper is supported to x% on load cells, to the rest on non-weighed
support points (pivots), and load cells rated capacity total is L/Cnom1, the load
cell rated capacity to be entered results from
L/C rated capacity = L/Cnom1 * 100% / x%.
If percental share x% is not known, determine rated value by external
weighing of a hopper contents.

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300.00 s
The load cell filter acts on all measurement values depending on measured
load.
P 24.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
NO :
Measurement value 0...175% of load cell rated capacity (2mV/V).
YES :
Measuring range -175%...175% of load cell rated capacity
Since the A/D converter resolution is higher in case of "NO", "YES" should be
used only in special cases (e.g. if measuring eyes are used).
P 24.07 Error LC Input Default: W1

Cause of Event:
See Parameter P 06.05.
P 24.08 LC Input > MAX Default: W1

Cause of Event:

Parameters
P 24.09 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100.0 % LC

Min: 0.0 % LC Max: 1000.0 % LC
Indicated in percent of load cell rated capacity (P 24.04), nominal bin load
serves as reference value for limit values and analog outputs.
P 24.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
P 24.11 Display Filter Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s
Filter applies to analog, or serial, output, however, not to limit values and
control contacts.
P 24.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60.0 %

Min: -10.0 % Max: 200.0 %
MIN/MAX levels can be used to control a fill unit (output P 24.14). Fill unit
stops if MIN value is reached, and cuts off if MAX value is reached.
P 24.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70.0 %

Min: -10.0 % Max: 200.0 %
P 24.14 DO Bin Filling Default: --

Alternative: DO
Upon every scale alarm, contact is set to "No Filling".

During its measuring phase, the automatic on-stream calibration system
(Block: Check System) performs the control.

Parameters
P 24.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5.0 %

Min: -200.0 % Max: 200.0 %
Freely definable limit value
P 24.16 Event Bin Level MIN Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Set MIN value exceeded down
P 24.17 DO Bin Level MIN Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 24.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120.0 %

Min: -10.0 % Max: 200.0 %
Freely definable MAX value.
P 24.19 Event Bin Level MAX Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Set MAX value exceeded up
P 24.20 DO Bin Level MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 24.21 AO Bin Load Default: --

Alternative: AO
Fill weight analog output.

Parameters
P 24.22 AO Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
0% fill weight output current.
P 24.23 AO Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
100% fill weight output current

Min: 0.5000 Max: 2.0000
Serving for correction of measuring result, parameter is automatically set by

the "CB: Weight Check" setting program.
P 24.25 Tare Default: 0.000 kg

Min: 0.000 kg Max: 220000000.000 kg
Setting program "TB: Tare" automatically acquires tare and enters value into
parameter.
P 24.26 Eff. Check Weight Default: 10.00 kg

Min: 0.00 kg Max: 220000000.00 kg
Enter relevant check weight for the "CB: Weight Check" setting program.
P 24.27 Control. in OFF-Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Determines whether fill weight (P24.12 and P24.13) and bin control (Block:
Bin Control) are active always or only in turned-on state of scale.

Parameters
P 24.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: --

Alternative: DI
Fill weight sensor digital input. If sensor responds, filling is suppressed or

aborted for 60s.
5. DO (P 24.14) OFF
6. DO (P 25.04) OFF
7. Control magnitude (P 25.03) 0, controller in home position.

Filling aborts independent of source (open loop control, closed loop control,
manual) and event class (P 24.29).
P 24.29 Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Fill weight sensor digital input has responded.
7.27 Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller

P 25.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Continuous bin control with interference quantity application, suitable for all
feed units controlled with 0(4)...20mA.
For controller schematic, see Appendix.
P 25.02 Filling Type Default: YES

Only available if Parameter: 24.01 = YES, Simulation; 25.01 = YES
Alternative: NO
YES
YES:
Weighfeeder extracts material from bin. Fill weight is controlled using fill unit.
NO:
Weighfeeder fills material into bin. Fill weight is controlled using discharge
unit.

Parameters
P 25.03 A0 Contr. Magn. Default: --

Alternative: AO
Fill/discharge unit control magnitude

(P 25.02 = YES or NO)
P 25.04 D0 Scale ON Default: --

Alternative: DO
Fill/discharge unit digital output.

Upon every scale alarm, output is set to "Off", control magnitude to "0" and
controller to home position.
During its measuring phase, the on-stream calibration system performs the
control.
P 25.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0.00 kg

Min: 0.00 kg Max: 1000000.00 kg
Fill weight setpoint to be used for control.
P 25.06 Scale Constant Default: 0.0 (kg/h)/mA

Min: 0.0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000.0 (kg/h)/mA
The fill/discharge unit constant is defined as feed rate in kg/hr per mA control
magnitude. Together with deadtime parameter P 25.07, it serves for automatic
setting of control parameters KP and TN.
Setting uses the "BIN: Controller Optim." setting program.
P 25.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
Deadtime from feed unit to bin (see also P 25.06).
P 25.08 P-Component KP Default: 0.00000 mA/kg

Min: 0.00000 mA/kg Max: 10000.00000 mA/kg
KP = 0 results in an I controller producing an instable control loop. This setting

should be avoided.

Parameters

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
TN = 0 results in a P controller; the I component is reset.
P 25.10 D Portion TV Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
P 25.11 D Filter TD Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
Filter for D component. Value should not exceed the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3
TV is normal.
P 25.12 Bypass Default: 10.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Weighfeeder setpoint additively superimposes control magnitude. Enter the

current value to be active upon weighfeeder nominal rate.
Calibrate bypass thus that with controller cut off (KP, TN, TV = 0) and scale
turned on, bin fill level is maintained (amount extracted = amount filled).
With controller active, bypass can be changed in small steps until service
display yBi is around 0.
P 25.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0.0 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 60000.0 s
In critical cases (small bin, high deadtime), the bypass D component can
relieve weighfeeder in case of big setpoint changes. Deviation time integral
can be minimized.
Suggestion: Normally 0, in critical cases, approx. TT/2 (P25.07).
P 25.14 Contr. Magn. Offset Default: 0.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Elevate control magnitude.

Parameters

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Control magnitude lower limit.

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 20.00 mA
Control magnitude upper limit.
P 25.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0.0 kg

Min: 0.0 kg Max: 10000.0 kg
Within dead band, the effective control deviation Xd(w) can be reduced by
factor
P 25.18.
This helps to achieve a slower control behaviour in balanced state, e.g. in
case of bin vibrations.
P 25.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0.0

Min: 0.0 Max: 1.0
See P 25.17.
P 25.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 200.0 s
Bin level setpoint filter. Helps to avoid overshooting in case of setpoint

changes caused by the on-stream calibration system.

Parameters
P 25.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0.0 s Max: 200.0 s
Actual value filter for bin level control. Calibrating program "BIN: Controller
Optim." automatically considers set value.
P 25.21 DI Init. Controller Default: --

Alternative: DI
Contact initializes all memorizing controller elements. As long as contact is

available, only bypass + elevation are active.
P 25.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER

Alternative: PARAMETER
FB
Lets you determine whether bin level setpoint is to be determined by

Parameter P25.05 "Bin Level Setpoint" or via fieldbus interface.
7.28 Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge

P 26.01 2.Weighbridge active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Parameter combinations:
1. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = YES, P 22.01 = YES
First and second weighbridge belt load controllers are active.
2. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = YES, P 22.01 = NO, P 22.03 = 0

Second weighbridge controller is active.
3. P 26.01 = YES, P 26.16 = NO, P 22.01 = NO

Second weighbridge with displays and limit values is active..
Special features:
1. Parameter P 22.08 (Store) applies to first weighbridge controller only.
In cut-off state of scale, second weighbridge controller is reset.
2. Upon start of second weighbridge controller, control magnitude is

synchronized.

Parameters
P 26.02 2nd Weighbridge Default: --

Only available if Parameter: 26.01 = YES
Alternative: LC
Parameter to "--": Q = 0

Min: 0.0100 mV/V Max: 10.0000 mV/V

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 220000000.000 kg
Total of load cell rated capacities. Pivots are counted as load cells.
P 26.05 Eff. Platf.Length Default: 0.180 m

Min: 0.001 m Max: 100.000 m

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300.00 s
Filter applies to all functions and displays depending on belt load.
P 26.07 Error LC Input Default: W1

Cause of Event:
P 26.08 2nd Bridge MIN Default: 5.0 %

Min: -200.0 % Max: 200.0 %
Minimum belt load limit value.

Parameters
P 26.09 Event 2nd Bridge MIN Default: W2

P 26.10 DO 2nd Bridge MIN Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 26.11 2nd Bridge MAX Default: 150.0 %

Min: -10.0 % Max: 200.0 %
Maximum belt load limit value
P 26.12 Event 2nd Bridge MAX Default: W2

P 26.13 DO 2nd Bridge MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO

Min: 0.2000 Max: 5.0000
Only manual correction is possible. Check to see that first and second
weighbridge displays coincide with Parameter P 26.14.
P 26.15 Tare Default: 0.00 kg/m

Min: 0.00 kg/m Max: 10000.00 kg/m
Taring program "TW: Tare" simultaneously acquires the tare of both

weighbridges and enters the result into the respective parameters. There is no
special taring program for second weighbridge.

Parameters
P 26.16 Controller active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
P 26.17 P-Component KP Default: 0.500

Min: 0.000 Max: 100.000
KP = 0 results in an I controller with KI = 1/TN (P 26.18).

Min: 0.0 s Max: 1000.0 s
TN = 0 results in a P controller; the I component is reset.
P 26.19 Analog Output 2nd Br Default: --

Alternative: AO
Analog output for belt load on second weighbridge.
P 26.20 2nd Bridge Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Output current for 0 belt load .
P 26.21 2nd Bridge Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Nominal belt load output current.

Parameters
7.29 Parameter Group 27 - Check System

P 27.01 Type of Check System Default: NO
Alternative: NO
Single Unit
Separated Units
Filling System
Extern
Single Unit:
Forming a mechanical unit, weighfeeder and check weigh bin are weighed at
a time. Weighfeeder discharges from bin.
Separate Units:
Weighfeeder and check weigh bin are decoupled from one another.
Weighfeeder discharges from bin.
Filling System:
During check measurement, weighfeeder fills material into check bin.
External:
Check sequence is controlled by a host system. DISOCONT only supplies
relevant measurement values.
Only the following parameters are active:
P 27.28 DO Check Meas. Active
P 27.31 Absolute Range
P 27.32 Relative Range
The following parameter description primarily relates to the first two types.
For sequence diagram, see Appendix.
P 27.02 Auto Correction Default: NO

Only available if Parameter: 27.01 = Single Unit, Separated Units, Filling
System
Alternative: NO
YES
NO :
Start correction in manual.
YES:
Correction takes place automatically if the correction result is within P 27.31,
P27.32.
P 27.03 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO

System
Alternative: NO
Tare
Span
Automatically starts on-stream calibration system for "Tare" or "Range".

Start is delayed by the timeout set by Parameter P 27.04.
It is useful to additionally select automatic correction (P 27.02).

Parameters
P 27.04 Cycle Time Default: 0.50 h

System
Min: 0.01 h Max: 100.00 h
P 27.05 Print Check Result Default: NO

System
Alternative: NO
YES
Prints check measurement result after every check operation.

1. Date and time
2. Continuous result Z = .... kg
3. Check result F/Z = ...
4. Check length = ... m
5. Correction Tare rel. ... % *
6. Correction Span rel. ... % *

* depending on correction target
P 27.06 Release Check System Default: --

System
Alternative: FB
DI
If release is missing
1. No check measurement starts
2. Active check measurement aborts.
If you enter "--", on-stream calibration system is permanently released.
P 27.07 No Check Release Default: W2

System
Event Group: CH Number: 09
Cause of Event:
On-stream calibration system started; no release available.
Message is output in turned-on and turned-off state of scale.
P 27.08 Start Span Corr Default: OP

Parameters

System
Alternative: DI
FB
Start on-stream calibration system to acquire scale span error and correct, if
necessary.
For details, see Parameter P 27.09.
P 27.09 Start Tare Corr Default: OP

System
Alternative: DI
FB
Start on-stream calibration system to acquire scale tare error and correct, if
necessary. Primarily caused by material deposits in weigh hopper, tare error
should be corrected as frequently as possible. Span error is normally acquired
only during initial and re-calibration of scale.
You can start check measurement also in cut-off state of scale. However, start
in turned-on state is preferrable.
While a setting program is running, no check measurement can be started.
Start is caused by the input signal edge
P 27.10 Accept Correction Default: OP

System
Alternative: DI
FB
If measurement is complete, on-stream calibration system goes to

acknowledgement phase and waits for correction command. If tolerances P
27.31, P 27.32 are exceeded, you can also start correction in manual.
Correction is started through input edge.
P 27.11 Finish Check Meas. Default: OP

System
Alternative: DI
FB
Check measurement can be aborted at any time.

Input is edge-controlled.

Parameters
P 27.12 Circuits or Quantity Default: Quantity

System
Alternative: Quantity
Circuits
You can select check setpoint as

1. Quantity, P 27.14
2. Integer number of belt circuits, P 27.13..

In case of weighfeeders without BIC (P 17.03) and increased requirements,
the second option is preferrable.
P 27.13 Check Circuits Default: 0.0

System
Min: 0.0 Max: 100.0
See P 27.12.
If possible, select integer belt circuits.
P 27.14 Check Quantity Default: 0.0 kg

System
Min: 0.0 kg Max: 100000000.0 kg
See P 27.12

Parameters
P 27.15 Storage Quantity Default: 500.0 kg

System
Min: 0.0 kg Max: 100000000.0 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level required for a check
measurement. Before measurement, bin is filled up to this level.
Prerequisites:
1. Ensure that storage quantity is below maximum check level
P 27.15 < P 27. 20
If this is not given, check aborts after start and message CH 03 (Max.
Check Level) is output.
2. Ensure that storage quantity exceeds the total from check amount,
minimum check level and safety reserve
P 27.15 > P 27.14 (P 27.13) + P 27.18 + MT + MB
If this is not given, bin level falls below minimum check bin level.
Measurement aborts and message CH 02 (MIN Bin Level) is output.
MT = Lost amount caused through damping time P 27.22.
MB = Lost amount caused through blind distance P 27.23 (with Single
Unit type only).
P 27.16 Min. Check Quantity Default: 0.0 kg

System
Min: 0.0 kg Max: 10000.0 kg
Determines and monitors the smallest admissible check amount upon setpoint
presetting by belt circuits.
If set amount is not reached after selected number of belt circuits,
measurement aborts and message CH 01 (Check Amount Too Small) is
output. At best, set Parameter P 27.12 = Quantity to 0
P 27.17 Min. Check Quantity Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
After completion of measurement, bin weigher has acquired a check amount
below that preset minimum value (P 27.16). Check measurement aborts.
Either number of belt circuits (P 27.12,13) or belt load is too small.
P 27.18 Min. Fill Weight Default: 0.0 kg

System
Min: 0.0 kg Max: 100000000.0 kg
Smallest bin level admissible during measurement. If value falls below MIN
level, check measurement aborts and message CH 02 (Min. Check Level) is
output.
Parameters
P 27.19 Min. Fill Weight Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
During measurement, bin level has fallen below admissible minimum value (P
27.18). Check measurement aborts.
Check setpoint is too big or storage quantity too small.
P 27.20 Max. Fill Weight Default: 1000.0 kg

System
Min: 0.0 kg Max: 100000000.0 kg
Maximum bin level is the highest admissible level admitted during check.
Measurement does not start before MAX value is exceeded down. The MIN (P
27.18) and MAX (P 27.20) values determine the check measurement working
point within bin.
P 27.21 Max. Fill Weight Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Storage quantity (P 27.15) exceeds MAX bin level (P 27.20). Check aborts
immediately after start.
In case of error, check both parameters values.
P 27.22 Damping Time Default: 3.0 s

System
Min: 0.0 s Max: 3600.0 s
Timeout between filling and measuring period, also if no refilling is required.
P 27.23 Blind Distance Default: 0.0 %

System
Min: 0.0 % Max: 100.0 %
P 27.01 = Single Unit

1. VAP (P 16.01) = NO
Blind distance from mid weighbridge to material discharge point in
% of total belt length
2. VAP = YES
Blind distance is 0.

Parameters
P 27.01 = Separated Unit

1. VAP = NO
Blind distance from material infeed point to mid weighbridge
2. VAP = YES
Distance from material infeed to material discharge
P 27.24 DO: Control Started Default: --

System
Alternative: DO
Digital output "Check Active"

Signal is available from start to effected correction, or abort.
P 27.25 Scale Stopped Default: --

System
Alternative: FB
DI
Fill unit Start/Stop feedback. "OFF" message starts damping time.
P 27.26 Scale Not Stopped Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
1. The echo (P 27.25) is pending (3s after "Stop Filling"). Check does
not abort but waits for echo.
2. If there is no echo during measuring phase, i.e. Start Filling is

reported, check aborts without message.
P 27.27 Prepare Check Meas. Default: W2

System
Cause of Event:
Check process is in filling or damping phase, or bin level exceeds maximum
check level (P27.20).

Parameters
P 27.28 DO:Check Meas Active Default: --

System, Extern
Alternative: DO
Digital output reporting measuring phase.
P 27.29 Expect Acceptance Default: W2

System
Cause of Event:
On-stream calibration system waits for operator's intervention.
(a) Accept correction
(b) Reject correction and abort.
If "Automatic Correction" (P 27.02 = YES) is selected, intervention is required
only if tolerance is exceeded.
P 27.30 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: --

System
Alternative: DO
Acknowledgement phase digital output.
P 27.31 Absolute Range Default: 10.0 %

System, Extern
Min: 0.0 % Max: 1000.0 %
Limit for total of all corrections; see Parameters P 27.33 and P 27.35.
P 27.32 Relative Range Default: 3.0 %

System, Extern
Min: 0.0 % Max: 1000.0 %
Limit for single correction; see Parameters P 27.34 and P 27.36.

Parameters
P 27.33 Abs.Tare Corr. Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
This correction raises the zero point correction total to above limit P 27.31. No
automatic correction is performed. Acknowledge message and accept the
result in manual. Monitoring and reporting take place in the acknowledgement
phase.
Correction evaluation factor P 27.37 is not considered for error evaluation.
Tabs = Absolute tare in %

TK = Parameter P 09.05 (Tare Correction) in kg/m
Qo = Nominal platform load in kg/m
N = Acquired zero point error (Z-F)/L in kg/m
F = Bin weigher check amount (setpoint)
Z = Weighfeeder check amount (actual value)
L = Belt length passed over weighbridge during check measurement
P 27.34 Rel.Tare Corr. Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Relative zero point error, i.e. the error acquired during last check
measurement exceeds limit value P 27.32.
P 27.35 Abs.Span Corr. Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Causes the total of all span corrections to exceed limit value P 27.31.
Babs = Absolute span in %

B = Acquired span error F/Z
K = Parameter P 09.01 (Span Correction)
1 = Default of Parameter P 09.01

Parameters
P 27.36 Rel.Span Corr. Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Relative span error, i.e. error acquired during last check measurement,
exceeds limit value P 27.32.
Values Brel, Trel, B and Z are displayed during acknowledgement phase.
P 27.37 Corr. Evaluation Default: 1.000

System
Min: 0.000 Max: 1.000
Factor "Correction Evaluation" evaluates measuring result; only a part of it is

used for zero point and span correction.
This enables variations in measurement to be averaged over various check
operations.
N(KOR) = N * KB
B(KOR) = 1 + (B -1) * KB
KB = Correction evaluation
P 27.38 Correction Speed Default: 0.0 s

System
Min: 0.0 s Max: 3600.0 s
To avoid feed rate steps through correction, correction can be performed

automatically in small steps. Enter 0, and correction is effected in one single
step.
Parameter defines the time between two steps. One steps is 0.1% Qnenn, or
0.1%K.
Qnenn = Nominal belt load
K = Range Correction parameter P 09.01

Parameters
P 27.39 AO:Check Meas Result Default: --

System
Alternative: AO
Analog output of measuring result B = F/Z. Update takes place upon start of
acknowledgement phase. Output value is maintained until next measuring
result.
4mA : F/Z = 0,9
12mA : F/Z = 1
20mA: F/Z = 1,1
Correction Evaluation P 27.37 is not considered.
P 27.40 DO: Check Gate Default: --

System
Alternative: DO
Parameters P 27.40...P27.43 refer to the Filling System check type.

Sequence:
Control gate (material diverter) can guide the material to the normal conveyor
route or to a check bin.
Digital input "Gate Feedback" lets you monitor gate position.
If no feedback is output during set monitoring time (P27.42"Gate Monit.
Time"), event message CH12 "Gate Error" is output and check measurement
aborts.
P 27.41 Check Gate Feedback Default: --

System
Alternative: DI
P 27.42 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s

System
Min: 0 s Max: 3600 s

Parameters
P 27.43 Check Gate Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Check gate not in proper position or too slow.
Check measurement aborts.
P 27.44 Max. Bin Error Default: 0.0 %

System
Min: 0.0 % Max: 10000.0 %
Bin level is measured upon start and end of measuring phase. Both points are
monitored for measuring errors.
If the error exceeds set limit values P 27.44, a second attempt starts after
damping time P 27.22. If this attempt fails, too, check measurement aborts.
With default value 0, monitoring is inactive.
Suggestion:
8. Set limit to 10 000%.
9. Watch service display "KME Window" during check measurement and

note maximum value.
10. Enter approx. triple value into Parameter P 27.44.
P 27.45 Event Bin Error Default: W1

System
Cause of Event:
Upon second attempt, measuring error acting on bin exceeded set limit (P
27.44).
Abort also takes place with event class IG.
P 27.46 DO: Correction Error Default: --

System
Alternative: DO
Contact is set if one of events CH 04...CH 07 occurs upon end of measuring

phase.

Parameters
7.30 Parameter Group 28 - Moisture

P 28.01 Moisture Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
Moisture block can be used to correct actual value. For controller input and
batch counter, the corrected value is used if moisture is activated. Pulse
counter readings can be corrected using Parameter P 28.14, or output without
being corrected.
P 28.02 Moisture Select Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
With default value "--" , moisture is activated.
P 28.03 Moisture Measurement Default: --

Alternative: AI
DI4
Parameters P 28.03...P 28.06 determine the input for moisture acquisition and
normalization.
P 28.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20.00 %

Min: 0.00 % Max: 100.00 %
P 28.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
P 28.06 Moisture Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA

Parameters
P 28.07 DO Moisture active Default: --

Alternative: DO
Moisture digital output active
P 28.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10.00 %

Min: 0.00 % Max: 100.00 %
Parameters P 28.08...P 28.10 monitor moisture for MAX value.
P 28.09 DO Moisture MAX Default: --

Alternative: DO
P 28.10 Event Moisture MAX Default: W1

Event Group: MF Number: 05
P 28.11 AO Flow Rate corr. Default: --

Alternative: AO
Parameters P 28.11...P 28.13 determine corrected actual value analog output

and its normalization.
P 28.12 AO Flow Rate Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
P 28.13 AO Flow Rate Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA

Parameters
P 28.14 Pulse Counter corr. Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
If "NO" is selected, VEA 1 pulse output outputs uncorrected Counter 1

readings (see Parameters P 02.06 and P 02.07).
7.31 Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time

P 29.01 Dead Time Active Default: NO
Alternative: NO
Setpoint + ON/OFF
Setpoint
ON/OFF
Dead time elements for setpoint and ON/OFF command are available and can
be activated separately.
NO :
No dead time active
Setpoint :
Only setpoint dead time active
ON/OFF :
Only ON/OFF dead time active
Setpoint + ON/OFF:
Setpoint and ON/OFF dead times are active.
P 29.02 Dead Time Default: 0.00 s

Only available if Parameter: 29.01 = Setpoint + ON/OFF, Setpoint, ON/OFF
Min: 0.00 s Max: 600.00 s
Dead time value is valid for both elements.
P 29.03 Setpoint Select Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
With default value "--", preselection is active.
P 29.04 Setpoint Clock ON Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
"--" starts setpoint element clock.

Parameters
P 29.05 ON/OFF Select Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
"--" activates preselection.
P 29.06 ON/OFF Clock ON Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
"--" starts ON/OFF element clock.
P 29.07 Time Elem. Preassign Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
Time elements can be assigned from outside with available setpoint, or

current ON/OFF command.
P 29.08 Time Elements Init. Default: --

Alternative: DI
FB
Upon initialization, setpoint element is preset with zero; the ON/OFF element,
with OFF.
P 29.09 DO Dead Time Active Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output for setpoint or ON/OFF dead times active.
P 29.10 DO Setpoint Active Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output for setpoint dead time active.

Parameters
P 29.11 DO ON/OFF Active Default: --

Alternative: DO
Digital output for ON/OFF dead time active.
7.32 Parameter Group 30 - Linearization

P 30.01 Linearization ON Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
The linearization function is designed to linearize belt load measurement.

You can determine the 4 linearization points through calibration with check
weights or checks using material. Place points not required or measured
outside of measuring range or interpolate. For calibration details, see
Appendix.
P 30.02 Lin. S1 Default: 25.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
Linearization Point 1:
Actual belt load, e.g. acquired using check weight or material measurement.
P 30.03 Lin. I1 Default: 25.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
Linearization point 1:
Belt load measured by DISOCONT
P 30.04 Lin. S2 Default: 50.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
Linearization point 2: See P 30.02
P 30.05 Lin. I2 Default: 50.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
P 30.06 Lin. S3 Default: 75.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q

Parameters
P 30.07 Lin. I3 Default: 75.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
P 30.08 Lin. S4 Default: 100.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
P 30.09 Lin. I4 Default: 100.00 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000.00 % Q
P 30.10 Lineariz. Error Default: W2

Cause of Event:
Monitoring for monotonously rising compensation takes place:
o Upon linearization start
o Upon parameter change.
7.33 Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate

This block describes the flow gate parameters that can be used for position-
controlled belt load control.
The gate can also be used independent of belt load controller.
P 31.01 AI Pos.Flow Gate Default: --

Alternative: AI
DI4
Prefeeder position analog input. For normalization, use Parameters P

31.02...P31.03.
P 31.02 AI Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Calibrate input for 0% nominal position.

Parameters
P 31.03 AI Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Calibrate input for 100% nominal position.

With nominal position, 100% material flow should be available at rated
conditions.
P 31.04 AO Pos. Flow Gate Default: --

Alternative: AO
Prefeeder position analog output
P 31.05 AO Offset Default: 4.00 mA

Min: -200.00 mA Max: 200.00 mA
Calibrate output for 0% position.
P 31.06 AO Range Default: 20.00 mA

Min: 0.00 mA Max: 1000.00 mA
Calibrate output for 100% position.
P 31.07 Err. MIN Flow Gate Default: W2

Cause of Event:
"Prefeeder Pos. MIN" (P31.08) digital input event message.
Position controlled prefeeder is in MIN position.
P 31.08 Pos. MIN Flow Gate Default: --

Alternative: DI
Prefeeder MIN value message digital input.

Signal does not affect control.
P 31.09 Err. MAX Flow Gate Default: W2

Cause of Event:
"Prefeeder Pos. MAX" (P31.10) digital input event message.
Position controlled prefeeder is in MAX position.

Parameters
P 31.10 Pos. MAX Flow Gate Default: --

Alternative: DI
Prefeeder MAX value message digital input.

Signal does not affect control.
7.34 Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip

P 32.01 2-Sensor Slip act. Default: NO
Alternative: NO
YES
The 2-sensor slip speeds up the detection of slip errors with slow-going belts.
Normal slip monitoring (see Block 17) requires a belt sensor to detect a new
slip error upon entire belt circuits. The 2-sensor slip can do without belt sensor
to continuously acquire the slip error. For detailed description of function, see
Appendix.
P 32.02 Source Sensor 1 Default: Speed

Alternative: Speed
DI
Either the input of the tacho sensor (speed) (P 04.07 speed detection) or any
other digital input can be chosen as source for sensor 1.
The requirements for a signal connected via DI are described in the Annex.
P 32.03 DI Sensor 1 Default: --

Alternative: DI
If you set Sensor 1 source (P 32.02) to DI, determine physical input.

The requirements for a signal connected via DI are described in the Annex.
P 32.04 Char. Value Sensor 1 Default: 100.00 I/m

Min: 0.01 I/m Max: 1000000.00 I/m
Sensor 1 characteristic value if P32.02 is set to DI.

No further function.
P 32.05 DI Sensor 2 Default: --

Alternative: DI
Sensor 2 digital input.

Parameters
P 32.06 Char. Value Sensor 2 Default: 100.00 I/m

Min: 0.01 I/m Max: 1000000.00 I/m
P 32.07 Slip Value 2 Default: 2.00 % length

Admissible change of belt length in % of total belt length.
P 32.08 Slip Error 2 Default: W1

Cause of Event:
Slip error has exceeded limit value P 32.07.
P 32.09 DO Slip 2 Default: --

Alternative: DO
Slip error (P 32.08) digital output

Parameters
7.35 Event Messages

Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
Before acknowledging event message, always remedy cause of

fault. If this is not done, system has the potential to cause injuries or damage
to the machine.
Reactions on events can be parametrized using event classes. The
parameters appertaining to event messages are indicated in brackets.
There are four different event classes:
Event Class Code Display / Effect
Event is highlighted and underscored. All measuring
Alarm A and control operations are aborted. System goes to
safe state.
Event is underscored. Message remains
underscored until event has been acknowledged.
Warning 1 W1 Display does not efface before cause of fault has
been remedied. Measuring and control tasks are not
affected.
Event is displayed as long as cause has not been
Warning 2 W2 remedied. Measuring and control tasks are not
affected.
Event is not displayed. Measuring and control tasks
Ignore IG
are not affected.
The event messages are comprised in form of groups. The following priority
applies:
Event Group Symbol
System message SY
Sequence monitoring SC
Electrical system WE
Mechanical system WM
Material flow MF
Interlocking IL
Controllers CO
Check-and-correct system CH
Calibration CA
Maximum HI
Minimum LO
NOTE: In the following list, the parameters appertaining to the event message
displayed are stated in brackets.

Parameters
Event Group: Calibration

CA-01 LC Input ( P 06.05 )
Load cell cable wrong.
Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
Supply voltage is below 19V.
Error must be available for minimum 3s.
If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
Check for either possibility. If scale connot be restarted after remedy of fault,
turn device off and restart.
CA-02 Tacho Input ( P 06.04 )
Input frequency exceeds 2900 Hz.
Prerequisite: Parameter P 04.07 "Speed Measurement" not set to "--".
CA-03 LC Input Bin ( P 24.07 )
CA-04 LC Input 2.Bridge ( P 26.07 )
CA-05 Linearization ( P 30.10 )
Monitoring for monotonously rising compensation takes place:
o Upon linearization start
o Upon parameter change.
Event Group: Check Measurement

CH-01 Min. Check Quantity ( P 27.17 )
After completion of measurement, bin weigher has acquired a check amount
below that preset minimum value (P 27.16). Check measurement aborts.
Either number of belt circuits (P 27.12,13) or belt load is too small.
CH-02 Min. Fill Weight ( P 27.19 )
During measurement, bin level has fallen below admissible minimum value (P
27.18). Check measurement aborts.
Check setpoint is too big or storage quantity too small.
CH-03 Max. Fill Weight ( P 27.21 )
Storage quantity (P 27.15) exceeds MAX bin level (P 27.20). Check aborts
immediately after start.
In case of error, check both parameters values.
CH-04 Abs.Tare Corr. Error ( P 27.33 )
This correction raises the zero point correction total to above limit P 27.31.
No automatic correction is performed. Acknowledge message and accept the
result in manual. Monitoring and reporting take place in the acknowledgement
phase.
Correction evaluation factor P 27.37 is not considered for error evaluation.
Tabs = Absolute tare in %

TK = Parameter P 09.05 (Tare Correction) in kg/m
Qo = Nominal platform load in kg/m
N = Acquired zero point error (Z-F)/L in kg/m

Parameters
L = Belt length passed over weighbridge during check measurement

CH-05 Rel.Tare Corr. Error ( P 27.34 )
Relative zero point error, i.e. the error acquired during last check
measurement exceeds limit value P 27.32.

CH-06 Abs.Span Corr. Error ( P 27.35 )
Causes the total of all span corrections to exceed limit value P 27.31.
Babs = Absolute span in %

B = Acquired span error F/Z
K = Parameter P 09.01 (Span Correction)
1 = Default of Parameter P 09.01
CH-07 Rel.Span Corr. Error ( P 27.36 )
Relative span error, i.e. error acquired during last check measurement,
exceeds limit value P 27.32.
Values Brel, Trel, B and Z are displayed during acknowledgement phase.

CH-08 Scale Not Stopped ( P 27.26 )
15. The echo (P 27.25) is pending (3s after "Stop Filling"). Check
does not abort but waits for echo.
16. If there is no echo during measuring phase, i.e. Start Filling is
reported, check aborts without message.
CH-09 No Check Release ( P 27.07 )
On-stream calibration system started; no release available.
Message is output in turned-on and turned-off state of scale.
CH-10 Prepare Check Meas. ( P 27.27 )
Check process is in filling or damping phase, or bin level exceeds maximum
check level (P27.20).
CH-11 Expect Acceptance ( P 27.29 )
On-stream calibration system waits for operator's intervention.
(a) Accept correction
(b) Reject correction and abort.
If "Automatic Correction" (P 27.02 = YES) is selected, intervention is required
only if tolerance is exceeded.
CH-12 Check Gate Error ( P 27.43 )
Check gate not in proper position or too slow.
CH-13 Max. Bin Error ( P 27.45 )
Upon second attempt, measuring error acting on bin exceeded set limit (P
27.44).
Abort also takes place with event class IG.

Parameters
Event Group: Controller

CO-01 Controller Limited ( P 06.14 )
Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response
threshold. After some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
17. Material flow missing or irregular.
18. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action: Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At
nominal feed rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.
CO-02 Err. MIN Flow Gate ( P 31.07 )
"Prefeeder Pos. MIN" (P31.08) digital input event message.
Position controlled prefeeder is in MIN position.
CO-03 Err. MAX Flow Gate ( P 31.09 )
"Prefeeder Pos. MAX" (P31.10) digital input event message.
Position controlled prefeeder is in MAX position.
CO-04 Bin Load MAX Sensor ( P 24.29 )
Fill weight sensor digital input has responded.
Event Group: Electrical System

WE-01 Power Failure ( P 06.09 )
Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off.
During power failure, no totalization takes place.
Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
WE-02 Namur Error VSE1-DI3 ( P 12.11 )
Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable.
If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG
type. External Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required (the
same holds the for the Namur monitorings below).
WE-08 Analog Input< Offset ( P 06.20 )
The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the set zero point
elevation.

Parameters
Event Group: Interlock

IL-01 No Release ( P 03.07 )
No release signal from source defined by Parameter "Release".
IL-02 Error Mechanics ( P 23.10 )
IL-03 Error Electricity ( P 23.12 )
IL-04 Error Mechatronics ( P 23.15 )
IL-05 Not Ready ( P 23.17 )
IL-06 Not Ready for Start ( P 23.19 )
IL-07 Error AND-Gate 1 ( P 23.22 )
IL-08 Error AND-Gate 2 ( P 23.25 )

>
Event Group: Material Flow
MF-05 Moisture > MAX ( P 28.10 )
MF-06 Out of Tolerance ( P 14.15 )

Batch out of tolerance
Event Group: MAX

HI-01 LC Input > MAX ( P 06.07 )
Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action: Check material infeed.
HI-02 I > MAX ( P 08.05 )
Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
HI-03 Load > MAX ( P 08.09 )
Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
HI-04 v > MAX ( P 08.13 )
Belt speed exceeds set MAX value.
HI-05 Deviation ( P 06.13 )
Maximum control deviation exeeded. Actual feed rate strongly differs from
setpoint for more than preset time.
There are various possible causes:
1. Material handling error
Material flows irregularly or cannot be discharged with sufficient qualitiy.
Controller is out of limit for a certain time.
2. Electronics error
Check external feed rate controller and motor cablings. Check feed
controller for proper setting (current limitation, speed range).
3. Calibration error
During initial calibration, controller was set so critically that smallest
changes of system properties cause unreliable operation.

Parameters
Action: Repeat this commissioning step.

HI-10 Bin: LC Input > MAX ( P 24.08 )
HI-11 B > MAX ( P 24.19 )
Set MAX value exceeded up
HI-12 2nd Bridge > MAX ( P 26.12 )
Event Group: Mechanic

WM-01 Belt Limit Switch ( P 12.10 )
Belt limit switch for belt run monitoring has been triggered.
WM-02 Slip Error ( P 17.12 )
Admissible slip exceeded.
WM-03 Belt Skew ( P 17.10 )
Belt has run off-center. Scale is no longer operable.
Action: See Belt Slip event.
WM-04 Belt Drift ( P 17.08 )
Belt out of tolerance.
Action:
1. Clean tail and drive pulleys.
2. Align belt.
Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be,
remedy fault.
WM-05 Slip Error 2 ( P 32.08 )
Slip error has exceeded limit value P 32.07.
Event Group: MIN

LO-01 LC Input < MIN ( P 06.06 )
Load cell load is smaller than 3% of load cell rated capacities.
LO-02 I < MIN ( P 08.03 )
Flow rate smaller than set minimum value.
LO-03 Load < MIN ( P 08.07 )
Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
LO-04 v < MIN ( P 08.11 )
Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
LO-11 B < MIN ( P 24.16 )
Set MIN value exceeded down
LO-12 2nd Bridge < MIN ( P 26.09 )
>
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring
SC-01 Setpoint Limited ( P 06.08 )
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the
nominal value.

Parameters
c) Emergency setpoint is active (P 06.18).

SC-02 Stand-By ( P 06.02 )
Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit
(Parameter P06.03 "Standby Limit"). Material prefeeder cuts off.
SC-03 Maint. Scale Run. ( P 15.05 )
Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time".
After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply
informs you that service work is required.
SC-04 Maintenance Int.Elec ( P 15.03 )
Total of power-on time exceeds value of "Voltage On-Time" parameter.
After every time interval elapsed, a message is output. This message simply
informs you that service work is required.
SC-05 External Event 1 ( P 12.02 )
External fault signal at input 1.
External fault signal at Input 2.
External fault signal across fault input 3.
External fault signal across fault input 4
>
Event Group: System Message
SY-01 Memory Error ( P 06.15 )
Error has been detected by cyclic check of program and parameter
memories. If SY 01 is output immediately after power-up, check VSM module
for proper seat.
If this is no help, call the "Load Default Parameters" function. If this does not
help either, contact the Schenck Service; in most cases, scale is inoperable.
SY-02 Com. VSE20100-Unit 2 ( P 01.10 )
SY-03 Com. VSE20100-Unit 3 ( P 01.11 )
SY-04 Com. VEA20100-Unit 1 ( P 01.07 )
Action: Check cabling .
SY-05 Com. VEA20100-Unit 2 ( P 01.08 )
Achtion: Check cabling .

Parameters

SY-06 Com. VEA20100-Unit 3 ( P 01.09 )
SY-07 Comm. Error OP ( P 01.01 )
Error in communication with DISOCONT control unit.
Action: Check cable connections.
SY-08 Comm. Error Host ( P 20.03 )
Interruption of serial communication exceeds the timeout period.
SY-09 License Violation ( P 06.16 )
Loaded software or activated parameter blocks (e.g. Bin Weigher) are not
licensed through the VSM module used. You need a module with a higher
type number.
The only possible event class is "Alarm".
SY-10 Com. Ext. I/O ( P 01.13 )
Error in communication with DISOCONT External I/O (EIO).
SY-11 Com. VEA 20101 ( P 01.15 )
Error in communication with extension card VEA 20101.

Typical Applications
8 Typical Applications
8.1 Weighfeeder
The figure below shows the DISOCONT controlling a weighfeeder. Material is
extracted from a silo and off-handled by a conveyor belt. Actual feed rate is
compared to setpoint, with the difference being transferred to controller R1.
Controller continues varying belt speed until actual value equals setpoint.
If a controlled prefeeder is required, additional belt load controller R2 can be
activated which is capable of controlling prefeeder continuously or via starting
pulses.
Yz
V
-
R2
+ + Q V
M
V Qo
P - ACT
Y Xd
R1
vh206221_gb.cdr + SET
kg/hr
Fig.: Weighfeeder
Feature Setting
Set Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" to
Controller type
"STANDARD" or "UNIVERS"
See "Standard Controller" figure shown at the "Detail:
Control scheme
Control" item of the Appendix
Actual feed rate Q *
Gravimetric mode
V control
Belt speed control Volumetric mode
You can also select the weighfeeder control structure by setting Parameter P
10.01 "Optim. Controller" to "UNIVERS". This offers the additional possibility
to adapt the controller to changes in weigh span amplification caused by
varying belt load.

8.2 Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder

Feed rate is controlled for setpoint by changing of belt load. Belt speed is
normally constant.
NOTE: Position-controlled prefeeders require an external three-point step
controller to be available.
The figure below shows the control loop of a belt weigher operating with
connected prefeeder.
Prefeeder
Q V
- ACT
Y Xd
R
+ SET
Vh206224_gb.cdr
kg/hr
Fig.: Belt Weigher With Controlled Prefeeder
Feature Setting
Controller type
"UNIVERS"
As shown in the "Universal Controller" figure at the
Control scheme
"Detail: Control" of the Appendix
Actual feed rate Q * V
Gravimetric mode
control
Prefeeder control via
Volumetric mode
setpoint bypass
The control scheme corresponds to that of the Universal Controller (s.
"Details: Control" item in the Appendix). If Gravimetric Mode is selected,
actual feed rate is controlled. If Volumetric Mode is selected, prefeeder is
controlled via the setpoint bypass (s. figure).

Enter the following parameter settings for the "Belt Weigher With Controlled
Material Prefeeder" application:
Parameter Setting
P 10.01 "Optim.Controller" "UNIVERS"
P 10.08 "Bypass" apr.10...15 mA
P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" "Yconst"
P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" apr. Tt / 5
P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" apr. Tt / 5
P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison" "W-X"
P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources" "I"
P 10.15 "Adaption 1" "1 / W"
P 10.16 "Adaption 2" "W"
The adaption points enable the controller working point to be quickly adapted
to setpoint changes. Parameters KP and TN are maintained. Filter
Parameters P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord"
simulate the time behaviour of weigh span with dead time Tt, so that upon
setpoint steps only the bypass is active. If after a setpoint step actual value
strongly tends to over or undershooting, filters have to be adapted empirically.

8.3 Belt Weigher with Constant Load

An uncontrolled prefeeder feeds the material onto a conveyor belt. Controller
adapts belt speed such that belt load always corresponds to rated value Qo.
The figure below shows the control loop for the "Belt Weigher With Constant
Load" application.
Prefeeder
Q V
ACT
+
Y Xd ACT
R
-
SET
Vh206225_gb.cdr
Qo
Fig.: Belt Weigher With Constant Load
Features Setting
Controller type
"UNIVERS"
As shown in the "Universal Controller" figure at the
Control scheme
"Detail: Control" of the Appendix
Actual feed rate Q * V
Gravimetric mode
control
Prefeeder control via
Volumetric mode
setpoint bypass
NOTE: To prevent belt from standstill with smaller belt loads, enter control
magnitude lower value by setting Parameter P 10.07 "Position at STOP" to
"Lower Limit".
The always identical working point of the weighing system permits a high
measuring accuracy to be achieved. Feed rate at the point of discharge
corresponds to the prefeeder feed rate.
Enter the following parameter settings for the "Belt Weigher With Constant
Load" application:
Parameter Setting
P 10.01 "Optim.Controller" "UNIVERS"
P 10.07"Position at STOP" "Lower Limit"
P 10.08 "Bypass" apr.10...15 mA
P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" "Yconst"
P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" 0
P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" 0
P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison" "X-W"

Parameter Setting
P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources" "Q"
P 10.15 "Adaption 1" "V"
P 10.16 "Adaption 2" "NO"
Belt speed control changes the dead time between prefeeder and weighing
platform. To ensure same control quality over wide ranges, controller is
adapted as a function of belt speed.

Appendix
9 Appendix
This chapter details special functions.
9.1 Linearization
Belt load linearization is normally not required. It makes good sense only with
high belt load variations and simple scale mechanics.
Calibration Using Check Weights:
19. Apply check weight Q1. Start scale and call zero setting program.
20. Note zero setting final result (under display) and enter later into
Parameter Lin-I1. Abort program; do not overwrite result.
21. Enter
into Parameter Lin-S1.
Value Meaning Unit

Q1 Check weight kg
L Effective platform length m
q0 Nominal belt load kg/m
22. Repeat steps 1...3 with increasing check weights for all other
linearization points.
Calibration Through Check With Material:
23. Perform material check at q1 nominal belt load.
24. Read off belt load mean value q1(a) from DISOCONT. Enter value
into Parameter Lin-I1.
25. Enter
into Parameter Lin-S1.
Value Description Unit

Ms Material amount fed out kg
Material amount read off
Ma kg
from DISOCONT
26. Repeat steps 1...3 with increasing check weights for all other
linearization points.

Appendix
9.2 Sensor Slip
The smallest slip that still can be acquired SMin is the bigger value of S1 or S2.
Value Meaning
IB No. of Belt Circuits (P 09.06)
K1 Sensor 1 Char. Val. (P 32.04)
K2 Sensor 2 Char. Val. (P 32.06)
Vs VS Characteristic (P 04.01)
Example:
Value Size
vs 10 000 I/m
IB 30 000 I/r
K1, K2 100 I/m
SMin 0.667 %
If the value of Parameter P 32.07 falls below value SMin, SMin automatically
becomes active.
Attention!
The pulses on sensors S1 and S2 must be available for at least 1.2 seconds.
Pulse intervals must also exceed 1.2 sec.
When using binary inputs on main VSE (equipped with program VDB 20150-
xx) for sensor signals, the minimum pulse/pause times are reduced to 0.2s.

Appendix
9.3 Source Selection

Source selection is used to assign a logical signal (source) to a hardware
channel (unit, channel).
Moreover, it can be used to determine the digital signal level which causes
signal to become active (level = low or high).
Hardware configuration is thus highly flexible. Assignment of analog and
digital inputs/outputs to logical signals can be optimized for the DISOCONT
assemblies spatial arrangement.
Every signal that can be configured is identified by the following information:
o Source = Logical signal name
o Unit = Hardware assembly for which signal has been configured

Counter number 1-n stands for the address set in the following table:
! VSE = System unit
! VEA = Input/output unit
! VLB = Local control box
! Hardware address setting for Local Bus

Address switch for Device-Net setting:
VSE1 = 1
VSE2 = 2
VSE3 = 3
VEA1 = 11
VEA2 = 12
VEA3 = 13
VLB1 = 21
EIO = 31
o Channel = Name of output, or input, on assembly
! DI = Digital input
! DO = Digital output
! AO = Analog output
! AI = Analog input
o Level = Effective level
! Low = input 0V, or output contact open

With Namur inputs, "Low" corresponds to > 1.6 mA current, or
sensor not covered
! High = Input energized, or output contact closed

With Namur inputs, "High" corresponds to < 1.6 mA current,
or sensor covered

Appendix
9.4 Setpoint and Start Sources
Fig.: Setpoint and Start Sources

"Select Setpoint" and "Start/Stop" sources can be started from various
operating sources. Source is preselected by parameter.
Using the "Keyboard Mode" dialog function, we can change from preselected
sources to keyboard, and vice versa.
Parameter Function Range
P03.02 Start source Keyboard/serial/contact
P03.03 Setpoint source Keyboard/serial
analog
P03.08 Setpoint with percental evaluation --, OP, AI, DI4
Setpoint Displays:
Value Description
P Effective setpoint
Pe External setpoint (if selected with P03.03)
Pr Percental evaluation (if selected with P03.08)
In Keyboard Mode, selected Pe and Pr displays are maintained.

Entering Setpoint Via Keyboard:
Value Description
T Absolute setpoint (only if no external setpoint is selected)
Percental setpoint (only if P03.08 is set to OP and analog, or serial,
input is selected with P03.03.
Tr
Relative setpoint can also be selected using analog input (see
Parameter P03.08).

Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization:
Upon change-over from external setpoint source to keyboard,
external setpoint is acquired. In opposite direction, the
external source is active.
Start / Stop Synchronization:
Upon change-over from external setpoint source to keyboard,
the Start/Stop status is maintained. In opposite direction, the
external source is active.
Power OFF:
Keyboard setpoints are stored.
Fig.: Control Inputs/Outputs
Parameter Function Range

P05.01 Start-up period in % length
P05.03 Counter tracking time in s

Appendix
Point in time:
1. As long as contact is open (no release signal), no start command is
active.
2. Release signal is available, feeder is released.
3. During start-up period P05.01 feeder is in volumetric mode.

In many cases, P05.01 is set to zero.
4. Automatic change-over to gravimetric mode takes place.
5. Cut-off command is output (Release contact open).

Prefeeder immediately cuts off.
6. During counter tracking time (P05.03), feed rate acquisition and

totalization are still active.
Alarm:
If feeder is cut off due to Alarm, prefeeder immediately stops.
If the time set by Parameter P05.03 has elapsed,
measurement is complete.
Measurement and Displays:
Belt load and belt speed are always acquired and displayed.
Feed rate is acquired only in turned-on state and during
counter tracking time (P05.03). All phases of active feed rate
acquisition are reported by ON message.

Appendix
9.5 Batching
The figure below applies to controlling feeders.
Fig.: Details: Batching
NOTE: The most important batching settings are effected in Parameter Block
14 "Batch Mode".
Batching Sequence
("Details:Batching" figure)
Point 0 : Connect scale to start batch.
Point 1 : Cut off scale to stop batching. Totalizing counter

continuous measurement for the time set by Parameter P
05.03 "Afterfl. Totalizer".
Point 2 : Restart scale to resume batching. Also possible

during counter tracking time.
Point 3 : Set feed rate moves towards zero; Full Feed or

Dribble Feed signal changes its level. This point is determined
using Parameter P 14.03 "Adaption Time" indicating the reset
time.
Point 4 : Cut-off point. Batch setpoint minus the correction

amount acquired by Parameter P 14.04 "Correction Amount"
is reached and batch is complete. Feed unit cuts off.

Appendix
Point 5 : Material afterflow. Totalizing counter continues

operating for the time set by Parameter P 05.03 "Afterfl.
Totalizer". New batch can start only if afterflow time has
elapsed.
Adaption
After every complete batch, system computes a correction amount based on
missing amount and stores value in Parameter "Correction Amount". Steps 3
and 4 automatically shift during next batching operation (s. Fig. Details:
Batching).
K(new) = K(old) + Adap * Error
K(new) = New correction amount
Adap. = Adaption factor
Errors smaller than smallest display digit are not corrected.
Alarm
Aborts batch. After remedy of cause and acknowledgement of message,
batching can be resumed.
Power OFF
Batch aborts, batching mode remains selected. All counter readings and batch
values are stored. Next start command starts new batch
Stand-By Mode
During deceleration time, feeder can go to stand-by mode. Relevant message
is suppressed.
Limit Values
Event messages P-min and v-min are suppressed during deceleration time.
This does not apply to digital outputs.
Clearance Mode
Batching with Parameter P 05.02 "Volum. Clearance" = > 0 makes good
sense only if prefeeder is controlled by the DISOCONT. Control sequence
slightly varies.
o Prefeeder cuts off at Point 4 as shown the in the "Details: Batching"
figure.
o Drive and dribble feed contact switch as soon as set clearance time
has elapsed.
o Counter tracking time starts as soon as drive and dribble feed cut off.

Appendix
9.6 Feed Rate Control

The setting of P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" determines the control scheme
used for the particular application.
The "STANDARD" controller optimization is specially designed for speed-
controlled weighfeeders. The figure below shows the control loop.
Fig.: Standard Control Loop
The "UNIVERS" control optimization with setpoint bypass and adapting

interventions can be matched to the specific task by using additional
parameters. The figure below shows the extended control loop:

Appendix
Fig.: Universal Controller Control Loop

The listing below indicates the meanings of the most important parameters
occurring in the "Standard Controller Control Loop" and "Universal Controller
Control Loop" figures.
NOTE: For information on other parameters, see the "Parameters" item.
Parameter P 10.02 "P-Component KP"
(cf. "Controller Constants" figure.) Nominal feed rate, or nominal belt load, is
used as reference.
Parameter P 10.03 "I-Component TN"
(cf. "Controller Constants" figure.) TN is the time during which the I-
component causes the same control magnitude change as the P-component.
Fig.: Controller Constants

Appendix
Special Cases
(cf. "Controller Constants" figure.)
1. KP = 0 : I-Controller. TN is the reciprocal of integration constant
KI, i.e. a big value means a slower controller.
KI = 1/TN in %/(mA/s).
2. TN = 0 : P-Controller. The I-Component is reset.
3. KP=TN= 0 : Controller output = elevation
4.
Parameter P 05.01 "Volum. Start-Up"
Volumetric start-up mode for belt circuits after connection of scale. See
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" and further explanations given at this
item.
Parameter P 05.02 "Volum. Clearance"
Volumetric clearance mode for belt circuits after disconnection of scale. See
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" and further explanations given at this
item.
Parameter P 10.08 "Bypass"
Proportional to setpoint, control magnitude is additively superimposed by a
value. Parameter indicates nominal setpoint bypass value in mA.
Parameter P 10.09 "Store"
Stores integral component or belt load after disconnection of scale. Acts in
start-up mode.
Value Meaning
NO No storage
YES Store
YES-A Store only if scale did not fail due to alarm
Prerequisites: Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" = UNIVERS,
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst.
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode"
Determines volumetric mode. There are two possible selections:
Qconst: Controller continuous operating. Actual value is the
current belt speed multiplied by Qconst. Qconst can be either
the value of nominal belt load or the value stored after cut-off
(Parameter P 10.09 "Store"). This mode is designed for speed
controlled weighfeeders.
Yconst: Controller cuts off. Setpoint bypass and constant
controller output YR are active. YR is either 0 or the integral
controller component stored after cut-off (Parameter P10.03
"I-Component"). This mode is designed, for instance, for belt
weighers operating with controlled prefeeders.
Parameter P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord"
1st-order filter for setpoint branch in (cf. Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd
Ord").
Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord"
2nd-order filter for setpoint branch. If bypass is used, set the approximate
control loop time pattern using Parameters P 10.15 "Adaption 1" and P 10.16
"Adaption 2". If no bypass is used, Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1" can be
used as setpoint ramp.
Parameter P 10.13 "Set/Act Comparison"

Appendix
Forming deviation Xd:

o Xd = Set-Act (W-X)
o Xd = Act-Set (X-W)
Case "Xd = Act-Set (X-W)" makes good sense only with belt weighers
controlled for constant belt load.
Parameter P 10.14 "Set/Act Sources"
Selecting setpoint and actual value:
o I : Setpoint = feed rate corresponding to the setpoint source set by
Parameter P 03.03 "Absolute Setpoint".
Actual value = measured feed rate
o Q : Setpoint = nominal belt load Qo;

Actual value = measured belt load
In the second case, setpoint cannot be entered from selected setpoint
sources.
Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1"
Controlled adaption of controller input
Value Meaning
NO No adaption
V Multiplication by V/Vo
1/Q Multiplication by Qo/Q
Multiplication by
1/W
Wo/W
Adapting the controller to variable loop gains, control behaviour is improved.
Parameter P 10.16 "Adaption 2"
Controlled adaption of controller output
Value Meaning
NO No adaption
Multiplication by setpoint
W
(cf. Parameter P 10.15 "Adaption 1")
Control parameter values essential for some operating states:
Power ON
Reset controller. Set Parameter P 10.11 "Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and Parameter
P 10.12 "Setp. Filter 2nd Ord" to 0. Qold = Qo.
STOP Scale
Parameters P 10.11"Setp. Filter 1st Ord" and Parameter P 10.12 "Setp. Filter
2nd Ord" are still active, controller integral component and belt load are
stored.
START Scale
Set stored controller or belt load value to 0 (Qo) as a function of Parameter P
10.09 "Store" or use value for start-up mode.

Appendix
Stand-By
If setpoint falls below stand-by limit for more than 3 s, scale operates in Stand-
By mode.
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst
Cut off controller and initialize. Y corresponds to Parameter P
10.07 "Position at STOP".
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst
Cut off controller. Y corresponds to Parameter P 10.07
"Position at STOP". Reset or store integral component as a
function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store".
"Drive" and "Prefeeder" control outputs are switched to OFF,
"Feeder START" output remains set to START. System
immediately returns to normal mode.
Synchronization
Upon changes to setpoint bypass and adaption points no synchromization
takes place. To prevent bigger feed steps from occurring, change bypass in
small steps, or with scale cut off. This equally applies to adaption changes.
Operating Intervals with Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst
Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" determines the types of volumetric,
start-up and clearance modes.
Controller parameter selection "Controller Type = STANDARD" has the same
effect as parameter setting "Volumetric Type" = Qconst.
o Start-Up: Start command immediately sets "Prefeeder" and "Drive"
outputs to START. Controller belt load input is set to nominal belt load
Qo or stored value Qa as a function of Parameter P 10.09 "Store".
Belt speed is controlled proportional to setpoint. After the start-up
period, system automatically switches over to the belt load
measurement value, e.g. the feed rate (Gravimetric Mode).
o Clearance: Stop command immediately shuts prefeeder. Controller

continues operating as in start-up mode. Belt load is not the
measurement value but value Qa last measured and stored. This
ensures smooth change-over. Qa is the value smoothed by the
display filter and stored for next start-up period. Start command during
clearance triggers new start-up period.
o Alarm: Alarm messages cut off scale without clearance. Only Qa is

stored.
o Volumetric: Belt speed is controlled proportional to setpoint. On the

controller belt load input, constant value Qo (nominal belt load) is
available. Volumetric mode does not use any stored values upon
start-up and clearance. In contrast to gravimetric mode, you can enter
the triple nominal setpoint.
o Volumetric Synchronous:
See above; however, in place of Qo, the last value measured before
changeover becomes active.
o Gravimetric: Feed rate control I = Q * v. Q and v are the current

measurement values. Gravimetric mode is given outside volumetric,
start-up and clearance modes. Setpoint is limited to nominal setpoint.

Appendix
Operating Intervals with Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Yconst

This setting is possible only if Parameter P 10.01 "Optim. Controller" is set to
"UNIVERS".
o Start-up: Start command immediately switches "Prefeeder" and
"Drive" outputs to START. Controller remains cut off. Its YR output is
set to 0 or integral component stored as a function of Parameter P
10.09 "Store". External controller drive thus operates proportionally to
setpoint. Once start-up is complete, controller automatically connects
and gravimetric mode (feed rate control) starts.
o Clearance: Stop command immediately shuts prefeeder and cuts off

controller. The integral component is stored for next start-up period.
Setpoint bypass is superimposed by the integral component of
controller YR. After start-up, drive automatically cuts off. A start
command during clearance triggers new start-up period.
o Alarm: Alarm messages cut off scale without clearance. Only the
controller integral component is stored.
o Volumetric: Only setpoint bypass is active. Controller integral

component is reset and controller cuts off. Any external control drive
is this controlled proportionally to setpoint. As maximum setpoint you
can enter the triple nominal feed rate of scale.
o Volumetric Synchronous:
See above; however, the controller integral component is not reset.
o Gravimetric: See Parameter P 10.10 "Volumetric Mode" = Qconst

Displaying/storing operating modes
Volumetric: "VOL" in upper text line
Start-up: "VOL->" in upper text line
Clearance: "VOL->" in upper text line
Keyboard mode: "OP" in upper text line
Gravimetric: No special symbol
Volumetric synchronous: VOL-S
Power OFF
Volumetric, Gravimetric, and Keyboard modes are stored.

Appendix
9.7 Effective Platform Load

Effective platform length value is essential for calibration. Determined by the
platform construction, it can normally be taken from Spec Sheet. However, we
recommend to check for actual length and enter value into Parameter "Eff.
Platf. Length".
Single Idler Platform Scale
The figure below shows the operating principle of a single idler platform scale.
Vh206212gb.cdr
Fig.: Single Idler Platform Scale

The hatched area shows the distribution of load on weighing platform.
Platform load weight is applied to load cell via a weighed idler. This can be
done via lever system or leaf-spring parallel guidance.
With a single idler platform scale, effective platform length is computed using
the following formula:
L = Lg / 2

Lg = total platform length as shown in the Single Idler
Platform Scale figure.
Multi Idler Platform Scale
The figure below shows the operating principle of a multi idler platform scale.
Platform
Vh206213gb.cdr
Fig.: Multi Idler Platform Scale

With a multi idler platform scale, effective platform length is computed using
the following formula:
L = (a+b) / 2 + c

a,b,c = length section as shown in the Multi Idler Platform
Scale figure
Buckled Platform
A buckled platform is of two-sectional design. In its centre the load is applied
to the load cell.

Appendix
For load application, weighed idlers can be replaced by the sectional weighing
table. The figure below shows the operating principle of a multi idler platform
scale.
Mount
Vh206215_gb.cdr
Fig.: Buckled Platform

With a buckled platform scale, effective platform length is computed using the
following formula:
L = Lg / 2
Lg = total platform length as shown in the Buckled Platform
figure

Appendix
9.8 Belt Load Control
Fig.: Belt Load Control

Appendix
9.9 Hopper Control
Fig.: Hopper Control

Appendix
9.10 Interlocking P23.01...P23.19
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by parameter setting. The drawing shows the
default values.
o LOW = Closed contact in position of rest, i.e. voltage is available. If
signal is active, contact is open (N/C contact).
o HIGH = Open contact in position of rest, i.e. no voltage is available. If

signal is active, contact is closed (N/O contact).

Appendix
E = Event message
DI = Digital input
DO = Digital output
Legende Parameter Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of the ALARM class
DI E 1 P 23.06 DI Error Electricity 1
DI E 2 P 23.07 DI Error Electricity 2
DI E 3 P 23.08 I Error Electricity 3
DI EE 1 P 12.03 DI Ext. Event 1
DI EE 4 P 12 20 DI Ext. Event 4
DI M 1 P 23.01 DI Error Mechanics 1
DO E P 23.11 DO Error Electricity
DO M P 23.09 DO Error Mechanics
DO MT 1 P 23.13 DO Error Mechatr 1
DO MT 2 P 23.14 DO Error Mechatr 2
DO R P 23.16 DO Ready
DO RS P 23.18 DO Ready vor Start
IL-2 P 23.10 Error Mechanics
IL-3 P 23.12 Error Electricity
IL-4 P 23.15 Error Mechatronics
IL-5 P 23.17 Not Ready
IL-6 P 23.19 Not Ready for Start
Int. Internal alarms from event messages CA-01, CA-02,
Alarm WM-01. WM02, WM-03, WM-04
No service mode: No keyboard mode, no local mode,
NO S
no simulation mode
Release P 03.06 Release
SC-5 P 12.02 Event Ext. Event 1
SC-6 P 12.04 Event Ext. Event2
Note:
With signals DI E1 - DI E2 and DI M1 - DI M5, you can also select LS (Logical
Signal) for source. This enables digital outputs to be used as well.

Appendix
9.11 Interlocking P23.20...P23.27
Fig. Sample Interlock Circuitry with AND-Gate 1

The above sample shows how the AND gates are used. The external fault
(P12.03) should become active only in turned-on state of scale (P12.12).
P 23.20 : Input LS-1 AND gate 1 : DO, VSE1, DO1, HIGH (Waage Ein,
P13.02)
P 23.21 : Input LS-2 AND gate 1 : DI, VSE1, DI1, HIGH (DI Ext.Ereignis 1,
P12.03)
In turned-on state of scale, error message IL07 (P23.22) is output after
approx. 0.33 s as soon as the External Event contact opens. At the same
time, digital output P 23.26 "DO AND Gate 1" is set.
Note:
Input/output signal levels are polled directly. This means the HIGH/LOW level
preselection is irrelevant for inputs.

Appendix
9.12 Details: Time Gate P22.28...P22.37
Logical signals Bit = 1 Bit = 0

Level: HIGH 1 0
Level: LOW 0 1
Fig.: Time Gate 1
Fig.: Time Gate Input/Output

Appendix
Note:
The time gate output cycle always consists of delay time plus pulse time.
Input is not reevaluated before this cycle has elapsed.
Use:
(i) Short signals --> extend for fixed time
(ii) Long signals --> generate cycle (pulse/pause)
Example:
Simple fill control using single contact (e.g. MAX).
If MAX contact is open, filling interrupts for a defined time. When this time has
elapsed, MAX contact is reevaluated, and cycle restarts.
Parameter "Active in OFF" lets you determine whether fill control operates in
ON state only or also in OFF state.

Appendix
9.13 On-stream Calibration System

"Abort Check" function 47
"B
Controller Optim." Calibrating Function 44
"Bin Contr. Man. Start/Stop" Calibrating Function 42
"Bin Controller Manual/Automatic" Calibrating Function 41
"CB
Weight Check" Calibrating Function 43
"Correct" function 46
"CW
Weight Check" 29
"LB
Pulses/Belt" 30
"Set Time" 32
"START / STOP Simulation" 32
"Start Range Corr." 46
"Start Tare Corr." function 45
"TB
Tare" Calibrating Function 42
"TW
Tare" 28
>0< Zero Set 24
Abort Batch 40
Acknowledge Event Messages 18
Alignment 48
Appendix 187
Basic Functions 16
Batching 10, 193
Batching Functions 39
Belt Influence Compensation BIC 9, 52
Belt Load Control 203
Belt Run Monitoring 51
Belt Speed Check 54
Belt Weigher with Constant Load 185
Belt Weigher With Controlled Material Prefeeder 8
Belt Weigher with Controlled Prefeeder 183
Belt Weighers With Constant Load 8
Bin Weigher 41
Calibrating Functions 27
Check Using Check Weight 53
Check Using Material 55
Checks 53
Commissioning 48
Control 7, 11, 50
Control Unit 11
Controller Calibration 51
Definitions 5
Deselect Batch 41
Details
Time Gate P22.28...P22.37 208
Display Events 25
Display Field 13
Effective Platform Load 201
Electrical Wiring 49
Enter Parameters 35
Event Messages 174
Feed Rate Control 195
Function Keys 14
Functional Check 53
General Information 57
Hopper Control 204
Input Important Parameters 49
Interlocking P23.01...P23.19 205
Interlocking P23.20...P23.27 207
LED 12
Linearization 187
Load Default Parameters 36
Maintenance 49
Measurement at Point of Discharge VAP 52
Measuring at Point of Discharge VAP 9
Measuring Principle 5
Mechanical Prerequisites 48
Message Field 14
On Manual 1
On-stream Calibration System 45, 210
Operating Functions 18
Operating Modes 7
Out-of-Round Error 48
Overview 4
Parameter Group 01 - Hardware Modules 78
Parameter Group 02 - Scale Definitions 81
Parameter Group 03 - Control Sources 85
Parameter Group 04 - Scale Rated Data 88
Parameter Group 05 - Scale Controlling 89
Parameter Group 06 - Scale Monitoring 90
Parameter Group 07 - Display Filters 95
Parameter Group 08 - Limit Values 96
Parameter Group 09 - Calibration Data 98
Parameter Group 10 - Controller 99
Parameter Group 11 - Analog Outputs 103
Parameter Group 12 - Digital Inputs 106
Parameter Group 13 - Digital Outputs 110
Parameter Group 14 - Batch Mode 113
Parameter Group 15 - Process Control 116
Parameter Group 16 - VAP 117
Parameter Group 17 - Scale Monitoring 117
Parameter Group 18 - Printer 120
Parameter Group 19 - Comm. EasyServe 121
Parameter Group 20 - Comm. Fieldbus 123
Parameter Group 21 - PLS Outputs 131
Parameter Group 22 - Belt Load Controller 133
Parameter Group 23 - Interlocking 136
Parameter Group 24 - Bin Weigher 140
Parameter Group 25 - Bin Level Controller 145
Parameter Group 26 - 2nd Weighbridge 149
Parameter Group 27 - Check System 153
Parameter Group 28 - Moisture 165
Parameter Group 29 - Dead Time 167
Parameter Group 30 - Linearization 169
Parameter Group 31 - Flow Gate 170
Parameter Group 32 - 2-Sensor Slip 172
Parameter List 61
Parameters 57
Print Batch 40
Print FMZ (Totalizing Counter Readings) 25
Print Parameter Shortlist 37
Print Parameters 36
Programming Functions 34
Read Parameters 34
Relative Setpoint 17
Reset Totalizing Counters 17
Safety Instructions 2
Select Batch 39
Select/Stop Prefeeder 19
Sensor Slip 188
Service Values 19
Setpoint and Start Sources 190
Setpoint Input 16
Setting external feed rate controller 50
Setting internal controller 50
Source Selection 189
START / STOP Keyboard Mode 23
START/STOP Feeder 16
Appendix
Status Field 12
Status Report 38
Test Display 19
Test Plug 56
To start: 45
Trend 26
Typical Applications 182
Volumetric / Volumetric Synchronous / Gravimetric Modes 23
Weighfeeder 7, 182
What is DISOCONT? 4

Measuring and Process Systems
SCHENCK PROCESS GmbH

D-64273 Darmstadt
Phone: +49 (0) 6151-32 10 28
Fax: +49 (0) 6151-32 11 72
E-Mail: sales.process@schenck.net
www.schenck-process.net
The Group
DISOCONT
System Manual
BV-H2085GB
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a
comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and
commissioning through to seamless support across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there
whenever and wherever you need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are there to
advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal, comprehensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on hand to analyse problems and
failures.
Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive Process Advanced Service System
provides you with the best service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It covers the entire service spectrum, from
simple inspections through to full service. Interested? Then find out more about the individual
components at www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.

Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office hours? Our service staff are on call
around the clock to deal with failures, service planning and other emergencies.

J +49 61 51-15 31 0

CONTENTS
On Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Use As Orginally Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Residual Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety-Minded Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Hints For The User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Conversion And Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Standalone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Group Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Mixed Equipment with MULTICONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mounting Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Local Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Local / Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cabinet Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Basic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Cable Fixation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DISOCONT Components Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fieldbox VFG 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cabinet Housing VEG 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System Unit VSE 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting Local Bus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Memory Module VSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
I/O Unit VEA 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Control Unit VLB 20105 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control Unit VLB 20120 (Fieldbox Variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fieldbus Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DISOCONT System Manual BV-H2085 GB, 0825 I1

Schenck Process
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Mounting Fieldbus Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Local Control Unit VLG 20105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
For Position-controlled Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Local Control Unit VLG 20110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Local Control Unit VLG 20120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Service Bus and Remote Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Sealing of Control Boxes (Protection Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Junction Box VAK 20100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Laptop Connecting Set (PC with Easyserve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Connecting Set For Portable VLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Use in the Hazardous Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Gas-Ex Area Zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Gas-Ex Area Zone 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dust-Ex Area Zone 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dust-Ex Area Zone 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fieldbus Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Attachment To Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
I2 BV-H2085 GB, 0825 System Manual DISOCONT

Schenck Process
On Manual
On Manual
This system manual describes the hardware components of the
DISOCONT system.
The functionality of the feeders and feeder controllers is described
in feeder operating manuals.
Safety Instructions
Use As Orginally Intended
The DISOCONT with connected scales, is exclusively designed for
weighing applications and directly relating control tasks. Any use
other than orginally intended is considered inappropriate.
General Risks
Designed to the latest state of the art, DISOCONT is safe in
operation.
The machine may cause residual risks if improperly installed,
commissioned and operated by unqualified workers.
Every person involved with installation, commissioning,
maintenance or repair is required to have read the manual,
particularly the safety instructions.
Residual Risks
The DISOCONT capabilities and equipment cover the control

technology only in part. Safety aspects of control technology have
to be planned and realized in the responsibilities of the plant
designer, outfitter and user such that residual risks are minimized.
Any existing regulation has to be observed. Residual risks in
conjunction with control technology have to be indicated.
After settings and operation have been established, make sure
that connected control systems remain in a safe state until the
DISOCONT switching behaviour has been checked.
The devices may be operated only in the provided housings.
There is danger of contacting live parts.
Safety-Minded Working
Changes of password-protected DISOCONT settings as well as
mounting and service work may be performed only by skilled and
authorized persons.
DISOCONT System Manual BV-H2085 GB, 0825 1

Schenck Process
Safety Instructions
Before performing work on electrical equipment, ensure that the

assemblies have been de-energized and protected from
inadvertent power-up.
Never acknowledge error messages before the cause has been

remedied and all hazards are excluded.
Safety Hints For The User

Superiors of operating and service personnel are required to know
the safety instructions as well as the safety relevant items of
operation and commissioning. They have to ascertain that the
operating personnel has read and understood all safety
instructions.
Before commissioning this system, check to see that the

DISOCONT does not cause additional risks in conjunction with
other machines or plant sections. If need be, the user shall add
cross-instructions, make them available to his operators and have
their receipt confirmed. The user shall clearly determine the lines
of responsibility (password privileges) concerning the DISOCONT
operation.
Conversion And Modification

The DISOCONT and connected scale must not be modified
neither in construction nor safety technology with out our prior
written consent. We do not assume any liability whatsoever for
damages resulting from unauthorized modifications.
Repair or soldering work to the boards and the exchange of

components must not be performed. When replacing complete
assemblies, always use the original Schenck Process parts.
2 BV-H2085 GB, 0825 System Manual DISOCONT

Schenck Process
Introduction
Introduction
Designed as modular electronics system for all weighing and
feeding tasks, DISOCONT is the system of choice whenever
material flows are to be measured and controlled in industrial
processes. The system performs the following functions:
n Measurement of transducer signals

n Control of feeder motors and auxiliaries (e.g. scrapers)
n Communication with other units, PCs and plant controls
via different fieldbus systems
n Operation via operator panel, PC/plant control, or
in manual mode
n Event report
n Data logging
n Report generation
The modular DISOCONT system is very flexible and offers a host

of advantages. It can be used in conjunction with
volumetric feeders
gravimetric feeders
continuous feeders
discontinuous feeders
DISOCONT can be used on loss-in-weight feeders, standard

weighfeeders, solids flow meters, Coriolis measuring systems, belt
weighers and batching systems.
This system offers all electronic and mechanical features required
by state-of-the-art plants:
n High weighing accuracy

n EMC protection
n RFI suppression
n Noise immunity
n Compliance with CE requirements
n Compliance with EN 600068
n Suitability for use in hazardous areas (electronics in safe area)
n Permanent storage of all operating parameters on memory
card
n Operation from 24V DC up to 230V AC.
DISOCONT further excels through easy handling, a feature which

is gaining ever increasing importance in modern plant control
concepts:
n Pluggable modules exchangeable with no need for

recalibration
n Intuitive graphical user interface for operation and service
n Fault tolerance
n Input/output channels configurable via software

Schenck Process
Introduction
n Manual operation (bypass) possible
Reduced cabling keeps system costs down. The special design

offers a host of advantages:
n Exhaustive diagnostics, locally or remote via modem

n Minimal service and spare parts requirements (small number of
hardware components, functionality provided by software )
n Simple replacement of faulty electronic components; current
parameters stored on memory card
n Defective modules exchangeable without recalibration.
The DISOCONT hardware and software has been re-designed

with the aim to keep the overall system costs down. Savings begin
with the installation: no external cabinet necessary, all
components can be attached to the feeder itself. The use of a
fieldbus system considerably reduces cabling.
Many different configurations are possible (e.g. for installation in
control cubicle) with the use of two basic modules. TheEasyServe
diagnostic and service software with its intuitive interface helps to
reduce maintenance costs.

Schenck Process
Configurations
Configurations
The DISOCONT electronics consists of system unit VSE and
several optional units that can be combined to form a system
tailored to your application. The optional units include additional
I/O unit VEA, control unit VLB, several fieldbus modules and two
different local control units VLG.
The system unit VSE performs all measuring and control tasks as
a function of scale software loaded. The VSE unit can be equipped
with a communication module for a standard fieldbus system.
A local fieldbus integrated into DISOCONT connects the other
DISOCONT units and local bus stations.
As extension module, input/output unit VEA is available and
connected to the VSE via the local bus. This unit is required if
controlled material infeed into feeder is desired or if the control unit
is mounted in a central control panel.
The most cost effective system configuration is local mounting with
integrated motor drive. This solution offers a compact system with
minimum cabling overhead and low overall costs. In addition, the
risk of EMC and RFI issues is considerably reduced since no
cable is required between motor and frequency controller.
Unfortunately, this variant is not suitable for all configurations. It
depends on the availability of integrated drives and the necessity
of explosion protection. In any event, DISOCONT offers a host of
equipment and installation variants.
Options
You can use the DISOCONT as a standalone unit for a single
feeder or a group of feeders, combine multiple DISOCONT units to
form one system and even combine various systems (e.g.
DISOCONT with MULTICONT MASTER). Combination of various
systems via fieldbus and process management system is always
possible.
There are two different options to control your DISOCONT:
n Use a VSE with fieldbus plug-in card and operate DISOCONT
via process management system
n Use a VSE together with an control unit VLB for parameter
input, process control and visualization.
System set-up is usually done using a PC equipped with

EasyServe program. For connection to PC, the built-in RS232
interface is used. When DISOCONT is controlled via central plant
control system, system unit VSE must be equipped with a fieldbus
plug-in card.
In all configurations, you can expand the system with a local

control unit VLG for bypassing DISOCONT. This unit enables
manual control (e.g. for service and maintenance). There are two
VLG variants: one with manual control for variable speed drive
(VLG 20100); a second, for systems with up to four manually
controlled drives (VLG 20110).

Schenck Process
Configurations
Below you will find a short description of the different

application-oriented variants.
Standalone Mode
DISOCONT controls a single feeder. For control, you can use the
above mentioned options, i.e. process management system
(PLC), plant control via fieldbus, operator panel and PC for
parameter input.
Fig. 1:
Group Mode
Fig. 2:
DISOCONT is so flexible that multiple feeders equipped with

DISOCONT can be combined to form a bigger system. You are
free to choose any of the commercial fieldbus systems described
below. The DISOCONT units are connected to fieldbus using a
single unit with a plug-in card, and internal communication takes
place via local bus. The present configuration enables the system
to operate in any mode.

Schenck Process
Configurations
Mixed Equipment with MULTICONT
Fig. 3:
Similar to group mode, you can use DISOCONT in an environment

where other Schenck MULTICONT systems are available. In this
case, system unit VSE must be equipped with a fieldbus module of
the MULTICONT SE bus type.
Network Connections
Communication with external systems, (e g. process
management), is performed using plug-in fieldbus cards for
different industrial networks. These cards are inserted into system
unit VSE that handles the communication with sub-units (e.g. I/O
unit VEA) via an internal network, the built-in local bus. Fieldbus
cards for the most frequently used fieldbus systems are available:
n SE-Bus, Modbus, J-Bus, 3964R
n CAN-Bus (DeviceNet Protocol)
n ETHERNET TCP/MODBUS
n PROFIBUS-DP
When using DISOCONT in conjunction with Schenck

MULTICONT, select the SE-Bus card.
Even though there are many differences among fieldbus systems,
every bus system is a network connecting different devices. We
have to consider cable types, topology and termination, if required.
Most networks including the built-in local bus, use a simple line
topology (Fig. 4) designed in daisy-chain technique. Another
variant is the star topology (right diagram in Fig. 4).
The individual extension modules, bus systems and standards are
detailed below. The built-in local bus uses a line topology with
drop lines enabling further branching using star topology. Please
observe the following restrictions:
n The maximum length of drop lines including branches is 6m.
n Maximum number of drop lines is 12.
n Branching is allowed with drop lines only.

Schenck Process
Configurations
n The maximum distance between two points in the bus is 500m

(Fig. 5).
Fig. 4: Line, ring and star topology for networks
Another important point is the termination at each end of a

network. End refers to the first and the last physical device on
the bus. This has nothing to do with the addresses set on device.
For local bus, jumper W500 is used for termination. For details,
please see individual units local bus descriptions. For residual bus
systems (e.g. SE-Bus or PROFIBUS), please read the Plug-in
Cards item.
First Last
Dev x Dev x Dev x
Drop line with Drop line

branching
Dev x
Dev x Dev x
Dev x
Fig. 5: Structure of the local bus
With every bus system, the controller for DISOCONT system unit
VSE can be located anywhere in the system. There is no need to
have it at an end of the network.
DEVICENET expects the bus interface module to be supplied via
the bus cable. With the local bus, supply is via the VEA or VLB
20120 unit bus cable. If none of these units is connected to bus,
module has to be supplied from the outside (24VDC, 40mA).

Schenck Process
Configurations
In the DISOCONT system, the wires for incoming and outgoing

bus lines are clipped onto the same terminal, so that the bus is
uninterrupted also if the bus connector is withdrawn. In variable
configurations where stations are to be removed from bus during
operation, it is useful to locate the terminal resistors on an external
connector and not on the p.c. board.
Since the Profibus cable is connected via the supply line, the
terminal resistor no longer operates properly if the connector is
withdrawn. Therefore, install a permanently available station on
cable end, for instance, a power unit.
If two wires on one terminal are not desired, provide an external

terminal box for the continuous bus line and guide a spur line from
terminal box to feeder. For admissible spur line length, see
specification of the particular bus.
Mounting Configurations
There are various DISOCONT mounting configurations.
Local Mounting
This configuration consists of system unit VSE, additional
input/output unit VEA for input flow control, and a prefeeder. Both
units are mounted on feeder in a small glass fiber reinforced
housing protected to IP65. Depending on the type of feeder, the
DISOCONT electronics can be integrated into the feeder
mechanics. An operator unit mounted in fieldbox VLB can be
used.
Local mounting of DISOCONT offers the highest advantage with
respect to installation expense.
Local / Cabinet Mounting

System unit VSE is mounted on feeder; I/O unit VEA, in a cabinet
clip-mounted on DIN rails in cabinet maximum 500m away from
feeder. An operator unit VLB can be used, normally mounted at
the cabinet door. This configuration, too, enables the system unit
to be arranged flexibly, e.g. in glass fiber reinforced housing
protected to IP65 or inside the support structure . A special
housing for the cabinet mounted VEA and the VLB units ensures
optimum handling control and wiring inside the cabinet.
Cabinet Mounting
All components are mounted inside a cabinet. VSE, if necessary,
and VEA are either rail- or wall-mounted. Both housing variants
are designed to ease handling inside the cabinet. A
panel-mounted operator unit VLB can be used as well.
The maximum cable distance from cabinet to feeder is 500m.

Schenck Process
Configurations
Wiring Considerations
Thanks to the small number of devices, DISOCONT is rather
simple to realize. Nevertheless, thoroughly check to see which
cables are required and whether number and size of the cables
you want to use fit into the available cable glands (see table at
item Accessories/Recommended Cables).
When checking the technical details of the different units, you will
find for each output (and input) the corresponding connector type
indicated (e.g. Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm spacing.) The maximum
wire cross section is indicated for every type. For Phoenix MSTB
(5mm contact spacing), the maximum wire cross section is
2.5mm2; for MSTB (3.5mm spacing), 1.5mm2.
Basic Diagrams
Below, the basic diagrams for two different configurations are
shown. Figure 6 shows a small system configuration; figure 7, a
more complex system.
Fig. 6: Small stand-alone system

Schenck Process
Configurations
Cable Fixation
Fig. 8 depicts proper cable fixation. Under each cable duct you
see several slots . When inserting cable clamps into these slots,
clamps press cable shield against housing and thus ensure proper
grounding. The M-shaped slots can also be used for pull relief of
cable binders.
Fig. 7: Cable fixation

Schenck Process
Configurations
DISOCONT Components Overview
Fig. 8:

Schenck Process
Fieldbox VFG 20100
Fieldbox VFG 20100

This glass fiber reinforced housing is used for field mounting of the
DISOCONT units.
Fig. 9: Fieldbox
Housing Glass fiber reinforced, polyester

Dimensions 260 x 160 x 90mm
Weight fully equipped /empty 3,1/2
Protection to IEC60 529 IP65, NEMA 4 type
240
6,5
110
Fig.: 10 Outlets and mounting holes
When using the fieldbox, the cable diameter is limited through the cable gland outlets.
Watch the cable recommendations given in chapter Accessories.

Schenck Process
Fieldbox VFG 20100
Ordering Data
Part no. Ordering no.
VFG 20100 F217902.02
Retrofitting set VFG 20100-E22* w/o connector V016872.B01
Retrofitting set VFG 20100-E22* with connector V016872.B02
* for use in potentially explosive atmospheres

Observe Use In Potentially Explosive Atmospheres item.

Schenck Process
Cabinet Housing VEG 20100

The stainless steel housings for system unit VSE and input/output
unit VEA housing are used when the main DISOCONT units are
mounted in a cabinet. Normally clipped to DIN top hat rails, the
housing can also be screwed on.
Fig. 11: Cabinet housing
Housing Clipped to DIN rails or wall-mounted

Weight fully equipped / empty 2.4 / 1.3
Protection to IEC60 529 IP20
Ordering Data
VEG 20100 F217903.01

Schenck Process
TS35
45
Fig. 12: Cabinet housing with mounting holes

Schenck Process
System Unit VSE 20100

Designed to perform all measurement and control functions, the
DISOCONT system unit can be expanded by a fieldbus adapter
card. All parameters (configuration etc.) are stored on the VSM
memory card. On power failure the dynamic values will be saved
as well. The system unit must be mounted in a VFG or VEG
housing in order to ensure that live parts are out of touch. For use
as feeder control unit, a VSM memory card is required. For use as
I/O system with VIO software, no memory card is necessary.
Fig. 13:
Setting Local Bus Address

The circuit board is equipped with two rotary switches for selecting
one of the 64 local bus addresses. Multiply setting of S2 switch by
10 (x10 indicated on cover plate), add setting of S1 switch (x1
indicated on cover plate), and calculate selected address.
The first VSE on a DISOCONT local bus has address 01, the
second 02 ,etc. third party units or extensions must have
addresses over 30.
The terminating resistor for the local bus is enabled via W500:
W500: 1-2 terminated
W500: 2-3 not terminated
If local bus is not connected, W500 remains in position 2-3.
The first and last device on local bus must have a bus termination.
Set jumper W500 to 1-2 (default).
The local bus must be supplied with energy. If a VEA 20100 or
VLB 20120 is connected, this unit powers the bus via the bus
terminals with no need for additional cabling. If only VSE units or a
VLB 20105 is connected to local bus, the latter must be supplied
from the outside. To do so, the voltage source on VSE connector
X7 can be used, for instance.
Scale Software
The VSE 20100 hardware consists of neutral standard
components programmed for the particular scale type by software.
The software can be updated immediately after delivery using the
EasyServe service software. The download procedure is detailed
in the EasyServe documentation. During download, set jumper
W100 to position 1-2. For normal operation, maintain jumper
position 2-3.

Schenck Process
General Specifications
Power supply DC 24V... 300V 15%
Power supply AC 110V....230V /-20%, +10%, 47...63 Hz
Phoenix MSTB 5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5 mm2
Fuse 4 ATr
Recommended user fuse 16A, device fuses, type C to DIN 60898
Consumption 20W
Operating temperature
-25 C ... 50 C
(Ambient temperature outside of housing)
Storage temperature -25 C ... 60 C
Protection to IEC 60529 IP 00
Auxiliary voltage output 24VDC, 250mA (for VLG)
Load Cell Input

Load cell field voltage +/- 6V AC
Load cell sensitivity 1 ... 3 mV/V (bipolar with) MULTICOR software
Load cell connection 6-wire
Load cell monitoring interval 100ms
Load cell number 4 (350)
Max. cable length 500m
Resolution 24bit
Temperature drift <10ppm/C
Connector Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5 mm2
Depending on load cell type and manufacturer, a different wiring scheme is used. See table
below for details or contact Schenck Process.
Table 2: Load cell connection
Terminal
Schenck VBB and Schenck
Schenck PWS Tedea in
DISOCONT RT HBM Z6 SF4/SB4
2mV/V 1250 terminal
2.8mV/V 2mV/V 2mV/V
box DKK
OUT 1 black black black 82
black black
REF 1 blue grey brown 82.1
IN 1 red red red red white 28
IN 2 white white white white red 27
REF 2 orange green blue 81.1
blue green
OUT 2 green blue green 81
Binary Input (NAMUR)

No of inputs, NAMUR (DIN 19234) 2
Monitoring Short-circuit, broken cable
Frequency/Tachometer 0.03Hz ... 2.9 kHz
Connector Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm spacing, max. 1.5mm2

Schenck Process
Binary Input
No. of inputs 2
Max. input voltage 20....30V 4-7mA
Input resistance 5k
Binary Output
No. of outputs 4 relays
Group of 3 safety isolated against 1; inside group,
Isolation
parallel use of 24V and 230V prohibited.
Function Contact closes
Voltage 24V ... 250V =/~; to be supplied externally
Max. 8A, resistive load
Current
Max. 1A, inductive load with spark suppressor
DC: 50 ... 250 W depending on voltage,
Switching power 240 W at 30V DC
AC: 2000 VA max.
Connector Phoenix MSTB, 5mm spacing, max. 2.5mm2
Analog Output
No. of outputs 1
Output range 0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V)
Max. load 500 ohms
Resolution 12 bits
Refresh rate 100ms
Serial Port RS232

Isolation No
Handshake RTS, CTS
Baud rate, depending on software 300Bd ... 115kBd
Connector D-Sub HD20
Local Bus For details on local bus, see chapter Network Connections
Baud rate, software selected 125kBit/s
Cable 3x2x0.23 screened in pairs, 1)
Power load Max. 40mA
LED for Communication OK; for function, see table
Display
below.
1) DeviceNet thin cable recommended

Schenck Process
Control unit VLB No control unit VLB

LED Local Bus OK connected and connected or
Function communication with VLB communication with VLB
OK faulty
Communicatio
Permanently lit Flashing
Hardware module (VSE n OK
or VEA) activated Communicatio Lit but goes out for a very
Off
n faulty short time
No hardware module (VSE or VEA)
Permanently lit Off
activated
Status does not occur before data transmission has been built up
(approx. 1 min. after power-up or changes to Local Bus).
Input DI4 used for analog signals
Number of inputs 1
Input range 0-10 V, with external resistance 0(4)-20 mA; see comments below
Input resistance 990 ohms
Potential separation No
Resolution 10 bits
Read-in rate 100 ms
Connector Phoenix MSTB, contact spacing 3.5, max. 1.5mm2
Input equivalent circuit diagram
Fig. 14:
Input is designed for NAMUR signals measurement. Measured is

measuring voltage U. When connecting common signal sources,
observe the following specifications:
1. If a voltage source U in accordance with connecting variant 1 is

used to preset a voltage, make sure the latter does not exceed
10V. The source must be capable of taking the current
delivered from internal supply. When designing supply cable,
pay attention to resistance R.
2. Connecting variant 2 is not possible.

Schenck Process
3. With connecting variant 3, current iv = 0-20 mA translates into

internal measurement value 6.2 - 18 mA. This variant is given,
e.g. if a DISOCONT analog output is used for presetting.
4. Resulting measuring voltage Um 0 - 9V is always resolved into
922 increments. With connecting variant 4, the maximum
resolution of preset value 0-20 mA is reduced to 544
increments.
5. To adapt input to particular connecting variant, use the
DISOCONT Range and Evaluation parameters.
To ensure protection from electrical shocks,

never use system unit VSE without VFG or VEG housing.
The internal cooling plate is a live part.

Schenck Process
Fig. 15: Wiring Diagram VSE 20100

Schenck Process
Memory Module VSM
Memory Module VSM

Installed in DISOCONT system unit VSE, the memory module
stores all system-specific settings and operating values.
In the event of power failure, dynamic values will be saved as well.
If a defective VSE system unit is to be repaired or replaced, the

VSM module can be plugged into a replacement unit for parameter
transfer.
Note: When plugging on module, ensure proper orientation

(pin strip towards the VSE outside) and vertical
introduction, for contacts to plug correctly.
Fig. 16: VSM 20100
No of erase/write cycles >1,000,000

Data retention >100 years
Variants
Designation
VSM 20110 for DISOCONT L, software VEC20150
VSM 20100 for measuring systems
VSM 20101 for feeding systems
VSM 20102 for extended systems
No VSM required for VSE with software VIO

Schenck Process
Memory Module VSM

Schenck Process
I/O Unit VEA 20100
I/O Unit VEA 20100

Designed as additional input/output unit, VEA must be employed if
the control panel version of control unit VLB (type 20100) is used.
The VEA unit must be mounted in a VFG or VEG housing in order
to ensure that live parts are out of touch.
Fig. 17:

The circuit board has two rotary switches for selecting one of the
64 local bus addresses. Multiply setting of S2 switch by 10 (x10
indicated on cover plate) and add setting of S1 switch (x1
indicated on cover plate) to calculate selected address.
The first VEA on a DISOCONT local bus has address 11; the
second, 12 etc. Jumper W500 terminates local bus (1-2 =
terminated). Default = 2-3.
VLP103V
W100
Service
1
9 0 1
8 2
S2 7
x10 3
6 5 4
9 0 1
8 2
S1 7
x1 3
6 5 4
X8
W500
1
X4 Local bus
Fig. 18: Address switch, jumpers and bus connectors
Reserved for servicing, jumper W100 must be set to 2-3 (default)

for normal operation.

Schenck Process
I/O Unit VEA 20100
Power supply DC 24V...300V 15%
Power supply AC 110...230V/ -20%, +10%, 47...63 Hz
Phoenix MSTB 5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5mm2
Fuse 4ATr
Recommended user fuse 16A, device fuses, type C to EN 60898
Power consumption 20W
-25 C ... 50 C
(Ambient temperature outside of housing)
Protection to IEC60529 IP00
Binary Input
No. of inputs 1+3
Input voltage 20...30V 4..7mA
Input resistance 5k
Connector Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5mm2
Binary Output
No. of outputs 5 relays
Group of 4, 1 completely isolated
Isolation
Function Contact closes

Contact voltage 24V ... 250V =/~; to be supplied externally
Max. 8A, resistive load
Contact current
Max. 1A, inductive load with spark suppressor
DC: 50 ... 250 W depending on voltage
Switching power 240 W at 30V DC
AC: 2000 VA max.
Connector Phoenix MSTB, 5mm contact spacing, max. 2.5mm2
Analog Input
No. of inputs 1
Current input 0/4mA ... 20mA / 50 ohms
Voltage input 0 ... 10V / 100 kilohms
Isolation galv. isolated
Resolution 12 bits
Time constant 100ms
Filter Suppression of 50/60Hz

Schenck Process
I/O Unit VEA 20100
Analog Output
No. of outputs 1
0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V)
Output span
0/4mA software depending
Max. load 500 ohms
Resolution 12 bits
Refresh rate 100ms
Connector Phoenix MSTB 3.5mm contact spacing, max. 1.5mm2
Serial Port RS232 (Printer)

Isolation No
Handshake Software (Xon/Xoff)
Baud rate, software depending 300Bd ... 115kBd
Connector D-Sub HD20
Local Bus
Baud rate, software depending 125kBit/s
Cable 3x2x0.23 screened by pair, 1)
Max distance between any two points 500m
Max length of drop line 6m
Branching On drop lines only
Termination at each end of bus
Bus supply 24V DC, 250mA for supply of other bus stations
Natural current load Max. 40mA
Display LED for Communication OK

Pulse Generator
Frequency range, software depending < 20 Hz for totalizing counter
Puls width, software depending 10 ms ... 10 s, in 5 ms steps
Output Open collector, max. 24VDC
Output current Max. 50mA
Ordering Data
VEA 20100 F217904.02

Schenck Process
I/O Unit VEA 20100
To ensure protection from electrical shocks, never use

system unit VEA without VFG or VEG housing.
The interior cooling plate is a live part.

Schenck Process
I/O Unit VEA 20100
Fig. 19: Wiring diagram VEA 20100

Schenck Process
Input/Output Optional Card VEA 20101

The VEA 20101 is plugged into the main VSE (local bus address
01) providing further inputs and outputs. If a VEA 20101 has been
mounted, no further field bus card can be mounted. The mounting
of the VEA 20101 card into the VSE 20100 assembly is described
in Section Field Bus Interfaces, Mounting of the Field Bus Card.
Replace the VSE 20100 cover plate by the cover plate supplied
with the VEA 10101. For retrofitting it is recommended to fix a
label for the software similar to that on the old cover plate.
The funcions of the optional card are only available if they are
supported by the scale software.
Fig. 20:
Position of connectors and jumpers on the VEA 20101
Technical Data
General Data
Supply voltage internal from VSE 20100

-25 C ... 50 C
(ambient temperature outside the case)

Schenck Process
Binary inputs
Number of inputs 3 (DI5, DI6, DI7)
Potential separation optocoupler
Input voltage 20 ... 30 V, 2 ... 7 mA
Input resistance 5 kOhm
Connector Phoenix MSTB 3,5; max. 1,5mm2
Relay binary outputs

Number of outputs 2 (DO5, DO6)
Potential separation Relay
Function contact closes
max. 2A, resistive load at 40 VDC
Contact load capacity DC max. 0.4 A resistive load at 230 VDC
inductive load only with spark extinction
max. 250VRelay binary outputsAC; max. 62 VA
Contact load capacity AC
inductive load only with spark extinction
Open Collector Binary Outputs

Number of outputs 1 (DO7)
Voltage max. 36 VDC, to be provided externally
Current max. 50 mA
Analog input
Number 1
Input current or 0/4 ... 20 mA, Ri = 200 Ohm
input voltage 0 ... 10 VDC; Ri = 25 kOhm
Resolution 16 Bit
Input filter 5 ms
Updating rate 100 ms
Analog output
Number 1
Ausgangsstrom 0/4mA ... 20mA (max. 11V)
Maximale Last 500 Ohm
Resolution 12 Bit
Updating rate 100 ms

Schenck Process
Isolation capacity of the potential separation

The connectors have been combined to form the following three
groups:
Group Connector
1 Analog output
Digital inputs
2
Analog inputs
Relay outputs
3
ulse output
Each group is separated from the other and from VSE 20100 by a basic isolation (test voltage 1
kV, no safe isolation). The isolation of the different potential islands within a group has been
dimensioned for a differential voltage of 60 V.
The serial interface is not isolated. When used for permanent process control or in case the
host is not isolated against PE, an external isolation of the serial link is required.
Setting of jumpers
The position of the jumpers is only of interest if the serial interface is used. Not every scale
software uses the serial interface.
Selecting the type of serial interface
Jumper RS 232 RS 485

W590 1-2 2-3
W591 1-2 2-3
W592 1-2 2-3
Bus termination
Bus termination 120
Jumper No bus termination
Ohm
W540 1-2 2-3
W550 1-2 2-3
Ordering data
Designation Order number
VEA 20101 V038841.B01

Schenck Process
Fig.: 21

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel Mounting Version)
Control Unit VLB 20100 (Front-of-Panel

Mounting Version)
Control unit VLB 20100 is used for direct operation of DISOCONT
instead of, or in addition to, the use of a plant control system. The
LC displays visualizes all measurement and control data.
When using VLB 20100, a VEA unit must be present. VLB and
VEA are interconnected using cable VSC 20100.
This variant can be mounted in control panel or cabinet door. The

distance between VEA and control unit must not exceed 2m.
Fig. 22: Operator panel for control panel mounting
Setting Contrast
To adjust contrast, press decimal point and UP/DOWN arrow keys
at the same time. The optimum setting depends on temperature.
Screen Saver
Appoximately 15 min. after last operation, background lighting
goes out and comes on again upon next key operation.
Simultaneous operation of decimal point and RIGHT/LEFT arrows
lets you change over between permanent lighting and screen
saver.

The address is set by software.
A VLB unit in a DISOCONT system always has address 21.
The first and last physical unit on Local Bus must be equipped with
bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2.
Default is 2-3.
Jumper W100 is reserved for servicing and must be in position 2-3
in normal mode.

Schenck Process
Fig. 23: Jumpers and bus connectors
Dimensions 240 x 120 x 55

Mounting recess 231 x 111 -0...+0.5
Keyboard Flexible membranes
Weight 0.8kg
Operating temperature 0 C ... 50 C
Storage temperature (Ambient
-20 C ... 60 C
temperature outside of housing)
Front: IP54, NEMA 2 type
Protection to IEC60 529
Rear wall: IP20
Consumption 3W
Ordering Data
VLB 20100 F217906.01
VSC 20100 F217914.01

Schenck Process
Fig. 24:

Schenck Process
Fig.25: Wiring diagram VLB 20100

Schenck Process
Control Unit VLB 20105 (Front-of-Panel

Mounting Version)
The control unit is used to control DISOCONT in place of or in
addition to plant control. The LC display shows all data relevant for
measurement and control.
Equipped with own power supply unit, the present variant can be
mounted in control panel or cubicle door.
Fig.26: Control unit for control panel mounting
Setting Contrast
Set contrast by simultaneous operation of decimal point and
UP/DOWN arrows. The optimal setting depends on temperature.
Screen Saver
Appoximately 15 min. after last operation, background lighting
goes out and comes on again upon next key operation.
Simultaneous operation of decimal point and RIGHT/LEFT arrows
lets you change over between permanent lighting and screen
saver.

The address is set by software.
A VLB unit in a DISOCONT system always has address 21.
The first and last physical unit on Local Bus must be equipped with
bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2.
Default is 2-3.
Jumper W100 is reserved for servicing and must be in position 2-3
in normal mode.

Schenck Process
General Technical Data

Dimensions 240 x 120 x 74
Mounting recess 231 x 111 -0...+0.5
Weight 1 kg
(Ambient temperature outside of 0 C ... 50 C
housing)
Front to IP54, NEMA 4 type
Protected to IEC60 529
Rear to IP20
Power supply 85-264V /3W
Local Bus Connector X4 For details, see Network Connections item.

Baud rate, software dependent 125kbit/s
Cable 3x2x0.23 screened by pair, 1)
Local Bus supply 24V DC, 80mA
Status LED for Communication OK
Phoenix MSTB, contact spacing 3.5mm,
Connector
max. 1.5mm2

Ordering Data
Part number Ordering number
VLB 20105 V00 3048.B01

Schenck Process
Fig. 27:

Schenck Process
Fig.28: Wiring diagram VLB 20105

Schenck Process
Control Unit VLB 20120 (Fieldbox Variant)

The control unit is used for direct operation of DISOCONT instead
of, or in addition to, the use of a plant control. The LCD screen
displays all necessary information for measurement and control.
The VLB is connected to the VSE via local bus.
This version is for use at the feeder site and is mounted in
fieldbox.
Fig. 29: Operator panel in fieldbox
For contrast setting and screen saver, see VLB 20100.

The address is set via software.
A VLB in a DISOCONT system always has address 21.
The first and the last physical unit on local bus must be equipped
with bus termination. To do so, set jumper W500 to position 1-2.
Default is 2-3.
Provided for servicing, jumper W100 must be in position 2-3 in
normal mode.
Address Setting
After power-up, the welcome text Schenck Process DISOCONT
Operator Panel is displayed for some seconds. Operate red
ENTER key to display and change set address.
When using VLB unit in DISOCONT system, always select
address 21.
Return to normal mode by operating ENTER once again.

Schenck Process
Fig. 30: Jumpers and bus connectors
Housing glass fiber reinforced, polyester

Fixation same as VFG 20100
Power supply DC 24V....300V 15%
Power supply AC 110V...230V, -20% +10%, 47...63 Hz
Fuse 4ATr
Power consumption 4W
-20 C ... 50 C
(ambient temperature outside of housing)
Local Bus For details on local bus, see Network Connections item.
Baud rate, software dependent 125kBit/s ... 500kBit/s
Cable 3x2x0.23 screened by in pairs, 1)
24V DC, 250mA for supply of other
Power supply
bus stations
Natural current load Max 40mA
Display LED for communication OK
Phoenix MSTB, 3.5mm contact
Connector
spacing, max. 1.5mm2

Schenck Process
Components
Type
VLB 20120
VSC 20106 cable for mobile use
VLB 20120-E22*
* unit for use in explosive zone 22
In potentially explosive atmospheres, VLB 20120-E22 must be

firmly attached (not plugged-in).
A VLB 20120 (normal design) with VSC 20106 can also be used
for service work on scales approved for explosive zones if it is
safeguarded that there is no explosive atmosphere when it is
used.

Schenck Process
Wiring Diagram
Fig. 31: Wiring diagram VLB 20120

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Interfaces
Fieldbus Interfaces
General Information
A process management system in platn control communicates
with DISOCONT preferably via fieldbus.
All field-bus interfaces are designed as plug-in cards for system
unit VSE.
Depending on the fieldbus system used there are some
restrictions to observe: length of cables, bus termination etc. You
will find details in the technical data section of the corresponding
bus. To ensure optimal EMC interference protection, we
recommend to use only cables specified for the single fieldbus
systems.
Please observe the hints given in chapter Configurations/Network
Connections.
Mounting Fieldbus Card

n disconnect all VSE cables from power
n remove cover plate
n replace spacer bolts by bolts provided with the fieldbus card
n configure card; if necessary, jumper
n insert card so that the plug connects
n fasten card with spacer bolts
n remount cover plate.
ATTENTION!
To protect the p.c. board from damage, tighten all pins using a 5.5
mm socket wrench.
Cover pl at e
Fig. 32: Mounting a fieldbus plug-in card
Each installation set comes with identification label. Please glue

the into fieldbus frame of cover plate.

Schenck Process
Multiple Bus Model VSB 20100

The module can be plugged into system unit VSE to provide an
interface to one of the following bus systems:
n SE-Bus for connection to Schenck MULTICONT
n Modbus/J-Bus
n 3964R
Due to the specifications for these bus systems, the connection

with two or four wires as well as the communication speed is
different. Although the hardware and software for all buses is
on-board, only one bus at a time can be used. The selection is
made via jumpers, see Fig. .
The first and last device on all buses must have a bus termination
(e.g. W500 and W501 set to 1-2). Addresses set on device are
irrelevant.
Pin assignment for fieldbus connector X20

Pin No. SE-Bus RS 422 RS 485
1 RX/TX RX RX/TX
2 RXinv./TXinv. RXinv. RXinv./TXinv.
3 GND 1) GND 1) GND 1)
4 - TX -
5 - TXinv. -
1) Normally, GND connectors are not connected externally.
Ordering Data
Part No. Ordering No.
VSB 20100 F217910.01

Schenck Process
Fig. 33:

Schenck Process
DeviceNet (CAN) Module VCB 20100

The module can be plugged into the VSE to provide an interface to
CAN-Bus with DeviceNet protocol.
Attention:
The poll rate of the host computer must be shorter than
200ms.
Fig. 34: Jumpers, switches and bus connectors; view on equipment side
The bus address is set via software (s. BV-H2103).

Please observe that the first and last station on CAN bus must be
equipped with a bus termination. To do so, set jumper W160 to
position 1-2 on respective device, and maintain jumper position
2-3 on all other devices.
Pin assignment
X20 (only for internal
Pin No. X2 (for optional use)
use)
1 0V -
2 CAN- CAN-
3 Shielding 1) 0V
4 CAN+ -
5 +24V -
6 n. a. -
7 n. a. CAN+
8 n. a. -
9 n. a. +24V
1) Normally, shielding terminal ist not connected externally

Schenck Process
Potential separation Optocouplers

Cable 3x2x0.23 screened in pairs, 1)
Status LED for communication OK
Connector Phoenix MSTB 3.5, max. 1.5m2

Schenck Process

The module can be plugged into the VSE to provide an interface to
CAN-Bus with DeviceNet protocol.
Poll rate of host computer is not limited.
VCB010
X20
XC3 W160
5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
Fieldbus card
connector
Fig. 35: Jumpers, switches and bus connectors; view on equipment side
The bus address is set via software (s. BV-H2103).

Please observe that the first and last station on CAN bus must be
equipped with a bus termination. To do so, set jumper W160 to
position 1-2 on respective device, and maintain jumper position
2-3 on all other devices.
Pin assignment
X20/XC3 (only for
Pin No.
internal use)
1 0V
2 CAN-
3 -
4 CAN+
5 +24V
6 n. a.
7 n. a.
8 n. a.
9 n. a.
Apply screen to cable pull relief.

Schenck Process
Cable 3x2x0.23 screened in pairs 1)
Status LED for communication OK
Connector Phoenix MSTB 3.5, max. 1.5m2

Schenck Process
PROFIBUS-DP Module VPB 20100

The module can be plugged into VSE to provide an interface to
PROFIBUS-DP. Designed and certified in accordance with DIN
19245 and EN 50170 Part 2, the module caters for automatic baud
rate recognition of up to 12 Mbit/s (12Mbaud).
When using cable type A, make sure the following cable lengths
for the entire bus are not exceeded:
Speed [kbit/s] Max. cable length [m]

12000, 6000, 3000 100 (max. 24 bus stations admitted)
1500 200
500 400
187,5 1000
For further details, see Profibus specification

(http://www.profibus.com)
With baud rates smaller than 12Mbaud, number of bus stations is

limited only by required cycle time and address.
For 12Mbaud, the following physical restriction additionally
applies: number of stations x cable length in m <2000.
The circuit board has two plug-ins for bus connection. DISOCONT
uses connector X20.
Please keep in mind that the first and last device on a
PROFIBUS-DP system must have a bus termination. To do so, set
W500 and W501 to 1-2 to provide termination.
Attention: both jumpers must be in same position.
Note:
If the last actively terminated slave is removed from bus, the entire
bus may be disturbed, particularly in the case of alternating scales.
This problem can be avoided with the use of a separate active
terminal resistor, e.g. Siemens ordering number 6ES7
972-0DA00-0AA0.
You can also order the terminal resistor from Schenck (ordering
number V014298.B01).

Schenck Process
Fig. 36: Bus connector, view on equipment side
Pin assignment
Pin No. X20 X1 (for optional use)
1 RxD/TxD-P * Shielding
2 RxD/TxD-N ** Reserved
3 DGND RxD/TxD-P *
4 VP CNTR-P
5 - DGND
6 - VP
7 - Reserved
8 - RxD/TxD-N **
9 - Reserved
* Data line is additionally identified by letter B; core colour is red.

** Data line is additionally identified by letter A; core colour is green.
Apply shield to cable pull relief, not to connector.
For connection, use standard Profibus cable.
Ordering Data
Type Ordering no.
VPB 20100 F217908.01
Profibus special connector for X1 V022274.B01

Schenck Process
Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V)
Ethernet Bus Module 20100 (VET010V)

Plugged onto the DISOCONT fieldbus connector, this optional
module provides an Ethernet interface 10Tbase to the TCP client.
Place bridge W100 (determination of the voltage supply) always
on 2-3.
To configure the module, load down the MultiServer software from
the Schenck Service page in the Internet.
Fig. 37:
Pin Assignment
RJ45 (only for

Pin X20
internal use)
1 PE 1) TX+
2 RX+ TX-
3 RX- RX+
4 TX+
5 TX-
6 RX-
7
8
1) Normally, PE ist not connected externally

Technical Data
Isolation Yes
Voltage supply Internal
Connector (X20) Phoenix spacing 3.5 max. 1.5mm
Ordering Data
Type Ordering number

VET 20100 V030590.B01

Schenck Process
Ethernet/IP-Module VET20101 (VET012V)

Plugged onto the DISOCONT fieldbus connector, this optional
module provides an Ethernet interface (10/100 BaseT) to the TCP
client.
Fig. 38:
Pin Assignment
Pin X20 RJ45 (only for internal use)
1 PE 1) TX+
2 RX+ TX-
3 RX- RX+
4 TX+
5 TX-
6 RX-
7
8
1) Normally, PE ist not connected externally
Technical Data
Isolation yes
Voltage supply Internal
Ethernet Topologie 10/100 BaseT
Connector (X20) Phoenix MSTB, Raster 3,5 max., 1,5mm 2
Ordering Data
Type Ordering number
VET 20101 V048756.B01

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled Drives
Local Control Unit VLG 20100 For Controlled

Drives
If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, control unit
bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables manual control. A
drive can be started or stopped, and a continuous value, e.g. belt
speed, can be keyed in. MANUAL mode ignores the
DISOCONT output signals.
Switch S1 lets you select AUTO/MANUAL mode and start/stop
drive in MANUAL mode.
The R1 switch controls the drive speed.
Fig.39: Local control unit VLG 20100

Weight fully equipped 4.5kg
Limit values Load relay outputs 230V/3A
Limit values Relay outputs for control
30V/1A
magnitude change
Limit values Open collector outputs 30V/10mA
Inputs 24V/5mA
Operating temperature -25....50C
Ordering Data
VLG 20100 F217920.02

Schenck Process
Wiring Diagram
Fig. 40: Wiring diagramm: Load control units used with VSE and VEA
If VLG 20100 is used on a feeder as second VLG, jumper terminals X2-15 and -16.

Schenck Process
Fig. 41:

Schenck Process
Local Control Unit VLG 20105

For Position-controlled Drives
If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, control unit
bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables manual control.
Switch S2 lets you start/stop a position-controlled prefeeder, e.g.
feed gate. MANUAL mode ignores the DISOCONT output signals.
Switch S1 lets you select AUTO/MANUAL mode and triggers quick
closing, if required.
Fig. 42:

Weight completely equipped 4.5kg
Limit values Relay outputs for
30V/1A
control magnitude change
Limit values Open collector outputs 30V/10mA
Inputs 24V/5mA
Operating temperature -25...50C
Ordering Data
VLG 20105 F217923.02

Schenck Process
Wiring Diagram
Fig. 43:

Schenck Process
Fig. 44:

Schenck Process

If you wish to operate main drive for servicing, local control unit
bypasses DISOCONT electronics and enables direct control. Main
drive and up to three auxiliary drives can be started and stopped
and a value (e.g. for belt speed) can be keyed in. Switch S1 lets
you select Service mode. Service mode ignores the
DISOCONT outputs signals.
Switch R1 controls the drive speed.
Switches S2...S4 let you control the auxiliary units.
Local Control Unit VLG 20110 comes with all relays and motor
protections required for the drives specified in your order.
Fig. 45: Local control unit VLG 20110
Housing Glass fiber reinforced, wall-mounted

Weight fully equipped 4.5kg
Limit value Relay outputs for control
30V/1A
magnitude change
Limit value Open collector outputs 30V/10mA
Inputs 24V/5mA
Operating temperature -25...50C
Ordering Data
VLG 20110 basic unit (without relays
F217921.02
and motor protections)

Schenck Process
Fig. 46:

Schenck Process
Wiring Diagram
Fig. 47: Wiring Diagram: Local control unit used with VSE (sample)/(Drive Control Variant 1)

Schenck Process
Fig. 48: Wiring diagram: Local control unit used with VSE (sample)
Drive Control Variant 2)
Refer to VLG 20100 for the logic diagram (F21756201)

Schenck Process

This unit comprises DISOCONT measuring and control electronics
VSE 20100 for a continuous scale as well as the control elements
for local control without using the DISOCONT electronics. The unit
is designed for connection to scale.
The control elements enable changeover to local mode, definition

of volumetric feed rate, start of main feed drive and max. 3
auxiliary drives as a function of variant.
S1 lets you select mode (Automatic/Local) and starts main drive.

R1 controls speed of main drive.
Optional switches S2 S3 enable auxiliary drives to be started.
In addition, the unit is equipped with sockets for connection of

service connectors for EasyServe and/or VLB 20120.
Fig. 49: Local control unit VLG 20120
Housing Glass fibre reinforced

Dimensions 582 x 190 x 125 mm
Limit values Load relay outputs 230 V / 3 A
Limit values Relay outputs for
30 V / 1 A
control magnitude change
Limit values Open collector
30 V / 10 mA
outputs
Inputs 24 V / 5 mA
EasyServe
Connector (integrated)
Service-VLB 20120
Weight completely equipped 8 kg
Protected to IEC 60 529 IP 65, NEMA 4-typ
Ambient temperature -25 ... 50 C

Schenck Process
Ordering Data
VLG 20120 base unit without optional switches and

V015297.B01
integral motor starters
Fig. 50: Dimension drawing VLG 20120

Schenck Process
Wiring Diagram
Fig. 51: Wiring diagram: Local control unit VLG 20120 Base variant and options (sample)

Schenck Process
Fig. 52:
Refer to VLG 20100 for the logic diagram (F2175620)

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150
EasyServe VPC 20150

Designed as DISOCONT configuration and diagnosis tool,
EasyServe operates under NT, 98, 2000, XP.
All controlling and calibrating operations can be performed via
control unit. The menu control allows flexible and easy adjustment,
provides access to service data and enables to operate the scale
for service purpose. It is also possible to customize the menu text
on PC screen and all operator units.
EasyServe ships on a CD-ROM which includes this manual and

the program itself partitioned into folders.
Ordering Data
VPC20150 CD-ROM EasyServe F217 940.01

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150
Service Bus and Remote Diagnostics

Service-Bus: Access to all feeders; no replugging.
Remote Diagnostic: Access round the world or inside a bigger
plant.
The figure shows the interconnection of the devices.
Converters RS232-RS485 must be mounted close to VSE, or PC
(cable <12m). This might require additional fieldboxes in a
mechatronic arrangement. For smaller installations, all converters
could be mounted in one enclosure. The RS485 bus can be
extended to max. 1200 m.
With the help of standard telephone modems, remote access is
possible.
Converters RS232-RS485 are commercial standard components
that include automatic detection of flow direction RS485 bus.
We suggest to use SPECTRA, type SSW-520A.
System unit
Fieldbus module
VSE
Power
supply RS 232 I/O Local Bus
System unit
*
Fieldbus module
VAK 20230
VSE
Interface converter
and power supply OPTION
Power
System unit 94-264VAC

Fieldbus module Next bus station
VAK 20200
VSE
Interface converter OPTION
Power
Next bus station
*
-A3 VAK 20210 -A1 -A2
MODEM, VAK 20230 VAK 20200
Interface converter Interface converter Interface converter
and power supply and power supply
94-264VAC 94-264VAC
OPTION
Next bus station
BVM2125GB_3.cdr
Service/configuration * If a continuous cable is used, insert PG screwing.
connector
Fig. 53:

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150
Fig. 54: Bus Configuration VAK 20200

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150
Fig.: 55 Bus Configuration VAK 20210

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150
Fig. 56: Bus Configuration VAK 20230

Schenck Process
EasyServe VPC 20150

Schenck Process
Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed pick-up
Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed

pick-up
Fig. 57:

Schenck Process
Example for connecting the FGA0053 speed pick-up

Schenck Process
Accessories
Accessories
Sealing of Control Boxes (Protection Type)
Our control boxes are highly protected to ingress of water and
dust. When used in areas with dust explosion hazard (dust Ex),
the type of protection is essential for compliance with the Ex
regulations.
To ensure the high degree of protection, observe the following:
n Observe the specified range for cable screwed connections. In
the safe area, the sealing ring can be replaced; with
approved screwed connections, the latter must be exchanged
completely.
n With non-used cable screwed connections, press sealing plug
into screwing to completion. To do so, remove clamping nut
and press in plug flush with the outer screwing edge .
Replace clamping nut and tighten.
n In critical locations, e.g. wet and dirty areas below a road
weighbridge, apply pure silicone grease to seal in cover and to
cable gland sealing rings.
Service hint: Sealing areas in fieldboxes
When opening a connector box after several year of operation,

check sealing areas in PG cable glands and cover joints. Apply
silicone grease to cover joints. When replacing a cable in the PG
screwed connection, replace sealing rubber.

Schenck Process
Accessories
Recommended Cables
Cable gland
Loss-in-weight feeder VLW Weighfeeder VDB
field housing
PWS=5mm M12
Load cell 6*0.23, Sh
RTN=6.5mm
Load cell 6*0.23, Sh <6.5mm
3,7-7 mm
M16
Load cell 3*2*0.22, Sh 3849.306 Load cell 3*2*0.23, Sh 3849.306
4,5-10 mm
M12
Speed 2*0.23 3849.415 Speed 2*0.23 3849.415
3,7-7 mm
M12
Flap-sensor 2*0.23 BIC 2*0.23 3849.415
3,7-7 mm
Drive unit
3849073
(FAE) + VLG, Local M20
3*2*0.23, Sh 3849.306 14*0.25, Sh or any other
feedback + control unit 7-13 mm
<10mm
supply
M16
Fill Flap 3*1.5 flex 3814.350 Aux Drv. 3*1.5 flex 3814.350
4,5-10 mm
2*0,33+2*0,22 2*0,33+2*0,22 M16
Local bus 3849.074 Local bus 3849.074
Sh1) Sh1) 4,5-10 mm
3*1.5 stiff or 3*1.5 stiff or M16
Power Aux 3806.300 Power Aux 3806.300
flex flex 4,5-10 mm
M16
Blow 3*1.5 flex 3814.350 Reserve - -
4,5-10 mm
3*1.5 stiff or 3806.300 or 3*1.5 stiff or 3806.300 or M20
Power Power
flex 3814.350 flex 3814.350 7-13 mm
Fieldbus 2*0,33+2*0,22 3849.306 2*0,33+2*0,22 3849.306 M16
Fieldbus
Devicenet* Sh1) 3849.074* Sh1) 3849074* 4,5-10 mm
Fieldbus M16
1*2*0,64 3849.219 Fieldbus 1*2*0,64 3849.219
Profibus 4.5-10 mm
S tart Agitator M12
4*0.22 3849.415 Reserve - -
+ feedback 3,7-7 mm
Service tool, Service tool, M16
3*2*0.23 3849.306 3*2*0.23 3849.306
Modem Modem 4,5-10 mm
1) DeviceNet thin cable
When using underground laying, a protective tube for the cables is

required.

Schenck Process
Accessories
Drive Units
Motor AC 3-Phase Converter
The AC 3-phase converters used for drive control are either

mounted locally (integrated compact drives) or in a control box.
When mounting converters in a control box, consider EMC
problems and motor cable maximum lengths.
Normally, cables of up to 300m can be used. (Additional filters

may be required.) With shielded motor cables, maximum length is
reduced by approx. 50%.
Vibro Feeder Controller
Designed to control the amplitude of a vibro feeder, the FRS

feeder controller is available in a fieldbox or as a panel mounting
unit.
Fig. 58: FRS 52 in fieldbox

Schenck Process
Accessories
Junction Box VAK 20100

Designed for cross-connection and voltage distribution, junction
boxes VAK 20100 and VAK 20120 are used with certain types of
scale and extended variants.
240
6,5
110
Fig. 59: Junction Box VAK
Ordering Data
VAK 20100 E 144 535.01
VAK 20120 F 217 763.03

Schenck Process
Accessories
Laptop Connecting Set (PC with Easyserve)
Fig. 60: Wiring Diagram
The laptop connecting set is installed in the VSE as standard

component.
The connecting set is used whenever local conditions do not
permit the housing cover to be removed for VSE parametrization.
With the use of the connecting set, a laptop with the EasyServe
software can be plugged onto the closed VSE from the outside.
Consisting of a prewired device socket, connecting set VSC20108
is inserted into the existing 10mm hole of a VFG/VSE combination
or in Multifeed support in place of a cable screwed connection (PG
7) and connected on VSE terminal strip -X5.
A protective cap is affixed to an adjacent PG screwing with the use
of a captive nylon cord.
The PC connecting cable VSC 20107 is plugged into the device
socket from the outside and connected to the PC COM port via a
9-pin sub-D connector.
Safety Hint: In Dust-Ex Zones, the device socket has to point
downward in accordance with standard regulations. This means
that the connecting set must not be used with Multifeed supports
mounted in Dust-Ex zones.
Ordering Data Ordering No.

System cable VSC 20107, 2m PC cable for PC COM port F217 739.01
System cable VSC 20108, device socket with protective cap, IP65 F217 740.01

Schenck Process
Accessories
Connecting Set For Portable VLB

The connecting set enables the scale to be parametrized via a
portable control unit of the VLB 20120 type and can be used
whenever local conditions do not allow a PC laptop with the much
more convenient and versatile EasyServe software to be used.
The portable VLB 20120 is plugged into the user*s terminal box
VAK 20115.
VAK 20115 is wired with local bus and the VSE system unit power
supply.
Fig. 61: Dimension drawing
Ordering Data Ordering No.

Terminal box VAK 20115 75*80*75, IP65, GFK-reinforced
F 217 737.02
polyester incl. 5 m connecting cable

Schenck Process
Accessories
Fig. 62:

Schenck Process
Use in the Hazardous Area

General Safety Hints
n Exclusively use the equipment in the zone indicated on type
plate, or in the safe area.
n Observe the safety data specified on the equipment.
n Operate the equipment as originally intended and in
irreproachable condition.
n Exclusively use the equipment within the ambient temperature
limits indicated on type plate.
n Conversion and modification of the equipment is not permitted.
n Make sure the specified operating voltage limit is not

exceeded.
n Observe maximum line cross-section and current of terminals.
n Keep hands off plug-in connectors if a potentially explosive
atmosphere is present.
n If replacement or repair is necessary, only use the genuine
Schenck spare parts.
n Always have repair work performed by qualified explosion
protection experts in accordance with local standards.
n When performing any kind of work on the equipment, pay heed
to the local safety and accident prevention rules.
n Connect metal housings to the existing potential equalization
line.
n Electrical equipment of type E22 or 2D is provided only for
use in areas where propagating brush discharges are unlikely.
Approvals and tests are performed in accordance with EC

directive 94/9/EC (ATEX). The source standards are stated in the
conformity declaration. Pay heed to the local safety and accident
prevention rules.
Installation
n To erection and operation, the relevant European standards,
the national regulations for device safety, and the generally
accepted technical practices apply.
n If necessary, replace cable inlets by the elements with reduced
cross-section supplied with your equipment..
n Never use bushings.
n To ensure the required type of protection, tighten screwings
to 3.0Nm (M16), or 6.0Nm (M20) torque.
n To ensure proper pull relief, exclusively connect fixed cables
and lines.
n Make sure the equipment is suitable for the existing Ex zone.
n Warning signs in national language can be obtained from

Schenckfor free.
Connect potential equalization lines to protective ground or
existing potential equalization system.

Schenck Process
Commissioning
n When putting the equipment into operation, ascertain that
technical equipment data are met.
n Check to see that the equipment is undamaged and in perfect
condition.
n Close any open holes in accordance with the requisite type of
protection.
n Plug-in connectors on housings are equipped with dust-proof
caps that must be secured by bracket and special lock.
n Check to see that the required explosion protective equipment
properly operates.
Maintenance
n If operated properly in accordance with installation instructions
and ambient conditions, no regular maintenance is required.
n When servicing electrial equipment in potentially explosive
atmospheres, comply with the European Standards (EN) and
national regulations.
n Before opening a housing with non-instrinsically safe circuits,
make sure it is de-energized.
n Never modify the equipment.
n Before restart, check to see if the explosion protective
equipment properly operates.
n Before restart, watch out for the presence of dust inside the
equipment and remove, if necessary.
n Always clean plastic parts using antistatic detergents.
With aluminium housing, never use spark-forming tools.
Disposal
Observe the applicable local regulations.

Schenck Process
Gas-Ex Area Zone 1

Not approved for use in Zone 1, the weighing electronics must be
mounted in the safe area. The residual equipment, e.g. control
boxes, drives, sensors and other types of transducer must be
approved for use in Zone 1 (Category II 2G) and protected by
suitable equipment (disconnectors).
Controlled drives are designed with flameproof enclosure d.
Mains-supplied drives are designed for increased safety e. Load
cells and speed sensors are designed intrinsically safe i.
List of disconnectors
Designation / Type Ordering no.

Switching amplifiers for speed and proximity
sensors (e.g. gate feedback) to NAMUR with supply
voltage 20-30V to type of protection EEx ib IIC. 3732055
Type GHG 1223121A2009 (CEAG)
Load cell barriers

Use Type
Socket for barriers GHG 1100000W9106 V000972.B01
Supply 1-4 4000-ohm load cells (e.g. RT) SB-0016 V000958.B01
Supply 1-3 350-ohm load cells SB-0015 V000956.B01
Signal; sense for 4000, or 350 ohms SB-0014 V000957.B01
Disconnectors (e.g. Z barriers, switching amplifiers) must be

tested by a notified authority and mounted in the safe area.

Schenck Process
INSTALLATIONS HINT:
Make sure barrier -A13(23) is mounted between -A12(22)
and -A14(24).
If multiple scales are available, ensure min. 4 cm space
between individual groups.
Fig. 63: Mechanical Construction
Fig. 64: Sensor Connection to Weighing Electronics

Schenck Process
Gas-Ex Area Zone 2

DISOCONT assemblies of special design are not suited for use in
Zone 2 and must be mounted in the safe area. The compliance
with the Ex regulations is confirmed by a manufacturers
declaration. According to the Ex
regulations, load cells and initiators are classified as simple
equipment, so that appertaining equipment (Z-barriers and
switching amplifiers) can be omitted.
Dust-Ex Area Zone 21

DISOCONT assemblies are not suited for use in Zone 21 and
must be mounted in the safe area.
Any other equipment, e.g. drives, initiators, must be suited for use
in Zone 21 (Category II 2D). A corresponding type examination
certificate or manufacturers declaration must be available.
Dust-Ex Area Zone 22

Specially designed DISOCONT assemblies are suited for use in
Zone 22. The compliance with the Ex regulations is confirmed by a
manufacturers declaration.
The residual equipment, e.g. drives, initiators, must be suitaed for
use in Zone 22 (Category II 3D). A corresponding type
examination certificate or manufacturers declaration must be
available.

Schenck Process
Fieldbus Accessories
The DISOCONT system is designed such that normally no additional assemblies for wiring the
fieldbus are required.
Fieldbus Cable
f. Local bus, Profibus DP, FMS, SE-bus, Interbus, Modbus
For universal use up to 500kb/s
d=7.1mm 6-core Schenck ordering no.: 3849306
f. Profibus DP, Bis 12 MB/s violet special cable Schenck ordering no.: 3849219
d=7.7mm 2-core
f. DeviceNet, thin ylw special cable Schenck ordering no.: 3849074d=6.9mm 4-core

Schenck Process

Schenck Process
Attachment To Scale
Fig. 68: Schematic Diagram: MULTIDOS Weighfeeder
Fig. 67: Schematic Diagram: MULTIGRAV

Schenck Process
EasyServe
Installation Instructions
DE Installationsanleitung
GB Installation Instructions
FR Instructions de service
IT Instructions dinstallation
ES Instrucciones para la instalacin
PT Instrues de instalao
GR
PL Wskazwki instalacyjne
CZ Nvod k instalaci
RU
BV-H2098AA
PASS Ein Service, auf den Sie zhlen knnen PASS - Service you can rely on
Schnell, umfassend, berall auf der Welt Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Qualitt und Zuverlssigkeit sind die Grundsteine unserer Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys
Unternehmensphilosophie. Darum setzen wir ein umfassendes philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
Servicekonzept einfach voraus, und zwar von der strengen concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
Qualittskontrolle, Installation und Inbetriebnahme bis hin zur installation and commissioning through to seamless support
nahtlosen Untersttzung ber den gesamten across the entire product life cycle.
Produktlebenszyklus.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
Mit mehr als 30 Servicestandorten und ber you can count on us to be there whenever and wherever you
180 Servicespezialisten knnen Sie jederzeit auf uns zhlen, need us. It doesnt matter where you are, our specialists are
wo und wann immer Sie uns brauchen. there to advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal,
Es ist vllig egal, wo Sie sind, unsere Spezilisten sind da, um comprehensive service.
Sie mit weltweit bestem, persnlichem und umfassendem
Service zu beraten und zu untersttzen.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on

Whrend der Geschftszeiten stehen Servicespezialisten aller hand to analyse problems and failures.
Geschftsbereiche zur Analyse der Probleme und Ausflle Look at www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck
bereit. Auf unserer Website www.schenckprocess.com finden Process Location.
Sie den Schenck Process Standort in Ihrer Nhe.
Unser umfassendes Process Advanced Service System

(PASS), das an Ihre Anforderungen angepasst ist, bietet Ihnen Customised to meet your requirements, our comprehensive
den besten Service. Sie suchen nach individuellen, Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best
mageschneiderten Servicelsungen? service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service
Dann ist unser modulares Servicesystem PASS genau das solutions?
Richtige fr Sie. Es umfasst das gesamte Servicespektrum, von Then our, the modular service system PASS, is the ticket. It
einfachen Inspektionen bis hin zum vollstndigen covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
Serviceprogramm. through to full service. Interested?
Interessiert? Weitere Informationen zu den einzelnen Then find out more about the individual components at
Bestandteilen unseres Serviceangebots finden Sie auf unserer www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Website www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Kostenlose 24 h Notfall-Service-Hotline Free 24 h Emergency Service Hotline

in Deutschland in Germany
Haben Sie einen Ausfall oder Probleme auerhalb der Are you experiencing a failure or problem outside normal office
normalen Geschftszeiten? Unser Servicepersonal ist rund um hours? Our service staff are on call around the clock to deal with
die Uhr auf Abruf, um Ausflle, Serviceterminplanung und failures, service planning and other emergencies.
andere Notflle zu behandeln.
( +49 171 2 25 11 95 Heavy and Light excluding Static Weighing Equipment
( +49 172 6 50 17 00 Transport Automation and Static Weighing Equipment

( +49 61 51-15 31 0
Alle Informationen sind unverbindlich. Spezifikationsnderungen All information is given without obligation. All specifications are
vorbehalten. subject to change.
Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: This is a translation of the original document.

Contents
Deutsch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Lieferumfang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Programmstart und Anschluss der Waage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Erforderliche PC-Ausstattung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Items Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Start Program and Connect Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Franais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fourniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dmarrage du programme et raccordement du doseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Programme EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Equipement - PC ncessaire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Italiano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fornitura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installazione. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Avvio programma e collegamento della bilancia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Programma EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Equipaggiamento PC necessario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Espaol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Volumen de suministro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Instalacin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lanzar el programa y conectar la bscula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
El programa EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Equipo requerido del PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Portugus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Volume de fornecimento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Instalao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Iniciar o programa e conectar a balana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Programa EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Equipamento necessrio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
H/Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EasyServe BV-H2098AA, 0834 I1

Schenck Process
Polski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Zakres dostawy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Instrukcja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Startowanie programu i przyczenie wagi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wymagane PC-wyposaenie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
esky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rozsah dodvky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Instalace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sputen programu a pripojen vhy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Programm EasyServe VPC 20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Potrebn vybaven PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EasyServeVPC20150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
I2 BV-H2098AA, 0834 EasyServe

Schenck Process
Deutsch
Deutsch
Lieferumfang
Installationsmedium CD-ROM
Installationsanweisung
Installation
EasyServe
Legen Sie die CD VPC20150 in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk. Die Installation beginnt normalerweise
automatisch. Wenn nicht, ffnen Sie den Windows-Explorer und whlen Ihr CD-ROM-Laufwerk
aus. Starten Sie VPC20150.exe. Das automatische Installationsprogramm durchluft eine
Reihe von Dialogen, die zu besttigen sind.
Upgrade
Falls bereits eine alte Version von EasyServe installiert ist, wird Setup diese zuerst entfernen.
Jetzt kann die Installation wie oben beschrieben durchgefhrt werden.
Achtung
Um das Programm EasyServe zu Installieren, mu man unter Windows 2000/XP/Vista als
Benutzer in der Gruppe der Administratoren eingetragen sein. Um das Programm auszufhren
ist die Berechtigung eines Hauptbenutzers notwendig.
Programmstart und Anschluss der Waage

Wenn die Installation abgeschlossen ist, finden Sie unter Start Programme Schenck
Process EasyServe ein Symbol zum Starten der Applikation.
Die Verbindung zwischen Waage und dem PC kann auf eine der folgenden Arten erfolgen:
a) Bei Einbau der VSE im Schaltschrank verbinden Sie die COM-Schnittstelle des PC mit
der RS232-Schnittstelle (-X8) der DISOCONT- und der INTECONT PLUS Systemeinheit
VSE ber das mitgelieferte Kabel (HD20 9polig Stecker-Buchse 1:1).
b) Ist die VSE vor Ort in ein Feldgehuse eingebaut, verwenden Sie das mitgelieferte
Spezialkabel und stecken dieses in den Rundstecker am Feldgehuse und die
COM-Schnittstelle des PCs (HD20 9-polig).
c) Reicht die Lnge der mitgelieferten Kabel nicht aus, so kann ein speziell angefertigtes
Kabel verwendet werden. Die Lnge dieses Kabels darf 12 m nicht berschreiten. Soll
ein lngeres Kabel Verwendung finden, so sind Wandler, z.B. Schenck VAK 202x0,
zwischenzuschalten. Bei der ortsfesten Installation eines Kabels ist dieses am Stecker
X5 anzuschlieen.
Der parallele Anschluss von mehr als einem PC an die selbe Waage ist nicht mglich.
Sollen mehrere Waagen ber ein Kabel von einem PC angesprochen werden, so sind
Wandler VAK 202x0 zwischenzuschalten. Diese Wandler sind von Schenck im
Feldgehuse erhltlich.
d) Ist die Waage mit einer Ethernet-Schnittstelle und Protokoll Modbus-TCP ausgestattet,
z.B. ber die Feldbuskarte VET 20100, so kann sich EasyServe auch ber Ethernet mit
der Waage verbinden. Ist die Waage dagegen mit Ethernet-IP Schnittstelle ausgerstet,
kann EasyServe sich nicht ber Ethernet verbinden.
Die Bedienungsanleitung des Programms finden Sie in der EasyServe-Online-Hilfe. Rufen Sie
dazu Hilfe zu EasyServe im Hilfe-Men. Hilfe, die die Waage betreffen, erreichen Sie durch
Bettigung der F1-Taste.
EasyServe BV-H2098AA, 0833 1

Schenck Process
Deutsch
Programm EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe ist das PC-Programm fr Inbetriebnahme und Service des DISOCONT und des
INTECONT PLUS. Es sind alle Bedienungen und Justage, ohne Einschrnkungen, mglich.
EasyServe ist lauffhig unter dem Betriebssystem Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Die
Mensteuerung ermglicht flexible und leichte Einstellung und bietet Zugang zu allen
Instandhaltungsdaten. Mit dem EasyServe-Programm kann die Waage zu Servicezwecken
betrieben werden. Die Mentexte auf dem PC-Bildschirm und allen eventuell vorhandenen
Bedieneinheiten knnen kundenspezifisch angepat werden. EasyServe wird auf einer
CD-ROM geliefert, die sowohl das Programm als auch die Handbcher enthlt.
Erforderliche PC-Ausstattung
CPU Pentium
Freier Festplattenspeicher 900MB
Anzeige VGA, 32768-Farben Bildschirm empfohlen
Betriebssystem Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista mit dem jeweils aktuellen ServicePack
COM-Schnittstelle RS 232 oder Ethernet-Schnittstelle RJ45
Maus oder anderes Zeigegert
CD-ROM Laufwerk
Bestelldaten
VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01
2 BV-H2098AA, 0834 EasyServe

Schenck Process
English
English
Items Supplied
CD-ROM installation medium
Instruction manual
Installation
EasyServe
Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open
Windows explorer and select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double-click on file. The automatic
installation program prompts you through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm.
Upgrade
If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC, Setup will remove it, and the installation
can be performed as described above.
Attention
To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the
group of administrators under Windows 2000/XP/Vista. To execute program, main user rights
are required.
Start Program and Connect Scale

When installation is complete, start application using the Start button available under Start
Programs Schenck Process EasyServe. To connect scale and PC, there is no single solution:
a) If the VSE unit is mounted in control cubicle, connect PC COM interface with RS232
interface of (-X8) DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS system unit using cable supplied
(HD20 9-pole socket 1:1).
b) If the VSE is mounted in a fieldbox, use the special cable supplied and plug it into round
plug on fieldbox and PC COM port (HD20 9-pole).
c) If the cable supplied is not long enough, use special cable of 12m maximum length. If a
longer cable is needed, employ converters, e.g. Schenck VAK 202x0. When firmly
connecting a cable, use connector X5.
Parallel connection of multiple PCs to the same scale is not possible. If multiple scales
are to be addressed via PC cable, employ converters supplied by Schenck in a fieldbox.
d) If the scales are equipped with an ethernet interface and accept the Modbus-TCP
protocol, i.e. per VET 20100 fieldbus card, EasyServe can establish a connection with
the scales via ethernet. If the scales are instead equipped with an Ethernet-IP interface
EasyServe will not be able to establish a connection.
The EasyServe on-line help offers instructions for program operation. Go to Help menu and
call EasyServe help. For instructions on scale, operate F1 button.

Schenck Process
English
Program EasyServe VPC 20150

Designed as PC program for DISOCONT and INTECONT PLUS commissioning and servicing,
EasyServe lets you perform any operating and calibrating operation. The program is operable
under Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista operating systems. The control unit lets you perform
all controlling and calibrating operations without any restrictions. The menu control permits
flexible and easy adjustment, lets you access service data, operate the scale for servicing, and
customize the menu texts on PC screen and all operator units.
EasyServe comes on a CD-ROM including both program and manuals.
Minimum System Requirements

Pentium or CPU-compatible
900MB free hard disk space
VGA display, 32768 colour monitor recommended
Operating systems Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista with latest service packs
COM interface RS 232 or Ethernet interface RJ45
Mouse or other type of pointer
CD-ROM drive
Ordering data
VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process
Franais
Franais
Fourniture
Un CD-ROM dinstallation
Instruction pour linstallation
Installation
EasyServe
Placez le CD, VPC20150 dans le lecteur CD-ROM. Normalement linstallation dbute
automatiquement. Si cela nest pas le cas, ouvrez le programme Windows-Explorer et
slectionnez votre lecteur de CD-ROM. Vous trouverez le fichier VPC20150.exe. Ouvrez le par
un double clic. Le programme automatique dinstallation se droule avec une suite de
dialogues quil faut confirmer.
Upgrade
Sil existe dj une ancienne version installe de lEasyServe, la commande Setup effacera
dabord celle-ci. Maintenant linstallation comme dcrit ci-dessus peut commencer.
Attention
Pour pouvoir installer le programme EasyServe, il faut tre enregistr sous Windows
2000/XP/Vista comme utilisateur dans le groupe des administrateurs. Pour pouvoir excuter le
programme il est ncessaire davoir lautorisation dun utilisateur principal.
Dmarrage du programme et raccordement du doseur

Quand linstallation est termine, vous trouvez sous Dmarrage Programme Schenck
Process EasyServe un symbole pour dmarrer lapplication.
Le raccordement entre le doseur et le PC peut tre ralis par lune des manires suivantes:
a) En implantant la carte VSE dans larmoire dappareillage reliez linterface -COM du PC

avec linterface- RS232 (-X8) du DISOCONT- et lunit systme VSE de lINTECONT
PLUS grce au cble livr avec linstallation (HD20 9 ples, prise-fiche 1:1).
b) Si la VSE est implant en local dans un coffret correspondant, veuillez utiliser le cble
spcial fourni et enfichez le dans la prise ronde sur le coffret local et dans la prise
dinterface -COM du PC. (HD20 9-ples)
c) Si la longueur du cble fourni nest pas suffisante, on peut utiliser un cble spcialement
fabriqu pour votre cas particulier. Toutefois la longueur de ce cble ne doit pas
dpasser 12 m. Sil savrait ncessaire dutiliser un cble plus long, il faudrait prvoir le
branchement intermdiaire de convertisseurs, par exemple le VAK 202x0 de Schenck.
Lors de linstallation dun cble inamovible celui-ci doit tre raccord sur la prise X5.
Le raccordement en parallle de plus de un PC sur le mme doseur nest pas possible.
Si plusieurs doseurs doivent tre consults par lintermdiaire dun seul cble partir
dun PC, alors il faut prvoir le raccordement complmentaire de convertisseurs VAK
202x0. Ces convertisseurs peuvent tre approvisionns chez Schenck dj implants en
coffret local.
d) Si le doseur est muni dune interface Ethernet et du protocole Modbus-TCP, par exemple
via la carte de bus de terrain VET 20100, alors EasyServe peut galement se raccorder
au doseur par lintermdiaire de lEthernet. Cependant, si le doseur est quip dune
interface Ethernet-IP, EasyServe ne pourra pas se relier laide de lEthernet.
Vous trouverez linstruction de service du programme dans laide - EasyServe-Online. Pour ce

Schenck Process
Franais
faire slectionner aide l EasyServe dans le menu -aide. Les aides, qui concernent le doseur,
peuvent tre obtenues par action sur la touche F1.
Programme EasyServe VPC 20150
EasyServe est le programme-PC pour la mise en service et lentretien du DISOCONT et de l
INTECONT PLUS. Toutes les commandes et ajustage, sans limitations sont possible.
EasyServe peut fonctionner sous les systmes dutilisation Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
La commande du menu permet un accs flexible et facile au rglage et offre accs toutes les
donnes concernant lentretien. Avec le programme EasyServe le doseur peut tre utiliser pour
des fins dentretien. Les textes du menu sur lcran du PC et toutes les units de pilotage
ventuellement existantes peuvent tre adapts spcifiquement aux besoins du client.
EasyServe est livr sur un CD-ROM, qui contient aussi bien le programme que les manuels
dutilisation.
Equipement - PC ncessaire
CPU Pentium
Mmoire libre sur le disque dur 900MB
Indication VGA, cran avec 32768-couleurs recommand
Systme dexploitation Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista avec selon le cas le ServicePack
actuel.
Interface -COM RS 232 ou interface - Ethernet RJ45
Souris ou autre appareil de pointage
Lecteur CD-ROM
Donnes pour une commande

VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process
Italiano
Italiano
Fornitura
Mezzo di installazione CD-ROM
Istruzioni di installazione
Installazione
EasyServe
Introdurre il CD VPC20150 nel drive del CD-ROM. Linstallazione incomincia di solito
automaticamente. In caso contrario aprire il Windows-Explorer e selezionare il drive CD-ROM.
Nel sottoarchivio VPC20150 o Disk1 si trova il file VPC20150.exe. Richiamarlo cliccando due
volte. Il programma di installazione automatico scorre con una serie di dialoghi che devono
essere di volta in volta confermati.
Upgrade
Se gi installata una vecchia versione di EasyServe, il Setup prima la canceller. Ora
linstallazione pu essere eseguita nel modo descritto sopra.
Attenzione
Per installare il programma EasyServe, bisogna essere registrati nei sistemi operativi Windows
2000/XP/Vista come utenti nel gruppo degli amministratori. Per poter eseguire il programma
necessaria lautorizzazione di un utente principale.
Avvio programma e collegamento della bilancia

Quando linstallazione conclusa, si trova sotto Avvio Programmi Schenck Process
EasyServe un simbolo per lavvio dellapplicazione.
Il collegamento tra bilancia ed il PC pu avvenire in uno dei seguenti modi:
a) Durante il montaggio del VSE nellarmadio di comando collegare linterfaccia COM del
PC con linterfaccia RS232- (-X8) del DISOCONT e dell INTECONT PLUS unit di
sistema VSE mediante il cavo fornito (HD20 a 9 poli spina-connettore 1:1).
b) SE il VSE montato sul posto in una custodia industriale, utilizzare il cavo speciale
fornito ed introdurre questultimo nella spina circolare alla custodia industriale e
nellinterfaccia COM del PC (HD20 a 9-poli).
c) Se la lunghezza del cavo fornito non sufficiente, si pu utilizzare un cavo speciale. La
lunghezza di questo cavo non deve superare i 12 metri. Se fosse necessario un cavo pi
lungo, bisogna interposizionare convertitori, per es. Schenck VAK 202x0. In caso di
installazione fissa di un cavo, esso deve essere collegato alla spina X5.
Lallacciamento parallelo di pi di un PC alla stessa bilancia non possibile. Se pi
bilance sono interpellate da un PC mediante un cavo, allora bisogna interposizionare
convertitori VAK 202x0. Questi convertitori si trovano nella custodia industriale della
Schenck.
d) Se la bilancia provvista di un interfaccia Ethernet e protocollo Modbus-TCP per es.
attraverso la scheda del bus di campo VET 20100, l EasyServe si pu collegare
attraverso Ethernet con la bilancia. Se la bilancia invece provvista con linterfaccia
Ethernet-IP, l EasyServe non si pu collegare attraverso l Ethernet.
Le istruzioni sulluso del programma si trovano nellaiuto Online EasyServe. Richiamare

laiuto per EasyServe nel menu Help. Aiuti riguardo alla bilancia si possono raggiungere
attivando il tasto F1.

Schenck Process
Italiano
Programma EasyServe VPC 20150

L EasyServe il programma PC per la messa in funzione e lassistenza tecnica del
DISOCONT e dell INTECONT PLUS. Sono possibili tutte le operazioni e calibrazioni senza
limitazioni. L EasyServe funziona con i sistemi operativi Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Il
comando di menu rende possibile impostazioni flessibili e semplici ed offre accesso a tutti i dati
di manutenzione. Con il programma EasyServe la bilancia pu essere azionata a scopi di
assistenza tecnica. I testi di menu sullo schermo del PC e tutte le unit di comando
eventualmente presenti possono essere adattati in modo specifico per il cliente. L EasyServe
viene fornito con un CD-ROM, che contiene sia il programma che i manuali per luso.
Equipaggiamento PC necessario
CPU Pentium
Memoria libera sul disco fisso 900MB
Visualizzazione VGA, consigliato schermo a 32768 colori
Sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista con il relativo ServicePack attuale
Interfaccia COM- RS 232 o interfaccia Ethernet- RJ45
Mouse o un altro apparecchio di indicazione
Drive CD-ROM
Dati di ordinazione
VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process
Espaol
Espaol
Volumen de suministro
Soporte de informacin para la instalacin : CD-ROM
Instrucciones de instalacin
Instalacin
EasyServe
Introducir el CD VPC20150 en la unidad de CD-ROM. Normalmente, la instalacin empieza
automticamente. Si no es as, hay que abrir el Explorer de Windows y seleccionar la unidad
de CD-ROM respectiva. En el subdirectorio VPC20150 Disk1 se halla el fichero
VPC20150.exe. Hay que llamarlo mediante un clic doble. El programa automtico de
instalacin recorre una serie de dilogos que hay que confirmar.
Extensin (Upgrade)
En caso de que ya exista una versin vieja de EasyServe, Setup va a borrarla ante todo.
Ahora, la instalacin puede realizarse como descrito ms arriba.
Atencin
Para instalar el programa EasyServe, uno debe ser inscrito como usuario en el grupo de los
administradores bajo Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Para ejecutar el programa, es necesario tener la
autorizacin de un usuario principal.
Lanzar el programa y conectar la bscula

Una vez terminda la instalacin, bajo Marcha Programas Schenck Process EasyServe se
halla un smbolo para lanzar la aplicacin.
La conexin entre la bscula y el PC puede realizarse segn uno de los siguientes modos :
a) Al instalar la unidad VSE en el armario de mando, conecte Vd. el interfaz COM del PC
con el interfaz RS232 (-X8) de la unidad de sistema VSE del DISOCONT y del
INTECONT PLUS por medio del cable suministrado (HD20 de 9 polos, enchufe -
casquillo 1:1).
b) Si se ha instalado la unidad VSE localmente en una caja de campo, utilize Vd. el cable
especial suministrado e introdzcalo en el enchufe redondo de la caja de campo y en el
interfaz COM del PC (HD20 de 9 polos).
c) Si la longitud de los cables suministrados no es suficiente, se puede utilizar un cable
fabricado especialmente. La longitud de este cable no debe sobrepasar 12 m. Si se debe
utilizar un cable ms largo, hay que interconectar convertidores, tal como VAK 202x0 de
Schenck, por ejemplo. Instalando un cable de manera fija, ste debe conectarse al
conector X5.
No es posible realizar la conexin en paralelo de ms de un PC a la misma bscula. Si
deben ser activadas varias bsculas por un PC va un cable, hay que interconectar
convertidores VAK 202x0. Estos convertidores se pueden obtener de Schenck en una
caja de campo.
d) Si la bscula est equipada con un interfaz Ethernet y el protocolo Modbus-TCP, por
ejemplo via la tarjeta de bus de campo VET 20100, entonces EasyServe puede tambin
conectarse con la bscula via Ethernet. Si, por lo contrario, la bscula est equipada con
el interfaz Ethernet-IP, EasyServe no puede conectarse via Ethernet.
Las instrucciones de uso del programa se hallan en la ayuda on-line de EasyServe.
Llamar Ayuda acerca de EasyServe en el men de ayuda. Para obtener ayuda con
respecto a la bscula, hay que pulsar la tecla F1.

Schenck Process
Espaol
El programa EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe es el programa de PC para la puesta en servicio y el servicio del DISOCONT y del
INTECONT PLUS. Son posibles todos los manejos y ajustes, sin restriccin. EasyServe
funciona bajo el sistema de explotacin Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. La gestin de
mens permite el ajuste de manera fcil y flexible y facilita el acceso a todos los datos de
mantenimiento. Con el programa EasyServe, la bscula puede utilizarse para los fines del
servicio. Los textos de men en la pantalla del PC y en todas las unidades de manejo
eventualmente existentes son adaptables al cliente.
EasyServe se suministra en un CD-ROM que embarca tanto el programa como los manuales.
Equipo requerido del PC

CPU Pentium
Memoria de disco duro libre 900 MByte
Display VGA, pantalla con 32768 colores recomendable
Sistema de explotacin Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista con el actual ServicePack
respectivo
Interfaz COM RS 232 interfaz Ethernet RJ45
Ratn u otro dispositivo de indicacin
Unidad CD-ROM
Datos de pedido
CD-ROM VPC20150 F217 940.01

Schenck Process
Portugus
Portugus
Volume de fornecimento
Meio de instalao CD-ROM
Instrues de instalao
Instalao
EasyServe
Introduza o CD VPC20150 na drive de CD-ROM. Normalmente a instalao inicia
automaticamente. Se no for assim, abra o Windows-Explorer seleccionando a sua drive de
CD-ROM. No sub-directrio VPC20150 ou Disk1 encontrar o ficheiro VPC20150.exe.
Chame-o fazendo um clique duplo. O programa automtico de instalao percorre uma srie
de dilogos a ser confirmados.
Upgrade
Se estiver instalada uma verso antiga do EasyServe, esta ser, em primeiro lugar, removida.
Depois ser possvel efectuar a instalao como descrito atrs.
Ateno
Para instalar o programa EasyServe, necessrio estar registado, em Windows
2000/XP/Vista, como usurio no grupo de administradores. Para executar o programa
necessrio ter a autorizao de usurio principal.
Iniciar o programa e conectar a balana

Uma vez terminada a instalao, encontrar um smbolo para iniciar a aplicao,
seleccionando Iniciar Programas Schenck Process EasyServe.
A conexo entre a balana e o computador PC pode ser efectuada por um dos seguintes
modos:
a) Ao instalar a unidade VSE no armrio de distribuio, conecte o interface COM do PC

com o interface RS232 (-X8) da unidade de sistema VSE do DISOCONT e INTECONT
PLUS atravs do cabo fornecido (ficha-conector HD20 de 9 polos 1:1).
b) Se a unidade VSE estiver instalada no local numa caixa de campo, utilize o cabo
especial fornecido conectando-o ficha redonda na caixa de campo e no interface COM
do PC (HD20 de 9 polos).
c) Se o comprimento dos cabos fornecidos no for suficiente, possvel utilizar um cabo
especial cujo comprimento no deve exceder 12 m. No caso de se utilizar um cabo mais
comprido, intercalar conversores, p.ex. Schenck VAK 202x0. No caso da instalao fixa
do cabo, conect-lo na ficha X5.
A conexo paralela de mais de um PC mesma balana no possvel. No caso de se
desejar operar vrias balanas atravs de um cabo de um PC, necessrio intercalar
conversores VAK 202x0. Estes podem-se obter da Schenck em caixa de campo.
d) Se a balana estiver provida dum interface Ethernet e protocolo Modbus-TCP, p.ex.
atravs da placa de bus de campo VET 20100, o EasyServe pode-se conectar com a
balana atravs do Ethernet. Se a balana, porm, for provida dum interface
Ethernet-IP, no possvel que EasyServe conecte atravs do Ethernet.
As instrues sobre o uso do programa esto contidas na ajuda online do EasyServe. Chame
a ajuda sobre EasyServe no menu de ajuda. Para obter ajuda sobre a balana carregue na
tecla F1.

Schenck Process
Portugus
Programa EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe o programa PC para a operao inicial e trabalhos de assistncia e manuteno
do DISOCONT e INTECONT PLUS. Permite todas as operaes e ajustes sem restries.
EasyServe funciona com o sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. O comando
baseado em menus permite um ajuste flexvel e fcil dando acesso a todos os dados de
manuteno. O programa EasyServe permite a operao da balana para fins de manuteno,
os textos dos menus no ecr do PC e das unidades de comando eventualmente existentes
podendo ser adaptados s necessidades especficas do cliente. EasyServe fornecido num
CD-ROM contendo o programa e tambm os manuais.
Equipamento necessrio
CPU Pentium
Espao disponvel em disco rgido 900MB
Ecr VGA de 32768 cores recomendado
Sistema operativo Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista com o respectivo Service Pack mais
recente
Interface COM RS 232 ou interface Ethernet RJ45
Rato ou outro indicador
Drive de CD-ROM
Dados para pedidos

VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process

CD-ROM

EasyServe
CD VPC20150 CD-ROM.
. , Windows Explorer
CD-ROM. VPC20150 1 (Disk1)
VPC20150.exe. .
.

EasyServe,
.
.

EasyServe, Windows 2000/XP/Vista
.
.

, Start - Programme - Schenck Process
EasyServe ( - - Schenck Process EasyServe)
.
/
:
) VSE COM
/ RS232 (-X8) DISOCONT
INTECONT PLUS VSE (HD20 9 -
1:1).
) VSE ,

COM H/Y (HD20 9 ).
) ,
.
12 . ,
, .. Schenck VAK 202x0.
, 5.
/ .
/,
VAK 202x0.
Schenck .
) Ethernet
Modbus-TCP, .. bus VET 20100, EasyServe
Ethernet .

Schenck Process

Ethernet IP, EasyServe

Ethernet.
Online EasyServe.
EasyServe .
, F1.
EasyServe VPC 20150
EasyServe /
DISOCONT INTECONT PLUS.
. EasyServe Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista.

. EasyServe
. H/Y
, . EasyServe
CD-ROM
.
H/Y
CPU Pentium
900MB
VGA, 32768
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista ServicePack
COM RS 232 Ethernet RJ45

CD-ROM

VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process
Polski
Polski
Zakres dostawy
Medium instalacji CD-ROM
Instrukcja instalacji
Instrukcja
EasyServe
Prosz woy CD VPC20150 do CD-ROM-stacji dyskw. Instalacja zaczyna si normalnie
automatycznie. Jeeli nie, to prosz otworzy Windows-Explorer i wybra CD-ROM-stacj
dyskw. W podkatalogu VPC20150 albo dysku1 znajd Pastwo plik VPC20150.exe. Prosz
wywoa ten program przez podwjny klik. Automatyczny program instalacji przebiega szereg
dialogw ktre naley potwierdzi.
Uaktualnienie
Jeeli jest ju zainstalowana stara wersja EasyServe, to Setup j usunie. Teraz moe zosta
przeprowadzona instalacja jak wyej opisano.
Uwaga
Aby mc zainstalowa EasyServe, musi si by wpisany jako uytkownik w grupie
administratorw w Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Aby mc pracowa z tym programem to konieczne
s uprawnienia gwnego uytkownika.
Startowanie programu i przyczenie wagi

Jeeli instalacja zostaa zakoczona, to Pastwo znajd pod Start Programy Schenck
Process EasyServe symbol do startu tej aplikacji.
Poczenie midzy wag a PC moe nastpi na jeden z nastpujcych sposobw:
a) Przy wmontowaniu VSE w szafie rozdzielczej prosz poczy COM-interfejs PCta z

RS232-interfejsem (-X8) DISOCONTa- i INTECONTa PLUS jednostk systemu VSE za
pomoc dostarczonego kabla (HD20 9-cio biegunowa wtyczka-gniazdo 1:1).
b) Jeeli VSE jest wmontowy lokalnie w obudowie polowej, to prosz zastosowa
dostarczony kabel specjalny i prosz go wetkn do okrgej wtyczki w obudowie
polowej i do COM-interfejsa PCta (HD20 9-cio biegunowa).
c) Jeeli dugo dostarczonego kabla nie wystarczy, to mona zastosowa specjalnie do
tego celu zrobiony kabel. Dugo tego kabla nie moe przekroczy 12 m. Jeeli
zachodzi potrzeba zastosowania duszego kabla to naley uy przetwornika np.
Schencka VAK 202x0. Przy trwaej miejscowej instalacji kabla naley go przyczy do
wtyczki X5.
Rwnolege przyczenie wicej jak jednego PCta do tej samej wagi jest niemoliwe.
Jeeli powinne by odpytane wicej wag przez jeden kabel od jednego PCta to naley
podczy przetwornik VAK 202x0. Te przetworniki s do nabycia w obudowie polowej
od Schencka.
d) Jeeli waga jest wyposaona w Ethernet-interfejs, np. przez modbus-TCP, przez kart
szyn polow VET 20100, tak moe EasyServe by poczony rwnie z wag przez
Ethernet. Przeciwnie, jeeli waga jest wyposaona w Ethernet-IP interfejsem, EasyServe
nie moe poczy si przez Ethrenet.
Instrukcj obsugi programu znajd Pastwo w EasyServe-Online-pomoc. Prosz w tym celu

wywoa pomoc do EasyServe w Pomoc-Menu. Pomoc, ktra dotyczy wagi osigniecie
Pastwo przez nacinicie F1- przycisku.

Schenck Process
Polski
Program EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe jest PC-Programem do uruchomienia i serwisu DISOCONTa i INTECONTa PLUS.
S moliwe wszystkie obsugi i kalibracja, bez ogranicze. EasyServe pracuje z systemami
operacyjnymi Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Sterowanie menu umoliwia atwe ustawienia i
oferuje dostp do wszystkich danych potrzebnych do utrzymania wagi w dobrym stanie. Przy
pomocy EasyServe-Programu wag mona uywa do celw serwisowych. Teksty menu na
monitorze PCta i wszystkich ewentualnie istniejcych panelach obsugi mog zosta
dopasowane do potrzeb klienta. EasyServe jest dostarczony na CD-ROMie, ktry zawiera
zarwno program jak rwie podrczniki obsugi.
Wymagane PC-wyposaenie
CPU Pentium
wolne miejsce na twardym dysku 900MB
Wywietlacz VGA, 32768-kolorw monitor zalecany
System operacyjny Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista z aktualnym ServicePack
COM-interfejs RS 232 albo Ethernet- interfejs RJ45
Mysz albo inny aparat pokazujcy
CD-ROM stacja dyskw
Dane zamwienia
VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process
esky
esky
Rozsah dodvky
Instalacn mdium CD-ROM
Nvod k instalaci
Instalace
EasyServe
Vlote CD do CD-ROM mechaniky. Instalace se za normlnch okolnost spust automaticky.
Pokud ne, otevrete Windows Explorer a zvolte Va CD-ROM mechaniku. V podadresri
VPC20150 nebo Disk1 najdete soubor VPC20150.exe. Vyvolejte ho dvojitm kliknutm.
Automatick instalacn program projde radu dialogu, kter je nutno potvrdit.
Upgrade
Jestlie je ji nainstalovan star verze EasyServe, Setup ji nejprve odstran. Nyn mue bt
provedena instalace, jak je uvedeno ve.
Pozor
Aby jste mohli program EasyServe nainstalovat, muste bt zaregistrovni pod Window
2000/XP/Vista jako uivatel skupiny administrtoru . Dle je potreba oprvnen hlavnho
uivatele.
Sputen programu a pripojen vhy

Jestlie byla provedena instalace, najdete pod Start Programy Schenck Process EasyServe
symbol ke sputen aplikace.
Propojen vhy a PC se mue uskutecnit nsledovne:
a) Pri monti VSE do ovldac skrne spojte COM rozhran poctace s rozhranm RS232
(-X8) systmov jednotky VSE DISOCONT- a INTECONT PLUS prostrednictvm
dodanho kabelu (HD20 9-plov konektor-zdrka 1:1).
b) Je-li VSE v pouzdre, pouijte dodan speciln kabel a strcte ho do kulatho konektoru
na pouzdre a COM rozhran poctace (HD20 9-plov).
c) Jestlie dlka dodanho kabelu nestac, je mon pout specilne zhotoven kabel.
Dlka kabelu nesm prekrocit 12 m. Pokud by bylo potreba pout del kabel, pak je
treba do zapojen pridat transformacn jednotku, napr. Schenck VAK 202x0. V prpade
pevn instalace kabelu je treba jej zapojit do zsuvky X5.
Paraleln zapojen vce ne jednoho PC na jednu a tut vhu nen mon. Pokud by na
jedno PC pres jeden kabel pristupovalo vce vah, je treba do zapojen pridat
transformacn jednotky VAK 202x0. Tyto transformacn jednotky jsou k dostn u firmy
Schenck v pouzdre.
d) Pokud je vha vybavena ethernetovm rozhranm a sbernic pro protokol TCP, napr.
pres prenosnou sbernicovou kartu VET 20100, mue se EasyServe pripojit k vze i pres
ethernet. Jestlie je vha naopak vybavena ethernetovm IP rozhranm, nemue se
EasyServe pres ethernet pripojit.
Nvod k obsluze programu naleznete v online npovede pro EasyServe. Npovedu pro
EasyServe vyvolte pomoc menu Npoveda. Npovedu, kter se tk vhy, vyvolte
stisknutm klvesy F1.

Schenck Process
esky
Programm EasyServe VPC 20150

EasyServe je poctacov program pro servis a uveden vhy DISCONT a INTECONT PLUS do
provozu. Jsou mon vechna pouit a nastaven bez omezen EasyServe je funkcn v
operacnm systmu Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Ovldn menu umonuje flexibiln a
jednoduch nastaven a nabz prstup ke vem servisnm dajum. Pomoc programu
EasyServe mue bt vha provozovna pro servisn cely. Texty v menu na poctacov
obrazovce a ve vech prpadne disponibilnch ovldacch jednotkch mohou bt prizpusobeny
dle poadavku zkaznka. EasyServe je dodn na CD-ROMu, kter obsahuje program, jako i
prrucky.
Potrebn vybaven PC
CPU Pentium
400 MB voln pameti na pevnm disku 900MB
Doporucujeme displej VGA, 32768 barev
Operacn systm Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista s aktulnm servisnm balckem
COM rozhran RS 232 nebo Ethernet rozhran RJ45
My nebo jin ukazovac zarzen
CD-ROM mechanika
Objednac daje
VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process

CD-ROM

EasyServe
CD VPC20150 CD-ROM.
. , Windows-Explorer
CD-ROM. VPC20150 1
VPC20150.exe. .
, .

EasyServe , Setup .
, .
EasyServe,
Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
.

, Schenck
Process EasyServe .
:
) VSE
- RS232 (-8) DISOCONT INTECONT PLUS
VSE (HD20
9- 1:1).
) VSE ,

- (HD20 9-
).
) ,
.
12 . ,
, Schenck VAK 202x0.
, 5.

. -,
Schenck

d) Modbus-TCP
, , VE 20100, Easy
Serve c . , ,
IP , EasyServe
.

Schenck Process

EasyServe-Online.
EasyServe . ,
, F1.
EasyServeVPC20150
EasyServe
DISOCONT INTECONT PLUS. EasyServe
.EasyServe Microsoft Windows
2000/XP/Vista.
.
EasyServe
. ,

. EasyServe CD ROM, ,
.

CPU Pentium
900
VGA, 32768
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista

- RS 232 Ethernet RJ45

CD-ROM

VPC20150 CD-ROM F217 940.01

Schenck Process

Intecont Plus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intecont Plus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTECONT PLUS

Helpdesk - kostenfrei Free Helpdesk

24h Notfall-Hotline: 24h Emergency-Hotline :

Hinweis: Originalbetriebsanleitung Note: Translation of the original instructions

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 I

- Reserved for users notes -

II BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

gB START/STOP Ein- bzw. Ausschalten wenn vorgewhlt

U SCROLL Untere Anzeige und Funktionen vorwhlen

i RESET Zhler lschen

G FUNCTION Funktionsverteiler und Ereignismeldungen aufrufen

O DELETE Ereignismeldungen quittieren, Eingaben lschen.

N ESCAPE Funktion abbrechen und Rcksprung zu den Normalanzeigen.

f ENTER Eingabe besttigen

P DATA Eingabe vorbereiten, z.B. Parameter

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 1

Reserved for users notes

2 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

U SCROLL Select lower display line and functions

i RESET Reset counter(s)

G FUNCTION Call function distributor and event messages

O DELETE Acknowledge event messages, delete inputs

N ESCAPE Abort function and return to normal displays

f ENTER Acknowledge input

P DATA Prepare input, e.g. parameters

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 3

Reserved for users notes

4 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

gB START/STOP Marche ou Arrt si prdtermin

U SCROLL Slectionner laffichage infrieur et fonctions

i RESET Effacement compteur

G FONCTION Slectionner le menu des fonctions et annonces vnements

O DELETE Acquittement des annonces dvnements, effacement entre

N ESCAPE Arrter la fonction et retour aux affichages normaux

f ENTER Valider lentre

P DATA Prparer une entre, par ex. Paramtre

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 5

Reserved for users notes

6 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

OPERAZ. IN CORSO. STATO FUNZ. H2

MENU INDIR. FUNZIONI

gB START/STOP Inserire o disinserire se selezionata

T SCROLL Selezionare display inferiore e funzioni

i RESET Azzerare totalizzatore

G FUNCTION Richiamare il menu di indirizzamento funzioni e i messaggi di evento

O DELETE Confermare i messaggi di evento, cancellare le introduzioni

N ESCAPE Interrompere la funzione e ritornare alle indicazioni normali

f ENTER Confermare lintroduzion

P DATA Preparare lintroduzione, ad es. parametri

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 7

Reserved for users notes

8 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

gB START/STOP Conexin o desconexin si se ha preseleccionado

U SCROLL Preseleccionar la indicacin inferior y las funciones

i RESET Borrar contador

G FUNCTION Activar el distribuidor de funciones y los avisos de acontecimientos

O DELETE Confirmar los avisos de acontecimientos, borrar las introducciones

N ESCAPE Cancelar la funcin y regresar a las indicaciones normales

f ENTER Confirmar la introduccin

P DATA Preparar la entrada, p. ej. parmetro

INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions BV-H2007AA / 0502 9

Reserved for users notes

10 BV-H2007AA / 0502 INTECONT PLUS Operating Instructions

Lopende melding, Bedrijfstoestand H2